BAC ProdAppHBii2007

®
Product & Application Handbook

VO LU M E I I - 2 0 0 7
Welcome ...
...to the second edition of the BAC Product & Application Handbook.
Based on the overwhelming response to our first edition in 2005, the marketplace
clearly demonstrated a need for this resource tool.
Our objective with Volume II is to continue to enhance industry knowledge

and product application information throughout the book.
Working with feedback and comments from you, our customer, we added
over 250 pages of additional information including new products, product
updates and additional technical resource material.
We are committed to continuing to provide products, services, and technical

resources that will help you meet your day-to-day evaporative cooling and ice
thermal storage application requirements. We hope you find our second edition
even more valuable than the first.
Sincerely,
Steve Duerwachter
President, Baltimore Aircoil Company
A1
Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Baltimore Aircoil Company . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B1 The Value of Standards and Independent
Introduction to Evaporative Cooling Products . . . . . . . . . . . . .C1 Certification Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M20
Open Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D1 CTI Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M22
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D1 What’s a Green Building? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M24
Series 3000 Open Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D8 Materials of Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M26
Series 1500 Open Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D36 Remote Sump Selection for an Open Cooling Tower . . .M28
FXT Open Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D56 Remote Sump Selection for a Closed
Series V Open Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D70 Circuit Cooling Tower or Evaporative Condenser . . . . . .M32
Engineering Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D92 Layout Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M36
Closed Circuit Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E1 Connection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M56
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E1 Friction Loss Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M58
Advantages of Closed Circuit Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . .E7 Piping Considerations – Maximum Fluid Velocity . . . . . .M59
FXV Closed Circuit Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E10 Cooling Tower Pumping and Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M60
Series V Closed Circuit Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E34 Refrigerant Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M105
HXV Closed Circuit Hybrid Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . .E60 Thermophysical Properties of Refrigerants . . . . . . . . . . .M114
Engineering Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E81 Cooling Towers in Parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M121
ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F1 Fundamentals of Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M124
Engineering Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F21 Fundamentals of Cooling System Filtration . . . . . . . . . .M159
Custom Engineered Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G1 Product Report, Automatic Bearing Greaser . . . . . . . . . .M167
Remote Sump Tanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .H1 Water Quality Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M168
Evaporative Condensers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J1 Maintenance Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M170
Engineering Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J54 Replacement Spare Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M172
Aircoil™ Evaporators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .K1 Maintenance Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N1
Application Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .K41 The Value of Maintaining Evaporative
ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L1 Cooling Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N1
Technical Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M1 Crossflow Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N10
Wet-bulb Temperature Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M2 Crossflow Coil Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N33
Temperature Conversion Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M13 Counterflow Cooling Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N49
Formulas and Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M14 Ice Thermal Storage Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N63
Conversion Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M16 Aircoil™ Evaporators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N75
Selection Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M18 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P1

B1
Commitment. . .
For nearly seven decades Baltimore Aircoil Company has been dedicated
to the development of innovative, cost effective heat transfer solutions for
its customers. This has established BAC as the global leader of factory
assembled evaporative heat rejection and thermal storage equipment.
Design
Ongoing investment in research, combined with an advanced R&D laboratory facility enables
BAC to consistently offer technology and products to meet developing industry demands.
Selection
BAC offers the widest array of evaporative heat rejection and thermal storage equipment
in the industry. Breadth of product enables BAC to provide its customers with optimized
solutions to meet their specific needs. Whether an application calls for open or closed
circuit, axial or centrifugal fan, special materials of construction or unique layout
considerations, BAC has the right solution.
Performance
All BAC products are engineered to minimize lifecycle costs through a combination of
low energy consumption and low maintenance. An extensive array of product and options
address such issues as sound, energy and reduced water consumption requirements.
Certification
All standard BAC cooling towers, both open and closed circuit, are independently certified
by the Cooling Technology Institute (CTI). This ensures published thermal capacities for
BAC cooling towers accurately reflect actual thermal performance, eliminating the need
for customers to conduct costly individual cooling tower testing.
Baltimore Aircoil Company

is recognized as the world’s largest manufacturer of evaporative heat rejection and
thermal storage equipment. BAC products are supplied to the commercial, industrial,
refrigeration, process and power markets to meet a variety of heat transfer applications.
B2
How can we help?

From employees to partners every action at BAC centers
on you, the customer. From application to installation
to aftermarket needs, whether you are working with
BAC representatives, the Product & Application
Handbook, or accessing www.BaltimoreAircoil.com,
BAC stands ready to meet your needs.
BAC Sales Channel

BAC employs the most extensive and
experienced network of manufacturer’s
representatives available to provide
unrivalled local support for all of your
specific application needs. Integrated globally,
our network of representatives facilitates
design support for projects coordinated
on a local, national, or international scale.
BAC Product & Application

Handbook
A revolutionary tool for assisting with
equipment application and selection
requirements, this handbook is the only
place to find key industry technical and
product information consolidated in one
convenient format.
www. BaltimoreAircoil.com
A proprietary website tool that allows access
to resources and education to assist in product
evaluation, application, comparison and selection.
• Product Information
• BAC Selection Software
• Equipment Specifications
• Technical Articles
• Rigging and Installation Manuals
• Operating and Maintenance Manuals
• The online Product & Application Handbook
...because temperature matters TM
C1
Evaporative Cooling Products

Evaporative cooling products minimize the energy consumption of the entire system by providing lower
operating temperatures than possible with comparably sized air-cooled equipment. BAC has a large selection
of evaporative cooling products to offer, each of which falls into one of these three main categories:
Open Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages D1 - D95

Open cooling towers are a proven and cost-effective method of cooling condenser water loops and industrial
processes. In operation, the condenser water (or process water) flows directly over the heat transfer surface
of the open cooling tower. As air is introduced into the tower, a fraction of this water is evaporated, cooling the
remaining water. BAC offers four distinct open cooling tower product lines.
Closed Circuit Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages E1 - E86

Closed circuit cooling towers keep the process fluid clean and contaminant free in a closed loop. This creates
two separate fluid circuits: (1) an external circuit, in which spray water circulates over the coil and mixes with
the outside air, and (2) an internal circuit, in which the process fluid to be cooled circulates inside the coil.
During operation, heat is transferred from the warm fluid in the coil to the spray water, and then to the
atmosphere as a portion of the water evaporates. In addition to chiller applications and industrial process
cooling, closed circuit cooling towers are often used in heat pump loops, where closed loop cooling is
preferred. BAC offers three distinct closed circuit cooling tower product lines.
Evaporative Condensers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages J1 - J72

When applied to HVAC and light industrial systems, evaporative condensers provide lower condensing
temperatures and compressor horsepower savings of up to 15 percent compared with traditional systems. In
an evaporative condenser, refrigerant vapor is condensed in a coil, which is continually wetted on the outside
by a recirculating water system. Air is circulated over the coil, causing a small portion of the recirculating water
to evaporate. The evaporation removes heat from the vapor in the coil, causing it to condense. BAC offers two
distinct evaporative condenser product lines.
Need help deciding which

product to use?
Contact your local BAC
Representative for assistance.

C2
...because temperature matters™

D1
Open Cooling Towers

Open cooling towers provide evaporative cooling for many types of systems. The specific application will
largely determine which BAC Cooling Tower is best suited for a project. The table on pages D5 and D6 is
intended as a general guide. Specific application assistance is available through your local BAC Representative.
Overview
Principle of Operation
Open cooling towers reject heat from water-cooled systems to the atmosphere. Hot water from the system
enters the cooling tower and is distributed over the fill (heat transfer surface). Air is induced or forced through
the fill, causing a small portion of the water to evaporate. This evaporation removes heat from the remaining
water, which is collected in the cold water basin and returned to the system to absorb more heat.
Each open cooling tower line, although operating under the same basic principle of operation, is arranged a
little differently. See the schematics on pages D5 and D6 for product specific details.
Configuration
There are two main configurations of factory assembled open cooling towers: crossflow and counterflow. In
crossflow cooling towers, the water flows vertically down the fill as air flows horizontally across.
In counterflow cooling towers, the water flows vertically down the fill as air flows vertically up.
Water down
Air across
Crossflow configuration
Water down
Air up
Counterflow configuration

D2
Water Distribution System

Open cooling towers employ either
gravity distribution or pressurized spray
systems to distribute water over the fill.
Gravity systems, employed on BAC’s
crossflow cooling towers, feature hot
water basins mounted on top of the
Cooling Towers
tower above the fill. A series of metering
orifices in each hot water basin distribute
the water evenly over the fill. Gravity
distribution systems generally require
minimal pump head, can be inspected
while the unit is in operation and are
easy to access for routine maintenance
and service.
Gravity distribution basin
Spray distribution systems, employed on counterflow cooling towers, feature a series of PVC branches or
pipes fitted with spray nozzles mounted inside the tower above the fill. These systems typically require 2 to 7
psi water pressure at the water inlet and require the unit to be out of service for inspection and maintenance.
Spray distribution

D3
Fan System
The flow of air through most factory assembled cooling towers is provided by one or more mechanically
driven fans. The fan(s) may be axial or centrifugal, each type having its own distinct advantages.
Axial fan units require approximately half the fan motor horsepower of comparably sized centrifugal fan
Overview
units, offering significant lifecycle cost savings.
Centrifugal fan units are capable of overcoming reasonable amounts of external static pressure (≤ 0.5” or
12.7mm of H2O), making them suitable for both indoor and outdoor installations. Centrifugal fans are also
inherently quieter than axial fans, although the difference is minimal and can often be overcome through the
application of optional low sound fans and/or sound attenuation on axial fan units.
Centrifugal fan Axial fan
Induced Draft
The axial fans of induced draft equipment are mounted in the top deck of the unit, minimizing the impact of
fan noise on nearby neighbors and providing maximum protection from fan icing with units operating in sub-
freezing conditions. The use of corrosion resistant materials ensures long life and minimizes maintenance
requirements for the air handling components.
Forced Draft
The fans are located on the air inlet face at the base of forced draft towers, facilitating easy access for routine
maintenance and service. Additionally, location of these components in the dry entering air stream extends
component life by isolating them from the saturated discharge air.

D4
Capacity Range
On the following pages, product capacities are called out in terms of nominal tons. A nominal cooling tower
ton is defined as the capability to cool 3 GPM (0.19 l/s) of water from a 95ºF (35.0ºC) entering water
temperature to an 85ºF (29.4ºC) leaving water temperature at a 78ºF (25.6ºC) entering wet-bulb temperature.
Nominal conditions are typical of conventional HVAC designs in most parts of the country, but will not apply to
all projects. BAC offers selection software to evaluate the performance of a tower at many conditions; see
Cooling Towers
page M18 for details.
All capacities shown are for a single cell! Multiple cell selections can be applied to achieve larger capacities.
Maximum Entering Water Temperature
As previously stated, typical HVAC conditions call for an entering water temperature of approximately 95ºF
(35.0˚C). All BAC Cooling Towers are capable of withstanding temperatures of at least 120ºF (48.9˚C) with
standard fill materials. For applications where the entering water temperature exceeds 120ºF (48.9˚C), check
the following table to determine whether alternate fill materials are required for your project.
Typical Applications
A list of typical applications is provided on pages D5 and D6 for your reference.

D5
Open Circuit Cooling Towers

Product Lines
Series 3000 Series 1500 FXT
Overview
Principle of
Operation
Configuration Crossflow Crossflow Crossflow
Water
Gravity Gravity Gravity
distribution
Fan system Axial fan, induced draft Axial fan, induced draft Axial fan, forced draft
220 - 1,350 Nominal Tons 128 - 428 Nominal Tons 6 - 268 Nominal Tons
Capacity range
(Single cell) 660 - 4,050 GPM at 384 - 1,284 GPM at 18 - 804 GPM at
95˚F/85˚F/78˚F 95˚F/85˚F/78˚F 95˚F/85˚F/78˚F
130˚F (54.4˚C) Standard Fill; 120˚F (48.9˚C) Standard Fill; 125˚F (51.7˚C) Standard Fill;
Maximum
entering water
140˚F (60.0˚C) with 135˚F (57.2˚C) with 140˚F (60.0˚F) with
temperature
alternative fill material alternative fill material alternative fill material
Medium HVAC & industrial

applications
Medium to large HVAC &
Counterflow unit replacements
industrial applications
Typical Small HVAC & industrial
applications Crossflow unit replacements applications
Replacement of field erected
towers w/basinless units
Tight enclosures &
installations requiring a
single air inlet

D6
Series V
VTL VT0 VT1
Cooling Towers
Counterflow Counterflow Counterflow
Pressurized Pressurized Pressurized
Centrifugal fan, forced draft Centrifugal fan, forced draft Centrifugal fan, forced draft
134 - 1,335 Nominal Tons

16 - 272 Nominal Tons 12 -176 Nominal Tons
402 - 4,005 GPM at
48 - 816 GPM at 95˚F/85˚F/78˚F 36 - 528 GPM at 95˚F/85˚F/78˚F
95˚F/85˚F/78˚F
130˚F (54.4˚C) Standard Fill; 130˚F (54.4˚C) Standard Fill; 130˚F (54.4˚C) Std Fill;
170˚F (76.7˚C) with 170˚F (76.7˚C) with 170˚F (76.7˚C) with

alternative fill material alternative fill material alternative fill material
Small to medium HVAC &
industrial applications Medium HVAC & industrial
Small HVAC & industrial applications applications
Installations with extremely low
height requirements Indoor installations Indoor applications
Indoor installations High temperature industrial High temperature industrial

applications applications
High temperature industrial
applications Tight enclosures & installations Tight enclosures & installations
requiring a single air inlet requiring a single air inlet
Tight enclosures & installations
requiring a single air inlet

D7
University of Maryland
Terrapins Play it
Project Report
COOL in the New

Comcast Center!
November 24, 2002 marked the
beginning of a new era for the University
of Maryland’s men’s basketball team.
With a National Championship under their
belts from the previous year, the Terps were eager to repeat history, but there were a few details they
wouldn’t miss this time around. “Gone were the wooden seats and balmy temperatures,” recalls Chris
Stuchko, former Athletic Media Relations Associate for Maryland. Even with the record-setting crowd of
17,950 Terp basketball fans, the players ran out onto a cool and comfortable court, unlike what they
were used to in the past at Cole Fieldhouse. The team would now enjoy playing in an air-conditioned
arena, thanks to the construction of the Comcast Center located in the northeast edge of the College
Park campus. Baltimore Aircoil Company is proud to have installed four of their Series 3000 Cooling
Towers as part of the system cooling this innovative center.
The BAC Cooling Towers were shipped to the Comcast Center on September 24, 2001 and installed by
the Poole & Kent Company, a contracting firm located in Baltimore, MD. Each of the four cooling
towers are capable of producing 758 nominal tons of cooling, which is used in the enormous arena, an
academic support and career center, locker rooms, administrative offices, a University of Maryland
team shop, eateries, a gym used by 19 sports teams, weight rooms, and a wrestling room.
The BAC Series 3000 Cooling Towers are constructed from galvanized steel and FRP (fiberglass
reinforced polyester) casing panels for increased life expectancy. Each tower is gear driven. In
addition, all towers contain electric immersion heater elements to ensure that the basin water does not
freeze, as well as heater controls, bottom equalizers, and one 50 hp motor each.
The EASY CONNECT® Piping Arrangement with BALANCE CLEAN® Chamber design incorporates a
single bottom water inlet with a balancing chamber, ensuring that the water is evenly distributed to the
nozzles and strainer. This arrangement allows for all maintenance of the hot water distribution system
to be performed from the interior of the tower, rather than from the fan deck. Furthermore, this
innovative option reduces installation and field maintenance costs, through the elimination of overhead
piping.
All four Cooling Towers are CTI certified, as are all Series 3000 towers manufactured by BAC. The
Cooling Technology Institute (CTI) is a nonprofit, self-governing, technical association dedicated to
improving and standardizing measurements of evaporative cooling equipment. Simply stated, CTI
certification assures the customers they get what they pay for.

D8
Series 3000
Open Cooling Towers
Open Cooling Towers

Product Detail
Product Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D9
Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D11
Construction Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D13
Custom Features & Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D15
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D18
Engineering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D21
Structural Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D29
Engineering Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D31
Engineering Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D92

D9
Series 3000 Open Cooling Towers

Single Cell Capacity:
220 – 1,350 Nominal Tons
660 – 4,050 GPM at 95ºF/85ºF/78ºF
Series 3000
Series 3000 Cooling Towers deliver independently verified, fully rated thermal performance over a wide
range of flow and temperature requirements. Standard design features satisfy today’s environmental
concerns, minimize installation costs, maximize year-round operating reliability, and simplify maintenance
requirements.
Series 3000 Cooling Towers

• Low energy consumption
• Low installed cost
• Easy maintenance
• Reliable year-round operation
• Long service life
• ASHRAE Standard 90.1 compliant
• Five-year warranty on mechanical equipment

D10
Open Cooling Towers

D11
Benefits
Low Energy Consumption
• Evaporative cooling equipment minimizes the energy consumption of the entire system because it
provides lower operating temperatures. The owner saves money while conserving
Series 3000
natural resources and reducing environmental impact.

• The Series 3000 provides the heat rejection required at the lowest possible energy input via:
• High efficiency, low horsepower axial fans
• High efficiency BACross® Fill, which provides maximum air/water contact time
at low air pressure drops
• Variable Frequency Drives (Optional) (see page G1 for details)
• ENERGY-MISER® Fan System (Optional) (see page D16 for details)
• BALTIGUARD PLUSTM Fan System (Optional) (see page G1 for details)
• All units meet or exceed ASHRAE Standard 90.1 energy efficiency requirements.
Low Installed Cost

• Support – All models mount directly on two parallel I-beams and ship complete with motors and
drives factory-installed and aligned.
• Modular Design – Models 3728A through 31056A and 31132A through 31301A ship in two sections
to minimize the size and weight of the heaviest lift, allowing for the use of smaller, less costly cranes.
• Piping – The optional EASY CONNECT® Piping Arrangement with BALANCE CLEAN® Chamber
further reduces installation costs by eliminating overhead piping and piping support requirements
(see page D17 for details).
Easy Maintenance
• Easy Cleaning – The fill surface is elevated
above the sloped cold water basin floor to facilitate
flushing of dirt and debris from this critical area.
• Hinged Access Doors – Provide easy access to the
unit interior to adjust the make-up float valve,
clean the cold water basin and strainer, and service
the fan drive system.
• Single Inlet – The optional EASY CONNECT®
Piping Arrangement with BALANCE CLEAN® Easy access to hot water basin
Chamber simplifies maintenance by allowing all routine maintenance of the water distribution system
to be performed from the unit interior. This option includes an integral strainer that collects dirt and
debris before reaching the hot water basins, keeping nozzles clean (see page D17 for details).

D12
Reliable Year-Round Operation

• Drive System – Backed by a
5-year fan motor and drive warranty, the
BALTIDRIVE® Power Train utilizes special
corrosion-resistant materials of construction
and state-of-the-art technology to ensure
ease of maintenance and reliable year-round
Open Cooling Towers

performance.
BALTIDRIVE® Power Train

• Separate Air Inlet Louvers – Reduce the potential for scale build-up and damaging ice formations
at the air/water interface by providing a line of sight from the outside of the unit into the fill.
Long Service Life
• Frame Construction – Enables casing panels, critical links for long service life, to be constructed of
corrosion-resistant, fiberglass reinforced polyester (FRP).
• Materials of Construction – Various materials are available to meet the corrosion resistance, unit
operating life, and budgetary requirements of any project (see page D15 for construction options).
Series 3000 Cooling Tower (FRP casing panels removed to show framed construction)

D13
Construction Details
Series 3000
5
2

D14
1 Heavy-Duty Construction 5 Water Distribution System
Open Cooling Towers

• Heavy-gauge G-235 (Z700 Metric) hot-dip • Steel covers in easy to remove sections
galvanized steel frame • Low pump head gravity distribution basins
• Designed to meet anchorage requirements • Large orifice, 360º non-clog nozzles
of UBC 1997, Importance Factor 1.0,
Seismic Zone 2B conditions and
30 psf wind loads BACross® Fill Surface
6
with Integral Drift Eliminators
• High efficiency heat transfer surface
2 FRP Casing Panels
• Polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
•Corrosion resistant
• Impervious to rot, decay and biological attack
• Maintenance free
• Flame spread rating of 5 per ASTM E84-77a
• UV resistant finish
7 FRP Air Inlet Louvers

3 BALTIDRIVE® Power Train
• Corrosion resistant
• Premium quality, solid backed, multi-groove belt
• Maintenance free
• Corrosion resistant cast aluminum sheaves
• Heavy-duty bearings (280,000 hour average life)
• Cooling tower duty fan motor
• 5-year motor and
8 Cold Water Basin
drive warranty
• Sloped cold water basin for easy cleaning
• Suction strainer with anti-vortex hood
• Adjustable water make-up assembly
4 Low HP Axial Fan
• High efficiency
• Quiet operation
9 Hinged Access Doors
(Not Shown)
• Inward swinging door on each end wall

D15
Custom Features and Options

Construction Options
• Standard Construction:
Steel panels and structural elements are constructed of heavy-gauge G-235 (Z700 metric) hot-dip
galvanized steel. Casing panels and air inlet louvers are constructed of UV-resistant, fiberglass
Series 3000
reinforced polyester (FRP).

• Optional BALTIBOND® Corrosion Protection System:
The BALTIBOND® Corrosion Protection System, a hybrid polymer coating used to extend equipment
life, is applied to all hot-dip galvanized steel components of the cooling tower.
• Optional Stainless Steel Cold Water Basin:
A Series 300 stainless steel cold water basin is provided. Seams between panels inside the cold
water basin are welded. The basin is leak tested at the factory and welded seams are provided with
a 5-year leak-proof warranty.
• Optional Stainless Steel Hot and Cold Water Basins:
Series 300 stainless steel hot water basins are provided in addition to the cold water basin
described above.
• Optional JE PREMIER SERIES® Construction:
Steel panels and structural elements are constructed of Series 300 stainless steel. Seams between
panels inside the cold water basin are welded. The basin is leak tested at the factory and welded
seams are provided with a 5-year leak-proof warranty. Casing panels and air inlet louvers are
constructed of corrosion and UV resistant fiberglass reinforced polyester (FRP). Each cooling tower
provided with the JE PREMIER SERIES® Construction is backed by a comprehensive
Louver-to-LouverSM Five-Year Warranty, which covers ALL components from the fan to the cold
water basin, from louver to louver, including the motor.
• Optional Seismic and Wind Rated Unit
All steel panels and structure elements have been upgraded to resist seismic forces of Seismic
Zone 4 per the 1997 Uniform Building Code and wind load in accordance with ASCE 7-98 for roof
top installations with an Importance factor of 1.0.
See page M26 for more details on the materials described above.
Fan Drive System
The fan drive system provides the cooling air necessary to reject unwanted heat from the system to the
atmosphere. The standard fan drive system on the Series 3000 is the exclusive BALTIDRIVE® Power
Train. This BAC engineered drive system consists of a specially designed powerband and two cast
aluminum sheaves located on minimum shaft centerline distances to maximize belt life. A TEAO
cooling tower duty fan motor, custom engineered for BAC to provide maximum performance for cooling
tower service, is provided and backed by BAC’s comprehensive 5-year motor and fan drive warranty.

D16
ENERGY-MISER® Fan System

The ENERGY-MISER® Fan System consists of two
standard single-speed fan motors and drive
assemblies. One drive assembly is sized for full
speed and load, and the other is sized for
approximately 2/3 speed and consumes only 1/3 the
design horsepower. This configuration allows the
Open Cooling Towers

system to be operated like a two-speed motor, but
with the reserve capacity of a standby motor in the
event of failure. As a minimum, approximately 70%
capacity will be available from the low horsepower
motor, even on a design wet-bulb day. Controls and
wiring are the same as those required for a two-speed, two-winding motor. Significant energy savings
are achieved when operating at low speed during periods of reduced load and/or low wet-bulb
temperatures.
BALTIGUARD PLUSTM Fan System

The BALTIGUARD PLUSTM Fan System builds on the
advantages of the ENERGY-MISER® Fan System by
adding a VFD to the smaller motor. Using the VFD
on the smaller fan motor, as opposed to the larger
motor, reduces the cost of the VFD, and wiring for the
motor. For more information on the BALTIGUARD
PLUSTM Fan System refer to page G1.
Gear Drive System,

Close-Coupled Motor
A gear drive system is available as a fan drive option Gear drive system, close-coupled motor
on Series 3000 Cooling Towers. Both the gear drive
and couplings are selected with a 2.0 service factor.
Gear construction includes a nickel-alloy steel shaft,
casehardened gears, self lubrication, and a single
piece, gray iron housing. This drive system ships
completely installed and aligned.
Gear Drive System,

Externally Mounted Motor
A gear drive system with a TEFC motor mounted
outside the airstream is also available on Series 3000
Cooling Towers. A non-corrosive carbon-fiber
composite drive shaft with stainless steel hubs is
selected with a 2.0 service factor. The motor and drive Gear drive system,
shaft ship separately for easy field installation. externally mounted motor

D17

Low Sound Operation
The low sound levels generated by Series 3000 Cooling Towers make
them suitable for installation in most environments. For very sound
Series 3000
sensitive installations, the Series 3000 is available with a low sound fan
option that significantly reduces the sound levels generated from the
tower with minimal impact on thermal performance. The cooling tower
thermal performance with the low sound fan has been certified in
accordance with CTI Standard STD-201. Unit with intake and discharge
sound attenuation
For extremely sound sensitive installations, factory designed, tested and
rated sound attenuation is available for both the air intake and discharge of Series 3000 Cooling Towers.
For more information on sound, see page M124.
Basinless Unit Construction

The basinless unit construction option enables Series
3000 Cooling Towers to be directly installed on to new or
existing concrete cold water basins. This custom
feature reduces maintenance costs by eliminating the
integral basin from traditional units. It simplifies piping and
pumping requirements of multi-cell installations and
provides a cost-effective solution for many field-erected
cooling tower replacement projects.
Basinless Series 3000 Cooling Tower
on a concrete basin
EASY CONNECT® Piping Arrangement with

BALANCE CLEAN® Chamber
This exclusive BAC option reduces routine maintenance and simplifies
water inlet piping on the Series 3000. The BALANCE CLEAN® Chamber
features an integral strainer which prevents large debris from reaching
Integral strainer, BALANCE
the hot water distribution basins. The BALANCE CLEAN® Chamber CLEAN® Chamber option
automatically balances flow within each cell, eliminating the need for flow
balancing valves. The unique design of the water distribution system
enables all routine maintenance to be performed from the unit interior,
thereby eliminating the need to use the cooling tower fan deck as a
working surface to perform routine maintenance on the water distribution
system. A single water inlet connection, located on the side or bottom of
each unit, eliminates the need for overhead piping and piping supports.
Optional EASY CONNECT®
Piping Arrangement with

D18
Accessories
Ladder, Safety Cage, Gate and Handrails
In the event the owner requires easy access to the cooling
tower fan deck, the Series 3000 can be furnished with ladders
extending from the top of the unit to the base, as well as safety
Open Cooling Towers

cages, safety gates, and handrail packages. All components are
designed to meet OSHA requirements. All access to the top of
the equipment must be made in accordance with applicable
governmental occupational safety standards.
External Service Platforms

For external service, louver face platforms, access door
platforms and fan deck extensions can be added to the cooling
tower when the unit is purchased or as an aftermarket item.
Safety cages and safety gates are also available. All
components are designed to meet OSHA requirements. External platform at louver face
Internal Walkway and

Service Platform
A galvanized steel internal walkway is
available to provide a permanent working
surface for easy access to the strainer,
outlet, and make-up water assembly. For
access to the motor and drive assemblies
on two-piece units, an internal ladder and
upper service platform with handrails is
available. Safety gates are available for
all handrail openings. All components are
designed to meet OSHA requirements.
Internal walkway Internal ladder and
service platform
Vibration Cutout Switch

A factory mounted vibration cutout switch is available to effectively protect against equipment failure due
to excessive vibration of the mechanical equipment system. BAC can provide either a mechanical or
solid-state electronic vibration cutout switch in a NEMA 4 enclosure to ensure reliable protection.
Additional contacts can be provided to either switch type to activate an alarm.

D19
Accessories
Basin Heaters
Cooling towers exposed to below freezing ambient temperatures require protection to prevent freezing
of the water in the cold water basin when the unit is idle. Factory-installed electric immersion heaters,
which maintain +40°F (4.4°C) water temperature, are a simple and inexpensive way of providing such
Series 3000
protection.
Heater Sizing Data

0˚F (-17.8˚C) Ambient Heaters -20˚F (-28.9˚C) Ambient Heaters
Model Numbers Number of Heaters kW per Heater Number of Heaters kW per Heater
3240A to 3379A 2 6 2 9
3412A to 3527A 2 8 2 12
3473A to 3672A 2 10 2 14
3728A to 31056A 2 12 2 15
3583A to 3725A 2 14 2 18
31132A to 31301A 2 14 2 20
Note: The table data is based on 460v/3 phase/60Hz power and standard, single-cell unit configuration
Electric Water Level Control Package

The electric water level control replaces the standard
mechanical make-up valve when more precise water
level control is required. This package consists of a
conductance-actuated level control mounted in the
basin and a solenoid activated valve in the
make-up water line. The valve is slow closing to
minimize water hammer.
Extended Lubrication Lines

Extended lubrication lines with grease fittings are
Electric water level control
available for lubrication of the fan shaft bearings. package & basin heater
Fittings are located inside the plenum area next to
the access door.
High Temperature Fill

If operation above 130°F (54.4°C) is anticipated, an optional high temperature fill material is available
which increases the maximum allowable entering water temperature to 140˚F (60.0˚C).
Factory Mutual Approval

All multi-cell Series 3000 Cooling Towers are available with Factory Mutual (FM)
Approved construction as an option.

D20
Equipment Controls
BAC control panels are specifically designed to work
seamlessly with all BAC units and engineered to meet your
particular application. A terminal box available only on
Series 3000 Cooling Towers includes a factory-mounted
enclosure, factory wiring to terminal blocks for the fan motors
and vibration cut-out switch, and grounding lugs. For more
Open Cooling Towers

information on BAC Equipment Controls, see pages G1-G13.
Externally mounted terminal box
Air Inlet Screens

Wire mesh screens can be factory-installed over the inlet
louvers to prevent debris from entering the tower.
Basin Sweeper Piping

Basin sweeper piping provides an effective method of
preventing sediment from collecting in the cold water
basin of the tower. A complete piping system, including
nozzles, is provided in the tower basin for connection to
side stream filtration equipment (by others). For more
information on filtration systems, see page M159.
Basin sweeper piping

Side Outlet Depressed Sump
A side outlet depressed sump box is available for field installation below the base of the tower to
facilitate jobsite piping. The outlet connection is designed to mate with an ASME Class 150 flat face
flange. See the Connection Guide (page M56) for more information on standard and optional unit
connection types.
Velocity Recovery Stacks

Velocity recovery stacks are available on
the Series 3000 for increased incremental
thermal performance. This accessory can
be used to gain extra capacity in tight
layouts, while maintaining the same
footprint and unit horsepower, as well as
maintaining CTI certification. Field
assembly is required.
Velocity recovery stacks

D21
Engineering Data
Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions. This handbook includes data current
at the time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. Up-to-date engineering
data, free product selection software, and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
Single Cell Unit

Series 3000
WEIGHTS (lbs) DIMENSIONS4

MODEL NOMINAL MOTOR FAN
NUMBER TONNAGE5 HP (CFM) HEAVIEST
OPERATING1 SHIPPING SECTION L W H3 A
3240A 240 10 62,790 14,770 6,790 6,790

3272A 272 15 71,340 14,900 6,920 6,920 8’ 5-3/4” 18’ 0-1/2” 9’ 3-5/8” 8’ 7-3/4”
3299A 299 20 78,110 14,960 6,980 6,980
3333A 333 20 85,720 15,750 7,260 7,260
3358A 358 25 91,960 15,780 7,290 7,290 8’ 5-3/4” 18’ 0-1/2” 10’ 7-5/8” 9’ 11-3/4”
3379A 379 30 97,400 15,830 7,340 7,340
3412A 412 25 103,700 18,580 8,420 8,420
9’ 9-1/4” 20’ 0-1/2” 10’ 9-1/8” 9’ 11-3/4”
3436A 436 30 109,830 18,630 8,470 8,470
3455A 455 25 112,250 19,480 8,740 8,740
3482A 482 30 118,880 19,530 8,790 8,790 9’ 9-1/4” 20’ 0-1/2” 12’ 1-1/8” 11’ 3-3/4”
3527A 527 40 130,160 19,690 8,950 8,950
3473A 473 25 118,870 23,090 10,190 10,190
11’ 9-3/4” 21’ 6-1/2” 10’ 10-1/8” 9’ 11-3/4”
3501A 501 30 125,900 23,140 10,240 10,240
3552A 552 30 136,170 25,690 10,800 10,800
3604A 604 40 149,090 25,850 10,960 10,960
11’ 9-3/4” 21’ 6-1/2” 12’ 2-1/8” 11’ 3-3/4”
3648A 648 50 159,950 25,860 10,970 10,970
3672A 672 60 166,020 27,060 12,180 12,180
3728A 728 40 178,860 32,060 13,770 8,720
3781A 781 50 191,890 32,070 13,780 8,730 11’ 9-3/4” 21’ 6-1/2” 16’ 4-7/8” 15’ 5-1/2”
3828A 828 60 203,230 32,290 13,990 8,940
3872A 872 50 206,630 35,030 14,500 8,800
3923A 923 60 218,840 35,250 14,710 9,010 11’ 9-3/4” 21’ 6-1/2” 19’ 0-7/8” 18’ 1-1/2”
3970A 970 75 230,080 36,530 16,000 10,300
3985A 985 60 229,950 40,240 15,560 9,460
11’ 9-3/4” 21’ 6-1/2” 21’ 8-7/8” 20’ 9-1/2”
31056A 1056 75 246,700 40,330 15,650 9,550
3583A 583 25 143,950 30,300 12,070 12,070
3618A 618 30 152,460 30,350 12,120 12,120
13’ 11-1/8” 24’ 0-1/2” 12’ 3-1/8” 11’ 3-3/4”
3676A 676 40 166,920 30,510 12,280 12,280
3725A 725 50 179,080 30,520 12,290 12,290
31132A 1132 75 267,880 41,290 16,610 10,230 13’ 11-1/8” 24’ 0-1/2” 19’ 2-7/8” 18’ 1-1/2”
31213A 1213 75 282,010 44,300 17,550 10,720
13’ 11-1/8” 24’ 0-1/2” 21’ 10-7/8” 22’ 4-7/8”
31301A2 1301 100 302,580 46,590 19,840 13,010
Notes:
1. Operating weight is based on the water level in the 4. Refer to page D24 for dimensional reference drawings.
cold water basin at overflow height. If a lower operating 5. Nominal tons of cooling represents 3 GPM of water from a
weight is needed to meet design requirements, your local 95ºF to 85ºF at a 78ºF entering wet-bulb temperature.
BAC Representative can provide additional assistance.
2. 31301A is supplied with a gear fan drive system as
standard.
3. Models shipped with an optional gear drive or low sound
fan may have heights up to 10.5" greater than shown.

D22
See page D92

for Engineering
Considerations.
Double Cell Units
Open Cooling Towers

WEIGHTS (lbs) DIMENSIONS 4
MODEL NOMINAL MOTOR FAN HEAVIEST
NUMBER TONNAGE 5 HP (CFM) OPERATING1 SHIPPING SECTION L W H3 A
3240A-2 480 (2) 10 125,580 29,540 13,580 6,790

3272A-2 544 (2) 15 142,680 29,800 13,840 6,920 17’ 2” 18’ 0-1/2” 9’ 3-5/8” 8’ 7-3/4”
3299A-2 598 (2) 20 156,220 29,920 13,960 6,980
3333A-2 666 (2) 20 171,440 31,500 14,520 7,260
3358A-2 716 (2) 25 183,920 31,560 14,580 7,290 17’ 2” 18’ 0-1/2” 10’ 7-5/8” 9’ 11-3/4”
3379A-2 758 (2) 30 194,800 31,660 14,680 7,340
3412A-2 824 (2) 25 207,400 37,160 16,840 8,420
19’ 9” 20’ 0-1/2” 10’ 9-1/8” 9’ 11-3/4”
3436A-2 872 (2) 30 219,660 37,260 16,940 8,470
3455A-2 910 (2) 25 224,500 38,960 17,480 8,740
3482A-2 964 (2) 30 237,760 39,060 17,580 8,790 19’ 9” 20’ 0-1/2” 12’ 1-1/8” 11’ 3-3/4”
3527A-2 1,054 (2) 40 260,320 39,380 17,900 8,950
3473A-2 946 (2) 25 237,740 46,180 20,380 10,190
23’ 10” 21’ 6-1/2” 10’ 10-1/8” 9’ 11-3/4”
3501A-2 1,002 (2) 30 251,800 46,280 20,480 10,240
3552A-2 1,104 (2) 30 272,340 51,380 21,600 10,800
3604A-2 1,208 (2) 40 298,180 51,700 21,920 10,960
23’ 10” 21’ 6-1/2” 12’ 2-1/8” 11’ 3-3/4”
3648A-2 1,296 (2) 50 319,900 51,720 21,940 10,970
3672A-2 1,344 (2) 60 332,040 54,120 24,360 12,180
3728A-2 1,456 (2) 40 357,720 64,120 27,540 8,720
3781A-2 1,562 (2) 50 383,780 64,140 27,560 8,730 23’ 10” 21’ 6-1/2” 16’ 4-7/8” 15’ 5-1/2”
3828A-2 1,656 (2) 60 406,460 64,580 27,980 8,940
3872A-2 1,744 (2) 50 413,260 70,060 29,000 8,800
3923A-2 1,846 (2) 60 437,680 70,500 29,420 9,010 23’ 10” 21’ 6-1/2” 19’ 0-7/8” 18’ 1-1/2”
3970A-2 1,940 (2) 75 460,160 73,060 32,000 10,300
3985A-2 1,970 (2) 60 459,900 80,480 31,120 9,460
23’ 10” 21’ 6-1/2” 21’ 8-7/8” 20’ 9-1/2”
31056A-2 2,112 (2) 75 493,400 80,660 31,300 9,550
3583A-2 1,166 (2) 25 287,900 60,600 24,140 12,070
3618A-2 1,236 (2) 30 304,920 60,700 24,240 12,120
28’ 0-3/4” 24’ 0-1/2” 12’ 3-1/8” 11’ 3-3/4”
3676A-2 1,352 (2) 40 333,840 61,020 24,560 12,280
3725A-2 1,450 (2) 50 358,160 61,040 24,580 12,290
31132A-2 2,264 (2) 75 535,760 82,580 33,220 10,230 28’ 0-3/4” 24’ 0-1/2” 19’ 2-7/8” 18’ 1-1/2”
31213A-2 2,426 (2) 75 564,020 88,600 35,100 10,720
28’ 0-3/4” 24’ 0-1/2” 21’ 10-7/8” 22’ 4-7/8”
31301A-22 2,602 (2) 100 605,160 93,180 39,680 13,010
Notes:
1. Operating weight is based on the water level in the 4. Refer to page D24 for dimensional reference drawings.
cold water basin at overflow height. If a lower operating 5. Nominal tons of cooling represents 3 GPM of water from a
weight is needed to meet design requirements, your local 95ºF to 85ºF at a 78ºF entering wet-bulb temperature.
BAC Representative can provide additional assistance.
2. 31301A-2 is supplied with a gear fan drive system
as standard.
3. Models shipped with an optional gear drive or low sound
fan may have heights up to 10.5" greater than shown.

D23
Engineering Data
Series 3000
DIMENSIONS CONNECTION SIZES 1,3
MODEL MAKE-UP TOP SINGLE

NUMBER B C D E F G J WATER INLET INLET OUTLET
3240A
3272A 8-1/16” 5’ 8-1/4” 10’ 4-1/2” 7’ 1-1/4” 1/4” 4’ 2-7/8” 8’ 8-1/4” 1-0” (2) 6” 8” 8”
3299A
3333A
3358A 8-1/16” 6’ 1-1/4” 10’ 4-1/2” 7’ 1-1/4” 1/4” 4’ 2-7/8” 8’ 8-1/4” 1-0” (2) 6” 8” 8”
3379A
3412A
8-1/16” 6’-1 1/4” 11’ 4-1/2” 8’ 1-1/4” 1-1/4” 4’ 10-5/8” 9’ 11-3/4” 1-1/2” (2) 6” 8” 8”
3436A
3455A
3482A 9-1/8” 6’-6 3/4” 11’ 4-1/2” 8’ 1-1/4” 1-1/4” 4’ 10-5/8” 9’ 11-3/4” 1-1/2” (2) 6” 10” 10”
3527A
3473A
9-1/8” 6’ 6-3/4” 12’ 1-1/2” 8’ 10-1/4” 1-1/4” 5’ 10-7/8” 12’ 0-1/4” 1-1/2” (2) 8” 10” 10”
3501A
3552A
3604A
9-1/8” 6’ 6-3/4” 12’ 1-1/2” 8’ 10-1/4” 1-1/4” 5’ 10-7/8” 12’ 0-1/4” 1-1/2” (2) 8” 10” 10”
3648A
3672A
3728A
3781A 9-1/8” 10’ 4-1/2” 12’ 1-1/2” 8’ 10-1/4” 1-1/4” 5’ 10-7/8” 12’ 0-1/4” 1-1/2” (2) 8” 12” 12”
3828A
3872A
3923A 9-1/8” 13’ 0-1/2” 12 1-1/2” 8’ 10-1/4” 1-1/4” 5’ 10-7/8” 12’ 0-1/4” 1-1/2” (2) 8” 12” 12”
3970A
3985A
9-1/8” 15’ 8-1/2” 12’ 1-1/2” 8’ 10-1/4” 1-1/4” 5’ 10-7/8” 12’ 0-1/4” 1-1/2” (2) 8” 12” 12”
31056A
3583A
3618A
6’ 6-3/4” 13’ 4-1/2” 10’ 1-1/4” 5/8” 6’ 11-5/16” 14’ 1-5/8” 1-1/2” (2) 8” 10” 10”
3676A 9-1/8”
3725A
31132A 9-5/8” 13’ 4-1/2” 13’ 4-1/2” 10’ 1-1/4” 5/8” 6’ 11-5/16” 14’ 1-5/8” 2” (2) 10” 14” 14”
31213A
9-5/8” 15’ 8-1/2” 13’ 4-1/2” 10’ 1-1/4” 5/8” 6’ 11-9/16” 14’ 1-5/8” 2” (2) 10” 14” 14”
31301A
Notes:
1. The specific size of the inlet and outlet connection may vary with the design cooling water flow rate.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, all connections 3” and smaller are male pipe thread, and connections 4” and larger are beveled
for welding and grooved to suit a mechanical coupling.
3. On double cell units, connections are the same size but are located on both ends of the unit.

D24
Note:
Single Cell Unit Double Cell Unit
Open Cooling Towers
3728A thru 31056A and 31132A thru 31301A ship in two sections per cell.
The top section is the heaviest and tallest.
Top section heights are:
• 3728A thru 3970A: 10' 3-1⁄8"
• 31132A: 10' 11-1⁄8"
• 3985A thru 31056A: 11' 7-1⁄8" See page D92
• 31213A: 12' 3-1⁄8" for Engineering
• 31301A: 12' 6-1⁄2" Considerations.

D25
Concrete Basin Engineering Data

for Optional Basinless Units
Series 3000
data, and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
Single Cell Unit

OPERATING MAXIMUM
MODEL LOAD OPERATING
NUMBER VERTICAL (LBS) WEIGHT (LBS) A B C D
3240A 2,420 9,690
3272A 2,460 9,820 9’ 1-3/4” 18’ 4-1/2” 9’ 2-1/4” N/A
3299A 2,470 9,880
3333A 2,670 10,670
3358A 2,680 10,700 9’ 1-3/4” 18’ 4-1/2” 9’ 2-1/4” N/A
3379A 2,690 10,750
3412A 3,130 12,510
10’ 5-1/4” 20’ 4-1/2” 10’ 2-1/4” N/A
3436A 3,140 12,560
3455A 3,350 13,410
3482A 3,370 13,460 10’ 5-1/4” 20’ 4-1/2” 10’ 2-1/4” N/A
3527A 3,410 13,620
3473A 3,770 15,070
12’ 5-3/4” 21’ 10-1/2” 10’ 11-1/4” N/A
3501A 3,780 15,120
3552A 4,100 16,140
3604A 4,140 16,570
12’ 5-3/4” 21’ 10-1/2” 10’ 11-1/4” N/A
3648A 4,150 16,580
3672A 4,450 17,780
3728A 5,640 22,570
3781A 5,650 22,580 12’ 5-3/4” 21’ 10-1/2” 10’ 11-1/4” N/A
3828A 5,700 22,800
3872A 6,390 25,540
3923A 6,440 25,760 12’ 5-3/4” 21’ 10-1/2” 10’ 11-1/4” N/A
3970A 6,760 27,040
3985A 7,690 30,750
12’ 5-3/4” 21’ 10-1/2” 10’ 11-1/4” N/A
31056A 7,710 30,840
3583A 3,100 18,630
3618A 3,110 18,680
14’ 7-1/8” 24’ 4-1/2” 7’ 8-1/4” 9’-0”
3676A 3,140 18,840
3725A 3,140 18,850
31132A 4,940 29,620 14’ 7-1/8” 24’ 4-1/2” 7’ 8-1/4” 9’ 0”
31213A 5,440 32,630
14’ 7-1/8” 24’ 4-1/2” 7’ 8-1/4” 9’ 0”
31301A 5,820 3,920
Notes:
1. Purchaser to design, construct and furnish basin 3. Pier dimensions shown are minimum bearing surfaces required
(including anchor bolts) in accordance with requirements for the tower structure and do not include corner chamfers on the
given. Purchaser must also supply sump, overflow, drain, concrete piers.
cleanout and water make-up to suit requirements. 4. Fill to be located below the operating water level.
2. All anchor bolts shall be 3/4” diameter, 1-1/2” projection (+/- 1/4”), (see section A-A, next page)
fully threaded. Bolt to have one nut and washer. Anchor bolt and 5. Maximum operating weight does not include concrete basin or
column bearing point locations and elevations must be water retained in the basin.
maintained +/- 1/8”.

D26
10 5/8" MIN.
3" MIN.
7 5/8"
3" MIN.
(TYP)
(TYP)
SEE DETAIL A
1'-3"
1'-6"
A A BASIN OPERATING
AIR IN AIR IN DEPTH WATER LEVEL
A
6" MIN.
Open Cooling Towers

(6) 3/4" DIA. TOP OF PIERS AND
BASE OF COOLING
ANCHOR BOLTS SECTION A-A TOWER
10 5/8" MIN.
7 5/8"
1'-2 7/8" 1'-2 7/8"
1'-5 7/8" MIN. 1'-5 7/8" MIN.
C
PLAN VIEW OF BASIN
Models 3240A thru Models 31056A
1"
See page D92

for Engineering
Considerations.
DETAIL A
CONCRETE BASIN WALL SLOPE
All Models
11 1/4" MIN.
3" MIN.
8 1/4"
3" MIN.
(TYP)
(TYP)
A A
SEE DETAIL A
BASIN
1'-3"
1'-6"
AIR IN AIR IN OPERATING

DEPTH
A
WATER LEVEL
6" 6"
MIN. MIN.
TOP OF PIERS
(8) 3/4" DIA. SECTION A-A
ANCHOR BOLTS AND BASE OF
COOLING TOWER
8 1/4"
11 1/4" MIN.
1'-2 7/8" 1'-2 7/8"

1'-5 7/8" MIN. 1'-5 7/8" MIN.
C D C
B
PLAN VIEW OF BASIN
Models 3583A thru Models 31301A

D27
Concrete Basin Engineering

Data for Basinless Units
Series 3000
Double Cell Unit

OPERATING MAXIMUM
MODEL LOAD OPERATING
NUMBER VERTICAL (LBS) WEIGHT (LBS) A B C D E
3240A-2 2,420 19,380
3272A-2 2,460 19,640 17’ 10” 18’ 4-1/2” 9’ 2-1/4” N/A 7’ 10-1/2”
3299A-2 2,470 19,760
3333A-2 2,670 21,340
3358A-2 2,680 21,400 17’ 10” 18’ 4-1/2” 9’ 2-1/4” N/A 7’ 10-1/2”
3379A-2 2,690 21,500
3412A-2 3,130 25,020
3436A-2 3,140 25,120 20’ 5” 20’ 4-1/2” 10’ 2-1/4” N/A 9’ 2”
3455A-2 3,350 26,820

3482A-2 3,370 26,920 20’ 5” 20’ 4-1/2” 10’ 2-1/4” N/A 9’ 2”
3527A-2 3,410 27,240
3473A-2 3,770 30,140
24’ 6” 21’ 10-1/2” 10’ 11-1/4” N/A 11’ 2-1/2”
3501A-2 3,780 30,240
3552A-2 4,100 32,820
3604A-2 4,140 33,140
24’ 6” 21’ 10-1/2” 10’ 11-1/4” N/A 11’ 2-1/2”
3648A-2 4,150 33,160
3672A-2 4,450 35,560
3728A-2 5,640 45,140
3781A-2 5,650 45,160 24’ 6” 21’ 10-1/2” 10’ 11-1/4” N/A 11’ 2-1/2”
3828A-2 5,700 45,600
3872A-2 6,390 51,080
3923A-2 6,440 51,520 24’ 6” 21’ 10-1/2” 10’ 11-1/4” N/A 11’ 2-1/2”
3970A-2 6,760 54,080
3985A-2 7,690 61,500
31056A-2 7,710 61,680 24’ 6” 21’ 10-1/2” 10’ 11-1/4” N/A 11’ 2-1/2”
3583A-2 3,100 37,260
3618A-2 3,110 37,360
28’ 8-3/4” 24’ 4-1/2” 7’ 8-1/4” 9’ 0” 13’ 2-5/8”
3676A-2 3,140 37,680
3725A-2 3,140 37,700
31132A-2 4,940 59,240 28’ 8-3/4” 24’ 4-1/2” 7’ 8-1/4” 9’ 0” 13’ 2-5/8”
31213A-2 5,440 65,260
28’ 8-3/4” 24’ 4-1/2” 7’ 8-1/4” 9’ 0” 13’ 2-5/8”
31301A-2 5,820 69,840
Note:
1. Purchaser to design, construct and furnish basin 3. Pier dimensions shown are minimum bearing surfaces required
(including anchor bolts) in accordance with requirements for the tower structure and do not include corner chamfers on the
given. Purchaser must also supply sump, overflow, drain, concrete piers.
cleanout and water make-up to suit requirements. 4. Fill to be located below the operating water level.
2. All anchor bolts shall be 3/4” diameter, 1-1/2” projection (see section A-A, next page)
(+/- 1/4”), fully threaded. Bolt to have one nut and washer.
Anchor bolt and column bearing point locations and elevations 5. Maximum operating weight does not include concrete basin or
must be maintained +/- 1/8”. water retained in the basin.

D28
10 5/8" MIN.
3" MIN.
(TYP)
7 5/8"
3" MIN.
(TYP)
6" MIN.
A A SEE DETAIL A
9 3/4"
AIR IN AIR IN
1'-3"
1'-6"
BASIN OPERATING
DEPTH WATER LEVEL
A
AIR IN AIR IN
Open Cooling Towers

E
TOP OF PIERS AND
BASE OF COOLING
SECTION A-A TOWER
(12) 3/4" DIA.
ANCHOR BOLTS
10 5/8" MIN.
7 5/8"
1'-2 7/8" 1'-2 7/8"

1'-5 7/8" MIN. 1'-5 7/8" MIN.
C
PLAN VIEW OF BASIN
Models 3240A-2 thru Models 31056A-2
1"
See page D92

for Engineering
Considerations.
DETAIL A
CONCRETE BASIN WALL SLOPE
All Models
11 1/4" MIN.
3" MIN.
8 1/4"
3" MIN.
(TYP)
(TYP)
A A
AIR IN AIR IN
E
11"
SEE DETAIL A
A
BASIN
1'-3"
1'-6"
OPERATING
DEPTH
WATER LEVEL
AIR IN AIR IN
E
6" 6"
MIN. MIN.
TOP OF PIERS
SECTION A-A
AND BASE OF
(16) 3/4" DIA.
ANCHOR BOLTS COOLING TOWER
11 1/4" MIN.
8 1/4"
1'-2 7/8" 1'-2 7/8"

1'-5 7/8" MIN. 1'-5 7/8" MIN.
C D C
B
PLAN VIEW OF BASIN
Models 3583A-2 thru Models 31301A-2

D29
Structural Support
The recommended support arrangement for the Series 3000 Cooling Tower consists of parallel I-beams
positioned as shown on the drawings. Besides providing adequate support, the steel also serves to raise
the unit above any solid foundation to assure access to the bottom of the tower. The Series 3000 Cooling
Tower may also be supported on columns at the anchor bolt locations shown in Plan A or Plan C.
Series 3000
A minimum bearing surface of 12 in2 (77,742 mm2) must be provided under each of the concentrated load
points (See Note 7, next page). To support a Series 3000 Cooling Tower on columns, with an alternate
steel support arrangement, or the optional seismic and rated unit, consult your local BAC Representative.
WEIGHTS (lbs) DIMENSIONS

WT. AT BOLT
MODEL HOLE
NUMBER OPERATING1 SHIPPING1,2 LOCATIONS L1 L2 W A B C D E
3240A 14,770 6,790 3,693
3272A 14,900 6,920 3,725 8’ 5-3/4” 17’ 2” 18’ 0-1/2” 9’ 4” 16’ 4-1/2” 1-1/8” 8’ 3-1/2” 4-3/4”
3299A 14,960 6,980 3,740
3333A 15,750 7,260 3,938
3358A 15,780 7,290 3,945 8’ 5-3/4” 17’ 2” 18’ 0-1/2” 9’ 4” 16’ 4-1/2” 1-1/8” 8’ 3-1/2” 4-3/4”
3379A 15,830 7,340 3,958
3412A 18,580 8,420 4,645
9’ 9-1/4” 19’ 9” 20’ 0-1/2” 11’ 4” 18’ 4-1/2” 1-1/8” 9’ 7” 4-3/4”
3436A 18,630 8,470 4,658
3455A 19,480 8,740 4,870
3482A 19,530 8,790 4,883 9’ 9 -/4” 19’ 9” 20’ 0-1/2” 11’ 4” 18’ 4-1/2” 1-1/8” 9’ 7” 4-3/4”
3527A 19,690 8,950 4,923
3473A 23,090 10,190 5,773
11’ 9-3/4” 23’ 10” 21’ 6-1/2” 12’ 10” 19’ 10-1/2” 1-1/8” 11’ 7-1/2” 4-3/4”
3501A 23,140 10,240 5,785
3552A 25,690 10,800 6,423
3604A 25,850 10,960 6,463
11’ 9-3/4” 23’ 10” 21’ 6-1/2” 12’ 10” 19’ 10-1/2” 1-1/8” 11’ 7-1/2” 4-3/4”
3648A 25,860 10,970 6,465
3672A 27,060 12,180 6,765
3728A 32,060 13,770 8,015
3781A 32,070 13,780 8,018 11’ 9-3/4” 23’ 10” 21’ 6-1/2” 12’ 10” 19’ 10-1/2” 1-1/8” 11’ 7-1/2” 4-3/4”
3828A 32,290 13,990 8,073
3872A 35,030 14,500 8,758
3923A 35,250 14,710 8,813 11’ 9-3/4” 23’ 10” 21’ 6-1/2” 12’ 10” 19’ 10-1/2” 1-1/8” 11’ 7-1/2” 4-3/4”
3970A 36,530 16,000 9,133
3985A 40,240 15,560 10,060
11’ 9-3/4” 23’ 10” 21’ 6-1/2” 12’ 10” 19’ 10-1/2” 1-1/8” 11’ 7-1/2” 4-3/4”
31056A 40,330 15,650 10,083
3583A 30,300 12,070 7,575
3618A 30,350 12,120 7,588
13’ 11-1/8” 28’ 0-3/4” 24’ 0-1/2” 15’ 4” 22’ 4-1/2” 1-7/16” 13’ 8-1/4” 5-3/8”
3676A 30,510 12,280 7,628
3725A 30,520 12,290 7,630
31132A 41,290 16,610 10,323 13’ 11-1/8” 28’ 0-3/4” 24’ 0-1/2” 15’ 4” 22’ 4-1/2” 1-7/16” 13’ 8-1/4” 5-3/8”
31213A 44,300 17,550 11,075
13’ 11-1/8” 28’ 0-3/4” 24’ 0-1/2” 15’ 4” 22’ 4-1/2” 1-7/16” 13’ 8-1/4” 5-3/8”
31301A 46,590 19,840 11,648
See notes, next page.

D30
Single Cell Unit
3/4" DIA. MOUNTING HOLES

(4 REQUIRED MODELS 3240A THRU 3725A)
UNIT OUTLINE C
3/4" DIA. MOUNTING HOLES

AIR AIR (8 REQUIRED MODELS 3728A THRU 31301A)
D
Open Cooling Towers

L1
INLET CL BOLTS INLET C
AIR AIR
ADDITIONAL
ADDITIONAL D
UNIT OUTLINE
CL BOLTS C ANCHOR
ANCHOR BOLT
BOLT INLET
CL BOLTS INLET
A MODELS
MODELS 3728A
3728A
UNIT OVERALL THRU 31301A
THRU 31301A
WEIGHT GIVEN
W REQUIRED ON MODELS C
ON PAGE D29 5'–2 5/8" 3728A THRU 31301A
3 IS AT MIDPOINT CL BOLTS
BETWEEN TWO B
LOCATIONS UNIT OVERALL
W
Plan A Plan B
Notes:
1. Weights are for a single cell. To obtain weights
for multi-cell units, multiply by the number
of cells. Double Cell Unit
2. Operating weight and weight loading are for a 3/4" DIA. MOUNTING HOLES
single cell tower with water at overflow level in (16 REQUIRED MODELS 3728A THRU 31301A)
the cold water basin. UNIT OUTLINE C
3. Support beams and anchor bolts to be selected
and installed by parties other than BAC.
AIR D AIR
4. All support steel must be level at the top. CL BOLTS
INLET INLET
5. Beams must be selected in accordance with
E
accepted structural practice. Maximum L2
deflection of beam under unit to be 1/360 of
span, not to exceed 1/2”.
AIR D AIR
CL B0LTS
6. All single and double cell units can be furnished INLET INLET
with optional vibration isolation rail packages,
when required, to be installed between the tower ADDITIONAL
C
and supporting steel. The BAC standard CL B0LTS ANCHOR BOLT
A MODELS 3728A
vibration isolation rail package is designed for THRU 31301A
UNIT OVERALL
support Plan A for single cell units and support W
Plan C for double cell units. Plan B rails are 3
available upon request. When determining the
length of the supporting steel, allow for the
length of the vibration rails, as they are
sometimes longer than the cooling tower
dimensions shown. Plan C
7. If point vibration isolation is used with multi-cell
towers, the isolators must be located under the
support steel, not between the support steel and
the cooling towers.

D31
Engineering Specifications
See our website at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com for an electronic copy of product engineering specifications.
1.0 Cooling Tower 5. Shall withstand 200 thermal shock cycles between -25ºF
and +180ºF (-32˚C and 82˚C) without loss of adhesion or
1.1 General: Furnish and install _____ factory-assembled, other deterioration;
induced draft, crossflow cooling tower(s) with vertical air
discharge, conforming in all aspects to the specifications, 6. Shall withstand 6000 hours of exposure to 60 psi (42,184
schedules and as shown on the plans. Overall dimensions kg/m2)water jet without signs of wear or erosion.
Series 3000
shall not exceed approximately _____ ft (mm) long X ______

(Alternate) 1.3 JE PREMIER SERIES® Construction: All steel
ft (mm) wide X _____ ft (mm) high. The total connected fan
panels and structural members, including the structural frame,
horsepower shall not exceed _____ HP (kW). The cooling
hot and cold water basins, distribution covers, fan deck and
tower(s) shall be Baltimore Aircoil Company Model
fan cylinder shall be constructed of Series 300 stainless steel
__________.
and assembled with Series 300 stainless steel nut and bolt
1.2 Thermal Capacity: The cooling tower(s) shall be fasteners. All factory seams in the cold water basin shall be
warranted by the manufacturer to cool _____ US GPM (lps) of welded to ensure watertight assembly and welded seams
water from ______ ºF(°C) to _____ ºF(°C) at _____ ºF(°C) shall be warranted against leaks for five (5) years. Stainless
entering wet-bulb temperature. Additionally, the thermal steel basins with bolted seams are not acceptable.
performance shall be certified by the Cooling Technology
The entire cooling tower, including fan motor, drive system,
Institute in accordance with CTI Certification Standard
bearings, and structure, shall be backed by a comprehensive
STD-201. Lacking such certification, a field acceptance test
Louver-to-LouverSM Five-Year warranty.
shall be conducted within the warranty period in accordance
with CTI Acceptance Test Code ATC-105, by the Cooling 1.4 Quality Assurance: The cooling tower manufacturer shall
Technology Institute or other qualified independent third party have a Management System certified by an accredited
testing agency. Manufacturers’ performance guarantees or registrar as complying with the requirements of ISO-
performance bonds without CTI Certification or independent 9001:2000 to ensure consistent quality of products and
field thermal performance test shall not be accepted. The services.
cooling tower(s) shall comply with the energy efficiency
requirements of ASHRAE Standard 90.1. 1.5 Wind and Seismic Forces: When supported as
recommended, the unit shall be suitable for applications
1.3 Corrosion Resistant Construction (standard): Unless requiring equipment anchorage to resist wind loads up to 30
otherwise noted in this specification, all steel basin panels and psf (146.6 kg/m2) acting on the full vertical projected area with
structural members shall be constructed of heavy-gauge 16 psf (78.1kg/m2) acting simultaneously on the full
G-235 (Z700 metric) hot-dip galvanized steel with all edges horizontal projected area or seismic forces of 161% of the
given a protective coating of zinc-rich compound. operating weight acting in the horizontal direction, and 24% of
the operating weight acting in the vertical direction applied at
(Alternate) 1.3 Corrosion Resistant Construction: Unless
the center of gravity. Loads are appropriate for Seismic Zone
otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and
4 assuming an Importance Factor of 1.0, and soil profile SD,
structural members shall be protected with the BALTIBOND®
and rigid mounting to the supporting structure per the 1997
Corrosion Protection System. The system shall consist of
Uniform Building Code.
G-235 (Z700 metric) hot-dip galvanized steel prepared in a
four-step (clean, pre-treat, rinse, dry) process with an 2.0 Construction Details
electrostatically sprayed, thermosetting, hybrid polymer
fuse-bonded to the substrate during a thermally activated 2.1 Structure: The cooling tower shall be constructed with a
curing stage and monitored by a 23-step quality assurance sturdy structural frame designed to transmit all wind, seismic
program. Coatings other than the BALTIBOND® Corrosion and mechanical loads to the equipment anchorage. The frame
Protection System must be submitted to the engineer for shall be constructed of heavy-gauge steel angles and
pre-approval. Approved equals must have undergone testing, channels.
resulting in the following results as a minimum:
2.2 Casing Panels: Casing panels shall be constructed of
1. When X-scribed to the steel substrate it shall be able to corrosion and UV-resistant fiberglass reinforced polyester
withstand 6000 hours of 5% salt spray per ASTM B117 (FRP) to minimize maintenance requirements and prolong
without blistering, chipping, or loss of adhesion; equipment life. Casing panels shall not provide structural
support, since the sturdy, structural frame of the tower
2. When X-scribed to the steel substrate it shall be able to accurately transfers all loads to the equipment anchorage.
withstand 6000 hours of exposure to acidic (pH=4.0) and Corrosion resistant Series 300 stainless steel casing panels
alkaline (pH=11.0) water solutions at 95ºF (35˚C) without may be used in lieu of FRP panels.
signs of chemical attack;
(Alternate) 2.2 Casing Panels: Casing panels shall be
3. Shall withstand impact of 160 in-lbs per ASTM D2794 constructed of corrosion and fire retardant fiberglass
without fracture or delamination of the polymer layer; reinforced polyester (FRP) to minimize maintenance
requirements and prolong equipment life. panels may be
4. Shall withstand 6000 hours of ultraviolet radiation
used in lieu of FRP panels.
equivalent to 120,000 hours of noontime sun exposure
without loss of functional properties;

D32
The Fire Retardant FRP casing panels will have a flame distribution basins shall be open gravity type for easy
spread rating of 25 or less per ASTM E84-77a. Corrosion cleaning, and constructed of heavy gauge, Series 300
resistant Series 300 stainless steel casing stainless steel. The basins must be accessible from outside
the unit and serviceable during tower operation. Basin weirs
(Alternate) 2.2 Casing Panels: Casing panels shall be and plastic metering devices shall be provided to assure the
constructed of galvanized steel protected with the even distribution of water over the fill. Lift-off distribution
BALTIBOND® Corrosion Protection System covers shall be constructed of heavy-gauge Series 300
(Alternate) 2.2 FM approval (Multi-cell): The cooling towers stainless steel and designed to withstand a 50 psf (244 kg/m2)
shall be constructed with galvanized steel casing panels and live load or a 200 pound (90.7 kg) concentrated load. Gravity
louvers that shall meet the requirements of FM. flow nozzles shall be snap-in type for easy removal. Should
pressurized nozzles be used, they shall utilize grommets,
Open Cooling Towers

(Alternate) 2.2 FM Approval (Multi-cell): The cooling towers which ensure easy removal.
shall be constructed with Series 300 stainless steel casing
panels and louvers that shall meet the requirements of FM. 2.6 EASY CONNECT® Piping Arrangement with BALANCE
CLEAN® Chamber (optional): Each tower cell shall be
2.3 Cold Water Basin: The cold water basin shall be furnished with a single water inlet connection complete with
constructed of heavy-gauge steel panels and structural the means to automatically balance flow rates to the hot water
members. Basin shall include a depressed center section with basins. Internal piping shall include an integral pre-strainer
drain/clean-out connection. The basin area under the fill shall such that routine maintenance of the hot water distribution
be sloped toward the depressed center section to facilitate system can be performed from the unit interior.
cleaning. Standard basin accessories shall include a brass
make-up valve with large diameter plastic float for easy 3.0 Mechanical Equipment
adjustment of the operating water level. 3.1 Fan(s): Fan(s) shall be heavy-duty, axial flow with
(Alternate) 2.3 Cold Water Basin: The cold water basin shall aluminum alloy blades selected to provide optimum cooling
be constructed of heavy-gauge Series 300 stainless steel tower thermal performance with minimal sound levels. Air
panels and structural members. All factory seams shall be shall discharge through a fan cylinder designed for
welded to ensure watertight construction and welded seams streamlined air entry and minimum tip clearance for maximum
shall be warranted against leaks for a period of five (5) years fan efficiency. The top of the fan cylinder shall be equipped
from date of shipment. Stainless steel basins with bolted with a conical, non-sagging removable fan guard.
seams are not acceptable. Basin shall include a depressed (Alternate) 3.1 Fan(s): Fan(s) shall be heavy-duty, axial flow
center section with drain/clean-out connection. The basin area with aluminum alloy blades selected to provide optimum
under the fill shall be sloped toward the depressed center sec- cooling tower thermal performance with minimal sound levels.
tion to facilitate cleaning. Standard basin accessories shall Air shall discharge through a velocity recovery stack designed
include a brass make-up valve with large diameter plastic float to increase thermal capacity without increasing the unit fan
for easy adjustment of the operating water level. horsepower or plan area. The velocity recovery stack shall
(Alternate) 2.3 Cold Water Basin: The unit shall be provided consist of multiple panels to form a tapered 60 inch (1524
without an integral cold water basin. The unit shall be mm) tall stack. Fan guards not required.
mounted on a separate concrete cold water basin provided by 3.2 Bearings: Fan(s) and shaft(s) shall be supported by
others, to allow cooling water to pass directly from the fill into heavy-duty, self-aligning, grease-packed ball bearings with
the basin. moisture proof seals and integral slinger collars, designed for
2.4 Water Outlet: The water outlet connection shall be beveled a minimum L10 life of 40,000 hours (280,000 Hr. Avg. Life).
for welding and grooved for mechanical coupling or bolt hole 3.3 Fan Drive: The fan(s) shall be driven by a one-piece,
circle designed to accept an ASME Class 150 flat face flange. multi-groove, solid back V- type powerband with taper lock
The outlet shall be provided with large-area lift out strainers sheaves designed for 150% of the motor nameplate
with perforated openings sized smaller than the water horsepower. The powerband shall be constructed of neoprene
distribution nozzles and an anti-vortexing device to prevent air reinforced polyester cord and be specifically designed for
entrainment. The strainer and vortex device shall be cooling tower service.
constructed of the same materials as the cold water basin
to prevent dissimilar metal corrosion. 3.4 Sheaves: Fan and motor sheave(s) shall be fabricated
from corrosion-resistant materials to minimize maintenance
2.5 Water Distribution System: The hot water distribution and ensure maximum drive and powerband operating life.
basins shall be the open gravity type for easy cleaning, and
constructed of heavy-gauge, G-235 (Z700) hot-dip galvanized (Alternate 3.2, 3.3 & 3.4) Fan Drive: Fan(s) are driven by a
steel. The basins must be accessible from outside the unit (Close-Coupled (internal) TEAO fan motor gear drive) (gear
and serviceable during tower operation. Basin weirs and drive with the TEFC fan motor mounted outside the
plastic metering orifices shall be provided to assure even airstream). The gear shall be a right angle, industrial duty,
distribution of the water over the fill. Lift-off distribution covers oil-lubricated, geared speed reducer. Spiral bevel or spiral
shall be constructed of heavy-gauge G-235 (Z700) hot-dip bevel/helical gears are designed in accordance with the
galvanized steel and designed to withstand a 50 psf (244 Cooling Technology Institute STD-111, "Gear Speed
kg/m2) live load or 200 pound (90.7 kg) concentrated load. Reducers". All gears have a minimum service factor of 2.0
Gravity flow nozzles shall be snap-in type for easy removal. based on design fan horsepower and are suitable for both for-
Should pressurized nozzles be used, they shall utilize ward and reverse operation. An oil level fill port and sight
grommets, which ensure easy removal. glass are located on the gear drive to facilitate routine inspec-
tion and maintenance. The gear is doweled in position after
Alternate) 2.5. Water Distribution System: The hot water alignment of the mechanical equipment.

D33
3.5 Fan Motor: Fan motor(s) shall be totally enclosed air over minimum of 3/4 inches (19.1 mm) to reduce the tendancy for
(TEAO), reversible, squirrel cage, ball bearing type designed fouling and scaling, and to ensure proper airflow for maximum
specifically for cooling tower service. The motor shall be cooling capacity.
furnished with special moisture protection on windings, shafts 5.0 Air Inlet Louvers
and bearings and labeled appropriately for cooling tower duty.
5.1 Air Inlet Louvers: Air Inlet louvers shall be separate from
(Alternate) 3.5 Fan Motor: Fan motor(s) shall be totally the fill and removable to provide easy access for inspection of
enclosed air over (TEAO), reversible, squirrel cage, ball the air/water interface at the louver face. Louvers shall prevent
bearing type designed specifically for cooling tower service. water splash out during fan cycling and be constructed of
The motor shall be furnished with special moisture protection maintenance free, corrosion and UV resistant, fiberglass
on windings, shafts and bearings and labeled appropriately for reinforced polyester (FRP).
Series 3000
cooling tower duty. Fan motors shall be inverter duty type 6.0 Access
designed per NEMA Standard MG1, Section IV, Part 31.
6.1 Plenum Access: Two hinged access doors shall be
(Alternate) 3.5 Fan Motor: Fan motor(s) shall be totally provided for access into the plenum section.
enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) and mounted outside the
airstream. 7.0 Sound
(Alternate) 3.5 Fan Motor: Fan motor(s) shall be totally 7.1 Sound Level: To maintain the quality of the local
enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) and mounted outside the environment, the maximum sound pressure levels (dB)
airstream. Fan motors shall be inverter duty type designed measured 50 ft (15240 mm) from the cooling tower operating
per NEMA Standard MG1, Section IV, Part 31. at full fan speed shall not exceed the sound levels detailed
below. If the tower exceeds these conditions the tower must
3.6 Mechanical Equipment Warranty: The fan(s), fan shaft(s), be either oversized and reduced in horsepower, provided with
sheaves, bearings, mechanical equipment support and fan a low sound fan, or provided with sound attenuation.
motor shall be warranted against defects in materials and
workmanship for a period of five (5) years from date of (Alternate) 7.1 Sound Level: To maintain the quality of the
shipment. local environment, the cooling tower shall be furnished with a
low sound fan. The thermal performance of the cooling tower
3.7 ENERGY-MISER® Fan System (optional): Two single- when furnished with the low sound fan shall be certified by the
speed fan motors, one sized for full speed and load, the other Cooling Technology Institute in accordance with paragraph 1.2
sized for 2/3 speed and approximately 1/3 the full load of this specification. Maximum sound pressure levels (dB)
horsepower shall be provided in each cell for capacity control measured 50 ft (15240 mm) from the cooling tower operating
and stand-by protection from drive or motor failure. Two-speed at full fan speed shall not exceed the sound levels detailed
motor(s) are not an acceptable alternative. below. If the tower exceeds these conditions the tower must
3.8 (Alternate) 3.4 BALTIGUARD PLUSTM Fan System: Two be either oversized and reduced in horsepower, or provided
single speed fan motors, one sized for load, the other sized with sound attenuation.
for 1/3 of the full load horsepower shall be provided in each
Location 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 dB(A)
cell for capacity control and standby protection from drive or
Discharge
motor failure. The manufacturer of the equipment shall supply
controls for the larger motor, a VFD for the smaller motor and Air Inlet
factory programmed logic controller to maximize energy sav- Cased Face
ing for off peak load and wet-bulb conditions.
8.0 Accessories
4.0 Fill and Drift Eliminators 8.1 Balancing Valves: Heavy-duty butterfly valves shall be
4.1 Fill and Drift Eliminators: The fill and integral drift provided at the hot water inlet connections. These valves shall
eliminators shall be formed from self-extinguishing (per include cast iron bodies, elastomer seat and steel operating
ASTM-568) polyvinyl chloride (PVC) having a flame spread stems. There shall be a locking handle to maintain the valve
rating of 5 per ASTM E84 and shall be impervious to rot, setting in any position. Wafer type field supplied spool piece
decay, fungus and biological attack. The fill shall be suitable is required between the inlet connection and the valve.
for entering water temperatures up to and including 130°F 8.2 Vibration Isolation Rails: Spring-type vibration isolation
(54.4°C). The fill shall be manufactured, tested and rated by rails, constructed of steel channels and base plates, painted
the cooling tower manufacturer and shall be elevated above with a rust-resistant primer shall be provided to minimize
the cold water floor to facilitate cleaning. Spacing between fill vibration transmission from the tower to the building structure.
sheets shall be a minimum of 3/4 inches (19.1 mm) to reduce The isolators shall be designed for a static deflection of 1"
the tendancy for fouling and ensure proper airflow for (25.4 mm) and a maximum wind speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
maximum cooling capacity.
(Alternate) 8.2 Vibration Isolation Rails: Spring-type vibration
(Alternate) 4.1 Fill and Drift Eliminators: The high temperature isolation rails, constructed of steel channels and base plates,
fill and integral drift eliminators shall be formed from self- coated with a 0.003" (.076 mm) layer of zinc after fabrication
extinguishing (per ASTM-568) polyvinyl chloride (PVC) having shall be provided to minimize vibration transmission from the
a flame spread rating of 5 per ASTM E84 and shall be tower to the building structure. The isolators shall be
impervious to rot, decay, fungus and biological attack. The designed for a static deflection of 1" (25.4 mm) and a
high temperature fill shall be suitable for entering water maximum wind speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
temperatures up to and including 140°F (60.0°C). The fill
shall be manufactured, tested and rated by the cooling tower 8.3 Basin Heater(s): The cooling tower cold water basin shall
manufacturer and shall be elevated above the cold water floor be provided with electric heater(s) to prevent freezing in low
to facilitate cleaning. Spacing between fill sheets shall be a ambient conditions. The heater(s) shall be selected to main-
tain 40°F (4.44°C) basin water temperatures at _____°F (°C)

D34
ambient. The heater(s) shall be ______V/____phase/___Hz 8.8 Ladder: An aluminum ladder (with galvanized steel safety
electric and shall be provided with low water cutout and cage) shall be provided for access to the fan deck. Access
thermostat. door or service platforms are not acceptable.
(Alternate) 8.3 Basin Heaters: A steam coil shall be factory 8.9 Handrails: 1-1/4" (31.75 mm) galvanized steel pipe
installed in the depressed section of the cold water basin to handrail shall be provided around the perimeter of the cooling
prevent freezing during cold water shutdown. The steam coil tower cells. The handrails shall be provided with knee and
shall be capable of maintaining 40°F (4.44°C) basin water toe rails and shall conform to the requirements of OSHA
temperature at a –20°F (-28.89°C) ambient temperature given applicable at the time of shipment.
5 psig (34 Kpa) at the coil inlet connection. 8.10 Access Door Platform: A galvanized steel platform and
(Alternate) 8.3 Basin Heaters: A steam injector shall be aluminum ladder to grade shall be provided at all access
Open Cooling Towers

factory installed in the cold water basin section to prevent doors to access the plenum section of the cooling tower. All
freezing during cold water shutdown. Steam injector shall be working surfaces shall be able to withstand 50 psf (244 kg/m2)
capable of maintaining 40°F (4.44°C) basin water temperature live load or 200 pound (90.72 kg) concentrated load.
at a ___°F (°C) ambient temperature given 10 psig (68 Kpa) 8.11 Platform to Access External Motor (available on gear
at the inlet connection. drives equipped with TEFC external motors only): A galva-
8.4 Basin Water Level Control: The cooling tower nized steel platform and ladder to grade shall be provided for
manufacturer shall provide an electric water level control access to the external fan motor. All working surfaces shall
(EWLC) system. The system shall consist of water level be able to withstand 50 psf (244 kg/m2) live load or 200 pound
sensing and control units in quantities and locations as (90.72 kg) concentrated load.
indicated on the drawings. Each water level sensing and 8.12 Internal Walkway: An internal walkway shall be provided
control unit shall consist of the following: NEMA 4 enclosure in the plenum section to provide for inspection and
with gasketed access cover; solid state controls including all maintenance. All working surfaces shall be able to withstand
necessary relays and contacts to achieve the specified 50 psf (244 kg/m2) live load or 200 pound (90.7 kg)
sequence of operation; stainless steel water level sensing concentrated load. Other components of the cooling tower,
electrodes with brass holder; Schedule 40 PVC standpipe i.e. basin floor and fill/drift eliminators, shall not be considered
assembly with vent holes, and all necessary stainless steel an internal working surface. Cooling tower manufacturers that
mounting hardware. Provide PVC union directly below the promote these surfaces to be used as a working platform shall
control enclosure to facilitate the removal and access of provide a two-year extended warranty to the Owner to repair
electrodes and control enclosure. any damage to these surfaces caused during routine mainte-
The number and position of water level sensing electrodes nance.
shall be provided to sense the following: high water level, low 8.13 Internal Platform: An internal platform shall be provided
water level, high water alarm level, low water alarm level, and in the plenum section to provide for inspection and
heater safety cutout. maintenance. All working surfaces shall be able to withstand
8.5 Vibration Cutout Switch: Provide a mechanical local reset 50 psf live load or 200 pound concentrated load. Other
vibration switch. The mechanical vibration cutout switch will components of the cooling tower, i.e. basin floor and fill/drift
be guaranteed to trip at a point so as not to cause damage to eliminators, shall not be considered an internal working
the cooling tower. To ensure this, the trip point will be set in a surface. Cooling tower manufacturers that promote these
frequency range of 0 to 3,600 RPM and a trip point of 0.2 to surfaces to be used as a working platform shall provide a
2.0 g’s. two-year extended warranty to the Owner to repair any
(Alternate) 8.5 Vibration Cutout Switch: Provide an electronic damage to these surfaces caused during routine
remote reset vibration switch with contact for BAS monitoring. maintenance.
Wiring shall be by the installing contractor. The electronic 8.14 Louver Face Platform: Easy access to the hot water
vibration cutout switch shall be set to trip at a point so as not basins for inspection and maintenance of the basins, even
to cause damage to the cooling tower. To ensure this, the trip during tower operation, shall be provided by louver face
point will be set in a frequency range of 2 to 1000 Hertz and platforms. Fan deck ladders and handrails, which add to the
a trip point of 0.45 in/sec (0.0114 m/sec). overall height of the tower, are not acceptable.
8.6 Basin Sweeper Piping: The cold water basin of the 8.15 Fan Cylinder Extension: To extend the height of the
cooling tower shall be equipped with PVC sump sweeper tower equal to the surrounding enclosure, the cooling tower
piping with plastic eductor nozzles. The piping should create shall be provided with _____ft (mm) of fan cylinder extension.
a grid under the fill section and force all dirt and debris to the The fan cylinder extension shall match the construction of the
center depressed section of the cold water basin. fan deck.
8.7 Air intake Option: Provide removable hot dip galvanized 8.16 Mechanical Equipment Removal Davit: Provide the
steel 1"x1" (25.4 mm x 25.4 mm) mesh air intake screens. mechanical equipment removal option to aid in motor removal
(Alternate) 8.7 Air intake Option: Provide removable hot dip or gear drive. The motor or gear drive shall be lowered from
galvanized steel 1"x1" (25.4 mm x 25.4 mm) mesh air intake the mechanical equipment supports down to an internal metal
screens protected with the BALTIBOND® Corrosion Protection working surface.
system or Series 300 stainless steel. 8.17 Externally Mounted Pre-wired Terminal Box: The cooling
(Alternate) 8.7 Air intake Option: Provide removable Series tower shall ship from the factory with the fan motor(s) (and
300 stainless steel 1"x1" (25.4 mm x 25.4 mm) mesh air vibration cutout switch) wired to terminal blocks encased in a
intake screens. 304 stainless steel NEMA 3R enclosure, mounted on the
outside of the tower. No casing penetrations shall be
permitted in the field.

D35
9.0 Equipment Controls (Optional)

10.1 Variable Frequency Drive(s): A variable frequency drive
(VFD) shall be provided for each fan motor. The supplier of
the VFD shall be the manufacturer of the evaporative cooling
equipment. The VFD shall have a 3-contactor bypass, 3%
input line reactor, a removable keypad, an RS232 terminal
for PC connection, and a circuit breaker disconnect. Fuse
protection will not be accepted. Control voltage shall be 24V
to minimize the size of the enclosure which should not
exceed _____ ft x _____ ft x ____ ft and the weight should
Series 3000
not exceed ____ lbs. VFD shall be provided in a NEMA

(1)(3R)(12) enclosure. The VFD shall be compatible with a
(ModBus) (LonWorks) (Johnson N2) Building Automation
System.
OR
10.1 Enclosed Controls: An enclosed control panel shall be

provided for each cell of the evaporative cooling equipment.
The panel shall include full voltage, non-reversing (FVNR)
fan motor and pump motor (if applicable) starters in a com-
mon enclosure. The panel shall be provided with a main a
circuit breaker disconnect and a separate circuit breaker for
each motor or speed. Fuse protection will not be accepted.
Panels containing basin heaters shall have an Earth
Leakage Breaker containing ground fault protection. Starters
above 25 A shall be NEMA rated. IEC starters will be accept-
ed for motors below 25 A. Panel shall include a 120V/60Hz
control power transformer, Hand-Off-Auto switches for each
starter or contactor, and pilot lights for each component.
Enclosed controls shall be provided in a NEMA
(1)(3R)(4)(4X)(12) enclosure.
Optional enclosed control features: (A temperature sensor

shall be provided with the enclosed controls.)(A temperature
controller shall be provided with the enclosed controls.)(A
basin heater contactor with circuit breaker shall be provid-
ed.)(A vibration cutout switch input shall be provided.)
10.2 Safety Switch(es): A heavy-duty, non-fusible safety dis-

connect switch shall be provided by the manufacturer of the
evaporative cooling equipment. Switch shall be single-throw,
3-pole design, rated up to 600 VAC. Switch shall have triple
padlocking capability, a visible double break rotary blade
mechanism, a clearly visible On/Off handle, an interlocking
mechanism to prevent door opening with handle in On posi-
tion, and a clear line shield. Safety switch shall be provided
in a NEMA (1)(3R)(12) enclosure.

D36
Series 1500
Open Cooling Towers
Open Cooling Towers

Product Detail
Product Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D37
Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D39
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D45

D37
Series 1500 Open Cooling Towers

128 – 428 Nominal Tons
384 – 1,284 GPM at 95ºF/85ºF/78ºF
Series 1500
Series 1500 Cooling Towers minimize the operating, installation, and maintenance costs associated with
both new and replacement cooling tower projects. The Series 1500 delivers independently verified, fully
rated thermal performance over a wide range of flow and temperature requirements. Standard design
features minimize the costs associated with enclosures, support requirements, electrical service, piping,
and rigging.

• Ideal replacement unit
• Single side air inlet
• 5-year warranty on mechanical equipment

D38
Open Cooling Towers

D39
Benefits
Ideal Replacement Unit
• Support Steel – Units are designed to mount
directly on existing support steel of many cooling
Series 1500
towers (both crossflow and counterflow).

• Electrical Service – Fan motor configurations
can be supplied to match existing wiring.
• Enclosures – Units fit in most existing
enclosures with little or no modifications due to
the single air inlet design.
Single air inlet provides installation
flexibility in tight layouts
Before After
Counterflow cooling tower replacement

provides lower operating temperatures. The owner saves money while conserving natural resources
and reducing environmental impact.
• Series 1500 Cooling Towers provide the heat rejection required at the lowest possible energy
input via:
• High efficiency BACross® Fill surface, which provides maximum air/water contact time at
low air pressure drops
• Independent fan motors (optional, see page D43 for details)
• Variable frequency drives (optional, see page G1 for details)
• ENERGY-MISER® Fan System (optional, see page D44 for details)
• BALTIGUARD PLUSTM Fan System (optional, see page G1 for details)

D40
Low Installed Cost

• Single Side Air Inlet – Units can be placed close
to solid walls, reducing the size of enclosures and
allowing for more profitable use of premium space.
• Modular Design – The modular design minimizes
the size and weight of the heaviest lift, allowing for
Open Cooling Towers

the use of smaller, less costly cranes.
The unit shown ships in two pieces to

minimize shipping and rigging costs
Easy Maintenance
• Easy Cleaning – The fill surface is elevated above the
sloped cold water basin floor to facilitate flushing of dirt and
debris from this critical area.
• Hinged Access Doors and Standard Internal Walkway –

Series 1500 with optional Provide easy entry to the spacious plenum for routine
external service platform drive maintenance.
• Accessibility – Make-up, drain, overflow and optional basin

accessories are accessible from outside the unit.
• Inlet Strainer – Dirt and debris are collected by an integral

strainer before reaching the hot water basins, keeping
nozzles clean.
Access to strainer, make-up and Reliable Year-Round Operation

basin accessories from outside • BALTIDRIVE® Power Train – Backed by a 5-year fan motor
the tower
and drive warranty, the BALTIDRIVE® Power Train utilizes
special corrosion-resistant materials of construction and
state-of-the-art technology to ensure ease of maintenance and
reliable year-round performance.
• Separate Air Inlet Louvers – Reduce the potential for

excessive scale build-up and damaging ice formations at the
air/water interface by providing a line of sight from the outside
the unit into the fill.
Standard inlet strainer
Long Service Life

• Materials of Construction – Various materials are available to meet the corrosion resistance, unit

D41
Series 1500
1
4
6
8

D42
Open Cooling Towers

1 Heavy-Duty Construction
5 BACross Fill with Integral
®
• G-235 (Z700 metric) hot-dip galvanized Drift Eliminators (Not Shown)

steel panels • High efficiency heat transfer surface
2 BALTIDRIVE Power Train®
• Premium quality, solid-backed, multi-groove belt
• Corrosion resistant cast aluminum sheaves 6 FRP Air Inlet Louvers
• Heavy-duty bearings (280,000 hour average life) • Corrosion resistant
• Cooling tower duty fan motor • UV protected finish
• 5-year motor and • Maintenance free
drive warranty
7 Cold Water Basin

3 Low HP Axial Fan • Sloped cold water basin for easy cleaning
• High efficiency • Suction strainer with anti-vortex hood
• Quiet operation • Adjustable water make-up assembly
• Corrosion resistant • Integral internal walkway as standard
4 Water Distribution System

• Large orifice non-clog nozzles 8 Hinged Access Doors
• Steel covers in easy to remove sections • Inward swinging door on each end wall
• Low pump head gravity distribution basin
• Integral strainer

D43

Steel panels and structural elements are constructed of heavy-gauge G-235 (Z700) hot-dip
galvanized steel.
Series 1500
A Series 300 stainless steel cold water basin is available. Seams between panels inside the cold
• Optional Stainless Steel Hot and Cold Water Basins:
Series 300 stainless steel hot water basins are provided in addition to the cold water basin
described above.
• Optional Stainless Steel Construction:
seams are provided with a 5-year leak-proof warranty.
Multi-cell Series 1500 Cooling Towers are available with Factory Mutual (FM) approved
construction as an option.
Fan Drive System

The fan drive system provides the cooling air
necessary to reject unwanted heat from the system
to the atmosphere. The standard fan drive system on
the Series 1500 is the exclusive BALTIDRIVE® Power
Train. This BAC engineered drive system consists of
a specially designed powerband and two cast
aluminum sheaves located on minimum shaft
centerline distances to maximize belt life. A cooling
tower duty fan motor, custom engineered for BAC to
provide maximum performance for cooling tower
service, is provided and backed by BAC’s
comprehensive 5-year motor and fan drive warranty. BALTIDRIVE® Power Train System
Independent Fan Operation

Models 15296 through 15425 are provided with one fan motor driving two fans as standard. The
independent fan option consists of one fan motor and drive assembly for each fan to allow independent
operation, adding an additional step of fan cycling and capacity control.

D44

standard single-speed fan motor and drive
speed and load, and the other is sized approximately
2/3 speed and consumes only 1/3 the design
Open Cooling Towers

horsepower. This configuration allows the system to
be operated like a two-speed motor, but with the
reserve capacity of a standby motor in the event of
failure. As a minimum, approximately 70% capacity
will be available from the low horsepower motor, even
on a design wet-bulb day. Controls and wiring are the
same as those required for a two-speed, two-winding
motor. Significant energy savings are achieved when
operating at low speed during periods of reduced load and/or low wet-bulb temperatures.

The BALTIGUARD PLUSTM Fan System builds on the advantages of the ENERGY-MISER® Fan System
by adding a VFD to the smaller motor. Using tthe VFD on the smaller fan motor, as opposed to the
larger motor, reduces the cost of the VFD, and wiring for the motor. For more information on the
BALTIGUARD PLUSTM Fan System refer to page G1.
Low Sound Alternatives

The low sound levels generated by Series 1500 Cooling Towers make them suitable for installation in
most environments. For situations when one direction is particularly sound sensitive, the unit can be
oriented so that the side opposite the air inlet faces the sound-sensitive direction. The Series 1500 is
also available with a low sound fan or a “Whisper Quiet” fan that significantly reduces the sound levels
generated from the tower with minimal impact on thermal performance. The cooling tower thermal
performance with the low sound fan has been certified in accordance with CTI Standard STD-201. For
extremely sound sensitive installations, factory designed, tested and rated sound attenuation is available
for both the air intake and discharge.
Whisper Quiet Fan

Series 1500 models are available with a "Whisper Quiet" fan that
significantly reduces the sound levels generated from the unit with
minimal impact on thermal performance.
Equipment Controls
BAC control panels are specifically designed to work seamlessly
with all BAC units and engineered to meet you particular application.
For more on BAC Equipment Controls, see pages G1-G13.

D45
Accessories
Service Platforms
For access to the motor and drive assemblies on Models
15296 through 15425, an internal ladder with or without
upper service platform with handrails is available. For
Series 1500
external service, louver face platforms and access door

platforms are options that can be added to the cooling tower
either when the unit is purchased or as an aftermarket item.
Safety gates are available for all handrail openings supplied
by BAC. All components are designed to meet OSHA
requirements.
External platform at louver face
Standard internal walkway Internal ladder and service platform

A factory mounted vibration cutout switch is available to effectively protect against rotating equipment
failure. BAC can provide either a mechanical or solid-state electronic vibration cutout switch in a
NEMA 4 enclosure to ensure reliable protection. Additional contacts can be provided on either switch
type to activate an alarm. Remote reset capability is also available on either switch type.
Basin Heaters
of the water in the cold water basin when the unit is idle. Factory-installed electric immersion heaters,
protection.
Heater Sizing Data

Model Number 0ºF (-17.8ºC) Ambient Heaters (kW) -20ºF (-28.9ºC) Ambient Heaters (kW)
15146 to 15282 8 12
15296 to 15425 12 16

D46

mechanical make-up valve when a more precise
water level control is required. This package consists
of a conductance-actuated level control mounted in
the basin and a solenoid activated valve in the
make-up water line. The valve is slow closing to
Open Cooling Towers

minimize water hammer.

Extended lubrication lines are available for lubrication Electric water level control package
of the fan shaft bearings. Fittings are located inside
the plenum area next to the access door.

If operation above 120°F (48.9°C) is anticipated, an
optional high temperature fill material is
available which increases the maximum allowable
entering water temperature to 135°F (57.2°C).
Air Inlet Screens

Wire mesh screens are available factory-installed
over the air inlet louvers to prevent debris from
entering the tower.
Grease fittings at the access door (inset) & bearings
with the extended lubrication line option
Basin sweeper piping is an effective method of
eliminating sediment that may collect in the cold
water basin of the tower. A complete piping system,
including nozzles, is provided for connection in the
tower basin to side stream filtration equipment
(by others). For more information on filtration
systems, see page M159.
Side Outlet Depressed Sump Box

A side outlet depressed sump box is available for
field installation below the base of the tower to
facilitate jobsite piping. The outlet connection is Basin sweeper piping
designed to mate with an ASME Class 150 flat face
flange. See the Connection Guide (page M56) for more information on standard and optional unit
connection types.

D47
Engineering Data
AIR OUT WATER INLET
Series 1500
AIR IN
AIR IN
8" WATER OUTLET2
ACCESS DOOR
8
MAKE UP
6
OVERFLOW
5
DRAIN
Single Cell Unit

IND. FAN WEIGHTS (lbs) DIMENSIONS
MODEL NOMINAL MOTOR HP MOTOR FAN HEAVIEST INLET
NUMBER TONNAGE9 OPTION (CFM) OPERATING1 SHIPPING SECTION L H A C CONN.2
15146 146 7.5 N/A 40,320 7,920 3,940 3,940
15160 160 10 N/A 44,190 7,940 3,960 3,960 8’ 6” 10’ 3” N/A 9’ 9” 6”
15176 176 15 N/A 48,160 7,990 4,010 4,010
15162 162 7.5 N/A 43,080 8,610 4,200 4,200
15177 177 10 N/A 47,070 8,630 4,220 4,220
8’ 6” 11’ 7” N/A 11’ 1” 6”
15201 201 15 N/A 53,540 8,690 4,280 4,280
15219 219 20 N/A 58,240 8,710 4,300 4,300
15200 200 10 N/A 52,320 11,430 5,350 2,770
15227 227 15 N/A 59,380 11,490 5,410 2,780 8’ 6” 14’ 3” 7’ 5” 13’ 9” 6”
15250 250 20 N/A 65,400 11,510 5,430 2,800
15214 214 10 N/A 56,610 12,450 5,640 2,920
15245 245 15 N/A 64,810 12,510 5,700 2,920
8’ 6” 15’ 7” 8’ 9” 15’ 1” 6”
15270 270 20 N/A 71,420 12,530 5,720 2,920
15282 282 25 N/A 74,600 12,610 5,800 2,920
15296 296 15 (2) 7.5 77,440 15,540 6,750 3,540
15325 325 20 (2) 10 85,030 15,590 6,800 3,590
12’ 1” 14’ 3” 7’ 5” 13’ 9” 8”
15350 350 25 (2) 15 91,560 15,640 6,850 3,640
15368 368 30 (2) 15 96,280 15,660 6,870 3,660
15310 310 15 (2) 7.5 82,000 17,050 7,070 3,540
15340 340 20 (2) 10 89,940 17,100 7,120 3,590
15365 365 25 (2) 15 96,550 17,150 7,170 3,640 12’ 1” 15’ 7” 8’ 9” 15’ 1” 8”
15385 387 30 (2) 15 101,840 17,180 7,200 3,670
15425 428 40 (2) 20 112,340 17,450 7,470 3,940
Notes:
1. Operating weight is based on the water level in the cold water 4. The heaviest section for all models except 15214 through
basin at overflow height. If a lower operating weight is needed 15282 is the upper section. Models 15146 to 15219 ship
to meet design requirements, your local BAC Representative in one piece.
can provide additional assistance. 5. Models 15296 through 15425 – 2 1/8”
2. The specific size of the inlet and outlet connection may vary 6. Models 15296 through 15425 – 8”
with the design cooling water flow rate. Consult unit print for
7. Models 15146 through 15219 and 15296 through
dimensions.
15425 – 2 3/4”
3. Unless otherwise indicated, all connections 3" and smaller are
8. Models 15296 through 15425 – 1 1/2”
MPT. Connections 4" and larger are beveled for welding and
mechanically grooved. 9. Nominal tons of cooling represents 3 GPM of water cooled
from 95ºF to 85ºF at a 78ºF entering wet-bulb temperature.

D48
See page D92

for Engineering
Considerations.
7
AIR OUT WATER INLET
Open Cooling Towers

AIR IN
AIR IN
8" WATER OUTLET
ACCESS DOORS 8
(BOTH ENDS) MAKE UP
6
OVERFLOW
DRAIN
5 5
CONNECTIONS SAME BOTH ENDS
Multi-Cell Units
IND. FAN WEIGHTS (lbs) DIMENSIONS
MODEL NOMINAL MOTOR HP MOTOR FAN HEAVIEST INLET
NUMBER TONNAGE9 OPTION (CFM) OPERATING1 SHIPPING SECTION L H A C D CONN.2
15146-2 292 (2) 7.5 N/A 80,640 15,840 7,880 3,940
15160-2 320 (2) 10 N/A 88,380 15,880 7,920 3,960 17’ 2” 10’ 3” N/A 9’ 9” 4’ 3” (2) 6”
15176-2 352 (2) 15 N/A 96,320 15,890 8,020 4,010
15162-2 324 (2) 7.5 N/A 86,160 17,220 8,400 4,200
15177-2 354 (2) 10 N/A 94,140 17,260 8,440 4,220
17’ 2” 11’ 7” N/A 11’ 1” 4’ 3” (2) 6”
15201-2 402 (2) 15 N/A 106,900 17,380 8,560 4,280
15219-2 438 (2) 20 N/A 116,480 17,420 8,600 4,300
15200-2 400 (2) 10 N/A 104,640 22,860 10,700 2,770
15227-2 454 (2) 15 N/A 118,760 22,980 10,820 2,780 17’ 2” 14’ 3” 7’ 5” 13’ 9” 4’ 3” (2) 6”
15250-2 500 (2) 20 N/A 130,800 23,020 10,860 2,800
15214-2 428 (2) 10 N/A 113,220 24,900 11,280 2,920
15245-2 490 (2) 15 N/A 129,620 25,020 11,400 2,920
17’ 2” 15’ 7” 8’ 9” 15’ 1” 4’ 3” (2) 6”
15270-2 540 (2) 20 N/A 142,840 25,060 11,440 2,920
15282-2 564 (2) 25 N/A 149,200 25,220 11,600 2,920
15296-2 592 (2) 15 (4) 7.5 154,880 31,080 13,500 3,540
15325-2 650 (2) 20 (4) 10 170,060 31,180 13,600 3,590
24’ 5” 14’ 3” 7’ 5” 13’ 9” 6’ 5/8” (2) 8”
15350-2 700 (2) 25 (4) 15 183,120 31,280 13,700 3,640
15368-2 736 (2) 30 (4) 15 192,560 31,320 13,740 3,660
15310-2 620 (2) 15 (4) 7.5 164,000 34,100 14,140 3,540
15340-2 680 (2) 20 (4) 10 179,880 34,200 14,240 3,590
15365-2 730 (2) 25 (4) 15 193,100 34,300 14,340 3,640 24’ 5” 15’ 7” 8’ 9” 15’ 1” 6’ 5/8” (2) 8”
15385-2 774 (2) 30 (4) 15 203,680 34,360 14,400 3,670
15425-2 856 (2) 40 (4) 20 224,860 34,900 14,940 3,940
Notes:
1. Operating weight is for tower with water level in the cold water 4. The heaviest section for all models except 15214 through
basin at overflow. If a lower operating weight is needed to 15282 is the upper section. Models 15146 to 15219 ship
meet design requirements, your local BAC Representative can in one piece.
provide additional assistance. 5. Models 15296 through 15425 – 2 1/8”
2. The specific size of the inlet and outlet connection may vary 6. Models 15296 through 15425 – 8”
with the cooling water design flow rate. Consult unit print for
7. Models 15146 through 15219 and 15296 through
dimensions.
15425 – 2 3/4”
8. Models 15296 through 15425 – 1 1/2”
MPT. Connections 4" and larger are beveled for welding and
mechanically grooved. 9. Nominal tons of cooling represents 3 GPM of water cooled
from 95ºF to an 85ºF at a 78ºF entering wet-bulb temperature.

D49
Structural Support
The recommended support arrangement for the Series 1500 Cooling Tower consists of parallel I-beams
positioned as shown in the following drawings. Besides providing adequate support, the steel also serves to
raise the unit above any solid foundation to ensure access to the bottom of the tower. The Series 1500 may
also be supported on columns at the anchor bolt locations shown in Plan A/C or Plan B. A minimum 12”x12”
(304.8mm x 304.8mm) bearing surface must be provided under each of the concentrated load points (See
Series 1500
Note 5). To support a Series 1500 Cooling Tower on columns or in an alternate steel support arrangement,
consult your local BAC Representative.
Plan A/C Plan B
Plan A/C: Single-Cell and Multi-Cell Units

MODEL NUMBER A L1 L
15146 to 15282 6’ 9-3/4” 8’ 5-3/4” -
15296 to 15425 10’ 5-1/4” 12’ 1-1/4” -
15146-2 to 15282-2 6’ 9-3/4” 8’ 5-3/4” 17’ 2”
15296-2 to 15425-2 10’ 5-1/4” 12’ 1-1/4” 24’ 5”
Plan B: Single-Cell Units Only

MODEL NUMBER A L
15146 to 15282 8’ 3-1/2” 8’ 5-3/4”
15296 to 15425 11’ 11” 12’ 1-1/4”
Notes:
1. Support beams and anchor bolts are to be selected and installed 5. If point vibration isolation is used with multi-cell towers, the
by others. isolators must be located under the supporting steel, not between
the support steel and the cooling towers.
2. All supporting steel must be level at the top.
6. If existing vibration isolator rails are being reused on a
3. Beams must be selected in accordance with accepted structural
replacement project, springs/elastomers must be resized to match
practice. Maximum deflection of beam under unit to be 1/360 of
the new cooling tower weight distribution. Consult your local BAC
span, not to exceed 1/2 inch.
Representative for details.
4. All units can be furnished with an optional vibration isolation
7. When using Alternative Plan A support arrangements with optional
package, if required, to be installed between the tower and
bottom water outlet, size and location restrictions will apply to
supporting steel. The BAC vibration isolation package is designed
water outlet piping. Consider the Cantilevered Plan A support
for units on support Plan A/C. When determining the length of
arrangement or consult your local BAC Representative for details.
steel beams, allow for the length of vibration isolation rails, as they
may be longer than the tower length shown above.

D50
Structural Support Alternatives

For replacement installations, the Series 1500 Cooling Tower has been designed to match the supporting
steel of most existing counterflow and crossflow cooling towers without modifications. Shown below are the
most common steel support arrangements which can be accommodated by the Series 1500. If individual
point support is required, or if steel arrangement is not as shown below, consult your local BAC
Representative for assistance.
Cantilevered Plan A
Open Cooling Towers

Alternative Plan A
Alternative Plan A: Typical Dimensions for Single-Cell and Multi-Cell Units

MODEL NUMBER UNIT REPLACED A B C L1
15146 to 15282 VLT/VST 8’ 9-1/8” 1’ 6-7/16” 8’ 3-1/2” 8’ 5-3/4”
VLT/VST/VXT 8’ 11-1/4” 1’ 5-3/8” 11’ 11” 12’ 1-1/4”
15296 to 15425
VXT/VXMT 9’ 7-1/2” 1’ 1-1/4” 11’ 11” 12’ 1-1/4”
CFT 8’ 0” 1’ 11” 8’ 3-1/2” 8’ 5-3/4”
15146 to 15282
SERIES 3000 8’ 3-1/4” 1’ 9-3/8” 8’ 3-1/2” 8’ 5-3/4”
CFT 8’ 0” 1’ 11” 11’ 11” 12’ 1-1/4”
15296 to 15425
SERIES 3000 9’ 6” 1’ 2” 11’ 11” 12’ 1-1/4”
Cantilevered Plan A: Typical Dimensions for Single-Cell and Multi-Cell Units

MODEL NUMBER UNIT REPLACED A B C1 C2 L1
15146 to 15282 VLT/VST 8’ 9-1/8” 2’ 11-3/4” 8’ 3-1/2” 6’ 9-3/4” 8’ 5-3/4”
VLT/VST/VXT 8’ 11-1/4” 2’ 9-5/8” 11’ 11” 10’ 5-1/4” 12’ 1-1/4”

15296 to 15425
VXT/VXMT 9’ 7-1/2” 2’ 1-3/8” 11’ 11” 10’ 5-1/4” 12’ 1-1/4”
CFT 8’ 0” 3’ 8-7/8” 8’ 3-1/2” 6’ 9-3/4” 8’ 5-3/4”
15146 to 15282
SERIES 3000 8’ 3-1/4” 3’ 5-5/8” 8’ 3-1/2” 6’ 9-3/4” 8’ 5-3/4”
CFT 8’ 0” 3’ 8-7/8” 11’ 11” 10’ 5-1/4” 12’ 1-1/4”

15296 to 15425
SERIES 3000 9’ 6” 2’ 2-7/8” 11’ 11” 10’ 5-1/4” 12’ 1-1/4”
See Notes on previous page.

D51
1.0 Cooling Tower 3. Shall withstand impact of 160 in-lbs per ASTM D2794
without fracture or delamination of the polymer layer;
1.1 General: Furnish and install _____ factory-assem- 4. Shall withstand 6000 hours of ultraviolet radiation
bled, induced draft, crossflow cooling tower(s) with verti- equivalent to 120,000 hours of noontime sun expo
cal air discharge conforming in all aspects to the specifi- sure without loss of functional properties;
Series 1500
cations, schedules and as shown on the plans. Overall 5. Shall withstand 200 thermal shock cycles between -
dimensions shall not exceed approximately _____ft (mm) 25ºF and +180ºF (-32ºC and 82ºC) and without loss
long x _____ ft (mm) wide x _____ ft (mm) high. The total of adhesion or other deterioration;
connected fan horsepower shall not exceed _____ HP 6. Shall withstand 6000 hours of exposure to 60 psi
(kW). The cooling tower(s) shall be Baltimore Aircoil (42184.2 kg/m2) water jet without signs of wear or
Company Model ____________________. erosion.
(Alternate) 1.3 Series 300 Stainless Steel Construction:
1.2 Thermal Capacity: The cooling tower(s) shall be war-
All steel panels and structural members, including the
ranted by the manufacturer to cool _____ USGPM (l/s) of
casing panels, hot and cold water basins, distribution
water from ___ °F(°C) to ___ °F(°C) at ___ °F(°C)
covers, fan deck and fan cylinder shall be constructed of
entering wet bulb temperature. Additionally, the thermal
Series 300 stainless steel and assembled with Series 300
performance shall be certified by the Cooling Technology
stainless steel nut and bolt fasteners. All factory seams in
Institute in accordance with CTI Certification Standard
the cold water basin shall be welded to ensure watertight
STD-201. Lacking such certification, a field acceptance
assembly and shall be unconditionally warranted against
test shall be conducted within the warranty period in
leaks for five (5) years from date of shipment.
accordance with CTI Acceptance Test Code ATC-105, by
the Cooling Technology Institute or other qualified
1.4 Quality Assurance: The cooling tower manufacturer
independent third party testing agency. Manufacturer’s
shall have a Management System certified by an
performance guarantees or performance bonds without
accredited registrar as complying with the requirements of
CTI Certification or independent field thermal
ISO-9001:2000 to ensure consistent quality of products
performance test shall not be accepted. The cooling
and services.
tower shall comply with the energy efficiency
requirements of ASHRAE Standard 90.1. 1.5 Wind and Seismic Forces: When supported as
recommended, the unit shall be suitable for applications
1.3 Corrosion Resistant Construction: Unless otherwise
requiring equipment anchorage to resist wind loads up to
noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural
30 psf (146.6 kg/m2) acting on the full vertical projected
members shall be constructed of heavy-gauge G-235
area with 16 psf (78.1kg/m2) acting simultaneously on the
(Z700 metric) galvanized steel with all edges given a
full horizontal projected area or seismic forces of 161% of
protective coating of zinc-rich compound.
the operating weight acting in the horizontal direction, and
(Alternate) 1.3 Corrosion Resistant Construction: Unless 24% of the operating weight acting in the vertical direction
otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and applied at the center of gravity. Loads are appropriate for
structural members must be protected with the BALTI- Seismic Zone 4 assuming an Importance factor of 1.0,
BOND® Corrosion Protection System. The system shall and soil profile SD, and rigid mounting to the supporting
consist of G-235 (Z700 metric) hot-dip galvanized steel structure per the 1997 Uniform Building Code.
prepared in a four-step (clean, pretreat, rinse, dry)
process with an electrostatically sprayed, thermosetting 2.0 Construction Details
hybrid polymer fuse-bonded to the substrate during a
thermally activated curing stage and monitored by a 2.1 Cold Water Basin: The cold water basin shall be
23-step quality assurance program. Coatings other than constructed of heavy-gauge steel panels and structural
the BALTIBOND® Corrosion Protection System must be members. Basin shall include a depressed section with
submitted to the engineer for pre-approval. Approved drain/clean-out connection. The basin area under the fill
equals must have undergone testing, resulting in the shall be sloped toward the depressed section to facilitate
following results as a minimum: cleaning. Standard basin accessories shall include a
1. When X-scribed to the steel substrate it shall be able brass make-up valve with a large diameter plastic float for
to withstand 6000 hours of 5% salt spray per ASTM easy adjustment of operating water level.
B117 without blistering, chipping, or loss of adhesion;
2. When X-scribed to the steel substrate it shall be able (Alternate) 2.1 Cold Water Basin: The cold water basin
to withstand 6000 hours of exposure to acidic shall be constructed of heavy-gauge Series 300 stainless
(pH=4.0) and alkaline (pH=11.0) water solutions at steel panels and structural members. All factory seams
95ºF (35ºC) without signs of chemical attack; shall be welded to ensure watertight construction and

D52
welded seams shall be warranted against leaks for a performance with minimal sound levels. Air shall
period of five (5) years from date of shipment. Stainless discharge through a fan cylinder designed for streamlined
steel basins with bolted seams are not acceptable. Basin air entry and minimum tip clearance for maximum fan
shall include a depressed section with drain/clean-out efficiency. The top of the fan cylinder shall be equipped
connection. The basin area under the fill shall be sloped with a conical, non-sagging removable fan guard.
toward the depressed center section to facilitate cleaning.
Standard basin accessories shall include a brass make-up 3.2 Bearings: Fan(s) and shaft(s) shall be supported by
valve with large diameter plastic float for easy adjustment heavy-duty, self-aligning, grease packed ball bearings with
of the operating water level. moisture proof seals and integral slinger collars, designed
for a minimum L10 life of 40,000 hours (280,000 Hr. Avg.
Open Cooling Towers

2.2 Water Outlet: The water outlet connection shall be Life).
beveled for welding and grooved for mechanical coupling
or bolt hole circle designed to accept an ASME Class 150 3.3 Fan Drive: The fan(s) shall be driven by a one-piece,
flat face flange. The outlet shall be provided with large- multi-groove, solid back V-type powerband with taper lock
area lift out strainers with perforated openings sized sheaves designed for 150% of the motor nameplate
smaller than the water nozzles and an anti-vortexing horsepower. The powerband shall be constructed of neo-
device to prevent air entrainment. The strainer and vortex prene reinforced polyester cord and be specifically
device shall be constructed of the same materials as the designed for cooling tower service.
cold water basin to prevent dissimilar metal corrosion.
3.4 Sheaves: Fan and motor sheave(s) shall be fabricated
2.3 Water Distribution System: The distribution system from corrosion-resistant materials to minimize mainte-
shall be furnished with a single water inlet. The pipe stub nance and ensure maximum drive and powerband
connection shall be beveled for welding and grooved for operating life.
mechanical coupling. The hot water distribution system
shall consist of an integral strainer that feeds to an open 3.5 Fan Motor: Fan motor(s) shall be totally enclosed air
gravity type basin, for easy cleaning, and constructed of over (TEAO), reversible, squirrel cage, ball bearing type
heavy-gauge G-235 (Z700 metric) hot-dip galvanized designed specifically for cooling tower service. The motor
steel. The basins must be accessible from outside the shall be furnished with special moisture protection on
unit and serviceable during tower operation. Basin weirs winding, shafts, and bearings and appropriately labeled
and plastic metering orifices shall be provided to assure for “cooling tower duty.”
even distribution of the water over the fill. Lift-off
distribution covers shall be constructed of heavy-gauge (Alternate) 3.5 Fan Motor: Fan motor(s) shall be totally
G-235 (Z700) hot-dip galvanized steel. Gravity flow enclosed air over (TEAO), reversible, squirrel cage, ball
nozzles shall be snap-in type for easy removal. Should bearing type designed specifically for cooling tower
pressurized nozzles be used, they shall utilize grommets, service. The motor shall be furnished with special
which ensure easy removal. moisture protection on winding, shafts, and bearings and
appropriately labeled for “cooling tower duty.” Fan motors
(Alternate) 2.3 Water Distribution System: The distribution shall be inverter duty type designed per NEMA Standard
system shall be furnished with a single water inlet. The MG1, Section IV Part 31.
pipe stub connection shall be beveled for welding and
grooved for mechanical coupling. The hot water 3.6 Mechanical Equipment Warranty: The fan(s), fan
distribution system shall consist of an integral strainer that shaft(s), bearings, mechanical equipment support, and fan
feeds to an open gravity type basin, for easy cleaning, motor shall be warranted against defects in materials and
and constructed of heavy-gauge, Series 300 stainless workmanship for a period of five (5) years from date of
steel. The basins must be accessible from outside of the shipment.
unit and serviceable during tower operation. Basin weirs
and plastic metering orifices shall be provided to assure 3.7 ENERGY-MISER® Fan System (optional): Two
even distribution of the water over the fill. Lift-off single-speed fan motors, one sized for full speed and
distribution covers shall be constructed of heavy-gauge, load, the other sized for 2/3 speed and approximately 1/3
Series 300 stainless steel. Gravity flow nozzles shall be the full load horsepower, shall be provided for capacity
snap-in type for easy removal. Should pressurized control and stand-by protection from drive or motor failure.
nozzles be used, they shall utilize grommets, which Two-speed motor(s) are not an acceptable alternative.
ensure easy removal. (Alternate) 3.4 BALTIGUARD PLUS™ Fan System: Two
single speed fan motors, one sized for load, the other
3.0 Mechanical Equipment sized for 1/3 of the full load horsepower shall be provided
in each cell for capacity control and standby protection
3.1 Fan(s): Fan(s) shall be axial flow with aluminum alloy
blades selected to provide optimum cooling tower thermal

D53
from drive or motor failure. The manufacturer of the equip- (Alternate) 7.1 Sound Level: To maintain the quality of the
ment shall supply controls for the larger motor, a VFD for local environment, the cooling tower shall be furnished
the smaller motor and factory programmed logic controller with a low sound fan. The thermal performance of the
to maximize energy saving for off peak load and wet-bulb cooling tower when furnished with the low sound fan shall
conditions. be certified by the Cooling Technology Institute in
accordance with paragraph 1.2 of this specification.
4.0 Fill and Drift Eliminators Maximum sound pressure levels (dB) measured 50 ft
(15240 mm) from the cooling tower operating at full fan
4.1 Fill and Drift Eliminators: The fill and integral drift elimi-
speed shall not exceed the sound levels detailed below.
nators shall be formed from self-extinguishing (per ASTM-
568) polyvinyl chloride (PVC) having a flame spread rating
Series 1500
Location 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 dB(A)

of 5 per ASTM E84 and shall be impervious to rot, decay,
fungus and biological attack. The fill shall be suitable for Discharge
entering water temperatures up to and including 120°F Air Inlet

(48.8°C). The fill shall be manufactured, tested and rated Side wall
by the cooling tower manufacturer and shall be elevated Back wall
above the cold water basin to facilitate cleaning. 8.0 Accessories:
(Alternate) 4.1 Fill and Drift Eliminators: The high tempera- 8.1 Vibration Isolation Rails: Spring-type vibration isolation
ture fill and integral drift eliminators shall be formed from rails, constructed of steel channels and base plates,
self-extinguishing (per ASTM-568) polyvinyl chloride (PVC) painted with a rust-resistant primer shall be provided to
having a flame spread rating of 5 per ASTM E84 and shall
minimize vibration transmission from the tower to the
be impervious to rot, decay, fungus and biological attack.
building structure. The isolators shall be designed for a
The high temperature fill shall be suitable for entering
static deflection of 1” (25.4 mm) and a maximum wind
water temperatures up to and including 135°F (57.2°C).
speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
The fill shall be manufactured, tested and rated by the
cooling tower manufacturer and shall be elevated above (Alternate) 8.1 Vibration Isolation Rails: Spring-type vibra-
the cold water basin to facilitate cleaning. tion isolation rails, constructed of steel channels and base
plates, coated with a 0.003” (.076 mm) layer of zinc after
5.0 Air Inlet Louvers fabrication shall be provided to minimize vibration trans-
mission from the tower to the building structure. The isola-
5.1 Air Inlet Louvers: Air inlet louvers shall be separate tors shall be designed for a static deflection of 1” (25.4
from the fill and be removable to provide easy access for mm) and a maximum wind speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
inspection of the air/water interface at the louver surface.
Louvers shall prevent water splash-out during fan cycling 8.2 Basin Heater(s): The cooling tower cold water basin
and be constructed of maintenance free, corrosion resist- shall be provided with electric heater(s) to prevent freezing
ant, UV protected, fiberglass reinforced polyester (FRP). in low ambient conditions. The heater(s) shall be selected
to maintain 40°F (4.4°C) basin water temperatures at
(Alternate) 5.1 FM Approval (Multi-cell): The cooling towers _____°F (°C) ambient. The heater(s) shall be
shall be constructed with galvanized steel casing panels ______V/____phase/___Hz electric and shall be provided
and louvers that shall meet the requirements of FM. with low water cutout and thermostat.
(Alternate) 5.1 FM Approval (Multi-cell): The cooling towers
shall be constructed with Series 300 stainless steel casing (Alternate) 8.2 Basin Heaters: A steam coil shall be factory
panels and louvers that shall meet the requirements of FM. installed in the depressed section of the cold water basin
to prevent freezing during cold water shutdown. The
6.0 Access steam coil shall be capable of maintaining 40°F (4.4°C)
basin water temperature at a –20°F (-28.8°C) ambient
6.1 Plenum Access: Hinged access doors shall be provid- temperature given 5 psig (34 Kpa) at the coil inlet
ed on two sides of the tower for access into plenum sec- connection.
tion.
7.0 Sound (Alternate) 8.2 Basin Heaters: A steam injector shall be

factory installed in the cold water basin section to prevent
7.1 Sound Level: To maintain the quality of the local envi- freezing during cold water shutdown. Steam injector shall
ronment, the maximum sound pressure levels (dB) meas- be capable of maintaining 40°F (4.4°C) basin water
ured 50 ft (15240 mm) from the cooling tower operating at temperature at a ___°F (°C) ambient temperature given
full fan speed shall not exceed the sound levels detailed 10 psig (68 Kpa) at the inlet connection.
below. If the tower exceeds these conditions the tower
must be either oversized and reduced in horsepower, pro-
vided with a low sound fan, or provided with sound attenu-
ation.

D54
8.3 Basin Water Level Control: The cooling tower manufac- ed load. Other components of the cooling tower, i.e. basin
turer shall provide an electric water level control (EWLC) floor and fill/drift eliminators, shall not be considered an
system. The system shall consist of water level sensing and internal working surface. Cooling tower manufacturers that
control units in quantities and locations as indicated on the require that these surfaces be used as a working platform
drawings. Each water level sensing and control unit shall shall provide a 5-year extended warranty to the Owner to
consist of the following: NEMA 4 enclosure with gasketed repair any damage to these surfaces caused by routine
access cover; solid state controls including all necessary maintenance.
relays and contacts to achieve the specified sequence of
operation; stainless steel water level sensing electrodes with 8.8 Fan Cylinder Extension: To extend the height of the
brass holder; Schedule 40 PVC standpipe assembly with tower equal to the surrounding enclosure, the cooling tower
Open Cooling Towers

vent holes, and all necessary stainless steel mounting shall be provided with ____ft (mm) of fan cylinder extension.
hardware. Provide PVC union directly below the control The fan cylinder extension shall match the construction of
enclosure to facilitate the removal and access of electrodes the fan deck.
and control enclosure.
The number and position of water level sensing electrodes 9.1 Variable Frequency Drive(s): A variable frequency drive
shall be provided to sense the following: high water level , (VFD) shall be provided for each fan motor. The supplier of
low water level, high water alarm level, low water alarm, and the VFD shall be the manufacturer of the evaporative cooling
heater safety cutout. equipment. The VFD shall have a 3-contactor bypass, 3%
input line reactor, a removable keypad, an RS232 terminal
8.4 Vibration Cutout Switch: Provide mechanical local reset for PC connection, and a circuit breaker disconnect. Fuse
vibration switch. The mechanical vibration cut out switch will protection will not be accepted. Control voltage shall be 24V
be guaranteed to trip at a point so as not to cause damage to minimize the size of the enclosure which should not
to the cooling tower. To ensure this, the trip point will be a exceed _____ ft x _____ ft x ____ ft and the weight should
frequency range of 0 to 3,600 RPM and a trip point of 0.2 to not exceed ____ lbs. VFD shall be provided in a NEMA
2.0 g’s. (1)(3R)(12) enclosure. The VFD shall be compatible with a
(ModBus) (LonWorks) (Johnson N2) Building Automation
(Alternate) 8.4 Vibration Cutout Switch: Provide electronic System.
remote reset vibration switch with contact for BAS monitor-
ing. Wiring shall be by the installing contractor. The elec- OR
tronic vibration cut out switch shall be set to trip at a point so
as not to cause damage to the cooling tower. The trip point 9.1 Enclosed Controls: An enclosed control panel shall be
will be 0.45 in/sec (0.0114 m/sec). provided for each cell of the evaporative cooling equipment.
The panel shall include full voltage, non-reversing (FVNR)
8.5 Basin Sweeper Piping: The cold water basin of the cool- fan motor and pump motor (if applicable) starters in a
ing tower shall be equipped with PVC basin sweeper piping common enclosure. The panel shall be provided with a main
with plastic eductor nozzles. The piping should create a grid a circuit breaker disconnect and a separate circuit breaker
under the fill section and force all dirt and debris to the for each motor or speed. Fuse protection will not be
depressed section of the cold water basin. accepted. Panels containing basin heaters shall have an
Earth Leakage Breaker containing ground fault protection.
8.6 Air Intake Option: Provide removable hot dip galvanized Starters above 25 A shall be NEMA rated. IEC starters will
steel 1”x1” (25.4 mm x 25.4 mm) mesh air intake screens. be accepted for motors below 25 A. Panel shall include a
120V/60Hz control power transformer, Hand-Off-Auto
(Alternate) 8.6 Air Intake Option: Provide removable hot dip switches for each starter or contactor, and pilot lights for
galvanized steel 1”x1” (25.4 mm x 25.4 mm) mesh air intake each component. Enclosed controls shall be provided in a
screens protected with the BALTIBOND® Corrosion NEMA (1)(3R)(4)(4X)(12) enclosure.
Protection system or Series 300 stainless steel.
(Alternate) 8.6 Air intake Option: Provide removable Series shall be provided with the enclosed controls.)(A temperature
300 stainless steel 1”x1” (25.4 mm x 25.4 mm) mesh air controller shall be provided with the enclosed controls.)
intake screens. (A basin heater contactor with circuit breaker shall be
provided.)(A vibration cutout switch input shall be provided.)
8.7 Access Door Platform: A galvanized steel platform and
aluminum ladder to grade shall be provided at an access 9.2 Safety Switch(es): A heavy-duty, non-fusible safety
door to access the plenum section of the cooling tower. All disconnect switch shall be provided by the manufacturer of
working surfaces shall be able to withstand 50 psf (244 the evaporative cooling equipment. Switch shall be single-
kg/m2) live load or 200 pound (90.7 kg) concentrated load. throw, 3-pole design, rated up to 600 VAC. Switch shall have
triple padlocking capability, a visible double break rotary
8.7 Internal Platform: An internal platform shall be provided blade mechanism, a clearly visible On/Off handle, an
in the plenum section to provide for inspection and mainte- interlocking mechanism to prevent door opening with handle
nance. All working surfaces shall be able to withstand 50 in On position, and a clear line shield. Safety switch shall be
psf (244 kg/m2) live load or 200 pound (90.7 kg) concentrat- provided in a NEMA (1)(3R)(12) enclosure.

D55
Philadelphia Wachovia Center

BAC Series 1500 Cooling Towers and ICE CHILLER® Thermal
Storage Coils are part of the Energy-Saving HVAC System
Project Report
Facility Owner/Operator:
Comcast-Spectacor
Architect:
Ellerbe Becket, Kansas City, MO
Consulting Engineer:
Flack & Kurtz, New York, NY
Mechanical Contractor:
Herman Goldner Co.,
Philadelphia, PA
The Wachovia Center in Philadelphia, PA is designed with extensive building envelope features and
HVAC energy-efficiency measures that are predicted to save over $250,00 in annual energy usage
costs and demand charges. The state-of-the-art facility can seat up to 21,000 people at concerts and
sports events such as basketball, hockey and lacrosse games. Baltimore Aircoil Company Series 1500
Cooling Towers and ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Coils are integral to the energy-saving HVAC
system at the facility.
The seven-cell BAC Series 1500 Cooling Towers provide the cooling water for the chiller system which
cools three areas of the building independently on a zoned basis. Series 1500 Cooling Towers were
chosen because their light weight, compact size and single-side air entry permitted locating them in a
narrow, roof-top enclosure on the front of the building. The towers are hidden behind the architectural
screen wall in the photo above.
Eight (8) BAC ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Coils are located in a concrete vault behind the arena,
to handle the building’s cyclical cooling demands. The internal melt thermal storage system cools a
solution of ethylene glycol to supplement the chillers during peak loads. The coils can build almost
800,000 lbs. of ice in an eight hour period.

D56
FXT
Open Cooling Towers
Open Cooling Towers

Product Detail
Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D59
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D63

D57
FXT
Cooling Towers
FXT
18 – 804 GPM at 95ºF/85ºF/78ºF
FXT Cooling Towers deliver independently verified, fully rated thermal performance over a wide range of flow
and temperature requirements. Standard design features satisfy today’s environmental concerns, minimize
installation costs, maximize operating reliability, and simplify maintenance requirements.
FXT Cooling Towers

• 5-year warranty on mechanical equipment

D58
Open Cooling Towers

D59
Benefits
FXT

• The FXT provides the heat rejection required at the lowest possible energy input via:
• High efficiency BACross® Fill, which provides maximum air/water contact time
at low air pressure drops
• Variable frequency drives (optional) (see page G1 for details)
Low Installed Cost

• All single cell FXT Cooling Towers ship
completely assembled, minimizing
installation time and cost:
• No motors to mount
• No sheaves to align
• No belts to install
• No make-up system to assemble
This single cell unit is placed with one lift

and ships fully assembled

D60
Easy Maintenance
• Easy access – The interior of the unit is
accessible through a circular access doors
for adjusting the float valve, cleaning the
strainer or flushing the basin
Open Cooling Towers

• Motor location – The fan motor is
located on the exterior of the unit for easy
maintenance and belt adjustment. On most
models, a single threaded bolt and nut
assembly further simplifies belt adjustment.
• Easy lubrication – Fittings for extended

lubrication lines are provided as standard Circular access door
on the exterior of the unit for bearing lubrication.
Long Service Life

• Materials of construction – Various materials are available to meet the corrosion resistance, unit
The fan motor is easily accessible at the base of the unit’s exterior

D61
FXT
4
7
3
5
10
6

D62
1 Heavy-Duty Construction 5 BACross Fill with Integral

®
• G-235 (Z700 metric) hot-dip galvanized Drift Eliminators

steel panels • High efficiency heat transfer surface
2 Fan Drive System • Impervious to rot, decay and biological attack
• Direct drive: Models FXT-6 through FXT-20
Open Cooling Towers

• V-belt drive: Models FXT-26 and above
• Heavy-duty bearings (280,000 hour 6 Air Inlet Cylinder
average life) • Streamlines air entry for maximum efficiency
• Extended lubrication lines
7 Inlet Screens
• 5-year motor and drive
warranty • Protection from moving parts
• Easily removed for access to fans, bearings,
motor and drives
3
Low HP Axial Fan(s)
• High efficiency 8 Water Make-up Valve Assembly
• Corrosion resistant • Bronze float valve
• Large diameter plastic float
• Non-clog nozzles 9 Strainer
• Low pump head gravity distribution basin • Anti-vortexing design to prevent
air entrainment
• Steel distribution covers (not shown)
10 Access Door
• Circular access door
All steel panels and structural elements are constructed of heavy-gauge G-235 (Z700 metric)
hot-dip galvanized steel.


A Series 300 stainless steel cold water basin is provided on most models.

All steel panels and structural elements are constructed of Series 300 stainless steel.
Factory Mutual Approval: FXT Cooling Towers are available with Factory Mutual (FM) Approved
construction as an option.

D63
Accessories
FXT
Basin Heaters
Cooling towers exposed to below freezing ambient temperatures require protection to prevent freezing of
the water in the cold water basin when the unit is idle. Factory-installed electric immersion heaters, which
maintain +40°F (4.4°C) water temperature, are a simple and inexpensive way of providing such protection.
Heater Sizing Data

FXT - 6, 7.5 1 2 1 2
FXT - 11 to 20 1 2 1 3
FXT - 26 to 68 1 3 1 5
FXT - 74 to 99 1 4 1 6
FXT - 115 to 142 2 3 2 5
FXT - 160 to 268 2 4 2 6

The electric water level control replaces the standard mechanical
make-up valve when a more precise water level control is required.
This package consists of a conductance-actuated level control
mounted in the basin and a solenoid activated valve in the make-up
water line. The valve is slow closing to minimize water hammer.

If operation above 125°F (51.7°C) is anticipated, an optional high
temperature fill material is available which increases the maximum Electric water level control
allowable entering water temperature to 140°F (60.0°C).
Discharge Screens
Wire mesh screens are available to cover the discharge of the tower to prevent debris from entering the
eliminators and cold water basin.
Discharge Air Turning Vanes

Discharge air turning vanes are available to direct the discharge air up and away from the unit. The
turning vanes are installed at the factory on the discharge of the tower and require no increase in fan
motor horsepower.
Equipment Controls
BAC control panels are specifically designed to work seamlessly with all BAC units and engineered to
meet your particular application. For more information on BAC Equipment Controls, see pages G1-G13.

D64
Structural Support
The recommended support arrangement for the FXT Cooling Tower consists of parallel “I” beams
positioned as shown in the drawings. Besides providing adequate support, the steel also serves to
raise the unit above any solid foundation to assure access to the bottom of the tower. FXT towers may
also be supported on columns at the anchor bolt locations shown, if required. A minimum bearing
surface of 6” x 6” (152.4mm x 152.4mm) inches square must be provided under each of the concen-
Open Cooling Towers

trated load points.
Plan A (Recommended) Plan B (Alternate-Single Cell Only)
Weight (lbs)
Model Number L W P1 P2
Shipping Operating
FXT - 6 370 980 1’ 3” 5’ 1” 264 226
FXT - 7.5 370 980 1’ 3” 5’ 1” 264 226
FXT - 11 470 1,420 2’ 5’ 1” 369 341
FXT - 16 570 1,330 2’ 5’ 1” 372 293
FXT - 20 590 1,350 2’ 5’ 1” 378 297
FXT - 26 940 2,080 3’ 6” 5’ 1” 624 416
FXT - 30 950 2,090 3’ 6” 5’ 1” 627 418
FXT - 33 950 2,090 3’ 6” 5’ 1” 627 418
FXT - 38 1,000 2,420 3’ 6” 5’ 1” 726 484
FXT - 42 1,000 2,420 3’ 6” 5’ 1” 726 484
FXT - 47 1,020 2,440 3’ 6” 5’ 1” 732 488
FXT - 58 1,220 3,140 5’ 5’ 1” 989 581
FXT - 68 1,230 2,150 5’ 5’ 1” 992 583
FXT - 74 1,720 4,230 5’ 7’ 1-7/8” 1,163 952
FXT - 87 1,730 4,240 5’ 7’ 1-7/8” 1,166 954
FXT - 99 1,770 4,280 5’ 7’ 1-7/8” 1,178 962
FXT - 115 2,220 6,080 8’ 7’ 1-7/8” 1,672 1,368
FXT - 130 2,260 6,120 8’ 7’ 1-7/8” 1,683 1,377
FXT - 142 2,300 6,160 8’ 7’ 1-7/8” 1,695 1,385
FXT - 160 2,880 8,030 11’ 7’ 1-7/8” 2,208 1,807
FXT - 175 2,920 8,070 11’ 7’ 1-7/8” 2,219 1,816
FXT - 200 2,970 8,120 11’ 7’ 1-7/8” 2,234 1,826
FXT - 216 3,560 9,420 11’ 7’ 1-7/8” 2,543 2,167
FXT - 250 3,610 9,470 11’ 7’ 1-7/8” 2,557 2,178
FXT - 268 3,630 9,490 11’ 7’ 1-7/8” 2,563 2,182
Notes:
1. Support beams and anchor bolts are to be selected and 4. When determining the length of the supporting steel, allow for the
installed by others. length of the vibration isolation rails as they are sometimes longer
than the cooling tower dimensions shown.
2. All support steel must be level at the top.
5. Operating weight is based on the water level in cold water basin at
3. The BAC standard vibration isolation rail package is designed
overflow height.
for support Plan A.

D65
Engineering Data
Models FXT-6 to 68
FXT
† Inlet piping must rest on the flow

divider located 7/8” below the top of the
water distribution box. The inlet piping
to the distribution box must be the
correct size, as indicated below.
Model Nominal Airflow Dimensions Weights (lbs) Connection Sizes

Motor HP
Number Tonnage (CFM) L W H A B C Operating Shipping Inlet Outlet
FXT - 6 6 1/3 2,400 2’ 1/8” 6’ 9-3/8” 4’ 7-7/8” 22 5/8” 7” 1’ 8-1/2” 980 370 3” 3”
FXT - 7.5 7.5 1/2 3,000 2’ 1/8” 6’ 9-3/8” 4’ 7-7/8” 22 5/8” 7” 1’ 8-1/2” 980 370 3” 3”
FXT - 11 11 1/2 4,400 3’ 1/8” 6’ 9-7/8” 4’ 7-7/8” 22 5/8” 7” 1’ 8-1/2” 1,420 470 3” 3”
FXT - 16 16 1/2 5,700 3’ 1/8” 6’ 10-7/8” 5’ 11-7/8” 19 3/4” 7 1/2” 1’ 8-1/2” 1,330 570 4” 4”
FXT - 20 20 1 7,100 3’ 1/8” 6’ 10-7/8” 5’ 11-7/8” 19 3/4” 7 1/2” 1’ 8-1/2” 1,350 590 4” 4”
FXT - 26 26 1 9,200 4’ 6-1/8” 7’ 7-7/8” 5’ 11-7/8” 19 3/4” 6 7/8” 1’ 8” 2,080 940 4” 4”
FXT - 30 30 1 1/2 10,600 4’ 6-1/8” 7’ 7-7/8” 5’ 11-7/8” 19 3/4” 6 7/8” 1’ 8” 2,090 950 4” 4”
FXT - 33 33 2 11,700 4’ 6-1/8” 7’ 7-7/8” 5’ 11-7/8” 19 3/4” 7 7/8” 1’ 8” 2,090 950 4” 4”
FXT - 38 38 1 1/2 12,100 4’ 6-1/8” 7’ 7-7/8” 7’ 3-1/4” 16 7/8” 7 7/8” 1’ 10-1/2” 2,420 1,000 6” 6”
FXT - 42 42 2 13,400 4’ 6-1/8” 7’ 7-7/8” 7’ 3-1/4” 16 7/8” 7 7/8” 1’ 10-1/2” 2,420 1,000 6” 6”
FXT - 47 47 3 15,000 4’ 6-1/8” 7’ 7-7/8” 7’ 3-1/4” 16 7/8” 7 7/8” 1’ 10-1/2” 2,440 1,020 6” 6”
FXT - 58 58 3 18,500 6’ 1/8” 7’ 7-7/8” 7’ 3-1/4” 16 7/8” 7 7/8” 1’ 10-1/2” 3,140 1,220 6” 6”
FXT - 68 68 5 21,700 6’ 1/8” 7’ 7-7/8” 7’ 3-1/4” 16 7/8” 7 7/8” 1’ 10-1/2” 3,150 1,230 6” 6”
Notes:
1. Unless otherwise indicated, all connections 6” and smaller are MPT and connections 8” and larger are beveled for welding.
2. Operating weight is based on the water level in cold water basin at overflow height.
3. Nominal tons of cooling represents 3 GPM of water from 95ºF to 85ºF at a 78ºF entering wet-bulb temperature.

D66
See page D92

for Engineering
Models FXT-74 to 268 Considerations.
Open Cooling Towers

7' - 3 3/8"
† Inlet piping must rest on the flow

divider located 7/8” below the top of the
water distribution box. The inlet piping
to the distribution box must be the
correct size, as indicated below.
Model Nominal Airflow Dimensions Weights (lbs) Connection Sizes

Motor HP
Number Tonnage (CFM) L H A B C Operating Shipping Inlet Outlet
FXT -74 74 3 21,800 6’ 1/8” 8’ 4” 4’ 1-3/8” 8 1/2” 2’ 1-1/8” 4,230 1,720 8” 8”
FXT - 87 87 5 25,600 6’ 1/8” 8’ 4” 4’ 1-3/8” 8 1/2” 2’ 1-1/8” 4,240 1,730 8” 8”
FXT - 99 99 7 1/2 29,100 6’ 1/8” 8’ 4” 4’ 1-3/8” 8 1/2” 2’ 1-1/8” 4,280 1,770 8” 8”
FXT - 115 115 5 33,900 9’ 1-1/8” 8’ 4” 4’ 1-3/8” 8 1/2” 2’ 1-1/8” 6,080 2,220 8” 8”
FXT - 130 130 7 1/2 38,300 9’ 1-1/8” 8’ 4” 4’ 1-3/8” 8 1/2” 2’ 1-1/8” 6,120 2,260 8” 8”
FXT - 142 142 10 41,800 9’ 1-1/8” 8’ 4” 4’ 1-3/8” 8 1/2” 2’ 1-1/8” 6,160 2,300 8” 8”
FXT - 160 160 7 1/2 47,100 12’ 1/8” 8’ 4” 4’ 1-3/8” 8 1/2” 2’ 1-1/8” 8,030 2,880 8” 8”
FXT - 175 175 10 51,500 12’ 1/8” 8’ 4” 4’ 1-3/8” 8 1/2” 2’ 1-1/8” 8,070 2,920 8” 8”
FXT - 200 200 15 58,900 12’ 1/8” 8’ 4” 4’ 1-3/8” 8 1/2” 2’ 1-1/8” 8,120 2,970 8” 8”
FXT - 216 216 10 56,400 12’ 1/8” 11” 3’ 7-3/4” 8 1/2” 2’ 3-1/8” 9,420 3,560 8” 8”
FXT - 250 250 15 65,300 12’ 1/8” 11” 3’ 7-3/4” 8 1/2” 2’ 3-1/8” 9,470 3,610 8” 8”
FXT - 268 268 20 70,000 12’ 1/8” 11” 3’ 7-3/4” 8 1/2” 2’ 3-1/8” 9,490 3,630 8” 8”
Notes:
1. Unless otherwise indicated, all connections 6” and smaller are MPT and connections 8” and larger are beveled for welding.
2. Operating weight is based on the water level in cold water basin at overflow height.
3. Nominal tons of cooling represents 3 GPM of water from 95ºF to 85ºF at a 78ºF entering wet-bulb temperature.

D67
1.0 Cooling Tower 4. Shall withstand 6000 hours of ultraviolet radiation

equivalent to 120,000 hours of noontime sun
1.1 General: Furnish and install ___ factory-assembled, exposure without loss of functional properties;
forced-draft, crossflow cooling tower(s). The tower(s) shall 5. Shall withstand 200 thermal shock cycles between -
have air entry on one side only. The tower(s) shall have 25ºF (-32ºC) and +180ºF (82ºC) without loss of
FXT
the fan and all moving parts located in the dry entering adhesion or other deterioration;
airstream to provide greater reliability and long life. Overall 6. Shall withstand 6000 hours of exposure to 60 psi
dimensions shall not exceed approximately ____ft (mm) (42,184.5 kg/m2) water jet without signs of wear or
long x ____ft (mm) wide, with an overall height not erosion.
exceeding ____ft (mm). The total connected fan horse-
power shall not exceed ___ HP (kW). The cooling tower (Alternate) 1.3 Stainless Steel Construction: Unless
shall be Baltimore Aircoil Company Model FXT _____. otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and
structural members shall be constructed of Series 300
1.2 Thermal Capacity: The cooling tower(s) shall be war- stainless steel and assembled with Series 300 stainless
ranted by the manufacturer to cool _____ USGPM (l/s) of steel nut and bolt fasteners.
water from ___ºF (ºC) to ___ºF (ºC) at ___ºF (ºC) entering
wet-bulb temperature. Additionally, the performance shall 1.4 Quality Assurance: The cooling tower manufacturer
be certified by the Cooling Technology Institute in accor- shall have a Management System certified by an
dance with CTI Certification Standard STD-201. Lacking accredited registrar as complying with the requirements of
such certification, a field acceptance test shall be conduct- ISO-9001:2000 to ensure consistent quality of products
ed within the warranty period in accordance with CTI and services.
Acceptance Test Code ATC-105, by the Cooling
Technology Institute or other CTI-accredited independent 2.0 Construction Details
testing agency. The cooling tower(s) shall comply with the
energy efficiency requirements of ASHRAE Standard 90.1. 2.1 Cold Water Basin: The cold water basin shall be
constructed of heavy-gauge, hot-dip galvanized steel.
1.3 Corrosion Resistant Construction: Unless otherwise Standard accessories shall include circular access doors,
noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural large-area, lift-out hot-dip galvanized steel strainers with
members shall be constructed of heavy-gauge, G-235 perforated openings sized smaller than water distribution
(Z700 metric) hot-dip galvanized steel with all cut edges nozzle orifices, an integral anti-vortexing hood to prevent
given a protective coating of zinc-rich compound. air entrainment, and a bronze make-up valve with large
diameter plastic float, arranged for easy adjustment.
(Alternate) 1.3 Corrosion Resistant Construction: Unless
otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and (Alternate) 2.1 Stainless Steel Cold Water Basin: All steel
structural members shall be protected with the components in the cold water basin below the overflow
BALTIBOND® Corrosion Protection System. The system level and in contact with the basin water shall be made of
shall consist of G-235 (Z700 metric) hot-dip galvanized Series 300 stainless steel. All other steel panels and
steel prepared in a four-step (clean, pre-treat, rinse, dry) structural elements shall be made from heavy-gauge
process with an electrostatically sprayed, thermosetting, G-235 (Z700 metric) hot-dip galvanized steel, with cut
hybrid polymer fuse-bonded to the substrate during a ther- edges given a protective coating of zinc-rich compound.
mally activated curing stage and monitored by a
2.2 Water Distribution System: Hot water distribution basin
23-step quality assurance program. Coatings other than
shall be open gravity type and constructed of heavy-
the BALTIBOND® Corrosion Protection System must be
gauge, G-235 (Z700 metric) hot-dip galvanized steel.
submitted to the engineer for pre-approval. Approved
Basin weirs and plastic metering orifices shall be provided
equals must have undergone testing, resulting in the fol-
to assure even distribution of water over the fill surface.
lowing results as a minimum:
Lift-off distribution covers shall be constructed of heavy-
1. When X-scribed to the steel substrate it shall be able
gauge, G-235 (Z700 metric) hot-dip galvanized steel.
to withstand 6000 hours of 5% salt spray per ASTM
B117 without blistering, chipping, or loss of adhesion; 3.0 Mechanical Equipment
2. When X-scribed to the steel substrate it shall be able
to withstand 6000 hours of exposure to acidic 3.1 Fan(s): Fan(s) shall be heavy-duty, axial flow type. Air
(pH=4.0) and alkaline (pH=11.0) water solutions at shall be forced into the tower through a fan cylinder
95ºF (35ºC) without signs of chemical attack; designed for streamlined air entry and minimum fan blade
3. Shall withstand impact of 160 in-lbs per ASTM tip clearance for maximum fan efficiency.
D2794 without fracture or delamination of the
polymer layer;

D68
3.2 Bearings: Fan(s) shall be mounted directly on the 5.0 Accessories

motor shaft or mounted on a horizontal solid steel shaft
5.1 Basin Heater(s): The cooling tower cold water basin
supported by two heavy-duty, self-aligning, relubricatable
shall be provided with electric heater(s) to prevent freezing
ball bearings with cast iron housings and designed for
in low ambient conditions. The heater(s) shall be selected
minimum L10 life of 40,000 hours (280,000 Hr. Avg. Life).
to maintain 40°F (4.4°C) basin water temperatures at
Extended lubrication lines are provided for ease of
_____°F (°C) ambient. The heater(s) shall be
maintenance.
______V/____phase/___Hz electric and shall be provided
with low water cutout and thermostat.
3.3 Fan Drive: Fan(s) shall be direct driven or driven by
V-belts designed for not less than 150% of motor
5.2 Basin Water Level Control: The cooling tower
Open Cooling Towers

nameplate horsepower. Drives and all moving parts shall
manufacturer shall provide an electric water level control
be protected by removable steel screens that shall ship
(EWLC) system. The system shall consist of water level
installed on the unit.
sensing and control units in quantities and locations as
indicated on the drawings. Each water level sensing and
3.4 Fan Motor(s): Fan motor(s) shall be totally enclosed
control unit shall consist of the following: NEMA 4
fan cooled (TEFC), reversible, squirrel cage, ball bearing
enclosure with gasketed access cover; solid state controls
type, designed specifically for cooling tower service. The
including all necessary relays and contacts to achieve the
motor shall be furnished with special moisture protection
specified sequence of operation; stainless steel water level
on winding, shafts and bearings and labeled specifically
sensing electrodes with bronze holder; Schedule 40 PVC
for “Cooling Tower Duty.”
standpipe assembly with vent holes, and all necessary
(Alternate) 3.4 Fan Motor(s): Fan motor(s) shall be totally stainless steel mounting hardware. Provide PVC union
enclosed fan cooled (TEFC), reversible, squirrel cage, ball directly below the control enclosure to facilitate the
bearing type, designed specifically for cooling tower removal and access of electrodes and control enclosure.
service. The motor shall be furnished with special
The number and position of water level sensing electrodes
moisture protection on winding, shafts and bearings and
shall be provided to sense the following: high water level,
labeled specifically for “Cooling Tower Duty.” Fan motors
low water leve, high water alarm level, low water alarm
shall be inverter duty type designed per NEMA Standard
level, and heater safety cutout.
MG1, Section IV, Part 31.
5.3 Vibration Cutout Switch: Provide a mechanical local
3.5 Mechanical Equipment Warranty: The fan(s), fan
reset vibration switch. The mechanical vibration cutout
shaft(s), bearings, mechanical equipment support and fan
switch shall be guaranteed to trip at a point so as not to
motor shall be warranted against defects in materials and
cause damage to the cooling tower. To ensure this, the
workmanship for a period of five (5) years from date of
trip point will be set in a frequency range of 0 to 3,600
shipment.
RPM and a trip point of 0.2 to 2.0 g’s.
4.0 Fill and Drift Eliminators (Alternate) 5.4 Vibration Cutout Switch: Provide an
electronic remote reset vibration switch with contact for
4.1 Fill and Drift Eliminators: The fill and integral drift
BAS monitoring. Wiring shall be by the installing
eliminators shall be formed from self-extinguishing
contractor. The electronic vibration cutout switch shall be
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) having a flame spread rating of 5
set to trip at a point so as not to cause damage to the
per ASTM E84 and shall be impervious to rot, decay, and
cooling tower. To ensure this, the trip point will be set in a
fungus or biological attack. The fill shall be suitable for
frequency range of 2 to 1000 Hertz and a trip point of 0.45
entering water temperatures up to and including 125°F
in/sec (0.0114 m/sec).
(51.7°C). The fill shall be manufactured and performance
tested by the cooling tower manufacturer to provide single
source responsibility and assure control of the final
product.
4.1 Fill and Drift Eliminators: The fill and integral drift
eliminators shall be formed from self-extinguishing
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) having a flame spread rating of 5
per ASTM E84 and shall be impervious to rot, decay, and
fungus or biological attack. The high temperature fill shall
be suitable for entering water temperatures up to and
including 140°F (60.0°C). The fill shall be manufactured
and performance tested by the cooling tower manufacturer
to provide single source responsibility and assure control
of the final product.

D69

(VFD) specifically configurated shall be provided for each
fan motor. The supplier of the VFD shall be the
manufacturer of the evaporative cooling equipment. The
VFD shall have a 3-contactor bypass, 3% input line
reactor, a removable keypad, an RS232 terminal for PC
connection, and a circuit breaker disconnect. Fuse
protection will not be accepted. Control voltage shall be
24V to minimize the size of the enclosure which should not
exceed _____ ft (mm) x _____ ft (mm) x ____ ft (mm) and
FXT
the weight should not exceed ____ lbs. VFD shall be

provided in a NEMA (1)(3R)(12) enclosure. The VFD shall
be compatible with a (ModBus) (LonWorks) (Johnson N2)
Building Automation System.
OR

provided for each cell of the evaporative cooling equip-
ment. The panel shall include full voltage, non-reversing
(FVNR) fan motor and pump motor (if applicable) starters
in a common enclosure. The panel shall be provided with a
main circuit breaker disconnect and a separate circuit
breaker for each motor or speed. Fuse protection will not
be accepted. Panels containing basin heaters shall have
an Earth Leakage Breaker containing ground fault
protection. Starters above 25 A shall be NEMA rated.
IEC starters will be accepted for motors below 25 A. Panel
shall include a 120V/60Hz control power transformer,
Hand-Off-Auto switches for each starter or contactor, and
pilot lights for each component. Enclosed controls shall be
provided in a NEMA (1)(3R)(4)(4X)(12) enclosure.Optional
enclosed control features: (A temperature sensor shall be
provided with the enclosed controls.)(A temperature
controller shall be provided with the enclosed controls.)
(A basin heater contactor with circuit breaker shall be pro-
vided.)(A vibration cutout switch input shall be provided.)
5.5 Safety Switch(es ): A heavy-duty, non-fusible safety

disconnect switch shall be provided by the manufacturer of
the evaporative cooling equipment. Switch shall be single-
throw, 3-pole design, rated up to 600 VAC. Switch shall
have triple padlocking capability, a visible double break
rotary blade mechanism, a clearly visible On/Off handle,
an interlocking mechanism to prevent door opening with
handle in On position, and a clear line shield. Safety
switch shall be provided in a NEMA (1)(3R)(12) enclosure.

D70
Series V
Open Cooling Towers
Open Cooling Towers

Product Detail
Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D73
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D79

D71
Series V Cooling Towers

12 – 1,335 Nominal Tons
36 – 4,005 GPM at 95ºF/85ºF/78ºF
Series V
Series V Cooling Towers deliver independently verified, fully rated thermal performance over a wide range of
flow and temperature requirements. The Series V can be installed indoors and is available in a low profile
version to accommodate limited ceiling or enclosure heights. It is also suitable for high temperature
applications with entering water temperatures of up to 170ºF. The Series V minimizes sound levels and
installation costs, provides year-round operating reliability, and simplifies maintenance requirements.
Series V Cooling Towers

• Suitable for indoor and outdoor installations
• Low profile models available
• Suitable for high temperature applications
• Low sound

D72
Open Cooling Towers

D73
Benefits
Installation and Application Flexibility
• Indoor Installations – Centrifugal fans can overcome the static pressure imposed by external
ductwork, allowing the Series V to be installed indoors.
Series V
• Low Profile Models - Motors and drives of low

profile units are adjacent to the casing section to
yield models suitable for use in height sensitive
installations. Low profile models are available in
capacities from 16 to 272 nominal tons, which
correspond to heights of 5’ 1-1/4” and
8’ 1-13/16”, respectively.
• High Temperature Applications – A range of fill

and construction options are available to Low profile unit shown in contrast
accommodate entering water temperatures of up to a standard unit
to 170ºF.
Low Sound
• Centrifugal Fan - Centrifugal fans have inherently low sound characteristics.
• Single Air Inlet - Sound-sensitive areas can be accommodated by facing the quiet
blank-off panel to the sound-sensitive direction.

Evaporative Cooling Equipment - Minimizes the energy consumption of the entire system
because it provides lower operating temperatures. The owner saves money while conserving natural
resources and reducing environmental impact.
Low Installed Cost

• Support – All models mount directly on two parallel I-beams and ship complete with motors
and drives factory-installed and aligned.
• Modular Design – Large models ship in multiple sections to minimize the size and weight of the
heaviest lift, allowing for the use of smaller, less costly cranes.

D74
Easy Maintenance
Internal Access - The interior of the unit is easily

accessible for adjusting the float valve, cleaning the
strainer or flushing the basin.
Open Cooling Towers

The water level control is easily
Reliable Year-Round Operation reached from the access door
V-Belt Drive – The fans, motor, and drive system are located outside of the moist
discharge airstream, protecting them from moisture, condensation and icing.
Backed by a five-year fan drive and motor warranty, these units are suitable for
year-round operation.
External V-Belt drive system (shown here with panel removed)
Long Service Life
Materials of Construction – Various materials are available to meet the corrosion resistance,
unit operating life, and budgetary requirements of any project (see page D77 for construction options).

D75
VT0 and VT1 Models
8
Series V
4 1
Upper Section:
VT0 & VT1 Models
6
2
Lower Section:
VT0 & VT1 Models

D76
8
1
4
3 5
Open Cooling Towers

2
VTL Models
1 Heavy-Duty Construction 5 BACount® Fill

• G-235 (Z700 metric) hot-dip galvanized steel • Polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
panels • Impervious to rot, decay and biological attack
2 Fan Drive System
• V-belt drive 6 Strainer
• Heavy-duty bearings (280,000 hour • Anti-vortexing design to prevent
average life) air entrainment
• Five-year motor and drive 7 Access Door
warranty
• Circular access door
3 Low Sound Centrifugal Fan(s) 8 Drift Eliminators

• Quiet operation
• Schedule 40 PVC spray header and branches
• Assembled in easy to handle sections
• Large orifice, non-clog nozzles
• Grommetted for easy removal

D77

Steel panels and structural elements are constructed of heavy-gauge G-235 hot-dip galvanized steel.
Series V

A Series 300 stainless steel cold water basin is provided. This option is available on VT0 and VT1
models only. See the “Optional Water-Contact Stainless Steel Cold Water Basin” for VTL models.
Steel panels and structural elements are constructed of Series 300 stainless steel.
• Optional Water-Contact Stainless Steel Cold Water Basin:
A cost effective alternative to an all stainless steel cold water basin, critical components in the cold
water basin are provided in Series 300 stainless steel. The remaining components are constructed of
the base material of construction (galvanized steel or the BALTIBOND® Corrosion Protection
System).
• Optional Water-Contact Stainless Steel Construction:
A cost effective alternative to all stainless steel construction, only components in the cooling tower
that are exposed to the recirculating water are provided in Series 300 stainless steel. The remaining
components are constructed of the base material of construction (galvanized steel or the
BALTIBOND® Corrosion Protection System).

Series V Cooling Towers are available with Factory Mutual (FM) Approved construction as an option.
Fan Drive System

atmosphere. Dynamically balanced, forwardly curved, centrifugal fans driven by matched V-belts with
taper lock sheaves designed for not less than 150% of the motor nameplate horsepower are standard
on the Series V. Cooling tower duty fan motors, custom engineered for BAC to provide maximum
performance for cooling tower service, are provided and backed by BAC’s comprehensive five-year
motor and fan drive warranty.

D78

approximately 2/3 speed and consumes only 1/3 the
design horsepower. This configuration allows the
Open Cooling Towers

system to be operated like a two-speed motor, but
with the reserve capacity of a standby motor in the
event of failure. As a minimum, approximately 70%
capacity will be available from the low horsepower
motor, even on a design wet-bulb day. Controls and ENERGY-MISER® Fan System
wiring are the same as those required for a two-speed, two-winding motor. Significant energy savings
are achieved when operating at low speed during periods of reduced load and/or low wet-bulb
temperatures.

by adding a VFD to the smaller motor. Using the VFD on the smaller fan motor, as opposed to the
Unit with intake and discharge sound attenuation

The low sound levels generated by Series V Cooling Towers make them suitable for most installations.
For situations when one direction is particularly sound-sensitive, the unit can be oriented so that the side
opposite the air inlet faces the sound-sensitive direction. The Series V is also available with factory
designed, tested and rated sound attenuation for both the air intake and discharge.

D79
Accessories
External Access Options
(VT0 and VT1 Models Only)
VT0 and VT1 models can be furnished with ladders extending from the top of the unit to the base, as
well as safety cages, safety gates and handrail packages to meet OSHA requirements. All access to
Series V
the top of the equipment must be made in accordance with applicable government occupational safety
standards.
NOTE: When these access options are employed, the tower must be equipped with steel drift eliminators.

A factory mounted vibration cutout switch is available to
effectively protect against equipment failure due to excessive
vibration of the mechanical equipment system. BAC can
provide either a mechanical or solid-state electronic vibration
cutout switch in a NEMA 4 enclosure to ensure reliable
protection. Additional contacts can be provided to either
switch type to activate an alarm.
Basin Heaters Vibration cutout switch

of the water in the cold water basin when the unit is idle. Factory installed electric immersion heaters,
protection.

Model Number
No. of Heaters kW per Heater No. of Heaters kW per Heater
VTL-016-E thru 039-H 1 2 1 2
VTL-045-H thru 079-K 1 3 1 4
VTL-082-K thru 095-K 1 4 1 5
VTL-103-K thru 137-M 1 5 1 7
VTL-152-M thru 227-O 1 7 1 9
VTL-245-P thru 272-P 1 9 1 12
VT0-12-E thru 57-K 1 2 1 2
VT0-65-J thru 88-L 1 2 1 3
VT0-102-L thru 176-O 1 3 1 5
VT1-N209-P thru N255-P 1 5 1 7.5
VT1-N301-Q thru N395-R 1 7 1 10
VT1-N418-P thru N510-P 2 5 2 7.5
VT1-275-P thru 415-R 1 8 1 10
VT1-416-O thru 600-P 1 12 2 7.5
VT1-550-P thru 830-R 2 8 2 10
VT1-825-P thru 1335-S 3 8 3 10

D80

makeup valve when more precise water level control is required.
This package consists of a conductance-actuated level control
mounted in the basin and a solenoid activated valve in the
make-up water line. The valve is slow closing to minimize water
hammer.
Open Cooling Towers

Extended lubrication lines with grease fittings located outside the Electric water level control package
fan section are available for lubrication of the fan shaft bearings.

Optional high temperature fill materials are available to increase the maximum allowable entering water
temperature to 170°F (76.7°C). Refer to page D94 for more detailed information.
Bottom Screens (VT0 and VT1 Models Only)

Wire mesh screens are available factory-installed over the bottom openings to prevent unauthorized
access.

Basin sweeper piping provides an effective method of preventing sediment from collecting in the cold
water basin of the tower. A complete system, is provided in the tower basin for connection to side
stream filtration equipment (by others). For more information on filtration systems see page M159.
Capacity Control Dampers

Modulating capacity control dampers are available to provide
better leaving water temperature control than can be obtained
from fan cycling alone. A standard electrical control package for
dampers is available.
Solid Bottom Panels

Factory-installed bottom panels are required when intake air is
ducted to the unit. Discharge hoods
Discharge Hoods
Discharge hoods reduce the risk of recirculation in tight enclosures by increasing discharge air velocity,
and can be used to elevate the tower discharge above adjacent walls to comply with layout guidelines.
Equipment Controls
BAC control panels are specifically designed to work seamlessly with all BAC units and engineered to
meet you particular application. For more on BAC Equipment Controls, see pages G1-G13.

D81
VTL Engineering Data

VTL Models
Series V
4ʻ0” 2ʻ11-5/16” 5ʻ11-5/8”

2ʻ0” 2-1/4” 3“
INLET
H
ACCESS
ACCESS
H
A
1" MAKE-UP 5ʻ10-5/8”
1" MAKE-UP
4ʻ11-7/8” 11-5/8” OVERFLOW
4-9/16”
1ʻ8” OVERFLOW
1ʻ8”
SUCTION
11-5/8”
3“ 2ʻ6-5/8”
7-3/4”
2-1/4” 3ʻ8-5/8” 2-5/8”
4ʻ1-1/4” 7-5/8” 2-5/8” 5ʻ1-3/4” 2" DRAIN
2ʻ 3-3/4” 2" DRAIN

10ʼ11-3/4”
7ʻ 0-3/4”
Models Models Models
VTL-016-E to 137-M VTL-016-E to 039-H VTL-045-H to 079-K
8ʻ11-7/16” 11ʼ11-5/8”
4-1/8” 4-1/8”
H
H ACCESS
ACCESS
1" MAKE-UP 5ʻ10-5/8”

1" MAKE-UP 5ʻ10-5/8” 11-5/8” OVERFLOW
11-5/8” OVERFLOW 1ʻ8”
1ʻ8”
8ʻ6-5/8”
5ʻ6-7/16” 4ʻ1/8” 9ʻ8-5/8” 2-5/8”
4ʻ1/8” 6ʻ8-7/16” 2-5/8” 10ʼ3-11/16” 2" DRAIN
7ʻ3-5/8” 2" DRAIN 17ʼ11-3/4”

14ʼ11-9/16”
Models VTL-082-K to 095-K Models VTL-103-K to 137-M
Model Nominal Airflow Weights (lbs) Dimensions Connections2

Motor HP3
Number Tonnage4 (CFM) Operating1 Shipping A H Inlet Outlet Overflow
VTL-016-E 16 1.5 7,680 1,620 1,100 4’0-3/4” 5’1-1/4” 3” 3” 2”
VTL-021-F 21 2 8,150 1,660 1,140 4’0-3/4” 5’1-1/4” 3” 3” 2”
VTL-027-F 27 2 7,370 1,740 1,220 5’7” 6’6-1/4” 3” 3” 2”
VTL-030-G 30 3 8,270 1,770 1,250 5’7” 6’6-1/4” 3” 3” 2”
VTL-034-H 34 5 9,420 1,810 1,290 5’7” 6’6-1/4” 3” 3” 2”
VTL-039-H 39 5 8,860 1,910 1,390 7’1-5/16” 8’1-13/16” 3” 3” 2”
VTL-045-H 45 5 16,910 2,710 1,650 4’0-3/4” 5’1-1/4” 4” 4” 2”
VTL-051-G 51 3 13,350 2,810 1,750 5’7” 6’6-1/4” 4” 4” 2”
VTL-059-H 59 5 15,490 2,830 1,770 5’7” 6’6-1/4” 4” 4” 2”
VTL-066-J 66 7.5 17,210 2,900 1,840 5’7” 6’6-1/4” 4” 4” 2”
VTL-072-K 72 10 18,690 2,930 1,870 5’7” 6’6-1/4” 4” 4” 2”
VTL-079-K 79 10 17,500 3,100 2,040 7’1-5/16” 8’1-13/16” 4” 4” 2”
VTL-082-K 82 10 22,400 3,810 2,260 5’7” 6’6-1/4” 6” 6” 2”
VTL-092-L 92 15 24,980 3,940 2,390 5’7” 6’6-1/4” 6” 6” 2”
VTL-095-K 95 10 21,150 4,070 2,510 7’1-5/16” 8’1-11/16” 6” 6” 3”
VTL-103-K 103 10 24,990 4,740 2,680 5’7” 6’6-1/4” 6” 6” 3”
VTL-116-L 116 15 28,200 4,800 2,740 5’7” 6’6-1/4” 6” 6” 3”
VTL-126-M 126 20 30,700 4,810 2,750 5’7” 6’6-1/4” 6” 6” 3”
VTL-137-M 137 20 29,560 5,120 3,060 7’1-5/16” 8’1-13/16” 6” 6” 3”

D82
See page D92

for Engineering
Considerations.
7ʻ9-1/4”
3ʻ10-5/8” 8ʻ11-7/16”
5“
Open Cooling Towers

INLET
H
ACCESS
A
2" MAKE-UP 5ʻ10-5/8”
6-1/8” 11-5/8” OVERFLOW
1ʻ8”
3ʻ11-1/4” 5ʻ6-7/16”
7ʻ10-1/2” 5“ 6ʻ8-7/16” 2-5/8”
7ʻ3-5/8” 2" DRAIN
14ʼ11-9/16”
Models Models VTL-152-M to 227-O
VTL-152-M to 272-P
11ʼ11-5/8”
5“
H
ACCESS
2" MAKE-UP 5ʻ10-7/8”

11-5/8” OVERFLOW
1ʻ8”
8ʻ6-5/8”
5“ 9ʻ8-5/8” 2-5/8”
10ʼ3-11/16” 2" DRAIN
17ʼ11-3/4”
Models VTL-245-P to 272-P
Nominal Weights (lbs) Dimensions Connections2

Model Number Motor HP3 Airflow (CFM)
Tonnage4 Operating1 Shipping A H Inlet Outlet Overflow
VTL-152-M 152 20 45,870 6,580 3,440 4’ 0-3/4” 5’ 1-1/4” 8” 8” 3”
VTL-171-L 171 15 39,940 6,820 3,680 5’7” 6’ 6-1/4” 8” 8” 3”
VTL-185-M 185 20 43,150 6,960 3,820 5’7” 6’ 6-1/4” 8” 8” 3”
VTL-198-N 198 25 46,090 7,000 3,860 5’7” 6’ 6-1/4” 8” 8” 3”
VTL-209-O 209 30 48,630 7,040 3,900 5’7” 6’ 6-1/4” 8” 8” 3”
VTL-227-O 227 30 46,550 7,470 4,300 7’ 1-5/16” 8’ 1-13/16” 8” 8” 3”
VTL-245-P 245 40 58,820 8,970 4,790 5’7” 6’ 6-1/4” 8” 8” 3”
VTL-272-P 272 40 56,760 9,490 5,310 5’7” 6’ 6-1/4” 8” 8” 3”
Notes:
1. Operating weight is for the tower with the water level in the cold water basin at overflow.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, all connections 6" and smaller are MPT. Connections 8" and larger are beveled for welding.
3. Fan horsepower is at 0” external static pressure.
4. Nominal tons of cooling represents 3 GPM of water from a 95ºF to 85ºF at a 78ºF entering wet-bulb temperature.

D83
VT0 Engineering Data

VT0 Models 21-1/8”

3ʻ6-1/4”
4“ 3ʻ-1/4” 2-1/4” 4“ 6ʻ0” 2-1/4” 4“ 8ʻ11-3/4” 2-1/4
Series V
WATER IN
1" MAKE-UP
H
OVERFLOW
3ʻ8-1/8”
3ʻ3”
26-1/8” WATER OUT
2" DRAIN M M M
B
8-3/8”
4-1/2” 36” 4-1/2” 6ʻ0” 4-1/2” 8ʻ11-3/4”
2-1/4”
Models
4-1/8” Models Models Models
17-1/4”
VT0-12-E to 116-M 30”
VT0-12-E to 28-H VT0-32-H to 57-K VT0-65-J to 88-L
3ʻ11-1/2”
4ʻ9-7/8” 3ʻ-1/4” 11ʼ11-3/4”
4“ 11ʼ11-3/4” 2-1/4” 5ʻ11-7/8”
WATER IN
1" MAKE-UP
H ACCESS
5ʻ4-1/2” OVERFLOW
4ʻ1-1/2”
WATER OUT
3ʻ-1”
2" DRAIN
B
M
15-3/4” M
2-1/2”
4-1/2” 12ʼ0” 5-5/8” 5-1/2” 11ʼ11-1/2”
Models 18-1/4”
Models VT0-102-L to 116-M VT0-132-L to 176-O Models VT0-132-L to 176-O
30-1/2”
4ʻ8-5/8”
Model Nominal Weights (lbs) Dimensions Connections2

Motor HP3 Airflow (CFM)
Number Tonnage4 Operating 1
Shipping H A B Inlet Outlet Overflow
VT0-12-E 12 1.5 4,970 960 790 7’ 6-1/8” 6’ 7-7/8” 12-7/8” 3” 3” 2”
VT0-14-F 14 2 5,460 970 800 7’ 6-1/8” 6’ 7-7/8” 12-7/8” 3” 3” 2”
VT0-19-G 19 3 6,190 990 820 7’ 6-1/8” 6’ 7-7/8” 12-7/8” 3” 3” 2”
VT0-24-G 24 3 5,945 1,050 950 9’ 0-1/8” 8’ 1-7/8” 12-7/8” 3” 3” 2”
VT0-28-H 28 5 6,960 1,170 970 9’ 0-1/8” 8’ 1-7/8” 12-7/8” 3” 3” 2”
VT0-32-H 32 5 11,820 1,590 1,230 7’ 6-1/8” 6’ 7-7/8” 12-7/8” 3” 3” 2”
VT0-41-J 41 7.5 13,435 1,650 1,290 7’ 6-1/8” 6’ 7-7/8” 12-7/8” 3” 3” 2”
VT0-52-J 52 7.5 12,960 1,780 1,540 9’ 0-1/8” 8’ 1-7/8” 12-7/8” 3” 3” 2”
VT0-57-K 57 10 14,180 1, 790 1,550 9’ 0-1/8” 8’ 1-7/8” 12-7/8” 3” 3” 2”
VT0-65-J 65 7.5 16,860 2,580 2,000 9’ 0-1/8” 8’ 1-7/8” 12-7/8” 4” 4” 2”
VT0-75-K 75 10 18,435 2,590 2,010 9’ 0-1/8” 8’ 1-7/8” 12-7/8” 4” 4” 2”
VT0-78-K 78 10 17,990 2,710 2,130 10’ 6-1/8” 9’ 7-1/8” 12-7/8” 4” 4” 2”
VT0-88-L 88 15 20,420 2,770 2,190 10’ 6-1/8” 9’ 7-1/8” 12-7/8” 4” 4” 2”
VT0-102-L 102 15 25,060 3,310 2,500 9’ 0-1/8” 8’ 1-7/8” 12-7/8” 4” 4” 2”
VT0-107-L5 107 15 24,460 3,680 2,870 10 ’6-1/8” 9’ 7-1/8” 12-7/8” 4” 4” 2”
VT0-116-M5 116 20 26,670 3,740 2,930 10’ 6-1/8” 9’ 7-1/8” 12-7/8” 4” 4” 2”
VT0-132-L 132 15 30,600 5,190 3,820 11’ 9-1/8” 10’ 9-7/8” 23-1/4” 6” 6” 3”
VT0-145-M 145 20 33,670 5,200 3,830 11’ 9-1/8” 10’ 9-7/8” 23-1/4” 6” 6” 3”
VT0-155-N 155 25 36,240 5,250 3,880 11’ 9-1/8” 10’ 9-7/8” 23-1/4” 6” 6” 3”
VT0-166-N5 166 25 35,265 5,650 4,280 13’ 3-1/8” 12’ 3-7/8” 23-1/4” 6” 6” 3”
VT0-176-O5 176 30 37,330 5,680 4,310 13’ 3-1/8” 12’ 3-7/8” 23-1/4” 6” 6” 3”

D84

Models VT1-N209-P to VT1-N510-P
Open Cooling Towers

7ʻ9-1/4” 7/8” 11ʼ11-3/4”
5ʻ11-7/8”
INLET
H 6ʻ8-3/4”
2" MAKE-UP
ACCESS
3" OVERFLOW
4ʻ2”
WATER OUT
2" DRAIN
B M
33-1/2” 6-5/8” 4ʻ 11ʼ7-3/4”

4-3/4”
8-3/4”
Models 37ʼ5-8” Models VT1-N209-P to N255-P
VT1-N209-P to N510-P
7ʻ10-3/8”
18ʼ0-1/8” 24ʼ0-1/2”
9ʻ0-1/16” 5ʻ11-7/8” 5ʻ11-7/8”
INLET INLET INLET
M M M
4“ 17ʼ8-1/8” 4“ 23ʼ8-1/2”
Models VT1-N301-Q to N395-R Models VT1-N418-P to N510-P
Weights (lbs) Dimensions Connections2

Model Nominal Heaviest
Airflow (CFM) Shipping
Number Tonnage4 Motor HP3 Operating1 Section H A B Outlet Overflow
VT1-N209-P 209 40 66,300 9,180 5,350 3,300 11’ 3-3/8” 10’ 7-5/8” 12” 8” 8”
VT1-N220-O 220 30 53,100 9,490 5,660 3,110 13’ 2-1/8” 12’ 4-5/8” 12” 8” 8”
VT1-N240-P 240 40 57,950 9,680 5,850 3,300 13’ 2-1/8” 12’ 4-5/8” 12” 8” 8”
VT1-N255-P 255 40 55,900 10,380 6,550 3,300 14’ 6-7/8” 13’ 9-3/8” 12” 8” 8”
VT1-N301-Q 301 50 86,150 13,380 7,530 4,590 11’ 3-3/8” 10’ 7-5/8” 12” 8” 8”
VT1-N325-P 325 40 77,450 14,110 8,260 4,550 13’ 2-1/8” 12’ 4-5/8” 12” 8” 8”
VT1-N346-Q 346 50 83,050 14,150 8,300 4,590 13’ 2-1/8” 12’ 4-5/8” 12” 8” 8”
VT1-N370-Q5 370 50 80,150 15,130 9,280 4,690 14’ 6-7/8” 13’ 9-3/8” 12” 8” 8”
VT1-N395-R 395 60 84,750 15,250 9,400 4,710 14’ 6-7/8” 13’ 9-3/8” 12” 8” 8”
VT1-N418-P 418 (2) 40 120,600 18,490 10,680 6,580 11’ 3-3/8” 10’ 7-5/8” 11” (2) 8” 10”
VT1-N440-O 440 (2) 30 106,200 19,110 11,300 6,200 13’ 2-1/8” 12’ 4-5/8” 11” (2) 8” 10”
VT1-N480-P 480 (2) 40 115,900 19,490 11,680 6,580 13’ 2-1/8” 12’ 4-5/8” 11” (2) 8” 10”
VT1-N510-P 510 (2) 40 111,800 20,890 13,080 6,580 14’ 6-7/8” 13’ 9-3/8” 11” (2) 8” 10”
Notes:
3. Fan horsepower is at 0” external static pressure.
1. Operating weight is for the tower with the water level in the cold
water basin at overflow. 4. Nominal tons of cooling respresents 3 GPM of water from a
95ºF to 85ºF at a 78ºF entering wet-bulb temperature.
5. Unit’s casing section is the heaviest section.
MPT. Connections 8" and larger are beveled for welding.

D85

Models VT1-275-P to VT1-1335-S

Series V
11ʼ 8-3/4” 7/8” 11ʼ11-3/4”

5ʻ11-7/8”
INLET
8ʻ4” MAKE-UP
3" OVERFLOW
ACCESS
3ʻ 4-7/16” WATER OUT
2" DRAIN
M
B
4“ 11ʼ7-3/4”
6-5/8” 3-3/8”
2ʻ 9-1/16”
Models VT1-275-P to 415-R
Models
VT1-275-P to 600-P 4-3/4”
27-1/8”
18ʼ0-1/8”
5ʻ 5-1/4” 9ʻ0-1/16”
11ʼ 10” INLET
M M
4“ 17ʼ8-1/8”
Models VT1-416-O to 600-P
Weights (lbs) Dimensions Connections

Number Tonnage4 Motor HP3 Airflow (CFM) Operating1 Shipping Section H A B Inlet Outlet Make-up
VT1-275-P 275 40 82,350 15,190 8,040 5,140 12’ 10-5/8” 12’ 2-7/8” 14-1/2” 8” 8” 2”
VT1-307-O 307 30 74,350 15,780 8,630 4,950 14’ 9-3/8” 13’ 11-7/8” 14-1/2” 8” 8” 2”
VT1-340-P 340 40 81,550 15,970 8,820 5,140 14’ 9-3/8” 13’ 11-7/8” 14-1/2” 8” 8” 2”
VT1-375-P 375 40 79,300 16,940 9,790 5,140 16’ 2-1/8” 15’ 4-5/8” 14-1/2” 8” 8” 2”
VT1-400-Q 400 50 85,150 16,980 9.830 5,180 16’ 2-1/8” 15’ 4-5/8” 14-1/2” 8” 8” 2”
VT1-415-R 415 60 90,250 17,100 9,950 5,300 16’ 2-1/8” 15’ 4-5/8” 14-1/2” 8” 8” 2”
VT1-416-O 416 (2) 30 125,046 22,430 11,530 7,280 12’ 10-5/8” 12’ 2-7/8” 13-1/2” 10” 10” 2”
VT1-478-N 478 (2) 25 116,150 23,600 12,700 7,240 14’ 9-3/8” 13’ 11-7/8” 13-1/2” 10” 10” 2”
VT1-507-O 507 (2) 30 123,150 23,640 12,740 7,280 14’ 9-3/8” 13’ 11-7/8” 13-1/2” 10” 10” 2”
VT1-560-O 560 (2) 30 119,750 25,080 14,180 7,280 16’ 2-1/8” 15’ 3-5/8” 13-1/2” 10” 10” 2”
VT1-600-P 600 (2) 40 131,250 25,460 14,560 7,660 16’ 2-1/8” 15’ 3-5/8” 13-1/2” 10” 10” 2”

D86
See page D92

for Engineering
Considerations.
11ʼ 8-3/4” 7/8”

24 0-1/2”
5 11-7/8” 5 11-7/8”
INLET INLET
Open Cooling Towers

A
8ʻ4” MAKE-UP
3" OVERFLOW
ACCESS
3ʻ 4-7/16”
WATER OUT
2" DRAIN
B
M M
6-5/8” 3-3/8”
2ʻ 9-1/16” 4 23 8-1/2”
Models
4-3/4” Models VT1-550-P to 830-R
VT1-550-P to 1355-S
27-1/8”
5ʻ 5-1/4”
11ʼ 10” 36ʼ1-1/4”
18ʼ0-5/8”
5ʻ11-7/8” 5ʻ11-7/8”
INLET INLET INLET
M M M
4“ 35ʼ9-1/4” 4“
Models VT1-825-P to 1335-S
Weights (lbs) Dimensions Connections

Number Tonnage4 Motor HP3 Airflow (CFM) Operating1 Shipping Section H A B Inlet Outlet Make-up
VT1-550-P 550 (2) 40 165,060 30,590 16,020 10,220 12’ 10-5/8” 12’ 2-7/8” 12-1/2” (2) 8” 12” 2”
VT1-680-P 680 (2) 40 163,100 32,150 17,580 10,220 14’ 9-3/8” 13’ 11-7/8” 12-1/2” (2) 8” 12” 2”
VT1-750-P 750 (2) 40 158,600 34,090 19,520 10,220 16’ 2-1/8” 15’ 4-5/8” 12-1/2” (2) 8” 12” 2”
VT1-800-Q 800 (2) 50 170,300 34,170 19,600 10,300 16’ 2-1/8” 15’ 4-5/8” 12-1/2” (2) 8” 12” 2”
VT1-830-R 830 (2) 60 180,500 34,410 19,840 10,540 16’ 2-1/8” 15’ 4-5/8” 12-1/2” (2) 8” 12” 2”
VT1-825-P 825 (3) 40 247,590 45,980 24,000 15,300 12’ 10-5/8” 12’ 2-7/8” 13-1/2” (3) 8” (2) 10” 3”
VT1-921-O 921 (3) 30 223,050 47,750 25,770 14,730 14’ 9-3/8” 13’ 11-7/8” 13-1/2” (3) 8” (2) 10” 3”
VT1-1020-P 1020 (3) 40 244,650 48,320 26,340 15,300 14’ 9-3/8” 13’ 11-7/8” 13-1/2” (3) 8” (2) 10” 3”
VT1-1125-P 1125 (3) 40 237,900 51,230 29,250 15,300 16’ 2-1/8” 15’ 4-5/8” 13-1/2” (3) 8” (2) 10” 3”
VT1-1200-Q 1200 (3) 50 255,450 51,350 29,370 15,420 16’ 2-1/8” 15’ 3-5/8” 13-1/2” (3) 8” (2) 10” 3”
VT1-1245-R 1245 (3) 60 270,750 51,710 29,730 15,780 16’ 2-1/8” 15’ 3-5/8” 13-1/2” (3) 8” (2) 10” 3”
VT1-1335-S 1335 (3) 75 290,550 51,770 29,790 15,840 16’ 2-1/8” 15’ 4-5/8” 13-1/2” (3) 8” (2) 10” 3”
Notes:
1. Operating weight is for tower with water level in the cold water 4. Fans on models VT1-416 through 600 must be cycled
basin at overflow. simultaneously for capacity control. For additional steps of control
beyond on/off operation, a variable frequency drive, the ENERGY-
2. Unless otherwise indicated, all connections 6" and smaller are MISER® Fan System, or two-speed motors are recommended.
MPT. Connections 8" and larger are beveled for welding.
5. Nominal tons of cooling represents 3 GPM of water from a 95ºF to
3. Fan horsepower is at 0” external static pressure. 85ºF at a 78ºF entering wet-bulb temperature.

D87
Structural Support
The recommended support arrangement for the Series V Cooling Tower consists of parallel I-beams
running the full length of the unit, spaced as shown in the following drawing. Besides providing
adequate support, the steel also serves to raise the unit above any solid foundation to ensure access
to the bottom of the tower. To support a Series V Cooling Tower in an alternate steel support
Series V
arrangement, consult your local BAC Representative.
All VTL Models
All VT0 Models & VT1-N209-P thru N255-P & VT1-275-P thru 415-R
Models VT1-N301-Q thru N510-P & VT1-416-O thru 830-R

D88
Open Cooling Towers

Models VT1-825-P thru 1335-S
Model Number A B Maximum Deflection3
VTL-016-E thru 039-H 3’ 11” 4’ 6” 1/4”
VTL-045-H thru 079-K 3’ 11” 7’ 11-1/2” 3/8”
VTL-082-K thru 095-K 3’ 11” 10’ 11-1/4” 1/2”
VTL-103-K thru 137-M 3’ 11” 13’ 11-1/2” 1/2”
VTL-152-M thru 227-O 7’ 8-1/4” 10’ 11-1/4” 1/2”
VTL-245-P thru 272-P 7’ 8-1/4” 13’ 11-1/2” 1/2”
VT0-12-E thru 28-H 3’ 9-3/8” 2’ 5-1/2” 3/32”
VT0-32-H thru 57-K 3’ 9-3/8” 5’ 5-1/2” 3/16”
VT0-65-J thru 88-L 3’ 9-3/8” 8’ 5-1/4” 5/16”
VT0-102-L thru 116-M 3’ 9-3/8” 11’ 5-1/2” 3/8”
VT0-132-L thru 176-O 4’ 6-1/4” 11’ 5-1/2” 3/8”
VT1-N209-P thru N255-P 7’ 7-5/8” 10’ 7-1/2” 3/8”
VT1-N301-Q thru N395-R 7’ 7-5/8” 16’ 7-3/4” 1/2”
VT1-N418-P thru N510-P 7’ 7-5/8” 22’ 8-1/4” 1/2”
VT1-275-P thru 415-R 11’ 7-1/4” 10’ 7-1/2” 3/8”
VT1-416-O thru 600-P 11’ 7-1/4” 16’ 7-3/4” 1/2”
VT1-550-P thru 830-R 11’ 7-1/4” 22’ 8-1/4” 1/2”
VT1-825-P thru 1335-S 11’ 7-1/4” 34’ 9” 1/2”
Notes:
1. Support beams and anchor bolts are to be selected and installed by others.
3. Beams must be selected in accordance with accepted structural practice. The maximum allowable deflection of beams
under unit shall be as specified in the table above.
4. All units can be furnished with an optional vibration isolation package, if required, to be installed between the tower and
supporting steel. When determining the length of steel beams, allow for the length of vibration isolation rails, as they
may be longer than the tower length shown above.
5. If point vibration isolation is used, the isolators must be located under the supporting steel, not between the support
steel and the cooling tower.

D89
1.0 Cooling Tower 2.0 Construction Details

2.1 Structure (VT0/1 models): The cooling tower shall be
1.1 General: Furnish and install _____ factory-assembled, constructed of heavy-gauge steel utilizing double-brake flanges
forced-draft, centrifugal fan, counterflow cooling tower(s) with for maximum strength and rigidity and reliable sealing of
vertical air discharge conforming in all aspects to the watertight joints. The fill shall be removable from the basin
Series V
specifications, schedules and as shown on the plans. Overall section to facilitate shipping and handling. The fan(s) and fan
dimensions shall not exceed approximately _____ft (mm) long X drive system, including the fan motor, shall be factory mounted
______ ft (mm) wide X_____ ft (mm) high. The total connected and aligned and located in the dry entering airstream to ensure
fan horsepower shall not exceed _____ HP (kW). The cooling reliable operation and ease of maintenance.
tower(s) shall be Baltimore Aircoil Model ______.
(Alternate 2.1) Structure (VTL models): The cooling tower shall
1.2 Thermal Capacity: The cooling tower(s) shall be warranted be constructed of heavy-gauge steel utilizing double-brake
by the manufacturer to cool _____USGPM (l/s) of water from flanges for maximum strength and rigidity and reliable sealing of
_____°F (°C) to _____°F (°C) at _____°F (°C) entering wet-bulb watertight joints. The unit shall be of unitary design to minimize
temperature. Additionally, the thermal performance shall be certi- rigging requirements. The fan(s) and fan drive system, including
fied by the Cooling Technology Institute in accordance with CTI the fan motor, shall be factory mounted and aligned and located
Certification Standard STD-201. Lacking such certification, a field in the dry entering airstream to ensure reliable operation and
acceptance test shall be conducted within the warranty period in ease of maintenance.
accordance with CTI Acceptance Test Code ATC-105, by the
Cooling Technology Institute or other qualified independent third 2.2 Fill: The heat transfer section(s) shall consist of a fill, spray
party testing agency. A manufacturer’s performance water distribution system and drift eliminators arranged for
guarantee or performance bond without CTI Certification or optimal thermal performance with minimal drift.
independent field thermal performance test shall not be
accepted. 2.3 Fill: The fill shall be formed from self-extinguishing (per UL94
HB and UL94 V-0 testing) polyvinyl chloride (PVC) having a
1.3 Corrosion Resistant Construction: Unless otherwise noted in flame spread rating of 5 per ASTM E84 and shall be impervious
this specification, all steel panels and structural members shall to rot, decay, and fungus or biological attack. The fill shall be
be constructed of heavy-gauge G-235 (Z700 metric) hot-dip manufactured and performance tested by the cooling tower man-
galvanized steel with all edges given a protective coating of ufacturer to assure single source responsibility and control of the
zinc-rich compound. final product.
(Alternate 1.3) Corrosion Resistant Construction (optional): 2.4 Water Distribution System: Water shall be distributed evenly
Unless otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and over the fill by a water distribution system consisting of a header
structural members shall be protected with the BALTIBOND® and spray branches of Schedule 40 PVC pipe with large orifice,
Corrosion Protection System. The system shall consist of G-235 non-clog plastic distribution nozzles. The branches and spray
(Z700 metric) hot-dip galvanized steel prepared in a four-step nozzles shall be held in place by snap-in rubber grommets,
(clean, pre-treat, rinse, dry) process with an electrostatically allowing quick removal of individual nozzles or complete branch-
sprayed, thermosetting hybrid polymer fuse-bonded to the es for cleaning or flushing.
substrate during a thermally activated curing stage and
2.5 Cold Water Basin: The cold water basin shall be provided
monitored by a 23-step quality assurance program.
with large area lift out strainers with perforated openings sized
smaller than the water distribution system nozzles and an
(Alternate 1.3) Corrosion Resistant Construction (optional): anti-votexing device to prevent air entrainment. The strainer and
Unless otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and anti-vortexing device shall be constructed of the same material
structural members shall be constructed of Series 300 stainless as the basin to prevent dissimilar metal corrosion. Standard
steel and assembled with Series 300 stainless steel nut and bolt basin accessories shall include a brass make-up valve with large
fasteners. diameter polystyrene filled plastic float for easy adjustment of the
operating water level.
1.4 Quality Assurance: The manufacturer shall have a
Management System certified by an accredited registrar as (Alternate 2.5) Cold Water Basin: The cold water basin shall be
complying with the requirements of ISO-9001 to ensure
constructed of heavy-gauge Series 300 stainless steel panels
consistent quality of products and services. Manufacturers that
and structural members up to the heat transfer section/basin
are not ISO-9001 certified shall not be acceptable.
joint. The basin shall be provided with large area lift out strainers
1.5 Warranty: The manufacturer’s standard equipment warranty with perforated openings sized smaller than the water distribution
shall be for a period of not less than one year from date of system nozzles and an anti-vortexing device to prevent air
startup or eighteen months from date of shipment, whichever entrainment. The strainer and anti-vortexing device shall be
occurs first. In addition, the manufacturer shall warrant the constructed of the same material as the basin to prevent
rotating mechanical equipment, including fans, fan motors, fan dissimilar metal corrosion. Standard basin accessories shall
shafts, bearings, sheaves and associated supports for not less include a brass make-up valve with large diameter polystyrene
than five (5) years from date of shipment. filled plastic float for easy adjustment of the operating water
level.

D90
3.0 Mechanical Equipment 6.0 Sound

3.1 Fan(s): Fan(s) shall be dynamically balanced, forwardly 6.1 Sound Level: To maintain the quality of the local environment,
curved, centrifugal type selected to provide optimum thermal the maximum sound pressure levels (dB) measured 50 ft from
performance with minimal sound levels. Fan housings shall have the cooling tower operating at full fan speed shall not exceed the
curved inlet rings for efficient air entry and four-sided rectangular sound levels detailed below.
discharge cowls shall extend into the basin to increase fan
efficiency and prevent water from splashing into the fans. Location 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 dB(A)
Discharge
3.2 Bearings: Fan(s) and shaft(s) shall be supported by Air Inlet
heavy-duty, self-aligning, relubricatable bearings with cast iron
Cased Face
housings, designed for a minimum L10 life of 40,000 hours
Open Cooling Towers

Blank Off
(280,000 Hr. Avg. Life).
3.3 Fan Drive: The fan(s) shall be driven by matched V-belts with
taper lock sheaves designed for not less than 150% of the motor 7.0 Accessories
nameplate horsepower. Motor shall be located on a heavy-duty
motor base, adjustable by a single threaded bolt-and-nut 7.1 Vibration Isolation Rails: Spring-type vibration isolation rails,
arrangement. Removable steel screens or panels shall protect constructed of steel channels and base plates, painted with a
the fan drive and all moving parts. rust-resistant primer shall be provided to minimize vibration
transmission from the tower to the building structure. The
3.4 Fan Motor: Fan motor(s) shall be totally enclosed air over isolators shall be designed for a static deflection of 1” (25.4 mm)
(TEFL), reversible, squirrel cage, ball bearing type designed and a maximum wind speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
specifically for cooling tower service. The motor shall be
furnished with special moisture protection on windings, shafts and (Alternate) 7.1 Vibration Isolation Rails: Spring-type vibration
bearings and labeled appropriately for cooling tower duty. isolation rails, constructed of steel channels and base plates,
coated with a 0.003” (.076 mm) layer of zinc after fabrication shall
(Alternate 3.4) Fan Motor: Furnish _____ HP, ______ RPM be provided to minimize vibration transmission from the tower to
Totally Enclosed, Fan Cooled (TEFC), squirrel cage, ball bearing the building structure. The isolators shall be designed for a static
type fan motors suitable for outdoor service. Fan motor(s) shall deflection of 1” (25.4 mm) and a maximum wind speed of 50 mph
be inverter-duty type designed per NEMA Standard MG1, Section (80 km/h).
IV, and Part 31 suitable for _____ volt, ____ hertz, and ___
phase electrical service 7.2 Basin Heater(s): The cooling tower cold water basin shall be
provided with electric heater(s) to prevent freezing in low ambient
3.5 Mechanical Equipment Warranty: The fan(s), fan shaft(s), conditions. The heater(s) shall be selected to maintain 40°F
bearings, mechanical equipment support and fan motor shall be (4.4˚C) basin water temperatures at _____° F ambient. The
warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for a heater(s) shall be ______V/____phase/___Hz electric and shall
period of five (5) years from date of shipment. be provided with low water cutout and thermostat.
3.6 ENERGY-MISER® Fan System (optional): Two single speed (Alternate) 7.2 Basin Heaters: A steam coil shall be factory
fan motors, one sized for full speed and load, the other sized for installed in the cooling tower depressed sump of the cold water
2/3 speed and approximately 1/3 of full load horsepower shall be basin to prevent freezing during cold water shutdown. The steam
provided in each cell for capacity control and stand-by protection coil shall be capable of maintaining 40°F (4.4˚C) basin water
from drive or motor failure. Two-speed motor(s) are not an temperature at a –20°F (-29.9˚C) ambient temperature given
acceptable alternative. 5 psig (34Kpa) at the coil inlet connection.
(Alternate) 3.7 BALTIGUARD PLUSTM Fan System: Two single 7.3 Basin Water Level Control: The cooling tower manufacturer
speed fan motors, one sized for load, the other sized for 1/3 of shall provide an electric water level control (EWLC) system. The
the full load horsepower shall be provided in each cell for capaci- system shall consist of water level sensing and control units in
ty control and standby protection from drive or motor failure. The quantities and locations as indicated on the drawings. Each
manufacturer of the equipment shall supply controls for the larg- water level sensing and control unit shall consist of the following:
er motor, a VFD for the smaller motor and factory programmed NEMA 4 enclosure with gasketed access cover; solid state
logic controller to maximize energy saving for off peak load and controls including all necessary relays and contacts to achieve
wet-bulb conditions. the specified sequence of operation; stainless steel water level
sensing electrodes with brass holder; Schedule 40 PVC
standpipe assembly with vent holes, and all necessary stainless
4.0 Drift Eliminators steel mounting hardware. Provide PVC union directly below the
control enclosure to facilitate the removal and access of
4.1 Drift Eliminators: Eliminators shall be constructed of specially electrodes and control enclosure.
formulated PVC and be removable in easily handled sections.
They shall have a minimum of three changes in air direction. The number and position of water level sensing electrodes shall
be provided to sense the following: high water level, low water
level, high water alarm level, low water alarm, and heater safety
cutout.
5.0 Access
5.1 Basin Access: Circular access doors shall be provided for
easy access to the make-up water assembly and suction strainer
for routine maintenance.

D91
7.4 Vibration Cutout Switch: Provide mechanical local reset Optional enclosed control features: (A temperature sensor shall
vibration switch. The mechanical vibration cut out switch will be be provided with the enclosed controls.)(A temperature controller
guaranteed to trip at a point so as not to cause damage to the shall be provided with the enclosed controls.)(A basin heater
cooling tower. To ensure this, the trip point will be a frequency contactor with circuit breaker shall be provided.)(A vibration
range of 0 to 3,600 RPM and a trip point of 0.2 to 2.0 g’s. cutout switch input shall be provided.)
(Alternate) 7.4 Vibration Cutout Switch: Provide electronic 8.2 Safety Switch(es): A heavy-duty, non-fusible safety
remote reset vibration switch with contact for BAS monitoring. disconnect switch shall be provided by the manufacturer of the
Wiring shall be by the installing contractor. The electronic evaporative cooling equipment. Switch shall be single-throw,
vibration cut out switch shall be set to trip at a point so as not to 3-pole design, rated up to 600 VAC. Switch shall have triple
cause damage to the cooling tower. The trip point will be padlocking capability, a visible double break rotary blade
Series V
0.45 in/sec (0.0114 m/sec). mechanism, a clearly visible On/Off handle, an interlocking
mechanism to prevent door opening with handle in On position,
Basin Sweeper Piping: The cold water basin of the cooling and a clear line shield. Safety switch shall be provided in a
tower shall be equipped with PVC basin sweeper piping for a NEMA (1)(3R)(12) enclosure.
separator (supplied by others). On VT0 Models, the unit shall be
equipped only with two connections for the separator (supplied
by others).
Intake Sound Attenuation: The unit shall be equipped with intake

sound attenuators consisting of fiberglass acoustical baffles
encased in steel to further reduce sound levels.
Discharge Options: The unit shall be equipped with a tapered

hood lined with sound absorbing fiberglass acoustical baffles to
reduce sound levels from the top of the unit.
(Alternate) 7.7: Discharge Options: The unit shall be equipped

with a tapered hood to increase discharge velocity or to raise the
discharge to the top of an enclosure.
8.0 Equipment Controls

(VFD) shall be provided for each fan motor. The supplier of the
VFD shall be the manufacturer of the evaporative cooling
equipment. The VFD shall have a 3-contactor bypass, 3% input
line reactor, a removable keypad, an RS232 terminal for PC
connection, and a circuit breaker disconnect. Fuse protection will
not be accepted. Control voltage shall be 24V to minimize the
size of the enclosure which should not exceed _____ ft x _____
ft x ____ ft and the weight should not exceed ____ lbs. VFD
shall be provided in a NEMA (1)(3R)(12) enclosure. The VFD
shall be compatible with a (ModBus) (LonWorks) (Johnson N2)
OR

provided for each cell of the evaporative cooling equipment. The
panel shall include full voltage, non-reversing (FVNR) fan motor
and pump motor (if applicable) starters in a common enclosure.
The panel shall be provided with a main a circuit breaker
disconnect and a separate circuit breaker for each motor or
speed. Fuse protection will not be accepted. Panels containing
basin heaters shall have an Earth Leakage Breaker containing
ground fault protection. Starters above 25 A shall be NEMA
rated. IEC starters will be accepted for motors below 25 A. Panel
Hand-Off-Auto switches for each starter or contactor, and pilot
lights for each component. Enclosed controls shall be provided in
a NEMA (1)(3R)(4)(4X)(12) enclosure.

D92
Engineering Considerations -
Cooling Towers
Location
Open Cooling Towers

Units must have an adequate supply of fresh air to the air inlet(s). When units are located adjacent to
building walls or in enclosures, care must be taken to ensure that the warm, saturated discharge air is not
deflected off surrounding walls or enclosures and drawn back into the air inlet(s).
CAUTION:
Each unit should be located and positioned to prevent the introduction of the warm discharge air
and the associated drift, which may contain chemical or biological contaminants including
Legionella, into the ventilation systems of the building on which the unit is located or those of
adjacent buildings.
For detailed recommendations on layout, refer to our web site, www.BaltimoreAircoil.com, or consult
your local BAC Representative.
For Series V products, bottom screens or solid bottom panels may be desirable or necessary for safety,
depending on the location and conditions at the installation site.
Piping and Valves

Piping must be sized and installed in accordance with good piping practice. All piping should be supported
by pipe hangers or other supports, not by the unit. On open systems, in order to prevent basin overflow at
shutdown and to ensure satisfactory pump operation at start-up, all heat exchangers and as much piping as
possible should be installed below the operating level of the cooling tower.
Some units may require flow balancing valves (supplied by others) at the hot water inlets to balance the flow
to individual inlets and cells. External shutoff valves (supplied by others) may also be required if the system
design necessitates the isolation of individual cells.
When multiple cells are used on a common system, equalizing lines should be installed between the cold
water basins to ensure balanced water level in all cells. It is good engineering practice to valve the inlet and
outlet of each tower separately for servicing. The shut-off valves can be used, if necessary, to adjust any
minor unbalanced condition in water flow to or from the units.

D93
Capacity Control
Variable Frequency Drives (VFD)
Variable speed drives offer the most precise control of leaving fluid temperature or condensing pressure at
the lowest energy cost. VFDs provide compliance with the speed control requirements for heat rejection
equipment in current energy codes, such as ASHRAE Standard 90.1 and California Title 24. In addition,
soft-starts, stops, and smooth accelerations prolong the life of the mechanical system, including belts,
bearings, and gears. Sound is also reduced, by minimizing start-up noise and running the tower at the lowest
Engineering Considerations
fan speed necessary to meet system demand. Note that units with VFDs require the use of inverter duty
motors, designed per NEMA Standard MG 1, Section IV, Part 31. This standard recognizes the increased
stresses placed on motors by these drive systems. Note that the use of a non-inverter duty motor in these
applications may void the motor warranty.
WARNING:
When the fan speed is to be changed from the factory-set speed, including through the use of a
variable speed control device, steps must be taken to avoid operating at or near fan speeds that cause
a resonance with the unit or its supporting structure. At start-up, the variable frequency drive should
be cycled slowly between zero and full speed and any speeds that cause a noticeable resonance in the
unit should be “locked out” by the variable speed drive.
Fan Cycling
Fan cycling is the simplest method of capacity control. The number of steps of capacity control can be
increased using the ENERGY-MISER® Fan System, BALTIGUARD PLUS™ Fan System, the independent
motor option, or two-speed fan motors in conjunction with fan cycling (see “Custom Features & Options”
section of the appropriate product line to determine whether the ENERGY-MISER® Fan System, BALTIGUARD
PLUS™ Fan System, or the independent fan motor option are available for the particular product line;
two-speed motors are available for all product lines with either belt or gear fan drive systems. All of these
options provide substantial energy savings when compared to simple fan cycling, especially the BALTIGUARD
PLUS™ System, which provides energy savings and redundancy at a low cost.
WARNING:
Rapid on-off cycling can cause the fan motor to overheat. It is recommended that controls be set to
allow a maximum of 6 on-off cycles per hour.
Capacity Control Dampers (Series V Models Only)

On Series V models, modulating capacity control dampers are available to provide better leaving water
temperature control than can be obtained from fan cycling alone. See page D80 or contact your local BAC
Representative for more details.
Vibration Cutout Switches

Vibration cutout switches are recommended on all installations. Vibration cutout switches are designed to
interrupt power to the fan motor and can provide an alarm to the operator in the event of excessive vibration.
BAC offers both electronic and mechanical vibration cutout switches on all cooling tower models.

D94
Water Treatment
As water evaporates in an open cooling tower, the dissolved solids originally present in the water remain in
the system. The concentration of these dissolved solids increases rapidly and can cause scale and corrosion.
In addition, airborne impurities and biological contaminants, including Legionella, may be introduced into the
circulating water. To control all potential contaminants, a water treatment program must be employed. In
many cases, a simple bleed-off may be adequate for control of scale and corrosion. Note: Bleed lines are to
be provided and installed by others. However, biological contamination, including Legionella, can be
Open Cooling Towers

controlled only through the use of biocides. Such treatment should be initiated at system startup, after periods
of equipment shutdown, and continued regularly thereafter. For more information, consult the appropriate
Operating and Maintenance Manual.
When a water treatment program is employed, it must be compatible with construction materials. The pH of
the circulating water must be maintained between 6.5 and 9.0. Units having galvanized steel construction and
a circulating water pH of 8.3 or higher will require periodic passivation of the galvanized steel to prevent the
accumulation of white, waxy, nonprotective zinc corrosion called white rust. Batch feeding of chemicals into
the unit is not recommended. If units are constructed with optional corrosion resistant materials, acid
treatment may be considered; however, the water quality must be maintained within the guidelines set forth in
the Operating and Maintenance Manual.
For complete Water Quality Guidelines, see the appropriate Operating and Maintenance Instruction
Manual, available at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com
For specific recommendations on water treatment, contact a competent water treatment
supplier.
Fill Compatibility
BAC’s standard fill is constructed of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and has a flame spread rating of 5 per ASTM
Standard E84. The PVC fill surface is compatible with the water found in most evaporative cooling
applications. The maximum allowable water temperature for each product is as shown in the following table:
Maximum Allowable Water Temperature by Fill Material

Product Line Standard PVC High Temperature PVC
Series 3000 130ºF (54.4ºC) 140ºF (60.0ºC)
Series 1500 120ºF (48.9ºC) 135ºF (57.2ºC)
FXT 125ºF (51.7ºC) 140ºF (60.0ºC)
140ºF (54.4ºC) for BALTIBOND® Corrsion Protection System Unit;
Series V 130ºF (54.4ºC)
150ºF (65.6ºC for Galvanized & Stainless Steel Units
For applications where the entering water temperature exceeds the limits shown above, contact your local
BAC Representative for assistance.

D95
Sound Levels
Sound rating data is available for all BAC Cooling Towers. When calculating the sound levels generated by a
unit, the designer must take into account the effects of the geometry of the tower as well as the distance and
direction from the unit to noise-sensitive areas. Low sound fans and intake and discharge sound attenuation
can be supplied on certain models to provide reduced sound characteristics (see the “Custom Features and
Options” section of the appropriate product line for details). The ENERGY-MISER® Fan System, two-speed
motors, or variable frequency drives can also be used to reduce sound during periods of non-peak thermal
loads. For more information on sound and how it relates to evaporative cooling equipment, see page M124.
For detailed low sound selections, please consult your local BAC Representative.
Protection Against Basin Water Freezing

When a unit is shut down in freezing weather, the basin water must be protected by draining to an indoor
auxiliary remote sump tank (see page H5 for remote sump engineering data; page M28 for sizing guidelines)
or by providing supplementary heat to the cold water basin. Supplementary heat can be provided by electric
immersion heaters or in some cases, hot water or steam coils, or steam injectors. All exposed water piping,
make-up lines, and spray pumps (if applicable) that do not drain at shutdown should be traced with electric
heater tape and insulated.
Indoor Installations (Applicable to Series V Models Only)

Many indoor installations require the use of inlet and/or discharge ductwork. Units installed with inlet
ductwork must be ordered with solid bottom panels. Generally, intake ducts are used only on smaller
units while the equipment room is used as a plenum for larger units. Discharge ductwork will normally be
required to carry the saturated discharge air from the building.
Both intake and discharge ductwork must have access doors to allow servicing of the fan assembly, drift
eliminators, and water distribution system. All ductwork should be symmetrical and designed to provide even
air distribution across the face of air intakes and discharge openings.
WARNING:
The discharge opening must be positioned to prevent the introduction of discharge air into the fresh
air intakes serving the unit or the ventilation systems of adjacent buildings.
Note: Axial fan units are not suitable for indoor installations.
Safety
Adequate precautions, appropriate for the installation and location of these products, should be taken to
safeguard the public from possible injury and the equipment and the premises from damage. Operation,
maintenance and repair of this equipment should be undertaken only by personnel qualified to do so. Proper
care, procedures and tools must be used in handling, lifting, installing, operating, maintaining, and repairing
this equipment to prevent personal injury and/or property damage.
Warranties
Please refer to the Limitation of Warranties applicable to and in effect at the time of the sale/purchase of
these products.

D96
Georgetown University
Make the Grade
Project Report
Georgetown University, located in our nation’s capital, is steeped in tradition and is a symbol of
higher learning and achievement. Many honors recognizing Georgetown’s excellence have been
bestowed upon it over the years. The most recent honor was the Washington Building Congress
Craftsmanship Award in the Mechanical Category, which recognized Green Contracting for its
installation of the Georgetown University Utility Plant Upgrade.
The project engineer, Mueller Associates II, Inc., was faced with two challenges:
• Replace an existing 9,000 ton field-erected cooling tower and add new cooling
towers to supply an additional 4,000 tons of cooling
• Meet height requirements for the project as established by Martin Reddy Architects
For Mueller Associates II, Inc. the choice was clear: specify and install thirteen BAC Series 3000
Cooling Towers. The thirteen cooling towers provided the necessary cooling capacity while
meeting the height limitation required to achieve the desired aesthetic condition. The superior
efforts and craftsmanship of Green Contracting Company, Mueller Associates II Inc. and Hartin
Reddy Architects, coupled with the quality equipment from Baltimore Aircoil Company earned the
Georgetown University Utility Plant Upgrade the prestigious Craftsmanship Award.

E1
Closed Circuit Cooling Towers

Closed circuit cooling towers provide evaporative cooling for many types of systems, and the specific
application will largely determine which BAC Closed Circuit Cooling Tower is best suited for a project. The
table on page E5 & E6 is intended as a general guide. Specialized assistance is available through your local
BAC Representative.
Overview
See page E7 for an article on the advantages of closed circuit cooling towers.
Closed circuit cooling towers operate in a manner similar to open cooling towers, except that the heat load
to be rejected is transferred from the process fluid (the fluid being cooled) to the ambient air through a heat
exchange coil. The coil serves to isolate the process fluid from the outside air, keeping it clean and
contaminate free in a closed loop. This creates two separate fluid circuits: (1) an external circuit, in which
spray water circulates over the coil and mixes with the outside air, and (2) an internal circuit, in which the
process fluid circulates inside the coil. During operation, heat is transferred from the internal circuit, through
the coil to the spray water, and then to the atmosphere as a portion of the water evaporates.
Configuration
BAC manufactures two types of closed circuit cooling towers: combined flow and counterflow.
Combined Flow
Combined flow is the use of both a heat exchange coil and fill for heat transfer in a closed circuit cool-
ing tower. The addition of fill to the traditional closed circuit cooling tower design reduces evaporation in
the coil section, reducing the potential for scaling and fouling. BAC’s combined flow closed circuit cool-
ing towers utilize parallel flow of air and spray water over the coil, and crossflow air/water flow through
the fill.
In parallel flow, air and water flow over the coil in the same direction. The process fluid travels from the
bottom to the top of the coil, increasing efficiency by bringing the coldest spray water and air in contact
with the process fluid at its coldest temperature.

E2
In the fill of BAC’s combined flow closed circuit cooling towers, air and water interact in a crossflow
configuration: water flows vertically down the fill as air flows horizontally across it.

Water down
Air across
Combined Flow: Parallel flow of air Combined Flow: Crossflow

and water over the coil configuration over the fill
Counterflow
In a counterflow closed circuit cooling tower design, the flow of the air is in the opposite direction of the spray
water. In BAC’s counterflow closed circuit cooling towers, air travels vertically up through the unit while the
spray water travels vertically down over the coil. The process fluid flows from top to bottom through the coil
and is in thermal counterflow to the air.
Water down
Air up
Counterflow configuration

E3
Fan System
The flow of air through most factory assembled closed circuit cooling towers is provided by one or more
mechanically driven fans. The fan(s) may be axial or centrifugal, each type having its own distinct
advantages.
Axial fan units require approximately half the fan motor horsepower of comparably sized centrifugal fan
units, offering significant lifecycle cost savings.
Overview
Centrifugal fan units are capable of overcoming reasonable amounts of external static pressure (≤ 0.5”),
making them suitable for both indoor and outdoor installations. Centrifugal fans are also inherently quieter
than axial fans, although the difference is minimal and can often be overcome through the application of
optional low sound fans and/or sound attenuation on axial fan units.
Centrifugal fan Axial fan
Induced Draft
Fans can be applied in an induced draft or a forced draft configuration. The rotating air handling components
of induced draft equipment are mounted in the top deck of the unit, minimizing the impact of fan noise on
near-by neighbors and providing maximum protection from fan icing if units operate in sub-freezing
conditions. The use of corrosion resistant materials ensures long life and minimizes maintenance
requirements for the air handling components.
Forced Draft
Rotating air handling components are located on the air intake face at the base of forced draft towers,
facilitating easy access for routine maintenance and service. Additionally, locating these components in the
dry entering air stream extends component life by isolating them from the corrosive saturated discharge air.

E4
Capacity Range
In the following table, product capacities are called out in terms of a flow rate at 95ºF/85ºF/78ºF. This refers to
the flow rate of water that the unit can cool from a 95ºF (35.0ºC) entering water temperature to an 85ºF
(29.4ºC) leaving water temperature at a 78ºF (25.6ºC) entering ambient wet-bulb temperature. BAC offers
selection software to evaluate the performance of a tower at any conditions; see page M18 for details.
All capacities shown are for a single cell; multiple cell units can be applied to achieve larger capacities.

Maximum Entering Water Temperature
All BAC Closed Circuit Cooling Towers are capable of withstanding entering fluid temperatures as high as
180ºF (82.2ºC), and the HXV is capable of withstanding even higher temperatures due to the added dry coil
technology.
Typical Applications
A list of typical applications is provided on page E5 & E6 for your reference.

E5
Closed Circuit Cooling Tower

Product Lines
FXV
Overview
Single Air Inlet Models Dual Air inlet Models
Principle of
Operation
Configuration Combined Flow Combined Flow
Fan System Axial Fan, Induced Draft Axial Fan, Induced Draft
26 - 299 Nominal Tons 344 - 624 Nominal Tons

Capacity Range
(Single Cell)
78.7 - 896 GPM at 95˚F/85˚F/78˚F 1,031 - 1,872 GPM at 95˚F/85˚F/78˚F
Maximum
Entering Water 180˚F (82.2˚C) 180˚F (82.2˚C)
Temperature
Small to medium HVAC & industrial

applications such as water source heat pump
loops and air compressor cooling.
Medium to large HVAC & industrial
Typical
Tight enclosures & installations applications such as electric arc furnaces and
Applications
requiring a single air inlet pharmaceutical plants.
Unit replacements

E6
Series V

HXV
VF1 VFL (low profile)
WARM AIR
WATER DISTRIBUTION OUT
SYSTEM
FINNED
AIR COIL
IN
... . . . . . .. .
. . . ..
. .
. . M
. R
. A R
W AI
MODULATING FLOW . ..
CONTROL VALVE . ..
. . . . . . .. .
. . . .
PRIME SURFACE
COIL
M
R
WATER A R
W AI
AIR
IN
COLD WATER FILL

SPRAY PUMP BASIN
Counterflow Counterflow Combined Flow
Centrifugal Fan, Forced Draft Centrifugal Fan, Forced Draft Axial Fan, Induced Draft
4.1 - 543 Nominal Tons 3.9 - 108 Nominal Tons 160 - 305 Nominal tons
12.4 - 1,629 GPM 95˚F/85˚F/78˚F 11.6 - 324.6 GPM at 95˚F/85˚F/78˚F 480 - 915 GPM at 95˚F/85˚F/78˚F
Entering water temperature can exceed

180˚F but is application specific;
180˚F (82.2˚C) 180˚F (82.2˚C)
contact your local BAC Representative
for details.
Small to medium HVAC &

industrial applications such as Small to medium HVAC & industrial Small to medium HVAC & industrial
water source heat pump loops and applications applications such as water source heat
air compressor cooling pump loops and air compressor cooling
Installations with extremely low height
Indoor installations requirements Installations requiring plume abatement
High temperature applications Indoor installations Installations requiring water

conservation
Tight enclosures & High temperature industrial
installations requiring a single air applications Large range/close approach
inlet applications
Extremely sound sensitive
Extremely sound sensitive applications High temperature industrial applications
applications

E7
Advantages of Closed Circuit

Cooling Towers
Open cooling towers expose process cooling water to the atmosphere, typically as part of a chiller system
loop (see Figure 1). Open towers use an efficient, simple, and economical design. All components in an
Advantages of CCCT
open system must be compatible with the oxygen introduced via the cooling tower.
Closed circuit cooling towers completely isolate process cooling fluid from the atmosphere. This is
accomplished by combining heat rejection equipment with a heat exchanger in a closed circuit tower (see
Figure 2). A closed loop system protects the quality of the process fluid, reduces system maintenance, and
provides operational flexibility at a slightly higher initial cost.
When deciding which system is best for an application, several factors should be considered.
Performance
If an application must produce full capacity throughout the year, maintaining a clean, reliable system loop is
critical. Isolating the process fluid in a closed loop system prevents airborne contaminants from entering
and fouling the system. Sustaining optimum performance in an open loop system will require regular
maintenance to assure similar efficiency. High efficiency chillers and heat exchangers rely on clean process
water to function properly and are significantly impacted by even small amounts of fouling.
Expense
The initial equipment cost of an open loop system will be less than a comparably sized closed loop system,
since the open system does not include the intermediate heat exchanger component. However, the higher
first cost of a closed loop system will be paid back during years of operation through the following savings:
• Cleaner process fluid results in a cleaner internal surface area, and higher efficiency components in
the system (e.g. chiller)
• Reduced system
maintenance costs
Chiller
• Reduced water treatment
costs for evaporative Cooling
equipment Tower Condenser Chilled Heat Load
Water Refrigerant Water (Building)
• Operating in ‘free cooling’ Circuit Circuit Circuit
mode during the winter to

save energy consumption
Condenser Evaporator
Figure 1: Chiller loop with open tower

E8
Maintenance
Since the process fluid of a closed loop system is completely isolated from the environment, routine
maintenance is only required on the heat rejection equipment itself. The need to shut down the system
periodically to clean the heat exchanger is dramatically reduced, if not entirely eliminated. Providing clean
process fluid to the system will extend the life of other components in the system (condenser bundles,
compressors, etc.).

Water Treatment
Maintaining proper process fluid quality in a system may involve several steps, such as chemical treatment,
filtration equipment and the addition of clean make-up water. A closed circuit cooling tower can provide the
following advantages over an open cooling tower:
• Lower volume of recirculating water to treat
• Process loop requires minimal treatment
• During periods of dry operation, the need for make-up water is eliminated
Chiller
Condenser Refrigerant Chilled Heat Load

Water Circuit Water (Building)
Circuit Circuit
Closed Circuit
Cooling Tower
Figure 2: Chiller loop with closed circuit tower
Operational Flexibility
Closed circuit towers allow for the following modes of operation not possible with open towers:
• Free cooling operation without the need for an intermediate heat exchanger: Chiller turned off
• Dry operation: Conserve water and treatment chemicals, prevent icing and plume
• Variable pumping: Closed condenser water loop allows for variable speed pumping to conserve energy

E9
Closed Circuit Tower vs. Open Tower / Heat Exchanger

Sometimes, an open cooling tower is paired with a heat exchanger (see Figure 3) to capture some of the
benefits of closed loop cooling. Choosing closed circuit cooling towers over this open tower/heat exchanger
combination may still be a better choice for the following reasons:
• Total cost: Addition of a heat exchanger (pump, piping, etc.) to the open tower loop brings the initial
cost much closer to that of the closed circuit tower system
• Single piece of equipment: Compact design of the closed circuit tower conserves space in a
Advantages of CCCT
self-contained package, compared to multiple locations for the tower/heat exchanger arrangement
• Maintenance: Narrow spacing in heat exchanger (e.g. plate and frame) may trap solids introduced by
the open tower, requiring frequent, time consuming cleaning to assure optimum performance
• Dry operation: Open tower/heat exchanger system cannot be run dry in the winter
These guidelines provide some general information to help decide whether a closed circuit cooling tower is
better suited for a particular application than an open tower, with or without a heat exchanger. For additional
assistance with a project, please contact your local BAC Representative.
Chiller
Cooling
Tower Condenser
Chilled Heat Load
Water Heat Refrigerant Water (Building)
Circuit Exchanger Circuit Circuit
Figure 3: Chiller loop with open tower/heat exchanger combination

E10
FXV

Product Detail
Product Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E11
Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E13
Construction Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E15
Custom Features & Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E21
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E25
Structural Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E26
Engineering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E27
Engineering Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E30
Engineering Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E81

E11
FXV
FXV
78.7 – 1,872 GPM of water at 95ºF/85ºF/78ºF
FXV Closed Circuit Cooling Towers deliver independently verified, fully rated thermal performance over a wide
range of flow and temperature requirements. Standard design features satisfy today’s environmental concerns,
minimize installation costs, maximize year-round operating reliability, and simplify maintenance requirements.
FXV Closed Circuit Cooling Towers

• Application flexibility
• ASME B31.5 compliant heat transfer coils

E12

E13
Benefits
• Evaporative cooled equipment minimizes the energy consumption of the entire system because it
FXV
• The FXV provides heat rejection at the lowest possible energy input and maintenance
requirements via:
• Closed loop cooling, which minimizes process fouling
• Patented combined flow technology, which reduces evaporation directly off the coil,
minimizing the potential for scaling and fouling (see page E1)
• Variable Frequency Drives (optional) (see page G1 for details)
• ENERGY-MISER® Fan System (optional) (see page E20 for details)
• BALTIGUARD PLUSTM Fan System (optional) (see page G1 for details)
Low Installed Cost

• Support — All models mount directly on parallel
I-beams and ship complete with motors and drives
factory-installed and aligned.
• Modular Design —Units ship in multiple sections to

minimize the size and weight of the heaviest lift,
allowing for the use of smaller, less costly cranes.
The unit shown ships in two pieces to

minimize shipping and rigging costs
Easy Maintenance
• Access — Hinged access doors on each end wall
and a standard internal walkway provide easy
access to the unit interior.
• Spacious Interior — Provides easy access to the

cold water basin, drift eliminators, fan drive system
and heat transfer coil.
Oversized, hinged access door

E14
• Access to Spray Distribution — Parallel flow of air and spray

water over the coil allows for inspection and access to the top
of the coil during full operation.

Spray distribution system
Application Flexibility
• Difficult thermal duties — The combined flow design is ideal for applications requiring a close
approach and/or large range.
• Replacement applications — Single air inlet models are designed to mount directly on existing
support steel of both crossflow and counterflow units.
• Coil configurations — Alternate coil configurations and materials available. ASME “U” Stamp
available (see page E19 for details).
• Highest capacity in the industry — Dual air inlet models offer the highest single cell capacity of
any closed circuit cooling tower in the industry. Projects benefit from fewer required cells, lower
overall fan horsepower, and fewer piping connections.
• BALTIDRIVE® Power Train — Backed by a 5-year fan motor and

drive warranty, the BALTIDRIVE® Power Train utilizes special
corrosion-resistant materials of construction and state-of-the-art
technology to ensure ease of maintenance and reliable
year-round performance.
• Separate Air Inlet Louvers — Reduce the potential for scale build-up
and damaging ice formations at the air/water interface by providing a
line of sight from the outside of the unit into the fill.
Long Service Life Air Inlet louvers
Materials of Construction — Various materials are available to meet the corrosion resistance, unit
operating life, and budgetary requirements of any project (see page E19 for construction options).

E15
Single Air Inlet Models
FXV
10

E16
6
BACross® Fill with Integral
• G-235 (Z700 metric) hot-dip Drift Eliminators (Not Shown)
galvanized steel panels • High efficiency heat transfer surface

• Impervious to rot, decay and
• Premium quality, solid-backed, biological attack
multi-groove belt • Flame spread rating of 5 per
• Corrosion resistant cast aluminum sheaves ASTM E84-77a
• Heavy-duty bearings
(280,000 hour average life) 7 FRP Air Inlet Louvers
• Cooling tower duty fan motor • Corrosion resistant
• 5-year motor and • UV resistant finish
drive warranty • Maintenance free
3 Low HP Axial Fan(s) 8 Cold Water Basin

• High efficiency • Sloped cold water basin for easy cleaning
• Quiet operation • Suction strainer with anti-vortex hood
• Corrosion resistant aluminium accessible from louver face
4 Water Distribution System • Integral internal walkway
• Visible and accessible during operation
• Overlapping spray patterns ensure proper 9 Recirculating Spray Water
water coverage Pump
• Large orifice, 360˚ non-clog nozzles • Close coupled, bronze fitted
centrifugal pump
5 Coil Section (Not Shown) • Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) motor
• Continuous serpentine, steel tubing • Bleed line with metering valve installed
from pump discharge to overflow
• Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (HDGAF)
• Pneumatically tested at 375 psig
10 Hinged Access Doors
• Sloped tubes for free drainage of fluid
• ASME B31.5 compliant
• When required, orders shipping into
Canada are supplied with a CRN

E17
Dual Air Inlet Models
FXV
4
2
3
5
1
6
7

E18
7 BACross Fill with Integral Drift
®
• G-235 (Z700 metric) hot-dip Eliminators

galvanized steel frame • High efficiency heat transfer surface
2 FRP Casing Panels

• Impervious to rot, decay and
• Corrosion resistant biological attack
• Maintenance free • Flame spread rating of 5 per ASTM E84-77a

8 FRP Air Inlet Louvers
3 BALTIDRIVE® Power Train • Corrosion resistant
• Premium quality, solid backed, multi-groove belt • UV resistant finish
• Corrosion resistant cast aluminum sheaves • Maintenance free
• Heavy-duty bearings (280,000 hour average life)
9 Cold Water Basin
• 5-year motor and drive warranty • Sloped cold water basin for easy cleaning
4 Low HP Axial Fan • Adjustable water make-up assembly
• High efficiency
• Quiet operation
• Corrosion resistant 10 Integral Recirculating Spray
Water Pumps (Not Shown)
• Close coupled, bronze fitted centrifugal pumps
• Totally enclosed fan cooled
(TEFC) motors
• Overlapping spray patterns ensure proper
• Bleed line with metering valve installed from
water coverage
pump discharge to overflow
• Large orifice, 360˚ non-clog nozzles
6 Coil Sections 11 Hinged Access Doors

(Not Shown)
• Continuous serpentine, steel tubing • Inward swinging door on each end wall
• When required, orders shipping into Canada
are supplied with a CRN

E19

Models 421 - 661: All steel panels and structural elements are constructed of heavy-gauge G-235
(Z700 metric) hot-dip galvanized steel. Inlet louvers are constructed of UV-resistant, fiberglass
reinforced polyester (FRP).
FXV
Models FXV-288 and 364: Casing panels and air inlet louvers are constructed of UV-resistant,
fiberglass reinforced polyester (FRP).
life, is applied to all hot-dip galvanized steel components of the closed circuit cooling tower
(excluding heat transfer coil).
seams are provided with a five-year leak-proof warranty.
All multi-cell units are available with Factory Mutual (FM) Approved construction as an option.
Coil Configurations
• Standard Serpentine Coil:
The standard cooling coil is constructed of continuous lengths of all prime surface steel, hot-dip
galvanized (outside surface) after fabrication (HDGAF). The coil is designed for low pressure drop
with sloping tubes for free drainage of fluid. Each coil is pneumatically tested at 375 psig (2586 kPa)
and is ASME B31.5 compliant.
• Optional Cleanable Header Coil:
The cleanable header tube bundle provides removable cover plates on the inlet and outlet header
boxes to permit access to each serpentine tube circuit for solvent or air-pressure cleaning. Tubes are
all prime surface steel tubing formed into a serpentine shape and welded into an assembly. Coil
material options include carbon steel coils (hot-dip galvanized outside surface) or stainless steel
coils. Each coil is pneumatically tested at 125 psig (860 kPa).

E20
• Optional Stainless Steel Coil:

Coils are available in Series 300 stainless steel for specialized applications. The coil is designed for
low pressure drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of fluid. Each coil is pneumatically tested at
375 psig (2586 kPa) and is ASME B31.5 compliant.

• Optional Straight-Through Mechanically-Cleanable Coil:
A header box with a removable cover plate at each end of the coil allows access to every tube end for
mechanical cleaning or plugging. It is available in carbon steel (hot-dip galvanized inside and out) or
stainless steel. Each coil is pneumatically tested at 125 psig (860 kPa).
• Optional ASME “U” Stamp Coil:
This serpentine coil is manufactured and tested in accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1, and bears the ASME “U” stamp. ASME coils are hot-dip
with sloping tubes for free drainage of fluid. Each coil is pneumatically tested at 375 psig (2586 kPa).
When required, coils shipping into Canada are supplied with a CRN. Other coil configurations are
available for specific applications. Contact your local BAC Representative for details.
Fan Drive System
atmosphere. The standard fan drive system on all models is the exclusive BALTIDRIVE® Power Train.
This BAC engineered drive system consists of a specially designed powerband and two cast aluminum
sheaves located on minimum shaft centerline distances to maximize belt life. A cooling tower duty fan
motor, custom engineered for BAC to provide maximum performance for cooling tower service, is
provided and backed by BAC’s comprehensive 5-year motor and fan drive warranty.
The ENERGY-MISER® Fan System consists of two standard single-speed fan motor and drive
assemblies. One drive assembly is sized for full speed and load, and the other is sized approximately
2/3 speed and consumes only 1/3 the design horsepower. This configuration allows the system to be
operated like a two-speed motor, but with the reserve capacity of a standby motor in the event of failure.
As a minimum, approximately 70% capacity will be available from the low horsepower motor, even on a
design wet-bulb day. Controls and wiring are the same as those required for a two-speed, two-winding
motor. Significant energy savings are achieved when operating at low speed during periods of reduced
load and/or low wet-bulb temperatures.


E21

Models FXV-43X, 44X, Q44X, 64X, and Q64X are provided with one fan motor driving two fans as
standard. Models FXV-66X and Q66X are provided with two fan motors driving three fans as standard.
FXV
The independent fan option consists of one fan motor and drive assembly for each fan to allow
independent operation, adding an additional step of fan cycling and capacity control.
Gear Drive System,

Close-Coupled Motor
Models FXV-288 and 364 are available
with a close-coupled gear drive system.
Both the gear drive and couplings are
selected with a 2.0 service factor. Gear
construction includes a nickel-alloy steel
shaft, casehardened gears, self
lubrication, and a single piece, gray iron
housing. This drive system ships
Gear Drive System,

Externally Mounted Motor
Gear drive system, close-coupled motor
Models FXV-288 and 364 are available with
a gear drive system with external TEFC
motor. A non-corrosive carbon-fiber
composite drive shaft with stainless steel
hubs is selected with a 2.0 service factor.
The motor and drive shaft ship separately
for easy field installation.
Equipment Controls
BAC control panels are specifically
designed to work seamlessly with all BAC
units and engineered to meet you
particular application. For more on BAC
Equipment Controls, see pages G1-G13.
VFD & safety switch

E22
Low Sound Operation

The low sound levels generated by FXV
Closed Circuit Cooling Towers make

them suitable for installation in most
environments. For very sound sensitive
installations, a low sound fan option is
available to reduce the sound levels
generated from the tower with minimal
impact on thermal performance. The FXV
thermal performance with the low sound
fan has been certified in accordance with
CTI Standard STD-201.
For extremely sound sensitive
installations, factory designed, tested and
rated sound attenuation is available for
both the air intake and discharge.
Whisper Quiet Fans

FXV single air inlet models (FXV-42X through FXV-Q66X) are
available with a “Whisper Quiet” fan that significantly reduces
the sound levels generated from the unit with minimal impact
on thermal performance.
Basinless Unit Construction

(FXV-288 and 364 Models Only)
The basinless unit construction option enables units to be
directly installed on new or existing concrete cold water
basins. This custom feature, reduces maintenance costs by
eliminating the integral basin from traditional units. It
simplifies piping and pumping requirements of multi-cell
installations and provides a cost-effective solution for many
field-erected replacement projects.
Installation on a concrete basin

.

E23
Accessories
For external service, louver face and access door
platforms can be added to the unit, when purchased
or as an aftermarket item. Safety cages and safety
FXV
gates are also available. All components are

designed to meet OSHA requirements.
External platform at louver face
Ladder, Safety Cage, Gate and Handrails (FXV-288 and 364 Models Only)
In the event the end-user elects to provide access to the fan deck, models FXV-288 and 364 can be
furnished with ladders extending from the top of the unit to the base, as well as safety cages, safety
gates, fan deck extensions and handrail packages. All components are designed to meet OSHA
requirements. All access to the top of the equipment must be made in accordance with applicable
government occupational safety standards.
Note: Partial or full grating above the coil air intake is recommended with this option.
Internal Ladder
For access to the motor and drive assemblies on single air inlet models, a moveable internal ladder is
available.
Internal Service Platforms

For access to the motor and drive assemblies on
single air inlet models FXV-L641 through FXV-Q661
and all dual air inlet models, an internal ladder and
upper service platform with handrails is available.
Safety gates are available for all handrail openings.
All components are designed to meet OSHA
requirements.
Internal ladder and service platform

A factory mounted vibration cutout switch is available to effectively protect against equipment failure
due to excessive vibration of the mechanical equipment system. BAC can provide either a mechanical
or solid-state electronic vibration cutout switch in a NEMA 4 enclosure to ensure reliable protection.

E24
Positive Closure Damper (PCD) Hoods

The FXV’s innovative design results in a low heat loss when the unit is idle. When additional heat loss
prevention is desired, coil air intake hoods with factory mounted PCDs and damper actuators can be
provided. The addition of factory mounted insulation to the hood and casing further reduces the heat
loss by minimizing losses due to conduction. See page E29 for heat loss data on all FXV models.

Basin Heaters
Closed circuit cooling towers exposed to below
freezing ambient temperatures require protection
to prevent freezing of the water in the cold water
basin when the unit is idle. Factory-installed
electric immersion heaters, which maintain +40°F
(4.4°C) water temperature, are a simple and
inexpensive way of providing such protection.
Heater Sizing Data Basin heater

FXV - 42X 1 4 1 6
FXV - 43X 1 6 1 8
FXV - 44X 1 8 1 12
FXV - 64X 1 12 1 16
FXV - 66X 1 16 1 21
FXV - 288 2 12 2 15
FXV - 364 2 14 2 20

make-up valve when a more precise water level control is
required. This package consists of a conductance-actuated level
control mounted in the basin and a solenoid activated valve in the
make-up water line. The valve is slow closing to minimize
water hammer.
Electric water level

control package

E25
Accessories
Extended lubrication lines are available for
lubrication of the fan shaft bearings. Grease fittings
FXV
are located inside the plenum area next to the

access door.
Grease fittings at the access door & bearings with the extended lubrication line option

Optional high temperature fill material is available for high entering fluid temperatures.
Air Inlet Screens

Wire mesh screens can be factory-installed over the inlet
louvers and the spray distribution system to prevent debris
from entering the unit.

Basin sweeper piping provides an effective method of
preventing debris from collecting in the cold water basin of the
tower. A complete piping system, including nozzles, is provided
in the tower basin for connection to side stream filtration
equipment (by others). For more information on filtration
systems , see page M159.
Basin sweeper piping

E26
Structural Support
The recommended support arrangement for FXV Closed Circuit Cooling Towers consists of parallel
I-beams positioned as shown on the drawings. Besides providing adequate support, the steel also
serves to raise the unit above any solid foundation to assure access to the bottom of the tower.
Alternate steel support designs include a cantilevered plan as indicated by the optional minimum “D”

dimension in the table below. To support an FXV on columns or in an alternate arrangement not shown
here, consult your local BAC Representative.
Single Air Inlet
Optional Minimum Maximum

Model Number D
D* Deflection
FXV - 42x 8’ 3” 5’ 9” 3/16”
FXV - 43x 8’ 3” 5’ 9” 5/16”
FXV - 44x 8’ 3” 5’ 9” 3/8”
FXV - 64x 11’ 7-3/4” 8’ 0” 3/8”
FXV - 66x 11’ 7-3/4” 8’ 0” 1/2”
*When unit is supported with a cantilever plan, the side

opposite the air inlet shall be cantilevered.
Dual Air Inlet
Model Max.
D
Number Deflection
FXV-288-xxx 23’ 9-1/8” 1/2”
FXV-364-xxx 26’ 5/8” 1/2”
Notes:
1. Support steel and anchor bolts to be designed and furnished 4. If vibration isolation rails are to be used between the unit and
by others. supporting steel, be certain to allow for the length of the vibration
rails when determining the length of the supporting steel, as
2. All support steel must be level at the top. vibration rail length and mounting hole locations may differ from
3. Beams must be selected in accordance with accepted structural those of the unit.
practice. Maximum deflection of beam under unit to be 1/360 5. If point vibration isolation is used with multi-cell units, the isolators
of span, not to exceed 1/2 inch. must be located under the support steel, not between the support
steel and the closed circuit cooling towers.

E27
Engineering Data
Single Air Inlet Models
FXV
3" OVERFLOW
2" DRAIN
Motor HP Weights (lbs) Dimensions Connection Sizes2,3 Internal

Spray
Model Nominal Coil
Heaviest Make-Up Pump
Number Tons5 Fan Pump Operating1 Shipping L W H A P Coil Volume
Section Water (GPM)
(GAL)
FXV-421 33 7,730 5,050 2,900 46
FXV-422 46 8,190 5,370 3,220 60
3 to 10 1.5 6’ 1-1/4” 8’ 5-1/4” 13’ 2-3/4” 6’ 3/4” 1’ 3-3/4” 1/2” 4” 190
FXV-423 52 8,680 5,710 3,560 74
FXV-424 59 9,160 6,050 3,900 88
FXV-431 57 11,230 7,160 4,240 69
FXV-432 73 11,930 7,650 4,730 90
5 to 15 2 9’ 1-1/4” 8’ 5-1/4” 13’ 2-3/4” 6’ 3/4” 1’ 4-1/4” 1/2” 4” 290
FXV-433 81 12,630 8,140 5,220 112
FXV-434 95 13,380 8,680 5,760 133
FXV-441 92 14,200 8,760 5,120 91
FXV-442 111 15,150 9,410 5,770 120
1/2” 4”
FXV-443 122 16,080 10,060 6,420 149
FXV-444 140 7.5 to 20 3 17,070 10,770 7,130 12’ 1-1/4” 8’ 5-1/4” 13’ 2-3/4” 6’ 3/4” 1’ 8-1/4” 500 178
FXV-Q440 88 15,150 9,410 5,770 124
1/2’ 6”
FXV-Q441 125 17,070 10,770 7,130 182
FXV-641 144 18,560 10,890 6,730 146
FXV-642 175 20,050 11,930 7,770 192
1” 4”
FXV-643 193 21,550 12,980 8,820 238
10 to 30 5 12’ 1-1/4” 11’ 10” 15’ 10-3/4” 8’ 8-3/4” 1’ 8-3/4” 715
FXV-644 215 23,050 14,040 9,880 284
FXV-Q640 134 20,050 11,930 7,770 194
1” 6”
FXV-Q641 186 23,050 14,040 9, 880 286
FXV-661 231 27,070 15,510 9,690 218
FXV-662 267 29,290 17,070 11,250 288
1” 4”
FXV-663 295 31,570 18,670 12,850 358
15 to 45 7.5 18’ 1-1/4” 11’ 10” 16’ 4-1/4” 9’ 2-1/4” 2’ 3/8” 900
FXV-664 331 33,810 20,280 14,460 429
FXV-Q660 215 29,290 17,070 11,250 299
1” 8”
FXV-Q661 299 33,810 20,280 14,460 439
Notes:
1. Operating weight is for the tower with the water level in the cold 3. Inlet and outlet connections are beveled for welding.
water basin at the overflow. 4. Standard make-up, drain and overflow connections are MPT.
2. The actual size of the inlet and outlet connection may vary with
5. Nominal tons of cooling represents 3 GPM of water from 95ºF to
the design flow rate. Consult unit print for dimensions.
85ºF at a 78ºF entering wet-bulb temperature.

E28
See page E81

for Engineering
Considerations.
Dual Air Inlet Models

6" FLUID OUT
6" FLUID IN
Motor HP Weights (lbs) Dimensions

Spray Internal Coil
Nominal
Model Number Heaviest Pump Volume
Tons6 Fan Pump Operating1 Shipping L W H
Section (GPM) (GAL)
FXV-288-31x 468 46,470 28,150 8,050 600

FXV-288-41x 502 20 to 60 15 50,160 30,910 9,430 11’ 11” 24’ 1/2” 18’ 10-3/8” 1,720 712
FXV-288-1Qx 439 50,160 30,910 9,430 706
FXV-364-31x 579 54,440 32,170 9,390 696
FXV-364-41x 624 25 to 75 15 58,800 35,450 11,030 13’ 11-1/8” 26’ 3-1/2” 19’ 0-3/8” 1,720 828
FXV-364-1Qx 550 58,800 35,450 11,030 862
Notes:
1. Operating weight is for the tower with the water level in the cold 5. Models shipped with an optional gear drive or low sound fan
water basin at the overflow. may have heights up to 10.5" greater than shown.
2. The actual size of the inlet and outlet connection may vary with
the design flow rate. Consult unit print for dimensions. 6. Nominal tons of cooling represents 3 GPM of water from 95ºF to
85ºF at a 78ºF entering wet-bulb temperature.
3. Inlet and outlet connections are beveled for welding.
4. Standard make-up, drain and overflow connections are located
on the bottom of the unit. Make-up connection is 1-1/2” MPT
standpipe, drain is 2” FPT and overflow is 3” FPT.

E29
Engineering Data:
Cold Weather Operation
FXV Heat Loss Data (BTUH)
Model Standard Unit w/ Unit w/ PCD
Number Unit PCD Hood Hood & Insulation
FXV
FXV-421 68,400 43,500 30,100

FXV-422 87,100 47,100 32,300
FXV-423 105,200 50,500 34,700
FXV-424 122,400 54,000 37,000
FXV-431 102,800 60,800 43,200

FXV-432 131,200 65,600 46,500
FXV-433 158,000 70,600 49,600
FXV-434 183,000 74,900 52,800
FXV-441 135,700 76,700 55,200

FXV-442 172,900 82,100 59,100
FXV-443 208,000 87,600 62,900
FXV-444 241,000 92,900 66,500
FXV-Q440 172,900 82,100 59,100
FXV-Q441 241,000 92,900 66,500
FXV-641 203,400 103,800 75,300

FXV-642 259,800 109,700 79,300
FXV-643 313,100 115,600 83,200
FXV-644 362,900 121,300 86,900
FXV-Q640 259,800 109,700 79,300
FXV-Q641 362,900 121,300 86,900
FXV-661 304,500 158,200 118,000

FXV-662 387,500 165,500 123,000
FXV-663 404,700 172,400 127,600
FXV-664 536,900 179,100 132,200
FXV-Q660 387,500 165,500 123,000
FXV-Q661 536,900 179,100 132,200
FXV-288-31x 760,200 280,700 202,000

FXV-288-41x 881,100 294,500 211,000
FXV-288-1Qx 881,100 294,500 211,000
FXV-364-31x 894,000 330,100 237,600
FXV-364-41x 1,036,200 346,400 248,100
FXV-364-1Qx 1,036,200 346,400 248,100
Notes:
1 Heat loss based on 50ºF entering coil water and -10ºF ambient
with 45 MPH wind (fans and pump off).
2. One inch thick PVC nitrite rubber blend thermal insulation on both
the PCD hood and the casing panels surrounding the coil.
Dimensional Data of Positive Closure Damper Hood

Model Hood Ship. Operating Weight Add Length Hood Height Unit Height Notes:
Width (W)
Number Weight (lbs.) (lbs.) (L) (Y) (H) 1. Hood shipping weight
includes shipping skid
FXV-42x 390 320 5’ 11-7/8” 3’ 5-1/4” 2’ 5-1/8” 15’ 1-3/4” weight.
FXV-43x 540 430 8’ 11-7/8” 3’ 5-1/4” 2’ 5-1/8” 15’ 1-3/4”
FXV-44x 720 570 11’ 11-7/8” 3’ 5-1/4” 2’ 5-1/8” 15’ 1-3/4”
FXV-64x 1,160 920 11’ 11-7/8” 5’ 3-1/2” 2’ 5-1/8” 17’ 9-3/4”
FXV-66x 1,650 1,300 17’ 11-7/8” 5’ 3-1/2” 2’ 5-1/8” 17’ 9-3/4”
FXV-288-xxx 1,300 1,040 11’ 11” 6’ 3-3/8” 2’ 5-1/8” 20’ 2-5/8”
FXV-364-xxx 1,500 1,200 13’ 11-1/8” 6’ 3-3/8” 2’ 5-1/8” 20’ 2-5/8”

E30
1.0 Closed Circuit Cooling Tower mally activated curing stage and monitored by a 23-step
quality assurance program. Coatings other than the
1.1 General: Furnish and install, as shown on the plans, BALTIBOND® Corrosion Protection System must be
___ factory-assembled closed circuit cooling tower(s) of submitted to the engineer for pre-approval. Approved
induced draft design with vertical air discharge. Overall equals must have undergone testing, resulting in the
dimensions shall not exceed approximately ___ ft (mm) x following results as a minimum:

___ ft (mm), with an overall height not exceeding approxi-
mately ___ ft (mm). Operating weight shall not exceed 1. When X-scribed to the steel substrate it shall be able
_____ lbs (kg). The closed circuit cooling tower shall be to withstand 6000 hours of 5% salt spray per ASTM
Baltimore Aircoil Company Model FXV-___. B117 without blistering, chipping, or loss of adhesion;
1.2 Thermal Capacity (water as heat transfer fluid): The 2. When X-scribed to the steel substrate it shall be able to
closed circuit cooling tower shall be warranted by the man- withstand 6000 hours of exposure to acidic (pH=4.0)
ufacturer to have capacity to cool _______ USGPM (l/s) of and alkaline (pH=11.0)water solutions at 95ºF (35˚C)
water from ______°F (°C) to _____°F (°C) at _____°F (°C) without signs of chemical attack;
entering wet-bulb temperature. Coil pressure drop shall not 3. Shall withstand impact of 160 in-lbs per ASTM D2794
exceed ________ psi (kPa). The performance shall be without fracture or delamination of the polymer layer;
certified by the Cooling Technology Institute in accordance 4. Shall withstand 6000 hours of ultraviolet radiation
with CTI Certification Standard STD-201 or, lacking such equivalent to 120,000 hours of noontime sun exposure
certification, a field without loss of functional properties;
acceptance test shall be conducted within the warranty
period in accordance with CTI Acceptance Test Code ATC- 5. Shall withstand 200 thermal shock cycles between -
105, by the Cooling Technology Institute, or other qualified 25ºF and +180ºF (-32˚C and 82˚C) without loss of
independent third party testing agency. Manufacturers' adhesion or other deterioration;
performance guarantees or performance bonds without CTI 6. Shall withstand 6000 hours of exposure to 60 psi
Certification of water ratings shall not be accepted. (42,184 kg/m2) water jet without signs of wear or
(Alternate) 1.2 Thermal Capacity (aqueous glycol solution erosion.
as heat transfer fluid): The closed circuit cooling tower(s) (Alternate) 2.1 Optional Stainless Steel Construction: All
shall be warranted by the manufacturer to cool steel panels and structural elements shall be constructed
________USGPM (l/s) of _____% by volume from heavy-gauge, Series 300 stainless steel.
ethylene/propylene glycol solution from ______°F (°C) to
2.2 Coil Section: The heat transfer section of the closed
_____°F (°C) at _____°F (°C) entering wet-bulb tempera-
circuit cooling tower shall be encased with removable
ture. Coil pressure drop shall not exceed ________ psi
heavy-gauge galvanized steel panels (or corrosion
(kPa). Basis for thermal performance rating shall be the
resistant, fiberglass reinforced polyester (FRP) on Models
Cooling Technology Institute (CTI) certified rating for water
FXV-288 to 364). The coil shall be constructed of continu-
cooling appropriately adjusted for the thermal properties of
ous serpentine all prime surface steel, be pneumatically
the aqueous glycol solution used. Additionally, the thermal
tested at 375 psig (2,685 kPa), and be hot-dip galvanized
performance of the product line with water as the heat
after fabrication. The coil shall be designed for free
transfer fluid shall be certified by the CTI in accordance
drainage of fluid and shall be ASME B31.5 compliant.
with CTI Certification Standard STD-201. Manufacturers'
Maximum allowable working pressure shall be 300 psig
performance guarantees or performance bonds without CTI
(280 psig for coils supplied with a CRN).
Certification of water ratings shall not be accepted.
(Alternate) 2.2 Optional Cleanable Header Coil: Coil(s) to
1.3 Quality Assurance: The cooling tower manufacturer
be constructed of continuous serpentine prime surface car-
shall have a Management System certified by an accredit-
bon steel, with a hot-dip galvanized (after fabrication) out-
ed registrar as complying with the requirements of ISO-
side surface. Inlet and outlet headers have removable
9001:2000 to ensure consistent quality of products and
cover plates, and elbowed fluid inlet and outlet connections
services.
to allow removal of the cover plates without disturbing fluid
2.0 Construction Details piping. Coil(s) shall be pneumatically tested at 125 psig
2.1 Corrosion Resistant Construction (standard): Unless (895 kPa).
otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and (Alternate) 2.2 Optional Cleanable Tube Coil: Coil(s) to be
structural elements shall be constructed from heavy-gauge, constructed with straight full-length tubes, pitched in the
G-235 (Z700 metric) hot-dip galvanized steel, with cut direction of fluid flow for free drainage, and pneumatically
edges given a protective coat of zinc-rich compound. tested at 125 psig (895 kPa). Full-height box headers and
(Alternate) 2.1 Corrosion Resistant Construction: Unless removable cover plates allow access to all tubes at both
otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and ends. The entire assembly is hot-dip galvanized after
structural members shall be protected with the fabrication, inside and out.
BALTIBOND® Corrosion Protection System. The system (Alternate) 2.2 Optional ASME Coil: Coil(s) shall be
shall consist of G-235 (Z700 metric) hot-dip galvanized designed and constructed to meet the requirements of
steel prepared in a four-step (clean, pre-treat, rinse, dry) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII,
process with an electrostatically sprayed, thermosetting, Division 1, and bear the U stamp.
hybrid polymer fuse-bonded to the substrate during a ther-

E31
(Alternate) 2.2 Optional Stainless Steel Coil: Coil(s) shall manufactured and performance tested by the closed cir-
be constructed of Series 300 stainless steel serpentine cuit cooling tower manufacturer to provide single source
tube. Tubes shall be sloped for free drainage and coil responsibility and assure control of the final product. A
assembly shall be pneumatically tested at 375 psig (2,685 separate set of drift eliminators shall be removable in
kPa). Coil(s) shall be ASME B31.5 compliant. easily handled sections for quick access to the coil.
Eliminators shall have a minimum of three changes in air
direction.
2.3 Cold Water Basin: The cold water basin shall be
constructed of heavy-gauge hot-dip galvanized steel. The (Alternate) 4.1 Fill and Drift Eliminators: The high
basin shall include a depressed section with drain/ temperature fill and integral drift eliminators shall be
clean-out connection. Standard accessories shall include formed from self-extinguishing (per ASTM-568) polyvinyl
chloride (PVC) having a flame spread rating of 5 per
FXV
large area, lift-out steel strainers with perforated openings

sized smaller than water distribution nozzle orifices, an ASTM E84 and shall be impervious to rot, decay, fungus
integral anti-vortexing hood to prevent air entrainment, and biological attack. The high temperature fill shall be
waste water bleed line, and brass make-up valve with suitable for entering water temperatures up to 140°F
large diameter plastic float arranged for easy adjustment. (60.0˚C). The fill shall be manufactured, tested and rated
by the cooling tower manufacturer and shall be elevated
above the cold water basin to facilitate cleaning.
(Alternate) 2.3 Optional Stainless Steel Cold Water Basin:
The cold water basin shall be made of Series 300
stainless steel. All factory seams in the cold water basin 5.0 Air Inlet Louvers
shall be welded, leak tested at the factory to ensure 5.1 Air Inlet Louvers: Air inlet louvers shall be
watertight assembly and shall be warranted against leaks wave-formed, fiberglass-reinforced polyester (FRP),
for 5 years. spaced to minimize air resistance and prevent water
splash-out.
2.4 Casing Panels: Models FXV-4xx, 6xx, Lxxx, & Qxxx:
Casing panels shall be constructed of steel matching the
structure defined in section 2.1. 6.0 Mechanical Equipment
Or, for Models FXV-288 and 364: 6.1 Fan(s): Fan(s) shall be heavy-duty, axial flow, with
aluminum alloy blades. Air shall discharge through a fan
Casing panels shall be constructed of corrosion resistant, cylinder designed for streamlined air entry and minimum
fiberglass reinforced polyester (FRP). fan blade tip clearance for maximum fan efficiency. Fan(s)
and shaft(s) shall be supported by heavy-duty, self-
aligning, grease-packed ball bearings with moisture-proof
3.0 Spray Water System seals and integral slinger rings, designed for minimum L10
3.1 Spray Water Pump(s): The closed circuit cooling life of 40,000 hours. Fan(s) shall be drive by a one-piece,
tower shall include an appropriate number of close- multi-groove neoprene/polyester belt designed specifically
coupled, bronze-fitted centrifugal pump and motor for evaporative cooling service. Fan and motor sheave(s)
assemblies equipped with mechanical seal, mounted in shall be fabricated from cast aluminum.
the basin and piped from the suction connection to the
water distribution system. The pump motor(s) shall be the
totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) type suitable for 6.2 Fan Motor: Fan motor(s) shall be totally enclosed air
_____ volts, ___ phase, and ____ hertz electrical service. over (TEAO), reversible, squirrel cage, ball bearing type
The system shall include a metering valve and bleed line with 1.15 service factor, designed specifically for
to control the bleed rate from the pump discharge to the evaporative cooling duty on _____ volt/ ___ hertz/ ___
overflow connection. phase electrical service. The motor shall be furnished
with special moisture protection on windings, shafts, and
bearings. Each motor shall be mounted on an easily
3.2 Water Distribution System: Water shall be distributed adjusted, heavy-duty motor base.
evenly over the coil at a flow rate sufficient to ensure
complete wetting of the coil at all times. Large diameter,
non-clog, 360° plastic distribution nozzles shall utilize a (Alternate) 6.2 Fan Motor: Fan motor(s) shall be totally
two stage diffusion pattern to provide overlapping, enclosed air over (TEAO), reversible, squirrel cage, ball
umbrella spray patterns that create multiple intersection bearing type designed specifically for evaporative cooling
points with adjacent nozzles. The branches and spray duty on ____ volt/ ___ hertz/ ____ phase electrical
nozzles shall be held in place by snap-in rubber service. The motor shall be furnished with special
grommets, allowing quick removal of individual nozzles moisture protection on windings, shafts, and bearings.
or complete branches for cleaning or flushing. Fan motors shall be inverter duty type designed per
NEMA Standard MG1, Section IV, Part 31.
4.0 Fill and Drift Eliminators 6.3 Mechanical Equipment Warranty: The fan(s), fan
4.1 Fill and Drift Eliminators: The fill and integral drift shaft(s), sheaves, bearings, mechanical equipment
eliminators shall be formed from self-extinquishing (per support and fan motor shall be warranted against defects
ASTM-568) polyvinyl chloride (PVC) having a flame in materials and workmanship for a period of five (5)
spread rating of 5 per ASTM E84 and shall be impervious years from date of shipment.
to rot, decay, fungus and biological attack. The fill shall be

E32
6.4 ENERGY-MISER® Fan System (optional): Two single- provided to minimize vibration transmission from the tower
speed fan motors, one sized for full speed and load, the to the building structure. The isolators shall be designed
other sized for 2/3 speed and approximately 1/3 the full for a static deflection of 1" (25.4 mm) and a maximum
load horsepower, shall be provided for capacity control wind speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
and stand-by protection from drive or motor failure.
Two-speed motor(s) are not an acceptable alternative. 9.2 Basin Heater(s): The cooling tower cold water basin
shall be provided with electric heater(s) to prevent freezing
(Alternate) 3.4 BALTIGUARD PLUSTM Fan System: Two in low ambient conditions. The heater(s) shall be selected
single speed fan motors, one sized for load, the other to maintain 40°F (4.4˚C) pan water temperatures at ____°
sized for 1/3 of the full load horsepower shall be provided F(˚C) ambient. The heater(s) shall be______V/ ____
in each cell for capacity control and standby protection phase/___Hz electric and shall be provided with low water

from drive or motor failure. The manufacturer of the cutout and thermostat.
equipment shall supply controls for the larger motor, a
VFD for the smaller motor and factory programmed logic (Alternate) 9.2 Basin Heaters (Available on single air inlet
controller to maximize energy saving for off peak load and models only): A steam coil shall be factory installed in the
wet-bulb conditions. cooling tower depressed sump of the cold water basin to
prevent freezing during cold water shutdown. The steam
7.0 Access coil shall be capable of maintaining 40°F (4.4˚C) pan water
temperature at a –20°F (-28.9˚C) ambient temperature
7.1 Plenum Access: A large, hinged access door shall be given 5 psig (34 kPa) at the coil inlet connection.
provided on each end wall for access to the coil, drift
eliminators, and fan plenum section. The water make-up 9.3 Basin Water Level Control: The cooling tower
valve, float ball, and suction strainer shall be easily manufacturer shall provide an electric water level control
accessible. On single side air inlet units, the access door (EWLC) system. The system shall consist of water level
shall open to an internal walkway. sensing and control units in quantities and locations as
indicated on the drawings. Each water level sensing and
8.0 Sound control unit shall consist of the following: NEMA 4
enclosure with gasketed access cover; solid state controls
8.1 Sound Level: To maintain the quality of the local including all necessary relays and contacts to achieve the
environment, the maximum sound pressure levels (dB) specified sequence of operation; stainless steel water level
measured 50 ft (15,240 mm) from the closed circuit sensing electrodes with brass holder; Schedule 40 PVC
cooling tower operating at full fan speed shall not exceed standpipe assembly with vent holes, and all necessary
the sound levels detailed below. stainless steel mounting hardware. Provide PVC union
directly below the control enclosure to facilitate the
(Alternate) 8.1 Sound Level: To maintain the quality of the removal and access of electrodes and control enclosure.
local environment, the closed circuit cooling tower shall be
furnished with a low sound fan. The thermal performance The number and position of water level sensing electrodes
of the closed circuit cooling tower shall be certified by the shall be provided to sense the following: high water level,
Cooling Technology Institute in accordance with paragraph low water level, high water alarm level, low water alarm,
1.2 of this specification when furnished with the low sound and heater safety cutout.
fan. Maximum sound pressure levels (dB) measured 50 ft
(15,240 mm) from the closed circuit cooling tower 9.4 Vibration Cutout Switch: Provide mechanical local
operating at full fan speed shall not exceed the sound reset vibration switch. The mechanical vibration cutout
levels detailed below. switch will be guaranteed to trip at a point so as not to
cause damage to the cooling tower. To ensure this, the
trip point will be a frequency range of 0 to 3,600 RPM and
Location 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 dB(A) a trip point of 0.2 to 2.0 g’s.
Discharge
Air Inlet (Alternate) 9.4 Vibration Cutout Switch: Provide electronic
Cased Face remote reset vibration switch with contact for BAS
monitoring. Wiring shall be by the installing contractor.
The electronic vibration cut out switch shall be set to trip at
9.0 Accessories a point so as not to cause damage to the cooling tower.
The trip point will be 0.45 in/sec (0.0114 m/sec).
9.1 Vibration Isolation Rails (Available on single air inlet
9.5 Basin Sweeper Piping: The cold water basin of the
models only): Spring-type vibration isolation rails,
cooling tower shall be equipped with PVC sump sweeper
constructed of steel channels and base plates, painted
piping for a separator (supplied by others).
with a rust-resistant primer shall be provided to minimize
vibration transmission from the tower to the building 9.6 Intake Sound Attenuation: The unit shall be equipped
structure. The isolators shall be designed for a static with intake sound attenuators consisting of fiberglass
deflection of 1" (25.4 mm) and a maximum wind speed acoustical baffles encased in steel to further reduce sound
of 50 mph (80 km/h). levels.
(Alternate) 9.1 Vibration Isolation Rails (Available on single
air inlet models only): Spring-type vibration isolation rails,
constructed of steel channels and base plates, coated with
a 0.003" (.076 mm) layer of zinc after fabrication shall be

E33
9.7 Sound Attenuation: The unit shall be equipped with a 10.0 Equipment Controls (Optional)
straight hood lined with sound absorbing fiberglass
acoustical baffles to reduce sound levels from the top of 10.1 Variable Frequency Drive(s): A variable frequency
the unit. drive (VFD) shall be provided for each fan motor. The
supplier of the VFD shall be the manufacturer of the
9.8 Heat loss: The heat loss for the FXV shall be equal evaporative cooling equipment. The VFD shall have a
to or less than __________ BTUH using either a 3-contactor bypass, 3% input line reactor, a removable
standard unit, a unit with a hood, positive closure keypad, an RS232 terminal for PC connection, and a
dampers, insulation or a combination. circuit breaker disconnect. Fuse protection will not be
9.9 External platform with ladder: A galvanized steel accepted. Control voltage shall be 24V to minimize the
FXV
platform and aluminum ladder to grade shall be provided size of the enclosure which should not exceed _____ ft x
at all access doors to access the plenum section of the _____ ft x ____ ft and the weight should not exceed ____
cooling tower. All working surfaces shall be able to lbs. VFD shall be provided in a NEMA (1)(3R)(12)
withstand 50 psf live load or 200 pound concentrated enclosure. The VFD shall be compatible with a (ModBus)
load.a (LonWorks) (Johnson N2) Building Automation System.
(Alternate for Dual air inlet FXVs only) 9.9 Ladder: An OR

aluminum ladder (with galvanized steel safety cage) shall 10.1 Enclosed Controls: An enclosed control panel shall
be provided for access to the fan deck. Access door or be provided for each cell of the evaporative cooling
service platforms shall not be accepted as equal. equipment. The panel shall include full voltage,
(Alternate for Dual air inlet FXVs only) 9.9 Handrails: non-reversing (FVNR) fan motor and pump motor (if
1-1/4" galvanized steel pipe handrail shall be proved applicable) starters in a common enclosure. The panel
around the perimeter of the cooling tower cells. The shall be provided with a main a circuit breaker disconnect
handrails shall be provided with knee and toe rails and and a separate circuit breaker for each motor or speed.
shall conform to the requirements of OSHA. Fuse protection will not be accepted. Panels containing
basin heaters shall have an Earth Leakage Breaker
9.10 Internal Walkway for Dual Air inlet FXV: An internal containing ground fault protection. Starters above 25 A
walkway shall be provided in the plenum section to shall be NEMA rated. IEC starters will be accepted for
provide for inspection and maintenance. All working motors below 25 A. Panel shall include a 120V/60Hz
surfaces shall be able to withstand 50 psf (244 Kg/m2)live control power transformer, Hand-Off-Auto switches for
load or 200 pound (90.7 Kg) concentrated load. Other each starter or contactor, and pilot lights for each
components of the cooling tower, i.e. basin and fill/drift component. Enclosed controls shall be provided in a
eliminators, shall not be considered an internal working NEMA (1)(3R)(4)(4X)(12) enclosure.
surface. Manufacturers that require that these surfaces be
used as a working platform shall provide a two-year Optional enclosed control features: (A temperature sensor
extended warranty to the Owner to repair any damage to shall be provided with the enclosed controls.)(A
these surfaces caused by routine maintenance. temperature controller shall be provided with the enclosed
controls.)(A basin heater contactor with circuit breaker
9.11 Internal Platform: An internal platform shall be shall be provided.)(A vibration cutout switch input shall be
provided in the plenum section to provide for inspection provided.)
and maintenance. All working surfaces shall be able to
withstand 50 psf live load or 200 pound concentrated 10.2 Safety Switch(es): A heavy-duty, non-fusible safety
load. Other components of the cooling tower, i.e. basin disconnect switch shall be provided by the manufacturer
floor and fill/drift eliminators, shall not be considered an of the evaporative cooling equipment. Switch shall be
internal working surface. Manufacturers that require that single-throw, 3-pole design, rated up to 600 VAC. Switch
these surfaces be used as a working platform shall shall have triple padlocking capability, a visible double
provide a two-year extended warranty to the Owner to break rotary blade mechanism, a clearly visible On/Off
repair any damage to these surfaces caused by routine handle, an interlocking mechanism to prevent door
maintenance. opening with handle in On position, and a clear line shield.
Safety switch shall be provided in a NEMA (1)(3R)(12)
9.12 Fan Cylinder Extension: To extend the height of the enclosure.
tower equal to the surrounding enclosure, the cooling
tower shall be provided with ____ of fan cylinder
extension. The fan cylinder extension shall match the
construction of the fan deck.

E34
Series V

Product Detail
Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E37
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E44

E35
Series V
Series V
12 – 1,629 GPM at 95ºF/85ºF/78ºF
Series V Closed Circuit Cooling Towers deliver independently verified, fully rated thermal performance over a
wide range of flow and temperature requirements. The Series V can be installed indoors and is available in a
low profile version to accommodate limited ceiling or enclosure heights. The Series V design minimizes sound
levels and installation costs, provides year-round operating reliability, and simplifies maintenance
requirements.
Series V Closed Circuit Cooling Towers

• Suitable for indoor or outdoor installations
• Low profile models available
• Low sound
• ASME B31.5 compliant heat transfer coil

E36

E37
Benefits
Installation and Application Flexibility
• Indoor Installations — Centrifugal fans can
overcome the static pressure imposed by
Series V
external ductwork, allowing the Series V to

be installed indoors.
• Low Profile Models – The fan section of low

profile units are adjacent to the casing section to
yield models suitable for use in height sensitive
installations. Low profile models are available in
capacities from 4.5 to 108 nominal tons, which
correspond to heights of 5’ 5” (1651mm) and 8’
4-3/4” (2559.1mm), respectively. Low Profile Series V
Closed Circuit Cooling Tower
Low Sound
• Centrifugal Fan — Centrifugal fans have inherently low sound characteristics.
• Single Air Inlet — Particularly sound-sensitive areas can be accommodated by facing the quiet
blank-off panel to the sound-sensitive direction.

Evaporative cooling equipment minimizes the energy consumption of the entire system because it
Low Installed Cost

• Support – All models mount directly on two parallel I-beams and ship complete with motors and
drives factory-installed and aligned (see sketches on next page).
• Modular Design – Large models ship in multiple sections to minimize the size and weight of the
heaviest lift, allowing for the use of smaller, less costly cranes. (See drawings on following page)

E38
Easy Maintenance
Internal Access — The interior of the unit is easily

accessible for adjusting the float valve,
cleaning the strainer or flushing the basin.
The water level control (optional
electric control shown here) is easily
reached from the access door
V-Belt Drive — The fans, motor, and drive system are

located outside of the moist discharge airstream, protecting
them from moisture, condensation and icing. Backed by a
5-year fan drive and motor warranty, these units are
suitable for year-round operation.
V-Belt drive system

Long Service Life
Materials of Construction – Various materials are available to meet
the corrosion resistance, unit operating life, and budgetary
requirements of any project (see page E41 for construction options).
VF1 Models VFL Models
Steel Supports
Steel Supports

E39
4
2
Series V
Coil section
(typical for all models)
1 Heavy-Duty Construction 3 Coil

• G-235 (Z700 metric) hot-dip galvanized • Continuous serpentine, steel tubing
steel panels • Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (HDGAF)
2 Water Distribution System • Sloped tubes for free drainage of fluid
• Schedule 40 PVC spray branches • ASME B31.5 compliant
• Large orifice, 360˚ non-clog nozzles • When required, orders shipping into
• Grommetted for easy removal Canada are supplied with a CRN
4 Drift Eliminators
• Flame spread rating of 5 per ASTM E84-03
• Assembled in easy to handle sections

E40

6
7
VF1 Models
4
2
3
6
1
VFL Models 5
7
5 Fan Drive System 7 Recirculating Spray Pump

• V-belt drive • Close coupled, bronze fitted centrifugal pump
• Heavy-duty bearings • Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) motor
(280,000 hour average life) • Bleed line with metering valve installed from
• Cooling tower duty fan motor pump discharge to overflow
• 5-year motor and drive warranty
8 Access Door
6 Low Sound Centrifugal Fan(s) • Circular access door
• Quiet operation
• Corrosion resistant 9 Strainer (Not Shown)
• Anti-vortexing design to prevent air entrainment

E41

• Standard Construction – Steel panels and structural elements are constructed of heavy-gauge
G-235 (Z700 metric) hot-dip galvanized steel.
Series V
• Optional BALTIBOND® Corrosion Protection System – The BALTIBOND® Corrosion Protection

System is a hybrid polymer coating used to extend equipment life, is applied to all hot-dip
galvanized steel components of the cooling tower.
• Optional Water Contact Series 300 Stainless Steel Cold Water Basin – A cost effective
alternative to all stainless steel cold water basin construction. All water contact steel panels in the
cold water basin are constructed of Series 300 stainless steel. All other steel components are
constructed of the base material of construction (galvanized steel or the BALTIBOND® Corrosion
Protection System).
• Optional Series 300 Stainless Steel Cold Water Basin - All steel panels and structural elements
of the cold water basin are constructed of Series 300 stainless steel. This option is available on
VF1 models only. See the “Optional Water-Contact Stainless Steel Cold Water Basin” for VFL
Models.
• Optional Water Contact Series 300 Stainless Steel Construction – A cost effective alternative to
an all stainless steel unit. All water contact steel panels in the cold water basin and casing are
constructed of Series 300 stainless steel. All other steel components are constructed of the base
material of construction (galvanized steel or the BALTIBOND® Corrosion Protection System).
• Optional Series 300 Stainless Steel Construction – All steel panels and structural elements are
constructed of Series 300 Stainless steel
Coil Configurations
• Standard Serpentine Coil:
The standard cooling coil is constructed of continuous lengths of all prime surface steel, hot-dip
with sloping tubes for free drainage of fluid. Each coil is pneumatically tested at 375 psig
(2,586 kPa) and is ASME B31.5 compliant.
• Optional Extended Surface Coil:

Coils are available with half or all rows finned at 5 fins per inch for seasonal wet/dry operation.
The coil is hot-dip galvanized (outside surface) after fabrication (HDGAF). The coil is designed for
375 psig (2,586 kPa) and is ASME B31.5 compliant.

E42
Coil Configurations
Coils are available in Series 300 stainless steel for specialized applications. The coil is designed for
375 psig (2,586 kPa) and is ASME B31.5 compliant.
• Optional Cleanable Header Coil:

The cleanable header tube bundle provides removable cover plates on the inlet and outlet header
boxes to permit access to each serpentine tube circuit for solvent or air-pressure cleaning. Tubes are
all prime surface steel tubing formed into a serpentine shape and welded into an assembly. Coil
material options include carbon steel coils (hot-dip galvanized outside surface) or stainless steel coils.
Each coil is pneumatically tested at 125 psig (860 kPa).
• Optional Straight-Through Cleanable Coil:
A header box with a removable cover plate at each end of the coil allows access to every tube end for
mechanical cleaning or plugging. It is available in carbon steel (hot-dip galvanized inside and out) or
stainless steel. Each coil is pneumatically tested at 125 psig (860 kPa).
• Optional ASME “U” Stamp Coil:
This coil is manufactured and tested in accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,
Section VIII, Division 1, and bears the ASME “U” stamp. ASME coils are hot-dip galvanized
(outside surface) after fabrication (HDGAF). The coil is designed for low pressure drop with sloping
tubes for free drainage of fluid. Each coil is pneumatically tested at 375 psig (2,586 kPa).
When required, orders shipping into Canada are supplied with a CRN. Other coil configurations are
available for specific applications. Contact your local BAC Representative for details.
Cleanable header coil Straight-through cleanable coil

E43

Fan Drive System
The fan drive system provides the cooling air
necessary to reject unwanted heat from the system
Series V
to the atmosphere. Dynamically balanced, forwardly

curved, centrifugal fans driven by matched V-belts
with taper lock sheaves designed for not less than
150% of the motor nameplate horsepower are
standard. Cooling tower duty fan motors, custom
engineered for BAC to provide maximum
performance for cooling tower service, are provided
and backed by BAC’s comprehensive 5-year motor
and fan drive warranty.
Standard fan drive system

approximately 2/3 speed and consumes only 1/3
the design horsepower. This configuration allows
the system to be operated like a two-speed motor,
but with the reserve capacity of a standby motor in
the event of failure. As a minimum, approximately
70% capacity will be available from the low horse-
power motor, even on a design wet-bulb day.
Controls and wiring are the same as those required ENERGY-MISER® Fan System
for a two-speed, two-winding motor. Significant energy
savings are achieved when operating at low speed during
periods of reduced load and/or low wet-bulb temperatures.

BALTIGUARD PLUSTM Fan System refer to pages G1.

E44
Accessories
Equipment Controls
BAC control panels are specifically designed to work
seamlessly with all BAC units and engineered to
meet you particular application. For more on BAC

Equipment Controls, see pages G1-G13.

The low sound levels generated by Series V Closed
Circuit Cooling Towers make them suitable for most
installations. For situations when one direction is
particularly sound sensitive, the unit can be oriented Variable frequency drive
so that the side opposite the air intake faces the sound-sensitive direction. The Series V is also available
with factory designed, tested and rated sound attenuation for both the air intake and discharge.
External Access Options

(VF1 Models Only)
In the event the end-user elects to provide access to
the top of the unit, VF1 models can be furnished with
ladders extending from the base of the unit to the top,
as well as safety cages, safety gates and handrail
packages. All components are designed to meet
OSHA requirements. All access to the top of the
equipment must be made in accordance with
applicable government occupational safety standards.
NOTE: When these access options are employed, the
unit must be equipped with steel drift eliminators. Unit shown with external access platform

Additional contacts can be provided to activate an alarm.

E45

The electric water level control replaces the
standard mechanical makeup valve when a more
precise water level control is required. This
package consists of a conductance-actuated level
control mounted in the basin and a solenoid
activated valve in the make-up water line. The
Series V
valve is slow closing to minimize water hammer.
Basin Heaters Basin heater
Closed circuit cooling towers exposed to below freezing ambient temperatures require protection to
prevent freezing of the water in the cold water basin when the unit is idle. Factory installed electric
immersion heaters, which maintain +40°F (4.4°C) water temperature, are a simple and inexpensive
way of providing such protection.
Heater Sizing Data

Model Numbers No. of Heaters kW per Heater No. of Heaters kW per Heater
VFL-012 1 2 1 2
VFL-024 1 3 1 4
VFL-036 1 4 1 5
VFL-048 1 5 1 7
VFL-072 1 7 1 9
VFL-096 1 9 1 12
VF1-009 1 2 1 2
VF1-018 1 2 11 2
VF1-027 1 2 1 3
VF1-036 1 3 1 5
VF1-048 1 3 11 5
VF1-072 1 5 1 7.5
VF1-096 1 5 1 7.5
VF1-144N 1 7 1 10
VF1-144 1 8 1 10
VF1-192 2 5 2 7.5
VF1-216 1 12 1 16
VF1-288N 2 7 2 10
VF1-288 2 8 2 10
VF1-432 2 12 2 16

E46

Extended lubrication lines with grease fittings located outside the fan section are available for lubrication
of the fan shaft bearings.
Bottom Screens (VF1 Models Only)

Wire mesh screens are available factory-installed over the bottom openings to prevent unauthorized
access.

Basin sweeper piping is an effective method of
eliminating sediment that may collect in the cold
water basin of the tower. A piping system is provided
for connection to side stream filtration equipment
(by others) with a supply pressure of 10-20 psig.
For more information on filtration systems, see
page M159.
Solid Bottom Panels

Factory-installed bottom panels are required when
intake air is ducted to the unit.
Capacity Control Dampers

Modulating capacity control dampers are available Solid bottom panels
to provide better leaving water temperature control than can be obtained from fan cycling alone. A
standard electrical control package for dampers is available.
Discharge Hoods
BAC offers a full line of standard discharge hoods
with and without positive closure dampers that are
built, tested, and rated specifically for all Series V
Closed Circuit Cooling Towers. The tapered hoods
are designed to increase the discharge air
velocity to avoid recirculation in extremely tight
enclosures. Straight or tapered hoods can be used
to elevate the unit discharge above adjacent walls.
A larger fan motor may be necessary when this
option is provided. See page E53 for details of
hoods furnished with positive closure dampers.
Tapered discharge hood with positive closure dampers

E47
VFL Engineering Data

Series V
End Elevation View Side Elevation View
1"
4' 1-1/4" 2" DRAIN
Models VFL-012 to 048
2" MAKE-UP
2"
7' 10-1/2"
Models VFL-072 to 096

E48
See page E81

for Engineering
Considerations.
MOTOR HP WEIGHTS (LBS) DIMENSIONS CONNECTIONS SPRAY

MODEL NOMINAL AIRFLOW INTERNAL COIL
PUMP
NUMBER TONS1 FAN5 PUMP (CFM) OPERATING2 SHIPPING L H F COIL3,6 OVERFLOW VOLUME (GAL)
(GPM)
VFL-012-02G 4.5 3 9,220 2,560 1,880 5’ 5” 1’ 2-1/4” 45 18

VFL-012-12G 7.4 3 9,010 2,810 2,090 6’ 3-3/4” 1’ 10-3/4” 45 25
VFL-012-22G 9.4 3 1/3 8,870 3,140 2,330 7’ 0-3/4” 6’ 10” 2’ 7-1/4” 3” 2” 45 32
VFL-012-32G 12 3 8,760 3,425 2,555 7’ 6-1/2” 3’ 3-3/4” 45 39
VFL-012-32H 14 5 10,380 3,425 2,555 7’ 6-1/2” 3’ 3-3/4” 45 39
VFL-024-12H 17 5 15,430 4,610 3,120 6’ 3-3/4” 1’ 9-3/4” 94 47
VFL-024-22H 21 5 15,180 5,130 3,510 6’ 7-1/4” 2’ 6-1/4” 94 61
1/2 10’ 11-3/4” 4” 2”
VFL-024-32H 26 5 14,990 5,750 3,960 7’ 3-3/4” 3’ 2-3/4” 94 75
VFL-024-32J 30 7 1/2 17,160 5,750 4,000 7’ 6-1/2” 3’ 2-3/4” 94 75
VFL-036-22K 35 10 23,580 7,070 4,690 6’ 10-1/4” 2’ 9-1/4” 142 90
VFL-036-32K 43 10 1 23,290 7,950 5,330 14’ 11-9/16” 7’ 8-3/4” 3’ 6-1/2” 4” 2” 142 111
VFL-036-31M 49 20 29,340 7,970 5,350 7’ 11-1/2” 3’ 6-1/2” 142 111
VFL-048-22L 43 15 29,150 8,905 5,615 6’ 10-1/4” 3’ 6-1/2” 192 119
VFL-048-31L 46 15 28,790 9,920 6,480 7’ 8-3/4” 3’ 6-1/2” 192 148
1 1/2 17’ 11-3/4” 4” 3”
VFL-048-31M 52 20 31,680 9,920 6,480 7’ 8-3/4” 3’ 6-1/2” 192 148
VFL-048-41M 55 20 31,360 10,950 7,230 8’ 4-3/4” 4’ 3-3/4” 192 177
VFL-072-22N 69 25 45,390 13,555 8,755 7’ 1” 2’ 9-1/4” 284 180
VFL-072-22O 75 30 48,240 13,555 8,755 7’ 1” 2’ 9-1/4” 284 180
VFL-072-31O 81 30 1 1/2 47,640 15,190 9,920 14’ 11-9/16” 7’ 11-1/2” 3’ 6-1/2” 4” 3” 284 223
VFL-072-41O 86 30 47,150 16,590 10,950 8’ 7-1/2” 4’ 3-3/4” 294 265
VFL-072-41P 97 40 51,900 16,590 10,950 8’ 7-1/2” 4’ 3-3/4” 284 265
VFL-096-41O 94 30 54,110 20,680 12,960 8’ 4-3/4” 4’ 3-3/4” 384 347
2 17’ 11-3/4” 4” 3”
VFL-096-41P 108 40 59,560 20,680 12,960 8’ 4-3/4” 4’ 3-3/4” 384 347
Notes:
1. Nominal tonnage is CTI Certified performance at a 95ºF entering 4. If discharge hoods with positive closure dampers are furnished,
water temperature, an 85ºF leaving water temperature, and a see page E53 for added weight and height. Fan motor
78ºF entering wet-bulb temperature. Consult BAC selection horsepower may increase; consult selection software for
software for all other conditions. verification.
2. Operating weight is for the unit with water level in the cold water 5. Fan horsepower is at 0” external static pressure.
basin at the overflow. 6. The number and location of coil connections will vary with
3. Standard coil connections are beveled for welding. design flow and coil arrangement.
7. All units ship in one piece.

E49
VF1 Engineering Data

Series V
1"
2"
2"
3' 11-1/2"
Models VF1-009 to 036
1"
3"
2"
4' 8-5/8"
Models VF1-048
2"
3"
7' 10-3/8"
Models VF1-072

E50
See page E81

for Engineering
Considerations.
MOTOR HP WEIGHTS (LBS) DIMENSIONS COIL SPRAY INTERNAL

MODEL NOMINAL AIRFLOW
CONN. PUMP COIL VOLUME
NUMBER TONS1 FAN5 PUMP (CFM) OPERATING2 SHIPPING HEAVIEST7 L H F A
SECTION SIZE3,6 (GPM) (GAL)

VF1-009-12G 5.5 3 5,690 1,875 1,625 1,625* 7’ 3-3/4” 1’ 10-3/4” 20
VF1-009-22G 6.8 3 5,590 2,075 1,785 1,000 8’ 0-1/4” 2’ 7-3/4” 26
1/3 3’ 0” 3’ 8-1/8” 3” 35
VF1-009-32G 8.3 3 5,520 2,295 1,965 1,180 8’ 8-3/4” 3’ 3-3/4” 31
VF1-009-42G 9.2 3 5,470 2,495 2,125 1,340 9’ 4-3/4” 3’ 11-3/4” 36
VF1-018-02H 9.5 5 11,180 2,635 2,175 2,175* 6’ 7-1/4” 1’ 1-1/4” 27
VF1-018-12H 14 5 10,930 2,955 2,415 2,415* 7’ 3-3/4” 1’ 9-3/4” 38
VF1-018-22J 20 7.5 1/2 12,310 3,260 2,640 1,720 6’ 0” 8’ 0-1/4” 2’ 6-1/4” 3’ 8-1/8” 4” 75 49
VF1-018-32J 22 7.5 12,150 3,660 2,940 2,010 8’ 8-3/4” 3’ 2-3/4” 60
VF1-018-42J 24 7.5 12,030 4,010 3,190 2,260 9’ 5-1/4” 3’ 11-1/4” 71
VF1-027-22H 24 5 14,060 4,940 3,830 2,410 7’ 6” 2’ 0” 72
VF1-027-22J 28 7.5 16,090 4,860 3,750 2,470 8’ 3-1/4” 2’ 9-1/4” 72
3/4 8’ 11-3/4” 3’ 8-1/8” 4” 115
VF1-027-32K 35 10 17,490 5,440 4,108 2,850 9’ 0-1/2” 3’ 6-1/2” 89
VF1-027-42K 37 10 17,310 5,970 4,570 3,240 9’ 9-3/4” 4’ 3-3/4” 106
VF1-036-21L 41 15 24,870 6,280 4,760 3,200 8’ 3-1/4” 2’ 9-1/4” 95
VF1-036-31L 44 15 24,560 7,020 5,310 3,720 9’ 0-1/2” 3’ 6-1/2” 118
1 12’ 0” 3’ 8-1/8” 4” 150
VF1-036-41L 47 15 24,310 7,710 5,810 4,220 9’ 9-3/4” 4’ 3-3/4” 140
VF1-036-51L 49 15 24,100 8,390 6,310 4,720 10’ 7” 5’ 1” 163
VF1-048-21M 55 20 35,790 10,230 7,870 4,920 9’ 11-5/8” 2’ 9-1/4” 137
VF1-048-31N 65 25 1 1/2 38,070 11,390 8,460 5,930 11’ 11-1/2” 10’ 8-7/8” 3’ 6-1/2” 5’ 4-1/2” 4” 220 170
VF1-048-41N 70 25 37,690 12,690 9,320 6,600 11’ 6-1/8” 4’ 3-3/4” 203
VF1-072-21O 75 30 52,650 15,670 10,720 6,580 11’ 3-7/8” 2’ 9-1/4” 190
VF1-072-31O 81 30 2 51,990 17,380 12,050 7,950 11’ 7-3/4” 12’ 1-1/8” 3’ 6-1/2” 6’ 8-3/4” 4” 305 235
VF1-072-41O 86 30 51,460 18,000 12,480 8,410 12’ 10-3/8” 4’ 3-3/4” 281
Notes: 4. If discharge hoods with positive closure dampers are furnished,

see page E53 for added weight and height. Fan motor horsepower
1. Nominal tonnage is CTI Certified performance at a 95ºF entering
may increase; consult selection software for verification.
water temperature, an 85ºF leaving water temperature, and a 78ºF
entering wet-bulb temperature. Consult BAC selection software for 5. Fan horsepower is at 0” external static pressure.
all other conditions. 6. The number and location of coil connections will vary with design
2. Operating weight is for the unit with water level in the cold water flow and coil arrangement.
basin at the overflow. 7. Units marked with an asterisk ship in one piece. The coil section is
3. Standard coil connections are beveled for welding. the heaviest section.

E51
VF1 Engineering Data

Series V
End Elevation View

Side Elevation View
ACCESS
2" MAKE-UP
3" OVERFLOW
7' 10-3/8"
Models VF1-096N to 288N Models VF1-096 to 144N
MAKE-UP
3" OVERFLOW
2"DRAIN
11' 10"
Models VF1-144 to 432 Models VF1-216

24"-0 1/2 "
11'-11 3/4"
M M
Models VF1-288
L

E52
See page E81

for Engineering
Considerations.
36'-1 1/4"
1/2" FPT VENT 18'-0 1/8"

F
BFW FLUID IN
H
BFW FLUID OUT

A
MAKE-UP ACCESS
3" OVERFLOW
2" DRAIN M M M M
11'-10" Models VF1-432

MOTOR HP WEIGHTS (LBS) DIMENSIONS CONNECTION SIZES SPRAY INTERNAL
MODEL NOMINAL AIRFLOW
HEAVIEST PUMP COIL VOLUME
NUMBER TONS1 FAN 5
PUMP (CFM) OPERATING2 SHIPPING L H F A COIL3,6
MAKE-UP
SECTION7 (GPM) (GAL)
VF1-096-31O 81 30 53,540 19,385 12,795 8,460 13’ 6-3/8” 3’ 6-1/2” 296
VF1-096-41P 99 40 3 58,320 21,345 14,215 9,880 11’ 7-3/4” 14’ 3-5/8” 4’ 3-3/4” 8’ 1-5/8” 4” 2” 400 353
VF1-096-51Q 114 50 62,290 22,255 14,855 10,520 15’ 0-78” 5’ 1” 411
VF1-144N-21Q 127 50 72,700 25,610 16,430 10,390 12’ 9-1/8” 2’ 9-1/4” 356
VF1-144N-31R 148 60 5 76,290 28,480 18,490 12,570 17’ 8-1/3” 13’ 6-3/8” 3’ 6-1/2” 8’ 1-5/8” 4” 2” 610 443
VF1-144N-41R 157 60 75,510 31,560 20,750 14,570 14’ 3-5/8” 4’ 3-3/4” 529
VF1-192-31O 163 (2) 30 108,150 38,900 25,570 8,460 13’ 6-3/8” 3’ 6-1/2” 592
VF1-192-41P 198 (2) 40 (2) 3 115,640 42,780 28,360 9,880 23’ 8-1/2” 14’ 3-5/8” 4’ 3-3/4” 8’ 1-5/8” 4” 2” 800 706
VF1-192-51Q 228 (2) 50 123,490 44,600 29,780 10,520 15’ 0-7/8” 5’ 0” 822
VF1-288N-21Q 253 (2) 50 145,510 51,260 32,750 11,970** 12’ 9-1/8” 2’ 9-1/4” 712
VF1-288N-31R 295 (2) 60 (2) 5 152,700 57,080 36,250 12,570 35’ 9-1/4” 13’ 6-3/8” 3’ 6-1/2” 8’ 1-5/8” 4” 2” 1,220 886
VF1-288N-41R 313 (2) 60 151,140 62,280 40,520 14,750 14’ 3-5/8” 4’ 3-3/4” 1,058
VF1-144-21Q 129 50 87,600 27,090 16,530 10,300 12’ 11-1/2” 2’ 9-1/4” 365
VF1-144-31Q 140 50 5 86,500 29,980 18,610 12,370 11’ 7-3/4” 13’ 8-3/4” 3’ 6-1/2” 8’4” 4” 2” 620 453
VF1-144-41R 164 60 90,990 32,840 20,640 14,440 14’ 6” 4’ 3-3/4” 541
VF1-216-21O 188 (2) 30 125,030 40,190 24,200 15,170 12’ 11-1/2” 2’ 9-1/4” 545
VF1-216-31P 231 (2) 40 7.5 135,890 44,370 27,140 18,290 17’ 8-1/8” 13’ 8-3/4” 3’ 6-1/2” 8’4” 4” 2” 900 677
VF1-216-41P 245 (2) 40 134,510 48,570 30,090 21,410 14’ 6” 4’ 3-3/4” 809
VF1-288-21Q 259 (2) 50 175,190 54,300 32,930 11,430** 12’ 11-1/2” 2’ 9-1/4” 730
VF1-288-31Q 281 (2) 50 (2) 5 173,010 60,820 37,020 12,370 23’ 8-1/2” 13’ 8-3/4” 3’ 6-1/2” 8’4” 4” 2” 1,240 906
VF1-288-41R 325 (2) 60 181,970 65,720 41,050 14,440 14’ 6” 4’ 3-3/4” 1,082
VF1-432-21O 376 (4) 30 250,060 78,200 45,960 15,620** 12’ 11-1/2” 2’ 9-1/4” 1,090
VF1-432-31P 462 (4) 40 (2) 7.5 271,790 87,120 52,400 18,290 35’ 9-1/4” 13’ 8-3/4” 3’ 6-1/2” 8’4” 4” 3” 1,800 1,354
VF1-432-41P 490 (4) 40 289,790 96,420 59,200 21,410 14’ 6” 4’ 3-3/4” 1,618
Notes:
1. Nominal tonnage is CTI Certified performance at a 95ºF, an 85ºF 5. Fan horsepower is at 0” external static pressure.
and a 78ºF entering wet-bulb temperature. Consult BAC selection 6. The number and location of coil connections will vary with design
software for all other conditions. flow and coil arrangement.
2. Operating weight is for the unit with water level in the cold water 7. Unless marked with a double asterisk (**), the coil section is the
basin at the overflow. heaviest section.
3. Standard coil connections are beveled for welding.
4. If discharge hoods with positive closure dampers are furnished,
see page E53 for added weight and height. Fan motor horsepower
may increase; consult selection software for verification.

E53
Engineering Data
Discharge Hoods with Positive Closure Dampers
Both tapered and straight discharge hoods with factory mounted positive closure dampers and damper
actuators are available for all Series V Closed Circuit Cooling Towers. Hoods are designed to minimize
heat loss from convective air flow through an idle unit. The addition of factory installed insulation to the
Series V
hood and casing further reduces the heat loss by minimizing losses due to conduction. Heat loss data is
presented on page E54 for units without hood, with hood, and with insulated casing and hood. Damper
actuators and linkage are factory mounted on the hood.
All wiring and actuator controls must be furnished by others. 115 volt single phase power supply is
required. Damper actuators should be interlocked with the temperature control system so that the
dampers are open when the pumps are running and closed when the pumps are off.
The additional external static pressure of the tapered discharge hood with dampers may require the use
of a larger fan motor; consult selection software for verification. Consult your local BAC Representative
for unit drawing with a hood and positive closure dampers.
NUMBER OF TAPERED TOTAL STRAIGHT TOTAL

MODEL
HOODS SHIPPING SHIPPING
NUMBER L W H L W H
REQUIRED WEIGHT (LBS) WEIGHT (LBS)
VFL-012 1 2’ 11-1/8” 2’ 3-1/2” 2’ 6-1/2”2 2204 2’ 11-1/8” 3’ 3/8” 2’ 9-1/4”2 2604
VFL-024 1 3’ 10-1/4” 2’ 3-1/2” 2’ 6-1/2”2 3304 5’ 3” 3’ 3/8” 2’ 9-1/4”2 4104
VFL-036 1 6’ 11” 2’ 3-1/2” 2’ 6-1/2”2 4704 8’ 2-1/2” 3’ 3/8” 2’ 9-1/4”2 5404
VFL-048 1 9’ 10” 2’ 3-1/2” 2’ 6-1/2”2 5904 11’ 2” 3’ 3/8” 2’ 9-1/4”2 7604
VFL-072 1 6’ 11” 4’- 1/2” 4’ 0”2 9104 8’ 2-1/2” 6’ 3-3/4” 2’ 9-1/4”2 9604
VFL-096 1 8’ 2-1/2” 4’- 1/2” 4’ 0”2 1,1004 11’ 2” 6’ 3-3/4” 2’ 9-1/4”2 1,2004
VF1-009 1 2’ 11-1/8” 1’ 4-1/4” 2’ 10-3/8”1 2803 2’ 11-1/8” 3’ 3/8” 2’ 9-1/8”1 3003
VF1-018 1 3’ 10-1/4” 1’ 4-1/4” 2’ 10-3/8”1 4703 5’ 1/4” 3’ 3/8” 2’ 9-1/8”1 4903
VF1-027 1 6’ 11” 1’ 4-1/4” 2’ 10-3/8”1 6403 8’ 2-1/2” 3’ 3/8” 2’ 9-1/8”1 6803
VF1-036 1 9’ 10” 1’ 4-1/4” 2’ 10-3/8”1 7603 11’ 2” 3’ 3/8” 2’ 9-1/8”1 8403
VF1-048 1 8’ 2-1/2” 2’ 3-1/2” 4’ 5-1/2”1 1,2403 11’ 2” 4’ 1/2” 3’ 6-1/8”2 1,2203
VF1-072 1 8’ 2-1/2” 3’ 3/8” 4’ 5-1/2”1 1,5403 10’5-1/8” 5’ 10” 3’ 6-1/8”2 1,6203
VF1-096 1 8’ 2-1/2” 4’ 1/2” 4’ 1-1/2”2 1,2004 11’ 2” 6’ 3-3/4” 3’ 6-1/8”2 1,3204
VF1-144N 1 14’ 1-1/2” 3’ 7-1/2” 4’ 1-1/2”2 1,7504 16’ 8” 6’ 3-3/4” 3’ 6-1/8”2 1,8204
VF1-144 1 8’ 2-1/2” 6’ 3-3/4” 4’ 1-1/2”2 1,5504 11’ 2” 10’ 3-7/8” 3’ 6-1/8”2 1,7504
VF1-192 2 8’ 2-1/2” 4’ 1/2” 4’ 1-1/2”2 2,4004 11’ 2” 6’ 6-3/4” 3’ 6-1/8”2 2,6404
VF1-216 1 14’ 1-1/2” 5’ 11” 4’ 1-1/2”2 2,1504 16’ 8” 10’ 3-7/8” 3’ 6-1/8”2 2,4004
VF1-288N 2 14’ 1-1/2” 3’ 7-1/2” 4’ 1-1/2”2 3,5004 16’ 8” 6’ 3-3/4” 3’ 6-1/8”2 3,6404
VF1-288 2 8’ 2-1/2” 6’ 3-3/4” 4’ 1-1/2”2 3,1004 11’ 2” 10’ 3-7/8” 3’ 6-1/8”2 3,5004
VF1-432 2 14’ 1-1/2” 5’ 11” 4’ 1-1/2”2 4,3004 16’ 8” 10’ 3-7/8” 3’ 6-1/8”2 4,8004
Notes (applicable to specific models only):

1. On these models, the discharge hood surrounds the drift 2. On these units, the hood sits directly on top of the casing.
eliminators and is recessed into the drift eliminator frame; 3. Includes drift eliminators and skid.
therefore, the overall height of the unit with hood equals H (of unit)
4. Includes skid only. Drift eliminators are included in unit weight.
plus H (of hood) minus 4”.

E54
See page E81

for Engineering
Heat Loss Data Considerations.
VFL Heat Loss Data (BTUH)1 VF1 Heat Loss Data (BTUH)1
Unit w/ Hood, Unit w/ Hood,
Standard Unit Unit w/ Hood Positive Closure Standard Unit Unit w/hood Positive Closure
Model Number Heat Loss & Positive Closure Dampers & Model Number Heat Loss & Positive Dampers &

(VFL Models Only) (BTU/HR) Dampers Insulation2 ( VF1 Models Only) (Btu/hr) Closure Dampers Insulation2
VFL-012-02G 19,200 16,500 11,000 VF1-009-12G 24,300 17,100 10,300
VF1-009-22G 29,400 18,800 12,000
VFL-012-12G 25,000 17,800 11,900
VF1-009-32G 32,900 20,500 12,000
VFL-012-22G 29,900 19,200 12,800
VF1-009-42G 34,800 22,200 13,700
VFL-012-32G/H 33,800 20,500 13,700 VF1-018-02H 34,700 25,600 15,400
VFL-024-12H 48,200 28,500 19,000 VF1-018-12H 46,200 27,300 15,400
VFL-024-22H 57,700 30,400 20,300 VF1-018-22J 56,000 29,100 17,100
VFL-024-32H/J 65,400 32,300 21,500 VF1-018-32J 64,300 30,800 17,100

VF1-018-42J 70,950 32,550 18,800
VFL-036-22K 87,000 47,100 30,700
VF1-027-22H/J 86,100 46,100 27,300
VFL-036-332K/M 98,400 49,800 32,500
VF1-027-32K 97,700 49,500 29,100
VFL-048-22L 126,400 66,000 42,600 VF1-027-42K 106,300 52,900 29,100
VFL-048-31L/M 138,800 69,300 44,800 VF1-036-21L 112,600 63,200 39,300
VFL-048-41M 151,200 72,600 47,000 VF1-036-31L 128,900 66,600 39,300
VFL-072-22N/O 210,900 84,400 56,200 VF1-036-41L 145,200 70,000 43,600
VF1-036-51L 161,500 73,400 43,600
VFL-072-31O 234,100 87,900 58,600
VF1-048-21M 154,900 80,200 52,900
VFL-072-41O/P 252,900 91,400 60,900
VF1-048-31N 177,200 83,700 52,900
VFL-096-41O/P 311,700 103,600 69,000 VF1-048-41N 197,000 85,600 54,600
VF1-072-21O 212,400 83,700 51,200
VF1-072-31O 241,100 87,100 51,200
VF1-072-41O 269,800 90,500 56,800
VF1-096-31O 286,700 97,600 60,000
VF1-096-41P 312,100 102,600 60,900
VF1-096-51Q 329,800 107,900 61,700
VF1-144N-21Q 381,400 128,300 81,300
VF1-144N-31R 429,900 134,700 82,800
VF1-144N-41R 464,800 141,400 84,400
VF1-144-21Q 385,000 139,900 88,600
VF1-144-31Q 435,500 146,900 90,200
VF1-144-41R 474,600 154,200 91,900
VF1-192-31O 576,300 228,400 153,600
VF1-192-41P 627,300 240,100 156,700
VF1-192-51Q 662,800 252,500 160,100
VF1-216-21O 579,900 194,000 122,900
VF1-216-31P 653,500 203,700 125,100
VF1-216-41P 707,300 213,800 127,300
VF1-288N-21Q 762,800 256,600 162,600
VF1-288N-31R 859,800 269,400 165,600
VF1288N-41R 929,600 282,800 168,800
VF1-288-21Q 750,800 260,300 171,900
VF1-288-31Q 849,300 273,300 175,000
VF1-288-41R 925,600 286,800 178,300
VF1-432-21O 1,142,500 390,000 259,400
VF1-432-31P 1,287,400 409,500 264,000
VF1-432-41P 1,393,500 429,800 268,500
Notes:
1. Heat loss is based on 50ºF coil water and –10ºF ambient with a 45 MPH wind. Fan(s) and pump(s) are off.
2. One inch thick PVC nitrite rubber blend thermal insulation with protective paint.

E55
Structural Support
The recommended support arrangement for the Series V Closed Circuit Cooling Tower consists of parallel
I-beams running the full length of the unit, spaced as shown in the following drawing. Besides providing
adequate support, the steel also serves to raise the unit above any solid foundation to ensure access to the
bottom of the tower. To support a Series V Closed Circuit Cooling Tower in an alternate steel support
arrangement, consult your local BAC Representative.
Series V
All VFL Models VF1-009 thru -048, -072, -096, & -144
VF1-144N, -192, -216 & -288 VF1-288N & -432
MODEL NUMBER A B MAXIMUM DEFLECTION3

VFL-012 3’ 11” 4’ 6” 1/4”
VFL-024 3’ 11” 7’ 11-1/2” 3/8”
VFL-036 3’ 11” 10’ 11-1/4” 1/2”
VFL-048 3’ 11” 13’ 11-1/2” 1/2”
VFL-072 7’ 8-1/4” 10’ 11-1/4” 1/2”
VFL-096 7’ 8-1/4” 13’ 11-1/2” 1/2”
VF1-009 3’ 9-3/8” 2’ 5-1/2” 3/32”
VF1-018 3’ 9-3/8” 5’ 5-1/2” 3/16”
VF1-027 3’ 9-3/8” 8’ 5-1/4” 5/16”
VF1-036 3’ 9-3/8” 11’ 5-1/2” 3/8”
VF1-048 4’ 6-1/4” 11’ 5-1/2” 3/8”
VF1-072, 096 7’ 7-5/8” 10’ 7-1/4” 3/8”
VF1-144N 7’ 7-5/8” 16’ 7-3/4” 1/2”
VF1-192 7’ 7-5/8” 22’ 8-1/4” 1/2”
VF1-288N 7’ 7-5/8” 34’ 8-3/4” 1/2”
VF1-144 11’ 7-1/4” 10’ 7-1/2” 3/8”
VF1-216 11’ 7-1/4” 16’ 7-3/4” 1/2”
VF1-288 11’ 7-1/4” 22’ 8-1/4” 1/2”
VF1-432 11’ 7-1/4” 34’ 8-3/4” 1/2”
Notes: 4. All units can be furnished with an optional vibration isolation

package, if required, to be installed between the tower and
1. Support beams and anchor bolts are to be selected and supporting steel. When determining the length of steel beams,
installed by others. allow for the length of vibration isolation rails, as they may be
2. All supporting steel must be level at the top. longer than the tower length shown above.
3. Beams must be selected in accordance with accepted structural 5. If point vibration isolation is used, the isolators must be located
practice. The maximum allowable deflection of beams under the under the supporting steel, not between the support steel and the
unit shall be as specified in the table above. cooling tower.

E56
1.0 Closed Circuit Cooling Tower 3. Shall withstand impact of 160 in-lbs per ASTM D2794 without
fracture or delamination of the polymer layer.
1.1 General: Furnish and install ____factory assembled, forced 4. Shall with stand 6000 hours of ultraviolet radiation equivalent
draft, centrifugal fan, closed circuit cooling tower(s) with vertical to 120,000 hours of noontime sun exposure without loss of
air discharge, conforming in all aspects to the specifications and functional properties.

schedules as shown on the plans. Overall dimensions shall not
exceed approximately ____ft (mm) long x ____ft (mm) wide x 5. Shall withstand 200 thermal shock cycles between -25ºF and
____ft (mm) high. The total connected fan horsepower shall not +180ºF (-32˚C and 82˚C) without loss of adhesion or other
exceed ____HP (kW). The total connected pump horsepower deterioration.
shall not exceed ____HP (kW). The closed circuit cooling
tower(s) shall be Baltimore Aircoil Company Model(s) 6. Shall withstand 6000 hours of exposure to 60 psi (42,184
________________. kg/m2) water jet without signs of wear or erosion.
1.2 Thermal Capacity (water as heat transfer fluid): The 1.4 Quality Assurance: The closed circuit cooling tower
closed-circuit cooling tower(s) shall be warranted by the manufacturer shall have a management system certified by an
manufacturer to cool ______USGPM (l/s) of _______ water from accredited registrar as complying with the requirements of
____°F (°C) to ____°F (°C) at ____°F (°C) entering wet-bulb ISO-9001:2000 to ensure consistent quality of its products and
temperature. The thermal performance shall be certified by the services. Closed circuit cooling tower manufacturers that are not
Cooling Technology Institute in accordance with CTI Certification ISO-9001:2000 certified shall provide an additional year of
Standard STD-201. A manufacturer’s performance guarantee or warranty to the customer at no additional cost.
performance bond without CTI Certification will not be accepted.
(Alternate) 1.2 Thermal Capacity (aqueous glycol solution as heat

transfer fluid): The closed circuit cooling tower(s) shall cool 2.0 Construction Details
________USGPM (l/s) of _____% by volume ethylene/propylene
glycol solution from ______°F (°C) to _____°F (°C) at _____°F 2.1 Tower Structure: The closed circuit cooling tower shall be
(°C) entering wet-bulb temperature. Coil pressure drop shall not constructed of heavy-gauge steel utilizing double-brake flanges
exceed ________ psi (kPa). Basis for thermal performance rating for maximum strength and rigidity and reliable sealing of
shall be the Cooling Technology Institute (CTI) certified rating for water-tight joints. All sheared edges shall be protected with a
water cooling appropriately adjusted for the thermal properties of coating of zinc-rich compound.
the aqueous glycol solution used. Additionally, the thermal
performance of the product line with water as the heat transfer 2.2 Casing Assembly: The closed circuit cooling tower shall
fluid shall be certified by the CTI in accordance with CTI include a coil casing section consisting of a serpentine coil, spray
Certification Standard STD-201. Manufacturers' performance water distribution system, and drift eliminators, as indicated by
guarantees or performance bonds without CTI Certification of the manufacturer. PVC drift eliminators shall be removable in
water ratings shall not be accepted. easily handled sections. They shall incorporate a minimum of
three changes in air direction.
1.3 Corrosion Resistant Construction: Unless otherwise noted in
this specification, all steel panels and structural members shall be 2.3 Coil Assembly: The cooling coil shall be fabricated of
constructed of heavy-gauge G-235 (Z700 metric) hot-dip continuous lengths of all prime surface steel at the
galvanized steel, with all sheared edges given a protective manufacturer’s own facility, and hot-dip galvanized after
coating of zinc-rich compound. fabrication. The cooling coil shall be pneumatically tested at 375
psig (2,865 kPa). The cooling coil shall be designed for low
(Alternate) 1.3 Corrosion Resistant Construction: Unless pressure drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of fluid and
otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and shall be ASME B31.5 compliant. Maximum allowable working
structural members shall be protected with the BALTIBOND® pressure shall be 300 psig (2,068 kPa) (280 psig (1,931 kPa) for
Corrosion Protection System. The system shall consist of G-235 coils supplied with a CRN).
(Z700 metric) hot-dip galvanized steel prepared in a four-step
(clean, pre-treat, rinse, dry) process with an electrostatically (Alternate) 2.3 Coil Assembly (Galvanized steel coil with
sprayed, thermosetting, hybrid polymer fuse-bonded to the cleanable header): The cooling coil shall be fabricated of
substrate during a thermally activated curing stage and monitored continuous lengths of all prime surface steel at the
by a 23-step quality assurance program. Coatings other than the manufacturer’s own facility, and hot-dip galvanized after
BALTIBOND® Corrosion Protection System must be submitted to fabrication. The cooling coil shall be designed for low pressure
the engineer for pre-approval. Approved equals must have drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of fluid. Removable
undergone testing, resulting in the following results as a cover plates permit access to each circuit for pressure cleaning.
minimum: Coil has a maximum allowable working pressure of 80 psig (650
kPa) and is tested at 125 psig (960 kPa) air pressure under
1. When X-scribed to the steel substrate it shall be able to water.
withstand 6000 hours of 5% salt spray per ASTM B117
without blistering, chipping, or loss of adhesion.
2. When X-scribed to the steel substrate it shall be able to

withstand 6000 hours of exposure to acidic (pH=4.0) and
alkaline (pH=11.0) water solutions at 95ºF (35˚C) without
signs of chemical attack.

E57
(Alternate) 2.3 Coil Assembly (Galvanized steel coil with 2.6 Basin Assembly: The combination basin/fan section shall be
cleanable coil): Coil shall be constructed of continuous 1.05" constructed of heavy-gauge G-235 (Z700 metric) galvanized
O.D. all prime surface steel tubes hot-dip galvanized inside and steel. The basin shall be provided with large area lift out
outside, encased in hot-dip galvanized steel framework. Coil strainers with perforated openings sized smaller than the water
shall have removable coverplates, also hot dip galvanized after distribution nozzles and an anti-vortexing device to prevent air
fabrication, to permit access to each tube for mechanical entrainment. The strainer and vortex device shall be constructed
cleaning. Elbowed fluid connections shall allow removal of the of the same material as the cold water basin to prevent dissimilar
cover plates without disturbing the fluid piping. Tubes shall be metal corrosion.
sloped for liquid drainage. Coil shall have a maximum allowable
working pressure of 80 psig (650 kPa) and tested at 125 psig
(960 kPa) air pressure under water.
3.0 Mechanical Equipment
3.1 Fan System: The fans and motors shall be factory installed
Series V
(Alternate) 2.3 Coil Assembly (ASME coil) : The cooling coil shall
at the base of the unit in the dry entering air stream to provide
be fabricated of continuous lengths of all prime surface steel at
greater reliability and ease of maintenance. The forwardly curved
the manufacturer’s own facility, and hot-dip galvanized after
centrifugal fans shall be heavy-duty centrifugal flow type,
fabrication. The cooling coil shall be pneumatically tested at 375
statically and dynamically balanced prior to shipment. Fan
psig (2,865 kPa). The cooling coil shall be designed for low
housings shall have curved inlet rings for efficient air entry and
pressure drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of fluid.
rectangular discharge cowls shall extend into the basin to
Maximum allowable working pressure shall be 300 psig (280
increase fan efficiency and prevent water from entering the fans.
psig for coils supplied with a CRN). The cooling coil shall be
designed, built, tested and stamped in accordance with Section 3.2 Bearings: Fans shall be mounted on a steel fan shaft
VIII, Division 1, of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. supported by heavy-duty self aligning, relubricatable bearings
with cast iron housings and designed for a minimum L10 life of
(Alternate) 2.3 Coil Assembly (Galvanized steel coil with
40,000 hours (280,000 hrs average life).
additional circuit): The cooling coil shall be fabricated of
continuous lengths of all prime surface steel at the 3.3 Fan Motor/Drive System: Fan motor(s) shall be totally
manufacturer’s own facility, and hot-dip galvanized after enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) type with a 1.15 service factor,
fabrication. The cooling coil shall be designed for low pressure suitable for _____ volts, ____ phase, ____ Hz electrical service
drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of fluid. The cooling coil and shall be mounted on an easily adjusted, heavy-duty motor
shall be designed for low pressure drop with sloping tubes for base. V-belt drives shall be designed for not less than 150% of
free drainage of fluid. Maximum allowable working pressure shall motor nameplate horsepower.
be 300 psig (280 psig for coils supplied with a CRN). The coil
header shall be partitioned. Each coil segment shall include an (Alternate) 3.3 Fan Motor/Drive System: Fan motor(s) shall be
inlet and outlet connection to allow independent operation of totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) inverter duty type with a 1.0
each segment. service factor, suitable for _____ volts, ____ phase, ____ Hz
electrical service. Motor shall be designed per NEMA Standard
(Alternate) 2.3 Coil Assembly (Galvanized steel coil with fins): MG1, Section IV, Part 31. V-belt drives shall be designed for not
The cooling coil shall be fabricated of continuous lengths of all less than 150% of motor nameplate horsepower.
prime surface steel at the manufacturer’s own facility, and hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication. The cooling coil shall be designed 3.4 Mechanical Warranty: The fan(s), fan shaft(s), bearings,
for low pressure drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of fluid. supports, and fan motor(s) shall be warranted against defects in
The cooling coil shall be designed for low pressure drop with materials and workmanship for a period of five (5) years from
sloping tubes for free drainage of fluid. Maximum allowable date of shipment.
working pressure shall be 300 psig (280 psig for coils supplied
with a CRN). Steel fins, spirally wound, optimally spaced for (Alternate) 3.5 ENERGY-MISER® Fan System: Two single speed
wet/dry operation on designated rows of tubes shall be provided fan motors, one sized for full speed and load, the other sized for
on the coil. 2/3 speed and approximately 1/3 of full load horsepower shall be
provided in each cell for capacity control and standby protection
2.4 Water Distribution System: Water shall be distributed evenly from drive or motor failure. Two speed motor(s) is not an
over the coil at a minimum flow rate of 4.5 gpm/ft2 (3.1 l/s-m2) to acceptable alternative.
ensure complete wetting of the coil at all times. The distribution
system shall consist of large-diameter, non-clog, plastic 360° (Alternate) 3.5 BALTIGUARD PLUSTM Fan System: Two single
distribution nozzles spaced across the coil face area in Schedule speed fan motors, one sized for load, the other sized for 1/3 of
40 PVC spray branches by snap-in rubber grommets, allowing the full load horsepower shall be provided in each cell for
quick removal of individual nozzles or complete branches for capacity control and standby protection from drive or motor
cleaning or flushing. Nozzles shall utilize a two-stage diffusion failure. The manufacturer of the equipment shall supply controls
pattern to provide overlapping, umbrella spray patterns that for the larger motor, a VFD for the smaller motor and factory
create multiple intersection points with adjacent nozzles. programmed logic controller to maximize energy saving for off
peak load and wet-bulb conditions.
2.5 Spray Pump System: The closed circuit cooling tower shall
include a close-coupled, bronze-fitted centrifugal pump equipped
with a mechanical seal, mounted on the basin and piped to the
4.0 Sound
suction strainer and water distribution system. It shall be installed 4.1 Sound Level: To maintain the quality of the local
so that it can be drained when the basin is drained. The pump environment, the maximum sound pressure levels (dB)
assembly shall include a metering valve and bleed line to control measured 50 ft (15,240 mm) from the closed circuit cooling
the bleed rate from the pump discharge to the overflow tower operating at full fan speed shall not exceed the sound
connection. The pump motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled levels detailed below.
(TEFC) type suitable for _____ volts, ____ phase, ______ Hz
electrical service.
Location 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 dB(A)
(Alternate) 2.5 Spray Pump System-Remote Sump: On Discharge
installations requiring a remote sump, the closed circuit cooling
Air Inlet
tower shall be modified to accommodate the use of an
independent basin and pump (both by others) for recirculating Cased Face
water.

E58
5.0 Accessories 5.5 Basin Sweeper Piping: The cold water basin of the cooling
tower shall be equipped with PVC sump sweeper piping for a
5.1 Vibration Isolation Rails: Spring-type vibration isolation rails, separator (supplied by others).
constructed of steel channels and base plates, painted with a
rust-resistant primer shall be provided to minimize vibration 5.6 Intake Sound Attenuation: The unit shall be equipped with
transmission from the tower to the building structure. The intake sound attenuators consisting of fiberglass acoustical baffles
isolators shall be designed for a static deflection of 1" (25.4 mm) encased in steel to further reduce sound levels.
and a maximum wind speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
5.7 Discharge Options: The unit shall be equipped with a tapered
(Alternate) 5.2 Basin Heaters: A steam coil shall be factory hood lined with sound absorbing fiberglass acoustical baffles to
installed in the cooling tower depressed sump of the cold water reduce sound levels from the top of the unit.

basin to prevent freezing during cold water shutdown. The steam
coil shall be capable of maintaining 40°F pan water temperature (Alternate) 5.8: Discharge Options: The unit shall be equipped
at a –20°F ambient temperature given 5 psig at the coil inlet with a tapered hood to increase discharge velocity or to raise the
connection. discharge to the top of an enclosure.
(Alternate) 5.1 Vibration Isolation Rails: Spring-type vibration 5.9 Heat Loss: The heat loss shall be no greater than
isolation rails, constructed of steel channels and base plates, _____________. If the heat loss is greater than the specified
coated with a 0.003" (0.076 mm) layer of zinc after fabrication limit, positive closure dampers or insulation on the hood/casing
shall be provided to minimize vibration transmission from the provided.
tower to the building structure. The isolators shall be designed for
a static deflection of 1" (25.4 mm) and a maximum wind speed of
50 mph (80 km/h). 6.0 Equipment Controls (Optional)
5.2 Basin Heater(s): The cooling tower cold water basin shall be 6.1 Variable Frequency Drive(s): A variable frequency drive (VFD)
provided with electric heater(s) to prevent freezing in low shall be provided for each fan motor. The supplier of the VFD
ambient conditions. The heater(s) shall be selected to maintain shall be the manufacturer of the evaporative cooling equipment.
40°F (4.4˚C) pan water temperatures at _____°F(°C) ambient. The VFD shall have a 3-contactor bypass, 3% input line reactor, a
The heater(s) shall be ______V/____phase/___Hz electric and removable keypad, an RS232 terminal for PC connection, and a
shall be provided with low water cutout and thermostat. circuit breaker disconnect. Fuse protection will not be accepted.
Control voltage shall be 24V to minimize the size of the enclosure
(Alternate) 5.2: Basin Heaters: A hot water coil shall be factory which should not exceed _____ ft x _____ ft x ____ ft and the
installed in the cooling tower depressed sump of the cold water weight should not exceed ____ lbs. VFD shall be provided in a
basin to prevent freezing during shutdown. The hot water coil NEMA (1)(3R)(12) enclosure. The VFD shall be compatible with a
shall be capable of maintaining 40°F (4.4°C) pan water tempera- (ModBus) (LonWorks) (Johnson N2) Building Automation System.
ture at a 20°F (-29°C) ambient given 180°F (82°C) entering water
temperature and 170°F (76°C) leaving water temperature. OR
5.3 Basin Water Level Control: The cooling tower manufacturer
shall provide an electric water level control (EWLC) system. The 6.1 Enclosed Controls: An enclosed control panel shall be
system shall consist of water level sensing and control units in provided for each cell of the evaporative cooling equipment. The
quantities and locations as indicated on the drawings. Each water panel shall include full voltage, non-reversing (FVNR) fan motor
level sensing and control unit shall consist of the following: NEMA and pump motor (if applicable) starters in a common enclosure.
4 enclosure with gasketed access cover; solid state controls The panel shall be provided with a main a circuit breaker
including all necessary relays and contacts to achieve the disconnect and a separate circuit breaker for each motor or
specified sequence of operation; stainless steel water level speed. Fuse protection will not be accepted. Panels containing
sensing electrodes with brass holder; Schedule 40 PVC standpipe basin heaters shall have an Earth Leakage Breaker containing
assembly with vent holes, and all necessary stainless steel ground fault protection. Starters above 25 A shall be NEMA rated.
mounting hardware. Provide PVC union directly below the control IEC starters will be accepted for motors below 25 A. Panel shall
enclosure to facilitate the removal and access of electrodes and include a 120V/60Hz control power transformer, Hand-Off-Auto
control enclosure. switches for each starter or contactor, and pilot lights for each
component. Enclosed controls shall be provided in a NEMA
The number and position of water level sensing electrodes shall (1)(3R)(4)(4X)(12) enclosure.
be provided to sense the following: high water alarm level, high
water level (make-up valve closes), low water level (make-up Optional enclosed control features: (A temperature sensor shall
valve opens), low water alarm, and heater safety cutout. be provided with the enclosed controls.)(A temperature controller
shall be provided with the enclosed controls.)(A basin heater
5.4 Vibration Cutout Switch: Provide mechanical local reset contactor with circuit breaker shall be provided.)(A vibration cutout
vibration switch. The mechanical vibration cut out switch will be switch input shall be provided.)
guaranteed to trip at a point so as not to cause damage to the
cooling tower. To ensure this, the trip point will be a frequency 6.2 Safety Switch(es): A heavy-duty, non-fusible safety disconnect
range of 0 to 3,600 RPM and a trip point of 0.2 to 2.0 g’s. switch shall be provided by the manufacturer of the evaporative
cooling equipment. Switch shall be single-throw, 3-pole design,
(Alternate) 5.4 Vibration Cutout Switch: Provide electronic remote rated up to 600 VAC. Switch shall have triple padlocking
reset vibration switch with contact for BAS monitoring. Wiring capability, a visible double break rotary blade mechanism, a
shall be by the installing contractor. The electronic vibration cut clearly visible On/Off handle, an interlocking mechanism to
out switch shall be set to trip at a point so as not to cause prevent door opening with handle in On position, and a clear line
damage to the cooling tower. The trip point will be 0.45 in/sec. shield. Safety switch shall be provided in a NEMA (1)(3R)(12)
enclosure.

E59
Lonza Biologics, Inc.

Reliable Performance and Flexibility prescribed
for Biotechnology Company
Project Report
Owner/Operator:
Lonza Biologics, Inc.: Portsmouth, NH
Project Engineer:
Parsons Engineering: Somerset, NJ
Consulting Engineer:
Phoenix Imperative, Inc.: Newark, DE
Gilbane Building Co.: Nashua, NH
When designing the Large Scale Build Out (LSBO) expansion to their existing manufacturing facility in
Portsmouth, NH, Lonza Biologics elected to use BAC FXV Closed Circuit Cooling Towers rather than
conventional open cooling towers. The closed circuit units preserve the integrity of the cooling loop by
isolating it from contaminant in the outside airstream, while providing cooling for a variety of heat loads
including process chillers, HVAC chillers and air compressors. Since the chillers are providing both
environmental and manufacturing process cooling, reliable operation of the system is critical to maintaining
the stringent requirements of their pharmaceutical customers. The following performance benefits made the
BAC FXV Lonza’s choice to meet its critical needs:
• Combined-flow technology provides the required heat rejection in a limited

plan area (79’-3”L x 28’W)
• Multi-cell arrangement allows for continuous access across all (6) cells to
facilitate routine inspection and maintenance activities
• Corrosion resistant construction featuring BAC’s BALTIBOND® Corrosion

Protection System, FRP casing panels and a welded Type 304 stainless steel
basin assure long life
• Dry operation capability inherent to closed circuit cooling towers allows for
continued unit operation without water during extreme winter conditions
Lonza Group is a Life Sciences driven company head quartered in Switzerland. Lonza Biologics is the
world’s leading contract manufacturer of monoclonal antibodies and recombinant proteins. Lonza Biologics
undertakes highly specialized development and manufacturing services for the pharmaceutical and
biotechnology industries. It has nearly 20 years of experience in mammalian cell culture and proprietary
technology for large-scale manufacture of innovative biopharmaceutical products.

E60
HXV
Closed Circuit Hybrid Cooling Towers

Product Detail
Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E63
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E70

E61
HXV Closed Circuit Hybrid

Cooling Towers
HXV
480 – 915 GPM at 95ºF/85ºF/78ºF
HXV Closed Circuit Hybrid Cooling Towers deliver fully rated thermal performance over a wide range of flow
and temperature requirements. Distinct advantages of the HXV include plume abatement, significant water
savings over traditional water-cooled equipment, and its suitability for high temperature cooling (>180ºF).
Standard design features satisfy today’s environmental concerns, minimize installation costs, maximize
year-round operating reliability, and simplify maintenance requirements.
HXV Closed Circuit Cooling Towers

• Plume abatement
• Maximum water savings
• High temperature cooling (>180ºF)
• ASME B31.5 compliant prime surface coil

E62

E63
Benefits
Plume Abatement
The HXV offers a combination of sensible, adiabatic, and evaporative heat transfer to significantly
reduce any plume that may occur with conventional evaporative cooling equipment. During the
HXV
coldest times of the year, when the potential for visible discharge is greatest, the HXV operates
100% dry, completely eliminating plume.
Maximum Water Savings

Water savings are achieved throughout the year with each of three different operating modes HXV. In
some areas, the water cost savings alone can pay for the equipment in as little as two years!
• At peak conditions in the “dry/wet” operating mode, a significant amount of heat is removed
by sensible heat transfer, providing reduced water consumption versus conventional
evaporative cooling
• When the heat load and/or ambient temperatures drop, water consumption is further
reduced in the “adiabatic” operating mode
• Water consumption is totally eliminated in the “dry” operating mode
See page E75 for details on operating modes.
High Temperature Cooling

The finned dry coil tempers the incoming fluid, allowing higher inlet fluid temperatures than
traditional closed circuit cooling towers.

The HXV provides heat rejection at the lowest possible energy input and maintenance
requirements via:
• Closed loop cooling, which minimizes process fouling
• Patented combined flow technology, which reduces evaporation directly off the coil,
minimizing the potential for scaling and fouling
• Variable Frequency Drives (see page G1 for details)
• ENERGY-MISER® Fan System available (see page E69 for details)
• BALTIGUARD PLUS™ Fan System (see page G1 for details)

E64
Low Installed Cost
• Support — All models mount directly on parallel I-beams and ship complete with motors and drives
factory-installed and aligned.
• Modular Design — Units ship in three pieces to minimize the size and weight of the heaviest lift,
allowing for the use of smaller, less costly cranes.

Easy Maintenance
• Access — Hinged access doors on each end wall and a

standard internal walkway provide easy access to the
unit interior.
• Spacious Interior — Provides easy access to the cold Access door

water basin, drift eliminators, fan drive system and the
prime surface coil.
• Access to Spray Distribution — Parallel flow of air

and spray water over the coil allows for inspection and
access to the top of the coil during full operation.
Drift eliminators can be removed for

access to the prime surface coil
• BALTIDRIVE® Power Train — Backed by a five-year fan motor and
drive warranty, the BALTIDRIVE® Power Train utilizes special
corrosion-resistant materials of construction and state-of-the-art
technology to ensure ease of maintenance and reliable year-round
performance.
• Separate Air Inlet Louvers — Reduce the potential for scale build-up
and damaging ice formations at the air/water interface by providing a
line of sight from the outside of the unit into the fill.
Long Service Life

Materials of Construction — Various materials are available to meet the corrosion resistance, unit
operating life, and budgetary requirements of any project (see page E67 for construction options).

E65
6
HXV
12
1
11 8

E66
7 BACross Fill with Integral Drift
®
• G-235 (Z700 metric) hot-dip Eliminators (Not Shown)

galvanized steel panels • High efficiency heat transfer surface
2 BALTIDRIVE Power Train
®
(Not Shown) • Flame spread rating of 5 per ASTM E84-77a
• Premium quality, solid-backed,

multi-groove belt 8 FRP Air Inlet Louvers
• Corrosion resistant cast aluminum sheaves
• Heavy-duty bearings (280,000
hour average life) • UV resistant finish
• Cooling tower duty fan motor • Maintenance free
9 Cold Water Basin
Low HP Axial Fan(s) • Sloped cold water basin for easy cleaning
3 • Suction strainer with anti-vortex hood
(Not Shown)
• High efficiency • Adjustable water make-up assembly
• Quiet operation • Integral internal walkway
10
Recirculating Spray Pump
4 Water Distribution System (Not Shown)
• Overlapping spray patterns ensure proper • Close coupled, bronze fitted
water coverage centrifugal pump
• Large orifice, 360˚ non-clog nozzles • Totally enclosed fan cooled
(TEFC) motor
• Visable & accessable during operation
• Bleed line with metering valve installed from
5 Prime Surface Coil (Not Shown)
• Continuous serpentine, steel tubing 11 Hinged Access Doors
• Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (HDGAF) • Inward swinging door on each end wall
• Pneumatically tested at 375 psig (2,585 kPa)
• Sloped tubes for free drainage of fluid 12 Optional Flow Control Package
• Temperature sensor
• When required, orders shipping into Canada
are supplied with a CRN • 3-way flow control valve with actuator
• All interconnecting piping
6 Dry Finned Coil
• Copper tubing with high density aluminum fins
• Pneumatically tested at 320 psig (2,206 kPa)

E67

• Standard Construction—
HXV
galvanized steel. Inlet louvers are constructed of UV resistant, fiberglass reinforced polyester (FRP).
• Optional BALTIBOND® Corrosion Protection System—
life, is applied to all hot-dip galvanized steel components of the closed circuit hybrid cooling tower
(excluding heat transfer coils).
• Optional Stainless Steel Cold Water Basin—
a five year leak-proof warranty.
• Optional Stainless Steel Construction—
seams are provided with a five-year leak-proof warranty.
Prime Surface Coil Configurations

• Standard Serpentine Coil—
The standard cooling coil is constructed of
continuous lengths of all prime surface steel,
hot-dip galvanized (outside surface) after
fabrication (HDGAF). The coil is designed for
low pressure drop with sloping tubes for free
drainage of fluid. Each coil is pneumatically
tested at 375 psig (2,586 kPa) and is ASME
B31.5 compliant.
• Stainless Steel Coil—

Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication
Coils are available in Series 300 stainless steel
for specialized applications. The coil is designed for low pressure drop with sloping tubes for free
drainage of fluid. Each coil is pneumatically tested at 375 psig (2,586 kPa) and is ASME B31.5
compliant.

E68
• Optional ASME “U” Stamp Coil—

This coil is manufactured and tested in accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,
Section VIII, Division I, and bears the ASME “U” stamp. ASME coils are hot-dip galvanized
(outside surface) after fabrication (HDGAF). The coil is designed for low pressure drop with sloping
tubes for free drainage of fluid. Each coil is pneumatically tested at 375 psig (2,586 kPa).
Other coil configurations are available for specific applications. Contact your local BAC Representative

for details.
Dry Finned Coil Configurations

The standard finned coil on the HXV unit has 6 rows and
is available in 1-1/2 serpentine and triple serpentine
arrangements. The serpentine arrangement indicates the
way in which these rows are circuited internally, and
influences the process fluid velocity and the total fluid
pressure through the unit. Hence, the unit flow and
pressure drop allowance must be taken into account
when the finned coil serpentine is selected to obtain the
most suitable HXV selection. Consult your local BAC
Dry fin coil
Representative for selection assistance.
Note: The dry finned coil is available in alternate materials of construction to meet specific
application requirements.
Fan Drive System

The fan drive system provides the cooling air necessary
to reject unwanted heat from the system to the
atmosphere. The standard fan drive system on all models
is the exclusive BALTIDRIVE® Power Train. This BAC
engineered drive system consists of a specially designed
powerband and two cast aluminum sheaves located on
minimum shaft centerline distances to maximize belt life.
A cooling tower duty fan motor, custom engineered for
BAC to provide maximum performance for cooling tower
service, is provided and backed by BAC’s comprehensive
five-year motor and fan drive warranty.
High efficiency fan

E69

The ENERGY-MISER® Fan System consists of two standard single-speed fan motors and drive
assemblies. One drive assembly is sized for full speed and load, and the other is sized for
approximately 2/3 speed and consumes only 1/3 the design horsepower. This configuration allows the
HXV
system to be operated like a two-speed motor, but with the reserve capacity of a standby motor in the
event of failure. As a minimum, approximately 70% capacity will be available from the low horsepower
motor, even on a design wet-bulb day. Controls and wiring are the same as those required for a
two-speed, two-winding motor. Significant energy savings are achieved when operating at low speed
during periods of reduced load and/or low wet-bulb temperatures.


Models HXV-64X and Q64X are provided with one fan motor driving two fans as standard. Models
HXV-66X and Q66X are provided with two fan motors driving three fans as standard. The independent
fan option consists of one fan motor and drive assembly for each fan to allow independent operation,
providing an additional step of fan cycling and capacity control.
Low Sound Operation

The low sound levels generated by HXV
Closed Circuit Hybrid Cooling Towers
make them suitable for installation in
most environments. For extremely sound
sensitive installations, factory designed,
tested and rated sound attenuation is
available for both the air intake and
discharge.

E70
Accessories
For external service, louver face and access door platforms can be added to the unit when purchased or
as an aftermarket item. Safety cages and safety gates are also available. All components are designed

to meet OSHA requirements.
Internal Ladder
For access to the motor and drive assemblies, an internal ladder is available.
Internal Service Platforms

For access to the motor and drive assemblies, an internal ladder and upper service platform with
handrails is available. Safety gates are available for all handrail openings. All components are designed
to meet OSHA requirements.

A factory mounted vibration cutout switch is available to
effectively protect against equipment failure due to
excessive vibration of the mechanical equipment
system. BAC can provide either a mechanical or
solid-state electronic vibration cutout switch in a NEMA
4 enclosure to ensure reliable protection. Additional
contacts can be provided to activate an alarm.
Basin Heaters Vibration cutout switch
Although most HXV units will operate dry in the winter, basin heaters are available for freeze protection
when required. Basin heaters prevent freezing of the water in the cold water basin when the unit is idle.
Factory-installed electric immersion heaters, which maintain +40°F (4.4°C) water temperature, are a
simple and inexpensive way of providing such protection.
Heater Sizing Data

Model Number
Number of Heaters kW per Heater Number of Heaters kW per Heater
HXV-64X, Q64X 1 12 1 16
HXV-66X, Q66X 1 16 1 21

E71
Accessories
makeup valve when a more precise water level control is
HXV
required. This package consists of a conductance-actuated level

control mounted in the basin and a solenoid activated valve in
the make-up water line. The valve is slow closing to minimize
water hammer.
Electric water level

control package
Flow Control Package
A flow control package is available to provide maximum plume control and water savings. This package
consists of a temperature sensor, a 3-way flow control valve arrangement with actuator, and all
connecting piping. 3-way flow control valve arrangement shown below for single prime surface and
double prime surface coil connections.
FLUID IN
Single Prime
Surface Coil FLUID OUT
Connections
FLUID IN
Double Prime FLUID OUT

Surface Coil
Connections

E72

Extended lubrication lines are available for
lubrication of the fan shaft bearings. Grease fittings
are located inside the plenum area next to the
access door.

Grease fittings at the access door & bearings with the extended lubrication line option

Optional high temperature fill material is available for high entering fluid temperatures.
Air Inlet Screens

Mesh screens can be factory-installed over the inlet louvers to prevent debris from entering the unit.

Basin sweeper piping provides an effective method of preventing
debris from collecting in the cold water basin of the tower. A
complete piping system, including nozzles, is provided in the
tower basin for connection to side stream filtration equipment
(by others).
Equipment Controls
BAC control panels are specifically designed to work seamlessly
with all BAC units and engineered to meet you particular
application. For more on BAC Equipment Controls, Basin sweeper piping
see pages G1-G13.

E73
Engineering Data
HXV-64X/Q64X
HXV
(4) 4" BFW FLUID IN (4) 4" BFW FLUID IN
(4) 4" BFW FLUID OUT (4) 4" BFW FLUID OUT
AIR AIR
HXV 64x INLET HXV Q64x INLET

F
(2) 4" BFW FLUID OUT ACCESS DOORS

6" BFW FLUID OUT THIS SIDE ONLY
22'-3 1/8"
22'-3 1/8"
(2) 4" BFW FLUID IN
F
6" BFW FLUID IN
ACCESS DOOR
ACCESS DOOR
A
A
(THIS END ONLY)
2'-7 1/2"
(THIS END ONLY) 3" OVERFLOW
8'-8 3/4"
8'-8 3/4"
11 1/2"
2" DRAIN
1" MAKE UP
2'-2 3/8" 2'-8 3/8" 6" 1'-8 1/4" 2'-2 1/4"
3"
3'-2 3/8" 11'-10" 12'-1 1/4" 2'-7 1/8"
11'-10"
HXV-66X/Q66X
(4) 4" BFW FLUID IN (4) 4" BFW FLUID IN
(4) 4" BFW FLUID OUT (4) 4" BFW FLUID OUT
AIR AIR
HXV 66x INLET HXV Q66x INLET
F
ACCESS DOORS
(2) 4" BFW FLUID OUT 8" BFW FLUID OUT THIS SIDE ONLY
(2) 4" BFW FLUID IN
22'-8 5/8"
22'-8 5/8"
F
8" BFW FLUID IN
ACCESS DOOR ACCESS DOOR

A
(THIS END ONLY) (THIS END ONLY) 3" OVERFLOW

3'-1"
9'-2 1/4"
9'-2 1/4"
2" DRAIN
1'-5"
1" MAKE UP
2'-2 3/8" 2'-8 3/8" 6" 2'-0 3/8" 2'-2 1/4"

8 1/2"
3'-2 3/8" 11'-10" 18'-1 1/4" 2'-7 1/8"

11'-10"
Motor Hp Weights (lbs) Dimensions

Model Number Nominal Tons5
Fan Pump Operating1 Shipping Heaviest Section A F
HXV-641-OM 160 30 5 24,800 15,800 6,800 14’ 2” 2’ 0”
HXV-642-OM 180 30 5 26,300 16,900 7,800 14’ 2” 2’ 9-1/4”
HXV-Q640-OM 164 30 5 26,300 16,900 7,800 14’ 1” 2’ 7-3/8”
HXV-Q641 191 30 5 29,300 18,900 9,900 14’ 1” 4’ 1-7/8”
HXV-661-OM 252 30 & 15 7.5 35,700 22,400 9,700 14’ 7-1/2” 2’ 0”
HXV-662-OM 283 30 & 15 7.5 38,000 23,900 11,300 14’ 7-1/2” 2’ 9-1/4”
HXV-Q660-OM 268 30 & 15 7.5 38,000 23,900 11,300 14’ 5-1/2” 2’ 5-3/8”
HXV-Q661 305 30 & 15 7.5 42,400 27,100 14,500 14’ 5-1/2” 3’ 11-7/8”
Notes:
1. Operating weight is for the tower with the water level in the cold 4. Dimensional drawings show standard (right hand) arrangements
water basin at the overflow. with the standard finned coil arrangement.
2. The actual size of the inlet and outlet connection may vary with 5. Nominal tons of cooling represents 3 GPM of water from 95ºF to
the design flow rate. Consult the unit print for dimensions. 85ºF at a 78ºF entering wet-bulb temperature.
3. Pipe sizes are nominal diameters. Standard connections are

beveled-for-welding (BFW).

E74
See page E81

Engineering Data for Engineering
Considerations.
Winter Operation
Heat Loss Data Internal Coil Volumes Cold Water Basin Volume at
Model Number
(BTU/HR, Standard Unit) Prime Surface Coil (Gallon) Finned Coil (Gallon) Operating Level (Gallon)
HXV-641-OM 904,180 163 119 207

HXV-642-OM 962,184 218 119 207
HXV-Q640-OM 962,184 218 119 207
HXV-Q641 1,074,780 326 119 207
HXV-661-OM 1,354,564 255 170 314
HXV-662-OM 1,436,452 340 170 314
HXV-Q660-OM 1,436,452 340 170 314
HXV-Q661 1,596.816 510 170 314
Notes:
1. Heat loss data based on 50°F (-10.0˚C) coil water and –10°F (-23.3˚C) with a 45 mph (72.4 Km/hr) wind velocity (fans and pump are off).
2. Electric immersion heaters with thermostat and low level cutout. All components are factory installed in the unit basin. Heaters are selected to
maintain 40°F (4.4˚C) basin water at 0°F (-17.8˚C) ambient temperature. In outdoor locations, trace heating and insulation of spray pump(s) (by
others) may be required for freeze protection. See page E84-E85 for more information on winter operation
Structural Support
The recommended support arrangement for HXV Closed Circuit Hybrid Cooling Towers consists of
parallel I-beams positioned as shown in the drawings. Besides providing adequate support, the steel
also serves to raise the unit above any solid foundation to assure access to the bottom of the tower.
To support an HXV on columns or in an alternate arrangement not shown here, consult your local BAC
Representative.
INLET
INLET
AIR
AIR
7/8" MOUNTING HOLES UNIT OUTLINE 1 1/8"
HXV 64x HXV 66x

UNIT
W
A
HXV Q64x HXV Q66x
4"
C B C C B B C
1 1/8"
L L
Maximum Number of Standard

Model Number W L A B C
Deflection (IN)4 7/8” Anchor Bolts
HXV-64X 1/2” 11’ 10” 12’ 1-1/4” 11’ 7-3/4” 10’ 5-1/4” 10” 4
HXV-Q64X 1/2” 11’ 10” 12’ 1-1/4” 11’ 7-3/4” 10’ 5-1/4” 10” 4
HXV-66X 1/2” 11’ 10” 18’ 1-1/4” 11’ 7-3/4” 8’ 10-5/8” 8
HXV-Q66X 1/2” 11’ 10” 18’ 1-1/4” 11’ 7-3/4” 8’ 10-5/8” 8
Notes:
1. Supporting steelwork and anchor bolts are to be designed and 5. If vibration isolation rails are to be used between the unit and the
furnished by others. supporting steel, be certain to allow for the length of the vibration
rails when determining the length of the supporting steel, as
2. All support steel must be level at the top. vibration rail length and mounting hole locations may differ from
3. Each beam should be designed, as a minimum, for 65% of the those of the unit.
total unit operating weight applied as a uniformly distributed load. 6. If point vibration isolation is used with multi-cell units, the isolators
4. Beams must be selected in accordance with accepted structural must be located under the support steel, not between the support
practice. Maximum deflection of the beam under the unit to be steel and the towers.
1/360 of span, not to exceed 1/2 inch.

E75
See page E81

for Engineering
Considerations.
Modes of Operation
Wet Primed Surface
Operation Mode Dry Finned Coil Fluid Flow Spray Pump Fan(s)
Coil Fluid Flow
Combined Dry/Wet 100% Modulating On On

HXV
Adiabatic 100% 0% On On
Dry 100% 100% Off On
Notes:
1. During dry mode, two-speed, variable frequency drive (VFD), or ENERGY-MISER® Fan System operation is also possible.
2. For both dry/wet and adiabatic operation modes, the use of an automatic blowdown system is recommended to minimize water consumption.
Combined Dry/Wet Operation Mode

In this mode, the fluid to be cooled flows first to the dry finned coil and then to the prime surface
evaporative coil, where the cooled fluid exits the unit. Spray water is drawn from the cold water basin
and pumped to the water distribution system above the prime surface coil. Wetting the prime surface
coil allows evaporative cooling to occur. The spray water falls from the prime surface coil over the fill
surface, enhancing the evaporative heat transfer by sub-cooling the spray water. Air is drawn through
both the prime surface coil and through the fill where it is saturated and picks up heat. The air is,
however, still cold enough to achieve significant cooling within the finned coil, which is installed at the
discharge above the fan(s).
In the dry/wet mode, both sensible and evaporative heat transfer are used. Compared to a conventional
evaporative unit, the potential for plume is substantially reduced and significant water savings can be
obtained, even at peak design conditions. At reduced heat load and/or ambient temperatures, the
evaporative cooling portion, and hence water usage, is further reduced as the flow through the
evaporative coil is gradually decreased. This is accomplished by a modulating flow control valve
arrangement, which controls the outlet fluid temperature. This control arrangement automatically
assures maximum use of sensible cooling in the finned coil and minimum use of evaporative cooling in
the prime surface coil. The heat transfer method and flow control are arranged to achieve maximum
water savings in the dry/wet mode. Plume is minimized by reducing the amount of evaporated water
and the heating of the entire discharge air with the dry finned coil.
Water consumption

E76
Adiabatic Mode

The adiabatic mode occurs when the fluid to be cooled completely bypasses the evaporative prime
surface coil. No heat is rejected from this coil and the recirculating spray water merely serves to
saturate and adiabatically pre-cool the incoming outside air. In most climates, the ambient air still
has considerable potential for absorbing moisture.
Thus adiabatic cooling of the

incoming air results in significantly lower
air temperatures, which greatly
increases the rate of sensible heat
transfer. Compared to conventional
evaporative cooling equipment,
visible plume and water consumption
are greatly reduced while maintaining
the low fluid design temperatures
required to maximize system efficiency.
Water consumption
Dry Mode
During the dry operation mode the spray water system is turned off, saving on pump energy. The fluid
to be cooled is fed from the finned coil to the prime surface coil. The modulating flow control valve
remains fully open to ensure both coils receive the full fluid flow in series; hence the maximum heat
transfer surface is available. In this
mode no water consumption WATER DISTRIBUTION SYTEM AIR OUT
occurs, and plume is completely AIR

FINNED COIL
eliminated. HXV units can be IN
economically selected for dry bulb AXIAL FAN
switchover points of 50°F (10°C) to AIR
60°F (15°C) or higher, depending

on the specific needs of the project. PRIME SURFACE COIL
When the equipment operates in

AIR
the dry mode for prolonged periods, IN

AIR
draining the cold water basin is

recommended, eliminating the need SPRAY PUMP
Water consumption
for freeze protection and water SUMP FILL
treatment.

E77
1.0 Closed Circuit Hybrid Cooling 6. Shall withstand 6000 hours of exposure to 60 psi (42,184
kg/m2)water jet without signs of wear or erosion.
Tower
(Alternate) 2.1 Optional Stainless Steel Construction: All steel
1.1 General: Furnish and install, as shown on the plans, ___ panels and structural elements shall be constructed from
factory-assembled closed circuit hybrid cooling tower(s) of heavy-gauge, Series 300 stainless steel.
HXV
induced draft design with vertical air discharge. The unit shall be
able to operate in combined dry/wet, adiabatic and dry modes for 2.2 Coil Sections: The dry finned coil shall consist of copper tubes
plume abatement and minimum water consumption. Overall with rippled edge, aluminum flat plate fins, and headers of
dimensions shall not exceed approximately ___ ft (m) x ___ ft (m), seamless copper tubes installed in a heavy-gauge galvanized
with an overall height not exceeding approximately ___ ft (m). steel casing. Fins shall have full drawn collars to maintain
Operating weight shall not exceed _____ lbs (kg). The closed consistent fin spacing and a continuous surface contact over the
circuit hybrid cooling tower shall be Baltimore Aircoil Company entire tube for maximum heat transfer. The coil shall have a
Model HXV-___. design pressure of 250 psig (1,725 kPa) and be pneumatically
tested at 320 psig (2,205 kPa). Staggered tube coil arrangement
1.2 Thermal Capacity (water as heat transfer fluid): The closed cir- and fin density shall be optimized for maximum sensible heat
cuit cooling tower shall be warranted by the manufacturer to have transfer during all operation modes with minimum airside pressure
capacity to cool _______ USGPM (l/s) of water from ______°F drop. The coil shall be designed for free drainage of fluid.
(°C) to _____°F (°C) at _____°F (°C) entering wet-bulb tempera-
ture. Coil pressure drop shall not exceed ________ psi (kPa). The prime surface coil shall be encased in a heavy-gauge
galvanized steel casing. The coil shall be constructed of
1.3 Quality Assurance: The tower manufacturer shall have a continuous serpentine all prime surface steel, be pneumatically
Management System certified by an accredited registrar as tested at 375 psig (2,685 kPa), and be hot-dip galvanized after
complying with the requirements of ISO-9001 to ensure consistent fabrication. The coil shall be designed for free drainage of fluid
quality of products and services. and shall be ASME B31.5 compliant. Maximum allowable working
pressure shall be 300 psig (280 psig for coils supplied with a
2.0 Construction Details CRN).
2.3 Cold Water Basin: The cold water basin shall be constructed
2.1 G-235 (Z700 metric) Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel Structure: All
of heavy-gauge hot-dip galvanized steel. The basin shall include a
steel panels and structural elements shall be constructed from
depressed section with drain/clean-out connection. Standard
heavy-gauge, G-235 (Z700 metric) hot-dip galvanized steel, with
accessories shall include large area, lift-out steel strainers with
cut edges given a protective coat of zinc-rich compound.
perforated openings sized smaller than water distribution nozzle
(Alternate) 2.1 Corrosion Resistant Construction: Unless orifices, an integral anti-vortexing hood to prevent air entrainment,
otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural waste water bleed line, and brass make-up valve with large
members shall be protected with the BALTIBOND® Corrosion diameter plastic float arranged for easy adjustment.
Protection System. The system shall consist of G-235 (Z700
(Alternate) 2.3 Optional Stainless Steel Cold Water Basin: The
metric) hot-dip galvanized steel prepared in a four-step (clean,
cold water basin shall be made of Series 300 stainless steel. All
pre-treat, rinse, dry) process with an electrostatically sprayed,
factory seams in the cold water basin shall be welded, leak tested
thermosetting, hybrid polymer fuse-bonded to the substrate during
at the factory to ensure watertight assembly and shall be
a thermally activated curing stage and monitored by a 23-step
warranted against leaks for five years.
quality assurance program. Coatings other than the BALTIBOND®
Corrosion Protection System must be submitted to the engineer
for pre-approval. Approved equals must have undergone testing, 4.0 Fill and Drift Eliminators
resulting in the following results as a minimum:
4.1 Fill and Drift Eliminators: The fill and integral drift eliminators
1. When X-scribed to the steel substrate it shall be able to shall be formed from self-extinguishing (per ASTM-568) poly vinyl
withstand 6000 hours of 5% salt spray per ASTM B117 choride (PVC) having a flame spread rating of 5 per ASTM E84
without blistering, chipping, or loss of adhesion; and shall be impervious to rot, decay, fungus and biological
attack. The fill shall be manufactured and performance tested by
2. When X-scribed to the steel substrate it shall be able to the closed circuit cooling tower manufacturer to provide single
withstand 6000 hours of exposure to acidic (pH=4.0) and source responsibility and assure control of the final product. A
alkaline (pH=11.0) water solutions at 95ºF (35˚C) without separate set of drift eliminators shall be removable in easily
signs of chemical attack; handled sections for quick access to the coil. Eliminators shall
have a minimum of three changes in air direction.
3. Shall withstand impact of 160 in-lbs per ASTM D2794
without fracture or delamination of the polymer layer;
(Alternate) 4.1 Fill and Drift Eliminators: The high temperature fill
4. Shall withstand 6000 hours of ultraviolet radiation equivalent and integral drift eliminators shall be formed from self-
to 120,000 hours of noontime sun exposure without loss of extinguishing (per ASTM-568) polyvinyl chloride (PVC) having a
functional properties; flame spread rating of 5 per ASTM E84 and shall be impervious to
rot, decay, fungus and biological attack. The high temperature fill
5. Shall withstand 200 thermal shock cycles between -25ºF and shall be suitable for water temperatures up to 140°F. The fill shall
+180ºF (-32˚C and 82˚C) without loss of adhesion or other be manufactured, tested and rated by the cooling tower
deterioration; manufacturer and shall be elevated above the cold water basin to
facilitate cleaning.

E78
5.0 Air Inlet Louvers Location 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 dB(A)
5.1 Air Inlet Louvers: Air inlet louvers shall be wave-formed, Discharge
fiberglass-reinforced polyester (FRP), spaced to minimize air Air Inlet
resistance and prevent water splash-out. Cased Face
6.0 Mechanical Equipment

Accessories
6.1 Fan(s): Fan(s) shall be heavy-duty, axial flow, with aluminum
alloy blades. Air shall discharge through a fan cylinder designed 9.1 Basin Heater(s): The cooling tower cold water basin shall be
for streamlined air entry and minimum fan blade tip clearance for provided with electric heater(s) to prevent freezing in low ambient

maximum fan efficiency. Fan(s) and shaft(s) shall be supported by conditions. The heater(s) shall be selected to maintain 40°F
heavy duty, self-aligning, grease-packed ball bearings with (4.4°C) basin water temperatures at _____°F ambient. The
moisture-proof seals and integral slinger rings, designed for heater(s) shall be ______V/____phase/___Hz electric and shall
minimum L10 life of 40,000 hours. Fan(s) shall be driven by a be provided with low water cutout and thermostat.
one-piece, multi-groove neoprene/polyester belt designed
specifically for evaporative cooling service. Fan and motor (Alternate) 9.1 Basin Heaters: A steam coil shall be factory
installed in the cooling tower depressed sump of the cold water
sheave(s) shall be fabricated from cast aluminum.
basin to prevent freezing during cold weather shutdown. The
steam coil shall be capable of maintaining 40°F (4.4°C) basin
6.2 Fan Motor: Fan motor(s) shall be totally enclosed air over
water temperature at a –20°F (-28.9˚C) ambient temperature
(TEAO), reversible, squirrel cage, ball bearing type with 1.15
given 5 psig at the coil inlet connection.
service factor, designed specifically for evaporative cooling duty
on _____ volt/ ___ hertz/ ___ phase electrical service. The motor (Alternate) 9.1 Basin Heaters: A hot water coil shall be factory
shall be furnished with special moisture protection on windings, installed in the cooling tower depressed sump of the cold water
shafts, and bearings. Each motor shall be mounted on an easily basin to prevent freezing during cold weather shutdown. The hot
adjusted, heavy-duty motor base. water coil shall be capable of maintaining 40°F (4.4°C) basin
water temperature at a –20°F (-28.9°C) ambient using 180°F
(Alternate) 6.2 Fan Motor: Fan motor(s) shall be totally enclosed
(82.2°C) entering water temperature and 170°F (76.7°C) leaving
air over (TEAO), reversible, squirrel cage, ball bearing type
water temperature.
designed specifically for evaporative cooling duty on ____ volt/
___ hertz/ ____ phase electrical service. The motor shall be 9.2 Basin Water Level Control: The cooling tower manufacturer
furnished with special moisture protection on windings, shafts, shall provide an electric water level control (EWLC) system. The
and bearings. Fan motors shall be inverter duty type designed system shall consist of water level sensing and control units in
per NEMA Standard MG1, Section IV, Part 31. quantities and locations as indicated on the drawings. Each water
level sensing and control unit shall consist of the following: NEMA
6.3 Mechanical Equipment Warranty: The fan(s), fan shaft(s),
4 enclosure with gasketed access cover; solid state controls
sheaves, bearings, mechanical equipment support and fan motor
including all necessary relays and contacts to achieve the
shall be warranted against defects in materials and workmanship
specified sequence of operation; stainless steel water level
for a period of five (5) years from date of shipment.
sensing electrodes with brass holder; Schedule 40 PVC standpipe
6.4 ENERGY-MISER® Fan System (optional): Two single-speed assembly with vent holes, and all necessary stainless steel
fan motors, one sized for full speed and load, the other sized for mounting hardware. Provide PVC union directly below the control
2/3 speed and approximately 1/3 the full load horsepower, shall enclosure to facilitate the removal and access of electrodes and
be provided for capacity control and stand-by protection from control enclosure.
drive or motor failure. Two-speed motor(s) are not an acceptable
The number and position of water level sensing electrodes shall
alternative.
be provided to sense the following: high water level, low water
(Alternate) 6.5 BALTIGUARD PLUSTM Fan System: Two single level, high water alarm level, low water alarm, and heater safety
speed fan motors, one sized for full load, the other sized for 1/3 of cutout.
the full load horsepower shall be provided in each cell for capacity
9.3 Vibration Cutout Switch: Provide mechanical local reset
control and standby protection from drive or motor failure. The
vibration switch. The mechanical vibration cut out switch will be
manufacturer of the equipment shall supply controls for the larger
guaranteed to trip at a point so as not to cause damage to the
motor, a VFD for the smaller motor and factory programmed logic
cooling tower. To ensure this, the trip point will be a frequency
controller to maximize energy saving for off peak load and wet-
range of 0 to 3,600 RPM and a trip point of 0.2 to 2.0 g’s.
bulb conditions.
(Alternate) 9.3 Vibration Cutout Switch: Provide electronic remote
7.0 Access reset vibration switch with contact for BAS monitoring. Wiring
shall be by the installing contractor. The electronic vibration cut
7.1 Plenum Access: A large, hinged access door shall be provided out switch shall be set to trip at a point so as not to cause
on each end wall for access to the prime surface coil, drift elimina- damage to the cooling tower. The trip point will be 0.45 in/sec.
tors, and fan plenum section. The water make-up valve, float ball,
and suction strainer shall be easily accessible. 9.4 Basin Sweeper Piping: The cold water basin of the cooling
tower shall be equipped with PVC sump sweeper piping with
8.0 Sound plastic educator nozzles. The piping should create a grid under
the fill section and force all dirt and debris to the center depressed
8.1 Sound Level: To maintain the quality of the local environment, section of the cold water basin.
the maximum sound pressure levels (dB) measured 50 ft from the
tower operating at full fan speed shall not exceed the sound levels
detailed below.

E79
9.5 Air intake Option: Provide removable hot dip galvanized Optional enclosed control features: (A temperature sensor shall
steel 1”x1” mesh air intake screens. be provided with the enclosed controls.)(A temperature controller
shall be provided with the enclosed controls.)(A basin heater
(Alternate) 9.5 Air intake Option: Provide removable hot dip contactor with circuit breaker shall be provided.)(A vibration
galvanized steel 1”x1” mesh air intake screens protected with the cutout switch input shall be provided.)
BALTIBOND® Corrosion Protection system or Series 300
stainless steel. 10.3 Safety Switch(es): A heavy-duty, non-fusible safety
disconnect switch shall be provided by the manufacturer of the
(Alternate) 9.5 Air intake Option: Provide removable Series 300 evaporative cooling equipment. Switch shall be single-throw,
stainless steel 1”x1” mesh air intake screens. 3-pole design, rated up to 600 VAC. Switch shall have triple
padlocking capability, a visible double break rotary blade
(Alternate) 9.5 Air Intake Option: The unit shall be equipped with
mechanism, a clearly visible On/Off handle, an interlocking
HXV
intake sound attenuators consisting of fiberglass acoustical

mechanism to prevent door opening with handle in On position,
baffles encased in steel to further reduce sound levels.
and a clear line shield. Safety switch shall be provided in a
9.6 Discharge Option: The discharge plenum shall be equipped NEMA (1)(3R)(12) enclosure.
with sound absorbing material.
10.4 Flow Control Package: The manufacturer shall provide a
9.7 Access Door Platform: A galvanized steel platform and flow control package consisting of a 3-way flow control valve
aluminum ladder to grade shall be provided at all access doors arrangement with actuator, and all interconnecting piping
to access the plenum section of the cooling tower. All working between the finned coil and the prime surface coil. The package
surfaces shall be able to withstand 50 psf live load or 200 pound will be designed to maximize plume control and water savings.
concentrated load.
9.8 Internal Platform: An internal platform shall be provided in

the plenum section to provide for inspection and maintenance.
All working surfaces shall be able to withstand 50 psf live load or
200 pound concentrated load. Other components of the cooling
tower, i.e. basin floor and fill/drift eliminators, shall not be
considered an internal working surface. Cooling tower
manufacturers that require that these surfaces be used as a
working platform shall provide a two-year extended warranty to
the Owner to repair any damage to these surfaces caused by
routine maintenance.
9.9 Heat Loss: The heat loss shall be no greater than

_____________. If the heat loss is greater than the specified
limit, positive closure dampers or insulation on the hood/casin
provided.

(VFD) shall be provided for each fan motor. The supplier of the
VFD shall be the manufacturer of the evaporative cooling
equipment. The VFD shall have a 3-contactor bypass, 3% input
line reactor, a removable keypad, an RS232 terminal for PC
connection, and a circuit breaker disconnect. Fuse protection will
not be accepted. Control voltage shall be 24V to minimize the
size of the enclosure which should not exceed _____ ft x _____
ft x ____ ft and the weight should not exceed ____ lbs. VFD
shall be provided in a NEMA (1)(3R)(12) enclosure. The VFD
shall be compatible with a (ModBus) (LonWorks) (Johnson N2)
OR

provided for each cell of the evaporative cooling equipment. The
panel shall include full voltage, non-reversing (FVNR) fan motor
and pump motor (if applicable) starters in a common enclosure.
The panel shall be provided with a main a circuit breaker
disconnect and a separate circuit breaker for each motor or
speed. Fuse protection will not be accepted. Panels containing
basin heaters shall have an Earth Leakage Breaker containing
ground fault protection. Starters above 25 A shall be NEMA
rated. IEC starters will be accepted for motors below 25 A. Panel
shall include a 120V/60Hz control power transformer, Hand-Off-
Auto switches for each starter or contactor, and pilot lights for
each component. Enclosed controls shall be provided in a NEMA
(1)(3R)(4)(4X)(12) enclosure.

E80
HXV Offers Economic Advantages

HXV First Cost Benefits (o F)
Heat rejection equipment must be selected for the

maximum heat load at summer peak air temperatures. In
most climates peak wet-bulb temperatures are significantly

lower than peak dry-bulb temperatures. Evaporative
cooling equipment based on the ambient air wet-bulb
therefore has a greater temperature driving force, thus
allowing the use of lower system temperatures. This
greater driving force also allows the use of less and thus
more cost-effective heat transfer surface area. Since the
Dry-bulb/wet-bulb difference
HXV utilizes evaporative cooling during peak load opera- versus climate zone
tion it inherently benefits from this advantage. Evaporatively
cooled units such as the HXV have a plan area and fan
horsepower advantage over the typical air-cooled arrangement, saving on support structures and electrical
hook-ups. The HXV design also avoids the corrosion and scaling that can be associated with spraying of
standard air-cooled equipment on design days for additional capacity. The lower process fluid temperatures
that can be achieved compared to air-cooled systems and the
greatly reduced fouling factors of closed loop cooling result in
lower first cost of process equipment such as chillers or
refrigeration compressors. Lastly, the costs associated with
plume abatement are eliminated, as the design is inherently
plume-free.
HXV Operating Cost Benefits

Due to its water saving concept and combined flow design, the
HXV offers significant operating cost benefits. Water Closed circuit cooling systems offer
consumption is minimized throughout the year. During peak the lowest fluid temperatures
summer operation a large amount of heat load is already
transferred by the finned coil. As the ambient temperature and/or heat load drops, the amount of evaporative
heat transfer is further reduced by controlling the flow through the wet coil. This reduces the evaporation loss
and blow-down as well as water treatment requirements
compared to conventional evaporative cooling equipment. In the
“adiabatic” mode only a small amount of water is needed to
saturate the air and the amount of blow-down is reduced even
further. Finally in the ‘dry’ mode no water is used at all (while
saving the energy associated with running the spray pump).
With HXV hybrid units water savings up to 70% or more are pos-
sible. Depending on local water costs and availability, this
advantage alone can pay for the equipment in as little as two
years through cost savings in water use, water treatment
0 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
chemicals, and higher system efficiencies. In addition, fouling 10
o
( F)
potential associated with open circuit cooling towers is eliminated Typical annual distribution of
through both the closed loop cooling system and the Combined ambient temperature with the
Flow TechnologyTM design of the HXV, assuring peak efficiency and three operating modes
energy savings over time. Finally, the induced draft propeller fan
design results in low fan energy requirements compared to centrifugal fan units.

E81
Location
Units must have an adequate supply of fresh air to the air inlet(s). When units are located adjacent to
building walls or in enclosures, care must be taken to ensure that the warm, saturated discharge air is not
deflected off surrounding walls or enclosures and drawn back to the air inlet(s).
CAUTION:
Each unit should be located and positioned to prevent the introduction of the warm discharge air
and the associated drift, which may contain chemical or biological contaminants including
Legionella, into the ventilation systems of the building on which the unit is located or those of
adjacent buildings.
For detailed recommendations on layout, refer to our web site, www.BaltimoreAircoil.com, or consult
For Series V products, bottom screens or solid bottom panels may be desirable or necessary for safety,
depending on the location and conditions at the installation site.
Piping and Valves

Piping must be sized and installed in accordance with good piping practice. All piping should be supported
by pipe hangers or other supports, not by the unit.
Some installations may require flow balancing valves (supplied by others) at the coil inlets to balance the
flow to individual coils and cells. External shutoff valves on the closed circuit loop (supplied by others) may
also be required if the system design necessitates the isolation of individual cells.
Although equalizing lines can be used to balance water levels between multi-cell closed circuit cooling
towers, the spray water for each cell must be treated separately, and a separate make-up must be provided
for each cell. Note that a common remote sump for multi-cell installations can simplify make-up and water
treatment – see page M167 for details. See page E83 or the appropriate Operating and Maintenance
Manual for more information on water treatment.

E82
Capacity Control
Variable Frequency Drives (VFD)
Installations which are to be controlled by Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) require the use of an inverter
duty motor as designed per NEMA Standard MG.1, Section IV, Part 31, which recognizes the increased
stresses placed on motors by these drive systems. Inverter duty motors must be furnished on VFD
applications in order to maintain the motor warranty.

WARNING:
When the fan speed is to be changed from the factory-set speed, including through the use of a
variable speed control device, steps must be taken to avoid operating at or near fan speeds that
cause a resonance with the unit or its supporting structure. At start-up, the variable frequency drive
should be cycled slowly between zero and full speed and any speeds that cause a noticeable
resonance in the unit should be “locked out” by the variable speed drive.
Fan Cycling
Fan cycling is the simplest method of capacity control. The number of steps of capacity control can be
increased using the ENERGY-MISER® Fan System, BALTIGUARD PLUSTM Fan System, the independent
motor option, or two-speed fan motors in conjunction with fan cycling (see “Custom Features & Options”
section of the appropriate product line to determine whether the ENERGY-MISER® Fan System,
BALTIGUARD PLUSTM Fan System, or the independent fan motor option are available for the particular
product line; two-speed motors are available for all product lines with either belt or gear fan drive systems.
All of these options provide substantial energy savings when compared to simple fan cycling, especially the
BALTIGUARD PLUSTM Fan System, which provides energy savings and redundancy at a low cost.
WARNING:
Rapid on-off cycling can cause the fan motor to overheat. It is recommended that controls be set to
allow a maximum of 6 on-off cycles per hour.
Note: Spray water pump cycling should not be used for capacity control. This method of control
often results in short cycling of the pump motor as capacity changes substantially with pump
cycling. In addition, alternate wetting and drying of the coil promotes scaling of the heat
exchanger coil surface.
Capacity Control Dampers (Series V Models Only)

On Series V models, modulating capacity control dampers are available to provide better leaving water
temperature control than can be obtained from fan cycling alone. See page E46 or contact your local BAC
Representative for more details.
Vibration Cutout Switches

Vibration cutout switches are recommended on all installations. Vibration cutout switches are designed to
interrupt power to the fan motor and/or provide an alarm to the operator in the event of excessive vibration.
BAC offers both electronic and mechanical vibration cutout switches on all closed circuit cooling tower
models.

E83
Water Treatment
As water evaporates in an evaporative cooling unit, the dissolved solids originally present in the water
remain in the system. The concentration of these dissolved solids increases rapidly and can cause scale
and corrosion. In addition, airborne impurities and biological contaminants, including Legionella, may be
introduced into the circulating water. To control all potential contaminants, a water treatment program must
be employed. In many cases, a simple bleed-off may be adequate for control of scale and corrosion.
Note: Bleed lines are to be provided and installed by others. However, biological contamination, including
Legionella, can be controlled only through the use of biocides. Such treatment should be initiated at system
startup, after periods of equipment shutdown, and continued regularly thereafter. Accordingly, it is strongly
recommended a biocide treatment be initiated when the unit is first filled with water and continued regularly
thereafter. For more information, consult the appropriate Operating and Maintenance Manual.
When a water treatment program is employed, it must be compatible with construction materials. The pH of
the circulating water must be maintained between 6.5 and 9.0. Units having galvanized steel construction
and a circulating water pH of 8.3 or higher will require periodic passivation of the galvanized steel to prevent
the accumulation of white, waxy, nonprotective zinc corrosion called white rust. Batch feeding of chemicals
into the unit is not recommended. If units are constructed with optional corrosion resistant materials, acid
treatment may be considered; however, the water quality must be maintained within the guidelines set forth
in the Operating and Maintenance Manual.
Note: Unless a common remote sump is utilized, each cell of a multi-cell installation must be treated
as a separate entity, even if the cold water basins are flumed together or equalized.
For complete Water Quality Guidelines, see the appropriate Operating and Maintenance Manual,
available at www.baltimoreaircoil.com
For specific recommendations on water treatment, contact a competent water treatment supplier.
Fill Compatibility (FXV Models Only)

The standard fill in FXV Closed Circuit Cooling Towers is constructed of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and has a
flame spread rating of 5 per ASTM Standard E84. This PVC fill is compatible with the water found in most
evaporative cooling applications. For applications where the entering fluid temperature exceeds 140°F,
contact your local BAC Representative to confirm that the standard PVC fill is acceptable.
Sound Levels
Sound rating data is available for all BAC Closed Circuit Cooling Towers. When calculating the sound levels
generated by a unit, the designer must take into account the effects of the geometry of the tower as well as
the distance and direction from the unit to noise-sensitive areas. Low sound fans and intake and discharge
sound attenuation can be supplied on certain models to provide reduced sound characteristics (see the
“Custom Features and Options” section of the appropriate product line for details). The ENERGY-MISER®
Fan System, two-speed motors, or variable frequency drives can also be used to reduce sound during
periods of non-peak thermal loads. For more information on sound and how it relates to evaporative cooling
equipment, see page M124. For detailed low sound selections, please consult your local BAC
Representative.

E84
Protection Against Basin Water Freezing

When a unit is shut down in freezing weather, the basin water must be protected by draining to an indoor
auxiliary remote sump tank (see page H5 for remote sump engineering data; page M32 for sizing
guidelines) or by providing supplementary heat to the cold water basin. Supplementary heat can be provided
by electric immersion heaters or in some cases, hot water or steam coils, or steam injectors. All exposed
water piping, make-up lines, and spray pumps (if applicable) that do not drain at shutdown should be traced
with electric heater tape and insulated.

When dry operation is planned for low ambient conditions, centrifugal fan units should be supplied with
oversized fan motors to prevent motor overload when the spray water is not operating. Dry operation with
standard fan motors is acceptable for axial fan units. For remote sump applications, the spray water pump
must be selected for the required flow at a total head which includes the vertical lift, pipe friction (in supply
and suction lines) plus the required pressure at the inlet header of the water distribution system (2.0 psi for
FXV models; 1.0 psi for Series V models). A valve should always be installed in the discharge line from the
pump to permit adjusting flow to the unit requirement. Inlet water pressure should be measured by a
pressure gauge installed in the water supply riser at the spray water inlet, and adjusted to the specified inlet
pressure. See page M32 for more information.
Indoor Installations (Applicable to Series V Models Only)

Many indoor installations require the use of inlet and/or discharge ductwork. Units installed with inlet
ductwork must be ordered with solid-bottom panels. Generally, intake ducts are used only on smaller
units while the equipment room is used as a plenum for larger units. Discharge ductwork will normally be
required to carry the saturated discharge air from the building.
Both intake and discharge ductwork must have access doors to allow servicing of the fan assembly, drift
eliminators, and water distribution system. All ductwork should be symmetrical and designed to provide even
air distribution across the face of air intakes and discharge openings.
WARNING:
The discharge opening must be positioned to prevent the introduction of discharge air into the fresh air
intakes serving the unit or the ventilation systems of adjacent buildings.
Note: Axial fan units are not suitable for indoor installations.
Safety
Adequate precautions, appropriate for the installation and location of these products, should be taken to
safeguard the public from possible injury and the equipment and the premises from damage. Operation,
maintenance and repair of this equipment should be undertaken only by personnel qualified to do so. Proper
care, procedures and tools must be used in handling, lifting, installing, operating, maintaining, and repairing

E85
Fluid Compatibility
The fluid to be cooled must be compatible with the coil material (standard serpentine and cleanable header
coils are carbon steel, hot-dip galvanized on the outside only). Fluids not compatible with coil materials
can lead to corrosion and tube failure. Certain fluids may require occasional pressure cleaning or
mechanical cleaning of the inside of coil tubes. In such cases the coil must be designed to provide this
capability (Optional Coil Configurations: for FXV see page E19, for Series V see page E41, and for HXV see
page E67).
Open/Closed System
The standard galvanized steel serpentine and cleanable header serpentine coils are carbon steel,
hot-dip galvanized on the outside only, and are intended for application on closed, pressurized
systems which are not open to the atmosphere. Stainless steel coils or cleanable coil units (with tubes
hot-dip galvanized inside and out) are available to cool corrosive fluids or water and ethylene/propylene
glycol solutions in systems open to the atmosphere (Optional Coil Configurations: for FXV see page E19, for
Series V see page E41, and for HXV see page E67).
Protection Against Coil Freezing

At below freezing ambient conditions, the closed circuit cooling tower can experience heat loss even without
the recirculating spray water pump and fans in operation. Without a heat load on the circulating fluid, coil
freezing can occur even at full flow. Protective means are readily available to avoid potential freeze
problems. Where the system will permit, the best protection against coil freeze-up is the use of an
industrially inhibited anti-freeze solution. When this is not possible, the system must be designed to meet
both of the following conditions:
1. Maintain minimum recommended flow through the coil at all times, as per the table below:
MODEL MINIMUM FLOW (GPM)

FXV-42X, 43X, 44X 75
FXV-Q44X 150 See product sections for
FXV-64X, 66X 110
FXV-Q64X, Q66X 220
applicable heat loss data:
FXV-288-X1X 275
FXV-288-XQX 550 FXV - page E29
FXV-364-X1X 275 Series V - page E54
FXV-364-XQX 550
HXV-6XX 110
HXV - page E74
HXV-Q6XX 220
VFL-012 thru 048 65
VFL-072 thru 096 125
VF1-009 thru 036 50
VF1-048 75
VF1-072 100
VF1-096 thru 144N 125
VF1-192 thru 288N 250
VF1-144 thru 216 200
VF1-288 thru 432 400

E86
2. Maintain a heat load on the circulating fluid so that the temperature of the fluid leaving the coil will not be
below 45ºF (7.2ºC).
If the process load is extremely light, or if the process is periodically shut off entirely, then an auxiliary heat
load must be applied to the circulating fluid when below freezing ambient temperatures exist to prevent
damage to the coil. Refer to the Heat Loss Data table (for FXV see page E29, for Series V see page E54,
and for HXV see page E74) for the auxiliary heat load requirement. The amount of auxiliary heat necessary

to prevent coil freezing can be further reduced by the use of a positive closure damper hood and insulation.
Draining the coil is not recommended as a normal method of freeze protection. However, draining is
acceptable as an emergency method of freeze protection. Frequent draining can promote corrosion inside
the coil tubes. If the coil is not protected by an industrially inhibited anti-freeze solution, an automatic drain
valve and air vent is recommended to drain the coil if flow stops or fluid temperature drops below 45°F
(7.2ºC) when the ambient temperature is below freezing. Note that cold water basin heaters will not provide
freeze protection for the coil.
Code Requirement
Standard coils are ASME B31.5 compliant and are provided with a Canadian Registration Number (CRN)
when required. State or local codes, or certain applications may require the use of pressure vessels
designed, fabricated, tested and “U” stamped in accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code, Section VIII, Division I. In such cases, the optional ASME “U” Stamp coil must be provided.
Warranties
these products.

E87
Colt Armory
“Quick on the Draw” at Historic Coltsville Site
Project Report
Developer:
Homes for America, LLC, Yonkers, NY
Architect:
Tai Soo Kim Partners, Hartford, CT
Mechanical Engineer:
Maguire Group, Foxboro, MA
Harry Grodsky & Co. Inc, Springfield, MA
The “innovative” Colt .45 Peacemaker revolver was developed and manufactured in Coltsville,
Connecticut. Today an “innovative” state-of-the-art heat pump system is installed on the site. Closed
circuit cooling towers, within an architectural enclosure, provide cooled water to each community
building through a new underground piping system. The heat absorbing cooled water, delivered by
these towers to individually controlled heat pumps, provides comfort cooling for the entire complex.
To save time and money, BAC provided (3) dual air-inlet model FXV Closed Circuit Cooling Towers.
Quick installation of the closed circuit cooling towers reduced costs and allowed the contractor to
meet a very demanding schedule. FXV Closed Circuit Cooling Tower versatility reduces the number
of cells required for large projects and virtually eliminates the need for custom field-erected
solutions.
The residents of Coltsville, past and present, know how to appreciate innovation. It was in Coltsville
that the Colt .45 Peacemaker, also know as the “weapon that won the west,” was developed and
manufactured under the direction of one of the nation’s first female industrialists, Elizabeth Colt.
Widowed in 1862, Elizabeth carried on the work started by her inventive and beloved husband,
Samuel Colt.
Samuel began construction on his armory and the surrounding community to house, entertain and
educate his workers and their families in 1847. His concept of a multiple shot firearm was unique in
his time, and brought him success as one of America’s first great entrepreneurs. Samuel’s impact
on the economy and the Industrial Revolution, along with Elizabeth’s role in the company after his
death, make Coltsville a fascinating piece of U.S. history. The Coltsville site, currently undergoing a
renovation in excess of $100 million, is under consideration for inclusion in the National Park
System.

F1
ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Products
Thermal Storage Products

Product Detail
Product Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F2
Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F4
Proven Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F8
Construction Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F12
Engineering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F14
Custom Coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F15
Engineering Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F20
Engineering Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F21

F2

Cooling with ice thermal storage can be the most cost-effective, reliable system approach to cooling offices,
schools, hospitals, malls and other buildings, and provides a steady source of low temperature fluids for
process cooling applications. These systems are environmentally friendly because they help lower energy
consumption and reduce greenhouse gas emissions. With thousands of successful installations worldwide,
ICE CHILLER®
BAC is the global leader in the application of ice thermal storage.
Ice Thermal Storage

• Lowest first cost
• Reduced energy cost
• Variable capacity
• Improved system reliability
• Reduced maintenance
• Environmentally friendly
• Proven technology

F3

F4
Benefits
Lowest First Cost
Systems with ice thermal storage can be installed at the same or lower first cost than traditional
systems when designed with the colder supply water available from ice. The savings that result from
ICE CHILLER®
the use of smaller chillers and cooling towers, reduced pump and pipe sizes, and less connected
horsepower offset the cost of the ice thermal storage equipment. Additional savings can be found when
using lower temperature air distribution, which allows for reduced ductwork and fan sizes.
• Smaller Chillers and Heat Rejection Equipment: By designing

the system around 24-hour per day chiller operation, the size of
the chillers and cooling towers or air-cooled condensers required
for an ice storage system is significantly reduced, when compared
to conventional chillers and heat rejection equipment sized for
the instantaneous peak load. A typical thermal storage design
includes chillers that provide 50 to 60% of the peak cooling load.
The balance of the cooling requirement is provided from the ice
storage system.
• Reduced Pump and Pipe Sizes: Pump and pipe sizes are also
reduced in a properly designed ice storage system. Substantial
savings in the chilled water distribution loop are realized when the
system design incorporates reduced flow rates that result from
using a larger temperature range in the water loop. Use of a larger
temperature range, for example 18°F (10°C) instead of the more
traditional 10°F (5.5°C) results in a reduction of pipe size.
Condenser water pipe sizes are reduced due to lower
flow requirements for the smaller chiller. Pump savings due to
reduced chilled water and condenser water flow rates are also
realized.
• Reduced Cooling Coil and Supply Air Fan Sizes: Cooling coils
sized using lower supply water temperatures and traditional supply
air temperatures are generally smaller due to fewer rows.
The reduction in rows leads to lower supply fan HP (kW).
• Reduced Air Handling Equipment: When the air distribution is designed with lower supply air
temperatures, the size of the ductwork, fans and fan motors are reduced.

F5
• Reduced Electrical Distribution: Smaller chillers, heat rejection equipment and pumps
require less horsepower than a traditional system, which results in smaller transformers,
switchgear, wire sizes and starter panels.

• Reduced Generator Size: If a facility has a generator for daily or back-up power, the size of the
generator will be significantly reduced when the peak electrical load of the facility is reduced using
ice storage.
Reduced Energy Cost

An ice thermal storage system reduces peak demand, shifts energy usage to non-peak hours, saves
energy, and reduces energy costs.
• Reduces Peak Demand and Shifts Energy Usage: With less connected horsepower, ice storage
can lower peak electrical demand for the HVAC or process cooling system by 50% or more. Since
most electrical rates include demand charges during peak demand times and/or higher day versus
night kWh charges, savings on electrical bills can be substantial. Peak electrical demand rates of
$15 to $18 per kW are not uncommon. In areas with “real time pricing”, where the electric rate
varies hour-by-hour based on the market price of electricity, day to night kWh costs can vary by
500 to 1000%. The use of electricity at night versus peak daytime hours can lead to large savings
on energy bills.
• Saves Energy: In addition, total annual kilowatt-hours used are less when the system is designed
to take advantage of the low supply water temperature available from ice storage system.
Lower kWh consumption is possible for several reasons:
1. Although making ice requires more energy than producing chilled water, the efficiency
penalty is not as large since the ice is made at night when condensing temperatures are
lower, increasing the efficiency of the chiller.
2. Ice systems typically operate the chiller at full load. Chillers are inefficient when run with
low loads during the spring and fall. A conventional chiller will operate at less than 30%
capacity for half the year.
3. Reduced pumping horsepower.
4. Reduced fan horsepower due to lower air pressure drop across the cooling coil. A higher
chilled water temperature differential across the cooling coil usually results in fewer rows
and therefore a lower pressure drop.
5. The ability to recover waste heat from the chiller for heating water both night and day.

F6
Benefits
Additional kWh savings are possible if the air distribution is
designed to take advantage of the low temperatures
available from the ice storage system. As the electric
ICE CHILLER®
industry continues to deregulate, and time-of-use rates, real

time pricing schedules and negotiated power prices become
standard, ice storage can provide even greater future
savings in operating costs.
Variable Capacity
The ice storage system will maintain a constant supply
temperature regardless of the variations in instantaneous
cooling demand. The flow and entering water temperature set
the instantaneous capacity.
Improved System Reliability

Ice storage systems provide the reliability necessary to ensure
air-conditioning is available. With traditional systems, installing multiple chillers provides redundancy. In
the event of a mechanical failure of one chiller, the second chiller provides limited cooling capacity. The
maximum available cooling for the traditional system would only be 50% on a design day.
Most ice storage systems utilize two chillers in addition to the

ice storage equipment. Two chillers are designed to provide
approximately 60% of the required cooling on a design day
while the ice storage provides the remaining 40% of the
cooling capacity. In the event only one chiller is available to
provide cooling during the day, up to 70% of the cooling
capacity is available. The one operable chiller provides 30%
of the cooling requirement while the ice provides up to 40%.
Based on typical HVAC load profiles and ASHRAE weather
data, 70% of the cooling capacity would meet the total daily
cooling requirements 85% of the time.

F7
Reduced Maintenance
The ice storage coils have no moving parts, so very little maintenance is required. Because the chillers,
pumps and heat rejection equipment are smaller, ice storage systems will have less maintenance than

a traditional system. The ice storage system also allows a chiller to undergo routine maintenance during
the day when the ice storage can handle the system load.
Environmentally Friendly
Reducing energy consumption and using electricity at night will reduce global warming. Electricity
generated at night generally has a lower heat rate (lower fuel use per power output), and therefore
lower carbon dioxide and greenhouse gas emissions resulting in less global warming. The California
Energy Commission concluded that the use of electricity at night created a 31% reduction in air
emissions over the use of electricity during the day.
With smaller chillers, an ice storage system reduces the amount of refrigerant in a system. Most
refrigerants in use today are slated to be banned in the future under the Montreal Protocol because they
contribute to global warming. Using smaller amounts of refrigerant helps to save the ozone layer and
reduce global warming.

F8
Proven Technology
BAC has successfully applied ice storage technology to thousands of installations worldwide. BAC has
the application and system experience to assist in the design, installation and operation of any ice
storage system. BAC has supplied ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Products for projects that range in
size from 90 to 125,000 ton-hours (0.3 to 441.3 MWh). Installations include office buildings, hospitals,
ICE CHILLER®
manufacturing processes, schools, universities, sports arenas, produce storage facilities, hotels and
district cooling applications.
The ICE CHILLER® Product includes a variety of factory-assembled units. For large applications,
where space is limited or factory-assembled units are not cost effective, ICE CHILLER® Thermal
Storage Coils are available for installation in field-erected tanks.
The BAC product offering provides system design flexibility. Ice can be built using various refrigerants
or glycols on steel coils and is used to provide either chilled water or chilled glycol to the cooling
system. This flexibility, combined with a broad range of application experiences, allows BAC to provide
a cost-effective product to meet your specific requirements.
Merchandise Mart
Merchandise Mart in Chicago, Illinois installed 26,400 ton-
hours (93.2 MWh) of ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Coils
in a retrofit of the building’s air-conditioning system. The
Merchandise Mart was built in 1930. The increased
air- conditioning load on the building from computers, other
electrical equipment and increased people density made
the old system too small. Ice thermal storage, with low
temperature water, allowed the retrofit of the air-
conditioning system to go ahead without replacing piping
and ductwork. Increasing the temperature ranges on the piping and air distribution system allowed the
Merchandise Mart to install an ice storage system at a lower first cost than a conventional system.
Johns Hopkins Applied Physics Lab

The Johns Hopkins University Applied Physics Lab in
Laurel, MD installed 5,600 ton-hours (19.8 MWh) of ICE
CHILLER® Thermal Storage Coils to cool the new Steven
Mueller Building which houses offices, labs and clean
rooms. Another 2,800 ton-hours (9.9 MWh) of ICE
CHILLER® Thermal Storage Coils were added to cool
adjacent office and lab buildings. The ice thermal storage
allows the Applied Physics Lab to save over $150,000 per
year on its electric bill.

F9
Friendship Annex 3 Office Building

The HVAC renovation of Friendship Annex (FANX) 2 and
3 in Baltimore, MD received the “Outstanding Engineering
Achievement of the Year Award” from the Engineering

Society of Baltimore. Ice with low temperature air
distribution cools these renovated buildings. To meet
federal guidelines, a comprehensive study of five
alternate systems was made using life cycle costing. The
analysis showed ice storage with low temperature chilled
water and low temperature air to be the most economical system. A total of 15,230 ton-hours (53.8 MWh)
of ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Units were installed for the two buildings.
Taipei 101
Taipei 101 is located in the central government and business district
of Taipei, Taiwan. The building consists of a podium shopping and
entertainment complex and office tower. Completed in August 2002,
the 101-floor office tower is the world’s tallest building at 508 meters.
BAC ice storage equipment (36,450 ton-hours) was selected because

of its ability to provide low fluid temperatures, in this case 36ºF (2°C).
Low supply temperatures allowed economical selection of pressure
isolation heat exchangers on the 42nd and 74th floors. Additionally, the
low supply temperature allowed cold air distribution to be used
throughout, thus reducing first costs and operating costs while
providing improved occupant comfort.
IMUX Beijing District Cooling

IMUX Beijing District Cooling’s first central cooling plant is
located in Beijing’s West Zone Zhongguancun Science
and Technology Park, China’s largest science park
focused on developing high-tech enterprises. The plant,
largely located underground, incorporates 29,800
ton-hours of BAC ice storage coils in a system which
effectively uses less expensive nighttime power (75% less
expensive than daytime power). Chilled water is supplied
at 34ºF (1°C) to a campus-style chilled water distribution
loop. Many of the buildings served employ cold air
distribution systems to achieve even lower construction
and operating costs.

F10
Proven Technology
Low Temperature Air
Omni Interlocken Resort
ICE CHILLER®
Hotel
The Omni Interlocken Resort Hotel just
outside of Denver, CO was designed
with a low temperature air and water
system using ICE CHILLER® Thermal
Storage Units. The challenge was to
design a high-quality HVAC system
sensitive to building aesthetics, which
would provide good guest comfort, low
operating/maintenance costs and could
be constructed within a tight
construction budget. The first
conceptual design was a four-pipe
fan-coil system for the hotel rooms with air-cooled chillers and rooftop air-handler units for the public
spaces. The final design was a low temperature air system with Modular ICE CHILLER® Thermal
Storage Units. This low temperature air system was $500,000 less than the original conceptual
design. In addition, the hotel’s energy bills are $100,000 less than with a conventional system.
Villa Julie College

Modular ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Units were part of an
expansion that doubled the size of this private college in
Baltimore, MD. The new facilities added 135,700 ft2 (12,620 m2)
of space to the campus and include a 400-seat auditorium and
theater, gymnasium with showers and locker rooms, student
center, video center, academic and computer classrooms, kitchen
and administrative offices. The architect designed the new
buildings with the intention that the structure be part of the visual
space. This reduced the space allotted for the mechanical equipment. The engineer designed a low
temperature air system that delivers 45°F (7°C) air temperature to VAV series fan powered boxes. The
use of smaller piping and ductwork made it possible to avoid architectural changes that would affect
the aesthetics of the design.

F11
Food Processing
Zippy’s Restaurant Central Facility
At Zippy’s in Honolulu, HI, food is cooked in a central
kitchen where it is cooled and packaged for use in local
Zippy’s restaurants. The FDA requires that the food in the
cooking vessels be cooled to 45°F (7°C) in less than one

hour to prevent contamination. The cooking vessels in the
kitchen need varying amounts of cooling depending on the
dish that is being prepared, and when it finishes its cooking
cycle. Because of the varying cooling load from day to day
and hour to hour and the need for a quick cool down period,
standard chillers are not a good match for this application. Ice storage with its variable capacity and low
supply temperature is an excellent match for this process cooling application.
Power Generation
Wolverine Power
Wolverine Power, located in central Michigan, is a
generation and transmission electric cooperative. For a new
generating plant with (2) 22-megawatt Rolls Royce turbines,
Wolverine Power elected to use ice storage for their turbine
inlet air cooling. They installed 7,610 ton-hours (26.9 MWH)
of ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Units to gererate 40°F
(4.4°C) chilled water, which provides 55°F (13°C) inlet air.
The generating plant’s ice storage capacity can be used over a 16-hour period as partial storage or over
a 4-hour period as full storage, depending on the value of power on the open market. During peak
summer time, the increased power capacity is worth up to $3,500 per hour in electricity sales.
Emergency Cooling
Verizon
Verizon, the provider of telephone service to a large portion
of the east coast, uses an ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage
Unit to provide back-up cooling to one of its computer
centers in Silver Spring, MD. If the chiller that provides
cooling goes down for any reason, power outage or alarm,
the system immediately switches over to the ice storage
system for cooling. The pump on the ice storage system is
on the continuous power back up with the computers. There
is enough ice to provide cooling for 30 minutes. This gives Verizon enough time to clear the alarm or get
the back-up generator running and the chiller back on line.

F12
ICE CHILLER®
9 2
11
5
6
7
8

F13
1 Covers
7 Secondary Liner/Vapor
• Watertight Barrier

• G-235 (Z700 Metric) Hot-dip • Prevents moisture from penetrating through
galvanized steel panels the insulation
• Insulated with 2” expanded

polystyrene insulation 8 Wall Panel
• Heavy-gauge galvanized steel with double
2 Coil Support Beams brake flanges
• Prevent contact between coil and • 3” of expanded polystyrene insulation

primary liner
3 Glycol Connections 9 Sight Tube

• Grooved for mechanical coupling • Visual indicator of water level
corresponding to the amount of ice in unit
4 Galvanized Steel Coil
• Continuous serpentine, steel tubing Operating Control
10
• Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (Not Shown)
(HDGAF) • High-level float switch and low water cutout
• Pneumatically tested at 190 psig mounted on the outside of the tank
• Rated for 150 psig operating pressure • Can be provided for one tank (standard) or
all tanks (optional)
5 Primary Liner
• Single piece 11 Ice Inventory Sensor
(Optional)
• 48-hour integrity test before shipment
• Differential pressure transmitter provides an
electrical 4-20 mA output signal which is
6 Extruded Polystyrene proportional to the amount of ice in
Insulation inventory
• 1.5” thick, installed between primary and
secondary liners

F14
Engineering Data
data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
ICE CHILLER®
Contact your local BAC

Representative for selection
assistance.
OVER FLOW
100 %
75 %
PERCENT ICE BUILD

50 %
25 %
0%
MODEL WEIGHTS (lbs) VOLUMES (gal) DIMENSIONS CONNECTION

NUMBER OPERATING SHIPPING TANK WATER COIL GLCOL L W SIZE
TSU-237M 39,100 9,750 2,990 260 10’ 7-5/8” 7’ 10-3/8” 2”
TSU-476M 73,900 16,750 5,840 495 19’ 10-1/4” 7’ 10-3/8” 3”
TSU-594M 93,100 20,200 7,460 610 19’ 10-1/4” 9’ 9-1/4” 3”
TSU-761M 113,800 24,000 9,150 790 19’ 10-1/4” 11’ 9-3/4” 3”
Notes:
1. Unit should be continuously supported on a flat level surface.
2. All connections are grooved for mechanical coupling.

F15
Custom Coils
BAC will manufacture custom ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Coils to meet project specific
requirements. BAC has done extensive research and testing on the build and melt characteristics of ice
storage. This research and testing has resulted in selection capabilities unmatched by any other
company in the industry.

BAC can predict the temperatures required on an hour-by-hour basis for building ice on custom coils,
over a variety of conditions and build times. The physical space available, load profile, discharge
temperatures, chiller capacity and operating sequences can be evaluated to find the design that best
meets the application.
The ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Coils are constructed of continuous 1.05" O.D. all prime surface
serpentine steel tubing, with no intermediate butt welds. The coils are assembled in a structural steel
frame designed to support the weight of the coil stack with a full ice build. After fabrication the coils are
tested for leaks using 375 psig air pressure under water, then hot-dip galvanized for corrosion
protection.
Installation of coil module at Oriole Park at Camden Yards, Baltimore, MD
For glycol applications the coils are configured to provide countercurrent glycol flow in adjacent circuits
for maximum storage capacity.
Individual coils are factory-assembled into modules of two (2) coils. Glycol manifolds are coated with
zinc-rich, cold galvanizing finish at the factory. Necessary support steel and lifting lugs are provided on
the modules to allow for lifting into and final positioning within the storage tank.

F16
Engineering Data:
Modes of Operation
The modular ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Unit can operate in any of five distinct operating modes.
These modes of operation provide the flexibility required by building operators to meet their daily HVAC
ICE CHILLER®
cooling requirements.
Ice Build
In this operating mode, ice is built by circulating a 25% solution (by weight) of inhibited ethylene/
propylene glycol through the coils contained in the ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Unit. Figure 1
illustrates typical chiller supply temperatures for 8, 10 and 12 hour build cycles. For a typical 10–hour
build time, the supply glycol temperature is never lower than 22°F (-5.6°C). As the graph illustrates, for
build times exceeding 10 hours, the minimum glycol temperature is greater than 22°F (-5.6°C). For
build times less than 10 hours, the minimum glycol temperature will be lower than 22°F (-5.6°C) at the
end of the build cycle. This performance is based on a chiller flow rate associated with a 5°F (2.8°C)
range. When a larger temperature range is the basis of the chiller selection, the chiller supply
temperatures will be lower than shown in Figure 1.
Figure 1

F17
Ice Build with Cooling

When cooling loads exist during the ice build period, some of the cold glycol used to build ice is
diverted to the cooling load to provide the required cooling. The amount of glycol diverted is determined
by the building loop set point temperature. BAC recommends that this mode of operation be applied on
systems using primary/secondary pumping. This reduces the possibility of damaging the cooling coil or
heat exchanger by pumping cold glycol, lower than 32°F (0°C), to this equipment.

Cooling – Ice Only
In this operating mode the chiller is off. The warm return glycol solution is cooled to the desired set
point temperature by melting ice stored in the modular ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Unit.
Cooling – Chiller Only

In this operating mode the chiller supplies all the building cooling requirements. Glycol flow is diverted
around the thermal storage equipment to allow the cold supply glycol to flow directly to the cooling
load. Temperature set points are maintained by the chiller.
Cooling – Ice with Chiller

In this operating mode, cooling is provided by the combined operation of the chiller and ice storage
equipment. The glycol chiller precools the warm return glycol. The partially cooled glycol solution then
passes through the ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Unit where it is cooled by the ice to the design
temperature.
Modular ICE Thermal Storage Unit

F18
Engineering Data:
System Schematics
ICE CHILLER®
Two basic flow schematics are applied to select

ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Units. Figure 2
illustrates a single piping loop with the chiller
installed upstream of the thermal storage
equipment. This design allows the thermal
storage system to operate in four of the five
possible operating modes. They are Ice Build,
Cooling-Ice Only, Cooling-Chiller Only and
Cooling-Ice with Chiller.
Figure 2
For Figure 2 the following control logic is applied:
MODE CHILLER P-1 V-1 V-2

Ice Build On On A-B A-B
Cooling – Ice Only Off On Modulate A-C
Cooling – Chiller Only On On A-C A-C
Cooling – Ice With Chiller On On Modulate A-C
Valve V-1 modulates in response to temperature sensor, TS-1. Valve V-2 could be positioned to either
maintain a constant flow, less than P-1, or modulate in response to the return glycol temperature from
the cooling load.
When the building loop contains chilled water, a heat exchanger must be installed to separate the
glycol loop from the building’s chilled water loop. On applications where an existing water chiller is
available, it can be installed in the chilled water loop to reduce the load on the thermal storage system.
This design should not be used when there is a requirement to build ice and provide cooling. This
would require the cold return glycol from the thermal storage equipment be pumped to the cooling load
or heat exchanger. Since the glycol temperature is below 32°F (0°C), the cooling coil or heat exchanger
is subject to freezing. The flow schematic illustrated in Figure 3 details a primary/secondary pumping
loop with the chiller located upstream of the thermal storage equipment. This design allows the system
to operate in all five operating modes.

F19

Figure 3
For Figure 3 the following control logic is applied:

MODE CHILLER P-1 P-2 V-1
Ice Build On On Off A-B
Ice Build With Cooling On On On A-B
Cooling – Ice Only Off On On Modulate
Cooling – Chiller Only On On On A-C
Cooling – Ice With Chiller On On On Modulate
Valve V-1 and Valve V-2 modulate, depending on the operating mode, in response to temperature
sensor, TS-1. The benefit provided by the primary/secondary pumping loop is that the system can build
ice and provide cooling without fear of freezing a cooling coil or heat exchanger. This system design
also allows for different flow rates in each of the pumping loops. When the flow rates in the pumping
loops are different, the glycol flow rate in the primary loop should be greater than or equal to the glycol
flow rate in the secondary loop. As in the single loop schematic, a heat exchanger and a base water
chiller can be added to the system schematic.
Variations to these schematics are possible but these are the most common for ice storage systems.
One variation positions the chiller downstream of the ice storage equipment. By positioning the chiller
downstream of the ice, the chiller is used to maintain the required supply temperature. In Figures 2 and
3, the chiller is installed upstream of the ice. This offers two significant advantages compared to system
designs that locate the chiller downstream of the ice. First, the chiller operates at higher glycol
temperatures to precool the return glycol. This enables the chiller to operate at a higher capacity which
reduces the amount of ice required. Second, since the chiller is operating at higher evaporator
temperatures, the efficiency (kW/TR) of the chiller is improved.

F20
The ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Unit(s) shall be Baltimore level before the ice build cycle can begin. Operating control
Aircoil Company Model TSU-______. Each unit shall have a quantities vary based on project requirements. An optional
latent ton-hour storage capacity of _______ ton-hours to be differential pressure transmitter shall be available to supply an
generated in ____ hours when supplied with _______ USGPM electrical output signal proportional to the amount of ice in
ICE CHILLER®
(lps) of a 25% (by weight) solution of industrially inhibited inventory.

ethylene/propylene glycol. The minimum glycol temperature
required during the ice build operating mode shall be _______
°F(°C). Rated system performance shall be provided in the The heat transfer fluid shall be an industrially inhibited, 25% by
format recommended by the Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration weight, ethylene/propylene glycol solution specifically designed
Institute (ARI) Guideline T. The thermal storage units shall be for HVAC applications. The 25% (by weight) solution is designed
modular in design. Unit design shall allow units of different sizes to provide freeze/burst and corrosion protection as well as
to be installed in order to optimize unit selection and minimize efficient heat transfer in water based, closed loop systems.
space requirements. Tanks sizes can be mixed due to internal Corrosion inhibitors shall be provided to keep pipes free of
piping arrangements that create a balanced flow due to uniform corrosion without fouling. DOWTHERM® SR-1 and
pressure drop through the coil circuits. UCARTHERM® are acceptable fluids.
The tank shall be constructed of heavy-gauge galvanized steel Overall unit dimensions shall not exceed approximately _____ ft
panels and include double brake flanges for structural strength. (m) by ____ ft (m) with an overall height not exceeding ____ ft
The tank walls shall be supplied with a minimum of 4-1/2" of (m). The operating weight shall not exceed _______ lbs (kg).
insulation that provides a total insulating value of R-18. The tank
design shall utilize multiple liners. The primary liner, which forms
the interior of the unit, shall be of single piece construction and
be suitable for low temperature applications. The secondary
liner/vapor barrier shall be separated from the primary liner by
1-1/2" of extruded polystyrene insulation. The tank bottom shall
be insulated with 2" of expanded polystyrene insulation and 1" of
extruded polystyrene insulation.
The ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Unit shall be provided with

watertight, sectional covers constructed of hot-dip galvanized
steel. The covers shall be insulated with a minimum of 2" of
expanded polystyrene insulation.
Contained within the tank shall be a steel heat exchanger that is

constructed of 1.05" O.D., all prime surface serpentine steel
tubing encased in a steel framework. The coil, which is hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication, shall be pneumatically tested at 190
psig and rated for 150 psig operating pressure. The coil circuits
are configured to provide maximum storage capacity. The coil
connections on the unit are galvanized steel and are grooved for
mechanical coupling.
Each ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Unit shall be provided with

a sight tube. The sight tube, which shall be fabricated from clear
plastic pipe, shall display the tank water level and corresponding
ice inventory.
Operating controls, consisting of two float switches, shall be

mounted on the outside of the tank. The high level float switch
terminates the build cycle when the tank water level reaches the
100% ice build level. The high level switch shall also prevent
re-initiation of the build cycle until approximately 15% of the ice
has been discharged. The second float switch is a low water
cutout. The cutout requires that the water level in the ICE
CHILLER® Thermal Storage Unit be at or above the 0% ice build

F21
Installation
ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Units are designed to be installed

outdoors. The units must be installed on a continuous flat level surface.
The pitch of the slab must not exceed 1/8" over a 10’ span. Figure 1
details ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Unit layout guidelines. The
units should be positioned so there is sufficient clearance between units
and adjacent walls to allow easy access. When multiple units are
installed, a minimum of 18" is recommended side-to-side and 3'-0"
end-to-end for access to the operating controls.
When installed indoors, the access and slab requirements described

above also apply. The units should be placed close to a floor drain in
the event they need to be drained. The minimum height requirement
above the tank for proper pipe installation is 3 feet. Figure 2 illustrates
the recommended overhead clearance for ICE CHILLER® Thermal
Storage Units. Figure 1
For large ton–hour applications, BAC will provide ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Coils for installation in
field fabricated concrete tanks. When coils are required, BAC’s manufacturing capabilities allow coils to be
manufactured in the size and configuration necessary to meet specific site and performance requirements.
The concrete tank design is to be completed by a qualified structural engineer. Figure 3 illustrates the ICE
CHILLER® Thermal Storage Coil layout guidelines. For large projects that require ICE CHILLER® Coils,
contact your local BAC Representative for selection and dimensional information.
Figure 2 Figure 3

F22
Unit Piping
Piping to the ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Unit should follow established piping guidelines. The coil
connections on the unit are galvanized steel and are grooved for mechanical coupling.
For single tank applications, each pair of manifolded

coil connections should include a shut-off valve, so
the unit can be isolated from the system. Figure 4
ICE CHILLER®
illustrates the valve arrangement for a single unit. It is

recommended that the piping include a bypass circuit
to allow operation of the system without the ICE
CHILLER® Thermal Storage Unit in the piping loop.
This bypass can be incorporated into the piping
design by installing a three way/modulating valve.
This valve can also be used to control the leaving
glycol temperature from the thermal storage unit.
Temperature and pressure taps should be installed to Figure 4
allow for easier flow balancing and system
troubleshooting. A relief valve, set at a maximum of 150 psi, must be installed between the shut-off
valves and the coil connections to protect the coils from excessive pressures due to hydraulic
expansion. The relief valve should be vented to a portion of the system which can accommodate
expansion.
CAUTION:
The system must include an expansion tank to accommodate changes in fluid volume.
Adequately sized air vents must be installed at the high points in the piping loop to remove
trapped air from the system.
Figure 5 illustrates reverse return piping for multiple units installed in parallel. The use of reverse return
piping is recommended to ensure balanced flow to
each unit. Shut-off valves at each unit can be used
as balancing valves.
When large quantities of ICE CHILLER® Thermal

Storage Units are installed, the system should be
divided into groups of units. Then, balancing of each
unit can be eliminated and a common balancing
valve for each group of units installed. Shut-off valves
for isolating individual units should be installed but
not used for balancing glycol flow to the unit.
Figure 5

F23
Controls
To ensure efficient operation of the ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Units, each system is provided with
factory installed Operating Controls. A brief description of the controls follow.
Once the ice build cycle has been initiated, the glycol chiller should run at full capacity without cycling or
unloading until the ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Units are fully charged. When the units are fully
charged, the chiller should be turned off and not allowed to re-start until cooling is required. The ice build

cycle is terminated by the Operating Control Assembly. This assembly includes a low water cutout and a
shut-off switch. The low water cutout prevents the ice build mode from starting if there is insufficient water in
the tank. The shut-off switch will terminate the build cycle when the units are fully charged and will prevent
the next ice build mode from starting until 15% of the ice has melted.
Note: Multiple Operating Control Assemblies must be wired in series so that a full build signal from
any one tank will terminate the ice build cyle.
An inventory control that provides a 4 - 20 mA signal is available. This control should be used for
determining the amount of ice in inventory, but not to terminate the ice build cycle. Complete operating
control details are provided in the Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Glycol
ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Units typically use a 25% (by weight) solution of industrially inhibited
ethylene/propylene glycol for both corrosion protection and freeze protection. Industrial grade inhibited glycol
is specifically designed to prevent corrosion in HVAC and heat transfer equipment. Inhibitors are used to
prevent the ethylene glycol from becoming acidic and to protect the metal components in the thermal
storage system. The system’s lowest operating temperature should be 5°F to 7°F (2.8°C to 3.9°C) above the
glycol freeze point. The freeze point for a system with 25% by weight ethylene glycol is 13°F (10.6°C); the
freeze point for a system with 25% by weight propylene glycol is 15°F (9.4°C).
Acceptable industrial grade inhibited glycol solutions are DOWTHERM® SR–1, DOWFROST® HD and
UCARTHERM®. Use of other brands of glycol in ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Products should be
approved by BAC.
DOWTHERM® SR-1, DOWFROST® and UCARTHERM® are registered trademarks of The Dow Chemical Company or its
subsidaries.
CAUTION:
Uninhibited glycol and automotive antifreeze solutions are NOT to be used on thermal storage
applications.

F24
Water Treatment
In the near freezing temperatures of the ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Unit, scale and corrosion are
naturally minimized. Therefore, water treatment for these two conditions may not be required or may require
minimal attention unless the water is corrosive in nature. To control biological growth, a biocide may be
needed to prevent the spread of iron bacteria or other organisms. For specific recommendations, consult a
reputable local water treatment company and follow the guidelines below:
ICE CHILLER®
PROPERTY OF WATER RANGE

pH 7.0 to 9.01
Hardness as CaCO3 30 to 500 ppm
Alkalinity as CaCO3 500 ppm maximum
Total Dissolved Solids 625 ppm maximum
Maximum Conductivity 1000 micromhos/cm @ 32°F
Chlorides 125 ppm maximum as Cl
Sulfates 125 ppm maximum
Note:
1. A water pH of 8.3 or higher will require periodic passivation of the galvanized steel to prevent
“white rust,” the accumulation of white, waxy, nonprotective zinc corrosion products on
galvanized steel surfaces.
To assure full capacity of the ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Unit, the water treatment should not alter the
freeze point of water.
Winterization
CAUTION:
Precautions must be taken to protect the unit and associated piping from freezing conditions. Heat
tracing and insulation should be installed on all piping connected to the unit. The sight tube,
operating controls and optional inventory sensor must be protected if the units are installed
outdoors and exposed to sub-freezing ambient conditions.
For this purpose, BAC can provide an optional heated enclosure, complete with a 100 W heater.
Otherwise, the sight tube, operating controls and optional inventory sensor must be heat traced and
insulated. It is not necessary to drain the unit during cold weather.

F25
Pressure Drop
The ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Unit is designed for low pressure drop. Figure 6 shows the pressure
drop associated with each unit for a 25% solution of industrially inhibited ethylene glycol. Data for flow rates
not shown should not be extrapolated from the performance curve. Pressure drops for flow rates not
presented in this table, and for alternative fluids, are available by contacting the local BAC Representative.

Figure 6
Warranties
these products.

F26
Comfort Link
Baltimore Building Owners Put Cooling on “ICE”
Comfort Link Inc. has helped building owners

Project Report
in downtown Baltimore, MD put cooling costs

on ice, ice thermal storage that is. Comfort
Link, a partnership between Baltimore Gas &
Electric Company and the Monumental
Investment Company, supplies chilled water
and related HVAC building services to
Baltimore businesses. Buildings served
include government and commercial office
buildings, hospitals, the convention center and
entertainment / retail establishments. With
three plants strategically located around
Baltimore’s Inner Harbor, Comfort Link
supplies cooling to its customers with a greater
degree of system reliability than others can
achieve alone. Other benefits provided
include enhanced building comfort, reduced
environmental risk, deferred capital investment,
and an overall increase in building asset value. Baltimore Convention Center
Convention Center Chilling Station (Plant 1)

Comfort Link’s initial chiller plant is located within the Baltimore Convention Center. Custom field-erected
glycol chillers are industrial screw compressors coupled with remote BAC Evaporative Condensers. 49,055
ton-hours of BAC ice coils, configured for air-agitated, internal melt operation, sit in concrete tanks located in
the convention center basement and below a parking lot adjacent to Oriole Park at Camden Yards. Peak plant
capacity is nearly 12,000 tons.
Market Center Chilling Station (Plant 2)

Custom dual-evaporator screw chillers can efficiently chill gylcol for ice making or water directly during peak
load periods. Packaged centrifugal chillers handle day and night base load water chilling duty. Heat rejection
is handled by BAC Series 3000 Cooling Towers equipped with low sound fans and discharge sound
attenuation. A total of 27,000 ton-hours of BAC ice coils, configured for air-agitated, external melt operation,
are installed in two 39’ diameter, steel storage tanks. Overall plant capacity is 13,750 tons.
Municipal Center Chilling Station (Plant 3)

Due to very tight site constraints, Plant 3 is being constructed and put into service in several phases. Plant 3
is Comfort Link’s largest, with capacity exceeding 16,000 tons. Large capacity centrifugal chillers will handle
water chilling duties. Heat rejection is handled by BAC Model Series 3000 Cooling Towers located on the roof.
Operations
Industrial and commercial businesses in Maryland were required to switch to independent suppliers of electric-
ity and enter the world of deregulation. While many owners dreaded the thought of deregulation, this change
was welcomed by Comfort Link as a great opportunity to manage energy costs.

G1
BAC Custom
Engineered Controls
BAC Custom Engineered Controls

Product Detail
Product Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G2
Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G4
Construction Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G6
Custom Features & Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G8
Engineering Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G13

G2
BAC Controls
BAC provides a complete, industrial grade control solution for all your
evaporative cooling needs:
• Variable frequency drives (VFDs)

BAC Controls
• Enclosed controls – motor starters

and contactors
• Enclosed controls with factory
provided programmable logic
controllers
• Safety disconnect switches
• Externally mounted pre-wired
terminal box
• Universal mounting brackets
Utilizing BAC as your single source

simplifies the order and submittal
approval process. BAC control panels are
specifically designed to work seamlessly
with all BAC units – including open cooling
towers, closed circuit cooling towers,
and evaporative condensers – and are
engineered to meet your particular
application.
BAC Controls offer:

• Single source responsibility
• Indoor/outdoor applications
NEMA 1 VFD with Bypass
• Industrial grade components
• Easy installation
• Ability to comply with current energy standards
• Energy and water savings controls

G3

G4
Benefits
Single Source Responsibility
BAC has designed the controls taking into
BAC Controls
consideration the exact specifications of the

fan and spray pump motors, heaters and other
accessories, providing you with a single
source solution.
Indoor/Outdoor Applications
BAC offers a variety of enclosures for location
flexibility; whether in a mechanical equipment
room or outdoors next to the equipment.
NEMA 3R VFD
Enclosure Type
Indoor Rated Outdoor Rated
NEMA 4x
NEMA 12 NEMA 3R NEMA 4
(Watertight, stainless steel
Products NEMA 1 (Dust tight) (Rainproof) (Watertight)
construction)
VFD
• • •
Enclosed Control • • • • •
Safety Disconnect Switch • • •
Terminal Box •
Industrial Grade Components

NEMA contactors are provided with all BAC control panels (25 amps and above). Circuit breaker
protection is provided for the main panel as well as separate circuit breakers for each motor or speed.
Each control panel is UL/CSA listed.

G5
Easy Installation
All motor starters and basin heater contactors are modular
in design, which simplifies expansion or replacement. The
VFDs are constructed with 24VDC components, making
them 70% lighter and easier to install than VFDs using

120V components. Also available are optional universal
mounting kits and factory pre-wired unit mounted terminal
boxes (Series 3000 Cooling Towers only) for ease of panel
mounting and field wiring, saving time and money.
Compliance with Current

Energy Standards
BAC Controls can help you comply with the speed control
requirements of current energy standards such as
ASHRAE Standard 90.1 and California Title 24.
These standards call for any motor 7.5 HP and above
to have the ability to run at 2/3 or less of full speed.
BAC offers many alternatives to comply with this
requirement, depending on your unique system needs. Pre-wired unit mounted
These methods include variable frequency drives, the terminal box and VFD
BALTIGUARD PLUS™ Fan System, the ENERGY-MISER®
Fan System, or multi-speed motors. The automatic motor
speed control requirements of these standards can be
satisfied through the controllers and temperature/ pressure
sensors available with BAC Controls for any of these
methods.
Saves Energy and Water

Evaporative water-cooled systems, whether for comfort
cooling or process applications, offer substantial
year-round system energy savings compared to air-cooled
alternatives. Proper system control is crucial to fully
utilize this advantage and operate your system at peak
efficiency under all combinations of atmospheric and load
conditions. BAC’s technical expertise in this field can show
you how saving energy can also save you water when
using BAC Controls for a truly “green” solution.
BALTIGUARD PLUS™ Fan System Control

G6
VFD:
1 Ventilation Hood 1
• Required for NEMA 3R Drives
2 Circuit Breaker
• Easily re-settable
BAC Controls
• Adjustable trip point

3 VFD Keypad/Keypad Connector 4
• Standard keypad with Hand-Off-Auto & Bypass 2
• Monitors Fan Speed, Actual Temp/Pressure or
Set-point Water Temp/Pressure
• Ready, Run and Fault lights 3
• Programmable buttons & lights 5
• Multi-Monitor Display
• RS-232 connection provides compatibility interface
with a PC to troubleshoot or reprogram the VFD
4 24VDC Power Supply
• Smallest & lightest components
• 24VDC power supply ensures redundancy 6
5 Space Heater
• Maintains minimum operating temperature
inside panel
• Thermostat control
6 3-Contactor Bypass
• Allows motor to be transferred to utility line
• Manual or automatic bypass
VFD - (NEMA 3R shown)
Enclosed Controls:
2 3
1 120V Transformer 6 1
• Provides 120V, single-phase control circuit power
from high voltage, three-phase supply (from 200-575V)
2 Main Circuit Breaker
3 Disconnect Switch
• Lockable operator handle
• Mechanically tied to the Main Circuit Breaker
4 Hand-Off-Auto Switches, Pilot Lights & Buttons 4
• Pilot Lights for each starter and accessory
• Basin Heater Contactor
• Vibration Cutout Switch Remote Reset Button 5
5 Main Fan Motor Starter

• Full voltage, non-reversing starter
• NEMA rated starters (25A and above)
• IEC rated starters (25A and below)
Programmable Logic Controller/Operator Interface
6 • Externally mounted controller monitors and
adjusts desired parameters
Enclosed controls - (NEMA 3R shown)

G7
Your local BAC

Representative can provide
additional assistance
Safety Disconnect Switch:
1 Clear Line Shield
• Protects the operator from contact with wires
2 Operator Handle

• Triple locking capability 1
• Prevents unauthorized access to the interior
of the enclosure
3 Door Labels Include
• Full lug wire size ranges and torque values
• Parts list
• Catalog numbers of UL listed accessories
• Maximum HP ratings
4 Enclosure Interlock
3 5
• Prevents the front door from being opened while
the disconnect handle is in the ON position 4
6
5 Contacts
• Visible double-break rotary mechanism
• Two points of contact provide a positive open and
close, easier operation and also help prevent help 2
contact burning for longer contact life
6 Ground Lug
• Provided for wiring convenience
Safety disconnect switch -

(NEMA 3R shown)
Terminal Box:
1 Terminal Blocks for Vibration Cutout Switches (VCOS)
• Vibration Cutout Switches are factory-wired into
the terminal blocks
• Electrical contractor wires from the terminal
blocks to the control panel
2 Power Terminal Blocks for Fan Motor(s)
• Fan motor(s) are factory-wired into the terminal blocks
• Electrical contractor wires from the terminal
blocks to the control panel 1
3 Ground Lugs
4 Cover (not shown) 2
• Enclosure provides NEMA 3R rating
• Stainless steel enclosure standard
3
Terminal box - (NEMA 3R shown)

G8
Custom Features & Options

Variable Frequency Drives (VFDs)
VFDs offer many benefits including:
(1) Precise leaving fluid temperature control provides a more
efficient method to vary airflow compared to fan cycling,
BAC Controls
fan dampers, or mechanical speed changers.

(2) Soft-starts, stops, and smooth accelerations prolong the
mechanical system (fans, motors, belts, bearings, etc)
life while reducing maintenance.
(3) The soft-start feature minimizes start-up noise and smooth
acceleration make the tower sound less noticeable to the
neighbors.
The VFDs are UL 508C listed and CUL certified and are
provided with a standard two year warranty.
Standard VFD includes an enclosure, 24VDC power supply,

control power transformer, main circuit breaker, disconnect NEMA 12 VFD with bypass
switch with lockable operator handle, 3-contactor bypass, and multi-monitor display
modular cooling fan and a detachable, programmable
VFD keypad.
3-Contactor Bypass is standard on all BAC drives. The input

contactor electrically isolates the drive during bypass
operation. The output and bypass contactors are mechanically
interlocked to regulate power to the fan motor. Bypass allows
for 100% fan speed operation back-up if the drive is not
functional for any reason.
Circuit Breaker Protection, which allows for quick reset,

is standard on all BAC VFDs. The circuit breaker is
mechanically linked to the rotary disconnect switch
mounted on the front of the panel.
User Interface Keypad controls hand-off-auto and bypass

modes. The multi-monitor display shows fan speed, set point,
measured temperature/pressure, vibration warnings and
fault codes.
Multi-monitor display and keypad

G9
Enclosed Controls
BAC enclosed controls, designed with the highest grade
components, are packed with operation-friendly features to
ensure a long life expectancy and lower life cycle costs. The
modular design of BAC panels allows for consistency across
projects and simplifies upgrades or future replacements, yet
can be customized to meet your particular application. The

enclosed controls are UL 508A listed and CSA/CUL certified
and are provided with a standard one year warranty.
Standard Panel with Fan Motor Starter(s) includes an

enclosure, control power transformer, main circuit breaker,
disconnect switch with lockable operator handle, hand-off-auto
switch, run pilot lights for each starter, and full voltage,
non-reversing starter with overload relay and double-break
silver alloy contacts.
Standard panel with fan motor starter

Circuit Breaker Protection allows for quick reset and is
standard for all BAC control panels. The main circuit breaker
is sized for the maximum current draw for the panel
configuration. Each fan motor starter includes individual
branch circuit protection.
Safety Disconnect Switches

Since control panels can be installed in indoors, NEC Article
430-102b requires a disconnect switch located within sight of
the motor and the driven machinery location. BAC safety
disconnect switches are rated for 600 VAC and sized
specifically for the current draw of the components. The
safety disconnect switches are UL E239 listed and CSA
certified and are provided with a standard one year warranty.
Standard Safety Disconnect Switch meets the NEC

requirements and includes an enclosure, knife blade style
contacts, door lock provision, interlock, ground lug and a
clear line shield.
NEMA 4X safety disconnect switch

G10
Options
Vibration Cutout Switch Interface includes wired interlock
to the fan motor starter and a remote reset button outside
the panel.
BAC Controls
Electric Water Level Control Interface (for enclosed

controls) includes wired interlock to the solenoid make up
valve and provision for high and low level alarms.
Communications Cards (for VFDs) can be provided when a

Building Automation System is used. Currently, BAC offers
Modbus, Lonworks and Johnson N2 cards. Consult the factory
for BACNet and Siemens communication card availability.
Custom VFD Software has been developed for typical

applications. The BAC Start-up Wizard guides the operator
step-by-step through the required parameters and
useful settings.
NEMA 3R VFD with multi-monitor
display & custom VFD software
Commissioning (for VFDs) is available to ensure successful
configuration and operation of BAC drives. Completion of
factory authorized start-up will extend the standard warranty
from two to three years, including parts and labor.
Fan Motor Starters (for enclosed controls) are available for

two speed/one winding; two speed/two winding or main/pony
motor configurations such as the ENERGY-MISER®
Fan System.
Basin Heater Controls (for enclosed controls) are

equipped with definite purpose contacts, a resettable short
circuit protection device, ground fault protection,
Hand-Off-Auto switch, and run pilot light. Basin heater
controls include Ground Fault Interrupt Protection as
required by NEC Article 427.
Spray Pump Motor Starter(s) (for enclosed controls)

include full voltage, non-reversing starter with overload relay
and double-break silver alloy contacts.
Basin heater controls with
ground-fault protection

G11
Positive Closure Damper Interface (for enclosed controls)

includes wired interlock to the fan motor starter.
Temperature/Pressure Controller & Interface Package

(for enclosed controls) includes a temperature or pressure
sensor with a 4-20mA transmitter to modulate the fan speed
and perform other functions such as: turn heaters on and off,

turn the spray pump on and off, or open and close dampers
based on a factory programmed sequence of operation.
Externally Mounted Factory Pre-wired

Terminal Box (Currently available on
Series 3000 Cooling Towers)
All wiring for the fan motor(s) and vibration cutout switch leads
are pre-wired from the factory and terminated on the outside
face of the BAC unit in a clearly marked terminal box. This
feature saves installation labor required to run conduit and Factory wiring to the fan motor & vibra-
wiring to the motor and vibration cutout switch, while saving tion cutout switch to the terminal blocks
material costs for the internal conduit, wire, couplings
and hardware. The externally mounted terminal boxes are UL
1773 listed and CSA certified. The externally mounted terminal
boxes are provided with a standard five year warranty.
The Terminal Box includes a factory-mounted enclosure,

factory wiring to terminal blocks for the fan motors and
vibration cutout switches, and grounding lugs.
Universal Mounting Brackets

Steel struts and mounting hardware are provided for simple
field installation of the control panels. The universal mounting
brackets are provided with a standard one year warranty.
Standard Universal Mounting Brackets include universal

mounting hardware for location flexibility and adjustable
vertical position panels.
Universal mounting brackets

G12
Fan Drive Controls

The ENERGY-MISER® Fan System is an energy
saving, capacity control alternative consisting of two
single speed fan motors and drive assemblies
BAC Controls
connected to a common shaft. A full size fan motor

and drives are coupled with a lower horsepower motor,
approximately 1/3 the standard motor horsepower,
providing stand-by capability in the event of a motor
failure. Drives for the lower horsepower motor are
sized for approximately 2/3 of design fan speed. The
unit can be operated at either full or 2/3 speed for
capacity control and significant energy savings during
periods of reduced load and/or lower ambient
temperatures. The controls and wiring required are
virtually identical to those of two-speed, two-winding
motors.

The BALTIGUARD PLUSTM Fan System builds on the
advantages of the ENERGY-MISER® Fan System by
adding a VFD to the smaller motor. Using the VFD on
the smaller fan motor, as opposed to the larger motor,
reduces the cost of the VFD, wiring, and the fan
motors. As the low speed fan motor operates
approximately 85% of the time, this system also
provides closer capacity control and additional
energy savings as compared to the ENERGY-MISER®
Fan System alone. The full size motor is available for
stand-by operation and for the relatively few hours per
year when full unit capacity is required.
Both the ENERGY-MISER® Fan System and the

BALTIGUARD PLUSTM Fan System are perfect for
one or two cell installations where reliability, energy
savings, and low first cost are critical.
NEMA 3R VFD

G13


8.1 Variable Frequency Drive(s): A variable frequency
drive (VFD) shall be provided for each fan motor. The shall be provided with the enclosed controls.) (A
supplier of the VFD shall be the manufacturer of the temperature controller shall be provided with the
evaporative cooling equipment. The VFD shall have a enclosed controls.) (A basin heater contactor with circuit
3-contactor bypass, 3% input line reactor, a removable breaker shall be provided.) (A vibration cutout switch
keypad, an RS232 terminal for PC connection, drive input shall be provided.)
current rating of 100 kAIC, bypass rating of 36 kAIC,
500,000 hours MTBF and a circuit breaker disconnect.
8.2 Safety Switch(s): A heavy-duty, non-fusible safety
Fuse protection will not be accepted. Control voltage shall
disconnect switch shall be provided by the manufacturer
be 24V to minimize the size of the enclosure which should
of the evaporative cooling equipment. Switch shall be
not exceed __ft x __ft x __ft and the weight of the
single-throw, 3-pole design, rated up to 600 VAC. Switch
enclosure should not exceed __lbs. VFD shall be
shall have triple padlocking capability, a visible double
provided in a NEMA (1) (3R) (12) enclosure. The VFD
break rotary blade mechanism, a clearly visible On/Off
shall be compatible with a (ModBus) (LonWorks)
handle, an interlocking mechanism to prevent door from
(Johnson N2) Building Automation System.
opening with handle in the On position, and a clear line
shield. Safety switch shall be provided in a NEMA (1)
OR (3R) (12) enclosure.
8.1 Enclosed Controls: An enclosed control panel shall 8.3 Universal Mounting Brackets: Mounting brackets
be provided for each cell of the evaporative cooling shall be provided by the equipment manufacturer for each
equipment. The panel shall include full voltage, VFD, enclosed control panel or safety disconnect switch.
non-reversing (FVNR) fan motor and pump motor (if The brackets will have the necessary hardware to mount
applicable) starters in a common enclosure. The panel the controls on the unit without penetrating the basin,
shall use a main circuit breaker disconnect and separate handrails or platforms.
circuit breakers for each motor/speed. Fuse protection will
not be accepted. Panels containing basin heaters shall
have an Earth Leakage Breaker containing ground fault
protection. Starters above 25 A shall be NEMA rated. IEC
starters will be accepted for motors 25A and below. Panel
Hand-Off-Auto switches for each starter or contactor, and
pilot lights for each component. Enclosed controls shall be
provided in a NEMA (1) (3R) (4) (4X) (12) enclosure.

G14
Externally Mounted
Pre-wired Terminal Box
Product Report
BAC can simplify installation by pre-wiring

the fan motors and vibration cutout switch
on Series 3000 Cooling Towers equipped
with BAC Controls. All wiring is terminated
on the cased face of the BAC unit in a
clearly marked, 304 Stainless Steel, NEMA
3R terminal box. The power wirng only
needs to be run to the controls, the terminal
box and otheraccessories.
Features Include:
BAC terminal box with factory wiring
• All field wiring can be easily connected to
the outside of the BAC unit
• Material costs (conduit, wire, couplings,
hardware) associated with internal wiring
are reduced
• Field casing penetrations are eliminated
• Enclosure is constructed of Series 300
stainless steel and NEMA 3R rated
(rainproof and suitable for outdoor
location)
Currently, this option is available on

Series 3000 Cooling Towers provided
with BAC Controls.
External conduit/wiring by others

H1
RS
Remote Sump Tanks
Remote Sump Tanks

Product Detail
Product Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .H2
Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .H3
Custom Features and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .H4
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .H4
Engineering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .H5
Structural Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .H6
Engineering Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .H7

H2
RS Remote Sump Tanks

Single Tank Capacity:
94 – 1,390 US Gallons Maximum Storage Volume
RS
Remote sump tanks can be added to cooling tower, closed circuit cooling tower, or evaporative condenser
systems. Remote sump tanks are often installed indoors in a heated space to prevent freezing of the
recirculating water during cold weather operation. Because the recirculating water is quickly drained from
the unit when the pump is shut off, the indoor remote sump tank eliminates the need for other methods of
freeze protection, such as cold water basin heaters, hot water or steam coils, or steam injectors. Remote
sump tanks are also used to simplify water treatment for multiple cell installations by providing a single
location for monitoring water quality. Remote sump tanks also facilitate dry operation of closed circuit cooling
towers and evaporative condensers by eliminating the need to drain the cold water basin when switching
from wet to dry operation. BAC’s RS Remote Sump Tanks are available in a variety of sizes in galvanized
steel or with the BALTIBOND® Corrosion Protection System.
RS Remote Sump Tanks

• Eliminate the need for other methods of freeze protection
• Simplify water treatment
• Facilitate dry operation

H3
Benefits
Low Installed Cost
Support — All models mount directly on parallel I-beams.
Remote Sump Tanks

Easy Maintenance
Internal Access — The interior of the unit is easily accessible for adjusting the float valve, cleaning
the strainer or flushing the remote sump tank.
The water level control is easily reached from outside the unit

Freeze Protection — For reliable year-round operation, the remote sump tank offers freeze protection
when installed indoors in a heated area, eliminating the need to install and wire cold water basin
heaters.
Long Service Life

Materials of Construction — Available in galvanized steel or with the BALTIBOND® Corrosion
Protection System (see next page for construction options).

H4

galvanized steel.
RS

life, is applied to all hot-dip galvanized steel components of the remote sump tank.
Hot Well/Cold Well Arrangement

A water tight center baffle is provided, along with additional suction & drain connections and strainer, for
separate storage of hot and cold water. This arrangement is provided with a single make-up assembly.
The hot well/cold well arrangement is frequently used with highly variable loads to even out the load put
on the evaporative cooling equipment.
Accessories
The electric water level control replaces the
standard mechanical make-up valve when more
precise water level control is required. This package
consists of a conductance-actuated level control and
a solenoid activated valve in the make-up water line.
Electric water level control package
The valve is slow closing to minimize water hammer.
Tank Covers
Covers with lifting handles are available.

H5
Engineering Data
Remote Sump Tanks

See page M28 for information on how to
size a remote sump tank for an open
cooling tower; page M32 for a closed
circuit cooling tower or
evaporative condenser
*5/8” diameter mounting holes
MAXIMUM NET
DIMENSIONS
SHIPPING MAXIMUM STORAGE "X" MINIMUM AVAILABLE
MODEL WEIGHT WEIGHT VOLUME OPERATING VOLUME SUCTION
NUMBER (LBS) (LBS)1 (GAL) LEVEL (GAL) W L A B MPT
RS-94 240 1,070 94 8 1/2" 72 22 1/2" 36 1/8" 8" 11 1/4" 4"
RS-212 350 2,220 212 8 1/2" 163 46 3/8" 36 1/8" 8" 23 3/16" 4"
RS-335 470 3,410 335 8 1/2" 257 46 3/8" 54 1/8" 8" 23 3/16" 4"
RS-457 610 4,630 457 8 1/2" 351 46 3/8" 72" 9 1/8" 23 3/16" 6"
RS-702 800 6,970 702 8 1/2" 539 46 3/8" 107 7/8" 9 1/8" 23 3/16" 6"
RS-946 1,030 9,340 946 8 1/2" 727 46 3/8" 143 3/4" 9 1/8" 23 3/16" 6"
RS-1390 1,260 13,470 1,390 8 1/2" 1,068 66 1/2" 143 3/4" 9 1/8" 33 1/4" 6"
Notes:
1. Maximum weight is for tank filled with water to overflow.
2. Minimum operating level “X” is measured from inside bottom of tank.

H6
Structural Support
The recommended support arrangement for the RS Remote Sump Tank consists of parallel I-beams
running the full length of the unit, spaced as shown in the following drawings. Besides providing
adequate support, the steel also serves to raise the unit above any solid foundation to ensure access to
the bottom of the unit. To support a RS Remote Sump Tank in an alternate steel support arrangement,
consult your local BAC Representative.
RS
RS-94 RS-212 thru -946
RS-1390
MODEL MAXIMUM
NUMBER C DEFLECTION
RS-94 N/A 3/32”
RS-212 2’ 7-7/8” 3/32”
RS-335 4’ 1-7/8” 1/8”
RS-457 5’ 7-3/4” 3/16”
RS-702 8’ 7-5/8” 9/32”
RS-946 11’ 7-1/2” 3/8”
RS-1390 N/A 3/8”
Notes:
1. Support beams and anchor bolts are to be selected and installed by others.
3. Beams must be selected in accordance with accepted structural practice. The maximum allowable deflection of beams under the unit
shall be 1/360 of unit length, not to exceed the value specified in the table above.

H7
1.0 Construction
1.1 Corrosion Resistant Construction (standard): Unless otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and
structural members shall be constructed of heavy-gauge G-235 (Z700 metric) hot-dip galvanized steel with all
Remote Sump Tanks

edges given a protective coating of zinc-rich compound. Panel design shall be flanged and gasketed.
(Alternate 1.1) Corrosion Resistant Construction (optional): Unless otherwise noted in this specification, all steel
panels and structural members shall be protected with the BALTIBOND® Corrosion Protection System. The
system shall consist of G-235 (Z700 metric) hot-dip galvanized steel prepared in a four-step (clean, pre-treat,
rinse, dry) process with an electrostatically sprayed, thermosetting hybrid polymer fuse-bonded to the substrate
during a thermally activated curing stage and monitored by a 23-step quality assurance program. Panel design
shall be flanged and gasketed.
2.0 Construction Details

2.1 Strainer: A large area, lift-out, hot-dip galvanized steel strainer with perforated openings and an integral
anti-vortexing hood to prevent air treatment shall be provided.
2.2 Make-up Assembly: A brass make-up valve with a large diameter, unsinkable plastic float arranged for easy
adjustment shall be provided.

Survey
2006 BAC Product & Application Handbook Survey
Receive a
FREE
BAC t-shirt
and be entered to
WIN
a BOSE®
WAVE® Radio
with CD Player

Thank you for taking the time to complete the attached survey. The information you provide will assist us in
continuing to improve and enhance the BAC Product & Application Handbook to better serve your needs.
As a small token of our appreciation, BAC will send you a free BAC t-shirt and enter you in a drawing for an
opportunity to win a BOSE® WAVE® Radio upon receiving your completed survey! The Bose drawing will be
held December 16, 2006. Surveys received after December 15, 2006 will be entered into the drawing to be
held on December 21, 2007.
The Survey has 7 questions and should take approximately 10 minutes to complete.
Options for submitting the Survey to BAC:
1) Internet: Complete the survey on-line at WWW.BaltimoreAircoil.com/Survey23

2) FAX: Carefully remove the forms from the Handbook and fax them to BAC at: 410-799-6405
3) Mail: Carefully remove the forms from the Handbook and mail them to:
Attn: Marketing Communications
P.O. Box 7322
Baltimore, MD 21227

(1) What is your overall impression of the BAC Product & Application Handbook?
Poor Satisfactory Good Excellent
q q q q

(2) Please identify your preference for using the following resource formats.
Do not like Indifferent Comfortable Enjoy
Using
Single-bound book q q q q

Binder with individual product brochures q q q q

Electronic formats that require Internet access
(Internet downloads, web pages, etc.) q q q q
CD q q q q
(3) How valuable do you find the following product sections of the BAC Handbook?
Never Use Somewhat Very Extremely
Valuable Valuable Valuable
Open Cooling Towers q q q q

Closed Circuit Cooling Towers q q q q
ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Products q q q q

Custom Engineered Controls q q q q
Remote Sump Tanks q q q q
Evaporative Condensers q q q q
Aircoil™ Evaporators q q q q
ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Units q q q q

(4) How valuable do you find the Technical Resource section of the BAC Handbook?
Never Use Somewhat Very Extremely
Valuable Valuable Valuable
q q q q
(5) How useful did you find the following topics of the Technical Resource section in the
BAC Handbook?

Would Not Somewhat Very Extremely
Use Valuable Valuable Valuable
Wet-Bulb Temperature Selection q q q q
Temperature Conversion Chart q q q q

Formulas and Tables q q q q

Conversion Factors q q q q

Value of Standards and Independent q q q q
Certification Programs

CTI Certification q q q q
What’s a Green Building? q q q q

Materials of Construction q q q q
Selecting a Remote Sump q q q q
Layout Guidelines q q q q
Connection Guide q q q q
Friction Loss Table q q q q
Piping considerations – Maximum Fluid Velocity q q q q


(5) contiinued - How useful did you find the following topics of the Technical Resource section
in the BAC Handbook?


Would Not Somewhat Very Extremely
Use Valuable Valuable Valuable
Cooling Tower Pumping and Piping q q q q
Refrigeration Piping q q q q

Thermophysical Properties of Refrigerants q q q q

Cooling Towers in Parallel q q q q

Fundamentals of Sound q q q q
Fundamentals of Cooling System Filtration q q q q
Water Quality Guidelines q q q q

Maintenance Check List q q q q
Replacement Spare Parts q q q q
The Value of Maintaining Evaporative q q q q

Cooling Equipment
Crossflow Cooling Towers q q q q
Crossflow Coil Products q q q q
Counterflow Products q q q q
Ice Thermal Storage Units q q q q
Aircoil™ Evaporators q q q q
Glossary q q q q


(6) In your opinion, how could the BAC Product and Application Handbook be improved
to better suit your needs?
____________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________
(7) Please fill in the following blanks to enter the BOSE® WAVE® Radio with CD Player
and receive your free BAC t-shirt.
Name:
Company:
Occupation:
Email address:
Phone Number:
Address:
Thank you!
Please check to make sure that you have not accidentally
skipped any questions and submit your survey to BAC
based on the information provided.

Register for your
free copy of the new
BAC Parts & Maintenance
Guide and you may
WIN ®
A BOSE
WAVE® RADIO
WITH CD PLAYER
($499 USD / $699 CDN value)
For a limited time

receive a
free copy
of the new BAC
Parts & Maintenance Guide!
Register to receive your free copy at

www.BaltimoreAircoil.com/parts4me or call 866.283.9567
You will be automatically entered for a chance to win a Bose® Wave® Radio
For complete details go to www.baltimoreaircoil.com/parts4me

Offer valid where prohibited by applicable state or local laws. Must be registered
by December 15, 2006. Bose® and Wave® radio design are both registered
trademarks of the Bose® Corporation.
P.O. Box 7322, Baltimore, MD 21227 USA • Phone: 410.799.6200 • Fax: 410.799.6416
Web: www.BaltimoreAircoil.com
J1
Evaporative
Condensers
Refrigeration
Product Detail

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J2
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J4
Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J10
Construction Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J14
Options and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J20
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J24

Engineering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J32
Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J48
Engineering Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J50
Engineering Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J54

J2
Evaporative Condensers
BAC offers evaporative condensers in six different styles to suit every industry application.
CXV Models -
CXV models deliver efficient performance in an easy-to-maintain

package. BAC’s combined flow technology provides maximum
capacity at the lowest refrigerant charge available in the industry by
incorporating fill media into the traditional evaporative condenser.
In addition, CXV models are designed to mount directly on existing
support steel of both crossflow and counterflow units, making them
a direct replacement option for almost any existing model.
CXV-T models are the largest factory-assembled evaporative

condensers available on the market. The design is similar to that
of the CXV, but on a larger scale with two air inlets instead of one.
These models provide the same efficient performance and easy-
to-maintain package and offer additional benefits for large projects.
These benefits include fewer required cells, lower overall fan
horsepower, and fewer piping connections, lowering both the cost of
installation and ownership.
Series V Models
VC2 models are traditional style forced draft evaporative

condensers with axial fans to minimize energy consumption.
VXMC models provide reliable, efficient operation for units

in tight spaces. The nominal 10’ wide unit extends the layout
flexibility of the VC2 product line.

J3
VC1 models are traditional style evaporative

condensers with centrifugal fans and are suited
to applications where external ductwork or other
Refrigeration
sources of external static pressure exist.
VC1-C models are traditional style evaporative

condensers (centrifugal fan) that are sized
specifically to fit into standard dry van containers.
These models minimize ocean freight costs for
export shipments.
VCL models are centrifugal fan evaporative

condensers that are specifically designed with a low
profile. These units fit well into mechanical equipment
rooms with low ceilings and are easily hidden behind
louvered walls on buildings. Low profile models are
available in heights from 5’ 2-1/4” to 8’ 4-3/4”.

J4
Condenser Features & Options

Standard Features CXV CXV-T VC2 VXMC VC1 VC1-C VCL
Axial Fan • • • •
Centrifugal Fan1 • • •
Large Plenum Area for Access • •
Ammonia Tons 6 - 962 645 - 1,888 98 - 1,357 213 - 879 7 - 1,140 153 - 333 11 - 212
R-22 Tons 81 - 1,218 816 - 2,390 138 - 1,914 300 - 1,239 10 - 1,608 216 - 469 16 - 299
Optional Features & Accessories CXV CXV-T VC2 VXMC VC1 VC1-C VCL
Stainless Steel Cold Water Basin • • • •
Water-Contact SST Cold Water Basin Note 3 Note 3 • • • • •
Stainless Steel Construction Note 3 Note 3 • • • •
Water-Contact Stainless Steel Construction • • • • •
BALTIBOND® Corrosion Protection System • • • • • • •
Coil Options
Extended Surface Coils • • • • •
Stainless Steel Coils • • • • • •
ASME “U” Stamp Coils • • • • • •
Multiple Circuit Coils • • • • • • •
Other Options & Accessories
ENERGY-MISER® Fan System • • • • •
Independent Fan Operation Note 4 • •
Low Sound Fan • •
Sound Attenuation • • • •
Handrails w/Ladder2 • • • •
External Access Platform w/Ladder2 • • • • •
Internal Ladder • •
Internal Access Platform • •
Capacity Control Dampers • • •
Desuperheater Coil • • • •
Subcooling Coil • • • • • • •
Gear Drive •
Basinless Unit Construction •
Factory Mutual Approval • • Note 5 Note 5 Note 5 Note 5 Note 5
Options common to all condenser styles: 1. Centrifugal fan units can overcome e.s.p. imposed by ductwork or other
Motor Options: Basin Heaters restrictions. A larger fan motor may be required; contact your
local sales representative for a selection.
Premium Efficiency Basin Sweeper Piping 2. Safety cages available on ladders when required by local safety standards.
Inverter Duty (VFD) Copper Sweat Fittings 3. Seams between the panels inside the cold water basin are welded for
CXV and CXV-T models. The basin is leak tested at the factory
Two-Speed Air Inlet/Bottom Screens
and welded seams are provided with a five-year leak-proof warranty.
Vibration Cutout Switch 4. This option is available on select models of this product line. Call your
Electric Water Level Control local sales representative for questions regarding specific models.
5. Factory Mutual (FM) approval is typically required on evaporative
Extended Lubrication Lines condensers with PVC fill. As these models do not have PVC fill,
(Standard on VC2)
FM Approval is not available.

J5
Corrosion Resistant Construction

All steel panels and structural elements are constructed of heavy-gauge G-235 hot-dip galvanized steel. The
inlet louvers of CXV & CXV-T models and the casing panels of CXV-T Models are constructed of UV-resistant,
fiberglass reinforced polyester (FRP).
BAC’s standard condensing coil is constructed of continuous lengths of all prime surface steel, hot-dip galvanized
after fabrication (HDGAF). All coils are designed for low pressure drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of
Refrigeration
fluid. Each coil is pneumatically tested at 375 psig (2,586 kPa) and is ASME B31.5 compliant. Condensing coils
shipping into Canada are supplied with a CRN.
For additional corrosion resistance, the following options are available: for availability (see table on J4)

The BALTIBOND® Corrosion Protection System, a hybrid polymer coating used to extend equipment life,
is applied to all hot-dip galvanized steel components of the evaporative condenser (excluding condensing
coil).
• Optional Stainless Steel Cold

Water Basin:
A Series 300 stainless steel cold water basin
is provided.

Steel panels and structural elements are constructed of
Series 300 stainless steel.
• Optional Water-Contact Stainless Steel

Cold Water Basin:
A cost effective alternative to an all stainless steel
cold water basin, all critical components in the cold
water basin are provided in Series 300 stainless steel.
The remaining components are constructed of the
base material of construction (galvanized steel or
Unit with BALTIBOND® Corrosion Protection System
the BALTIBOND® Corrosion Protection System).
• Optional Water-Contact Stainless

Steel Construction:
A cost effective alternative to all stainless steel construction, all components that are exposed to the
recirculating water are provided in Series 300 stainless steel. The remaining components are constructed
of the base material of construction (galvanized steel or the BALTIBOND® Corrosion Protection System).

Welded Cold Water Basins!
Coils are available in Series 300 stainless steel
CXV & CXV-T Models: Seams between
for specialized applications. panels inside the cold water basin
are welded. The basin is leak tested
at the factory and welded seams are
provided with a five-year
leak-proof warranty.

J6
Low Sound
The low sound levels generated by BAC Evaporative Condensers make them suitable for installation in most
environments. Although axial fan units such as the VC2, CXV & CXV-T can meet the sound requirements of
most installations, centrifugal fan models such as the VC1 and VCL should be considered for extremely sound
sensitive installations.
To evaluate whether an axial fan unit can be applied on a particular application, follow these steps to minimize
the impact of sound on the environment. These suggestions are ordered with regard to the impact they will
have on cost. The first couple of suggestions cost very little, while later suggestions may have a significant
impact on the cost of the project.
1. Position the quietest side of the equipment towards the sound sensitive direction. CXV and VC2 models
have a single air inlet and therefore have an inherently quiet “blankoff” panel (the panel opposite the air
inlet) that can insulate sensitive areas from higher sound levels.
2. For CXV & CXV-T models, consider oversizing the unit and reducing the fan speed. This method will
reduce sound levels when the larger unit has the same fan diameter. Contact your local BAC
Representative for assistance with this type of evaluation.
3. Provide a method of capacity control

(see next page for capacity control
options). Capacity control will allow the
fan to run at lower speeds when loads
are lighter or the wet-bulb is lower. These
lower speeds are often sufficient to
provide the scheduled capacity at
night, when sound requirements are the
most stringent.
4. For CXV & CXV-T models, a low sound

fan option is available to significantly
reduce the sound levels generated from
the unit.
5. Factory designed, tested and rated

sound attenuation is available for both
the air intake and discharge for further
sound attenuation.
6. Barrier walls can be constructed to

prevent sound transmission to sensitive
areas.

J7
Capacity Control
Evaporative condensers provide lower condensing temperatures and can offer significant horsepower savings
over conventional air-cooled and water-cooled condensing systems. The owner saves money while conserving
natural resources and reducing environmental impact. Energy consumption can be further reduced via the
following capacity control options:
Variable Frequency Drives
Refrigeration
Precise capacity control and energy savings are achieved with the BAC variable frequency drive (VFD) option.
VFDs offer a more efficient and reliable way to reduce fan speed compared to fan cycling, fan discharge
dampers, or mechanical speed changers.
The inherent ability for VFDs to provide soft starts, stops, and smooth accelerations prolongs the mechanical
system life (fans, motors, belts, bearings, etc.). Sound levels are also reduced at lower fan speeds, and start-
up noise is eliminated with the soft start feature. See page J8 for information on BAC’s enclosed control and
variable frequency drive offerings.
NOTE: An inverter duty motor is required for all models operating with a variable frequency drive.

The ENERGY-MISER® Fan System consists
of two standard single-speed fan motors
and drive assemblies. One drive assembly
is sized for full speed and load, and the
other is sized approximately 2/3 speed and
consumes only 1/3 the design horsepower.
This configuration allows the system to be
operated like a two-speed motor, but with
the reserve capacity of a standby motor in
the event of failure. As a minimum, approxi-
mately 70% capacity will be available from
the low horsepower motor, even on a design
wet-bulb day. Controls and wiring are the
same as those required for a two-speed,
two-winding motor. Significant energy savings are achieved when operating at low speed during periods of
reduced load and/or low wet-bulb temperatures.
BALTIGUARD PLUS™ Fan System

The BALTIGUARD PLUS™ Fan System builds on the advantages of the ENERGY-MISER® Fan System by
adding a VFD to the smaller motor. Using the VFD on the smaller fan motor, as opposed to the larger motor,
reduces the cost of the VFD, and wiring for the motor.

The Independent Fan option consists of one fan motor and drive assembly for each fan to allow independent
operation, adding redundancy and an additional step of fan cycling and capacity control to models with more
than one fan.
See Page J8 for information

on BAC Controls!

J8
BAC Controls
VFD:
Ventilation Hood
1
1
• Required for NEMA 3R Drives
2 Circuit Breaker
4
2
3 VFD Keypad/Keypad Connector
• Standard keypad w/Hand-Off Auto & Bypass
• Monitors Fan Speed, Actual Temp/Pressure or 3
Set-point Water Temp/Pressure 5
• Ready, Run and Fault lights
• Programmable buttons & lights
• Multi-Monitor Display
• RS-232 connection provides compatibility interface
with a PC to troubleshoot or reprogram the VFD
6
4 24VDC Power Supply
• Smallest & lightest components
• 24VDC power supply ensures redundancy
5 Space Heater
• Maintains minimum operating temperature
inside panel
• Thermostat control
3-Contactor Bypass VFD - (NEMA 3R Shown)
6
• Allows motor to be transferred to utility line
• Manual or automatic bypass
Enclosed Controls:
1 120V Transformer 6
• Provides 120V, single-phase control circuit power
from high voltage, three-phase supply (from 200-575V)
2 Main Circuit Breaker

3 Disconnect Switch
• Lockable operator handle
• Mechanically tied to the Main Circuit Breaker
4 Hand-Off-Auto Switches, Pilot Lights & Buttons

• Pilot Lights for each starter and accessory
• Basin Heater Contactor
• Vibration Cutout Switch Remote Reset Button
5 Main Fan Motor Starter

• Full voltage, non-reversing starter
• NEMA rated starters (25A and Above)
• IEC rated starters (25A and Below)
6 Programmable Logic Controller/Operator Interface

• Externally mounted controller monitors and
adjusts desired parameters
Enclosed Controls - (NEMA 3R Shown)

J9
Your Local BAC

Representative can provide
additional assistance
Refrigeration
Safety Disconnect Switch:
1 Clear Line Shield
• Protects the operator from contact with wires
2 Operator Handle 4
1
• Triple locking capability
• Prevents unauthorized access to the interior
of the enclosure
3 Door Labels Include 2
• Full lug wire size ranges and torque values
• Parts list
• Catalog numbers of UL listed accessories
• Maximum HP ratings 3 5
4 Enclosure Interlock
• Prevents the front door from being opened while 6
the disconnect handle is in the ON position
5 Contacts
• Visible double-break rotary mechanism
• Two points of contact provide a positive open and
close, easier operation and also help prevent help
contact burning for longer contact life
6 Ground Lug
Safety Disconnect Switch -

(NEMA 3R Shown)

J10
CXV Spotlight
Reduced Scale Potential
BAC’s innovative combined flow technology, applied on CXV & CXV-T Evaporative Condensers, is used to reduce
the tendency to accumulate fouling and scale on the coil’s exterior surface. Fouling is the build-up of solids, often
calcium and magnesium compounds, resulting from the evaporation of water within the unit. By reducing fouling
tendency, units are able to sustain peak heat transfer capability over the life of the equipment and maximize
coil longevity. This saves time, money and energy in the installation, operation, and routine maintenance of
equipment. Four facets of the unique product design contribute to the reduced tendency for fouling:
• The air and water flow in a parallel path;

eliminating scale-producing dry spots
on the coil
• Increased water flow over the coil is
more than twice that of conventional
designs to provide continuous flooding of
the primary heat transfer surface
• Evaporative cooling occurs primarily in
the fill
• Colder spray water keeps scale-forming
compounds in solution Advanced Coil Technology Conventional Designs
Reduced Refrigerant Charge Easy Maintenance

The combined flow technology utilized on CXV & Hinged access doors on each end wall of CXV & CXV-
CXV-T models provides maximum capacity at the T models provide easy access to the unit interior. The
lowest refrigerant charge available in the industry. spacious plenum area of these models provides easy
Reduced refrigerant charge lowers installation costs access to the cold water basin, drift eliminators, fan
and may help satisfy refrigerant charge thresholds. drive system and condensing coil.
Lower refrigerant charge means fewer coil connections
Parallel flow of air and spray water over the condensing
and also leads to a reduction in cost through savings
coil allows access to and inspection of the top of the
on pipe, valves, purgers, and labor.
coil during full operation.

J11
CXV Series Principle of Operation

Water is sprayed in parallel with the fresh ambient air flowing over The cooled water increases the temperature differential
the outside of the condensing coil. Parallel air and water paths between the water and the refrigerant, which permits the
minimize scale-producing dry spots that may be found on the CXV to deliver a reduced coil size, fewer coil connections,
bottom of the tubes in other, conventional condensers. a lower refrigerant charge, and reduced unit weights. This
facet further reduces the tendency to form scale on the
Refrigeration
coil since cooler water offers higher solubility for scale
producing compounds.
The condensing coil rejects

heat through both evaporative
cooling using the fresh air
stream and, more significantly,
through sensible cooling using
the pre-cooled recirculating
spray water. Reducing this
evaporative cooling component
from the coil section helps to
minimize the propensity to form
scale on the relatively hot coil
surface.
Water is pumped over the condensing The recirculating spray water falls from the coil to a fill
coil at a rate of 10 GPM/ft2 of coil face surface section where it is cooled by a second fresh
area to ensure continuous flooding of air stream using both evaporative and sensible heat
the primary heat transfer surface which transfer processes.
enhances heat transfer efficiency and
minimizes scale formation.

J12
Series V Spotlight
Easy Maintenance Economical Export
The fans, motor, and drive system of Series V units VC1-C models are sized specifically to fit into
(VC2, VC1, VC1-C, & VCL models) are located standard dry van containers. These models minimize
outside of the moist discharge air stream, protecting ocean freight costs for export shipments.
them from moisture condensation and icing, and
facilitating maintenance.
Dry van container
External drive system

The vapor to be condensed is circulated through
a condensing coil, which is continually wetted on
the outside by a recirculating water system. Air is
simultaneously blown upward over the coil, causing
a small portion of the water to evaporate. This
evaporation removes heat from the coil, cooling and
condensing the vapor in the coil.
Low profile
Ducted Installations
VC1 and VCL models are provided with centrifugal
fans suitable for applications where external ductwork
or other sources of external static pressure exist.
Low Profile Models

VCL models fit well into mechanical equipment
rooms with low ceilings and are easily hidden behind
louvered walls on buildings. Low profile models are
available in heights from 5’ 2-1/4” to 8’ 4-3/4”.

J13
BAC 360™ Spray Nozzle

Reduce maintenance costs and ensure efficient equipment operation with BAC’s non-clog nozzle that
combines scatter diffusion technology with BAC’s largest nozzle orifice yet, to create the most technologically
advanced spray nozzle in the industry!
Features and Benefits
Refrigeration
• Ease of Maintenance
Easy snap in/out grommet design
Anti-scale design
• Large non-clog orifice
• Robust, durable construction
• Universal alignment
• No moving parts
• Eliminates dry spots inherent in other designs
BAC 360TM Spray Nozzles can easily

replace nozzles in existing BAC units and
other manufacturers’ units too!

J14
CXV Models
3
2
10 7

J15
1 Heavy-Duty Construction 6
• G-235 (Z700 metric) hot-dip
BACross® Fill with
galvanized steel panels
Integral Drift Eliminators
(Not Shown)
Refrigeration
• Premium quality, solid-backed,
multi-groove belt
• Corrosion resistant cast 7
aluminum sheaves FRP Air Inlet Louvers
• Heavy-duty bearings • Corrosion resistant
(280,000 hour average life) • UV resistant finish
• Cooling tower duty fan motor • Maintenance free
• 5-year motor and drive warranty 8
Cold Water Basin
3 Low HP Axial Fan(s) • Sloped cold water basin for easy cleaning
• Quiet operation • Suction strainer with anti-vortex hood
• Corrosion resistant accessible from louver face
4 Water Distribution System accessible from louver face
• Integral internal walkway
• Overlapping spray patterns ensure proper 9
water coverage Recirculating Spray Water Pump
• Large orifice, 360º non-clog nozzles • Close coupled, bronze fitted
centrifugal pump
5 Coil Section (Not Shown) • Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) motor
• Bleed line with metering valve
• Continuous serpentine, steel tubing
installed from pump discharge to overflow
10
Hinged Access Doors
• Orders shipping into Canada are supplied
with a CRN

J16
CXV-T Models
6
2 1
7
8

J17
1 Heavy-Duty Construction 7 BACross® Fill with

• G-235 (Z700 metric) hot-dip Integral Drift Eliminators
galvanized steel panels • Polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
2 FRP Casing Panels • Flame spread rating of 5 per ASTM E84-77a
Refrigeration
• Maintenance free 8 FRP Air Inlet Louvers
• UV resistant finish • Corrosion resistant
3 BALTIDRIVE® Power Train • Maintenance free
• Premium quality, solid backed,
multi-groove belt 9 Cold Water Basin
• Corrosion resistant cast • Sloped cold water basin for easy cleaning
aluminum sheaves
• Heavy-duty bearings
(280,000 hour average life)
• 5-year motor and drive warranty 10 Integral Recirculating Spray
Water Pumps (Not Shown)
• Close coupled, bronze fitted centrifugal pumps
4 Low HP Axial Fan • Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) motors
• Quiet operation
• Bleed line with metering valve installed
• Corrosion resistant from pump discharge to overflow
5 Water Distribution System 11 Hinged Access Doors

• Visible and accessible during operation (Not Shown)
• Overlapping spray patterns ensure proper • Inward swinging door on each end wall
water coverage
• Large orifice, 360º non-clog nozzles
6 Coil Sections
• Continuous serpentine, steel tubing
• Orders shipping into Canada are supplied
with a CRN

J18
Series V Models
4
2
1
Upper Section: 8
VC1 & VC2 Models
6
7
5
4
2 Lower Section:
VC1 Models
3 6
1
8 VCL Models
7 5
1 8
11 1
11
8 7
10
10
7 VC2-N Models
Lower Section:
VC2 Models

J19
1 Heavy Duty Construction 6 Low Sound Centrifugal Fan(s)

• G-235 (Z700 metric) hot-dip galvanized (VC1/VCL Models)
steel panels • Quiet operation
Refrigeration
2 Water Distribution System 7 Recirculating Spray Pump
• Schedule 40 PVC spray branches • Close coupled, bronze fitted centrifugal pump
• Large orifice, non-clog nozzles • Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) motor
• Grommetted for easy maintenance • Bleed line with metering valve installed from
3 Coil
• Continuous serpentine, steel tubing 8 Access Door
• Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (HDGAF) • Circular access door
• Sloped tubes for free drainage of fluid 9 Strainer (Not Shown)
• ASME B31.5 compliant • Anti-vortexing design to prevent air
• Orders shipping into Canada are supplied entrainment
with a CRN
10 Fan Drive System
4 Drift Eliminators (VC2 Models Only)
• Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) • V-belt drive
• Impervious to rot, decay and biological attack • Heavy-duty bearings
• Flame spread rating of 5 per ASTM E84-77a (280,000 hour average life)
• Assembled in easy to handle sections • Extended lubrication lines

5 Fan Drive System • 5-year motor and drive warranty
(VC1/VCL Models)
• V-belt drive 11 Low HP Axial Fan(s)
• Heavy-duty bearings (VC2 Models)
(280,000 hour average life) • Corrosion resistant

J20
Options and Accessories

External Service Platforms Internal Service Platforms
For external service, louver face and access door An upper service platform with ladder and handrails is
platforms can be added to the unit for easy access to available for access to the motor and drive assemblies
the drift eliminators and spray system. Safety gates on stacked CXV and CXV-T units. Safety gates are
are available for all handrail openings. All components available for handrail openings. All components are
are designed to meet OSHA requirements. designed to meet OSHA requirements.
External platform at louver face with ladder and safety cage
Ladder, Safety Cage, Gate

and Handrails
In the event the end-user elects to provide access to Internal ladder and service platform

the top of the unit, units can be furnished with ladders,
safety cages, safety gates and handrail packages. Vibration Cutout Switch
All components are designed to meet OSHA require- A factory mounted vibration cutout switch is available
ments. All access to the top of the equipment must to effectively protect against equipment failure due
be made in accordance with applicable governmental to excessive vibration of the mechanical equipment
occupational safety standards. system. BAC can provide either a mechanical or solid-
NOTE: When these access options are employed, state electronic vibration cutout switch in a NEMA
VC2 & VC1 models must be equipped with steel drift 4 enclosure to ensure reliable protection. Additional
eliminators. contacts can be provided to activate an alarm.
NOTE: For CXV-T models, partial or full grating above Basin Heaters
the coil air intake is recommended with this option.
Evaporative condensers exposed to below freezing
ambient temperatures require protection to prevent
Internal Ladder
freezing of the water in the cold water basin when the
An internal ladder is available for access to motor and unit is idle. Factory-installed heaters, which maintain
drive assemblies. +40°F (4.4°C) water temperature, are a simple and
inexpensive way of providing such protection.

J21
Heater Sizing Data

CXV Heater Sizing
0ºF (-17.8°C) Ambient Heaters -20ºF (-28.9°C) Ambient Heaters
Model Numbers
CXV-64 thru 95 1 4 1 6
CXV-103 thru 153 1 6 1 8
CXV-160 thru 192, 206 1 8 1 12
Refrigeration
CXV-196 thru 305 1 12 1 16
CXV-310 thru 481 1 16 1 21
CXV-N465 thru N687 2 10 2 15
CXV-420 thru 610 2 12 2 16
CXV-620 thru 962 2 16 2 21
CXV-T645 thru T792 2 12 2 15
CXV-T791 thru T944 2 14 2 20
CXV-T1290 thru T1584 4 12 4 15
CXV-T1654 thru T1888 4 14 4 20
Series V Heater Sizing

0ºF (-17.8°C) Ambient Heaters -20ºF (-28.9°C) Ambient Heaters
Model Numbers
VC2-N138 thru N191 1 5 1 9
VC2-N206 thru N235 1 7 1 10
VC2-N261 thru N301 1 8 1 10
VC2-N356 thru N446 1 12 1 16
VC2-319 thru 626 1 10 1 16
VC2-526 thru 957 1 16 1 20
VC2-N870 thru N1204 2 10 2 16
VC2-684 thru 1252 2 10 2 16
VC2-1052 thru 1914 2 16 2 20
VXMC-300 thru 380 1 8 1 12
VXMC-430 thru 620 1 12 1 18
VXMC-600 thru 760 2 8 2 12
VXMC-860 thru 1240 2 12 2 18
VC1-10 thru 25 1 2 1 2
VC1-30 thru 65 1 2 1 2
VC1-72 thru 90 1 2 1 3
VC1-100 thru 135 1 3 1 5
VC1-150 thru 205 1 3 1 5
VC1-N208 thru N230 1 5 1 7.5
VC1-N243 thru N315 1 5 1 7.5
VC1-C216 thru C320 1 5 1 7.5
VC1-N338 thru N470 1 7 1 10
VC1-C339 thru C469 1 5 1 7.5
VC1-386 thru 516 1 8 1 10
VC1-540 thru 804 1 12 1 16
VC1-772 thru 1032 2 8 2 10
VC1-1158 thru 1608 2 12 2 16
VCL-016 thru 035 1 2 1 2
VCL-038 thru 079 1 3 1 4
VCL-087 thru 120 1 4 1 5
VCL-134 thru 155 1 5 1 7
VCL-167 thru 234 1 7 1 9
VCL-257 thru 299 1 9 1 12

J22
Options and Accessories

Extended lubrication lines are available for lubrication
of the fan shaft bearings. Grease fittings are located
inside the plenum area next to the access door for
CXV & CXV-T models, and outside the fan section for
all other models.
NOTE: This option is standard on VC2 models.
Electric Water Level Grease fittings outside Grease fittings at the bearings
Control Package the unit

Subcooling Coils
mechanical make-up valve when a more precise Subcooling coils are available for those halocarbon
water level control is required. This package consists refrigerant installations where subcooled refrigerant
of a conductance-actuated level control mounted is specified, or where the pressure drop or a vertical
in the basin and a solenoid activated valve in the rise in the liquid line is great enough to cause
make-up water line. The valve is slow closing to excessive flashing. Standard subcooling coil sections
minimize water hammer. provide approximately 10ºF of subcooling at standard
conditions. Subcooling sections are approximately
7” high and are mounted between the coil and basin
sections. Coils are hot-dip galvanized after fabrication
and pneumatically tested at 375 psig.
Desuperheater Coils
The addition of a desuperheater coil can sometimes
permit the use of a unit with a smaller plan area.
The desuperheater section is mounted on top of the
condenser in the discharge air stream. Coils are
hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and pneumatically
tested at 375 psig. Piping between the desuperheater
Basin Sweeper Piping coil and the condenser coil is not included.
Basin sweeper piping provides an effective method

of preventing debris from collecting in the cold Optional Extended Surface Coil
water basin of the unit. A complete piping system is
provided in the cold water basin for connection to Condensing coils are available with selected rows
side stream filtration equipment (by others). Specific finned at 5 fins per inch for wet/dry applications. The
design varies by model. coil is hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (HDGAF).
Capacity Control Dampers Optional ASME “U” Stamp Coil

The condensing coil can be constructed to meet
Modulating capacity control dampers are available to the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure
provide better capacity control than can be obtained Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1, and bear the
from fan cycling alone. A standard electrical control ASME “U” stamp. ASME coils are hot-dip galvanized
package for dampers is available. after fabrication (HDGAF).

J23
Multiple Refrigerant Circuit Coil Gear Drive System, Close-Coupled

Multiple circuit coils are generally required on Motor (CXV-T Models Only)
halocarbon refrigerant systems, where it is common CXV-T Models are available with a close-coupled
practice to maintain individual compressor systems. gear drive system. Both the gear drive and
The quantity of circuits, capacity per circuit, and couplings are selected with a 2.0 service factor.
desired connection size should be specified when Gear construction includes a nickel-alloy steel shaft,
requesting this option. case hardened gears, self lubrication, and a single
piece, gray iron housing. This drive system ships
Refrigeration
Auxiliary Water or Glycol Circuit
A circuit can be isolated to provide cooling of a
water or glycol loop for compressor jacket cooling.
The flow rate and entering temperature should be
specified when requesting this option. The leaving
temperature should be the same as the condensing
temperature.

Air Inlet Screens
Gear Drive System, Externally
Wire mesh screens can be factory-installed over
the inlet louvers and the spray distribution system Mounted Motor (CXV-T Models Only)
of CXV & CXV-T models to prevent debris from
A gear drive system with
entering the unit.
a TEFC motor mounted
outside the airstream is also
available. A non-corrosive
Bottom Screens carbon-fiber composite drive
Wire mesh screens are available factory-installed shaft with stainless steel
over the bottom openings of Series V units to hubs is selected with a 2.0
prevent unauthorized access. service factor. The motor and
drive shaft ship separately
for easy field installation.
Solid Bottom Panels
Factory-installed bottom panels are required when Basinless Unit Construction
the intake air is ducted to the unit.
(CXV-T Models Only)
The basinless unit
construction option
enables units to
Copper Sweat Fittings be directly applied
Optional copper sweat fittings to new or existing
are available to simplify field concrete cold water
piping. basins. This custom
feature, available
exclusively on BAC
CXV-T evaporative
condensers, reduces
Factory Mutual Approval maintenance costs by
eliminating the integral basin from traditional units.
CXV & CXV-T models provided with Factory Mutual It simplifies piping and pumping requirements of
(FM) Approval must be multi-cell installations, and multi-cell installations and provides a cost-effective
have galvanized steel casing panels and louvers. solution for many field-erected replacement projects.

J24
Download free selection

Selection software at
www.BaltimoreAircoil.com
Two methods of unit selection are provided on the following pages. The
heat rejection method is always recommended and the selection can be Table 1.
made via BAC’s free product selection software, or manually as described Base Heat Rejection CXV & CXV-T
below.
Base Heat Base Heat
Model Model
NOTE: Consult your local BAC Representative for evaporative Number
Rejection
Number
Rejection
condenser selections for systems utilizing the following:
(MBH) (MBH)
• Hydrocarbon refrigerants such as propane, butane, or propylene

CXV-64 1,327 CXV-620 12,851
CXV-77 1,596 CXV-648 13,431
• Centrifugal compressors CXV-86 1,783 CXV-674 13,970
• Rotary screw compressors with water cooled oil coolers

CXV-95 1,969 CXV-698 14,467
CXV-103 2,135 CXV-746 15,462
• Ammonia evaporative condensers with desuperheaters CXV-119 2,467 CXV-776 16,084
• Halocarbon evaporative condensers with subcooling

CXV-125 2,591 CXV-796 16,499
CXV-134 2,777 CXV-832 17,245
Heat Rejection Method CXV-143 2,964 CXV-854 17,701

CXV-153 3,171 CXV-898 18,613
In a mechanical refrigeration system, the function of an evaporative CXV-160 3,316 CXV-932 19,318
condenser is to reject heat to the environment. The heat to be rejected CXV-171 3,544 CXV-962 19,939
is the sum of the heat input at the evaporator and the energy input at CXV-179 3,710 CXV-N465 9,638
the compressor. For a given set of operating conditions, the energy CXV-192 3,980 CXV-N491 10,177
CXV-184 3,814 CXV-N530 10,985
input through the compression process can vary. Therefore, in order to
CXV-206 4,270 CXV-N559 11,586
accurately determine the proper evaporative condenser required, it is
CXV-196 4,062 CXV-N574 11,897
necessary to establish the compressor energy input as well as the heat
CXV-210 4,353 CXV-N605 12,540
absorbed in the evaporator. CXV-220 4,560 CXV-N636 13,182
CXV-235 4,871 CXV-N664 13,763
CXV-253 5,244 CXV-N687 14,239
Selection Procedure CXV-264 5,472 CXV-T645 13,369
CXV-283 5,866 CXV-T686 14,219
The Base Heat Rejection of each evaporative condenser is shown in
CXV-290 6,011 CXV-T717 14,861
Tables 1 through 4. Tables 5, 6 and 7 present correction factors to be CXV-305 6,322 CXV-T729 15,110
applied to the system heat rejection for various condensing temperatures, CXV-310 6,425 CXV-T763 15,815
wet-bulbs, and refrigerants. CXV-324 6,716 CXV-T792 16,416
CXV-T791 16,395
1. Establish total heat rejection required in thousands of BTU per
CXV-337 6,985
CXV-349 7,234 CXV-T827 17,141
hour (MBH):Total heat rejection = compressor evaporator
CXV-373 7,731 CXV-T857 17,763
capacity (MBH) + compressor BHP x 2.545.
CXV-388 8,042 CXV-T876 18,157
2. Determine the refrigerant and design conditions for condensing CXV-398 8,249 CXV-T906 18,779
temperature and wet-bulb temperature. CXV-416 8,622 CXV-T944 19,566

CXV-427 8,850 CXV-T1290 26,738
3. Using the appropriate table for the system refrigerant and CXV-449 9,306 CXV-T1372 28,437
model (Table 5, 6 or 7), determine the correction CXV-466 9,659 CXV-T1434 29,723
factor for the design condensing temperature and CXV-481 9,970 CXV-T1458 30,220
wet-bulb temperature. CXV-420 8,705 CXV-T1526 31,629
CXV-470 9,742 CXV-T1584 32,832
4. Multiply the total heat rejection by the correction factor CXV-506 10,488 CXV-T1582 32,790
determined in Step 3. CXV-528 10,944 CXV-T1654 34,282
CXV-566 11,731 CXV-T1714 35,526
5. From Tables 1 through 4, select the evaporative condenser
CXV--580 12,022 CXV-T1752 36,314
whose Base Heat Rejection equals or exceeds the corrected
CXV-610 12,643 CXV-T1812 37,557
heat rejection calculated in Step 4.
CXV-T1888 39,133

J25
Table 4.
Table 2. Table 3. Base Heat
Base Heat Rejection VC2 & VXMC Base Heat Rejection VC1 & VC1-C Rejection VCL
Base Heat Base Heat Base Heat Base Heat Base Heat
Model Model Model Model Model
Rejection Rejection Rejection Rejection Rejection
Number Number Number Number Number
(MBH) (MBH) (MBH) (MBH) (MBH)
VC2-N138 2,029 VC2-684 10,055 VC1-10 147 VC1-540 7,938 VCL-016 235
VC2-N150 2,205 VC2-754 11,084 VC1-15 221 VC1-579 8,511 VCL-019 279
Refrigeration
VC2-N170 2,499 VC2-840 12,348 VC1-20 294 VC1-612 8,996 VCL-024 353
VC2-N191 2,808 VC2-902 13,259 VC1-25 368 VC1-646 9,496 VCL-029 426
VC2-N206 3,028 VC2-942 13,847 VC1-30 441 VC1-683 10,040 VCL-035 515
VC2-N215 3,161 VC2-982 14,435 VC1-38 559 VC1-715 10,511 VCL-038 559
VC2-N235 3,455 VC2-1026 15,082 VC1-46 676 VC1-748 10,996 VCL-044 647
VC2-N261 3,837 VC2-1082 15,905 VC1-52 764 VC1-804 11,819 VCL-048 706
VC2-N301 4,425 VC2-1160 17,052 VC1-58 853 VC1-772 11,348 VCL-054 794
VC2-N356 5,233 VC2-1170 17,199 VC1-65 956 VC1-872 12,818 VCL-058 853
VC2-N396 5,821 VC2-1252 18,404 VC1-72 1,058 VC1-934 13,730 VCL-065 956
VC2-N416 6,115 VC2-1052 15,464 VC1-80 1,176 VC1-908 13,348 VCL-073 1,073
VC2-N446 6,556 VC2-1162 17,081 VC1-90 1,323 VC1-974 14,318 VCL-079 1,161
VC2-319 4,689 VC2-1246 18,316 VC1-100 1,470 VC1-1032 15,170 VCL-087 1,279
VC2-342 5,027 VC2-1284 18,875 VC1-110 1,617 VC1-1158 17,023 VCL-096 1,411
VC2-377 5,542 VC2-1376 20,227 VC1-125 1,838 VC1-1224 17,993 VCL-102 1,499
VC2-420 6,174 VC2-1422 20,903 VC1-135 1,985 VC1-1366 20,080 VCL-108 1,588
VC2-451 6,630 VC2-1504 22,109 VC1-150 2,205 VC1-1430 21,021 VCL-115 1,691
VC2-471 6,924 VC2-1570 23,079 VC1-165 2,426 VC1-1496 21,991 VCL-120 1,764
VC2-491 7,218 VC2-1654 24,314 VC1-185 2,720 VC1-1608 23,638 VCL-134 1,970
VC2-513 7,541 VC2-1774 26,078 VC1-205 3,014 VC1-C216 3,175 VCL-148 2,176
VC2-541 7,953 VC2-1790 26,313 VC1-N208 3,058 VC1-C231 3,396 VCL-155 2,279
VC2-580 8,526 VC2-1914 28,136 VC1-N230 3,381 VC1-C242 3,557 VCL-167 2,455
VC2-585 8,600 VXMC VC1-N243 3,572 VC1-C260 3,822 VCL-185 2,720
VC2-626 9,202 VXMC-300 4,410 VC1-N257 3,778 VC1-C274 4,028 VCL-209 3,072
VC2-752 11,054 VXMC-585 8,600 VC1-N417 6,130 VC1-C396 5,821
VC2-785 11,540 VXMC-620 9,114 VC1-N470 6,909 VC1-C424 6,233
VC2-827 12,157 VXMC-600 8,820 VC1-386 5,674 VC1-C445 6,542
VC2-887 13,039 VXMC-680 9,996 VC1-436 6,409 VC1-C469 6,894
VC2-895 13,157 VXMC-760 11,172 VC1-467 6,865
VC2-957 14,068 VXMC-860 12,642 VC1-454 6,674
VC2-N870 12,789 VXMC-920 13,524 VC1-487 7,159
VC2-N932 13,700 VXMC-1020 14,994 VC1-516 7,585
VC2-N1000 14,700 VXMC-1120 16,464
VC2-N1071 15,744 VXMC-1170 17,199
VC2-N1124 16,523 VXMC-1240 18,228
VC2-N1204 17,699

J26
Table 5. Heat Rejection Capacity Factors – R-717 (Ammonia)

Condensing
Pressure (psig) Entering Wet-Bulb Temperature (°F)
Condensing
R-717 Temp (°F) 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 72 74 76 78 80 82
151.3 85 0.97 1.01 1.06 1.11 1.17 1.25 1.33 1.43 1.55 1.70 1.89 2.14 2.47 2.97 3.73 - -
154.1 86 0.94 0.98 1.02 1.07 1.13 1.19 1.27 1.36 1.46 1.60 1.76 1.97 2.26 2.66 3.26 4.25 -
156.9 87 0.91 0.95 0.99 1.03 1.08 1.14 1.21 1.29 1.39 1.51 1.65 1.83 2.08 2.40 2.88 3.63 -
159.8 88 0.88 0.91 0.95 0.99 1.04 1.10 1.16 1.23 1.32 1.42 1.55 1.71 1.92 2.20 2.58 3.16 4.13
162.6 89 0.85 0.89 0.92 0.96 1.00 1.05 1.11 1.18 1.26 1.35 1.46 1.60 1.78 2.02 2.34 2.80 3.53
165.5 90 0.83 0.86 0.89 0.93 0.97 1.01 1.07 1.13 1.20 1.28 1.38 1.51 1.67 1.87 2.13 2.51 3.08
168.5 91 0.80 0.83 0.86 0.90 0.93 0.98 1.02 1.08 1.14 1.22 1.31 1.42 1.56 1.73 1.96 2.27 2.72
171.5 92 0.78 0.81 0.83 0.87 0.90 0.94 0.99 1.04 1.10 1.17 1.25 1.35 1.47 1.62 1.82 2.08 2.44
174.5 93 0.76 0.78 0.81 0.84 0.87 0.91 0.95 1.00 1.05 1.11 1.19 1.28 1.38 1.52 1.69 1.91 2.21
177.6 94 0.74 0.76 0.79 0.81 0.84 0.88 0.92 0.96 1.01 1.07 1.13 1.21 1.31 1.43 1.58 1.77 2.02
180.7 95 0.72 0.74 0.76 0.79 0.82 0.85 0.88 0.92 0.97 1.02 1.08 1.16 1.24 1.35 1.48 1.64 1.86
185.0 96.3 0.69 0.71 0.73 0.76 0.78 0.81 0.84 0.88 0.92 0.97 1.02 1.09 1.16 1.25 1.36 1.51 1.68
187.0 97 0.68 0.70 0.72 0.74 0.77 0.79 0.83 0.86 0.90 0.94 0.99 1.05 1.13 1.21 1.31 1.44 1.60
190.2 98 0.66 0.68 0.70 0.72 0.74 0.77 0.80 0.83 0.87 0.91 0.96 1.01 1.07 1.15 1.24 1.35 1.49
193.4 99 0.65 0.66 0.68 0.70 0.72 0.75 0.77 0.80 0.84 0.87 0.92 0.97 1.03 1.10 1.18 1.28 1.40
196.7 100 0.63 0.65 0.66 0.68 0.70 0.72 0.75 0.78 0.81 0.84 0.88 0.93 0.98 1.05 1.12 1.21 1.32
213.7 105 0.56 0.57 0.58 0.60 0.61 0.63 0.65 0.67 0.69 0.71 0.74 0.77 0.81 0.85 0.89 0.95 1.01
231.8 110 0.50 0.51 0.52 0.53 0.54 0.55 0.57 0.58 0.60 0.62 0.64 0.66 0.68 0.71 0.74 0.78 0.82
Table 6. Heat Rejection Capacity Factors – R-22, R-134a (CXV Only)

Condensing
Condensing
R-22 R-134a Temp (°F) 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 72 74 76 78 80 82
155.7 95.2 85 1.16 1.21 1.27 1.33 1.41 1.50 1.60 1.72 1.87 2.05 2.29 2.59 3.01 3.61 4.56 - -
158.2 97.1 86 1.13 1.17 1.23 1.29 1.36 1.44 1.53 1.64 1.77 1.94 2.14 2.40 2.75 3.24 3.98 5.21 -
160.7 98.9 87 1.09 1.14 1.19 1.24 1.31 1.38 1.46 1.56 1.68 1.83 2.01 2.23 2.53 2.94 3.53 4.46 -
163.2 100.7 88 1.06 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.26 1.32 1.40 1.49 1.14 1.23 1.89 2.09 2.34 2.69 3.17 3.89 5.09
165.8 102.6 89 1.03 1.07 1.11 1.16 1.21 1.27 1.34 1.43 1.53 1.64 1.78 1.96 2.18 2.47 2.87 3.45 4.35
168.4 104.3 90 0.99 1.03 1.07 1.12 1.16 1.22 1.29 1.36 1.45 1.56 1.68 1.84 2.03 2.29 2.62 3.09 3.79
171.0 106.2 91 0.97 1.00 1.04 1.08 1.13 1.18 1.24 1.31 1.39 1.49 1.60 1.74 1.91 2.13 2.41 2.80 3.36
173.7 108.1 92 0.94 0.97 1.01 1.04 1.09 1.14 1.19 1.26 1.33 1.42 1.52 1.65 1.80 1.99 2.23 2.56 3.02
176.4 110.0 93 0.91 0.94 0.98 1.01 1.05 1.10 1.15 1.21 1.28 1.36 1.45 1.56 1.70 1.86 2.08 2.35 2.73
179.1 111.9 94 0.89 0.92 0.95 0.98 1.02 1.06 1.11 1.17 1.23 1.30 1.39 1.49 1.61 1.76 1.94 2.18 2.50
181.8 113.9 95 0.87 0.89 0.92 0.95 0.99 1.03 1.07 1.12 1.18 1.25 1.33 1.42 1.53 1.66 1.82 2.03 2.30
184.6 115.9 96 0.84 0.87 0.90 0.93 0.96 1.00 1.04 1.09 1.14 1.20 1.27 1.35 1.45 1.57 1.71 1.90 2.13
187.4 117.5 97 0.82 0.85 0.87 0.90 0.93 0.97 1.01 1.05 1.10 1.15 1.22 1.30 1.38 1.49 1.62 1.78 1.98
190.2 119.9 98 0.80 0.82 0.85 0.88 0.91 0.94 0.97 1.01 1.06 1.11 1.17 1.24 1.32 1.42 1.53 1.68 1.85
193.0 122.1 99 0.78 0.80 0.83 0.85 0.88 0.91 0.94 0.98 1.03 1.07 1.13 1.19 1.27 1.35 1.46 1.58 1.74
195.9 124.1 100 0.76 0.78 0.81 0.83 0.86 0.88 0.92 0.95 0.99 1.04 1.09 1.14 1.21 1.29 1.39 1.50 1.64
210.7 149.6 105 0.68 0.70 0.71 0.73 0.75 0.77 0.80 0.82 0.85 0.88 0.92 0.96 1.00 1.05 1.11 1.18 1.26
226.4 146.4 110 0.61 0.62 0.64 0.65 0.67 0.68 0.70 0.72 0.74 0.76 0.79 0.82 0.85 0.89 0.93 0.97 1.03

J27
Table 7. Heat Rejection Capacity Factors – R-22, R-134a (Series V Only)

Condensing
Condensing
R-22 R-134a Temp (°F) 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 72 74 76 78 80 82
155.7 95.2 85 1.09 1.14 1.19 1.25 1.32 1.40 1.49 1.60 1.74 1.91 2.12 2.40 2.78 3.33 - - -
158.2 97.1 86 1.06 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.27 1.34 1.42 1.52 1.64 1.79 1.98 2.22 2.54 2.98 3.66 4.78 -
160.7 98.9 87 1.02 1.06 1.11 1.16 1.22 1.28 1.36 1.45 1.56 1.69 1.85 2.06 2.33 2.70 3.24 4.08 -
163.2 100.7 88 0.99 1.03 1.07 1.12 1.17 1.23 1.30 1.38 1.48 1.60 1.74 1.92 2.16 2.47 2.90 3.56 4.65
Refrigeration
165.8 102.6 89 0.96 0.99 1.03 1.08 1.13 1.18 1.25 1.32 1.41 1.52 1.64 1.80 2.00 2.27 2.63 3.15 3.97
168.4 104.3 90 0.93 0.96 1.00 1.04 1.09 1.14 1.20 1.27 1.35 1.44 1.56 1.70 1.87 2.10 2.40 2.82 3.46
171.0 106.2 91 0.90 0.93 0.97 1.01 1.05 1.10 1.15 1.21 1.29 1.37 1.47 1.60 1.75 1.95 2.20 2.55 3.06
173.7 108.1 92 0.88 0.91 0.94 0.97 1.01 1.06 1.11 1.16 1.23 1.31 1.40 1.51 1.65 1.82 2.04 2.33 2.74
176.4 110.0 93 0.85 0.88 0.91 0.94 0.98 1.02 1.07 1.12 1.18 1.25 1.33 1.43 1.56 1.71 1.90 2.14 2.49
179.1 111.9 94 0.83 0.85 0.88 0.91 0.95 0.98 1.03 1.08 1.13 1.20 1.27 1.35 1.47 1.60 1.77 1.98 2.27
181.8 113.9 95 0.81 0.83 0.86 0.88 0.92 0.95 0.99 1.04 1.09 1.15 1.22 1.30 1.40 1.51 1.66 1.84 2.09
184.6 115.9 96 0.79 0.81 0.83 0.86 0.89 0.92 0.96 1.00 1.05 1.10 1.17 1.24 1.33 1.43 1.56 1.72 1.93
187.4 117.5 97 0.76 0.79 0.81 0.83 0.86 0.89 0.93 0.97 1.01 1.06 1.12 1.18 1.26 1.36 1.47 1.61 1.80
190.2 119.9 98 0.75 0.76 0.79 0.81 0.84 0.86 0.90 0.93 0.97 1.02 1.07 1.13 1.21 1.29 1.39 1.52 1.68
193.0 122.1 99 0.73 0.74 0.77 0.79 0.81 0.84 0.87 0.90 0.94 0.98 1.03 1.09 1.15 1.23 1.32 1.43 1.57
195.9 124.1 100 0.71 0.73 0.74 0.77 0.79 0.81 0.84 0.87 0.91 0.95 0.99 1.04 1.10 1.17 1.26 1.36 1.48
210.7 149.6 105 0.63 0.64 0.66 0.67 0.69 0.71 0.73 0.75 0.77 0.80 0.83 0.87 0.91 0.95 1.00 1.07 1.14
226.4 146.4 110 0.56 0.57 0.58 0.60 0.61 0.62 0.64 0.65 0.67 0.69 0.71 0.74 0.77 0.85 0.83 0.87 0.92
Selection Example Solution:

Given: • Determine the total heat rejection:
Compressor evaporator capacity =
R-717 refrigerant 550 TR x 12,000 BTUH/TR = 6,600,000 BTUH
Compressor evaporator capacity = 550 tons Compressor BHP input =
600 BHP x 2,545 BTUH/BHP = 1,527,000 BTUH
Compressor BHP = 600 Total heat rejection = 8,127,000 BTUH = 8,127 MBH
Condensing temperature = 95°F • From Table 5, the heat rejection capacity factor for
R-717 at 95ºF condensing temperature and 76ºF
Wet-bulb temperature = 76°F
wet-bulb temperature is 1.35
• Multiply: 8,127 MBH x 1.35 = 10,972 MBH
• From Table 1 select a unit with a Base Heat

Rejection equal to or greater than 10,972 MBH:
Model CXV-N530
Contact your local BAC Representative for assistance

with alternate refrigerant selections.

J28
Evaporator Ton Method Table 8.

Base Corrected Evaporator Tons
This selection method is based on estimated horsepower
requirements for open reciprocating compressors only, and cannot CXV & CXV-T
be considered to be precise. Critical selection of this type should be Corrected Corrected
Model Model
checked by the heat rejection method shown on page J24. Number
Evaporator
Number
Evaporator
Tons Tons
Selection Procedure CXV-64 64 CXV-620 620
1. Determine the evaporator capacity in Refrigeration Tons CXV-77 77 CXV-648 648
(one Refrigreration Ton = 12,000 BTUH)
CXV-86 86 CXV-674 674

CXV-95 95 CXV-698 698
2. Determine refrigerant and design conditions of condensing CXV-103 103 CXV-746 746
temperature, suction temperature, and wet-bulb temperature. CXV-119 119 CXV-776 776
CXV-125 125 CXV-796 796
3. Using tables appropriate for the system refigerant, determine two CXV-134 134 CXV-832 832
correction factors: the Evaporator Capacity Factor (Table 12
CXV-143 143 CXV-854 854
to 15) and the Suction Temperature Factor (Tables 16 and 17).
CXV-153 153 CXV-898 898
4) Mutiply the evaporator capacity in tons by the two correction CXV-160 160 CXV-932 932
factors determined in Step 3. CXV-171 171 CXV-962 962

CXV-179 179 CXV-N465 465
5) From Table 8 through 11 evaporative condenser whose model CXV-192 192 CXV-N491 491
number equals or exceeds the product (factors x tons) calculated CXV-184 184 CXV-N530 530
in Step 4. CXV-206 206 CXV-N559 559
CXV-196 196 CXV-N574 574
Notes: Consult your BAC Representative for evaporative condenser CXV-210 210 CXV-N605 605
selections for systems utilizing refrigerants other than R-717, R-22, or CXV-220 220 CXV-N636 636
R-134a and systems requiring special considerations, such as screw CXV-235 235 CXV-N664 664
compressors with water cooled oil coolers, evaporative condensers with
CXV-253 253 CXV-N687 687
ammonia desuperheaters or halocarbon subcooling.
CXV-264 264 CXV-T645 645
CXV-283 283 CXV-T686 686
Selection Example: CXV-290 290 CXV-T717 717
Open Recip. Compressor CXV-305 305 CXV-T729 729
CXV-310 310 CXV-T763 763
Given: R-134a refrigerant CXV-324 324 CXV-T792 792
Evaporator capacity = 145 tons
CXV-337 337 CXV-T791 791
Condensing temperature = 105ºF
CXV-349 349 CXV-T827 827
Suction temperature = 30ºF
CXV-373 373 CXV-T857 857
Wet-bulb temperature = 80ºF
CXV-388 388 CXV-T876 876
Solution: CXV-398 398 CXV-T906 906
• From Table 13, the capacity factor for R-134a at 105ºF condensing CXV-416 416 CXV-T944 944
temperature and 80ºF wet-bulb is 0.84. CXV-427 427 CXV-T1290 1,290
• From Table 17, the capacity factor for R-134a at 30ºF suction CXV-449 449 CXV-T1372 1,372
temperature is 1.03. CXV-466 466 CXV-T1434 1,434
• Multiply 145 x 0.84 x 1.03 = 125.5 corrected tons. CXV-481 481 CXV-T1458 1,458
• From Table 8, select a unit with Corrected Evaporator Tons equal CXV-420 420 CXV-T1526 1,526
or greater to 125.5: Model CXV-134. CXV-470 470 CXV-T1584 1,584
CXV-506 506 CXV-T1582 1,582
CXV-528 528 CXV-T1654 1,654
CXV-566 566 CXV-T1714 1,714
CXV-580 580 CXV-T1752 1,752
CXV-610 610 CXV-T1812 1,812
CXV-T1888 1,888

J29
Table 9. Table 10. Table 11.

Base Corrected Evaporator Tons Base Corrected Evaporator Tons Base Corrected
VC2 & VXMC VC1 & VC1-C Evaporator Tons
VCL
Corrected Corrected Corrected Corrected Corrected
Model Model Model Model Model
Evaporator Evaporator Evaporator Evaporator Evaporator
Number Number Number Number Number
Tons Tons Tons Tons Tons
VC2-N138 138 VC2-684 684 VC1-10 10 VC1-540 540 VCL-016 16
Refrigeration
VC2-N150 150 VC2-754 754 VC1-15 15 VC1-579 579 VCL-019 19
VC2-N170 170 VC2-840 840 VC1-20 20 VC1-612 612 VCL-024 24
VC2-N191 191 VC2-902 902 VC1-25 25 VC1-646 646 VCL-029 29
VC2-N206 206 VC2-942 942 VC1-30 30 VC1-683 683 VCL-035 35
VC2-N215 215 VC2-982 982 VC1-38 38 VC1-715 715 VCL-038 38
VC2-N235 235 VC2-1026 1,026 VC1-46 46 VC1-748 748 VCL-044 44
VC2-N261 261 VC2-1082 1,082 VC1-52 52 VC1-804 804 VCL-048 48
VC2-N301 301 VC2-1160 1,160 VC1-58 58 VC1-772 772 VCL-054 54
VC2-N356 356 VC2-1170 1,170 VC1-65 65 VC1-872 872 VCL-058 58
VC2-N396 396 VC2-1252 1,252 VC1-72 72 VC1-934 934 VCL-065 65
VC2-N416 416 VC2-1052 1,052 VC1-80 80 VC1-908 908 VCL-073 73
VC2-N446 446 VC2-1162 1,162 VC1-90 90 VC1-974 974 VCL-079 79
VC2-319 319 VC2-1246 1,246 VC1-100 100 VC1-1032 1,032 VCL-087 87
VC2-342 342 VC2-1284 1,284 VC1-110 110 VC1-1158 1,158 VCL-096 96
VC2-377 377 VC2-1376 1,376 VC1-125 125 VC1-1224 1,224 VCL-102 102
VC2-420 420 VC2-1422 1,422 VC1-135 135 VC1-1366 1,366 VCL-108 108
VC2-451 451 VC2-1504 1,504 VC1-150 150 VC1-1430 1,430 VCL-115 115
VC2-471 471 VC2-1570 1,570 VC1-165 165 VC1-1496 1,496 VCL-120 120
VC2-491 491 VC2-1654 1,654 VC1-185 185 VC1-1608 1,608 VCL-134 134
VC2-513 513 VC2-1774 1,774 VC1-205 205 VC1-C216 216 VCL-148 148
VC2-541 541 VC2-1790 1,790 VC1-N208 208 VC1-C231 231 VCL-155 155
VC2-580 580 VC2-1914 1,914 VC1-N230 230 VC1-C242 242 VCL-167 167
VC2-585 585 VXMC VC1-N243 243 VC1-C260 260 VCL-185 185
VC2-626 626 VXMC-300 300 VC1-N257 257 VC1-C274 274 VCL-209 209
VC2-752 752 VXMC-585 585 VC1-N417 417 VC1-C396 396
VC2-785 785 VXMC-620 620 VC1-N470 470 VC1-C424 424
VC2-827 827 VXMC-600 600 VC1-386 386 VC1-C445 445
VC2-887 887 VXMC-680 680 VC1-436 436 VC1-C469 469
VC2-895 895 VXMC-760 760 VC1-467 467
VC2-957 957 VXMC-860 860 VC1-454 454
VC2-N870 870 VXMC-920 920 VC1-487 487
VC2-N932 932 VXMC-1020 1,020 VC1-516 516
VC2-N1000 1,000 VXMC-1120 1,120
VC2-N1071 1,071 VXMC-1170 1,170
VC2-N1124 1,124 VXMC-1240 1,240
VC2-N1204 1,204

J30
Table 12. Evaporator Capacity Factors – R-717 (Ammonia) (CXV Only)

Condensing
Condensing
R-717 Temp (°F) 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 72 74 76 78 80 82
151.7 85 0.70 0.73 0.76 0.80 0.84 0.89 0.95 1.02 1.11 1.22 1.35 1.53 1.77 2.12 2.67 - -
154.1 86 0.68 0.70 0.73 0.77 0.81 0.86 0.91 0.97 1.05 1.15 1.26 1.42 1.62 1.91 2.33 3.05 -
156.9 87 0.66 0.68 0.71 0.74 0.78 0.82 0.87 0.93 1.00 1.08 1.19 1.32 1.49 1.73 2.07 2.61 -
159.8 88 0.64 0.66 0.69 0.72 0.75 0.79 0.84 0.89 0.95 1.03 1.12 1.23 1.38 1.58 1.86 2.28 2.98
162.6 89 0.62 0.64 0.67 0.69 0.73 0.76 0.80 0.85 0.91 0.98 1.06 1.16 1.29 1.46 1.69 2.02 2.55
165.9 90 0.60 0.62 0.65 0.67 0.70 0.73 0.77 0.82 0.87 0.93 1.00 1.09 1.21 1.35 1.53 1.82 2.23
168.9 91 0.58 0.60 0.63 0.65 0.68 0.71 0.74 0.78 0.83 0.89 0.95 1.03 1.13 1.26 1.43 1.65 1.98
171.9 92 0.57 0.59 0.61 0.63 0.66 0.69 0.72 0.75 0.80 0.85 0.91 0.98 1.07 1.18 1.32 1.51 1.78
174.9 93 0.55 0.57 0.59 0.61 0.64 0.66 0.69 0.73 0.77 0.81 0.87 0.93 1.01 1.11 1.23 1.39 1.61
178.0 94 0.54 0.56 0.58 0.59 0.62 0.64 0.67 0.70 0.74 0.78 0.83 0.89 0.96 1.04 1.15 1.29 1.48
181.1 95 0.53 0.54 0.56 0.58 0.60 0.62 0.65 0.68 0.71 0.75 0.80 0.85 0.91 0.99 1.08 1.20 1.36
185.0 96.3 0.51 0.53 0.54 0.56 0.58 0.60 0.62 0.65 0.68 0.71 0.75 0.80 0.86 0.92 1.00 1.11 1.24
187.4 97 0.50 0.52 0.53 0.55 0.57 0.59 0.61 0.63 0.66 0.70 0.73 0.78 0.83 0.89 0.97 1.06 1.18
190.6 98 0.49 0.50 0.52 0.53 0.55 0.57 0.59 0.61 0.64 0.67 0.71 0.75 0.79 0.85 0.92 0.99 1.1
193.9 99 0.48 0.49 0.51 0.52 0.54 0.55 0.57 0.60 0.62 0.65 0.68 0.72 0.76 0.81 0.87 0.95 1.04
197.2 100 0.47 0.48 0.49 0.51 0.52 0.54 0.56 0.58 0.60 0.63 0.66 0.69 0.73 0.78 0.83 0.90 0.98
214.2 105 0.42 0.43 0.44 0.45 0.46 0.47 0.49 0.50 0.52 0.54 0.56 0.58 0.61 0.64 0.67 0.71 0.76
232.3 110 0.37 0.38 0.39 0.40 0.41 0.42 0.43 0.44 0.46 0.47 0.48 0.50 0.52 0.54 0.56 0.59 0.62
Table 13. Evaporator Capacity Factors – R-22, R-134a (CXV Only)

Condensing
Condensing
R-22 R-134a Temp (°F) 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 72 74 76 78 80 82
155.7 95.2 85 0.79 0.82 0.86 0.90 0.95 1.01 1.08 1.16 1.26 1.39 1.55 1.75 2.03 2.44 3.08 - -
158.2 97.1 86 0.77 0.80 0.83 0.87 0.92 0.98 1.04 1.11 1.20 1.31 1.45 1.63 1.87 2.20 2.70 3.53 -
160.7 98.9 87 0.74 0.77 0.81 0.84 0.89 0.94 1.00 1.06 1.14 1.24 1.36 1.52 1.72 2.00 2.40 3.03 -
163.2 100.7 88 0.72 0.75 0.78 0.82 0.86 0.90 0.96 1.02 1.09 1.18 1.29 1.42 1.60 1.83 2.16 2.65 3.47
165.8 102.6 89 0.70 0.73 0.76 0.79 0.83 0.87 0.92 0.98 1.04 1.12 1.22 1.34 1.49 1.69 1.96 2.35 2.97
168.4 104.3 90 0.68 0.71 0.73 0.76 0.80 0.84 0.89 0.93 0.99 1.07 1.15 1.26 1.39 1.56 1.79 2.11 2.59
171.0 106.2 91 0.66 0.69 0.71 0.74 0.77 0.81 0.85 0.90 0.95 1.02 1.10 1.19 1.31 1.46 1.65 1.92 2.31
173.7 108.1 92 0.65 0.67 0.69 0.72 0.75 0.78 0.82 0.86 0.92 0.98 1.05 1.13 1.24 1.37 1.53 1.76 2.07
176.4 110.0 93 0.63 0.65 0.67 0.70 0.73 0.76 0.79 0.83 0.88 0.94 1.00 1.08 1.17 1.28 1.43 1.62 1.88
179.1 111.9 94 0.61 0.63 0.66 0.68 0.70 0.73 0.77 0.81 0.85 0.90 0.96 1.03 1.11 1.21 1.34 1.51 1.73
181.8 113.9 95 0.60 0.62 0.64 0.66 0.69 0.71 0.74 0.78 0.82 0.86 0.92 0.98 1.06 1.15 1.26 1.40 1.59
184.6 115.9 96 0.59 0.60 0.62 0.64 0.67 0.69 0.72 0.75 0.79 0.83 0.88 0.94 1.01 1.09 1.19 1.32 1.48
187.4 117.5 97 0.57 0.59 0.61 0.63 0.65 0.67 0.70 0.73 0.76 0.80 0.85 0.90 0.96 1.04 1.13 1.24 1.38
190.2 119.9 98 0.56 0.58 0.59 0.61 0.63 0.65 0.68 0.71 0.74 0.78 0.82 0.87 0.92 0.99 1.07 1.17 1.29
193.0 122.1 99 0.55 0.56 0.58 0.60 0.62 0.64 0.66 0.69 0.72 0.75 0.79 0.83 0.88 0.95 1.02 1.11 1.22
195.9 124.1 100 0.54 0.55 0.56 0.58 0.60 0.62 0.64 0.67 0.69 0.73 0.76 0.80 0.85 0.91 0.97 1.05 1.15
210.7 149.6 105 0.48 0.49 0.51 0.52 0.53 0.55 0.56 0.58 0.60 0.63 0.65 0.68 0.71 0.75 0.79 0.84 0.90
226.4 146.4 110 0.44 0.45 0.46 0.47 0.48 0.49 0.50 0.52 0.53 0.55 0.57 0.59 0.61 0.64 0.67 0.70 0.74
Contact your local BAC Representative for assistance

with alternate refrigerant selections.

J31
Table 14. Evaporator Capacity Factors – R-717 (Ammonia) (Series V Only)

Condensing
Condensing
R-717 Temp (°F) 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 72 74 76 78 80 82
151.7 85 0.98 1.02 1.07 1.12 1.18 1.26 1.34 1.44 1.56 1.71 1.90 2.15 2.50 2.99 - - -
154.1 86 0.95 0.99 1.03 1.08 1.14 1.20 1.28 1.37 1.48 1.61 1.78 1.99 2.28 2.68 3.29 4.30 -
156.9 87 0.92 0.96 1.00 1.04 1.10 1.16 1.23 1.31 1.41 1.52 1.67 1.86 2.10 2.44 2.92 3.68 -
159.8 88 0.90 0.93 0.97 1.01 1.06 1.11 1.18 1.25 1.34 1.45 1.58 1.74 1.95 2.23 2.62 3.21 4.20
Refrigeration
162.6 89 0.87 0.90 0.94 0.98 1.02 1.07 1.13 1.20 1.28 1.37 1.49 1.63 1.82 2.05 2.38 2.85 3.59
165.9 90 0.85 0.88 0.91 0.95 0.99 1.03 1.09 1.15 1.22 1.31 1.41 1.54 1.70 1.91 2.18 2.56 3.14
168.9 91 0.82 0.85 0.88 0.92 0.95 1.00 1.05 1.11 1.17 1.25 1.34 1.46 1.60 1.78 2.01 2.33 2.79
171.9 92 0.80 0.83 0.86 0.89 0.92 0.96 1.01 1.06 1.12 1.20 1.28 1.38 1.51 1.66 1.86 2.13 2.51
174.9 93 0.78 0.81 0.83 0.86 0.90 0.93 0.98 1.02 1.08 1.15 1.22 1.31 1.42 1.56 1.74 1.96 2.27
178.0 94 0.76 0.78 0.81 0.84 0.87 0.90 0.94 0.99 1.04 1.10 1.17 1.25 1.35 1.47 1.62 1.82 2.08
181.1 95 0.74 0.76 0.79 0.81 0.84 0.88 0.91 0.95 1.00 1.06 1.12 1.19 1.28 1.39 1.53 1.70 1.92
185.0 96.3 0.72 0.74 0.76 0.79 0.81 0.84 0.88 0.91 0.96 1.01 1.06 1.13 1.21 1.30 1.41 1.56 1.74
187.4 97 0.71 0.73 0.75 0.77 0.80 0.82 0.86 0.89 0.93 0.98 1.03 1.10 1.17 1.26 1.36 1.49 1.66
190.6 98 0.69 0.71 0.73 0.75 0.77 0.80 0.83 0.86 0.90 0.95 0.99 1.05 1.12 1.20 1.29 1.41 1.55
193.9 99 0.67 0.69 0.71 0.73 0.75 0.78 0.81 0.84 0.87 0.91 0.96 1.01 1.07 1.14 1.23 1.33 1.46
197.2 100 0.66 0.68 0.69 0.71 0.73 0.76 0.78 0.81 0.85 0.88 0.92 0.97 1.03 1.09 1.17 1.26 1.38
214.2 105 0.59 0.61 0.62 0.63 0.65 0.67 0.69 0.71 0.73 0.76 0.79 0.82 0.86 0.90 0.95 1.00 1.07
232.3 110 0.54 0.55 0.56 0.57 0.58 0.59 0.61 0.62 0.64 0.66 0.68 0.71 0.73 0.76 0.79 0.83 0.88
Table 15. Evaporator Capacity Factors – R-22, R-134a (Series V Only)

Condensing
Condensing
R-22 R-134a Temp (°F) 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 72 74 76 78 80 82
155.7 95.2 85 1.04 1.09 1.14 1.19 1.26 1.33 1.42 1.53 1.66 1.82 2.02 2.29 2.65 3.18 - - -
158.2 97.1 86 1.01 1.05 1.10 1.15 1.21 1.28 1.36 1.46 1.57 1.71 1.89 2.12 2.42 2.85 3.49 4.57 -
160.7 98.9 87 0.98 1.02 1.06 1.11 1.16 1.23 1.30 1.39 1.49 1.62 1.78 1.97 2.23 2.59 3.10 3.91 -
163.2 100.7 88 0.95 0.99 1.03 1.07 1.12 1.18 1.25 1.33 1.42 1.53 1.67 1.85 2.07 2.37 2.79 3.41 4.46
165.8 102.6 89 0.92 0.96 0.99 1.04 1.08 1.14 1.20 1.27 1.36 1.46 1.58 1.73 1.93 2.18 2.53 3.03 3.82
168.4 104.3 90 0.90 0.93 0.96 1.00 1.05 1.10 1.15 1.22 1.30 1.39 1.50 1.64 1.80 2.02 2.31 2.72 3.33
171.0 106.2 91 0.87 0.90 0.94 0.97 1.01 1.06 1.11 1.17 1.24 1.33 1.43 1.55 1.69 1.88 2.13 2.47 2.95
173.7 108.1 92 0.85 0.88 0.91 0.94 0.98 1.02 1.07 1.13 1.19 1.27 1.36 1.47 1.60 1.76 1.98 2.26 2.66
176.4 110.0 93 0.83 0.85 0.88 0.91 0.95 0.99 1.04 1.09 1.15 1.22 1.30 1.39 1.51 1.66 1.84 2.08 2.41
179.1 111.9 94 0.81 0.83 0.86 0.89 0.92 0.96 1.00 1.05 1.10 1.17 1.24 1.33 1.43 1.56 1.72 1.93 2.21
181.8 113.9 95 0.79 0.81 0.84 0.86 0.89 0.93 0.97 1.01 1.06 1.12 1.19 1.27 1.36 1.48 1.62 1.80 2.04
184.6 115.9 96 0.77 0.79 0.81 0.84 0.87 0.90 0.94 0.98 1.03 1.08 1.14 1.21 1.30 1.40 1.53 1.68 1.89
187.4 117.5 97 0.75 0.77 0.79 0.82 0.84 0.88 0.91 0.95 0.99 1.04 1.10 1.16 1.24 1.33 1.44 1.58 1.76
190.2 119.9 98 0.73 0.75 0.77 0.80 0.82 0.85 0.88 0.92 0.96 1.00 1.05 1.11 1.19 1.27 1.37 1.49 1.65
193.0 122.1 99 0.72 0.73 0.75 0.78 0.80 0.83 0.86 0.89 0.93 0.97 1.02 1.07 1.14 1.21 1.30 1.41 1.55
195.9 124.1 100 0.70 0.72 0.74 0.76 0.78 0.80 0.83 0.86 0.90 0.94 0.98 1.03 1.09 1.16 1.24 1.34 1.46
210.7 149.6 105 0.63 0.64 0.66 0.67 0.69 0.71 0.73 0.75 0.77 0.80 0.83 0.87 0.91 0.95 1.00 1.07 1.14
226.4 146.4 110 0.57 0.58 0.59 0.60 0.62 0.63 0.65 0.66 0.68 0.70 0.72 0.75 0.78 0.81 0.84 0.88 0.93
Table 16. Suction Temperature Factors – R-717 (Ammonia)

Suction Temperature (°F) -20 -10 0 +10 +20 +30 +40 +50
Capacity Factor 1.14 1.11 1.07 1.04 1.00 0.98 0.95 0.93
Table 17. Suction Temperature Factors – R-22, R-134a

Suction Temperature (°F) -20 -10 0 +10 +20 +30 +40 +50
Capacity Factor 1.20 1.16 1.13 1.09 1.06 1.03 1.00 0.98

J32
Engineering Data See page M32

for information on sizing a
remote sump tank.
Models CXV-64 to 206
Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions. This handbook includes data current at
the time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. Up-to-date engineering data, free
product selection software and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
REFRIG IN MODELS MODELS MODELS

REFRIG OUT
64 - 95 160 - 206
13’ — 2-3/4”
103 - 153
ACCESS DOOR
6“ — 0-3/4”
BOTH ENDS
3“ OVERFLOW 1/2” MAKE UP 1/2” MAKE UP 1/2” MAKE UP
2“ DRAIN 1‘—3-3/4” 6‘ — 1-1/4” 1‘—4-1/4” 9‘ — 1-1/4” 1‘—8-1/4” 12‘ — 1-1/4”

8‘ — 5-1/4”
SIDE ELEVATION SIDE ELEVATION SIDE ELEVATION
END ELEVATION
Approx. Weights (lbs) Remote Sump

Base Ammonia Internal Spray
Nom. Heat Fan Airflow Pump Operating Coil Flow- Drain Volume Approx.
Box Model Rejection R-22 Motor Rate Motor Heaviest Charge5 Volume rate Size Required Oper. Wt.
Size Number1 (MBH) Tons2 (HP) (CFM) (HP) Ship. Section Oper.3 (lbs) (ft3) (GPM) (in) (gal) (lbs)
CXV-64 1,327 81 5 28,950 1.5 5,020 2,870 7,410 51 6.2 190 6 270 7,120
8.5’ x 6’
CXV-77 1,596 97 5 28,550 1.5 5,340 3,190 7,780 67 8 190 6 270 7,490
CXV-86 1,783 109 5 27,850 1.5 5,680 3,530 8,170 84 10 190 6 270 7,880
CXV-95 1,969 120 7.5 31,050 1.5 6,030 3,880 8,570 101 12 190 6 270 8,280
CXV-103 2,135 130 10 48,650 2 7,160 4,240 10,800 76 9.2 290 6 290 10,470
CXV-119 2,467 151 7.5 43,650 2 7,640 4,720 11,350 101 12 290 6 290 11,020
8.5’ x 9’
CXV-125 2,591 158 10 48,000 2 7,650 4,730 11,360 101 12 290 6 290 11,030
CXV-134 2,777 170 7.5 42,550 2 8,130 5,210 11,910 126 15 290 6 290 11,580
CXV-143 2,964 181 10 45,650 2 8,630 5,710 12,480 151 18 290 6 290 12,150
CXV-153 3,171 194 15 52,150 2 8,680 5,760 12,530 151 18 290 6 290 12,200
CXV-160 3,316 203 10 58,750 3 9,360 5,720 14,330 135 16 500 8 550 13,770
CXV-171 3,544 216 15 67,150 3 9,410 5,770 14,380 135 16 500 8 550 13,820
8.5’ x 12’
CXV-179 3,710 227 10 57,250 3 10,010 6,370 15,060 168 20 500 8 550 14,520
CXV-192 3,980 243 15 65,450 3 10,060 6,420 15,130 168 20 500 8 550 14,570
CXV-184 3,814 233 10 55,850 3 10,670 7,030 15,830 201 24 500 8 550 15,270
CXV-206 4,270 261 20 70,200 3 10,770 7,130 15,930 201 24 500 8 550 15,370
Notes:
1. Model number denotes nominal ammonia capacity in evaporator tons 4. For R-22 and R-134a, the coil connection quantity will double (except
at a 96.3ºF condensing temperature, a 20ºF suction temperature, and a for the CXV-64 thru -153).
78ºF wet-bulb temperature. 5. The R-22 operating charge is 1.93 times the ammonia charge; R-134a
2. R-22 tons are at a 105ºF condensing temperature, a 40ºF suction is 1.98 times.
temperature, and a 78ºF wet-bulb temperature. 6. Inlet and outlet connections are beveled for welding.
3. Operating weight is for the unit with the water level in the cold water 7. Standard make-up, drain and overflow connections are MPT.
basin at the overflow.

J33

Refrigeration
REFRIG IN MODELS MODELS
REFRIG OUT 196–305 310–481
ACCESS DOOR
BOTH ENDS H
1" MAKE UP 1" MAKE UP

A
3" OVERFLOW
2" DRAIN
1'–8-1/4" 12'–1-1/4" 2'–0-3/8" 18'–1-1/4"
11'–10"
END ELEVATION SIDE ELEVATION SIDE ELEVATION

Ammonia Internal
Nom. Base Heat Fan Airflow Pump Operating Coil Spray Drain Volume Approx.
Box Model Rejection R-22 Motor Rate Motor Heaviest Charge Volume Flowrate Size Required Oper. Wt.
Size Number1 (MBH) Tons2 (HP) (CFM) (HP) Ship. Section Oper.3 (lbs)5 (ft3) (GPM) (in) (gal) (lbs) A H
CXV-196 4,062 248 10 68,160 5 10,740 6,580 17,480 164 20 715 10 600 16,920 8’-8 3/4” 15’-10 3/4”
CXV-210 4,353 266 15 77,900 5 10,790 6,630 17,530 164 20 715 10 600 16,970 8’-8 3/4” 15’-10 3/4”
CXV-220 4,560 278 20 85,650 5 10,840 6,680 17,580 164 20 715 10 600 17,020 8’-8 3/4” 15’-10 3/4”
CXV-235 4,871 297 10 67,200 5 11,780 7,620 18,670 217 26 715 10 600 18,110 8’-8 3/4” 15’-10 3/4”
12’ x 12’
CXV-253 5,244 320 15 76,800 5 11,830 7,670 18,720 217 26 715 10 600 18,160 8’-8 3/4” 15’-10 3/4”
CXV-264 5,472 334 10 64,930 5 12,830 8,670 19,870 270 32 715 10 600 19,310 8’-8 3/4” 15’-10 3/4”
CXV-283 5,866 358 15 74,200 5 12,880 8,720 19,920 270 32 715 10 600 19,360 8’-8 3/4” 15’-10 3/4”
CXV-290 6,011 367 15 72,700 5 13,920 9,760 21,110 321 38 715 10 600 20,550 8’-8 3/4” 15’-10 3/4”
CXV-305 6,322 386 20 79,950 5 13,970 9,810 21,160 321 38 715 10 600 20,600 8’-8 3/4” 15’-10 3/4”
CXV-310 6,425 392 15/7.5 117,900 7.5 15,320 9,500 25,500 243 29 900 10 750 24,940 9’-2 1/4” 16’-4 1/4”
CXV-324 6,716 410 10/5 129,650 7.5 15,410 9,590 25,590 243 29 900 10 750 25,030 9’-2 1/4” 16’-4 1/4”
CXV-337 6,985 427 25/15 139,550 7.5 15,510 9,690 25,690 243 29 900 10 750 25,130 9’-2 1/4” 16’-4 1/4”
CXV-349 7,234 442 10/5 101,760 7.5 16,810 10,990 27,210 321 39 900 10 750 26,650 9’-2 1/4” 16’-4 1/4”
CXV-373 7,731 472 15/7.5 116,300 7.5 16,890 11,070 27,290 321 39 900 10 750 26,730 9’-2 1/4” 16’-4 1/4”
12’ x 18’
CXV-388 8,042 491 10/5 98,310 7.5 18,400 12,580 29,030 401 48 900 10 750 28,470 9’-2 1/4” 16’-4 1/4”
CXV-398 8,249 504 10/5 96,290 7.5 19,990 14,170 30,830 475 57 900 10 750 30,270 9’-2 1/4” 16’-4 1/4”
CXV-416 8,622 527 15/7.5 112,350 7.5 18,480 12,660 29,110 401 48 900 10 750 28,550 9’-2 1/4” 16’-4 1/4”
CXV-427 8,850 541 15/7.5 110,050 7.5 20,070 14,250 30,910 475 57 900 10 750 30,350 9’-2 1/4” 16’-4 1/4”
CXV-449 9,306 568 20/10 121,050 7.5 20,150 14,330 30,990 475 57 900 10 750 30,430 9’-2 1/4” 16’-4 1/4”
CXV-466 9,659 590 25/15 130,300 7.5 20,260 14,440 31,100 475 57 900 10 750 30,540 9’-2 1/4” 16’-4 1/4”
CXV-481 9,970 609 30/15 138,350 7.5 20,280 14,460 31,120 475 57 900 10 750 30,560 9’-2 1/4” 16’-4 1/4”
Notes:
1. Model number denotes nominal ammonia capacity in evaporator tons at 4. For R-22 and R-134a, the coil connection quantity will double (except
a 96.3ºF condensing temperature, a 20ºF suction temperature, for the CXV-64 thru -153).
and a 78ºF wet-bulb temperature. 5. The R-22 operating charge is 1.93 times the ammonia charge; R-134a
2. R-22 tons are at a 105ºF condensing temperature, a 40ºF suction is 1.98 times.

J34

REFRIG IN MODELS MODELS
REFRIG OUT 420–610 620–962
ACCESS DOOR
BOTH ENDS
H
A
3" OVERFLOW
1" MAKE UP 1" MAKE UP 1" MAKE UP
2" DRAIN
2-1/2" 2-1/2"
11'–10"
24’-5"
36'–5"
END ELEVATION 1'–8-1/4" SIDE ELEVATION 1'–8-1/4" 2'–0-3/8" 2'–0-3/8"

SIDE ELEVATION
* Models CXV-420 to CXV-610 are four fan units, as shown. Models CXV-620 to CXV-962 are six fan units.

Ammonia Internal
Nom. Base Heat Airflow Pump Operating Coil Spray Drain Volume Approx.
Box Model Rejection R-22 Fan Motor Rate Motor Heaviest Charge Volume Flowrate Size Required Oper.
Size Number1 (MBH) Tons2 (HP) (CFM) (HP) Ship. Section3 Oper. (lbs)5 3
(ft ) (GPM) (in) (gal) Wt.(lbs) L H P
CXV-420 8,705 532 (2) 15 155,800 (2) 5 21,580 6,630 35,060 328 39 1,430 (2) 10” 1,200 33,940 24’-5” 15’-10 3/4” 1’-8 1/4”
CXV-470 9,742 595 (2) 10 134,400 (2) 5 23,560 7,620 37,340 434 51 1,430 (2) 10” 1,200 36,220 24’-5” 15’-10 3/4” 1’-8 1/4”
CXV-506 10,488 641 (2) 15 153,600 (2) 5 23,660 7,670 37,440 434 51 1,430 (2) 10” 1,200 36,320 24’-5” 15’-10 3/4” 1’-8 1/4”
12’ x 24’
CXV-528 10,944 668 (2) 10 129,860 (2) 5 25,660 8,670 39,740 540 64 1,430 (2) 10” 1,200 38,620 24’-5” 15’-10 3/4” 1’-8 1/4”
CXV-566 11,731 716 (2) 15 148,400 (2) 5 25,760 8,720 39,840 540 64 1,430 (2) 10” 1,200 38,720 24’-5” 15’-10 3/4” 1’-8 1/4”
CXV-580 12,022 734 (2) 15 145,400 (2) 5 27,840 9,760 42,220 642 76 1,430 (2) 10” 1,200 41,100 24’-5” 15’-10 3/4” 1’-8 1/4”
CXV-610 12,643 772 (2) 20 159,900 (2) 5 27,940 9,810 42,320 642 76 1,430 (2) 10” 1,200 41,200 24’-5” 15’-10 3/4” 1’-8 1/4”
CXV-620 12,851 785 (2)15/(2)7.5 235,800 (2) 7.5 30,640 9,500 51,000 486 58 1,800 (2) 10” 1,500 49,880 36’-5” 16’-4 1/4” 2’-0 3/8”
CXV-648 13,431 820 (2)20/(2)10 259,300 (2) 7.5 30,820 9,590 51,180 486 58 1,800 (2) 10” 1,500 50,060 36’-5” 16’-4 1/4” 2’-0 3/8”
CXV-674 13,970 853 (2)25/(2)15 279,100 (2) 7.5 31,020 9,690 51,380 486 58 1,800 (2) 10” 1,500 50,260 36’-5” 16’-4 1/4” 2’-0 3/8”
CXV-698 14,467 884 (2)10/(2)5 203,520 (2) 7.5 33,600 11,000 54,400 642 77 1,800 (2) 10” 1,500 53,280 36’-5” 16’-4 1/4” 2’-0 3/8”
CXV-746 15,462 944 (2)15/(2)7.5 232,600 (2) 7.5 33,780 11,070 54,580 642 77 1,800 (2) 10” 1,500 53,460 36’-5” 16’-4 1/4” 2’-0 3/8”
12’ x 36’
CXV-776 16,084 982 (2)10/(2)5 196,620 (2) 7.5 36,780 12,590 58,040 802 96 1,800 (2) 10” 1,500 56,920 36’-5” 16’-4 1/4” 2’-0 3/8”
CXV-796 16,499 1,008 (2)10/(2)5 192,580 (2) 7.5 39,980 14,180 61,660 950 115 1,800 (2) 10” 1,500 60,540 36’-5” 16’-4 1/4” 2’-0 3/8”
CXV-832 17,245 1,053 (2)15/(2)7.5 224,700 (2) 7.5 36,960 12,660 58,220 802 96 1,800 (2) 10” 1,500 57,100 36’-5” 16’-4 1/4” 2’-0 3/8”
CXV-854 17,701 1,081 (2)15/(2)7.5 220,100 (2) 7.5 40,140 14,250 61,820 950 115 1,800 (2) 10” 1,500 60,700 36’-5” 16’-4 1/4” 2’-0 3/8”
CXV-898 18,613 1,137 (2)20/(2)10 242,100 (2) 7.5 40,300 14,330 61,980 950 115 1,800 (2) 10” 1,500 60,860 36’-5” 16’-4 1/4” 2’-0 3/8”
CXV-932 19,318 1,180 (2)25/(2)15 260,600 (2) 7.5 40,520 14,440 62,200 950 115 1,800 (2) 10” 1,500 61,080 36’-5” 16’-4 1/4” 2’-0 3/8”
CXV-962 19,939 1,218 (2)30/(2)15 276,700 (2) 7.5 40,560 14,460 62,240 950 115 1,800 (2) 10” 1,500 61,120 36’-5” 16’-4 1/4” 2’-0 3/8”
Notes:
1. Model number denotes nominal ammonia capacity in evaporator tons at 4. For R-22 and R-134a, the coil connection quantity will double (except
a 96.3ºF condensing temperature, a 20ºF suction temperature, for the CXV-64 thru -153).
and a 78ºF wet-bulb temperature. 5. The R-22 operating charge is 1.93 times the ammonia charge; R-134a is
2. R-22 tons are at a 105ºF condensing temperature, a 40ºF suction 1.98 times.

J35
Models CXV-N465 to N687

Refrigeration
REFRIG IN MODELS
N465–N687
REFRIG OUT
16'–4-1/4"
ACCESS DOOR
BOTH ENDS
9'–2-1/4"
3" OVERFLOW
1" MAKE UP
2" DRAIN
11'–10" 1'–8-1/4" 23'–6" 1'–8-1/4"
END ELEVATION SIDE ELEVATION
Designed to minimize refrigerant piping, these models have coil connections on just one end.

Ammonia Internal
Nom. Base Heat Fan Airflow Pump Operating Coil Spray Drain Volume Approx.
Box Model Rejection R-22 Motor Rate Motor Heaviest Charge Volume Flowrate Size Required Oper.
Size Number1 (MBH) Tons2 (HP) (CFM) (HP) Ship. Section Oper.3 (lbs)5 (ft3) (GPM) (in) (gal) Wt.(lbs)
CXV-N465 9,638 589 (2) 15 174,270 (2) 5 20,890 12,750 34,400 323 39 1,430 12” 1,140 33,280
CXV-N491 10,177 622 (2) 10 149,230 (2) 5 22,780 14,640 36,590 427 51 1,430 12” 1,140 35,470
CXV-N530 10,985 671 (2) 15 170,810 (2) 5 22,920 14,780 36,730 427 51 1,430 12” 1,140 35,610
CXV-N559 11,586 708 (2) 20 188,430 (2) 5 22,960 14,820 36,770 427 51 1,430 12” 1,140 35,650
12’ x 24’
CXV-N574 11,897 727 (2) 15 169,210 (2) 5 25,000 16,860 39,110 532 63 1,430 12” 1,140 37,990
CXV-N605 12,540 766 (2) 20 186,220 (2) 5 25,040 16,900 39,150 532 63 1,430 12” 1,140 38,030
CXV-N636 13,182 805 (2) 20 183,020 (2) 5 27,120 18,980 41,510 631 76 1,430 12” 1,140 40,390
CXV-N664 13,763 841 (2) 25 197,790 (2) 5 27,220 19,080 41,610 631 76 1,430 12” 1,140 40,490
CXV-N687 14,239 870 (2) 30 210,170 (2) 5 27,500 19,360 41,890 631 76 1,430 12” 1,140 40,770
Notes:
1. Model number denotes nominal ammonia capacity in evaporator tons 5. The R-22 operating charge is 1.93 times the ammonia charge; R-134a
at a 96.3ºF condensing temperature, a 20ºF suction temperature, is 1.98 times.
and a 78ºF wet-bulb temperature. 6. Inlet and outlet connections are beveled for welding.
2. R-22 tons are at a 105ºF condensing temperature, a 40ºF suction 7. Standard make-up, drain and overflow connections are MPT.
temperature, and a 78ºF wet-bulb temperature. 8. The vertical liquid leg height for models CXV-N465 thru CXV-N687
3. Operating weight is for the unit with the water level in the cold water should be at least 12 feet for multiple condenser installations on
basin at the overflow. ammonia applications. Minimum liquid leg height is subject to overall
4. For R-22 and R-134a, the coil connection quantity will double system piping requirements.
(except for the CXV-64 thru -153).

J36
Models CXV-T645 to T188

REFRIG. IN REFRIG. IN CXV– CXV–

T1290 to T1888
T645 to T944
REFRIG. OUT REFRIG. OUT
H
ACCESS DOORS
10'-4 3/4"
BOTH ENDS
2-1/2"
SPRAY PUMPS
L L
W
END ELEVATION SIDE ELEVATION SIDE ELEVATION

Base Ammonia Internal
Nom. Heat Fan Airflow Pump Operating Coil Spray Drain Volume Approx.
Box Model Rejection R-22 Motor Rate Motor Heaviest Charge Volume Flowrate Size Required Oper. Wt.
Size Number1 (MBH) Tons2 (HP) (CFM) (HP) Ship. Section Oper.3 (lbs)5 (ft3) (GPM) (in) (gal) (lbs) “W” “L” “H”
CXV-T645 13,369 816 30 177,100 (2) 7.5 27,710 8,050 42,640 656 76 1,720 12” 1,625 41,240 24’-1/2” 11’-11” 18’-7 7/8”
CXV-T686 14,219 868 40 195,420 (2) 7.5 27,850 8,050 42,780 656 76 1,720 12” 1,625 41,380 24’-1/2” 11’-11” 18’-7 7/8”
12’ x 24’
CXV-T717 14,861 908 50 210,980 (2) 7.5 27,910 8,050 42,840 656 76 1,720 12” 1,625 41,440 24’-1/2” 11’-11” 18’-7 7/8”
CXV-T729 15,110 923 40 193,150 (2) 7.5 30,610 9,430 45,810 780 91 1,720 12” 1,625 44,410 24’-1/2” 11’-11” 18’-7 7/8”
CXV-T763 15,815 966 50 208,490 (2) 7.5 30,670 9,430 45,870 780 91 1,720 12” 1,625 44,470 24’-1/2” 11’-11” 18’-7 7/8”
CXV-T792 16,416 1,003 60 221,910 (2) 7.5 30,830 9,430 46,030 780 91 1,720 12” 1,625 44,630 24’-1/2” 11’-11” 18’-7 7/8”
CXV-T791 16,395 1,001 40 225,480 (2) 7.5 31,770 9,390 50,070 753 89 1,720 12” 2,000 48,670 26’-3 1/2” 13’-11 1/8” 18’-9 7/8”
CXV-T827 17,141 1,047 50 245,080 (2) 7.5 31,830 9,390 50,130 753 89 1,720 12” 2,000 48,730 26’-3 1/2” 13’-11 1/8” 18’-9 7/8”
14’ x 26’
CXV-T857 17,763 1,085 60 260,910 (2) 7.5 31,990 9,390 50,290 753 89 1,720 12” 2,000 48,890 26’-3 1/2” 13’-11 1/8” 19’-3 7/8”
CXV-T876 18,157 1,109 50 240,050 (2) 7.5 35,110 11,030 53,740 903 107 1,720 12” 2,000 52,340 26’-3 1/2” 13’-11 1/8” 18’-9 7/8”
CXV-T906 18,779 1,147 60 255,630 (2) 7.5 35,270 11,030 53,900 903 107 1,720 12” 2,000 52,500 26’-3 1/2” 13’-11 1/8” 19’-3 7/8”
CXV-T944 19,566 1,195 75 278,020 (2) 7.5 35,320 11,030 53,950 903 107 1,720 12” 2,000 52,550 26’-3 1/2” 13’-11 1/8” 19’-3 7/8”
CXV-T1290 26,738 1,633 (2) 30 354,200 (4) 7.5 55,420 8,050 85,280 1,312 152 3,440 (2) 12” 3,250 82,480 24’-1/2” 24’-1/2” 18’-7 7/8”
CXV-T1372 28,437 1,737 (2) 40 390,840 (4) 7.5 55,700 8,050 85,560 1,312 152 3,440 (2) 12” 3,250 82,760 24’-1/2” 24’-1/2” 18’-7 7/8”
24’ x 24’
CXV-T1434 29,723 1,815 (2) 50 421,960 (4) 7.5 55,820 8,050 85,680 1,312 152 3,440 (2) 12” 3,250 82,880 24’-1/2” 24’-1/2” 18’-7 7/8”
CXV-T1458 30,220 1,846 (2) 40 386,300 (4) 7.5 61,220 9,430 91,620 1,560 182 3,440 (2) 12” 3,250 88,820 24’-1/2” 24’-1/2” 18’-7 7/8”
CXV-T1526 31,629 1,932 (2) 50 416,980 (4) 7.5 61,340 9,430 91,740 1,560 182 3,440 (2) 12” 3,250 88,940 24’-1/2” 24’-1/2” 18’-7 7/8”
CXV-T1584 32,832 2,005 (2) 60 443,820 (4) 7.5 61,660 9,430 92,060 1,560 182 3,440 (2) 12” 3,250 89,260 24’-1/2” 24’-1/2” 18’-7 7/8”
CXV-T1582 32,790 2,003 (2) 40 450,960 (4) 7.5 63,540 9,390 100,140 1,506 178 3,440 (2) 12” 4,000 97,340 26’-3 1/2” 28’-3/4” 18’-9 7/8”
CXV-T1654 34,282 2,094 (2) 50 490,160 (4) 7.5 63,660 9,390 100,260 1,506 178 3,440 (2) 12” 4,000 97,460 26’-3 1/2” 28’-3/4” 18’-9 7/8”
28’ x 26’
CXV-T1714 35,526 2,170 (2) 60 521,820 (4) 7.5 63,980 9,390 100,580 1,506 178 3,440 (2) 12” 4,000 97,780 26’-3 1/2” 28’-3/4” 19’-3 7/8”
CXV-T1752 36,314 2,218 (2) 50 480,100 (4) 7.5 70,220 11,030 107,480 1,806 214 3,440 (2) 12” 4,000 104,680 26’-3 1/2” 28’-3/4” 18’-9 7/8”
CXV-T1812 37,557 2,294 (2) 60 511,260 (4) 7.5 70,540 11,030 107,800 1,806 214 3,440 (2) 12” 4,000 105,000 26’-3 1/2” 28’-3/4” 19’-3 7/8”
CXV-T1888 39,133 2,390 (2) 75 556,040 (4) 7.5 70,640 11,030 107,900 1,806 214 3,440 (2) 12” 4,000 105,100 26’-3 1/2” 28’-3/4” 19’-3 7/8”
Notes:
1. Model number denotes nominal ammonia capacity in evaporator tons at 5. The R-22 operating charge is 1.93 times the ammonia charge; R-134a
a 96.3ºF condensing temperature, a 20ºF suction temperature, and a 78ºF is 1.98 times.
wet-bulb temperature. 6. Inlet and outlet connections are beveled for welding.
2. R-22 tons are at a 105ºF condensing temperature, a 40ºF suction 7. Standard make-up, drain and overflow connections are located on the
temperature, and a 78ºF wet-bulb temperature. bottom of the unit. Make-up connection is 1-1/2” MPT standpipe, drain
3. Operating weight is for the unit with the water level in the cold water is 2” FPT and overflow is 3” FPT.
basin at the overflow. 8. Models shipped with an optional gear drive or low sound fan may have
4. Coil connections also available on the end. For other refrigerants, contact heights up to 10.5” greater than shown.
your local BAC Representative for the coil connection quantity.

J37
VC2 Models
Refrigeration
R-717 Internal
Nom. Base Heat Pump Oper. Coil Drain Approx.
Box Model Rejection R-717 Heaviest Motor HP Motor Charge6 Volume Size Oper. Gal.
Size Number1 (MBH) Tons2 Ship. Section4 Oper.3 CFM (0” ESP) GPM HP (lbs.) (ft3) (in) Weight Req. F H
VC2-N138 2,029 98 7,130 4,920 8,920 25,900 5 220 1 1/2 170 18 6 7,610 270 33 1/4 131 1/8
4.5’ x 12’
VC2-N150 2,205 106 7,220 5,830 9,010 28,300 7 1/2 220 1 1/2 190 18 6 7,700 270 33 1/4 131 1/8
VC2-N170 2,499 121 8,120 5,930 9,930 28,000 7 1/2 220 1 1/2 210 23 6 86,250 270 42 1/2 140 3/8
VC2-N191 2,808 135 8,770 6,580 10,580 30,100 10 220 1 1/2 245 27 6 9,270 270 51 3/4 149 5/8
VC2-N206 3,028 146 9,960 6,580 14,950 39,650 10 305 2 230 25 6 12,690 430 33 1/4 143 1/8
6’ x 12’
VC2-N215 3,161 152 11,190 7,810 16,180 35,050 7 1/2 305 2 290 31 6 13,920 430 42 1/2 152 3/4
VC2-N235 3,455 167 11,210 7,810 16,200 38,750 10 305 2 290 31 6 13,940 430 42 1/2 152 3/4
VC2-N261 3,837 185 11,860 8,460 15,380 43,400 10 385 3 360 40 8 13,420 480 42 1/2 152 3/4
8’ x 12’
VC2-N301 4,425 213 13,310 9,860 16,970 48,550 15 385 3 430 47 8 15,010 480 51 3/4 162
VC2-N356 5,233 252 15,170 10,390 20,260 67,650 15 580 5 435 48 10 17,250 820 33 1/4 155 1/2
VC2-N396 5,821 281 17,350 12,570 22,650 65,700 15 580 5 540 59 10 19,640 820 42 1/2 164 3/4
8’ x 18’
VC2-N416 6,115 295 19,530 14,750 25,050 64,200 15 580 5 645 71 10 22,040 820 51 3/4 174
VC2-N446 6,556 316 19,540 14,750 25,060 70,650 20 580 5 645 71 10 22,050 820 51 3/4 174
Notes:
1. Model number denotes nominal tons using R-22 at a 105ºF 4. Unless otherwise noted, the coil section is the heaviest section.
condensing temperature, a 40ºF suction temperature, and a 78ºF 5. Standard refrigerant connection size is 4” BFW (inlet and outlet).
wet-bulb temperature. 6. Refrigerant charge listed is R-717 operating charge. To determine
2. R-717 tons are at a 96.3ºF condensing temperature, a 20ºF suction operating charge for R-22, multiply charge by 1.93. For R-134a,
temperature, and a 78ºF wet-bulb temperature. multiply by 1.98.
3. Operating weight shown is based on total unit weight, weight of
refrigerant operating charge, and cold water basin filled to the
overflow level.

J38
VC2 Models
-626 -957
Approx. Weights (lbs) R-717 Internal Remote Sump

Nom. Base Heat Motor Pump Oper. Coil Drain Approx.
Box Model Rejection R-717 Heaviest HP Motor Charge6 Volume Size Oper. Gal.
VC2-319 4,689 226 15,240 10,300 24,590 54,300 7.5 585 5 445 49 8 19,550 480 33 1/4 163 1/2
VC2-342 5,027 243 15,290 10,300 24,640 59,750 10 585 5 445 49 8 19,600 480 33 1/4 163 1/2
VC2-377 5,542 267 15,340 10,300 24,690 68,400 15 585 5 445 49 8 19,650 480 33 1/4 163 1/2
VC2-420 6,174 298 17,410 12,370 26,970 68,400 15 585 5 550 60 8 21,930 480 42 1/2 172 3/4
VC2-451 6,630 320 17,420 12,370 26,980 73,100 20 585 5 550 60 8 21,940 480 42 1/2 172 3/4
12’ x 12’
VC2-471 6,924 334 19,450 14,400 29,010 71,400 20 585 5 675 72 8 23,970 480 51 3/4 182
VC2-491 7,218 348 19,470 14,400 29,030 76,950 25 585 5 675 72 8 23,990 480 51 3/4 182
VC2-513 7,541 364 19,490 14,400 29,050 81,750 30 585 5 675 72 8 24,010 480 51 3/4 182
VC2-541 7,953 384 20,870 15,780 30,510 81,500 30 585 5 750 80 8 25,470 480 51 3/4 182
VC2-580 8,526 411 21,060 15,780 30,700 89,700 40 585 5 750 80 8 25,660 480 51 3/4 182
VC2-585 8,600 415 22,740 18,205 33,445 77,040 30 585 5 875 93 8 28,405 480 61 194 1/4
VC2-626 9,202 444 22,795 18,205 33,500 85,200 40 585 5 875 93 8 28,460 480 61 194 1/4
VC2-526 7,732 373 22,220 15,170 36,430 89,700 10 & 5 835 5 665 73 10 29,050 670 33 1/4 163 1/2
VC2-581 8,541 412 22,330 15,170 36,540 102,650 15 & 7.5 835 5 665 73 10 29,160 670 33 1/4 163 1/2
VC2-623 9,158 442 22,350 15,170 36,560 113,000 20 & 10 835 5 665 73 10 29,180 670 33 1/4 163 1/2
VC2-642 9,437 455 25,450 18,290 39,990 99,600 15 & 7.5 835 5 825 90 10 32,610 670 42 1/2 172 3/4
VC2-688 10,114 488 25,470 18,290 40,010 109,650 20 & 10 835 5 825 90 10 32,630 670 42 1/2 172 3/4
12’ x 18’
VC2-711 10,452 504 28,580 21,400 43,450 107,150 20 & 10 835 5 990 108 10 36,070 670 51 3/4 182
VC2-752 11,054 533 28,680 21,400 43,550 115,400 25 & 15 835 5 990 108 10 36,170 670 51 3/4 182
VC2-785 11,540 557 28,700 21,400 43,570 122,650 30 & 15 835 5 990 108 10 36,190 670 51 3/4 182
VC2-827 12,157 587 30,780 23,480 45,760 122,200 30 & 15 835 5 1,100 120 10 38,380 670 51 3/4 182
VC2-887 13,039 629 30,980 23,480 45,960 134,500 40 & 20 835 5 1,100 120 10 38,580 670 51 3/4 182
VC2-895 13,157 635 33,655 27,160 49,895 115,000 30 & 15 900 7.5 1,290 140 10 42,515 670 61 194 1/4
VC2-957 14,068 679 33,765 27,160 50,005 126,080 40 & 20 900 7.5 1,290 140 10 42,625 670 61 194 1/4
Notes:
condensing temperature, a 40ºF suction temperature, and a 78ºF 5. Standard refrigerant connection size is 4” BFW (inlet and outlet).
overflow level.

J39
7 3/4"
H
VC2 Models 3" OVERFLOW 2" MAKE-UP
9'-0"
ACCESS
2" DRAIN
11'-10"
Refrigeration
11'-8 3/4"
3'-0 1/4" 5'-8 1/4" 3'-0 1/4"
BFW REFRIG IN
VC2-N870
VC2-N1204
F
BFW REFRIG OUT

7 3/4"
H
3" OVERFLOW 2" MAKE-UP

9'-0"
ACCESS
M M
2" DRAIN
2'-3" 23'-8 1/2" 2'-0"
11'-10"

R-717 Internal
Nom. Base Heat Pump Oper. Coil Approx.
VC2-N870
Box Model Rejection R-717 Heaviest Motor HP Motor Charge6 Volume Drain Oper. Gal.
VC2-N1204 4
Size Number1 (MBH) Tons2 Ship. Section Oper.3 CFM (0” ESP) GPM HP (lbs.) (ft3) Size Weight Req. F H
VC2-N870 12,789 617 32,325 23,855 53,195 132,800 (2) 15 1,170 (2) 5 1,100 112 10 42,935 1,440 42 1/2 175 3/4
VC2-N932 13,700 661 32,415 23,855 53,285 146,200 (2) 20 1,170 (2) 5 1,100 112 10 43,025 1,440 42 1/2 175 3/4
12’ x 24’
VC2-N1000 14,700 709 32,725 23,855 53,595 163,100 (2) 25 1,170 (2) 5 1,350 112 10 43,335 1,440 42 1/2 175 3/4
VC2-N1071 15,744 760 38,595 27,795 58,445 163,500 (2) 30 1,170 (2) 5 1,350 136 10 48,185 1,440 51 3/4 185
VC2-N1124 16,523 797 39,610 30,510 61,480 160,230 (2) 30 1,170 (2) 5 1,510 150 10 51,700 1,440 51 3/4 185
VC2-N1204 17,699 854 39,740 30,510 61,610 176,340 (2) 40 1,170 (2) 5 1,510 150 10 52,080 1,440 51 3/4 185
M M
Notes:
condensing
2'-3" temperature, a 40ºF suction temperature,
23'-8 1/2" and a 78ºF 5. Standard
2'-0" refrigerant connection size is 4” BFW (inlet and outlet).
overflow level.

J40
VC2 Models
VC2-684
VC2-1252
11'-8 3/4"
3'-0 1/4" 5'-8 1/4" 3'-0 1/4"
BFW REFRIG IN
BFW REFRIG OUT M M

F
2'-3" 23'-8 1/2" 2'-0"

4 3/4"
H
VC2-1052
3" OVERFLOW 2" MAKE-UP
VC2-1914
9'-0"
ACCESS
2" DRAIN
11'-10"
35’ 9-1/4” 2’-0”

R-717 Internal
Nom. Base Heat Pump Oper. Coil Drain Approx.
Box Model Rejection R-717 Heaviest Motor HP Motor Charge6 Volume Size Oper. Gal.
VC2-684 10,055 485 30,570 10,300 49,580 119,500 (2) 10 1,170 (2) 5 890 98 10 39,320 1,440 33 1/4 163 1/2
VC2-754 11,084 535 30,670 10,300 49,680 136,800 (2) 15 1,170 (2) 5 890 98 10 39,420 1,440 33 1/4 163 1/2
VC2-840 12,348 596 34,810 12,370 54,240 132,800 (2) 15 1,170 (2) 5 1,100 121 10 43,980 1,440 42 1/2 172 3/4
VC2-902 13,259 640 34,830 12,370 54,260 146,200 (2) 20 1,170 (2) 5 1,100 121 10 44,000 1,440 42 1/2 172 3/4
VC2-942 13,847 668 38,900 14,400 58,020 142,800 (2) 20 1,170 (2) 5 1,350 144 10 47,760 1,440 51 3/4 182
12’ x 24’
VC2-982 14,435 696 38,940 14,400 58,060 153,900 (2) 25 1,170 (2) 5 1,350 144 10 47,780 1,440 51 3/4 182
VC2-1026 15,082 728 38,980 14,400 58,100 163,500 (2) 30 1,170 (2) 5 1,350 144 10 47,820 1,440 51 3/4 182
VC2-1082 15,905 767 41,740 15,780 61,020 160,230 (2) 30 1,170 (2) 5 1,510 160 10 50,740 1,440 51 3/4 182
VC2-1160 17,052 823 42,120 15,780 61,400 176,340 (2) 40 1,170 (2) 5 1,510 160 10 51,120 1,440 51 3/4 182
VC2-1170 17,199 830 45,905 15,780 67,645 154,080 (2) 30 1,170 (2) 5 1,715 186 10 57,385 1,440 61 194 1/4
VC2-1252 18,404 888 46,015 15,780 67,755 170,400 (2) 40 1,170 (2) 5 1,715 186 10 57,495 1,440 61 194 1/4
VC2-1052 15,464 746 44,420 15,170 73,170 179,400 (2) 10 & (2) 5 1,670 (2) 5 1,330 146 12 58,240 2,220 33 1/4 163 1/2
VC2-1162 17,081 824 44,640 15,170 73,390 205,300 (2) 15 & (2) 7 1/2 1,670 (2) 5 1,330 146 12 58,460 2,220 33 1/4 163 1/2
VC2-1246 18,316 884 44,680 15,170 73,430 226,000 (2) 20 & (2) 10 1,670 (2) 5 1,330 146 12 58,500 2,220 33 1/4 163 1/2
VC2-1284 18,875 911 50,880 18,290 80,290 199,200 (2) 15 & (2) 7 1/2 1,670 (2) 5 1,650 181 12 65,360 2,220 42 1/2 172 3/4
VC2-1376 20,227 976 50,920 18,290 80,330 219,300 (2) 20 & (2) 10 1,670 (2) 5 1,650 181 12 65,400 2,220 42 1/2 172 3/4
12’ x 36’
VC2-1422 20,903 1,009 57,140 21,400 87,210 214,300 (2) 20 & (2) 10 1,670 (2) 5 1,980 216 12 72,280 2,220 51 3/4 182
VC2-1504 22,109 1,067 57,340 21,400 87,410 230,800 (2) 25 & (2) 15 1,670 (2) 5 1,980 216 12 72,480 2,220 51 3/4 182
VC2-1570 23,079 1,113 57,380 21,400 87,450 245,300 (2) 30 & (2) 15 1,670 (2) 5 1,980 216 12 72,520 2,220 51 3/4 182
VC2-1654 24,314 1,173 61,540 23,480 91,840 240,400 (2) 30 & (2) 15 1,670 (2) 5 2,210 241 12 76,910 2,220 51 3/4 182
VC2-1774 26,078 1,258 61,940 23,480 92,240 264,600 (2) 40 & (2) 20 1,670 (2) 5 2,210 241 12 77,310 2,220 51 3/4 182
VC2-1790 26,313 1,269 67,000 27,160 99,790 230,000 (2) 30 & (2) 15 1,800 (2) 7.5 2,580 280 12 84,860 2,220 61 194 1/4
VC2-1914 28,136 1,357 67,220 27,160 100,010 252,160 (2) 40 & (2) 20 1,800 (2) 7.5 2,580 280 12 85,080 2,220 61 194 1/4
Notes:
1. Model number denotes nominal tons using R-22 at a 105ºF condensing 4. Unless otherwise noted, the coil section is the heaviest section.
temperature, a 40ºF suction temperature, and a 78ºF wet-bulb temperature. 5. Standard refrigerant connection size is 4” BFW (inlet and outlet).
2. R-717 tons are at a 96.3ºF condensing temperature, a 20ºF suction 6. Refrigerant charge listed is R-717 operating charge. To determine
temperature, and a 78ºF wet-bulb temperature. operating charge for R-22, multiply charge by 1.93. For R-134a,
3. Operating weight shown is based on total unit weight, weight of refrigerant multiply by 1.98.
operating charge, and cold water basin filled to the overflow level.

J41
VXMC Models
24'-0 1/2"
9'-10 7/8"
2'-7" 4'-8 7/8" 2'-7" 11'-11 3/4"
Refrigeration
BFW REFRIG IN
VXMC 300 VXMC 430 VXMC 600
VXMC 380 VXMC 620 VXMC 760
BFW REFRIG OUT
F
H
4 3/4"
MAKE-UP
8'-4"
ACCESS
M M M M M M
DRAIN OVERFLOW
9'-10 1/8" 2'-2" 11'-7 3/4" 2'-2" 17'-8 1/8" 2'-2" 23'-8 1/2" 1'-10" 2'-2"
36'-1 1/4"
18'-0 1/8"
VXMC 860
VXMC 1240
M M M M
1'-10" 2'-2" 35'-9 1/4" 1'-10"
ACCESS

Base R-717 Internal
Nom. Heat Pump Oper. Coil Drain Approx.
9'-7 7/8" 1 1/8"
Box Model Rejection R-717 Heaviest Motor HP Motor Charge Volume Size
6 Oper. Gal.
VXMC-300 4,410 213 14,420 9,760 18,950 59,800 10 490 5 380 40 8 15680 213 37 3/4 157 7/8
10’ x 12’
VXMC-340 4,998 241 16,280 11,580 20,900 55,400 10 490 5 460 50 8 17630 213 48 1/4 168 3/8
VXMC-380 5,586 270 18,180 13,400 22,870 59,400 15 490 5 550 59 8 19600 213 58 3/4 178 7/8
VXMC-430 6,321 305 20,370 14,750 27,120 80,700 5/7.5 740 5 560 60 10 22600 323 37 3/4 157 7/8
VXMC-460 6,762 326 22,920 15,010 27,360 87,700 5/10 740 5 590 60 10 22840 323 37 3/4 157 7/8
10’ x 18’
VXMC-510 7,497 362 23,080 17,430 29,960 87,200 5/10 740 5 700 75 10 25440 323 48 1/4 168 3/8
VXMC-560 8,232 397 23,360 17,710 30,220 95,700 7.5/15 740 5 750 75 10 25700 323 48 1/4 168 3/4
VXMC-585 8,600 415 25,980 20,230 32,970 93,600 7.5/15 740 5 830 89 10 28460 323 58 3/4 178 7/8
VXMC-620 9,114 440 26,280 20,530 33,250 100,500 10/20 740 5 860 89 10 28740 323 58 3/4 178 7/8
VXMC-600 8,820 426 28,840 9,760 37,900 119,600 (2) 10 980 (2) 5 760 80 10 31360 433 37 3/4 157 7/8
10’ x 24’
VXMC-680 9,996 482 32,560 11,580 41,800 110,800 (2) 10 980 (2) 5 920 99 10 35260 433 48 1/4 168 3/4
VXMC-760 11,172 539 36,360 13,400 45,740 118,800 (2) 15 980 (2) 5 1100 118 10 39200 433 58 3/4 178 7/8
VXMC-860 12,642 610 44,740 15,240* 54,240 161,400 (2)5/(2)7.5 1480 (2) 5 1120 120 12 45200 654 37 3/4 157 7/8
VXMC-920 13,524 652 45,840 15,820* 54,720 175,400 (2)5/(2)10 1480 (2) 5 1180 120 12 45680 654 37 3/4 157 7/8
10’ x 36’
VXMC-1020 14,994 723 46,160 17,430 59,920 174,400 (2)5/(2)10 1480 (2) 5 1400 149 12 50880 654 48 1/4 168 3/8
VXMC-1120 16,464 794 46,720 17,710 60,440 191,400 (2)7.5/(2)15 1480 (2) 5 1500 149 12 51400 654 48 1/4 168 3/8
VXMC-1170 17,199 830 51,960 20,230 65,940 187,200 (2)7.5/(2)15 1480 (2) 5 1660 178 12 56920 654 58 3/4 178 7/8
VXMC-1240 18,228 879 52,560 20,530 66,500 201,000 (2)10/(2)20 1480 (2) 5 1720 178 12 57480 654 58 3/4 178 7/8
Notes:
1. Model number denotes nominal tons using R-22 at a 105ºF condensing 4. Unless otherwise noted, the coil section is the heaviest section.
temperature, a 40ºF suction temperature, and a 78ºF wet-bulb temperature. 5. Standard refrigerant connection size is 4” BFW (inlet and outlet).
2. R-717 tons are at a 96.3ºF condensing temperature, a 20ºF suction 6. Refrigerant charge listed is R-717 operating charge.
temperature, and a 78ºF wet-bulb temperature. To determine operating charge for R-22, multiply charge
3. Operating weight shown is based on total unit weight, weight of refrigerant by 1.93. For R-134a, multiply by 1.98.
operating charge, and cold water basin filled to the overflow level.

J42
VC1 Models

Base R-717 Internal
Nom. Heat Motor Pump Oper. Coil Drain Approx.
Box Model Rejection R-717 Heaviest HP3 Motor Charge7 Volume Size Oper. Gal.
VC1-10 147 7 1,270 * 1,270 1,400 2,900 1/2 35 1/3 19 2 2 1/2 1,220 25 14 1/4 79 1/4
VC1-15 221 11 1,460 * 1,460 1,600 3,800 1 35 1/3 25 2.7 2 1/2 1,420 25 22 3/4 87 3/4
3’ x 3’
VC1-20 294 14 1,620 1,000 1,770 4,400 1 1/2 35 1/3 32 3.5 2 1/2 1,590 25 31 1/4 96 1/4
VC1-25 368 18 1,670 1,050 1,820 5,300 3 35 1/3 34 3.5 2 1/2 1,640 25 31 1/4 96 1/4
VC1-30 441 21 2,010 * 2,010 2,300 8,200 3 75 1/2 35 3.5 3 1,990 50 13 1/4 79 1/4
VC1-38 559 27 2,240 * 2,240 2,560 8,900 3 75 1/2 45 5.0 3 2,250 50 21 3/4 87 3/4
VC1-46 676 33 2,540 1,650 2,880 8,500 3 75 1/2 61 6.5 3 2,570 50 30 1/4 96 1/4
3’ x 6’
VC1-52 764 37 2,590 1,700 2,930 10,200 5 75 1/2 65 6.5 3 2,620 50 30 1/4 96 1/4
VC1-58 853 41 2,860 1,940 3,230 9,800 5 75 1/2 76 8.0 3 2,920 50 38 3/4 104 3/4
VC1-65 956 46 2,930 2,010 3,300 11,600 7 1/2 75 1/2 80 8.0 3 2,990 50 38 3/4 104 3/4
VC1-72 1,058 51 3,510 2,400 4,210 12,300 5 115 3/4 90 9.6 4 3,770 75 33 1/4 99 1/4
3’ x 9’
VC1-80 1,176 57 3,580 2,470 4,280 14,500 7 1/2 115 3/4 100 9.6 4 3,840 75 33 1/4 99 1/4
VC1-90 1,323 64 4,000 2,850 4,750 14,000 7 1/2 115 3/4 110 12 4 4,310 75 42 1/2 108 1/2
VC1-100 1,470 71 4,450 3,060 5,420 19,600 7 1/2 150 1 120 13 4 4,830 105 33 1/4 99 1/4
3’ x 12’
VC1-110 1,617 78 4,530 3,140 5,500 22,000 10 150 1 130 13 4 4,910 105 33 1/4 99 1/4
VC1-125 1,838 89 5,060 3,640 6,080 21,000 10 150 1 145 16 4 5,490 105 42 1/2 108 1/2
VC1-135 1,985 96 5,180 3,640 6,160 23,000 15 150 1 145 16 4 5,570 105 42 1/2 108 1/2
VC1-150 2,205 106 7,480 4,920 8,730 28,200 10 220 1 1/2 170 18 6 7,880 140 33 1/4 119 5/8
4.5’ x 12’
VC1-165 2,426 117 8,060 5,830 9,680 27,200 10 220 1 1/2 210 23 6 8,830 140 42 1/2 128 7/8
VC1-185 2,720 131 8,170 5,930 9,770 33,300 15 220 1 1/2 210 23 6 8,920 140 42 1/2 128 7/8
VC1-205 3,014 145 8,820 6,580 10,420 35,800 20 220 1 1/2 245 27 6 9,570 140 51 3/4 138 1/8
Notes: 4. Operating weight shown is based on total unit weight, weight of
1. Model number denotes nominal tons using R-22 at a 105ºF condensing refrigerant operating charge, and cold water basin filled to the
temperature, a 40ºF suction temperature, and a 78ºF wet-bulb overflow level.
temperature. 5. Unless otherwise noted, the coil section is the heaviest section.
2. R-717 tons are at a 96.3ºF condensing temperature, a 20ºF suction 6. Standard refrigerant connection sizes are 3” BFW inlet and outlet for
temperature, and a 78ºF wet-bulb temperature. VC1-10 through -25, and 4” BFW inlet and outlet for all other models.
3. Fan horsepower is at 0” external static pressure. 7. Refrigerant charge listed is R-717 operating charge. To determine
operating charge for R-22, multiply charge by 1.93. For R-134a,
multiply by 1.98.

J43
VC1 Models
Refrigeration
2

Base R-717 Internal
Heat Motor Pump Oper. Coil Drain Approx.
Nom. Model Rejection R-717 Heaviest HP3 Motor Charge7 Volume Size Oper. Gal.
3
Box Size Number1 (MBH) Tons2 Ship. Section5 Oper.4 CFM (0” ESP) GPM HP (lbs.) (ft ) (in) Weight Req. F H
VC1-N208 3,058 148 10,170 6,580 13,710 39,650 15 305 2 230 25 6 11,460 360 33 1/4 135 7/8
6’ x 12’
VC1-N230 3,381 163 11,410 8,220 15,000 38,550 15 305 2 245 31 6 12,750 360 42 1/2 145 1/8
VC1-N243 3,572 172 10,720 7,050 15,140 46,150 20 385 3 290 32 6 13,040 360 33 1/4 153 1/8
VC1-N257 3,778 182 10,770 7,050 15,190 49,700 25 385 3 290 32 6 13,090 360 33 1/4 153 1/8
8’ x 12’
VC1-N275 4,043 195 12,130 8,460 16,700 44,800 20 385 3 360 40 6 14,600 360 42 1/2 162 3/8
VC1-N301 4,425 213 13,580 9,860 18,210 47,150 25 385 3 430 47 6 16,110 360 51 3/4 171 5/8
VC1-N315 4,631 223 13,600 9,860 18,230 50,100 30 385 3 430 47 6 16,130 360 51 3/4 171 5/8
VC1-N338 4,969 240 15,630 10,390 22,360 60,450 20 580 5 435 48 8 19,110 520 33 1/4 153 1/8
VC1-N357 5,248 253 15,680 10,390 22,410 65,100 25 580 5 435 48 8 19,160 520 33 1/4 153 1/8
8’ x 18’
VC1-N373 5,483 265 15,700 10,390 22,430 69,200 30 580 5 435 48 8 19,180 520 33 1/4 153 1/8
VC1-N417 6,130 296 17,880 12,570 24,820 67,200 30 580 5 540 59 8 21,570 520 42 1/2 162 3/8
VC1-N470 6,909 333 20,250 14,750 27,410 72,250 40 580 5 645 71 8 24,160 520 51 3/4 171 5/8

temperature, a 40ºF suction temperature, and a 78ºF wet-bulb temperature. overflow level.
2. R-717 tons are at a 96.3ºF condensing temperature, a 20ºF suction 5. Unless otherwise noted, the coil section is the heaviest section.
temperature, and a 78ºF wet-bulb temperature. 6. Standard refrigerant connection size is 4” BFW (inlet and outlet).
multiply by 1.98.

J44
VC1 Models

Base R-717 Internal
VC1-386 5,674 274 15,810 10,300 23,860 74,250 30 585 5 445 49 8 19,350 600 33 1/4 155 1/2
VC1-436 6,409 309 17,880 12,370 26,140 72,050 30 585 5 550 60 8 21,630 600 42 1/2 164 3/4
12’ x 12’
VC1-467 6,865 331 18,070 12,370 26,330 79,300 40 585 5 550 60 8 21,820 600 42 1/2 164 3/4
VC1-454 6,674 322 19,950 14,440 28,430 70,400 30 585 5 655 72 8 23,920 600 51 3/4 174
VC1-487 7,159 345 20,140 14,440 28,620 77,500 40 585 5 655 72 8 24,110 600 51 3/4 174
VC1-516 7,585 366 20,180 14,440 28,660 83,450 50 585 5 655 72 8 24,150 600 51 3/4 174
VC1-540 7,938 383 22,850 15,170 35,090 97,250 (2) 15 835 5 665 72 10 28,530 710 33 1/4 155 1/2
VC1-579 8,511 411 22,870 15,170 35,110 107,050 (2) 20 835 5 665 72 10 28,550 710 33 1/4 155 1/2
VC1-612 8,996 434 22,970 15,170 35,210 115,300 (2) 25 835 5 665 72 10 28,650 710 33 1/4 155 1/2
12’ x 18’
VC1-646 9,496 458 25,990 18,290 38,560 103,900 (2) 20 835 5 825 90 10 32,000 710 42 1/2 164 3/4
VC1-683 10,040 484 26,090 18,290 38,660 111,950 (2) 25 835 5 825 90 10 32,100 710 42 1/2 164 3/4
VC1-715 10,511 507 26,130 18,290 38,700 118,950 (2) 30 835 5 825 90 10 32,140 710 42 1/2 164 3/4
VC1-748 10,996 530 29,240 21,400 42,140 116,200 (2) 30 835 5 990 108 10 35,580 710 51 3/4 174
VC1-804 11,819 570 29,620 21,400 42,520 127,900 (2) 40 835 5 990 108 10 35,960 710 51 3/4 174
VC1-772 11,348 548 31,560 * 10,960 47,930 148,500 (2) 30 1,170 (2) 5 890 98 10 39760 1360 33 1/4 155 1/2
VC1-872 12,818 618 35,700 12,370 52,490 144,100 (2) 30 1,170 (2) 5 1,100 121 10 44,320 1,360 42 1/2 164 3/4
12’ x 24’
VC1-934 13,730 662 36,080 12,370 52,870 158,600 (2) 40 1,170 (2) 5 1,100 121 10 44,700 1,360 42 1/2 164 3/4
VC1-908 13,348 644 39,840 14,440 57,070 140,800 (2) 30 1,170 (2) 5 1,310 144 10 48,900 1,360 51 3/4 174
VC1-974 14,318 691 40,220 14,440 57,450 155,000 (2) 40 1,170 (2) 5 1,310 144 10 49,280 1,360 51 3/4 174
VC1-1032 15,170 732 40,300 14,440 57,530 166,900 (2) 50 1,170 (2) 5 1,310 144 10 49,360 1,360 51 3/4 174
VC1-1158 17,023 821 45,710 * 15,340 70,450 214,100 (4) 20 1,670 (2) 5 1,330 146 12 57,180 2,090 33 1/4 155 1/2
VC1-1224 17,993 868 45,910 * 15,540 70,650 230,600 (4) 25 1,670 (2) 5 1,330 146 12 57,380 2,090 33 1/4 155 1/2
12’ x 36’
VC1-1366 20,080 969 52,120 18,290 77,520 223,900 (4) 25 1,670 (2) 5 1,650 181 12 64,250 2,090 42 1/2 164 3/4
VC1-1430 21,021 1014 52,200 18,290 77,600 237,900 (4) 30 1,670 (2) 5 1,650 181 12 64,330 2,090 42 1/2 164 3/4
VC1-1496 21,991 1061 58,420 21,400 84,480 232,400 (4) 30 1,670 (2) 5 1,980 216 12 71,210 2,090 51 3/4 174
VC1-1608 23,638 1140 59,180 21,400 85,240 255,800 (4) 40 1,670 (2) 5 1,980 216 12 71,970 2,090 51 3/4 174
* Basin section is heaviest section.
temperature, a 40ºF suction temperature, and a 78ºF wet-bulb overflow level.
temperature. 5. Unless otherwise noted, the coil section is the heaviest section.
2. R-717 tons are at a 96.3ºF condensing temperature, a 20ºF suction 6. Standard refrigerant connection size is 4” BFW (inlet and outlet).
temperature, and a 78ºF wet-bulb temperature. 7. Refrigerant charge listed is R-717 operating charge. To determine
3. Fan horsepower is at 0” external static pressure. operating charge for R-22, multiply charge by 1.93. For R-134a,
multiply by 1.98.

J45
VC1 Models
Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions. Designed to minimize ocean
This handbook includes data current at the time of publication, which freight costs, VC1-C models fit in
should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. Up-to-date engineering standard dry van containers.
data, free product selection software and more can be found at www.
BaltimoreAircoil.com.
Refrigeration
2 Side Drain

Base R-717 Internal
VC1-C216 3,175 153 10,270 6,680 14,880 40,060 15 385 3 265 29 6 12,780 360 33 1/4 142 1/4
VC1-C231 3,396 164 10,280 6,680 14,890 44,090 20 385 3 265 29 6 12,790 360 33 1/4 142 1/4
VC1-C242 3,557 172 11,560 7,970 16,300 38,870 15 385 3 330 36 6 14,200 360 42 1/2 151 1/2
7.4’ x 12’
VC1-C260 3,822 184 11,570 7,970 16,310 42,790 20 385 3 330 36 6 14,210 360 42 1/2 151 1/2
VC1-C274 4,028 194 11,620 7,970 16,360 46,090 25 385 3 330 36 6 14,260 360 42 1/2 151 1/2
VC1-C286 4,204 203 11,640 7,970 16,380 48,980 30 385 3 330 36 6 14,280 360 42 1/2 151 1/2
VC1-C299 4,395 212 12,920 9,250 17,720 47,830 30 385 3 390 43 6 15,620 360 51 3/4 160 3/4
VC1-C320 4,704 227 13,110 9,250 17,910 52,650 40 385 3 390 43 6 15,710 360 51 3/4 160 3/4
VC1-C339 4,983 241 15,050 9,830 22,040 62,180 25 580 5 395 43 8 18,790 520 33 1/4 142 1/4
VC1-C354 5,204 251 15,070 9,830 22,060 66,080 30 580 5 395 43 8 18,810 520 33 1/4 142 1/4
VC1-C380 5,586 269 15,260 9,830 22,250 72,730 40 580 5 395 43 8 19,000 520 33 1/4 142 1/4
7.4’ x 18’
VC1-C396 5,821 281 17,050 11,810 24,240 64,180 30 580 5 490 54 8 20,990 520 42 1/2 151 1/2
VC1-C424 6,233 301 17,240 11,810 24,430 70,640 40 580 5 490 54 8 21,180 520 42 1/2 151 1/2
VC1-C445 6,542 316 19,240 13,810 26,630 69,020 40 580 5 590 64 8 23,380 520 51 3/4 160 3/4
VC1-C469 6,894 333 19,280 13,810 26,670 74,340 50 580 5 590 64 8 23,420 520 51 3/4 160 3/4
Notes:
1. Model number denotes nominal tons using R-22 at a 105ºF condensing 4. Operating weight shown is based on total unit weight, weight of
temperature, a 40ºF suction temperature, and a 78ºF refrigerant operating charge, and cold water basin filled to the
wet-bulb temperature. overflow level.
2. R-717 tons are at a 96.3ºF condensing temperature, a 20ºF suction 5. Unless otherwise noted, the coil section is the heaviest section.
temperature, and a 78ºF wet-bulb temperature. 6. Standard refrigerant connection size is 4” BFW (inlet and outlet).
multiply by 1.98.

J46
VCL Models
4‘-1 1/4”
*2’-5 5/16” ON VCL-016-035
2’-5 3/16” ON ALL OTHER MODELS
Approx. Wt. Remote Sump

R-717 Internal
Nom. Base Heat Motor Pump Oper. Coil Drain Approx.
Box Model Rejection R-717 Ship. Oper.4 HP3 Motor Charge7 Volume Size Oper. Gal.
Size Number1 (MBH) Tons2 (lbs) (lbs) CFM (0” ESP) GPM HP (lbs.) (ft3) (in) Weight Req. F H
VCL-016 235 11 1,660 2,210 7,040 1 45 1/3 23 2.5 3 1,860 40 14 1/4 62 1/4
VCL-019 279 13 1,690 2,240 8,310 2 45 1/3 23 2.5 3 1,890 40 14 1/4 65
4’ x 3’
VCL-024 353 17 1,900 2,470 8,010 2 45 1/3 34 3.3 3 2,120 40 22 3/4 75 3/4
VCL-029 426 21 2,120 2,700 7,660 2 45 1/3 44 4.3 3 2,350 40 31 1/4 82
VCL-035 515 25 2,360 2,960 8,140 3 45 1/3 52 5.2 3 2,610 40 39 3/4 90 1/2
VCL-038 559 27 2,400 3,530 12,800 3 94 1/2 44 4.4 4 2,980 95 13 1/4 62 1/4
VCL-044 647 31 2,760 3,940 12,620 2 94 1/2 62 6.3 4 3,390 95 21 3/4 73
VCL-048 706 34 2,790 3,970 14,250 3 94 1/2 62 6.3 4 3,420 95 42 1/2 73
4’ x 6’
VCL-054 794 38 2,810 3,990 16,150 5 94 1/2 62 6.3 4 3,440 95 21 3/4 75 3/4
VCL-058 853 41 3,180 4,370 13,570 3 94 1/2 83 8.2 4 3,820 95 30 1/4 79 1/4
VCL-065 956 46 3,200 4,390 15,600 5 94 1/2 83 8.2 4 3,840 95 30 1/4 79 1/4
VCL-073 1,073 52 3,610 4,820 15,150 5 94 1/2 101 10 4 4,270 95 38 3/4 87 3/4
VCL-079 1,161 56 3,680 4,890 16,690 7 1/2 94 1/2 101 10 4 4,340 95 38 3/4 90 1/2
VCL-087 1,279 62 4,380 6,130 19,280 5 142 1 122 12 4 5,840 200 33 1/4 82 1/4
VCL-096 1,411 68 4,410 6,160 21,570 7 1/2 142 1 122 12 4 5,870 200 33 1/4 82 1/4
4’ x 9’
VCL-102 1,499 72 4,440 6,190 23,730 10 142 1 122 12 4 5,900 200 33 1/4 82 1/4
VCL-108 1,588 77 4,990 6,770 21,200 7 1/2 142 1 159 15 4 6,480 200 42 1/2 92 9/16
VCL-115 1,691 82 5,020 6,800 22,970 10 142 1 159 15 4 6,510 200 42 1/2 92 9/16
VCL-120 1,764 85 5,620 7,440 22,210 10 142 1 182 18 4 7,150 200 51 3/4 100 3/4
VCL-134 1,970 95 6,160 8,590 25,130 10 192 1 1/2 203 20 6 7,990 250 42 1/2 92 9/16
4’ x 12’
VCL-148 2,176 105 6,220 8,650 28,400 15 192 1 1/2 203 20 6 8,050 250 42 1/2 92 9/16
VCL-155 2,279 110 6,950 9,450 28,000 15 192 1 1/2 242 24 6 8,850 250 51 3/4 100 3/4
VCL-167 2,455 118 8,030 11,570 36,870 10 284 1 1/2 244 24 6 10,850 385 33 1/4 82 1/4
VCL-185 2,720 131 8,090 11,630 41,560 15 284 1 1/2 244 24 6 10,910 385 33 1/4 82 1/4
8’ x 9’
VCL-209 3,072 148 9,270 12,870 40,780 15 284 1 1/2 317 30 6 12,150 385 42 1/2 92 9/16
VCL-223 3,278 158 9,280 12,880 44,290 20 284 1 1/2 317 30 6 12,160 385 42 1/2 92 9/16
VCL-234 3,440 166 10,460 14,140 43,480 20 284 1 1/2 364 35 6 13,420 385 51 3/4 100 3/4
VCL-257 3,778 182 11,080 16,000 47,860 20 384 2 406 40 8 14,260 405 42 1/2 92 9/16
8’ x 12’
VCL-271 3,984 192 12,480 17,540 47,370 20 384 2 484 47 8 15,800 405 51 3/4 100 3/4
VCL-286 4,204 203 12,520 17,580 50,670 25 384 2 484 47 8 15,840 405 51 3/4 100 3/4
VCL-299 4,395 212 12,560 17,620 53,520 30 384 2 484 47 8 15,880 405 51 3/4 100 3/4

J47
Refrigeration
temperature, a 40ºF suction temperature, and a 78ºF overflow level.
wet-bulb temperature. 5. All models ship as a single piece.
2. R-717 tons are at a 96.3ºF condensing temperature, a 20ºF suction 6. Standard refrigerant connection size is 4” BFW (inlet and outlet).
temperature, and a 78ºF wet-bulb temperature. 7. Refrigerant charge listed is R-717 operating charge. To determine
3. Fan horsepower is at 0” external static pressure. operating charge for R-22, multiply charge by 1.93. For R-134a,
multiply by 1.98.

J48
Structural Support
CXV, CXV-T Models
The primary support arrangement for the CXV is two parallel I-beams continuously supporting the full length of
the unit. Alternates include a cantilevered plan, with a minimum “D” dimension indicated in the table below, or
transverse steel. The steel support serves to adequately support the unit and may also serve to raise the unit
above any solid foundation to assure access to the bottom of the basin.
Beam size should be calculated in accordance with accepted structural design practice. The maximum
permissible beam deflection and center line distances between bolt holes are tabulated below.
Model Number D Optional Minimum D Max. Deflection

CXV-64 to 95 8'-3" 6'-0" 3/16"
CXV-103 to 153 8'-3" 6'-0" 5/16"
CXV-160 to 192, 206 8'-3" 6'-0" 3/8"
CXV-196 to 305 11'-7 3/4" 9'-6" 3/8"
CXV-310 to 481 11'-7 3/4" 9'-6" 1/2"
AIR
CXV-N465 to N687 11'-7 3/4" 9'-6" 1/2" IN
CXV-420 to 610 11'-7 3/4" 9'-6" 3/8"

CXV-620 to 960 11'-7 3/4" 9'-6" 1/2"
* When the unit is supported with a cantilever plan, the side

opposite the air intake shall be cantilevered. D 1 1/8"
Model Number A Max Deflection

CXV-T645 to T792 23'-9 5/8" 1/2"
CXV-T791 to T944 26'-5/8" 1/2"
CXV-T1290 to T1584 23'-9 5/8" 1/2" AIR AIR
IN IN
1 7/16"
A/2
STEEL SUPPORT

J49
Structural Support
Series V Models
The recommended support arrangement for the Series V Evaporative Condenser consists of parallel I-beams
running the full length of the unit. Besides providing support, the steel also serves to raise the unit above any
solid foundation which might restrict air movement or prevent access to the unit. The steel support beam must
be located directly beneath the unit and extend the full length of the basin section. Support beams and anchor
Refrigeration
bolts are to be furnished and installed by others. Refer to the BAC unit certified print for bolt hole location.
NOTE: Models VC1-386 through VC1-1608 and Models VC2-342 through VC2-1914 (12’ wide units) can also
be supported with beams on nominal 10’ wide centers. In this case, the fan section will overhang the support
steel approximately two feet. Contact your local BAC Representative for exact dimensions.
Beam Size and Length
Beam size should be calculated in accordance with accepted Model Number D Max Deflection
structural practice. Use 65 percent of the operating weight as
VC2-N138 thru N191 4’ 9-1/2” 3/8”
a uniform load on each beam. The length of the beam must be
VC2-N206 thru N235 6’ 4-1/4” 3/8”
at least equal to the length of the basin. Refer to Engineering
Data on page J37 for basin dimensions. VC2-N261 thru N301 7’ 8” 3/8”
VC2-N356 thru N446 7’ 8” 1/2”
Maximum permissible beam deflection and center line VC2-319 thru 626 11’ 7-1/4” 3/8”
distances between bolt holes are tabulated in the table to the VC2-526 thru 957 11’ 7-1/4” 1/2”
right. VC2-N870 thru N1204 11’ 7-1/4” 1/2”
D VC2-684 thru 1252 11’ 7-1/4” 1/2”

VC2-1052 thru 1914 11’ 7-1/4” 1/2”
VXMC-300 thru 380 9’ 7-1/2” 3/8”
VXMC-430 thru 1240 9’ 7-1/2” 1/2”
VC1-10 thru 25 3’ 9-3/8” 3/32”
VC1-30 thru 65 3’ 9-3/8” 3/16”
Vibration Isolators VC1-72 thru 90 3’ 9-3/8” 5/16”

VC1-100 thru 135 3’ 9-3/8” 3/8”
If vibration isolators are used, a rail or channel must be VC1-150 thru 205 4’ 6-1/4” 3/8”
provided between the unit and the isolators to provide VC1-N208 thru N315 7’ 7-5/8” 3/8”
continuous support. Refer to vibration isolator drawings for VC1-N338 thru N470 7’ 7-5/8” 1/2”
the length of the rails and mounting hole locations, which may VC1-386 thru 516 11’ 7-1/4” 3/8”
differ from the length and the hole locations of the unit itself. VC1-540 thru 804 11’ 7-1/4” 1/2”
VC1-772 thru 1032 11’ 7-1/4” 1/2”
VC1-1158 thru 1608 11’ 7-1/4” 1/2”
VC1-C216 thru C320 7’ 1-5/8” 3/8”
VC1-C339 thru C469 7’ 1-5/8” 1/2”
VCL-016 thru 035 3’ 11” 1/4”
VCL-038 thru 079 3’ 11” 3/8”
VCL-087 thru 120 3’ 11” 1/2”
VCL-134 thru 155 3’ 11” 1/2”
VCL-167 thru 234 7’ 8-1/4” 1/2”
VCL-257 thru 299 7’ 8-1/4” 1/2”

J50
CXV, CXV-T Models
Part 1: General
A. General: Furnish and install, ________ factory assembled a. The refrigerant condensing coil shall be pneumatically
evaporative condenser(s) of induced draft design with vertical tested at 375 psig (2,687 kPa).
discharge, conforming in all aspects to the specifications and b. The refrigerant condensing coil shall be designed for low
schedules as shown on the plans. pressure drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of liquid
B. Capacity: The evaporative condenser(s) shall be warranted by refrigerant.
the manufacturer to have condensing capacity of _____ BTUH c. The refrigerant condensing coil shall be ASME B31.5
(kW) heat rejection, operating with _____ refrigerant at ___ compliant and coils shipping into Canada shall be supplied
°F(ºC) condensing temperature and ___°F(ºC) entering wet-bulb with a CRN.
temperature. 2. Water shall be distributed evenly over the coil at a minimum
C. Warranty: The manufacturer shall provide a five-year flow rate of 10 gpm/ft2 (6.8 lps/m2) to ensure complete
mechanical drive warranty covering the fans, fan shafts, wetting of the coil at all times. Large-diameter, non-clog, 360°
bearings, sheaves, supports, and fan motors. The plastic distribution nozzles shall be spaced across the coil
manufacturer’s standard equipment warranty for the balance of face area in Schedule 40 PVC spray branches. Nozzles shall
the components shall be for a period of one year from the date utilize a two-stage diffusion pattern to provide overlapping,
of startup or eighteen months from the date of shipment, umbrella spray patterns that create multiple intersection
whichever ends first. points with adjacent nozzles.
D. Factory Testing: The manufacturer shall be capable of testing the a. Nozzles and spray branches shall be observable and
operation of the condenser in the manufacturer’s own test facility. accessible for cleaning from the outside of the evaporative
Test facilities shall be capable of simulating design conditions, condenser during condenser operation without the removal
including but not limited to design wet-bulb, airflow, refrigerant of other components.
mass flow rate, refrigerant condensing temperature, and total b. Spray branches and nozzles shall be held in place by
heat rejection. snap-in rubber grommets, allowing quick removal of
E. Quality Assurance: The manufacturer shall have a individual nozzles or complete branches for cleaning or
Management System certified by an accredited registrar as flushing.
complying with the requirements of ISO-9001:2000 to ensure 3. Removable PVC drift eliminators shall be positioned to
consistent quality of products and services. Manufacturers that prevent moisture from entering the air plenum and
are not ISO-9001:2000 certified shall provide an additional one incorporate a minimum of three (3) changes in air direction.
year warranty to the customer at no additional cost. 4. Fan(s) shall be heavy-duty, axial type with aluminum alloy
blades driven by a one-piece, multi-groove neoprene/
polyester belt designed for a minimum of 150% of the motor
Part 2: Products
nameplate horsepower.
2.01 Evaporative Condenser Materials and Components
a. Fan(s) and shafts shall be supported by heavy-duty, self
A. General: All steel panels and structural elements shall be con-
aligning, grease-packed ball bearings with moisture-proof
structed from heavy-gauge, G-235 (Z700 metric) hot-dip
seals and integral sealer rings, designed for a minimum
galvanized steel, with cut edges given a protective coating
L10 life of 40,000 hours (280,000 hours average life).
of zinc-rich compound.
b. Fan and motor sheaves shall be fabricated from corrosion
Or, for CXV-T Models
resistant materials.
A. General: All steel panels and structural elements shall be con-
c. Fan motor(s) shall be totally enclosed air over (TEAO) type
structed from heavy-gauge, G-235 (Z700 metric), hot-dip galva-
with a 1.15 service factor, suitable for ____ volt,
nized steel, with cut edges given a protective coating of
____ phase, ___ Hz electrical service and shall be
zinc-rich compound. Casing panels shall be constructed of
mounted on an easily adjusted, heavy-duty motor base.
corrosion resistant, fiberglass, reinforced polyester (FRP).
d. The motor shall be furnished with double-sealed,
permanently lubricated bearings and special moisture
2.02 Coil Casing Assembly
protection on windings, shafts and bearings.
A. The evaporative condenser shall include a coil casing section
e. Air plenum shall provide a minimum of 48˝ (1220 mm)
consisting of refrigerant condensing coil, spray water
clearance under the motor base to provide comfortable
distribution system, drift eliminators, and air plenum with fan
working space for service personnel.
assemblies as indicated by the manufacturer.
1. The refrigerant condensing coil shall be fabricated of
continuous lengths of all prime surface steel at the
manufacturer’s own facility, and hot-dip galvanized
after fabrication.

J51
2.03 Basin Assembly 4. The air inlet louvers shall be manufactured of wave-formed,
A. The evaporative condenser shall include a basin assembly fiberglass-reinforced polyester (FRP) widely spaced to
consisting of cold water basin with pump assembly, heat transfer minimize air resistance and prevent water splash-out.
section for spray water cooling with integral drift eliminators, and
wide spaced air inlet louvers. 2.04 Optional Equipment Specifications
1. The cold water basin shall be constructed of heavy-gauge A. Evaporative condenser shall be provided with basin heaters
steel panels and structural members. Basin shall include a to prevent freezing of the recirculating water when the
depressed section with drain/cleanout connection. The basin evaporative condenser is idle.
area under the fill surface shall be sloped toward the 1. The basin heaters shall be selected to maintain +40°F
depressed section to facilitate cleaning. (4.4°C) basin water temperature at a 0°F (-17.8°C) ambient
- OR - temperature and 10 mph (16.1 km/hr) wind speed.
Refrigeration
1. The cold water basin shall be constructed of heavy-gauge 2. Basin heaters shall be electric immersion type controlled by a
Series 300 stainless steel panels and structural members, remote thermostat with the sensing bulb located in the basin
with all welded seams. The welded stainless steel basin shall water.
be leak tested at the factory. Basin shall include a depressed 3. Basin heaters shall be provided with a low water level cutout
section with drain/cleanout connection. The basin area under switch to prevent heater operation unless the heater
the fill surface shall be sloped toward the depressed elements are adequately submerged.
section to facilitate cleaning. B. The evaporative condenser shall be provided with extended
2. The cold water basin shall include: a drain/clean-out lubrication lines with standard grease fittings for lubricating the
connection; a steel strainer; a brass make-up valve; overflow fan shaft bearings from the outside base of the condenser.
connection; and a water recirculation pump assembly. C. Evaporative condenser shall be supplied with dedicated motors
a. Cold water basin shall be designed so that the strainer, and drives so that each fan can be cycled independently.
makeup valve and float, and pump assembly are easily D. The evaporative condenser shall be provided with a factory
accessible without removing any of the unit panels or other assembled, field-installed external platform with an access
components. ladder and handrails complying with OSHA standards and
b. Lift-out steel strainer shall be supplied with perforated regulations to provide access to the top of the evaporative
openings sized smaller than the water distribution nozzle condenser.
orifices and an integral anti-vortexing hood to prevent air 1. External platform shall have a 24˝ (610 mm) wide non-skid
entrainment. walking surface and 42˝ (1,220 mm) high safety railings.
c. Water recirculation pump shall be a close-coupled, bronze- 2. Optional ladder safety cage shall be available to meet OSHA
fitted centrifugal pump equipped with a mechanical seal, requirements as necessary.
mounted on the basin and piped from the suction strainer Or, for CXV-T Models
to the water distribution system. D. The evaporative condenser shall be provided with factory
i. The pump shall be installed with adequate drains so assembled, field installed perimeter safety railings and walking
that it may drain freely when the basin is drained. surface above coil air intake to provide access to the top of the
ii. The pump assembly shall include an integral metering evaporative condenser.
valve and bleed line to control the bleed rate from E. Evaporative condenser shall be provided with a moveable ladder
the pump discharge to the overflow connection. with fixed ladder supports to provide access to the fan drive
iii. The pump motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled system and coil assembly.
(TEFC) type suitable for _____ volt, ____ phase, F. Evaporative condenser shall be provided with an internal walk
______ Hz electrical service. way at the access door to facilitate servicing the unit.
d. On installations requiring a remote sump, the evaporative G. Evaporative condenser shall be provided with a factory
condenser shall be modified to accommodate the use of an assembled internal working platform with ladder to provide a
independent sump and pump for recirculating water (by permanent working surface for maintenance personnel (CXV-193
others). and larger only).
i. The recirculating water pump, steel strainer, make-up H. Evaporative condenser shall be provided with the ENERGY-
valve, and integral bleed line assemblies shall be MISER® Fan System, which provides two-single speed fan
omitted from the evaporative condenser scope of motors, one sized for full horsepower and load, the other sized
supply. for 1/3 the full horsepower and approximately 75% full load for
ii. The evaporative condenser shall be supplied with a capacity control and stand-by protection from drive or motor
cold water basin outlet sized and located as indicated failure.
on the drawings for gravity drain to the remote sump. I. Evaporative condenser shall be supplied with a right angle gear
iii. The water distribution system shall have a design drive designed specifically for evaporative condenser service.
operating pressure of 1 psig (108.25 kPa) at the All gears shall have a minimum service factor of 2.0 based on
evaporative condenser spray water inlet connection. design fan horsepower. An oil level fill port and sight glass shall
3. The heat transfer section shall consist of fill with integral drift be located on the gear drive to facilitate routine inspection and
eliminators for cooling the spray water leaving the coil maintenance.
to optimize the thermal performance of the J. BALTIGUARD PLUS™ Fan System: Two single speed fan
evaporative condenser. motors, one sized for load, the other sized for 1/3 of the full load
a. The fill and integral drift eliminators shall be formed from horespower shall be provided in each cell for capacity control
self-extinguishing (per ASTM-568) polyvinyl choride (PVC) and standby protection from drive or motor failure. The
having a flame spread rating of 5 per ASTM E84. manufacturer of the equipment shall suppy controls for the larger
b. The fill and integral drift eliminators shall be motor, a VFD for the smaller motor and factory programmed
impervious to rot, decay, fungus, and biological attack. logic controller to maximize energy saving for off peak load and
wet-bulb conditions.


J52
Series V Models
Part 1: General area in Schedule 40 PVC spray branches. Nozzles shall

A. General: Furnish and install, _____ factory assembled utilize a two-stage diffusion pattern to provide overlapping,
evaporative condenser(s) of counterflow blow-through design, umbrella spray patterns that create multiple intersection
points with adjacent nozzles.
with single side entry, conforming in all aspects to the

specifications and schedule as shown on the plans. a. Directional nozzles shall not be acceptable.
B. Capacity: The evaporative condenser(s) shall be warranted by b. Spray branches and nozzles shall be held in place by
the manufacturer to have condensing capacity of _____ BTUH snap-in rubber grommets, allowing quick removal of indi
(kW) heat rejection, operating with ____ refrigerant and ___ºF vidual nozzles or complete branches for cleaning or
(ºC) condensing temperature and ___ºF(ºC) entering wet-bulb flushing.
temperature. c. Nozzles shall have a minimum of 0.25” (6.35 mm)
C. Warranty: The manufacturer’s standard equipment warranty shall protrusion inside the spray branches to ensure unimpeded
be for a period of one year from the date of startup or eighteen water flow between regular cleanings of the water
months from the date of shipment, whichever ends first. The distribution system.
manufacturer shall, in addition, provide a 5-year mechanical 3. Removable PVC drift eliminators shall be positioned to
drive warranty covering the fans, fan shafts, bearings, sheaves, prevent moisture from leaving the evaporative condenser and
supports, and fan motors. incorporate a minimum of three (3) changes in air direction.
D. Factory Testing: Equipment manufacturer shall be capable of
testing the operation of the condenser in the manufacturer’s own 2.03 Basin Assembly
test facility. Test facilities shall be capable of simulating design A. The evaporative condenser shall include a basin assembly
conditions, including but not limited to design wet-bulb, airflow, consisting of cold water basin with pump assembly and fan
refrigerant mass flow rate, refrigerant condensing temperature, assemblies with single side air inlet and integral air plenum.
and total heat rejection. 1. The cold water basin shall include: a drain/clean-out
E. Quality Assurance: The manufacture shall have a Management connection; a steel strainer; a brass make-up valve; overflow
System certified by an accredited registrar as complying with the connection; and a water recirculation pump assembly.
requirements of ISO-9001 to ensure consistent quality of a. Drain/cleanout connection shall be located in the cold
products and services. Manufacturers that are not ISO-9001 water basin to allow removal of recirculating water.
certified shall provide an additional one-year warranty to the b. Lift-out steel strainer shall be supplied with perforated
customer at no additional cost. openings sized smaller than the water distribution nozzle
orifices and an integral anti-vortexing hood to prevent air
entrainment.
Part 2: Parts c. Brass make-up valve shall be supplied with a large-
2.01 Evaporative Condenser Materials and Components
diameter plastic float arranged for easy adjustment.
A. General: All steel panels and structural elements shall be con
d. Overflow connection shall be provided in the cold water
structed from heavy-gauge, G-235 (Z700 metric) hot-dip
basin to protect against recirculating water spillage.
galvanized steel, with cut edges given a protective coating of
e. Water recirculation pump shall be a close-coupled,
zinc-rich compound.
bronze-fitted centrifugal pump equipped with a mechanical
seal, mounted on the basin and piped from the suction
2.02 Coil Casing Assembly
strainer to the water distribution system.
A. The evaporative condenser shall include a coil casing section
i. The pump shall be installed so that it may drain freely
consisting of a refrigerant condensing coil, a spray water
when the basin is drained.
distribution system, and drift eliminators as indicated by
ii. The pump assembly shall include an integral metering
the manufacturer.
valve and bleed line to control the bleed rate from
1. The refrigerant condensing coil shall be fabricated of all prime
the pump discharge to the overflow connection.
surface steel at the manufacturer’s own facility, and hot-dip
iii. The pump motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled
galvanized after fabrication.
(TEFC) type suitable for _____ V, ____ phase, ______
a. The refrigerant condensing coil shall be tested at 375 psig
Hz electrical service.
(2,687 kPa) air pressure under water.
f. On installations requiring a remote sump, the evaporative
b. The refrigerant condensing coil shall be designed for low
condenser shall be modified to accommodate the use of an
pressure drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of liquid
independent sump and pump for recirculating water (by
refrigerant.
others)
c. The refrigerant condensing coil shall be ASME B31.5
i. The recirculating water pump, steel strainer, make-up
compliant and coils shipping into Canada shall be supplied
valve, and integral bleed line assemblies shall be
with a CRN.
omitted from the evaporative condenser scope of
2. Water shall be distributed evenly over the coil at a minimum
supply.
flow rate of 4.5 gpm/ft2 (3.1 lps/m2) to ensure complete
ii. The evaporative condenser shall be supplied with a
wetting of the coil at all times by large-diameter, non-clog,
cold water basin outlet sized and located as indicated
360° plastic distribution nozzles spaced across the coil face
on the drawings for gravity drain to the remote sump.

J53
iii. The water distribution system shall have an a. Centrifugal fan assemblies shall be located adjacent to the
operating pressure of 2 psig (115 kPa) at the casing and the cold water basin to minimize overall
evaporative condenser spray water inlet connection. unit height.
VC2 and VXMC Models b. Fan housings shall have curved inlet rings for efficient air
2. Air shall enter the evaporative condenser through the axial entry and rectangular discharge cowls which extend into
fan assemblies and integral air plenum. the pan to increase fan efficiency and prevent water from
a. Fans and motors shall be located in the dry entering entering the fans.
airstream to provide greater reliability and ease of c. Fan housings shall be split to facilitate the removal of the
maintenance. fan shaft.
b. Fan motors and drives shall be located at the front base d. Fan(s) shall be heavy-duty, centrifugal flow type mounted
of the unit to facilitate access without requiring access to on a steel shaft with heavy-duty, self-aligning,
Refrigeration
the inside of the unit. relubricatable bearings with cast iron housings, designed
c. Fan cylinders shall have curved inlets for efficient air entry. for a minimum L10 life of 40,000 hours (280,000 hours
d. Each fan assembly shall contain two axial-flow fans average life).
mounted in series on a common shaft with discharge e. Fan motor(s) shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC)
guide vanes between the fans for increased fan efficiency. type with a 1.15 service factor, suitable for _____ V, ____
e. Fans shall be heavy-duty, axial flow type with aluminum phase, ______ Hz electrical service and shall be mounted
alloy blades driven by a one-piece, multi-groove on an easily adjusted, heavy-duty motor base. Special
neoprene/polyester belt designed for a minimum of 150% moisture protection shall be provided on the windings,
of the motor nameplate horsepower. shafts and bearings.
i. Fan shafts shall be mounted in heavy-duty, self-
aligning, grease-packed relubricatable ball bearings 2.04 Optional Equipment Specifications
with eccentric locking collars, designed for a minimum A. Evaporative condenser shall be provided with basin heaters to
L10 life of 40,000 hours (280,000 hours average life). prevent freezing of the water in the cold water basin when the
ii. Bearing lubrication lines shall be extended to the evaporative condenser is idle.
exterior of the unit. 1. The basin heaters shall be selected to maintain +40° F
iii. Fan and motor sheaves shall be fabricated from (4.4° C) basin water temperature at a 0° F (-17.8° C) ambient
corrosion-resistant materials. temperature and 10 mph (16.1 km/hr) wind speed.
f. Fan motor(s) shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) 2. Basin heaters shall be electric immersion type controlled by a
type with a 1.15 service factor, suitable for _____ V, ____ remote thermostat with the sensing bulb located in the basin
phase, ______ Hz electrical service and shall be mounted water.
on an easily adjusted, heavy-duty motor base. 3. Basin heaters shall be provided with a factory-installed low
g. Integral air plenum shall contain additional guide vanes to water level cutout switch to prevent heater operation unless
ensure uniform airflow into the coil casing section. the heater elements are fully submerged.
B. Evaporative condenser shall be supplied with dedicated motors
VC1 Models and drives so that each fan can be cycled independently, and an
2. Air shall enter the evaporative condenser through the internal baffle shall be supplied to deter air bypass within
centrifugal fan assemblies and integral air plenum. the unit.
a. Fans and motors shall be located in the dry entering air C. Evaporative condenser shall be provided with a factory
stream to provide greater reliability and ease of assembled, field-installed external platform with an access
maintenance. ladder and handrails complying with OSHA standards and
b. Fan housings shall have curved inlet rings for efficient air regulations to provide access to the top of the evaporative
entry and rectangular discharge cowls that extend into condenser.
the pan to increase fan efficiency and prevent water from 1. External platform shall have a 24” (610 mm) wide non-skid
entering the fans. walking surface and 42” (1,220 mm) high safety railings.
c. Fan housings on units more than 8’ wide shall be split to 2. Optional ladder/safety cage shall be available to meet OSHA
facilitate the removal of the fan shaft. requirements as necessary.
d. Fan(s) shall be heavy-duty, centrifugal flow type mounted D. Evaporative condenser shall be supplied with the ENERGY-
on a steel shaft with heavy-duty, self-aligning, MISER® Fan System to improve part load efficiency and provide
relubricatable bearings with cast iron housings, designed system redundancy in case of a motor failure.
for a minimum L10 life of 40,000 hours (280,000 hours 1. The ENERGY-MISER® Fan System shall include the main
average life). fan motor as listed in the manufacturer’s published literature
and a pony motor sized for approximately 1/3 of design horse
e. Fan motor(s) shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) power and 2/3 of design fan speed to optimize energy
type with a 1.15 service factor, suitable for _____ V, ____ savings during non-design load conditions.
phase, ______ Hz electrical service and shall be mounted E. BALTIGUARD PLUS™ Fan System: Two single speed fan
on an easily adjusted, heavy-duty motor base. Special motors, one sized for load, the other sized for 1/3 of the full load
moisture protection shall be furnished on the windings, horespower shall be provided in each cell for capacity control
shafts, and bearings. and standby protection from drive or motor failure. The
manufacturer of the equipment shall suppy controls for the larger
motor, a VFD for the smaller motor and factory programmed
VCL Models logic controller to maximize energy saving for off peak load and
2. Air shall enter the evaporative condenser through the wet-bulb conditions.
centrifugal fan assemblies and integral air plenum.

J54
Evaporative Condenser
Engineering Manual
Evaporative Condenser Engineering Manual
Introduction
The objective of a mechanical refrigeration system is to remove heat from a space or product, and to reject
that heat to the environment in some acceptable manner. Evaporative condensers are frequently used to
reject heat from mechanical refrigeration systems. The evaporative condenser is essentially a combination
of a water-cooled condenser and an air-cooled condenser, utilizing the principle of heat rejection by the
evaporation of water into an air stream traveling across the condensing coil.
Evaporative condensers offer important cost-saving benefits for most refrigeration and air-conditioning
systems. They eliminate the problems of pumping and treating large quantities of water associated with
water-cooled systems. They require substantially less fan horsepower than air-cooled condensers of
comparable capacity and cost. And most importantly, systems utilizing evaporative condensers can be
designed for a lower condensing temperature and subsequently lower compressor energy input, at lower
first cost, than systems utilizing conventional air-cooled or water-cooled condensers.
The Refrigeration System

A schematic of a basic vapor compression system is shown in Figure 1. The corresponding heat transfer
processes can be represented on a plot of pressure versus enthalpy as shown in Figure 2.
B
C
C
D B
CONDENSER
POR
D VA
RECEIVER
UID
LIQ
RATE
X THROTTING
DEVICE
COMPRESSOR
TED
E SATU
URA
A
SAT
E F A
F
EVAPORATOR
Figure 1 – Vapor Compression Figure 2 – Pressure-Enthalpy Diagram for

Refrigeration System Compression Refrigeration System
Refrigerant vapor enters the compressor from the evaporator at a slightly superheated condition (A) and is
compressed to the condensing pressure (B). The amount of suction gas superheat (F-A) is a function of the
type of evaporator and the heat absorbed from the atmosphere as the gas travels along the suction line
from evaporator to the compressor.

J55
The compressed and further superheated vapor enters the heat rejection device (condenser) at Point B,
where the superheat is quickly removed and the saturated vapor state (Point C) is reached. From Point C to
Point D, condensation of the refrigerant occurs at constant pressure until the refrigerant reaches a saturated
liquid state at Point D.
There may be some subcooling of the liquid refrigerant near the outlet of the evaporative condenser, but this
is quickly dissipated in the drain line from the condenser to the receiver, and in the receiver itself. The drain
line and the receiver contain both refrigerant liquid and vapor, and where these two phases coexist, it is
impossible for the liquid temperature to remain below the saturation temperature. Therefore, the lower heat
Refrigeration
content of the subcooled liquid condenses some of the refrigerant vapor until an equilibrium condition is
reached at a saturated temperature corresponding to the condensing pressure. So, from a practical
standpoint, the refrigerant liquid going to the evaporator should be saturated as represented by Point D. The
only exception to this is when a separate subcooling device is used to subcool the liquid after it leaves the
receiver.
The refrigerant liquid at Point D is passed through a throttling device (orifice, capillary, or valve) where the
pressure is reduced at constant enthalpy to the system suction pressure at Point E. The refrigerant at Point E
consists of liquid and vapor, the vapor resulting from the "flashing" of some of the liquid in order to cool the
remaining liquid from condensing temperature (Point D) to the evaporating temperature (Point E). The
evaporation of the remaining liquid from Point E to Point F represents the useful work of heat pickup in the
evaporator.
Refrigeration Heat Rejection Systems

“Once-Through” Condensing System
Water, because of its availability and heat transfer characteristics, has long been the principal medium used
for heat rejection from refrigeration and air conditioning systems.
The simplest heat rejection system is one using city, well or surface water directly through a refrigerant
condenser and then dumping that water into the sewer, to the ground, or back to the surface water source.
The heat removed in the condenser is dependent upon the temperature rise and the flow rate of the water.
For an average heat rejection of 15,000 BTUH per ton of refrigeration and a water temperature rise of 20°F in
the condenser, approximately 1.5 gpm of water per ton must be supplied to and wasted from the refrigerant
condenser.
This "once-through" type of system at one time was used almost universally for refrigerant condensing.
However, the increasing cost of water, high sewerage charges, and restrictions on thermal pollution have
made this type of system uneconomical and obsolete.
Refrigerant Condenser and Cooling Tower
One of the early modifications to the "once-through" system was the addition of a cooling tower to permit
recirculation of the cooling water and thus conserve water. In a cooling tower, the heated water from the
condenser is brought in contact with air, and a small portion of the water is evaporated into the airstream.
For each pound of water evaporated, approximately 1,000 BTU are removed from the remainder of the
recirculated water. Therefore, only 15 Ib/hr, or 0.03 GPM of water is used per ton of refrigeration, a theoretical
savings of 98% of the water required by the "once-through” system. In actual practice, however, the savings
is approximately 95%, because a small amount of water must be "bled off" from the system in order to control
the concentration of impurities in the recirculated water.

J56
The temperature of the water leaving the cooling tower is determined by the ambient air wet-bulb
temperature. In most areas, design wet-bulb temperatures are such that the temperature of the water
leaving the cooling tower is substantially higher than well or surface water temperatures (see page M2 for
geographical wet-bulb data). Therefore, to compensate for the higher cooling water temperature and the
additional step of heat exchange introduced by the cooling tower, the condenser water circulation rate and
the design condensing temperature often must be increased in comparison to a "once-through" system.
Figure 3 shows a typical arrangement for a cooling tower AIR DISCHARGE
/refrigerant condenser system. The recirculated water flow rate

of 5 gpm/ton of refrigeration and the 6°F water temperature
COOLING
increase are representative of those existing in an ammonia 78°F WET BULB
TOWER
refrigeration system. The 100°F condensing temperature is 275 CFM/TON
about the practical minimum that could be obtained at a 78°F

85°F
design wet-bulb temperature. Since the pump must circulate
water through the refrigerant condenser, cooling tower and PUMP
REFRIG
VAPOR IN.
interconnecting piping, relatively high pumping head is 91°F
required. REFRIGERANT
CONDENSER
WATER RECIRCULATED
Halocarbon refrigerant systems may be and usually are AT 5 GPM/TON
(HIGH PUMPING HEAD) REFRIG.
LIQUID OUT
designed for somewhat higher condensing temperatures than @ 100°F
ammonia systems. This permits a higher water temperature

Figure 3 – Refrigerant condenser
rise through the condenser, but increases the compressor
with cooling tower
horsepower. Water circulation is normally 3 gpm/ton versus 5
to 6 gpm/ton required for an ammonia system.
Air-Cooled Condensers
The air-cooled condenser is another type of heat rejection device used for refrigeration and airconditioning
systems.
AIR DISCHARGE
Figure 4 shows a typical air-cooled condenser. Since it does
not utilize the evaporative principle, the amount of cooling in REFRIG.
VAPOR IN
the air-cooled condenser is a function of the ambient dry-bulb
temperature. Design dry-bulb temperatures are normally 15°F
to 25°F higher than design wet-bulb temperatures, so
condensing temperatures using air-cooled equipment will be at
least that much higher than condensing temperatures using
evaporative cooling, resulting in increased compressor
horsepower.
REFRIG.
95°F D.B. INLET AIR LIQUID OUT
1200 CFM/TON @ 115°F
Air-cooled condensers reject heat from the refrigerant by
sensible heating of the ambient air that flows through them.
The low specific heat of air results in a large volume flow rate Figure 4 – Air-cooled condenser
of air required (approximately four times that of evaporative
cooling equipment), with corresponding high fan horsepower
andlarge condenser plan area.
The net result of the use of an air-cooled condenser is a savings of water, but at the expense of increased
power consumption by the compressor and the condenser.

J57
Evaporative condensers reject heat from refrigeration and air conditioning systems while using minimum
quantities of energy and water. As shown in Figure 5, water is pumped from the basin section and is
distributed over the exterior of the condensing coil by a series of distribution troughs or spray nozzles. The
flow rate of water need only be enough to thoroughly wet the condensing coil to provide uniform water
distribution and prevent accumulation of scale. Therefore, minimum pumping horsepower is required.
A fan system forces air through the falling water and over the coil surface. A small portion of the water is
Refrigeration
evaporated, removing heat from the refrigerant, and condensing it inside the coil. Therefore, like the cooling
tower, all of the heat rejection is by evaporation, thus saving about 95% of the water normally required by a
"once-through" system.
The evaporative condenser essentially combines a cooling tower and a refrigerant condenser in one piece of
equipment. It eliminates the sensible heat transfer step of the condenser water which is required in the
cooling tower/refrigerant condenser system. This permits a condensing temperature substantially closer to
design wet-bulb temperature, and consequently, minimum compressor energy input.
The temperatures and water flow rate shown in Figure 5 are typical of an evaporative condenser applied to a
refrigeration or air conditioning system at the designated design wet-bulb temperature with either ammonia or
a halocarbon refrigerant. These conditions result in an economical evaporative condenser selection.
However, a lower condensing temperature and lower compressor energy input could be obtained with a
larger condenser at this same wet-bulb temperature.
*The evaporative condenser offers a number of important advantages over other condensing systems:
1. Low system operating costs Condensing temperatures within 15°F of design wet-bulb are
practical and economical, resulting in compressor horsepower savings of 10% or more over cooling
tower/condenser systems and more than 30% over air-cooled systems. Fan horsepower is
comparable to cooling tower/condenser systems and is about one-third that of an equivalent air-cooled
unit. Because of the low pumping head and reduced water flow, water pumping horsepower is
approximately 25% of that required for the normal cooling tower/condenser installation.
2. Initial cost savings The evaporative condenser combines the cooling tower, condenser surface,
water circulating pump, and water piping in one assembled piece of equipment. This reduces the cost
of handling and installing separate components of the cooling tower/condenser system.
Since the evaporative condenser utilizes the efficiency of AIR DISCHARGE
evaporative cooling, less heat transfer surface, fewer fans, ELIMINATORS
and fewer fan motors are required resulting in an initial WATER DIST. SYSTEM
material cost savings of 30 to 50% over a comparable REFRIG.
VAPOR IN
air-cooled condenser. CONDENSING
COIL
3. Space saving The evaporative condenser saves valuable
REFRIG.
space by combining the condensing coil LIQUID OUT @ 95°F
and cooling tower into one piece of equipment, and

eliminating the need for large water pumps and
78°F W.B.
piping associated with the cooling tower/condenser 275 CFM/TON
system.
PUMP
Evaporative condensers require only about 50% of (APPROX. 1 GPM/TON
@ LOW PUMPING HEAD)
the plan area of a comparable sized air-cooled
installation. Figure 5 — Evaporative condenser

J58
Evaporative Condenser Operation and

Installation Recommendations
Winterization
Most evaporative condenser installations operate year-round so consideration must be given to protect
against freezing of the recirculated water in locations where the ambient temperature falls below 32°F. There
are several protection methods that can be used.
Remote Sump
One method involves the use of an auxiliary sump
tank with a spray water recirculating pump located
within a heated space. Figure 6 shows a typical EVAPORATIVE
arrangement of an evaporative condenser with a CONDENSER
(OUTDOORS)
remote sump tank. All of the water in the condenser
basin drains to the indoor sump whenever the
recirculating pump is not operating. The indoor
remote sump must be sized to provide an operating
suction head for the pump and a surge volume
above this operating level to hold all the water that
DRAIN (HEATED SPACE)
will drain back when the pump is shut down. This LINE
includes water in suspension in the condenser and
WATER
the water in the condenser basin during normal FLOW MAKEUP
operation, plus that in the pipe lines between the ADJUSTMENT VALVE OVERFLOW
VALVE
condenser and sump. The amount of water in
suspension plus the amount of water in the
condenser basin during remote sump operation for PUMP STRAINER DRAIN
BAC condensers is available on M34 or from your

local BAC Representative.
Recirculating water pumps for remote sump

Figure 6 – Evaporative condenser with
applications must be selected for the required flow at
remote sump tank
a total head which includes the vertical lift, pipe friction
(in supply and suction lines) plus the specified pressure required at the inlet header of the water distribution
system (1.0 psig for CXV models; 2.0 psig for Series V models). A balancing valve must always be installed
in the discharge line from the pump to permit adjusting flow to the condenser.
Basin Heaters
Occasionally, because of the condenser location or space limitations, a remote sump application may be
impractical. In such cases, electric heaters or steam coils can be installed in the condenser basin to prevent
freezing at low ambient temperatures when the condenser is completely idle. In addition, the pump suction
line, pump, and pump discharge pipe (up to overflow connection) should be traced with heating tape and
insulated.

J59
Capacity Control
Most refrigeration and air conditioning systems are subject to wide load variations and substantial changes in
ambient temperature conditions. Where refrigerant control requires a reasonably constant condensing
pressure, some form of capacity control is required.
Fan Cycling
Fan cycling is the simplest method of capacity control on evaporative condensers. This method can result in
relatively large fluctuations in condensing pressures, however. On ammonia systems, most evaporators are
fed by high pressure or low pressure float valves or float switches which are less sensitive to variations in
Refrigeration
head pressure. On this type of system, fan cycling of the evaporative condenser will usually provide
satisfactory capacity control on the high side of the system. This is particularly true on larger ammonia
systems, where the evaporative condenser may have several fan motors which can be cycled in steps.
Halocarbon systems generally utilize evaporators controlled by thermal expansion valves. A reasonably
constant pressure differential across the thermal expansion valve is required for its proper operation.
Therefore, this type of system requires a closer degree of evaporative condenser capacity control than can
be obtained with fan cycling.
Two-Speed Fan Motors

The number of steps of capacity control can be doubled by using two-speed fan motors in conjunction with
fan cycling. This is particularly useful on single fan motor units which normally have only one step of capacity
control using simple fan cycling.
Normally the two-speed fan motor will be selected so that the low speed is half of the full speed, such as
1800/900 rpm. An evaporative condenser will deliver approximately 58% of its rated capacity at half speed
operation.
An additional benefit of two-speed fan motors is reduced fan horsepower at low speed. Brake horsepower
varies as the cube of the fan speed, so the unit will use only about one eighth of the full load brake
horsepower when operating at low speed. Maximum load and maximum wet-bulb temperature occur
infrequently, so the unit will be operating at half speed and hence sharply reduced brake horsepower much
of the time.
Another benefit of two speed motors is that when an evaporative condenser is operating at low speed it will
have substantially lower operating sound levels. The sound pressure levels of both centrifugal and propeller
fan evaporative condensers will be reduced by four to ten decibels, depending on the sound frequency.

J60

The ENERGY-MISER® Fan System consists of two standard single-speed fan motor and drive assemblies.
One drive assembly is sized for full speed and load, and the other is sized approximately 2/3 speed and
consumes only 1/3 the design horsepower. This configuration allows the system to be operated like a
two-speed motor, but with the reserve capacity of a standby motor in the event of failure. As a minimum,
approximately 70% capacity will be available from the low horsepower motor, even on a design wet-bulb
day. Controls and wiring are the same as those required for a two-speed, two-winding motor. Significant
energy savings are achieved when operating at low speed during periods of reduced load and/or low
wet-bulb temperatures.

The BALTIGUARD PLUS™ Fan System builds on the advantages of the ENERGY-MISER® Fan System by
adding a VFD to the smaller motor. Using the VFD on the smaller fan motor, as opposed to the larger
motor, reduces the cost of the VFD, and wiring for the motor.

The Independent Fan option consists of one fan motor and drive assembly for each fan to allow independent
operation, adding redundancy and an additional step of fan cycling and capacity control to models with more
than one fan.

Precise capacity control and energy savings are achieved with the BAC variable frequency drive (VFD)
option. VFDs offer a more efficient and durable way to reduce fan speed compared to fan cycling, fan
discharge dampers, or mechanical speed changers. The inherent ability for VFDs to provide soft starts,
stops, and smooth accelerations prolongs the mechanical system life (fans, motors, belts, bearings, etc.).
Sound levels are also reduced at lower fan speeds, and start-up noise is eliminated with the soft start
feature. See page J8 for information on BAC’s enclosed control and variable frequency drive offerings.
NOTE: An inverter duty motor is required for all models operating with a variable frequency drive.
Modulating Fan Discharge Dampers

Modulating fan dampers, located in the fan discharge of centrifugal fan units, provide an infinite number of
capacity control steps. Modulating dampers also affect a reduction in fan motor horsepower which is
approximately proportional to the reduction in CFM as the dampers move toward the closed position.
Single Coil Circuit Units -

On a single circuit condenser, a condensing pressure sensing element is located in the compressor
discharge line or in the receiver (see Figure 7). The pressure controller is electrically connected to a damper
motor, and when condensing pressure changes, a signal is sent to the damper motors to reposition the
dampers and provide more or less airflow as required.
Multiple Coil Circuit Units -

On multiple circuit condensers where it is necessary to control condensing pressures for two or more
circuits, a spray water temperature sensing controller, located in the basin, is substituted for the condensing
pressure controller. Maintaining spray water at approximately summertime temperatures will indirectly
provide control of condensing pressures on the multiple condenser circuits. Even with a very light load on
one circuit, the condensing temperature in that circuit cannot fall below the spray water temperature.
NOTE: This system will not provide control if the basin is drained for dry condenser operation in winter.

J61
AIR DISCHARGE
PRESSURE CONTROLLER
VAPOR
IN
DAMPER
MOTOR
LIQUID
OUT
Refrigeration
MODULATING FAN
DISCHARGE DAMPER
INLET
AIR FAN
Figure 7 – Evaporative condenser with modulating

fan discharge dampers
(single coil circuit unit)
Dry Operation
During winter operation, when the refrigeration load may be reduced and the ambient air temperature is far
below the design conditions, the evaporative condenser may be operated dry, i.e., without recirculated water
flow. This reduces the capacity of the unit to more nearly match the reduced load.
Dry operation of an evaporative condenser is intended to be a seasonal process. Water pump cycling should
not be used for capacity control. Condenser capacity changes greatly with and without spray water, so that
this method of control often results in short cycling of the recirculating pump. In addition, alternate wetting
and drying of the condenser coil promotes formation of scale on the condensing surface.
Evaporative condensers should not be operated dry in sub-freezing ambient temperatures while the
recirculated water is stored in the basin of the unit. The flow of cold air through the unit may freeze the water,
even if electric heaters or steam coils have been provided for freeze protection. These heaters are designed
to prevent freezing only when the pumps and fans are idle. Furthermore, air turbulence created by the fans
will blow water throughout the interior of the unit, and cause icing on the cold surfaces. It is recommended
that the evaporative condenser be completely drained of water when dry operation is desired.
Condenser Piping
See page M105.
Purging and Purge Piping
Source of Non-Condensables
Air and other non-condensable gases collect in refrigeration systems from several sources:
1. Poor evacuation of a new system prior to charging.

2. A leak into the system low side if operation is at pressures below atmospheric.
3. Failure to evacuate completely after part of a system has been open for repair.
4. Chemical breakdown of oil and/or refrigerant.
If permitted to accumulate, non-condensables in the system cause high condensing pressures and,
therefore increased power input to the compressors.

J62
Checking the System for Non-Condensables

To check the system for non-condensable gases, first close the valve in the liquid line running from the
receiver to the evaporator (king valve), then pump down the system slightly, enough to assure that if any
non-condensables are present they are pumped over to the high side. Immediately after pump-down, close
the discharge valve on the compressor. Operate the evaporative condenser for at least two hours or until the
water temperature in the basin or remote sump is the same as the entering wet-bulb temperature. Then the
temperature corresponding to the pressure in the evaporative condenser should correspond, or nearly so, to
the wet-bulb temperature of the entering air. If this temperature is higher than the wet-bulb temperature by
more than 2°F, the system has an excessive amount of non-condensables. (Be sure that all gauges are
accurate when checking for non-condensables.)
Purge Connections
Purging at the high point of the system can only be effective when the system is down. During normal
operation the non-condensables are dispersed throughout the high velocity refrigerant vapor and too much
refrigerant would be lost when purging from this high point.
However, purging at the condenser coil outlet can be effectively accomplished during system operation. The
non-condensables will carry through the condensing coil with the refrigerant liquid and vapor and tend to
accumulate in the condensing coil outlet header and connection where the temperature and velocity are
relatively low.
In the BAC condenser coil design, the refrigerant outlet connection is tangent to the top of the coil header so
non-condensables cannot trap in the header. A 1/2" or 3/4" purge connection should be cut into the top of
the liquid outlet along the horizontal run (for a refrigerant connection size less than 4”, a purge valve may be
provided with the BAC condenser; contact your local BAC Representative for confirmation). Each connection
must be valved so that each coil can be purged separately.
Purge Piping
All of the purge connections on the condenser coils plus the purge connection in the receiver may be cross
connected to a single purge line, which is connected to an automatic purger. However, only one purge valve
should be open at a time. Opening two or more valves tied together equalizes the coil outlet pressures and
the effect of the vertical drop legs is lost.
Location
In order to obtain specified performance from an evaporative condenser installation, it is essential that the
unit or units be located so as to guarantee design airflow to each unit while minimizing recirculation of the
discharge air.

J63
ELEVATION
Refrigeration
d D D
Figure 8 – Condenser spacing parameters
A single condenser located outdoors will seldom pose any layout problem. However, multiple units or a single
unit with a fan side facing an adjoining building or wall must be located with reference to the wall (or to each
other) to allow ample space for airflow to the fans. Figure 8 illustrates those dimensions which must be taken
into consideration when locating evaporative condensers. BAC representatives can provide specific location
recommendations for the various models of BAC evaporative condensers that are available. (Refer to layout
guidelines on page M36)
Note: In Figure 8, the top (discharge) of the condenser should be at the same or higher level than an
adjoining building or wall in order to minimize recirculation caused by down draft between the condenser and
wall. Such a down draft might be created by winds blowing across the condenser discharge towards the wall.
If for some reason, it is not possible to raise the condenser to the level of the top of an adjoining building or
wall, a discharge hood can be used on centrifugal fan condensers (see Figure 9). The hood increases the
discharge air velocity and elevates the point of discharge to a height where recirculation is minimized.
Elevating the condenser increases the area for airflow from beneath the unit and permits placing the
condensers closer together or closer to an adjoining wall. However, there is no spacing advantage to
elevations greater than 10 feet in this respect.
DECKING
Figure 9 – Discharge hoods to increase Figure 10 – Decking between condenser

discharge air velocity and wall or between condensers
Occasionally, the minimum spacing cannot be provided. By "decking over" between the condensers or
between a condenser and an adjoining wall (providing a solid surface between the air discharge and air
intakes, Figure 10), the condenser spacing can be decreased accordingly.

J64
Condenser installations involving large capacities and/or multiple units do not lend themselves to the
application of rigid layout guidelines. Some such installations virtually create their own environment and all
potential problems of airflow and recirculation are magnified. In some cases, it may be necessary to
increase the design wet-bulb temperature for which the condensers are selected. It is recommended that the
layout parameters of any installation other than a single unit on an open roof be reviewed by the BAC
Representative.
Recirculated Water System

An evaporative condenser obtains its ability to condense the refrigerant by evaporating a portion of the
water recirculated over the condensing coil. As the water evaporates, any impurities present in the supply
water remain in the unit. The concentration of impurities increases rapidly, and continues as long as the unit
is in operation.
In addition, any impurities in the air (such as chemical fumes in an industrial area or salt air near the
coastline) will be absorbed by the recirculated water, resulting in a corrosive solution.
To prevent an excessive build-up of impurities in the recirculated water, it is recommended that water be
removed or "bled" from the unit at a rate at least equal to the amount of water being evaporated. In many
localities this constant bleed and replacement with fresh water will keep the concentration of impurities in the
system at an acceptable level. Note: In addition to any bleed or chemical treatment, all systems must be
treated for biological contaminants.
An evaporative condenser will evaporate approximately 3 GPM of water per 100 tons of refrigeration.
Allowing an equal quantity for bleed, total water consumption is approximately 6 GPM per 100 tons of
refrigeration.
Most evaporative condensers that are furnished with a factory-installed recirculating pump (or pumps) are
also furnished with a water bleed line and flow adjusting valve. Units furnished for remote sump application
must have a bleed line and valve installed at the remote sump. It is important to keep the bleed lines
operative and properly adjusted through periodic inspection. The water removed through the bleed line will
more than pay for itself through increased unit life.
If the condition of the water and/or the air is such that continuous bleed will not control scaling or corrosion,
the recirculated water must be treated. A reputable local water treatment company should be consulted to
analyze the system water and recommend proper treatment. See M167 for BAC’s recommended water
treatment guidelines.
Most evaporative condensers are constructed of galvanized (zinc-coated) steel, and any chemical treatment
must be compatible with this material. Chemicals should be fed into the recirculated water on a continuous
metered basis to avoid localized high concentration which may cause corrosion. Batch feeding of chemicals
does not afford adequate control of water quality, and is not recommended.
When acid treatment is required, it is essential that the acid be accurately metered into the recirculated
water, and the concentration properly controlled. Acid should not be fed directly into the cold water basin; it
must be fed into the recirculated water piping so it will mix thoroughly before reaching the basin.

J65
Special Applications
Desuperheaters
A desuperheater is an air-cooled finned coil usually installed in the discharge airstream of an evaporative
condenser. Figure 11 shows a typical arrangement. Its primary function is to increase the condenser capacity
by removing some of the superheat from the discharge vapor before the vapor enters the wetted condensing
coil. The amount of superheat removed is a function of the desuperheater surface, condenser airflow and the
temperature difference between refrigerant temperature and the temperature of the air leaving the condenser.
Refrigeration
Practically, the application of a desuperheater is limited to reciprocating compressor ammonia installations
where discharge temperatures are relatively high (250°F to 300°F).
It is economically impractical to provide a desuperheater on an evaporative condenser with enough heat

transfer surface to remove all of the superheat in the ammonia refrigerant. Therefore, complete superheat
removal is never attained under design conditions of load and ambient wet-bulb temperature with the
standard desuperheater coils furnished by evaporative condenser manufacturers. The anticipated capacity
increase on an ammonia condenser with a standard desuperheater is in the area of 10% rather than the 16%
theoretically possible.
Occasionally, where condenser space is limited, the addition of a desuperheater may permit a smaller plan
area unit. However, with the numerous size increments available in today's evaporative condensers, such
instances are rare. The air-cooled desuperheater is not as efficient as wetted condenser surface, so it is more
economical to select a condenser with additional wetted surface to achieve greater capacity.
DESUPERHEATER COIL
HOT GAS
FROM COMPRESSOR
EVAPORATIVE
CONDENSER
LIQUID
OUTLET
Figure 11 — Evaporative condenser with

desuperheater coil
Desuperheaters have been recommended by some manufacturers to assist in oil removal from the ammonia
vapor and also to minimize scaling of the upper tubes of the wetted condensing coil by reducing entering
refrigerant gas temperatures to the wetted coil.
For oil removal, an oil separator is installed between the desuperheater coil and the wetted condenser coil.
The theory is that cooling of the hot discharge refrigerant vapor will promote condensation of the oil vapor
from the refrigerant-oil mixture and separation of oil from the refrigerant in the oil separator. This claim has
merit. However, there is normally no control over the amount of heat removed from the refrigerant vapor in
the desuperheater coil. At less than design load or wet-bulb temperature, the desuperheater coil often
becomes a condensing coil, and when liquid refrigerant mixes with liquid oil, separation becomes quite
difficult.

J66
Today there are many oil separators with high efficiencies for removing oil from the hot discharge vapor as it
leaves the compressor. The oil separator can be located in the engine room where it can be monitored by
the operating engineer and where it is not exposed to the ambient temperatures that would cause refrigerant
condensation. From the scaling standpoint, the presence or absence of a desuperheater is immaterial. The
primary factor that determines the tendency to form scale on the wetted coil of an evaporative condenser is
the external surface temperature of the coil. At the inlet of the wetted coil where only hot refrigerant vapor
exists, the internal heat transfer coefficient is quite low. Despite the high vapor temperatures at the inlet
(250°F to 300°F), the low internal coefficient reduces the rate of heat transfer through the coil/tubes at that
point. The resulting coil surface temperature at the inlet is not appreciably different from the coil surface
temperature in the condensing portion of the coil. Therefore, scaling in an evaporative condenser becomes
primarily a function of adequate water distribution over the coil, proper bleed-off to prevent concentration of
solids, and proper water treatment where water conditions are particularly bad.
The increasing use of screw compressors for industrial refrigeration systems further obsoletes the use of a
desuperheater. The screw compressor is an oil seal, oil cooled unit, with the cooled oil injected into the
compressor in contact with the refrigerant vapor. Larger, efficient, de-mister type oil traps furnished as part of
the screw compressor package minimize problems of oil carryover. Because the cooled oil is in direct
contact with the refrigerant vapor, discharge temperatures are relatively low on water-cooled screw
compressors (160°F to 190°F), and even lower on refrigerant liquid injected screw compressors
(approximately 120°F). Consequently, any capacity gain of a desuperheater used on a screw compressor
installation is negligible.
Refrigerant Liquid Subcooling (Halocarbon Systems)

In the case of air conditioning or refrigeration systems, the pressure at the expansion device feeding the
evaporator(s) can be substantially lower than the receiver pressure due to liquid line pressure losses. If the
evaporator is above the receiver, the static head at the evaporator is less than at the receiver, which further
reduces the pressure at the expansion device.
A refrigerant remains in liquid form only as long as the liquid pressure is at or higher than the saturation
pressure corresponding to its temperature. Any pressure reduction in the liquid line between the receiver
and the expansion device causes flashing or vaporization of some of the liquid. The presence of this flash
gas will cause erratic operation of the thermal expansion valve and reduce the valve capacity, sometimes to
the point of starving the evaporator.
To avoid liquid line flashing where the above conditions exist, it is necessary to subcool the liquid refrigerant
after it leaves the receiver. The minimum amount of subcooling required is the temperature difference
between the condensing temperature and the saturation temperature corresponding to the pressure at the
expansion valve. To determine the degree of subcooling required, it is necessary to calculate the liquid line
pressure drop including valves, ells, tees, strainers, etc., and add to it the pressure drop equivalent to the
static head loss between the receiver and the thermal valve at the evaporator, if the evaporator is located
above the receiver.
The static head loss due to a vertical rise in the liquid line is a function of the refrigerant density. At normal
condensing temperatures, the static head loss is approximately 0.50 psi per foot rise for R-22.

J67
As an example of the calculation to determine the amount of subcooling required, assume an R-22 system
designed for 105°F condensing temperature (210.7 psig) with a thermal valve fed evaporator 25 feet above
the refrigerant receiver.
Assume that detailed calculations of friction pressure drop indicate a line loss of 8.0 psi. The static head loss
for a vertical rise of 25 feet (12.5 psi), plus 8 psi friction pressure drop, results in a total pressure drop of 20.5
psi. So the pressure at the expansion valve is 210.7 - 20.5, or 190.2 psig, and the saturation temperature
corresponding to 190.2 psig is 98°F. Therefore, the minimum amount of subcooling to prevent flashing is
105°F (condensing temperature) minus 98°F, or 7°F.
Refrigeration
Some compressor manufacturers publish their compressor ratings based on a fixed amount of subcooling at
the thermal expansion valve. Subcooled liquid at the expansion valve of the evaporator does increase system
capacity since it increases the refrigeration effect per pound of refrigerant circulated. But the increase is
relatively small and seldom justifies the cost of the subcooling device and piping for this reason alone.
However, where compressor ratings based on subcooled liquid are used, the specified amount of subcooling
must be added to that required for liquid line pressure drop and static head loss.
One method commonly used for supplying subcooled liquid for halocarbon systems is to provide a subcooling
coil section in the evaporative condenser, located below the condensing coil (see Figure 12). Depending
upon the design wet-bulb temperature, condensing temperature, and subcooling coil surface, these sections
will normally furnish approximately 10°F of liquid cooling. However, to be effective, the subcooling coil must
be piped between the receiver and evaporator as shown in Figure 12.
CONDENSING
COMPRESSOR COIL
DISCHARGE
TO
EVAPORATOR
EVAPORATIVE CONDENSER
RECEIVER
SUBCOOLING
COIL
Figure 12 — Recommended piping for evaporative condenser

with liquid subcooling coil
NOTE: Increasing the evaporative condenser size over the capacity required for the system will not produce
liquid subcooling. The increased condenser capacity will result only in lower operating condensing
temperatures. The same result will occur if the condensing coil is piped directly to the subcooling coil.
Low temperature, multistage ammonia refrigeration systems often use liquid subcooling between stages for
more economical operation. However, subcooling coils in an evaporative condenser are seldom, if ever, used
with an ammonia refrigeration system for several reasons:
1. Design condensing temperatures are generally lower with ammonia, thus limiting the amount of
subcooling that can be obtained.
2. The density of ammonia liquid is approximately 37 lbs/ft3, less than half that of the normally used
halocarbons, and static head losses are proportionately less.
3. The expansion devices and system designs normally used for ammonia systems are less sensitive to
small amounts of flash gas.
4. The high latent heat of ammonia (approximately 480 BTU/lb versus 70 BTU/lb for R-22) results in
comparatively small amounts of flash gas with a liquid line properly sized for low pressure drop.

J68
Multiple Circuit Condenser Coils
The coil in a single condenser can be split in sections to provide a number of individual circuits. A multiple
circuit coil is used primarily with the common halocarbon refrigerant (R-134a, R-22, R-404A, R-507) on small
air-conditioning or refrigeration systems with two or more reciprocating compressors. The reason for this is
that proper oil return to the compressors can be a problem on these systems, and it is good design practice
to isolate each compressor.
In general, the halocarbon refrigerant are highly miscible with oil, the degree of miscibility being a function of
the refrigerant, the type of oil, the pressure and temperature of the mixture. During normal operation, some
oil is lost from the crankcase of the reciprocating compressor and this oil travels around the refrigerant
circuit with the refrigerant. It is essential that the oil lost from the compressor be returned to it.
In order to avoid oil return problems, it is common practice on the smaller (200 tons and below) halocarbon
refrigeration and air-conditioning systems to design independent refrigerant circuits where two or more
reciprocating compressor systems are involved. In order to use a single evaporative condenser, the
condenser coils can be split internally to accommodate the capacities of the individual systems.
This practice is not followed with R-717 (ammonia) systems. Oil and ammonia are practically immiscible so
that most of the oil carried over from the reciprocating compressors can be removed with discharge line oil
separators and returned either directly to the individual compressor crankcase or to an oil receiver and then
to the compressor crankcase.
If multiple compressor halocarbon systems are not designed with isolated circuits, an oil return system must
be provided to return oil to each compressor crankcase.
Auxiliary Cooling Using Condenser Basin Water

During normal evaporative condenser operation, the recirculated spray water is maintained at a temperature
some point higher than the inlet air wet-bulb temperature and lower than the condensing temperature. The
exact recirculated water temperature is determined by these two operating parameters. Therefore, this water
can be considered as a source of relatively cool fluid for auxiliary cooling requirements on refrigeration
plants, such as jacket cooling for reciprocating and rotary compressors, jacket cooling for air compressors
and vacuum pumps, and oil cooling for screw compressors.
Water is taken from the basin of the condenser or the remote sump and is pumped to the source of heat,
usually by a separate pump (see Figure 13). In most cases, only a fraction of the evaporative condenser
flow rate is required for cooling purposes. The water flows through the heat source, increases in
temperature, and is then returned to the condenser basin or remote sump. The heated water then mixes
with the basin water producing a mixture temperature somewhat higher than the normal recirculated water
temperature. An increase in temperature of the recirculated water by virtue of an external cooling load has
the effect of reducing condensing capacity, but the penalty is relatively small. Consult your local BAC
Representative for specific evaporative condenser performance data on systems utilizing basin water for
auxiliary cooling.
Using a portion of the recirculated spray water for external cooling purposes is an effective and simple
concept. However, there is a significant drawback to this cooling system that does not always make it
desirable. An evaporative condenser characteristically behaves as an air washer, stripping dirt and dust
particles from the air circulating through it, and holding them in suspension in the recirculated water.
Consequently, this can create serious clogging of compressor jackets or heat exchanger tubes. Frequent
cleaning of the heat exchanger or sophisticated filtering equipment is usually required.

J69
EVAPORATIVE
CONDENSER
COOLING
LOAD
AUXILIARY PUMP STANDARD CONDENSER
Refrigeration
PUMP
Figure 13 — Auxiliary cooling using condenser basin water
Closed Circuit Fluid Cooling

To eliminate the problem of system contamination associated with using spray water for auxiliary cooling,
BAC recommends that a closed system be used for that cooling whenever possible. A separate closed circuit
cooling tower, or a split circuit coil in the evaporative condenser, with one circuit for condensing the
refrigerant and the other for cooling the liquid, are two good solutions.
SCREW COMPRESSOR
CLOSED CIRCUIT EVAPORATIVE

EVAPORATIVE COOLER CONDENSER
OIL COOLER
SCREW COMPRESSOR
PUMP
OIL COOLER
Figure 14 — Evaporative condenser with closed circuit

cooling tower for fluid cooling: cooling oil coolers for
refrigeration screw compressors
As an example, a closed circuit cooling tower could be used to cool water or glycol solution for oil coolers of
refrigeration screw compressors. Figure 14 shows a typical arrangement. This is the ideal cooling system
because it provides the following important advantages:
1. Provides closed loop cooling, which precludes the contamination of system fluid.
2. Provides independent control of the condensing and water-cooling systems by separating these two
functions into two or more units.
3. Permits the evaporative condenser to be operated as an air-cooled condenser in cold weather, thus
minimizing freeze up problems.

J70
It is important to note that if the closed circuit cooling tower is installed in a freezing climate, an antifreeze
(glycol) solution must be used instead of water. If a closed circuit cooling tower coil containing water is not
provided with a supplementary heat load after shutdown, and is exposed to ambient temperature below
32°F, the water could freeze and rupture the coil. Other winterizing precautions similar to those described
earlier in this manual for evaporative condensers apply equally to closed circuit cooling towers.
A separate closed circuit cooling tower for fluid cooling cannot always be justified, particularly on smaller
installations. For instance, on refrigerated plants involving only one or two water-cooled screw compressors,
it may be more economical to furnish an evaporative condenser with a split circuit coil, with one circuit for
condensing refrigerant and the other isolated for fluid cooling. This approach lacks one of the features of the
separate unit arrangement, i.e., the fluid cooling and condensing functions cannot be controlled
independently. Both functions are handled within the same unit, but the heat rejection capacity of the unit
must be controlled by either the condensing pressure or the leaving fluid temperature. Consequently it is
necessary to sacrifice close control of one of these parameters, usually the leaving fluid temperature.
Using an evaporative condenser for both condensing and fluid cooling also limits the permissible inlet and
outlet fluid temperatures on the fluid cooling circuit. Careful engineering analysis is required to establish
satisfactory temperature criteria and properly select the evaporative condenser. Consult your local BAC
representative for specific recommendations on split circuit evaporative condensers.
Thermosyphon Oil Coolers

Thermosyphon oil coolers (TSOC) operate as unique high-temperature chillers using high-pressure liquid
ammonia saturated at 70°F to 95°F (21°C to 35°C), and evaporating in the TSOC at the system condensing
pressure 70°F to 95°F (21°C to 35°C). This is made possible by using a gravity feed recirculation refrigerant
system based on drawing liquid ammonia from a receiver or auxiliary liquid supply. The liquid source is at
condensing pressure and located about 6 to 8 ft (1.8 to 2.4 m) above the TSOC. This source is connected
directly via low-pressure drop piping to the tube side of the TSOC shell and tube heat exchanger (see
Figure 1).
The oil to be cooled is piped through the shell-side of the cooler. When the oil entering the cooler is warmer
than the saturated liquid temperature, some of the ammonia liquid will boil at the saturated temperature
within the tubes, cooling the oil. Vapor generated in the TSOC tubes will rise through the refrigerant return
line, which is connected to the liquid receiver above the liquid level.
The vapor bubbles in the return line lower the density of the return liquid/vapor to approximately 3 lb/ft3 (48
kg/m3). The supply liquid line, which contains only liquid ammonia, is heavier, weighing about 37 lb/ft3 (592
kg/m3).
The weight imbalance between the two legs induces a thermosyphon refrigerant flow that will be in excess
of the oil cooler load requirement. The excess liquid returns with the vapor up to the receiver vessel. The
liquid drops into the receiver and the vapor is vented to the condenser inlet.
When a TSOC is operating properly, the refrigerant inlet and return lines will be at the same temperature.
Two problems that can cause the TSOC to lose oil-cooling capacity and/or stop cooling entirely.
The first problem, the gradual loss of cooling capacity, may occur on any TSOC application, but is generally
found on those ammonia systems that have screw compressors and some older reciprocating compressors
with less efficient (non-coalescer) mesh-type oil separators. Coalescing oil separators typically permit
minimal oil carryover of 5 to 10 ppm by weight (pound of oil per pound of ammonia pumped). Mesh oil
separators will allow more carryover, on the order of 30 to 100 ppm, which may result in 6 to 20 times the oil
carryover as with screw compressors.
Reprinted with permission from ASHRAE Journal, April, 2001

J71
Oil is virtually immiscible with ammonia. Because it is heavier COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE

HOT GAS
than liquid ammonia, it will be located at the bottom of any
ammonia liquid vessel, including the ammonia in high-
pressure receivers and auxiliary TSOC receivers. If the EVAPORATIVE
CONDENSOR
supply of ammonia for TSOCs is taken from the bottom of VAPOR VENT TO
CONDENSOR INLET
these vessels, then some oil may be drawn into the TSOC,
where it will settle to the bottom, logging the lower tubes and
reducing the TSOC capacity by preventing these tubes from
participating in the cooling process. CONDENSED
Refrigeration
LIQUID AUXILARY
RECEIVER
When cooling loss occurs, close the liquid supply to the

TSOC, pump out the remaining liquid ammonia, then close
the return line. Next, stop the unit and drain the oil from the 95F
35C VAPOR & LIQUID
RETURN
bottom drain connections on the TSOC heads, but not the 2.6 ls/ft3
40 kg/m3
LIQUID SUPPLY 95F
shell that contains the oil being cooled. This should clear the 6 - 8 ft
1.8 - 2.4m
38 ls/ft3
576 kg/m3
OIL OUT
110F
35C
problem, but it may require periodic draining every few 95F

35C
43C
months or so.
THERMOSYPHON
OIL COOLER TO HIGH PRESSURE
RECEIVER
When the problem requires weekly draining, then more OIL IN
175F
serious action is indicated. The oil carryover rate is out of (78C)
control and the low-side evaporators, level switches and Figure 1—A basic flow diagram of a TSOC
pressure regulators are probably also oil logged. When this
occurs, evaluate the oil carryover, track the amount added to
reciprocating and screw compressors and the amount drained
from the low side of the system. Chances are that oil carryover
is extreme and an oil management system is indicated.
COMPRESSOR
An oil management system can include a special DISCHARGE
“downstream coalescing separator” located between the EVAPORATIVE

CONDENSOR
VAPOR VENT TO
reciprocating compressors and the condenser. This CONDENSOR INLET
separator can be designed to remove oil in the range of 5 to

10 ppm carryover, equivalent to that of screw compressors. RETURN HEADER
SLOPE TOWARDS
CONDENSED
The oil can be collected in an oil receiver, properly filtered LIQUID
AUXILARY RECEIVER
AUX.
and directed back to the reciprocating compressor REC.
VAPOR LIQUID
VAPOR LIQUID
VAPOR LIQUID
crankcases via float level control for automatic handling. This LIQUID RETURN
RETURN
RETURN
SUPPLY
method will rapidly pay for itself considering the savings of
OIL
the cost of labor, the cost of new oil and the disposal of TO #3 OUT
TO HIGH
TO #2
used oil. THERMOSYPHON
OIL COLLER #1 #2 #3
PRESSURE
RECEIVER
The second problem is that the TSOC units work well for
months and then, all at once, one or more coolers in a large Figure 2 —Multiple thermosyphon piping
plant with many TSOCs connected to a single supply source
stop cooling. Obviously, the oil overheats and the screw compressors shut down on high oil temperature.
Generally, this occurs with a season change—even mild season changes.
The problem is neither with the TSOC nor with the oil. It is because the TSOC is tied into the same receiver
with any number of other TSOCs. This is not bad. It is done all the time. However, the piping for the return
lines to the receiver must be respected. The premise is that the thermosyphon principle operates on minimal
pressure differences (the 6 to 8 ft [1.8 to 2.4 m] height). One of the primary rules is that the vapor generated
in the TSOC must return to the condenser inlet at the same condensing pressure.

J72
Figure 2 shows the proper way to pipe the return on multiple TSOC systems. It is imperative that each
TSOC return reaches the receiver return header without influence from the other coolers or they may
interfere with each other. This may result in spilling liquid refrigerant down a neighbor’s return line, causing
the fine pressure balance to be upset and stopping the TSOC refrigerant flow.
If there are multiple TSOCs and one unit quits cooling, look up at the TSOC return lines. It may be that
several of the TSOC returns are manifolded into a horizontal line that rises several feet before entering the
auxiliary receiver. This is the problem.
The returns will have to be repiped in accordance with the intent of Figure 2. Each TSOC return is
individually connected into a return header, located above the receiver liquid level and sloping toward the
receiver. Each return must connected to the header by entering from above, so that the liquid return from
one TSOC cannot interfere with any other.
Written by:
Rudy Stegmann, P.E.
President of The Enthalpy Exchange
Williamsburg, Va.

K1
Aircoil™
Evaporators
Refrigeration
Product Detail
Product Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .K2
Features Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .K3
Construction Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .K4
Optional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .K6
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .K8
Engineering Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K10
Engineering Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K38
Nomenclature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K40
Application Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K41

K2
Aircoil™ Evaporators
BAC Aircoil™ Evaporators are available in five different styles, each suitable for a variety of applications. Each
style was designed and built with the same guiding principle in mind: to bring premier components and materials
together with modern manufacturing techniques to satisfy customer requirements more completely and
cost-effectively than ever before.
Available models:
AS – small to medium industrial applications
(2 - 31 ammonia tons)
AM – small to medium cast fan industrial applications

(2 – 34 ammonia tons)
AL – medium to large industrial applications

AR – process room applications

AC – sound sensitive and high static applications

(5 - 65 ammonia tons)
The table on page K3 further identifies features and

options available on each of these evaporator styles.

K3
Aircoil™ Evaporators Features

& Options
Standard Features AS AM AL AC AR
Sheet Metal Fans • •
Cast Aluminum Fans • •
Refrigeration
Centrifugal Fans •
Swing-Away Fan Panels • • Optional
Vertical Discharge •
Ammonia Tons 2 - 31 2 - 34 5 - 65 5 - 65 3 - 22
ASME B31.5 (2001) Compliant • • • • •
Optional Features & Accessories AS AM AL AC AR

45° Down Discharge • •
90° Down Discharge •
Long Throw Adapter • •
Operable w/External Static Pressure • • •
Two-Speed Motors • • • •
Inverter (VFD) Duty Motors • •
Individual Contactor(s) w/Control Transformer • • •
Individual Contactor(s) w/o Control Transformer • • •
Common Contactor Starter w/Control Transformer • • •
Common Contactor Starter w/o Control Transformer • • •
Individual Combination Starter w/Control Transformer • •
Individual Combination Starter w/o Control Transformer • •
Common Combination Starter w/Control Transformer • •
Common Combination Starter w/o Control Transformer • •
Support Legs (Hangers are Standard on all Models) • • • •
Options common to all Aircoil styles:

Coil/fin Construction Options: End Covers Electrical Options:
Galvanized Steel/ Galvanized Steel Defrost Options: Individual Terminal Strip
Aluminum/Aluminum Air Common Terminal Strip
Copper/Aluminum Water Individual Non-Fused Disconnect
Stainless Steel/Aluminum Hot Gas - Coil & Pan Common Non-Fused Disconnect
Electrofin coating also available Hot Gas - Coil Only Individual Fused Disconnect
Casing Construction Options: Hot Gas - Pan Only Common Fused Disconnect
Galvanized Steel (standard) Electric - Coil & Pan Feed Types:
Stainless Steel Electric - Coil Only Recirculated, Bottom
Pan Construction Options: Electric - Pan Only Recirculated, Top
Aluminum (standard) Hot Gas Coil/Electric Pan Flooded
Stainless Steel Direct Expansion
Insulated Pan with Cover Control Pressure Bottom
Galvanized Steel Control Pressure Top
Stainless Steel

K4
Construction Features
Coil Design Casing
Coils are designed and manufactured according to the AS, AM, AL, AC - Casings are constructed of durable,
stringent requirements of ASME B31.5 (2001), which corrosion resistant G-235 (Z700 metric) galvanized
now addresses heat transfer component design. All steel with 2.35 oz/ft2 zinc coating (700 g/m2). Load
coils are pressure tested to 350 psig with air under wa- carrying components are engineered with reinforcing
ter. Units are shipped with a nitrogen holding charge. panel breaks and hardware particularly suited for the
application. Fans are individually compartmented with
Tubes - BAC Aircoil™ Evaporators are constructed continuous tube sheets to permit fan cycling.
with 0.875” diameter stainless steel, aluminum, or gal-
vanized steel tubes, staggered in the direction of air- AR - Casings are constructed of heavy-gauge, corro-
flow to ensure maximum air turbulence and coil heat sion resistant Series 300 stainless steel. Casing pan-
transfer efficiency. els are removable to permit access to both faces of the
tube bundle for maintenance and cleaning.
Fins - Die-formed, flat pattern fins are a continuous
design with a clean full collar to optimize performance, Hangers
resistance to airflow, and cleanability. The flat pattern Heavy-duty support hangars are engineered with rig-
also reduces resistance to airflow, providing perfor- ging points to permit safe and easy hanging.
mance comparable to corrugated fins at a given horse-
power. Hinged Fan Panel
AS, AM - Fan orifice panels are constructed with
Circuiting - Each coil is individually circuited for spe- smooth, large radius orifices. Fan panels are hinged
cific applications in recirculated, flooded, direct expan- to permit unrestricted access to both faces of the tube
sion, or control pressure receiver refrigeration systems bundle, for maintenance and cleaning.
along with water, glycols, or brines. AL - This feature is available as an option.
Tube Frame Drain Pan

The coil incorporates a heavy-duty rectangular struc- AS, AM, AL, AC - Inner drain pans are constructed
tural tube frame, which improves rigidity, squareness, of heavy-gauge welded aluminum for corrosion resis-
and long-term stability, rather than a less robust angle tance, light weight, and good heat conductance for
design. The tube frame also improves cleanability by pan defrost.
reducing cavities and it encloses and protects BAC
supplied wiring options. AR - Inner drain pans are constructed of heavy-gauge
welded Series 300 stainless steel for corrosion resis-
tance and durability.
Header
Headers are constructed of schedule 80 or schedule All pans are furnished with an extra large drain con-
40 pipe as required by ASME B31.5.* nection, when coupled with the flatness and smooth-
ness of the sloped aluminum pan, permits swift and
* Does not apply to coils of copper tube construction. total drainage.

K5
Fans Wiring
BAC has optimized the fan proximity to the coil face, AS, AM, AR - Motors are pre-wired to a common non-
fan positioning within the tapered fan orifice, and the fused disconnect, as standard. Flexible conduit from
coil aspect ratio to maximize performance of selected the motor to the air unit frame permits opening of the
fans. hinged fan panel on AS and AM units. Wiring is run
through the structural tube frame and terminated in a
AS, AR - Direct-drive fans with contoured aluminum factory mounted NEMA-4 enclosure.
blades are selected and installed to maximize perfor-
mance and efficiency. Fan motors are basket-mounted AL, AC - Motors are pre-wired to individual terminal
Refrigeration
in a heavy gauge, PVC-coated steel fan guard. strips mounted in composite NEMA 4 enclosures, as
standard.
AM - Direct-drive solid aluminum cast fans are selected
and installed to maximize performance and efficiency. Motors
Fan motors are mounted on a heavy-gauge steel sup- Motors are a totally enclosed air over (TEAO), fur-
port platform with four points of contact riveted to the nished with low temperature grease and are otherwise
swing-away fan panel. Fan guards are heavy-gauge designed to ensure reliability and longevity in a harsh
steel with a corrosion resistant PVC coating. environment.
AL - Direct-drive, cast aluminum fans are selected and

installed to maximize performance and efficiency. Fan
motors are foot-mounted on stainless steel base plates
for durability and supported by fan housings construct-
ed of heavy-gauge G-235 galvanized steel.
AC - Centrifugal fans are selected and installed to

maximize performance and efficiency. Fan motors are
easily accessible and serviceable from outside unit,
and motors 10 HP and above are factory installed on a
swinging motor base for easy field installation. AL Series
AR Series

K6
Optional Features
Coil Materials Casing
Galvanized steel tubes and fins - A conventional AS, AM, AL, AC - Optional casing materials include
choice for decades, carbon steel coils are hot-dip gal- Series 300 stainless steel and BAC’s patented BAL-
vanized per ASTM A-123 for corrosion protection. TIBOND® Corrosion Protection System, a polymer
coating which is baked on galvanized steel in a metic-
Aluminum tubes with aluminum fins - Aluminum ulously controlled process at the BAC manufacturing
coils weigh far less than galvanized steel coils and facility. These casing material upgrades offer varying
have superior thermal conductivity, improving perfor- degrees of corrosion resistance, durability, and en-
mance in both cooling and defrost modes. hanced appearance.
Stainless steel tubes with aluminum fins - In ad- AR - The standard casing material is Series 300 stain-
dition to the durability of stainless steel tubes, stainless steel given the inherent requirements of process
less-aluminum coils weigh far less than galvanized room applications.
steel coils and have the superior thermal conductivity
of aluminum fins, improving performance in both cool- Pan material
ing and defrost modes. AS, AM, AL, AC - Heavy-gauge stainless steel is
available as an alternative to aluminum. Stainless
Copper tubes with aluminum fins - Designed for steel provides a broader resistance to airborne impu-
halocarbon or liquid applications, copper-aluminum rities and cleaning agents that could damage alumi-
coils are manufactured with 5/8” OD copper tube to num or galvanized steel.
be efficient, cost competitive, corrosion resistant, and
light in weight. AR - The standard pan material is heavy-gauge stain-
less steel given the inherent requirements of process
room applications.
Vari-Fin
For severe frost applications, fins on the air inlet face Reheat Coils
of the coil have wider spacing than the remainder of Finned reheat coils produce continuous dehumidifi-
the coil. Fin spacing is 2 fins/inch (fpi) or 1.5 fpi for cation and reduce sweating by heating the air after it
the first 2 rows and 4 fpi or 3 fpi, respectively, for the leaves the cooling coil section. The reheat section is
remaining rows. Performance must be de-rated ac- separated from the cooling section by an air break.
cordingly. This break in the fins eliminates thermal conductance
between the sections and prevents water from mi-
grating to the reheat coil, reducing wasted artificial
loads and providing better dehumidification. Contact
your BAC Representative for performance ratings
and other information.
Swing away fan

K7
Air Discharge Alternatives Motors

On applicable models, air discharge alternatives in- Motor options available include inverter duty, pre-
clude long throw adapters, forty-five degree (45°) mium efficiency, 2-speed/1-winding and 2-speed/2-
down discharge, 90° down discharge (penthouse winding alternatives. Standard voltages include 208,
adapters), and fans selected for external static pres- 230, 460, and 575 for 3-phase, 60-Hz applications.
sure (E.S.P.). 45° and penthouse options feature Contact your BAC Representative for 50-Hertz and
heavy-duty discharge housings that tilt the cast alu- other applications.
minum fans 45° down from the vertical plane. These
housings ship installed for ease of installation. Ac- Electrical
Refrigeration
cess panels are provided on penthouse adapters to Several electrical panel and pre-wiring options are
permit service access. available. Alternatives to the standard non-fused dis-
connect include no wiring, junction boxes, and con-
tactor panels with fused disconnects and with/without
control power transformers. Motors can be wired to
operate individually or in unison. Wiring options are
designed to reduce field installation time, labor, and
cost.
Forty-five degree down
Insulated Pan with Cover

Insulated drain pans have closed-cell insulation and
an outer pan cover. Outer pan covers are construct-
ed of either galvanized steel, stainless steel, or the
BALTIBOND® Corrosion Protection System (see de-
scription for casing alternatives).
Hot Gas Pan

A corrosion resistant stainless steel pan coil, hydro-
statically expanded into aluminum extrusions, deliv-
Electrical panel
ers maximum heat transfer to an aluminum drain pan.
Interconnecting piping is contained within the pan Water Defrost
profile and the right-angle check valve is welded into A water defrost pan is available to wet the entire
place to prevent flanged connections. Side walls are finned surface during water defrost. The material of
at a 90° angle to the pan bottom for easy cleaning. construction matches the selected casing material.
The pan increases the unit height by 6-1/2”.
Legs
Galvanized or stainless steel support legs are avail-
able for floor or beam-mounted installations.
Interconnecting piping within pan profile

K8
Selection Information
Base Rating
The base unit capacities as listed in the tables are based on sensible heat removal using a galvanized steel
coil with either a flooded or a pump recirculated ammonia refrigerant system. Base Ratings are expressed in
BTUH/°F for both frosted and wet conditions. See Tables 1 and 2 below for correction factors and limitations
of various coil materials and refrigerant systems. For more detailed computer-generated performance data and
other applications, please contact your BAC Representative.
Selection Procedure Selection Example

1. Calculate the total required cooling load in Select units for a room load of 900,000 BTUH in a
Btu/hour (BTUH). -10°F freezer using -20°F pump recirculated bottom
feed ammonia and galvanized steel coils. Three (3)
Note: Motor heat of 4,150 BTUH/hp is not included in AL style units are requested to suit the room layout.
the ratings; include this heat load to calculate a total
required cooling load. 1. The net required cooling load per unit equals
(900,000 BTUH / 3 =) 300,000 BTUH per unit.
2. Calculate the temperature difference (TD) between Adding an estimated 15 hp fan motor heat per unit
the design room temperature and the design yields a total cooling load of (300,000 BTUH +
saturation temperature in the evaporator. (15 x 4,150 BTUH/hp)) = 362,250 BTUH per unit.
3. Divide the total required cooling load by the TD to 2. The temperature difference (TD) equals
determine the design BTUH/°F. (-10°F – (-20°F)) =10°F.
4. Divide the design BTUH/°F by the applicable Coil 3. The design BTUH/°F equals (362,250 BTUH /
Material Correction Factor (Table 1) and the 10°F) = 36,225 BTUH/°F.
Refrigerant System Correction Factor (Table 2).
4. The required Base Rating equals (36,225 BTUH/
5. From the table, select a model that meets or °F / 1.00 / 1.00) = 36,225 BTUH/°F.
exceeds the required base rating BTUH/°F.
5. From the model tables, select a model
Note: To prevent moisture carryover on wet applica- AL3S-5483-500L with a frosted Base Rating of
tions where the room temperature exceeds 32°F, 36,225 BTUH/°F. This unit has three fans at 5 hp
select only those models with average face velocities each, yielding 62,250 BTUH motor load, as
less than 620 FPM. estimated. Final selection: Three (3) AL3S-5483-
500-ARB

K9
Correction Factors
The following tables provide correction factors relative to the Base Ratings. When using these tables, please
note the limitations expressed below the tables.
Table 1. Coil Material Correction Factors

Coil Material Correction Factors
Galvanized Steel Tube & Fin 1.00
Refrigeration
Aluminum Tube - Aluminum Fin 1.14
Stainless Steel Tube - Aluminum Fin 1.12
Copper Tube - Aluminum Fin 1.00
Table 2. Refrigerant System Correction Factors

Saturated Suction Temperature (°F)
Refrigerant System
+40°F +20°F 0°F -20°F -40°F
Pump Recirc., Bottom Feed (ARB) 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
Pump Recirc., Top Feed (ART) 1.00 1.00 * * *
Ammonia Flooded (AFL) 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
Direct Expansion (ADX) 0.83 0.83 NA NA NA
Control Pressure Receiver (APT/B) 1.00 1.00 * * *
Direct Expansion (FDX) 0.83 0.83 0.83 * *

R-22
R-134a Pump Recirc., Bottom Feed (FRB) 1.00 1.00 0.95 0.90 0.80
R-404A Pump Recirc., Top Feed (FRT) 1.00 1.00 * * *
R-507
Flooded (FFL) * * * * *
* Consult your local BAC Representative
Pump recirculated refrigerant coils must have a liq- The temperature difference between the air and the
uid feed temperature within 10°F of the coil’s design saturated suction temperature at the coil should be
saturated suction temperature and a feed pressure a minimum of 12°F for ammonia and a minimum of
5 psi above the design saturated suction pressure 10°F for halocarbons. The minimum design evapora-
to achieve these performance ratings. Air defrost tor temperature is +10°F for ammonia and -10°F for
coils should be top feed. Hot gas defrost coils should halocarbon. TEVs must be externally equalized and
be bottom feed, particularly at temperatures below the discharge tube must be removed.
+10°F.
Controlled pressure receiver system coils may re-
Flooded coils have the same ratings as recirculated quire a top feed with a distributor(s). Please contact
refrigerant coils. Flooded coils are bottom feed and your BAC Representative with the design feed tem-
circuited to minimize refrigerant pressure drop. Con- perature and pressure in addition to other design pa-
sult your BAC Representative for flooded halocarbon rameters.
applications.
Brine and other single phase fluid systems are not
Direct expansion (DX) coils must have a liquid rated in this manual. Please contact your local BAC
feed temperature at the thermal expansion valve Representative with the type of fluid, fluid tempera-
(TXV) higher than the coil’s design saturated suction tures, and flow rate in addition to other operating pa-
temperature to achieve these performance ratings. rameters.

K10
AS Engineering Data
Models AS1S-3163 to AS1S-4066
Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions. This handbook includes data current at the time of
publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase.
31”
HANGER CL 40”
28 1/8”
HANGER CL
HINGED
FAN
AIR AS - 31 = 36” *
PANEL
FLOW AS - 36 = 40 1/2” *
AS - 40 = 45” *
* ADD 2 1/2”
FOR OPTIONAL
INSULATED PAN
DRAIN 5 1/2”
57 3/4”
Avg. Est. Shipping Wt.

Capacity Face Fan Fan Fan Face Fin Surf. Coil
Model (BTUH/°F) Airflow Vel. Pwr. Spd. Dia. Area Rows Dens. Area Vol. Galv. Alum. SST-Al
Number Frosted Wet (CFM) (fpm) (HP) (RPM) (in.) (ft2) Deep (fpi) (ft2) (ft3) (lbs.) (lbs.) (lbs.)
AS1S-3163-033L 2,290 2,520 3,900 575 1/3 1140 20 6.8 6 3 451 0.7 724 374 495
AS1S-3163-050L 2,430 - 4,500 664 1/2 1140 20 6.8 6 3 451 0.7 724 374 495
AS1S-3183-033L 2,680 2,950 3,750 553 1/3 1140 20 6.8 8 3 602 1.0 821 405 552
AS1S-3164-033L 2,580 2,840 3,780 557 1/3 1140 20 6.8 6 4 584 0.7 785 388 509
AS1S-3164-050L 2,760 - 4,300 634 1/2 1140 20 6.8 6 4 584 0.7 785 388 509
AS1S-3184-050L 3,210 3,530 4,100 605 1/2 1140 20 6.8 8 4 779 1.0 901 423 571
AS1S-3166-050L - 3,450 4,200 619 1/2 1140 20 6.8 6 6 850 0.7 950 415 536
AS1S-3663-033L 2,670 2,940 4,750 613 1/3 1140 24 7.8 6 3 516 0.8 798 406 543
AS1S-3663-050L 2,900 - 5,600 723 1/2 1140 24 7.8 6 3 516 0.8 798 406 543
AS1S-3683-033L 3,160 3,480 4,500 581 1/3 1140 24 7.8 8 3 688 1.1 909 441 609
AS1S-3683-050L 3,430 - 5,200 671 1/2 1140 24 7.8 8 3 688 1.1 909 441 609
AS1S-3664-033L 3,010 3,310 4,500 581 1/3 1140 24 7.8 6 4 668 0.8 868 421 559
AS1S-3664-050L 3,290 - 5,300 684 1/2 1140 24 7.8 6 4 668 0.8 868 421 559
AS1S-3684-033L 3,500 3,850 4,300 555 1/3 1140 24 7.8 8 4 890 1.1 1,000 462 630
AS1S-3684-050L 3,810 - 4,950 639 1/2 1140 24 7.8 8 4 890 1.1 1,000 462 630
AS1S-3666-050L - 4,070 4,650 600 1/2 1140 24 7.8 6 6 971 0.8 1,055 452 590
AS1S-4063-050L 3,130 - 5,800 665 1/2 1140 24 8.7 6 3 580 0.9 863 428 583
AS1S-4083-050L 3,750 - 5,550 637 1/2 1140 24 8.7 8 3 774 1.2 989 468 657
AS1S-4064-050L 3,570 - 5,580 640 1/2 1140 24 8.7 6 4 751 0.9 942 446 600
AS1S-4084-050L 4,130 4,540 5,250 602 1/2 1140 24 8.7 8 4 1,001 1.2 1,090 492 680
AS1S-4066-050L - 4,590 5,270 604 1/2 1140 24 8.7 6 6 1,092 0.9 1,151 481 635

K11

Refrigeration
62”
HANGER CL 40”
28 1/8”
HANGER CL
AIR AS - 31 = 36” *
FLOW AS - 36 = 40 1/2” *
AS - 40 = 45” *
* ADD 2 1/2”
HINGED FAN FOR OPTIONAL
PANEL (TYP.) INSULATED PAN
88 3/4” DRAIN 5 1/2”

AS2S-3163-033L 4,580 5,040 7,800 575 1/3 1140 20 13.6 6 3 903 1.5 1,232 644 826
AS2S-3163-050L 4,860 - 9,000 664 1/2 1140 20 13.6 6 3 903 1.5 1,232 644 826
AS2S-3183-033L 5,360 5,900 7,500 553 1/3 1140 20 13.6 8 3 1,204 1.9 1,415 703 931
AS2S-3164-033L 5,160 5,680 7,560 557 1/3 1140 20 13.6 6 4 1,168 1.5 1,350 671 853
AS2S-3164-050L 5,520 - 8,600 634 1/2 1140 20 13.6 6 4 1,168 1.5 1,350 671 853
AS2S-3184-050L 6,420 7,060 8,200 605 1/2 1140 20 13.6 8 4 1,558 1.9 1,568 739 968
AS2S-3166-050L - 6,900 8,400 619 1/2 1140 20 13.6 6 6 1,699 1.5 1,660 726 908
AS2S-3663-033L 5,340 5,880 9,500 613 1/3 1140 24 15.5 6 3 1,032 1.7 1,359 699 907
AS2S-3663-050L 5,800 - 11,200 723 1/2 1140 24 15.5 6 3 1,032 1.7 1,359 699 907
AS2S-3683-033L 6,320 6,960 9,000 581 1/3 1140 24 15.5 8 3 1,376 2.2 1,568 766 1,027
AS2S-3683-050L 6,860 - 10,400 671 1/2 1140 24 15.5 8 3 1,376 2.2 1,568 766 1,027
AS2S-3664-033L 6,020 6,620 9,000 581 1/3 1140 24 15.5 6 4 1,335 1.7 1,492 730 938
AS2S-3664-050L 6,580 - 10,600 684 1/2 1140 24 15.5 6 4 1,335 1.7 1,492 730 938
AS2S-3684-033L 7,000 7,700 8,600 555 1/3 1140 24 15.5 8 4 1,780 2.2 1,742 808 1,069
AS2S-3684-050L 7,620 - 9,900 639 1/2 1140 24 15.5 8 4 1,780 2.2 1,742 808 1,069
AS2S-3666-050L - 8,140 9,300 600 1/2 1140 24 15.5 6 6 1,942 1.7 1,844 793 1,000
AS2S-4063-050L 6,260 - 11,600 665 1/2 1140 24 17.4 6 3 1,161 1.9 1,467 737 970
AS2S-4083-050L 7,500 - 11,100 637 1/2 1140 24 17.4 8 3 1,547 2.5 1,702 812 1,105
AS2S-4064-050L 7,140 - 11,160 640 1/2 1140 24 17.4 6 4 1,502 1.9 1,617 772 1,005
AS2S-4084-050L 8,260 9,080 10,500 602 1/2 1140 24 17.4 8 4 2,003 2.5 1,898 859 1,152
AS2S-4066-050L - 9,180 10,540 604 1/2 1140 24 17.4 6 6 2,185 1.9 2,011 842 1,075

K12
AS Engineering Data
93” 40”
HANGER CL
28 1/8”
HANGER CL
AIR AS - 31 = 36” *
FLOW AS - 36 = 40 1/2” *
AS - 40 = 45” *
* ADD 2 1/2”
PANEL (TYP.) INSULATED PAN
DRAIN 5 1/2”
119 3/4”

AS3S-3163-033L 6,870 7,560 11,700 575 1/3 1140 20 20.3 6 3 1,354 2.2 1,741 914 1,157
AS3S-3163-050L 7,290 - 13,500 664 1/2 1140 20 20.3 6 3 1,354 2.2 1,741 914 1,157
AS3S-3183-033L 8,040 8,850 11,250 553 1/3 1140 20 20.3 8 3 1,805 2.9 2,009 1,000 1,310
AS3S-3164-033L 7,740 8,520 11,340 557 1/3 1140 20 20.3 6 4 1,752 2.2 1,914 955 1,198
AS3S-3164-050L 8,280 - 12,900 634 1/2 1140 20 20.3 6 4 1,752 2.2 1,914 955 1,198
AS3S-3184-050L 9,630 10,590 12,300 605 1/2 1140 20 20.3 8 4 2,336 2.9 2,236 1,054 1,364
AS3S-3166-050L - 10,350 12,600 619 1/2 1140 20 20.3 6 6 2,549 2.2 2,370 1,037 1,280
AS3S-3663-033L 8,010 8,820 14,250 613 1/3 1140 24 23.3 6 3 1,547 2.5 1,919 993 1,270
AS3S-3663-050L 8,700 - 16,800 723 1/2 1140 24 23.3 6 3 1,547 2.5 1,919 993 1,270
AS3S-3683-033L 9,480 10,440 13,500 581 1/3 1140 24 23.3 8 3 2,063 3.3 2,226 1,091 1,445
AS3S-3683-050L 10,290 - 15,600 671 1/2 1140 24 23.3 8 3 2,063 3.3 2,226 1,091 1,445
AS3S-3664-033L 9,030 9,930 13,500 581 1/3 1140 24 23.3 6 4 2,003 2.5 2,116 1,040 1,317
AS3S-3664-050L 9,870 - 15,900 684 1/2 1140 24 23.3 6 4 2,003 2.5 2,116 1,040 1,317
AS3S-3684-033L 10,500 11,550 12,900 555 1/3 1140 24 23.3 8 4 2,670 3.3 2,484 1,153 1,507
AS3S-3684-050L 11,430 - 14,850 639 1/2 1140 24 23.3 8 4 2,670 3.3 2,484 1,153 1,507
AS3S-3666-050L - 12,210 13,950 600 1/2 1140 24 23.3 6 6 2,913 2.5 2,634 1,133 1,410
AS3S-4063-050L 9,390 - 17,400 665 1/2 1140 24 26.2 6 3 1,741 2.8 2,071 1,046 1,357
AS3S-4083-050L 11,250 - 16,650 637 1/2 1140 24 26.2 8 3 2,321 3.7 2,416 1,156 1,554
AS3S-4064-050L 10,710 - 16,740 640 1/2 1140 24 26.2 6 4 2,253 2.8 2,292 1,098 1,410
AS3S-4084-050L 12,390 13,620 15,750 602 1/2 1140 24 26.2 8 4 3,004 3.7 2,706 1,226 1,624
AS3S-4066-050L - 13,770 15,810 604 1/2 1140 24 26.2 6 6 3,277 2.8 2,872 1,203 1,515

K13

Refrigeration
40”
62” 62”
HANGER CL HANGER CL 28 1/8”
HANGER CL
AIR AS - 31 = 36” *
FLOW AS - 36 = 40 1/2” *
AS - 40 = 45” *
* ADD 2 1/2”
FOR OPTIONAL
HINGED FAN INSULATED PAN
PANEL (TYP.)
DRAIN 5 1/2”
150 3/4”

AS4S-3163-033L 9,160 10,080 15,600 575 1/3 1140 20 27.1 6 3 1,805 2.9 2,249 1,184 1,488
AS4S-3163-050L 9,720 - 18,000 664 1/2 1140 20 27.1 6 3 1,805 2.9 2,249 1,184 1,488
AS4S-3183-033L 10,720 11,800 15,000 553 1/3 1140 20 27.1 8 3 2,407 3.9 2,603 1,297 1,689
AS4S-3164-033L 10,320 11,360 15,120 557 1/3 1140 20 27.1 6 4 2,336 2.9 2,479 1,239 1,543
AS4S-3164-050L 11,040 - 17,200 634 1/2 1140 20 27.1 6 4 2,336 2.9 2,479 1,239 1,543
AS4S-3184-050L 12,840 14,120 16,400 605 1/2 1140 20 27.1 8 4 3,115 3.9 2,904 1,370 1,761
AS4S-3166-050L - 13,800 16,800 619 1/2 1140 20 27.1 6 6 3,398 2.9 3,080 1,347 1,651
AS4S-3663-033L 10,680 11,760 19,000 613 1/3 1140 24 31.0 6 3 2,063 3.3 2,480 1,287 1,634
AS4S-3663-050L 11,600 - 22,400 723 1/2 1140 24 31.0 6 3 2,063 3.3 2,480 1,287 1,634
AS4S-3683-033L 12,640 13,920 18,000 581 1/3 1140 24 31.0 8 3 2,751 4.4 2,884 1,416 1,863
AS4S-3683-050L 13,720 - 20,800 671 1/2 1140 24 31.0 8 3 2,751 4.4 2,884 1,416 1,863
AS4S-3664-033L 12,040 13,240 18,000 581 1/3 1140 24 31.0 6 4 2,670 3.3 2,741 1,349 1,696
AS4S-3664-050L 13,160 - 21,200 684 1/2 1140 24 31.0 6 4 2,670 3.3 2,741 1,349 1,696
AS4S-3684-033L 14,000 15,400 17,200 555 1/3 1140 24 31.0 8 4 3,560 4.4 3,226 1,499 1,946
AS4S-3684-050L 15,240 - 19,800 639 1/2 1140 24 31.0 8 4 3,560 4.4 3,226 1,499 1,946
AS4S-3666-050L - 16,280 18,600 600 1/2 1140 24 31.0 6 6 3,884 3.3 3,424 1,474 1,821
AS4S-4063-050L 12,520 - 23,200 665 1/2 1140 24 34.9 6 3 2,321 3.7 2,675 1,355 1,745
AS4S-4083-050L 15,000 - 22,200 637 1/2 1140 24 34.9 8 3 3,095 5.0 3,130 1,500 2,003
AS4S-4064-050L 14,280 - 22,320 640 1/2 1140 24 34.9 6 4 3,004 3.7 2,967 1,425 1,815
AS4S-4084-050L 16,520 18,160 21,000 602 1/2 1140 24 34.9 8 4 4,005 5.0 3,514 1,593 2,096
AS4S-4066-050L - 18,360 21,080 604 1/2 1140 24 34.9 6 6 4,369 3.7 3,732 1,565 1,955

K14
AS Engineering Data
31” 93” 31” 40”

HANGER CL HANGER CL HANGER CL
28 1/8”
HANGER CL
AIR AS - 31 = 36” *
FLOW AS - 36 = 40 1/2” *
AS - 40 = 45” *
* ADD 2 1/2”
INSULATED PAN
PANEL (TYP.)
DRAIN 5 1/2”
181 3/4”

AS5S-3163-033L 11,450 12,600 19,500 575 1/3 1140 20 33.9 6 3 2,257 3.6 2,758 1,454 1,819
AS5S-3163-050L 12,150 - 22,500 664 1/2 1140 20 33.9 6 3 2,257 3.6 2,758 1,454 1,819
AS5S-3183-033L 13,400 14,750 18,750 553 1/3 1140 20 33.9 8 3 3,009 4.9 3,197 1,595 2,068
AS5S-3164-033L 12,900 14,200 18,900 557 1/3 1140 20 33.9 6 4 2,920 3.6 3,043 1,522 1,887
AS5S-3164-050L 13,800 - 21,500 634 1/2 1140 20 33.9 6 4 2,920 3.6 3,043 1,522 1,887
AS5S-3184-050L 16,050 17,650 20,500 605 1/2 1140 20 33.9 8 4 3,894 4.9 3,571 1,685 2,158
AS5S-3166-050L - 17,250 21,000 619 1/2 1140 20 33.9 6 6 4,248 3.6 3,790 1,658 2,023
AS5S-3663-033L 13,350 14,700 23,750 613 1/3 1140 24 38.8 6 3 2,579 4.2 3,040 1,581 1,998
AS5S-3663-050L 14,500 - 28,000 723 1/2 1140 24 38.8 6 3 2,579 4.2 3,040 1,581 1,998
AS5S-3683-033L 15,800 17,400 22,500 581 1/3 1140 24 38.8 8 3 3,439 5.5 3,542 1,741 2,282
AS5S-3683-050L 17,150 - 26,000 671 1/2 1140 24 38.8 8 3 3,439 5.5 3,542 1,741 2,282
AS5S-3664-033L 15,050 16,550 22,500 581 1/3 1140 24 38.8 6 4 3,338 4.2 3,365 1,659 2,076
AS5S-3664-050L 16,450 - 26,500 684 1/2 1140 24 38.8 6 4 3,338 4.2 3,365 1,659 2,076
AS5S-3684-033L 17,500 19,250 21,500 555 1/3 1140 24 38.8 8 4 4,450 5.5 3,969 1,845 2,385
AS5S-3684-050L 19,050 - 24,750 639 1/2 1140 24 38.8 8 4 4,450 5.5 3,969 1,845 2,385
AS5S-3666-050L - 20,350 23,250 600 1/2 1140 24 38.8 6 6 4,855 4.2 4,213 1,814 2,231
AS5S-4063-050L 15,650 - 29,000 665 1/2 1140 24 43.6 6 3 2,902 4.7 3,278 1,664 2,132
AS5S-4083-050L 18,750 - 27,750 637 1/2 1140 24 43.6 8 3 3,869 6.2 3,844 1,844 2,452
AS5S-4064-050L 17,850 - 27,900 640 1/2 1140 24 43.6 6 4 3,755 4.7 3,643 1,751 2,220
AS5S-4084-050L 20,650 22,700 26,250 602 1/2 1140 24 43.6 8 4 5,006 6.2 4,322 1,961 2,568
AS5S-4066-050L - 22,950 26,350 604 1/2 1140 24 43.6 6 6 5,461 4.7 4,593 1,926 2,395

K15

40”
28 1/8”
HANGER CL
Refrigeration
AIR AS - 31 = 36” *
FLOW AS - 36 = 40 1/2” *
AS - 40 = 45” *
* ADD 2 1/2”
FOR OPTIONAL
INSULATED PAN
DRAIN 5 1/2”
93” 93”
HANGER CL HANGER CL
HINGED FAN
PANEL (TYP.)
212 3/4”

AS6S-3163-033L 13,740 15,120 23,400 575 1/3 1140 20 40.7 6 3 2,708 4.4 3,266 1,724 2,150
AS6S-3163-050L 14,580 - 27,000 664 1/2 1140 20 40.7 6 3 2,708 4.4 3,266 1,724 2,150
AS6S-3183-033L 16,080 17,700 22,500 553 1/3 1140 20 40.7 8 3 3,611 5.8 3,791 1,892 2,446
AS6S-3164-033L 15,480 17,040 22,680 557 1/3 1140 20 40.7 6 4 3,504 4.4 3,791 1,892 2,446
AS6S-3164-050L 16,560 - 25,800 634 1/2 1140 20 40.7 6 4 3,504 4.4 3,608 1,806 2,232
AS6S-3184-050L 19,260 21,180 24,600 605 1/2 1140 20 40.7 8 4 4,673 5.8 3,608 1,806 2,232
AS6S-3166-050L - 20,700 25,200 619 1/2 1140 20 40.7 6 6 5,097 4.4 4,500 1,969 2,395
AS6S-3663-033L 16,020 17,640 28,500 613 1/3 1140 24 46.5 6 3 3,095 5.0 4,500 1,969 2,395
AS6S-3663-050L 17,400 - 33,600 723 1/2 1140 24 46.5 6 3 3,095 5.0 3,601 1,875 2,361
AS6S-3683-033L 18,960 20,880 27,000 581 1/3 1140 24 46.5 8 3 4,127 6.7 3,601 1,875 2,361
AS6S-3683-050L 20,580 - 31,200 671 1/2 1140 24 46.5 8 3 4,127 6.7 4,201 2,066 2,700
AS6S-3664-033L 18,060 19,860 27,000 581 1/3 1140 24 46.5 6 4 4,005 5.0 4,201 2,066 2,700
AS6S-3664-050L 19,740 - 31,800 684 1/2 1140 24 46.5 6 4 4,005 5.0 3,989 1,968 2,455
AS6S-3684-033L 21,000 23,100 25,800 555 1/3 1140 24 46.5 8 4 5,340 6.7 3,989 1,968 2,455
AS6S-3684-050L 22,860 - 29,700 639 1/2 1140 24 46.5 8 4 5,340 6.7 4,711 2,191 2,824
AS6S-3666-050L - 24,420 27,900 600 1/2 1140 24 46.5 6 6 5,826 5.0 4,711 2,191 2,824
AS6S-4063-050L 18,780 - 34,800 665 1/2 1140 24 52.3 6 3 3,482 5.6 3,882 1,972 2,520
AS6S-4083-050L 22,500 - 33,300 637 1/2 1140 24 52.3 8 3 4,642 7.5 3,882 1,972 2,520
AS6S-4064-050L 21,420 - 33,480 640 1/2 1140 24 52.3 6 4 4,506 5.6 4,318 2,077 2,625
AS6S-4084-050L 24,780 27,240 31,500 602 1/2 1140 24 52.3 8 4 6,008 7.5 4,318 2,077 2,625
AS6S-4066-050L - 27,540 31,620 604 1/2 1140 24 52.3 6 6 6,554 5.6 5,453 2,287 2,834

K16
AS Engineering Data
Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified
dimensions. This handbook includes data current at the
time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the
40”
time of purchase. 28 1/8”

HANGER CL
AIR AS - 31 = 36” *
FLOW AS - 36 = 40 1/2” *
AS - 40 = 45” *
* ADD 2 1/2”
FOR OPTIONAL
INSULATED PAN
DRAIN 5 1/2”
93” 62” 93”

HINGED FAN
PANEL (TYP.)
274 3/4”

AS8S-3163-033L 18,320 20,160 31,200 575 1/3 1140 20 54.3 6 3 3,611 5.8 4,283 2,264 2,813
AS8S-3163-050L 19,440 - 36,000 664 1/2 1140 20 54.3 6 3 3,611 5.8 4,283 2,264 2,813
AS8S-3183-033L 21,440 23,600 30,000 553 1/3 1140 20 54.3 8 3 4,814 7.8 4,979 2,487 3,204
AS8S-3164-033L 20,640 22,720 30,240 557 1/3 1140 20 54.3 6 4 4,673 5.8 4,979 2,487 3,204
AS8S-3164-050L 22,080 - 34,400 634 1/2 1140 20 54.3 6 4 4,673 5.8 4,737 2,373 2,921
AS8S-3184-050L 25,680 28,240 32,800 605 1/2 1140 20 54.3 8 4 6,230 7.8 4,737 2,373 2,921
AS8S-3166-050L - 27,600 33,600 619 1/2 1140 20 54.3 6 6 6,796 5.8 5,920 2,591 3,139
AS8S-3663-033L 21,360 23,520 38,000 613 1/3 1140 24 62.0 6 3 4,127 6.7 5,920 2,591 3,139
AS8S-3663-050L 23,200 - 44,800 723 1/2 1140 24 62.0 6 3 4,127 6.7 4,722 2,462 3,089
AS8S-3683-033L 25,280 27,840 36,000 581 1/3 1140 24 62.0 8 3 5,502 8.9 4,722 2,462 3,089
AS8S-3683-050L 27,440 - 41,600 671 1/2 1140 24 62.0 8 3 5,502 8.9 5,517 2,717 3,536
AS8S-3664-033L 24,080 26,480 36,000 581 1/3 1140 24 62.0 6 4 5,340 6.7 5,517 2,717 3,536
AS8S-3664-050L 26,320 - 42,400 684 1/2 1140 24 62.0 6 4 5,340 6.7 5,238 2,587 3,213
AS8S-3684-033L 28,000 30,800 34,400 555 1/3 1140 24 62.0 8 4 7,120 8.9 5,238 2,587 3,213
AS8S-3684-050L 30,480 - 39,600 639 1/2 1140 24 62.0 8 4 7,120 8.9 6,195 2,882 3,702
AS8S-3666-050L - 32,560 37,200 600 1/2 1140 24 62.0 6 6 7,767 6.7 6,195 2,882 3,702
AS8S-4063-050L 25,040 - 46,400 665 1/2 1140 24 69.8 6 3 4,642 7.5 5,090 2,590 3,294
AS8S-4083-050L 30,000 - 44,400 637 1/2 1140 24 69.8 8 3 6,190 10.0 5,090 2,590 3,294
AS8S-4064-050L 28,560 - 44,640 640 1/2 1140 24 69.8 6 4 6,008 7.5 5,668 2,730 3,434
AS8S-4084-050L 33,040 36,320 42,000 602 1/2 1140 24 69.8 8 4 8,010 10.0 5,668 2,730 3,434
AS8S-4066-050L - 36,720 42,160 604 1/2 1140 24 69.8 6 6 8,738 7.5 7,174 3,010 3,714

K17
AM Engineering Data
Models AM1S-3663 to AM1S-4084
31”
44 1/2” AM - 36 = 51 3/4”
Refrigeration
HANGER CL AM - 40 = 55 1/2”
28 1/8”
HANGER CL 28 1/8”
HANGER CL
HINGED
FAN AIR
PANEL AM - 36 = 40 1/2” *
FLOW
AM - 36 = 40 1/2” *
AM - 40 = 45” *
AM - 40 = 45” *
* ADD 2 1/2”
R
* ADD 2 1/2”
AI
FOR OPTIONAL
OW
FOR OPTIONAL
FL
INSULATED PAN INSULATED PAN
DRAIN DRAIN 5 1/2”

57 3/4” 5 1/2”

Capacity Air- Face Fan Fan Fan Face Fin Surf. Coil
Model (BTUH/°F) flow Vel. Pwr. Spd. Dia. Area Rows Dens. Area Vol. Galv. Alum. SST-Al
AM1S-3663-050L 2,620 2,880 4,570 590 1/2 1140 24 7.8 6 3 516 0.8 858 465 603
AM1S-3663-100H 3,230 - 6,930 894 1 1750 24 7.8 6 3 516 0.8 869 476 614
AM1S-3683-050L 3,100 3,410 4,360 563 1/2 1140 24 7.8 8 3 688 1.1 969 501 668
AM1S-3683-100H 3,940 - 6,700 865 1 1750 24 7.8 8 3 688 1.1 980 512 679
AM1S-3664-050L 2,940 3,230 4,300 555 1/2 1140 24 7.8 6 4 668 0.8 927 481 618
AM1S-3664-100H 3,720 - 6,760 872 1 1750 24 7.8 6 4 668 0.8 938 492 629
AM1S-3684-050L 3,700 4,070 4,740 612 1/2 1140 24 7.8 8 4 890 1.1 1,059 521 689
AM1S-3684-100H 4,420 - 6,400 826 1 1750 24 7.8 8 4 890 1.1 1,070 532 700
AM1S-4063-050L 3,020 3,320 5,350 614 1/2 1140 24 8.7 6 3 580 0.9 923 488 642
AM1S-4063-100H 3,480 - 7,180 824 1 1750 24 8.7 6 3 580 0.9 934 499 653
AM1S-4083-050L 3,590 3,950 5,140 590 1/2 1140 24 8.7 8 3 774 1.2 1,048 528 716
AM1S-4064-100H 4,010 - 6,930 795 1 1750 24 8.7 6 4 751 0.9 1,012 516 671
AM1S-4084-100H 4,730 - 6,600 757 1 1750 24 8.7 8 4 1,001 1.2 1,160 562 750
The models below are based on 0.25” E.S.P. / 45° Down Discharge / Long Throw Adaptors
AM1S-3663-075L-4/F/L 2,670 2,940 4,750 613 3/4 1140 24 7.8 6 3 516 0.8 865 472 610
AM1S-3663-150H-4/F/L 3,100 - 6,400 826 1.5 1750 24 7.8 6 3 516 0.8 903 511 648
AM1S-3683-075L-4/F/L 3,220 3,540 4,600 594 3/4 1140 24 7.8 8 3 688 1.1 976 508 676
AM1S-3683-150H-4/F/L 3,770 - 6,150 794 1.5 1750 24 7.8 8 3 688 1.1 1,015 546 714
AM1S-3664-075L-4/F/L 3,070 3,380 4,630 597 3/4 1140 24 7.8 6 4 668 0.8 935 488 625
AM1S-3664-150H-4/F/L 3,570 - 6,230 804 1.5 1750 24 7.8 6 4 668 0.8 973 526 664
AM1S-3684-075L-4/F/L 3,590 3,950 4,480 578 3/4 1140 24 7.8 8 4 890 1.1 1,066 529 696
AM1S-3684-150H-4/F/L 4,260 - 5,900 761 1.5 1750 24 7.8 8 4 890 1.1 1,105 567 735
AM1S-4063-100L-4/F/L 3,000 - 5,300 608 1 1140 24 8.7 6 3 580 0.9 941 506 660
AM1S-4063-150H-4/F/L 3,340 - 6,600 757 1.5 1750 24 8.7 6 3 580 0.9 969 533 688
AM1S-4083-100L-4/F/L 3,630 3,990 5,140 590 1 1140 24 8.7 8 3 774 1.2 1,066 546 734
AM1S-4083-150H-4/F/L 4,050 - 6,400 734 1.5 1750 24 8.7 8 3 774 1.2 1,094 573 762
AM1S-4064-100L-4/F/L 3,450 3,800 5,200 596 1 1140 24 8.7 6 4 751 0.9 1,019 523 678
AM1S-4064-150H-4/F/L 3,850 - 6,450 740 1.5 1750 24 8.7 6 4 751 0.9 1,047 551 705
AM1S-4084-100L-4/F/L 4,130 4,540 5,200 596 1 1140 24 8.7 8 4 1,001 1.2 1,168 569 758
AM1S-4084-150H-4/F/L 4,560 - 6,200 711 1.5 1750 24 8.7 8 4 1,001 1.2 1,195 597 785

K18
AM Engineering Data
44 1/2”
62”
HANGER CL
28 1/8”
HANGER CL
AIR
AM - 36 = 40 1/2” *
FLOW AM - 40 = 45” *
* ADD 2 1/2”
FOR OPTIONAL
INSULATED PAN
HINGED FAN
PANEL (TYP.)
88 3/4” DRAIN 5 1/2”
NOTE: See page K17 for 45° down-discharge side vew.

AM2S-3663-050L 5,240 5,760 9,140 590 1/2 1140 24 15.5 6 3 1,032 1.7 1,478 818 1,026
AM2S-3663-100H 6,460 - 13,860 894 1 1750 24 15.5 6 3 1,032 1.7 1,500 840 1,048
AM2S-3683-050L 6,200 6,820 8,720 563 1/2 1140 24 15.5 8 3 1,376 2.2 1,687 885 1,146
AM2S-3683-100H 7,880 - 13,400 865 1 1750 24 15.5 8 3 1,376 2.2 1,709 907 1,168
AM2S-3664-050L 5,880 6,460 8,600 555 1/2 1140 24 15.5 6 4 1,335 1.7 1,611 849 1,057
AM2S-3664-100H 7,440 - 13,520 872 1 1750 24 15.5 6 4 1,335 1.7 1,633 871 1,079
AM2S-3684-050L 7,400 8,140 9,480 612 1/2 1140 24 15.5 8 4 1,780 2.2 1,861 927 1,188
AM2S-3684-100H 8,840 - 12,800 826 1 1750 24 15.5 8 4 1,780 2.2 1,883 949 1,210
AM2S-4063-050L 6,040 6,640 10,700 614 1/2 1140 24 17.4 6 3 1,161 1.9 1,586 856 1,089
AM2S-4063-100H 6,960 - 14,360 824 1 1750 24 17.4 6 3 1,161 1.9 1,608 878 1,111
AM2S-4083-050L 7,180 7,900 10,280 590 1/2 1140 24 17.4 8 3 1,547 2.5 1,821 931 1,224
AM2S-4064-100H 8,020 - 13,860 795 1 1750 24 17.4 6 4 1,502 1.9 1,758 913 1,146
AM2S-4084-100H 9,460 - 13,200 757 1 1750 24 17.4 8 4 2,003 2.5 2,039 1,000 1,293
AM2S-3663-075L-4/F/L 5,340 5,880 9,500 613 3/4 1140 24 15.5 6 3 1,032 1.7 1,492 833 1,040
AM2S-3663-150H-4/F/L 6,200 - 12,800 826 1.5 1750 24 15.5 6 3 1,032 1.7 1,569 910 1,117
AM2S-3683-075L-4/F/L 6,440 7,080 9,200 594 3/4 1140 24 15.5 8 3 1,376 2.2 1,701 900 1,160
AM2S-3683-150H-4/F/L 7,540 - 12,300 794 1.5 1750 24 15.5 8 3 1,376 2.2 1,778 977 1,237
AM2S-3664-075L-4/F/L 6,140 6,760 9,260 597 3/4 1140 24 15.5 6 4 1,335 1.7 1,625 864 1,071
AM2S-3664-150H-4/F/L 7,140 - 12,460 804 1.5 1750 24 15.5 6 4 1,335 1.7 1,702 941 1,148
AM2S-3684-075L-4/F/L 7,180 7,900 8,960 578 3/4 1140 24 15.5 8 4 1,780 2.2 1,875 941 1,202
AM2S-3684-150H-4/F/L 8,520 - 11,800 761 1.5 1750 24 15.5 8 4 1,780 2.2 1,952 1,018 1,279
AM2S-4063-100L-4/F/L 6,000 - 10,600 608 1 1140 24 17.4 6 3 1,161 1.9 1,622 892 1,125
AM2S-4063-150H-4/F/L 6,680 - 13,200 757 1.5 1750 24 17.4 6 3 1,161 1.9 1,677 947 1,180
AM2S-4083-100L-4/F/L 7,260 7,980 10,280 590 1 1140 24 17.4 8 3 1,547 2.5 1,858 968 1,261
AM2S-4083-150H-4/F/L 8,100 - 12,800 734 1.5 1750 24 17.4 8 3 1,547 2.5 1,913 1,023 1,316
AM2S-4064-100L-4/F/L 6,900 7,600 10,400 596 1 1140 24 17.4 6 4 1,502 1.9 1,772 927 1,160
AM2S-4064-150H-4/F/L 7,700 - 12,900 740 1.5 1750 24 17.4 6 4 1,502 1.9 1,827 982 1,215
AM2S-4084-100L-4/F/L 8,260 9,080 10,400 596 1 1140 24 17.4 8 4 2,003 2.5 2,053 1,014 1,307
AM2S-4084-150H-4/F/L 9,120 - 12,400 711 1.5 1750 24 17.4 8 4 2,003 2.5 2,108 1,069 1,362

K19

93” 44 1/2”
HANGER CL
28 1/8”
Refrigeration
HANGER CL
AIR
AM - 36 = 40 1/2” *
FLOW AM - 40 = 45” *
* ADD 2 1/2”
FOR OPTIONAL
INSULATED PAN
HINGED FAN
PANEL (TYP.)
DRAIN 5 1/2”
119 3/4”

AM3S-3663-050L 7,860 8,640 13,710 590 1/2 1140 24 23.3 6 3 1,547 2.5 2,098 1,172 1,449
AM3S-3663-100H 9,690 - 20,790 894 1 1750 24 23.3 6 3 1,547 2.5 2,131 1,205 1,482
AM3S-3683-050L 9,300 10,230 13,080 563 1/2 1140 24 23.3 8 3 2,063 3.3 2,404 1,270 1,624
AM3S-3683-100H 11,820 - 20,100 865 1 1750 24 23.3 8 3 2,063 3.3 2,437 1,303 1,657
AM3S-3664-050L 8,820 9,690 12,900 555 1/2 1140 24 23.3 6 4 2,003 2.5 2,295 1,218 1,496
AM3S-3664-100H 11,160 - 20,280 872 1 1750 24 23.3 6 4 2,003 2.5 2,328 1,251 1,529
AM3S-3684-050L 11,100 12,210 14,220 612 1/2 1140 24 23.3 8 4 2,670 3.3 2,663 1,332 1,686
AM3S-3684-100H 13,260 - 19,200 826 1 1750 24 23.3 8 4 2,670 3.3 2,696 1,365 1,719
AM3S-4063-050L 9,060 9,960 16,050 614 1/2 1140 24 26.2 6 3 1,741 2.8 2,249 1,224 1,536
AM3S-4063-100H 10,440 - 21,540 824 1 1750 24 26.2 6 3 1,741 2.8 2,282 1,257 1,569
AM3S-4083-050L 10,770 11,850 15,420 590 1/2 1140 24 26.2 8 3 2,321 3.7 2,595 1,335 1,733
AM3S-4064-100H 12,030 - 20,790 795 1 1750 24 26.2 6 4 2,253 2.8 2,504 1,310 1,621
AM3S-4084-100H 14,190 - 19,800 757 1 1750 24 26.2 8 4 3,004 3.7 2,917 1,438 1,835
AM3S-3663-075L-4/F/L 8,010 8,820 14,250 613 3/4 1140 24 23.3 6 3 1,547 2.5 2,119 1,193 1,470
AM3S-3663-150H-4/F/L 9,300 - 19,200 826 1.5 1750 24 23.3 6 3 1,547 2.5 2,235 1,309 1,586
AM3S-3683-075L-4/F/L 9,660 10,620 13,800 594 3/4 1140 24 23.3 8 3 2,063 3.3 2,426 1,291 1,645
AM3S-3683-150H-4/F/L 11,310 - 18,450 794 1.5 1750 24 23.3 8 3 2,063 3.3 2,541 1,407 1,761
AM3S-3664-075L-4/F/L 9,210 10,140 13,890 597 3/4 1140 24 23.3 6 4 2,003 2.5 2,316 1,240 1,517
AM3S-3664-150H-4/F/L 10,710 - 18,690 804 1.5 1750 24 23.3 6 4 2,003 2.5 2,432 1,355 1,633
AM3S-3684-075L-4/F/L 10,770 11,850 13,440 578 3/4 1140 24 23.3 8 4 2,670 3.3 2,684 1,353 1,707
AM3S-3684-150H-4/F/L 12,780 - 17,700 761 1.5 1750 24 23.3 8 4 2,670 3.3 2,800 1,469 1,823
AM3S-4063-100L-4/F/L 9,000 - 15,900 608 1 1140 24 26.2 6 3 1,741 2.8 2,304 1,279 1,590
AM3S-4063-150H-4/F/L 10,020 - 19,800 757 1.5 1750 24 26.2 6 3 1,741 2.8 2,386 1,361 1,673
AM3S-4083-100L-4/F/L 10,890 11,970 15,420 590 1 1140 24 26.2 8 3 2,321 3.7 2,649 1,389 1,787
AM3S-4083-150H-4/F/L 12,150 - 19,200 734 1.5 1750 24 26.2 8 3 2,321 3.7 2,732 1,472 1,870
AM3S-4064-100L-4/F/L 10,350 11,400 15,600 596 1 1140 24 26.2 6 4 2,253 2.8 2,525 1,331 1,643
AM3S-4064-150H-4/F/L 11,550 - 19,350 740 1.5 1750 24 26.2 6 4 2,253 2.8 2,608 1,414 1,725
AM3S-4084-100L-4/F/L 12,390 13,620 15,600 596 1 1140 24 26.2 8 4 3,004 3.7 2,939 1,459 1,857
AM3S-4084-150H-4/F/L 13,680 - 18,600 711 1.5 1750 24 26.2 8 4 3,004 3.7 3,021 1,542 1,940

K20
AM Engineering Data
62” 62” 44 1/2”

HANGER CL HANGER CL
28 1/8”
HANGER CL
AIR
AM - 36 = 40 1/2” *
FLOW AM - 40 = 45” *
* ADD 2 1/2”
FOR OPTIONAL
HINGED FAN INSULATED PAN
PANEL (TYP.)
150 3/4” DRAIN 5 1/2”

AM4S-3663-050L 10,480 11,520 18,280 590 1/2 1140 24 31.0 6 3 2,063 3.3 2,718 1,525 1,872
AM4S-3663-100H 12,920 - 27,720 894 1 1750 24 31.0 6 3 2,063 3.3 2,762 1,569 1,916
AM4S-3683-050L 12,400 13,640 17,440 563 1/2 1140 24 31.0 8 3 2,751 4.4 3,122 1,654 2,101
AM4S-3683-100H 15,760 - 26,800 865 1 1750 24 31.0 8 3 2,751 4.4 3,166 1,698 2,145
AM4S-3664-050L 11,760 12,920 17,200 555 1/2 1140 24 31.0 6 4 2,670 3.3 2,979 1,587 1,934
AM4S-3664-100H 14,880 - 27,040 872 1 1750 24 31.0 6 4 2,670 3.3 3,023 1,631 1,978
AM4S-3684-050L 14,800 16,280 18,960 612 1/2 1140 24 31.0 8 4 3,560 4.4 3,464 1,737 2,184
AM4S-3684-100H 17,680 - 25,600 826 1 1750 24 31.0 8 4 3,560 4.4 3,508 1,781 2,228
AM4S-4063-050L 12,080 13,280 21,400 614 1/2 1140 24 34.9 6 3 2,321 3.7 2,913 1,593 1,983
AM4S-4063-100H 13,920 - 28,720 824 1 1750 24 34.9 6 3 2,321 3.7 2,957 1,637 2,027
AM4S-4083-050L 14,360 15,800 20,560 590 1/2 1140 24 34.9 8 3 3,095 5.0 3,368 1,738 2,241
AM4S-4064-100H 16,040 - 27,720 795 1 1750 24 34.9 6 4 3,004 3.7 3,249 1,707 2,097
AM4S-4084-100H 18,920 - 26,400 757 1 1750 24 34.9 8 4 4,005 5.0 3,796 1,875 2,378
AM4S-3663-075L-4/F/L 10,680 11,760 19,000 613 3/4 1140 24 31.0 6 3 2,063 3.3 2,746 1,554 1,901
AM4S-3663-150H-4/F/L 12,400 - 25,600 826 1.5 1750 24 31.0 6 3 2,063 3.3 2,900 1,708 2,055
AM4S-3683-075L-4/F/L 12,880 14,160 18,400 594 3/4 1140 24 31.0 8 3 2,751 4.4 3,151 1,683 2,130
AM4S-3683-150H-4/F/L 15,080 - 24,600 794 1.5 1750 24 31.0 8 3 2,751 4.4 3,305 1,837 2,284
AM4S-3664-075L-4/F/L 12,280 13,520 18,520 597 3/4 1140 24 31.0 6 4 2,670 3.3 3,007 1,616 1,963
AM4S-3664-150H-4/F/L 14,280 - 24,920 804 1.5 1750 24 31.0 6 4 2,670 3.3 3,161 1,770 2,117
AM4S-3684-075L-4/F/L 14,360 15,800 17,920 578 3/4 1140 24 31.0 8 4 3,560 4.4 3,493 1,766 2,213
AM4S-3684-150H-4/F/L 17,040 - 23,600 761 1.5 1750 24 31.0 8 4 3,560 4.4 3,647 1,920 2,367
AM4S-4063-100L-4/F/L 12,000 - 21,200 608 1 1140 24 34.9 6 3 2,321 3.7 2,985 1,665 2,056
AM4S-4063-150H-4/F/L 13,360 - 26,400 757 1.5 1750 24 34.9 6 3 2,321 3.7 3,095 1,775 2,166
AM4S-4083-100L-4/F/L 14,520 15,960 20,560 590 1 1140 24 34.9 8 3 3,095 5.0 3,441 1,811 2,313
AM4S-4083-150H-4/F/L 16,200 - 25,600 734 1.5 1750 24 34.9 8 3 3,095 5.0 3,551 1,921 2,423
AM4S-4064-100L-4/F/L 13,800 15,200 20,800 596 1 1140 24 34.9 6 4 3,004 3.7 3,278 1,735 2,125
AM4S-4064-150H-4/F/L 15,400 - 25,800 740 1.5 1750 24 34.9 6 4 3,004 3.7 3,388 1,845 2,235
AM4S-4084-100L-4/F/L 16,520 18,160 20,800 596 1 1140 24 34.9 8 4 4,005 5.0 3,825 1,904 2,407
AM4S-4084-150H-4/F/L 18,240 - 24,800 711 1.5 1750 24 34.9 8 4 4,005 5.0 3,935 2,014 2,517

K21

31” 93” 31”

Refrigeration
HINGED FAN
PANEL (TYP.)
181 3/4”

AM5S-3663-050L 13,100 14,400 22,850 590 1/2 1140 24 38.8 6 3 2,579 4.2 3,338 1,878 2,295
AM5S-3663-100H 16,150 - 34,650 894 1 1750 24 38.8 6 3 2,579 4.2 3,393 1,933 2,350
AM5S-3683-050L 15,500 17,050 21,800 563 1/2 1140 24 38.8 8 3 3,439 5.5 3,840 2,039 2,579
AM5S-3683-100H 19,700 - 33,500 865 1 1750 24 38.8 8 3 3,439 5.5 3,895 2,094 2,634
AM5S-3664-050L 14,700 16,150 21,500 555 1/2 1140 24 38.8 6 4 3,338 4.2 3,662 1,956 2,373
AM5S-3664-100H 18,600 - 33,800 872 1 1750 24 38.8 6 4 3,338 4.2 3,717 2,011 2,428
AM5S-3684-050L 18,500 20,350 23,700 612 1/2 1140 24 38.8 8 4 4,450 5.5 4,266 2,142 2,683
AM5S-3684-100H 22,100 - 32,000 826 1 1750 24 38.8 8 4 4,450 5.5 4,321 2,197 2,738
AM5S-4063-050L 15,100 16,600 26,750 614 1/2 1140 24 43.6 6 3 2,902 4.7 3,576 1,961 2,430
AM5S-4063-100H 17,400 - 35,900 824 1 1750 24 43.6 6 3 2,902 4.7 3,631 2,016 2,485
AM5S-4083-050L 17,950 19,750 25,700 590 1/2 1140 24 43.6 8 3 3,869 6.2 4,141 2,142 2,749
AM5S-4064-100H 20,050 - 34,650 795 1 1750 24 43.6 6 4 3,755 4.7 3,995 2,103 2,572
AM5S-4084-100H 23,650 - 33,000 757 1 1750 24 43.6 8 4 5,006 6.2 4,674 2,313 2,921
AM5S-3663-075L-4/F/L 13,350 14,700 23,750 613 3/4 1140 24 38.8 6 3 2,579 4.2 3,373 1,914 2,331
AM5S-3663-150H-4/F/L 15,500 - 32,000 826 1.5 1750 24 38.8 6 3 2,579 4.2 3,566 2,107 2,524
AM5S-3683-075L-4/F/L 16,100 17,700 23,000 594 3/4 1140 24 38.8 8 3 3,439 5.5 3,876 2,075 2,615
AM5S-3683-150H-4/F/L 18,850 - 30,750 794 1.5 1750 24 38.8 8 3 3,439 5.5 4,068 2,267 2,807
AM5S-3664-075L-4/F/L 15,350 16,900 23,150 597 3/4 1140 24 38.8 6 4 3,338 4.2 3,698 1,992 2,409
AM5S-3664-150H-4/F/L 17,850 - 31,150 804 1.5 1750 24 38.8 6 4 3,338 4.2 3,891 2,184 2,601
AM5S-3684-075L-4/F/L 17,950 19,750 22,400 578 3/4 1140 24 38.8 8 4 4,450 5.5 4,302 2,178 2,719
AM5S-3684-150H-4/F/L 21,300 - 29,500 761 1.5 1750 24 38.8 8 4 4,450 5.5 4,494 2,371 2,911
AM5S-4063-100L-4/F/L 15,000 - 26,500 608 1 1140 24 43.6 6 3 2,902 4.7 3,667 2,052 2,521
AM5S-4063-150H-4/F/L 16,700 - 33,000 757 1.5 1750 24 43.6 6 3 2,902 4.7 3,804 2,189 2,658
AM5S-4083-100L-4/F/L 18,150 19,950 25,700 590 1 1140 24 43.6 8 3 3,869 6.2 4,232 2,233 2,840
AM5S-4083-150H-4/F/L 20,250 - 32,000 734 1.5 1750 24 43.6 8 3 3,869 6.2 4,369 2,370 2,977
AM5S-4064-100L-4/F/L 17,250 19,000 26,000 596 1 1140 24 43.6 6 4 3,755 4.7 4,031 2,139 2,608
AM5S-4064-150H-4/F/L 19,250 - 32,250 740 1.5 1750 24 43.6 6 4 3,755 4.7 4,168 2,277 2,745
AM5S-4084-100L-4/F/L 20,650 22,700 26,000 596 1 1140 24 43.6 8 4 5,006 6.2 4,710 2,349 2,956
AM5S-4084-150H-4/F/L 22,800 - 31,000 711 1.5 1750 24 43.6 8 4 5,006 6.2 4,848 2,487 3,094

K22
AM Engineering Data
93” 93”
HANGER CL HANGER CL
HINGED FAN
PANEL (TYP.)
212 3/4”
NOTE: See page K17 for 45° down-discharge and standard side views.
AM6S-3663-050L 15,720 17,280 27,420 590 1/2 1140 24 46.5 6 3 3,095 5.0 5,453 2,287 2,834
AM6S-3663-100H 19,380 - 41,580 894 1 1750 24 46.5 6 3 3,095 5.0 4,023 2,298 2,784
AM6S-3683-050L 18,600 20,460 26,160 563 1/2 1140 24 46.5 8 3 4,127 6.7 4,023 2,298 2,784
AM6S-3683-100H 23,640 - 40,200 865 1 1750 24 46.5 8 3 4,127 6.7 4,624 2,489 3,123
AM6S-3664-050L 17,640 19,380 25,800 555 1/2 1140 24 46.5 6 4 4,005 5.0 4,624 2,489 3,123
AM6S-3664-100H 22,320 - 40,560 872 1 1750 24 46.5 6 4 4,005 5.0 4,412 2,391 2,878
AM6S-3684-050L 22,200 24,420 28,440 612 1/2 1140 24 46.5 8 4 5,340 6.7 4,412 2,391 2,878
AM6S-3684-100H 26,520 - 38,400 826 1 1750 24 46.5 8 4 5,340 6.7 5,134 2,614 3,247
AM6S-4063-050L 18,120 19,920 32,100 614 1/2 1140 24 52.3 6 3 3,482 5.6 5,134 2,614 3,247
AM6S-4063-100H 20,880 - 43,080 824 1 1750 24 52.3 6 3 3,482 5.6 4,305 2,395 2,943
AM6S-4083-050L 21,540 23,700 30,840 590 1/2 1140 24 52.3 8 3 4,642 7.5 4,305 2,395 2,943
AM6S-4064-100H 24,060 - 41,580 795 1 1750 24 52.3 6 4 4,506 5.6 4,741 2,500 3,047
AM6S-4084-100H 28,380 - 39,600 757 1 1750 24 52.3 8 4 6,008 7.5 4,741 2,500 3,047
AM6S-3663-075L-4/F/L 16,020 17,640 28,500 613 3/4 1140 24 46.5 6 3 3,095 5.0 4,001 2,275 2,761
AM6S-3663-150H-4/F/L 18,600 - 38,400 826 1.5 1750 24 46.5 6 3 3,095 5.0 4,001 2,275 2,761
AM6S-3683-075L-4/F/L 19,320 21,240 27,600 594 3/4 1140 24 46.5 8 3 4,127 6.7 4,601 2,466 3,100
AM6S-3683-150H-4/F/L 22,620 - 36,900 794 1.5 1750 24 46.5 8 3 4,127 6.7 4,601 2,466 3,100
AM6S-3664-075L-4/F/L 18,420 20,280 27,780 597 3/4 1140 24 46.5 6 4 4,005 5.0 4,389 2,368 2,855
AM6S-3664-150H-4/F/L 21,420 - 37,380 804 1.5 1750 24 46.5 6 4 4,005 5.0 4,389 2,368 2,855
AM6S-3684-075L-4/F/L 21,540 23,700 26,880 578 3/4 1140 24 46.5 8 4 5,340 6.7 5,111 2,591 3,224
AM6S-3684-150H-4/F/L 25,560 - 35,400 761 1.5 1750 24 46.5 8 4 5,340 6.7 5,111 2,591 3,224
AM6S-4063-100L-4/F/L 18,000 - 31,800 608 1 1140 24 52.3 6 3 3,482 5.6 4,348 2,438 2,986
AM6S-4063-150H-4/F/L 20,040 - 39,600 757 1.5 1750 24 52.3 6 3 3,482 5.6 4,348 2,438 2,986
AM6S-4083-100L-4/F/L 21,780 23,940 30,840 590 1 1140 24 52.3 8 3 4,642 7.5 5,023 2,654 3,366
AM6S-4083-150H-4/F/L 24,300 - 38,400 734 1.5 1750 24 52.3 8 3 4,642 7.5 5,023 2,654 3,366
AM6S-4064-100L-4/F/L 20,700 22,800 31,200 596 1 1140 24 52.3 6 4 4,506 5.6 4,784 2,543 3,091
AM6S-4064-150H-4/F/L 23,100 - 38,700 740 1.5 1750 24 52.3 6 4 4,506 5.6 4,784 2,543 3,091
AM6S-4084-100L-4/F/L 24,780 27,240 31,200 596 1 1140 24 52.3 8 4 6,008 7.5 5,596 2,794 3,506
AM6S-4084-150H-4/F/L 27,360 - 37,200 711 1.5 1750 24 52.3 8 4 6,008 7.5 5,596 2,794 3,506

K23

93” 62” 93”
Refrigeration
HINGED FAN
PANEL (TYP.)
274 3/4”
NOTE: See page K17 for 45° down-discharge and standard side views.

AM8S-3663-050L 20,960 23,040 36,560 590 1/2 1140 24 62.0 6 3 4,127 6.7 7,174 3,010 3,714
AM8S-3663-100H 25,840 - 55,440 894 1 1750 24 62.0 6 3 4,127 6.7 5,285 3,026 3,653
AM8S-3683-050L 24,800 27,280 34,880 563 1/2 1140 24 62.0 8 3 5,502 8.9 5,285 3,026 3,653
AM8S-3683-100H 31,520 - 53,600 865 1 1750 24 62.0 8 3 5,502 8.9 6,081 3,280 4,100
AM8S-3664-050L 23,520 25,840 34,400 555 1/2 1140 24 62.0 6 4 5,340 6.7 6,081 3,280 4,100
AM8S-3664-100H 29,760 - 54,080 872 1 1750 24 62.0 6 4 5,340 6.7 5,802 3,151 3,777
AM8S-3684-050L 29,600 32,560 37,920 612 1/2 1140 24 62.0 8 4 7,120 8.9 5,802 3,151 3,777
AM8S-3684-100H 35,360 - 51,200 826 1 1750 24 62.0 8 4 7,120 8.9 6,759 3,446 4,266
AM8S-4063-050L 24,160 26,560 42,800 614 1/2 1140 24 69.8 6 3 4,642 7.5 6,759 3,446 4,266
AM8S-4063-100H 27,840 - 57,440 824 1 1750 24 69.8 6 3 4,642 7.5 5,654 3,154 3,858
AM8S-4083-050L 28,720 31,600 41,120 590 1/2 1140 24 69.8 8 3 6,190 10.0 5,654 3,154 3,858
AM8S-4064-100H 32,080 - 55,440 795 1 1750 24 69.8 6 4 6,008 7.5 6,232 3,294 3,998
AM8S-4084-100H 37,840 - 52,800 757 1 1750 24 69.8 8 4 8,010 10.0 6,232 3,294 3,998
AM8S-3663-075L-4/F/L 21,360 23,520 38,000 613 3/4 1140 24 62.0 6 3 4,127 6.7 5,255 2,996 3,622
AM8S-3663-150H-4/F/L 24,800 - 51,200 826 1.5 1750 24 62.0 6 3 4,127 6.7 5,255 2,996 3,622
AM8S-3683-075L-4/F/L 25,760 28,320 36,800 594 3/4 1140 24 62.0 8 3 5,502 8.9 6,051 3,250 4,069
AM8S-3683-150H-4/F/L 30,160 - 49,200 794 1.5 1750 24 62.0 8 3 5,502 8.9 6,051 3,250 4,069
AM8S-3664-075L-4/F/L 24,560 27,040 37,040 597 3/4 1140 24 62.0 6 4 5,340 6.7 5,771 3,120 3,746
AM8S-3664-150H-4/F/L 28,560 - 49,840 804 1.5 1750 24 62.0 6 4 5,340 6.7 5,771 3,120 3,746
AM8S-3684-075L-4/F/L 28,720 31,600 35,840 578 3/4 1140 24 62.0 8 4 7,120 8.9 6,729 3,416 4,235
AM8S-3684-150H-4/F/L 34,080 - 47,200 761 1.5 1750 24 62.0 8 4 7,120 8.9 6,729 3,416 4,235
AM8S-4063-100L-4/F/L 24,000 - 42,400 608 1 1140 24 69.8 6 3 4,642 7.5 5,711 3,211 3,916
AM8S-4063-150H-4/F/L 26,720 - 52,800 757 1.5 1750 24 69.8 6 3 4,642 7.5 5,711 3,211 3,916
AM8S-4083-100L-4/F/L 29,040 31,920 41,120 590 1 1140 24 69.8 8 3 6,190 10.0 6,606 3,497 4,419
AM8S-4083-150H-4/F/L 32,400 - 51,200 734 1.5 1750 24 69.8 8 3 6,190 10.0 6,606 3,497 4,419
AM8S-4064-100L-4/F/L 27,600 30,400 41,600 596 1 1140 24 69.8 6 4 6,008 7.5 6,290 3,351 4,056
AM8S-4064-150H-4/F/L 30,800 - 51,600 740 1.5 1750 24 69.8 6 4 6,008 7.5 6,290 3,351 4,056
AM8S-4084-100L-4/F/L 33,040 36,320 41,600 596 1 1140 24 69.8 8 4 8,010 10.0 7,367 3,684 4,606
AM8S-4084-150H-4/F/L 36,480 - 49,600 711 1.5 1750 24 69.8 8 4 8,010 10.0 7,367 3,684 4,606

K24
AL Engineering Data
Models AL1S-4563 to AL1S-63104
0” ESP 0.25” E.S.P. / 45° Down / Long Throw 0.5” ESP / 90° Down (Penthouse)
Avg.
Face Fan Fan Fan Capacity Face Fan Fan Capacity Airl- Fan Fan Capacity
Model Area Pwr. Spd. Dia. (BTUH/°F) Airflow Velocity Pwr. Spd. (BTUH/°F) fow Pwr. Spd. (BTUH/°F) Airlfow
Number (ft2) (HP) (RPM) (in.) Frosted Wet (CFM) (fpm) (HP) (RPM) Frosted Wet (CFM) (HP) (RPM) Frosted Wet (CFM)
AL1S-4563 19.4 1 1140 30 6,370 7,010 10,800 557 1.5 1140 6,280 6,910 10,600 2 1140 6,080 6,690 10,000
AL1S-4583 19.4 1 1140 30 7,560 8,320 10,400 537 1.5 1140 7,560 8,320 10,400 2 1140 7,150 7,870 9,500
AL1S-45103 19.4 1.5 1140 30 9,030 9,930 11,200 578 2 1140 8,930 9,820 11,000 3 1140 8,930 9,820 11,000
AL1S-4564 19.4 1 1140 30 7,130 7,840 10,200 526 2 1140 7,460 8,210 11,000 3 1140 7,460 8,210 11,000
AL1S-4584 19.4 1.5 1140 30 9,090 10,000 11,400 588 2 1140 8,850 9,740 11,000 3 1140 8,930 9,820 11,100
AL1S-45104 19.4 2 1140 30 10,210 11,230 11,400 588 2 1140 9,770 10,750 10,600 3 1140 9,550 10,510 10,300
AL1S-4563 19.4 3 1140 30 7,520 - 14,800 764 5 1750 7,750 - 16,000 5 1750 7,560 - 15,200
AL1S-4583 19.4 3 1140 30 9,050 - 14,300 738 5 1750 9,510 - 15,700 5 1750 9,280 - 15,000
AL1S-45103 19.4 3 1140 30 10,250 - 13,800 712 5 1750 11,020 - 15,700 5 1750 10,640 - 14,700
AL1S-4564 19.4 3 1140 30 8,540 - 14,300 738 5 1750 8,990 - 15,800 5 1750 8,820 - 15,200
AL1S-4584 19.4 3 1140 30 10,230 - 14,000 723 5 1750 10,850 - 15,500 5 1750 10,660 - 15,000
AL1S-45104 19.4 3 1140 30 11,300 - 13,300 686 5 1750 12,280 - 15,200 5 1750 11,820 - 14,300
AL1S-4563 19.4 7.5 1750 30 8,490 - 19,500 1,006 7.5 1750 8,410 - 19,000 7.5 1750 8,230 - 18,200
AL1S-4583 19.4 7.5 1750 30 10,600 - 19,300 996 7.5 1750 10,400 - 18,700 7.5 1750 10,210 - 18,000
AL1S-45103 19.4 7.5 1750 30 12,210 - 18,800 970 7.5 1750 11,970 - 18,100 7.5 1750 11,720 - 17,400
AL1S-4564 19.4 7.5 1750 30 9,940 - 19,300 996 7.5 1750 9,770 - 18,700 7.5 1750 9,610 - 18,000
AL1S-4584 19.4 7.5 1750 30 12,070 - 18,900 975 7.5 1750 11,780 - 18,200 7.5 1750 11,630 - 17,600
AL1S-45104 19.4 7.5 1750 30 13,740 - 18,300 945 7.5 1750 13,470 - 17,700 7.5 1750 13,140 - 17,000
AL1S-4963 21.3 0.75 1140 36 6,950 7,650 11,800 554 1.5 1140 7,290 8,020 12,700 2 1140 7,160 7,880 12,500
AL1S-4983 21.3 0.75 1140 36 8,330 9,160 11,500 540 1.5 1140 8,650 9,520 12,300 2 1140 8,550 9,410 12,000
AL1S-49103 21.3 0.75 1140 36 9,040 9,940 10,500 493 2 1140 10,170 11,190 12,700 3 1140 10,170 11,190 12,700
AL1S-4964 21.3 0.75 1140 36 7,820 8,600 11,200 526 1.5 1140 8,250 9,080 12,300 2 1140 8,140 8,950 12,000
AL1S-4984 21.3 0.75 1140 36 9,190 10,110 11,000 516 1.5 1140 9,700 10,670 12,000 2 1140 9,610 10,570 11,800
AL1S-49104 21.3 1.5 1140 36 11,170 12,290 12,400 582 2 1140 11,230 12,350 12,500 3 1140 11,230 12,350 12,500
AL1S-4963 21.3 3 1140 36 8,570 - 17,800 835 3 1140 8,460 - 17,300 5 1140 8,400 - 17,100
AL1S-4983 21.3 3 1140 36 10,400 - 16,900 793 3 1140 10,210 - 16,500 5 1140 10,570 - 17,600
AL1S-49103 21.3 3 1140 36 12,150 - 17,300 812 5 1140 12,060 - 17,000 5 1750 12,490 - 18,100
AL1S-4964 21.3 3 1140 36 9,800 - 17,000 798 3 1140 9,680 - 16,600 5 1140 9,970 - 17,700
AL1S-4984 21.3 3 1140 36 11,940 - 17,000 798 5 1140 12,040 - 17,300 5 1750 12,360 - 18,200
AL1S-49104 21.3 5 1140 36 13,900 - 17,500 821 5 1140 13,750 - 17,200 5 1750 13,850 - 17,400
AL1S-4963 21.3 5 1140 36 9,400 - 21,600 1,013 5 1750 9,250 - 21,000 5 1750 8,970 - 19,600
AL1S-4983 21.3 5 1140 36 11,550 - 20,900 981 7.5 1750 12,190 - 23,400 7.5 1750 11,890 - 22,300
AL1S-49103 21.3 7.5 1140 36 13,870 - 22,000 1,032 7.5 1750 13,960 - 22,300 7.5 1750 13,600 - 21,000
AL1S-4964 21.3 5 1140 36 10,850 - 21,000 985 7.5 1750 11,420 - 23,500 7.5 1750 11,210 - 22,400
AL1S-4984 21.3 7.5 1140 36 13,790 - 22,500 1,056 7.5 1750 13,810 - 22,600 7.5 1750 13,490 - 21,500
AL1S-49104 21.3 7.5 1140 36 15,450 - 21,000 985 7.5 1750 15,580 - 21,300 7.5 1750 15,130 - 20,300
AL1S-5463 23.3 1.5 1140 36 7,950 8,750 13,900 598 2 1140 7,880 8,670 13,700 3 1140 7,880 8,670 13,700
AL1S-5483 23.3 1.5 1140 36 9,670 10,640 13,900 598 2 1140 9,670 10,640 14,000 3 1140 9,630 10,590 13,800
AL1S-54103 23.3 1.5 1140 36 10,860 11,950 13,500 581 2 1140 10,900 11,990 13,600 3 1140 11,090 12,200 13,900
AL1S-5464 23.3 1.5 1140 36 9,210 10,130 13,900 598 2 1140 9,210 10,130 14,000 3 1140 9,210 10,130 13,900
AL1S-5484 23.3 1.5 1140 36 11,020 12,120 13,800 594 2 1140 11,020 12,120 14,000 3 1140 11,020 12,120 14,000
AL1S-54104 23.3 2 1140 36 12,230 13,450 13,600 585 3 1140 12,390 13,630 13,800 3 1140 12,040 13,240 13,300
AL1S-5463 23.3 2 1140 42 9,250 - 19,000 817 3 1140 9,230 - 18,900 5 1140 9,490 - 20,000
AL1S-5483 23.3 3 1140 42 11,790 - 20,000 860 5 1140 11,930 - 20,500 5 1140 11,930 - 20,500
AL1S-54103 23.3 3 1140 42 13,250 - 18,800 809 5 1140 13,670 - 19,700 5 1140 13,440 - 19,300
AL1S-5464 23.3 3 1140 42 11,090 - 20,100 865 5 1140 11,280 - 20,700 5 1140 11,350 - 20,800
AL1S-5484 23.3 3 1140 42 13,140 - 18,900 813 5 1140 13,650 - 20,200 5 1140 13,510 - 19,900
AL1S-54104 23.3 5 1140 42 15,580 - 20,000 860 5 1140 15,580 - 20,000 7.5 1140 15,760 - 20,400
AL1S-5463 23.3 5 1140 42 10,420 - 24,500 1,054 7.5 1140 10,530 - 25,000 7.5 1140 10,280 - 23,800
AL1S-5483 23.3 5 1140 42 12,790 - 23,500 1,011 7.5 1140 13,180 - 25,000 7.5 1140 12,790 - 23,500
AL1S-54103 23.3 7.5 1140 42 15,480 - 25,000 1,075 7.5 1140 15,070 - 23,500 7.5 1750 15,140 - 24,000
AL1S-5464 23.3 5 1140 42 11,970 - 23,400 1,006 7.5 1140 12,320 - 25,000 7.5 1140 11,970 - 23,500
AL1S-5484 23.3 5 1140 42 14,600 - 23,000 989 7.5 1140 14,880 - 24,000 7.5 1750 15,210 - 25,000
AL1S-54104 23.3 7.5 1140 42 17,110 - 23,500 1,011 7.5 1750 17,530 - 24,600 7.5 1750 16,810 - 22,800

K25
Performance Data (continued)
Avg.
Face Fan Fan Fan Capacity Face Fan Fan Capacity Fan Fan Capacity
Model Area Pwr. Spd. Dia. (BTUH/°F) Airflow Velocity Pwr. Spd. (BTUH/°F) Airlfow Pwr. Spd. (BTUH/°F) Airlfow
AL1S-5863 25.2 1.5 1140 36 8,460 9,310 14,600 580 2 1140 8,610 9,470 15,000 3 1140 8,610 9,470 15,100
AL1S-5883 25.2 2 1140 36 10,280 11,310 14,600 580 2 1140 10,300 11,330 14,700 3 1140 10,350 11,390 14,800
AL1S-58103 25.2 2 1140 36 11,610 12,770 14,300 568 3 1140 11,910 13,100 14,900 3 1140 11,640 12,800 14,400
AL1S-5864 25.2 2 1140 36 9,820 10,800 14,700 584 2 1140 9,870 10,860 14,800 3 1140 9,870 10,860 14,700
Refrigeration
AL1S-5884 25.2 2 1140 36 11,610 12,770 14,400 572 3 1140 11,890 13,080 15,000 3 1140 11,740 12,910 14,700
AL1S-58104 25.2 2 1140 36 13,480 14,830 15,000 596 3 1140 13,480 14,830 15,100 3 1140 12,390 13,630 13,400
AL1S-5863 25.2 3 1140 42 10,300 - 21,800 866 5 1140 10,550 - 23,000 5 1140 10,330 - 21,900
AL1S-5883 25.2 3 1140 42 12,440 - 20,600 818 5 1140 12,820 - 21,900 5 1140 12,540 - 21,000
AL1S-58103 25.2 5 1140 42 14,580 - 21,000 834 5 1140 14,810 - 21,600 7.5 1140 15,160 - 22,500
AL1S-5864 25.2 3 1140 42 11,810 - 21,000 834 5 1140 12,370 - 23,000 5 1140 11,940 - 21,300
AL1S-5884 25.2 5 1140 42 15,190 - 23,100 917 5 1140 14,790 - 22,000 7.5 1140 15,190 - 23,100
AL1S-58104 25.2 5 1140 42 16,750 - 21,300 846 5 1140 16,470 - 20,800 7.5 1140 16,650 - 21,200
AL1S-5863 25.2 7.5 1140 42 11,440 - 27,200 1,080 7.5 1140 11,380 - 26,900 7.5 1140 11,030 - 25,000
AL1S-5883 25.2 7.5 1140 42 14,430 - 27,600 1,096 7.5 1140 14,000 - 26,100 7.5 1140 13,420 - 24,000
AL1S-58103 25.2 7.5 1140 42 16,400 - 26,000 1,032 7.5 1750 16,650 - 26,700 7.5 1750 16,150 - 25,100
AL1S-5864 25.2 7.5 1140 42 13,450 - 27,500 1,092 7.5 1140 13,100 - 26,000 7.5 1140 12,670 - 24,200
AL1S-5884 25.2 7.5 1140 42 16,270 - 26,500 1,052 7.5 1140 15,820 - 24,900 7.5 1750 16,040 - 25,700
AL1S-58104 25.2 7.5 1140 42 18,140 - 24,500 973 7.5 1750 18,460 - 25,400 7.5 1750 17,880 - 24,000
AL1S-6363 27.1 2 1140 36 8,820 9,700 15,000 553 3 1140 9,170 10,090 15,900 3 1140 9,250 10,180 16,100
AL1S-6383 27.1 2 1140 36 11,280 12,410 16,300 601 3 1140 11,280 12,410 16,300 3 1140 11,040 12,140 15,700
AL1S-63103 27.1 3 1140 36 12,780 14,060 16,100 594 3 1140 12,640 13,900 15,700 3 1140 12,100 13,310 14,700
AL1S-6364 27.1 2 1140 36 10,710 11,780 16,300 601 3 1140 10,740 11,810 16,300 3 1140 10,520 11,570 15,700
AL1S-6384 27.1 3 1140 36 12,860 14,150 16,200 597 3 1140 12,690 13,960 15,900 3 1140 12,310 13,540 15,200
AL1S-63104 27.1 3 1140 36 14,320 15,750 16,000 590 3 1140 14,400 15,840 16,100 5 1140 14,510 15,960 16,300
AL1S-6363 27.1 3 1140 42 10,740 - 22,000 811 5 1140 11,150 - 23,800 7.5 1140 11,370 - 24,600
AL1S-6383 27.1 5 1140 42 14,080 - 24,400 900 5 1140 13,640 - 23,000 7.5 1140 13,920 - 23,900
AL1S-63103 27.1 5 1140 42 16,090 - 23,600 870 7.5 1140 16,250 - 24,000 7.5 1140 15,920 - 23,200
AL1S-6364 27.1 5 1140 42 13,290 - 24,700 911 5 1140 12,880 - 23,300 7.5 1140 13,130 - 24,100
AL1S-6384 27.1 5 1140 42 16,090 - 24,000 885 7.5 1140 16,300 - 24,700 7.5 1140 15,950 - 23,700
AL1S-63104 27.1 5 1140 42 17,880 - 22,700 837 7.5 1140 18,390 - 23,800 7.5 1140 17,520 - 22,000
AL1S-6363 27.1 7.5 1140 42 12,260 - 29,000 1,069 7.5 1140 11,940 - 27,500 7.5 1750 12,070 - 28,200
AL1S-6383 27.1 7.5 1140 42 15,140 - 28,300 1,043 7.5 1140 14,650 - 26,500 7.5 1750 14,890 - 27,400
AL1S-63103 27.1 7.5 1140 42 17,200 - 26,600 981 7.5 1750 17,500 - 27,400 7.5 1750 16,980 - 26,000
AL1S-6364 27.1 7.5 1140 42 14,080 - 28,000 1,032 7.5 1140 13,810 - 26,700 7.5 1750 13,970 - 27,300
AL1S-6384 27.1 7.5 1140 42 17,120 - 27,300 1,006 7.5 1750 17,360 - 28,000 7.5 1750 16,930 - 26,600
AL1S-63104 27.1 7.5 1140 42 19,150 - 25,500 940 7.5 1750 19,370 - 26,000 7.5 1750 18,820 - 24,800
Physical Data
Fin Density: 3 fpi Fin Density: 4 fpi
Est. Shipping Wt. (std.) Est. Shipping Wt. (std.)

Face Coil Surf. Surf.
Model Area Rows Vol. LxDxH Area Galv. Alum. SST-Al Area Galv. Alum. SST-Al
Number (ft2) Deep (ft3) (in.) (ft2) (lbs.) (lbs.) (lbs.) (ft2) (lbs.) (lbs.) (lbs.)
AL1S-456X 19.4 6 3.2 92 x 53 1/4 x 49 1/2 1,290 1,883 1,101 1,360 1,669 2,048 1,140 1,399
AL1S-458X 19.4 8 4.1 92 x 53 1/4 x 49 1/2 1,719 2,145 1,184 1,510 2,225 2,360 1,236 1,562
AL1S-4510X 19.4 10 4.9 92 x 53 1/4 x 49 1/2 2,149 2,406 1,268 1,660 2,781 2,673 1,333 1,725
AL1S-496X 21.3 6 3.5 92 x 53 1/4 x 54 1,419 1,931 1,080 1,365 1,836 2,112 1,122 1,408
AL1S-498X 21.3 8 4.5 92 x 53 1/4 x 54 1,891 2,219 1,172 1,530 2,448 2,538 1,311 1,669
AL1S-4910X 21.3 10 5.4 92 x 53 1/4 x 54 2,364 2,589 1,346 1,777 3,059 2,882 1,417 1,848
AL1S-546X 23.3 6 3.9 92 x 53 1/4 x 58 1/2 1,548 2,055 1,134 1,445 2,003 2,251 1,180 1,492
AL1S-548X 23.3 8 4.9 92 x 53 1/4 x 58 1/2 2,063 2,368 1,234 1,625 2,670 2,626 1,296 1,687
AL1S-5410X 23.3 10 5.9 92 x 53 1/4 x 58 1/2 2,579 2,764 1,417 1,887 3,338 3,084 1,495 1,965
AL1S-586X 25.2 6 4.2 92 x 53 1/4 x 63 1,676 2,259 1,269 1,605 2,169 2,472 1,319 1,656
AL1S-588X 25.2 8 5.3 92 x 53 1/4 x 63 2,235 2,598 1,378 1,800 2,893 2,878 1,445 1,868
AL1S-5810X 25.2 10 6.4 92 x 53 1/4 x 63 2,794 2,938 1,486 1,995 3,616 3,284 1,570 2,079
AL1S-636X 27.1 6 4.5 92 x 53 1/4 x 67 1/2 1,805 2,380 1,321 1,684 2,336 2,609 1,376 1,738
AL1S-638X 27.1 8 5.7 92 x 53 1/4 x 67 1/2 2,407 2,746 1,438 1,893 3,115 3,046 1,511 1,966
AL1S-6310X 27.1 10 6.9 92 x 53 1/4 x 67 1/2 3,009 3,112 1,556 2,103 3,894 3,484 1,646 2,194

K26
AL Engineering Data
Avg.
AL2S-4563 38.8 1 1140 30 12,740 14,020 21,600 557 1.5 1140 12,560 13,820 21,200 2 1140 12,160 13,380 20,000
AL2S-4583 38.8 1 1140 30 15,120 16,640 20,800 537 1.5 1140 15,120 16,640 20,800 2 1140 14,300 15,740 19,000
AL2S-45103 38.8 1.5 1140 30 18,060 19,860 22,400 578 2 1140 17,860 19,640 22,000 3 1140 17,860 19,640 22,000
AL2S-4564 38.8 1 1140 30 14,260 15,680 20,400 526 2 1140 14,920 16,420 22,000 3 1140 14,920 16,420 22,000
AL2S-4584 38.8 1.5 1140 30 18,180 20,000 22,800 588 2 1140 17,700 19,480 22,000 3 1140 17,860 19,640 22,200
AL2S-45104 38.8 2 1140 30 20,420 22,460 22,800 588 2 1140 19,540 21,500 21,200 3 1140 19,100 21,020 20,600
AL2S-4563 38.8 3 1140 30 15,040 - 29,600 764 5 1750 15,500 - 32,000 5 1750 15,120 - 30,400
AL2S-4583 38.8 3 1140 30 18,100 - 28,600 738 5 1750 19,020 - 31,400 5 1750 18,560 - 30,000
AL2S-45103 38.8 3 1140 30 20,500 - 27,600 712 5 1750 22,040 - 31,400 5 1750 21,280 - 29,400
AL2S-4564 38.8 3 1140 30 17,080 - 28,600 738 5 1750 17,980 - 31,600 5 1750 17,640 - 30,400
AL2S-4584 38.8 3 1140 30 20,460 - 28,000 723 5 1750 21,700 - 31,000 5 1750 21,320 - 30,000
AL2S-45104 38.8 3 1140 30 22,600 - 26,600 686 5 1750 24,560 - 30,400 5 1750 23,640 - 28,600
AL2S-4563 38.8 7.5 1750 30 16,980 - 39,000 1,006 7.5 1750 16,820 - 38,000 7.5 1750 16,460 - 36,400
AL2S-4583 38.8 7.5 1750 30 21,200 - 38,600 996 7.5 1750 20,800 - 37,400 7.5 1750 20,420 - 36,000
AL2S-45103 38.8 7.5 1750 30 24,420 - 37,600 970 7.5 1750 23,940 - 36,200 7.5 1750 23,440 - 34,800
AL2S-4564 38.8 7.5 1750 30 19,880 - 38,600 996 7.5 1750 19,540 - 37,400 7.5 1750 19,220 - 36,000
AL2S-4584 38.8 7.5 1750 30 24,140 - 37,800 975 7.5 1750 23,560 - 36,400 7.5 1750 23,260 - 35,200
AL2S-45104 38.8 7.5 1750 30 27,480 - 36,600 945 7.5 1750 26,940 - 35,400 7.5 1750 26,280 - 34,000
AL2S-4963 42.6 0.75 1140 36 13,900 15,300 23,600 554 1.5 1140 14,580 16,040 25,400 2 1140 14,320 15,760 25,000
AL2S-4983 42.6 0.75 1140 36 16,660 18,320 23,000 540 1.5 1140 17,300 19,040 24,600 2 1140 17,100 18,820 24,000
AL2S-49103 42.6 0.75 1140 36 18,080 19,880 21,000 493 2 1140 20,340 22,380 25,400 3 1140 20,340 22,380 25,400
AL2S-4964 42.6 0.75 1140 36 15,640 17,200 22,400 526 1.5 1140 16,500 18,160 24,600 2 1140 16,280 17,900 24,000
AL2S-4984 42.6 0.75 1140 36 18,380 20,220 22,000 516 1.5 1140 19,400 21,340 24,000 2 1140 19,220 21,140 23,600
AL2S-49104 42.6 1.5 1140 36 22,340 24,580 24,800 582 2 1140 22,460 24,700 25,000 3 1140 22,460 24,700 25,000
AL2S-4963 42.6 3 1140 36 17,140 - 35,600 835 3 1140 16,920 - 34,600 5 1140 16,800 - 34,200
AL2S-4983 42.6 3 1140 36 20,800 - 33,800 793 3 1140 20,420 - 33,000 5 1140 21,140 - 35,200
AL2S-49103 42.6 3 1140 36 24,300 - 34,600 812 5 1140 24,120 - 34,000 5 1750 24,980 - 36,200
AL2S-4964 42.6 3 1140 36 19,600 - 34,000 798 3 1140 19,360 - 33,200 5 1140 19,940 - 35,400
AL2S-4984 42.6 3 1140 36 23,880 - 34,000 798 5 1140 24,080 - 34,600 5 1750 24,720 - 36,400
AL2S-49104 42.6 5 1140 36 27,800 - 35,000 821 5 1140 27,500 - 34,400 5 1750 27,700 - 34,800
AL2S-4963 42.6 5 1140 36 18,800 - 43,200 1,013 5 1750 18,500 - 42,000 5 1750 17,940 - 39,200
AL2S-4983 42.6 5 1140 36 23,100 - 41,800 981 7.5 1750 24,380 - 46,800 7.5 1750 23,780 - 44,600
AL2S-49103 42.6 7.5 1140 36 27,740 - 44,000 1,032 7.5 1750 27,920 - 44,600 7.5 1750 27,200 - 42,000
AL2S-4964 42.6 5 1140 36 21,700 - 42,000 985 7.5 1750 22,840 - 47,000 7.5 1750 22,420 - 44,800
AL2S-4984 42.6 7.5 1140 36 27,580 - 45,000 1,056 7.5 1750 27,620 - 45,200 7.5 1750 26,980 - 43,000
AL2S-49104 42.6 7.5 1140 36 30,900 - 42,000 985 7.5 1750 31,160 - 42,600 7.5 1750 30,260 - 40,600
AL2S-5463 46.5 1.5 1140 36 15,900 17,500 27,800 598 2 1140 15,760 17,340 27,400 3 1140 15,760 17,340 27,400
AL2S-5483 46.5 1.5 1140 36 19,340 21,280 27,800 598 2 1140 19,340 21,280 28,000 3 1140 19,260 21,180 27,600
AL2S-54103 46.5 1.5 1140 36 21,720 23,900 27,000 581 2 1140 21,800 23,980 27,200 3 1140 22,180 24,400 27,800
AL2S-5464 46.5 1.5 1140 36 18,420 20,260 27,800 598 2 1140 18,420 20,260 28,000 3 1140 18,420 20,260 27,800
AL2S-5484 46.5 1.5 1140 36 22,040 24,240 27,600 594 2 1140 22,040 24,240 28,000 3 1140 22,040 24,240 28,000
AL2S-54104 46.5 2 1140 36 24,460 26,900 27,200 585 3 1140 24,780 27,260 27,600 3 1140 24,080 26,480 26,600
AL2S-5463 46.5 2 1140 42 18,500 - 38,000 817 3 1140 18,460 - 37,800 5 1140 18,980 - 40,000
AL2S-5483 46.5 3 1140 42 23,580 - 40,000 860 5 1140 23,860 - 41,000 5 1140 23,860 - 41,000
AL2S-54103 46.5 3 1140 42 26,500 - 37,600 809 5 1140 27,340 - 39,400 5 1140 26,880 - 38,600
AL2S-5464 46.5 3 1140 42 22,180 - 40,200 865 5 1140 22,560 - 41,400 5 1140 22,700 - 41,600
AL2S-5484 46.5 3 1140 42 26,280 - 37,800 813 5 1140 27,300 - 40,400 5 1140 27,020 - 39,800
AL2S-54104 46.5 5 1140 42 31,160 - 40,000 860 5 1140 31,160 - 40,000 7.5 1140 31,520 - 40,800
AL2S-5463 46.5 5 1140 42 20,840 - 49,000 1,054 7.5 1140 21,060 - 50,000 7.5 1140 20,560 - 47,600
AL2S-5483 46.5 5 1140 42 25,580 - 47,000 1,011 7.5 1140 26,360 - 50,000 7.5 1140 25,580 - 47,000
AL2S-54103 46.5 7.5 1140 42 30,960 - 50,000 1,075 7.5 1140 30,140 - 47,000 7.5 1750 30,280 - 48,000
AL2S-5464 46.5 5 1140 42 23,940 - 46,800 1,006 7.5 1140 24,640 - 50,000 7.5 1140 23,940 - 47,000
AL2S-5484 46.5 5 1140 42 29,200 - 46,000 989 7.5 1140 29,760 - 48,000 7.5 1750 30,420 - 50,000
AL2S-54104 46.5 7.5 1140 42 34,220 - 47,000 1,011 7.5 1750 35,060 - 49,200 7.5 1750 33,620 - 45,600

K27

Avg.
AL2S-5863 50.4 1.5 1140 36 16,920 18,620 29,200 580 2 1140 17,220 18,940 30,000 3 1140 17,220 18,940 30,200
AL2S-5883 50.4 2 1140 36 20,560 22,620 29,200 580 2 1140 20,600 22,660 29,400 3 1140 20,700 22,780 29,600
AL2S-58103 50.4 2 1140 36 23,220 25,540 28,600 568 3 1140 23,820 26,200 29,800 3 1140 23,280 25,600 28,800
Refrigeration
AL2S-5864 50.4 2 1140 36 19,640 21,600 29,400 584 2 1140 19,740 21,720 29,600 3 1140 19,740 21,720 29,400
AL2S-5884 50.4 2 1140 36 23,220 25,540 28,800 572 3 1140 23,780 26,160 30,000 3 1140 23,480 25,820 29,400
AL2S-58104 50.4 2 1140 36 26,960 29,660 30,000 596 3 1140 26,960 29,660 30,200 3 1140 24,780 27,260 26,800
AL2S-5863 50.4 3 1140 42 20,600 - 43,600 866 5 1140 21,100 - 46,000 5 1140 20,660 - 43,800
AL2S-5883 50.4 3 1140 42 24,880 - 41,200 818 5 1140 25,640 - 43,800 5 1140 25,080 - 42,000
AL2S-58103 50.4 5 1140 42 29,160 - 42,000 834 5 1140 29,620 - 43,200 7.5 1140 30,320 - 45,000
AL2S-5864 50.4 3 1140 42 23,620 - 42,000 834 5 1140 24,740 - 46,000 5 1140 23,880 - 42,600
AL2S-5884 50.4 5 1140 42 30,380 - 46,200 917 5 1140 29,580 - 44,000 7.5 1140 30,380 - 46,200
AL2S-58104 50.4 5 1140 42 33,500 - 42,600 846 5 1140 32,940 - 41,600 7.5 1140 33,300 - 42,400
AL2S-5863 50.4 7.5 1140 42 22,880 - 54,400 1,080 7.5 1140 22,760 - 53,800 7.5 1140 22,060 - 50,000
AL2S-5883 50.4 7.5 1140 42 28,860 - 55,200 1,096 7.5 1140 28,000 - 52,200 7.5 1140 26,840 - 48,000
AL2S-58103 50.4 7.5 1140 42 32,800 - 52,000 1,032 7.5 1750 33,300 - 53,400 7.5 1750 32,300 - 50,200
AL2S-5864 50.4 7.5 1140 42 26,900 - 55,000 1,092 7.5 1140 26,200 - 52,000 7.5 1140 25,340 - 48,400
AL2S-5884 50.4 7.5 1140 42 32,540 - 53,000 1,052 7.5 1140 31,640 - 49,800 7.5 1750 32,080 - 51,400
AL2S-58104 50.4 7.5 1140 42 36,280 - 49,000 973 7.5 1750 36,920 - 50,800 7.5 1750 35,760 - 48,000
AL2S-6363 54.3 2 1140 36 17,640 19,400 30,000 553 3 1140 18,340 20,180 31,800 3 1140 18,500 20,360 32,200
AL2S-6383 54.3 2 1140 36 22,560 24,820 32,600 601 3 1140 22,560 24,820 32,600 3 1140 22,080 24,280 31,400
AL2S-63103 54.3 3 1140 36 25,560 28,120 32,200 594 3 1140 25,280 27,800 31,400 3 1140 24,200 26,620 29,400
AL2S-6364 54.3 2 1140 36 21,420 23,560 32,600 601 3 1140 21,480 23,620 32,600 3 1140 21,040 23,140 31,400
AL2S-6384 54.3 3 1140 36 25,720 28,300 32,400 597 3 1140 25,380 27,920 31,800 3 1140 24,620 27,080 30,400
AL2S-63104 54.3 3 1140 36 28,640 31,500 32,000 590 3 1140 28,800 31,680 32,200 5 1140 29,020 31,920 32,600
AL2S-6363 54.3 3 1140 42 21,480 - 44,000 811 5 1140 22,300 - 47,600 7.5 1140 22,740 - 49,200
AL2S-6383 54.3 5 1140 42 28,160 - 48,800 900 5 1140 27,280 - 46,000 7.5 1140 27,840 - 47,800
AL2S-63103 54.3 5 1140 42 32,180 - 47,200 870 7.5 1140 32,500 - 48,000 7.5 1140 31,840 - 46,400
AL2S-6364 54.3 5 1140 42 26,580 - 49,400 911 5 1140 25,760 - 46,600 7.5 1140 26,260 - 48,200
AL2S-6384 54.3 5 1140 42 32,180 - 48,000 885 7.5 1140 32,600 - 49,400 7.5 1140 31,900 - 47,400
AL2S-63104 54.3 5 1140 42 35,760 - 45,400 837 7.5 1140 36,780 - 47,600 7.5 1140 35,040 - 44,000
AL2S-6363 54.3 7.5 1140 42 24,520 - 58,000 1,069 7.5 1140 23,880 - 55,000 7.5 1750 24,140 - 56,400
AL2S-6383 54.3 7.5 1140 42 30,280 - 56,600 1,043 7.5 1140 29,300 - 53,000 7.5 1750 29,780 - 54,800
AL2S-63103 54.3 7.5 1140 42 34,400 - 53,200 981 7.5 1750 35,000 - 54,800 7.5 1750 33,960 - 52,000
AL2S-6364 54.3 7.5 1140 42 28,160 - 56,000 1,032 7.5 1140 27,620 - 53,400 7.5 1750 27,940 - 54,600
AL2S-6384 54.3 7.5 1140 42 34,240 - 54,600 1,006 7.5 1750 34,720 - 56,000 7.5 1750 33,860 - 53,200
AL2S-63104 54.3 7.5 1140 42 38,300 - 51,000 940 7.5 1750 38,740 - 52,000 7.5 1750 37,640 - 49,600
Physical Data

AL2S-456X 38.8 6 6.4 154 x 53 1/4 x 49 1/2 2,579 3,488 2,085 2,519 3,338 3,810 2,162 2,597
AL2S-458X 38.8 8 8.2 154 x 53 1/4 x 49 1/2 3,439 3,995 2,247 2,806 4,450 4,418 2,351 2,909
AL2S-4510X 38.8 10 9.8 154 x 53 1/4 x 49 1/2 4,299 4,502 2,409 3,092 5,563 5,026 2,539 3,222
AL2S-496X 42.6 6 7.0 154 x 53 1/4 x 54 2,837 3,560 2,034 2,512 3,671 3,914 2,120 2,597
AL2S-498X 42.6 8 9.0 154 x 53 1/4 x 54 3,783 4,118 2,213 2,827 4,895 4,748 2,492 3,106
AL2S-4910X 42.6 10 10.8 154 x 53 1/4 x 54 4,728 4,841 2,556 3,307 6,119 5,417 2,699 3,450
AL2S-546X 46.5 6 7.8 154 x 53 1/4 x 58 1/2 3,095 3,784 2,135 2,655 4,005 4,168 2,228 2,749
AL2S-548X 46.5 8 9.8 154 x 53 1/4 x 58 1/2 4,126 4,392 2,329 2,999 5,340 4,899 2,454 3,124
AL2S-5410X 46.5 10 11.8 154 x 53 1/4 x 58 1/2 5,158 5,165 2,689 3,508 6,675 5,794 2,844 3,664
AL2S-586X 50.4 6 8.4 154 x 53 1/4 x 63 3,353 4,168 2,396 2,960 4,339 4,585 2,498 3,061
AL2S-588X 50.4 8 10.6 154 x 53 1/4 x 63 4,470 4,827 2,607 3,333 5,785 5,376 2,742 3,467
AL2S-5810X 50.4 10 12.8 154 x 53 1/4 x 63 5,588 5,115 2,453 3,336 7,231 5,795 2,621 3,504
AL2S-636X 54.3 6 9.0 154 x 53 1/4 x 67 1/2 3,611 4,388 2,493 3,100 4,673 4,836 2,602 3,209
AL2S-638X 54.3 8 11.4 154 x 53 1/4 x 67 1/2 4,814 5,098 2,721 3,502 6,230 5,688 2,866 3,647
AL2S-6310X 54.3 10 13.8 154 x 53 1/4 x 67 1/2 6,018 5,808 2,948 3,903 7,788 6,540 3,129 4,084

K28
Engineering Data
Avg.
AL3S-4563 58.1 1 1140 30 19,110 21,030 32,400 557 1.5 1140 18,840 20,730 31,800 2 1140 18,240 20,070 30,000
AL3S-4583 58.1 1 1140 30 22,680 24,960 31,200 537 1.5 1140 22,680 24,960 31,200 2 1140 21,450 23,610 28,500
AL3S-45103 58.1 1.5 1140 30 27,090 29,790 33,600 578 2 1140 26,790 29,460 33,000 3 1140 26,790 29,460 33,000
AL3S-4564 58.1 1 1140 30 21,390 23,520 30,600 526 2 1140 22,380 24,630 33,000 3 1140 22,380 24,630 33,000
AL3S-4584 58.1 1.5 1140 30 27,270 30,000 34,200 588 2 1140 26,550 29,220 33,000 3 1140 26,790 29,460 33,300
AL3S-45104 58.1 2 1140 30 30,630 33,690 34,200 588 2 1140 29,310 32,250 31,800 3 1140 28,650 31,530 30,900
AL3S-4563 58.1 3 1140 30 22,560 - 44,400 764 5 1750 23,250 - 48,000 5 1750 22,680 - 45,600
AL3S-4583 58.1 3 1140 30 27,150 - 42,900 738 5 1750 28,530 - 47,100 5 1750 27,840 - 45,000
AL3S-45103 58.1 3 1140 30 30,750 - 41,400 712 5 1750 33,060 - 47,100 5 1750 31,920 - 44,100
AL3S-4564 58.1 3 1140 30 25,620 - 42,900 738 5 1750 26,970 - 47,400 5 1750 26,460 - 45,600
AL3S-4584 58.1 3 1140 30 30,690 - 42,000 723 5 1750 32,550 - 46,500 5 1750 31,980 - 45,000
AL3S-45104 58.1 3 1140 30 33,900 - 39,900 686 5 1750 36,840 - 45,600 5 1750 35,460 - 42,900
AL3S-4563 58.1 7.5 1750 30 25,470 - 58,500 1,006 7.5 1750 25,230 - 57,000 7.5 1750 24,690 - 54,600
AL3S-4583 58.1 7.5 1750 30 31,800 - 57,900 996 7.5 1750 31,200 - 56,100 7.5 1750 30,630 - 54,000
AL3S-45103 58.1 7.5 1750 30 36,630 - 56,400 970 7.5 1750 35,910 - 54,300 7.5 1750 35,160 - 52,200
AL3S-4564 58.1 7.5 1750 30 29,820 - 57,900 996 7.5 1750 29,310 - 56,100 7.5 1750 28,830 - 54,000
AL3S-4584 58.1 7.5 1750 30 36,210 - 56,700 975 7.5 1750 35,340 - 54,600 7.5 1750 34,890 - 52,800
AL3S-45104 58.1 7.5 1750 30 41,220 - 54,900 945 7.5 1750 40,410 - 53,100 7.5 1750 39,420 - 51,000
AL3S-4963 63.9 0.75 1140 36 20,850 22,950 35,400 554 1.5 1140 21,870 24,060 38,100 2 1140 21,480 23,640 37,500
AL3S-4983 63.9 0.75 1140 36 24,990 27,480 34,500 540 1.5 1140 25,950 28,560 36,900 2 1140 25,650 28,230 36,000
AL3S-49103 63.9 0.75 1140 36 27,120 29,820 31,500 493 2 1140 30,510 33,570 38,100 3 1140 30,510 33,570 38,100
AL3S-4964 63.9 0.75 1140 36 23,460 25,800 33,600 526 1.5 1140 24,750 27,240 36,900 2 1140 24,420 26,850 36,000
AL3S-4984 63.9 0.75 1140 36 27,570 30,330 33,000 516 1.5 1140 29,100 32,010 36,000 2 1140 28,830 31,710 35,400
AL3S-49104 63.9 1.5 1140 36 33,510 36,870 37,200 582 2 1140 33,690 37,050 37,500 3 1140 33,690 37,050 37,500
AL3S-4963 63.9 3 1140 36 25,710 - 53,400 835 3 1140 25,380 - 51,900 5 1140 25,200 - 51,300
AL3S-4983 63.9 3 1140 36 31,200 - 50,700 793 3 1140 30,630 - 49,500 5 1140 31,710 - 52,800
AL3S-49103 63.9 3 1140 36 36,450 - 51,900 812 5 1140 36,180 - 51,000 5 1750 37,470 - 54,300
AL3S-4964 63.9 3 1140 36 29,400 - 51,000 798 3 1140 29,040 - 49,800 5 1140 29,910 - 53,100
AL3S-4984 63.9 3 1140 36 35,820 - 51,000 798 5 1140 36,120 - 51,900 5 1750 37,080 - 54,600
AL3S-49104 63.9 5 1140 36 41,700 - 52,500 821 5 1140 41,250 - 51,600 5 1750 41,550 - 52,200
AL3S-4963 63.9 5 1140 36 28,200 - 64,800 1,013 5 1750 27,750 - 63,000 5 1750 26,910 - 58,800
AL3S-4983 63.9 5 1140 36 34,650 - 62,700 981 7.5 1750 36,570 - 70,200 7.5 1750 35,670 - 66,900
AL3S-49103 63.9 7.5 1140 36 41,610 - 66,000 1,032 7.5 1750 41,880 - 66,900 7.5 1750 40,800 - 63,000
AL3S-4964 63.9 5 1140 36 32,550 - 63,000 985 7.5 1750 34,260 - 70,500 7.5 1750 33,630 - 67,200
AL3S-4984 63.9 7.5 1140 36 41,370 - 67,500 1,056 7.5 1750 41,430 - 67,800 7.5 1750 40,470 - 64,500
AL3S-49104 63.9 7.5 1140 36 46,350 - 63,000 985 7.5 1750 46,740 - 63,900 7.5 1750 45,390 - 60,900
AL3S-5463 69.8 1.5 1140 36 23,850 26,250 41,700 598 2 1140 23,640 26,010 41,100 3 1140 23,640 26,010 41,100
AL3S-5483 69.8 1.5 1140 36 29,010 31,920 41,700 598 2 1140 29,010 31,920 42,000 3 1140 28,890 31,770 41,400
AL3S-54103 69.8 1.5 1140 36 32,580 35,850 40,500 581 2 1140 32,700 35,970 40,800 3 1140 33,270 36,600 41,700
AL3S-5464 69.8 1.5 1140 36 27,630 30,390 41,700 598 2 1140 27,630 30,390 42,000 3 1140 27,630 30,390 41,700
AL3S-5484 69.8 1.5 1140 36 33,060 36,360 41,400 594 2 1140 33,060 36,360 42,000 3 1140 33,060 36,360 42,000
AL3S-54104 69.8 2 1140 36 36,690 40,350 40,800 585 3 1140 37,170 40,890 41,400 3 1140 36,120 39,720 39,900
AL3S-5463 69.8 2 1140 42 27,750 - 57,000 817 3 1140 27,690 - 56,700 5 1140 28,470 - 60,000
AL3S-5483 69.8 3 1140 42 35,370 - 60,000 860 5 1140 35,790 - 61,500 5 1140 35,790 - 61,500
AL3S-54103 69.8 3 1140 42 39,750 - 56,400 809 5 1140 41,010 - 59,100 5 1140 40,320 - 57,900
AL3S-5464 69.8 3 1140 42 33,270 - 60,300 865 5 1140 33,840 - 62,100 5 1140 34,050 - 62,400
AL3S-5484 69.8 3 1140 42 39,420 - 56,700 813 5 1140 40,950 - 60,600 5 1140 40,530 - 59,700
AL3S-54104 69.8 5 1140 42 46,740 - 60,000 860 5 1140 46,740 - 60,000 7.5 1140 47,280 - 61,200
AL3S-5463 69.8 5 1140 42 31,260 - 73,500 1,054 7.5 1140 31,590 - 75,000 7.5 1140 30,840 - 71,400
AL3S-5483 69.8 5 1140 42 38,370 - 70,500 1,011 7.5 1140 39,540 - 75,000 7.5 1140 38,370 - 70,500
AL3S-54103 69.8 7.5 1140 42 46,440 - 75,000 1,075 7.5 1140 45,210 - 70,500 7.5 1750 45,420 - 72,000
AL3S-5464 69.8 5 1140 42 35,910 - 70,200 1,006 7.5 1140 36,960 - 75,000 7.5 1140 35,910 - 70,500
AL3S-5484 69.8 5 1140 42 43,800 - 69,000 989 7.5 1140 44,640 - 72,000 7.5 1750 45,630 - 75,000
AL3S-54104 69.8 7.5 1140 42 51,330 - 70,500 1,011 7.5 1750 52,590 - 73,800 7.5 1750 50,430 - 68,400

K29

Avg.
AL3S-5863 75.6 1.5 1140 36 25,380 27,930 43,800 580 2 1140 25,830 28,410 45,000 3 1140 25,830 28,410 45,300
AL3S-5883 75.6 2 1140 36 30,840 33,930 43,800 580 2 1140 30,900 33,990 44,100 3 1140 31,050 34,170 44,400
AL3S-58103 75.6 2 1140 36 34,830 38,310 42,900 568 3 1140 35,730 39,300 44,700 3 1140 34,920 38,400 43,200
Refrigeration
AL3S-5864 75.6 2 1140 36 29,460 32,400 44,100 584 2 1140 29,610 32,580 44,400 3 1140 29,610 32,580 44,100
AL3S-5884 75.6 2 1140 36 34,830 38,310 43,200 572 3 1140 35,670 39,240 45,000 3 1140 35,220 38,730 44,100
AL3S-58104 75.6 2 1140 36 40,440 44,490 45,000 596 3 1140 40,440 44,490 45,300 3 1140 37,170 40,890 40,200
AL3S-5863 75.6 3 1140 42 30,900 - 65,400 866 5 1140 31,650 - 69,000 5 1140 30,990 - 65,700
AL3S-5883 75.6 3 1140 42 37,320 - 61,800 818 5 1140 38,460 - 65,700 5 1140 37,620 - 63,000
AL3S-58103 75.6 5 1140 42 43,740 - 63,000 834 5 1140 44,430 - 64,800 7.5 1140 45,480 - 67,500
AL3S-5864 75.6 3 1140 42 35,430 - 63,000 834 5 1140 37,110 - 69,000 5 1140 35,820 - 63,900
AL3S-5884 75.6 5 1140 42 45,570 - 69,300 917 5 1140 44,370 - 66,000 7.5 1140 45,570 - 69,300
AL3S-58104 75.6 5 1140 42 50,250 - 63,900 846 5 1140 49,410 - 62,400 7.5 1140 49,950 - 63,600
AL3S-5863 75.6 7.5 1140 42 34,320 - 81,600 1,080 7.5 1140 34,140 - 80,700 7.5 1140 33,090 - 75,000
AL3S-5883 75.6 7.5 1140 42 43,290 - 82,800 1,096 7.5 1140 42,000 - 78,300 7.5 1140 40,260 - 72,000
AL3S-58103 75.6 7.5 1140 42 49,200 - 78,000 1,032 7.5 1750 49,950 - 80,100 7.5 1750 48,450 - 75,300
AL3S-5864 75.6 7.5 1140 42 40,350 - 82,500 1,092 7.5 1140 39,300 - 78,000 7.5 1140 38,010 - 72,600
AL3S-5884 75.6 7.5 1140 42 48,810 - 79,500 1,052 7.5 1140 47,460 - 74,700 7.5 1750 48,120 - 77,100
AL3S-58104 75.6 7.5 1140 42 54,420 - 73,500 973 7.5 1750 55,380 - 76,200 7.5 1750 53,640 - 72,000
AL3S-6363 81.4 2 1140 36 26,460 29,100 45,000 553 3 1140 27,510 30,270 47,700 3 1140 27,750 30,540 48,300
AL3S-6383 81.4 2 1140 36 33,840 37,230 48,900 601 3 1140 33,840 37,230 48,900 3 1140 33,120 36,420 47,100
AL3S-63103 81.4 3 1140 36 38,340 42,180 48,300 594 3 1140 37,920 41,700 47,100 3 1140 36,300 39,930 44,100
AL3S-6364 81.4 2 1140 36 32,130 35,340 48,900 601 3 1140 32,220 35,430 48,900 3 1140 31,560 34,710 47,100
AL3S-6384 81.4 3 1140 36 38,580 42,450 48,600 597 3 1140 38,070 41,880 47,700 3 1140 36,930 40,620 45,600
AL3S-63104 81.4 3 1140 36 42,960 47,250 48,000 590 3 1140 43,200 47,520 48,300 5 1140 43,530 47,880 48,900
AL3S-6363 81.4 3 1140 42 32,220 - 66,000 811 5 1140 33,450 - 71,400 7.5 1140 34,110 - 73,800
AL3S-6383 81.4 5 1140 42 42,240 - 73,200 900 5 1140 40,920 - 69,000 7.5 1140 41,760 - 71,700
AL3S-63103 81.4 5 1140 42 48,270 - 70,800 870 7.5 1140 48,750 - 72,000 7.5 1140 47,760 - 69,600
AL3S-6364 81.4 5 1140 42 39,870 - 74,100 911 5 1140 38,640 - 69,900 7.5 1140 39,390 - 72,300
AL3S-6384 81.4 5 1140 42 48,270 - 72,000 885 7.5 1140 48,900 - 74,100 7.5 1140 47,850 - 71,100
AL3S-63104 81.4 5 1140 42 53,640 - 68,100 837 7.5 1140 55,170 - 71,400 7.5 1140 52,560 - 66,000
AL3S-6363 81.4 7.5 1140 42 36,780 - 87,000 1,069 7.5 1140 35,820 - 82,500 7.5 1750 36,210 - 84,600
AL3S-6383 81.4 7.5 1140 42 45,420 - 84,900 1,043 7.5 1140 43,950 - 79,500 7.5 1750 44,670 - 82,200
AL3S-63103 81.4 7.5 1140 42 51,600 - 79,800 981 7.5 1750 52,500 - 82,200 7.5 1750 50,940 - 78,000
AL3S-6364 81.4 7.5 1140 42 42,240 - 84,000 1,032 7.5 1140 41,430 - 80,100 7.5 1750 41,910 - 81,900
AL3S-6384 81.4 7.5 1140 42 51,360 - 81,900 1,006 7.5 1750 52,080 - 84,000 7.5 1750 50,790 - 79,800
AL3S-63104 81.4 7.5 1140 42 57,450 - 76,500 940 7.5 1750 58,110 - 78,000 7.5 1750 56,460 - 74,400
Physical Data

AL3S-456X 58.1 6 9.6 216 x 53 1/4 x 49 1/2 3,869 5,092 3,069 3,678 5,006 5,571 3,185 3,794
AL3S-458X 58.1 8 12.3 216 x 53 1/4 x 49 1/2 5,158 5,845 3,310 4,101 6,675 6,476 3,465 4,257
AL3S-4510X 58.1 10 14.7 216 x 53 1/4 x 49 1/2 6,448 6,597 3,550 4,525 8,344 7,380 3,745 4,719
AL3S-496X 63.9 6 10.5 216 x 53 1/4 x 54 4,256 5,189 2,989 3,659 5,507 5,715 3,118 3,787
AL3S-498X 63.9 8 13.5 216 x 53 1/4 x 54 5,674 6,017 3,254 4,125 7,343 6,958 3,673 4,543
AL3S-4910X 63.9 10 16.2 216 x 53 1/4 x 54 7,093 7,093 3,767 4,838 9,178 7,953 3,980 5,052
AL3S-546X 69.8 6 11.7 216 x 53 1/4 x 58 1/2 4,643 5,513 3,136 3,866 6,008 6,085 3,276 4,006
AL3S-548X 69.8 8 14.7 216 x 53 1/4 x 58 1/2 6,190 6,416 3,425 4,374 8,010 7,171 3,611 4,560
AL3S-5410X 69.8 10 17.7 216 x 53 1/4 x 58 1/2 7,737 7,567 3,961 5,129 10,013 8,504 4,194 5,363
AL3S-586X 75.6 6 12.6 216 x 53 1/4 x 63 5,029 6,078 3,524 4,315 6,508 6,698 3,676 4,466
AL3S-588X 75.6 8 15.9 216 x 53 1/4 x 63 6,705 7,057 3,837 4,865 8,678 7,874 4,039 5,067
AL3S-5810X 75.6 10 19.2 216 x 53 1/4 x 63 8,382 8,035 4,150 5,416 10,847 9,050 4,403 5,668
AL3S-636X 81.4 6 13.5 216 x 53 1/4 x 67 1/2 5,416 6,397 3,666 4,517 7,009 7,063 3,829 4,680
AL3S-638X 81.4 8 17.1 216 x 53 1/4 x 67 1/2 7,221 7,450 4,003 5,110 9,345 8,329 4,220 5,327
AL3S-6310X 81.4 10 20.7 216 x 53 1/4 x 67 1/2 9,027 8,504 4,340 5,702 11,681 9,596 4,612 5,974

K30
Engineering Data
Avg.
AL4S-4563 77.5 1 1140 30 25,480 28,040 43,200 557 1.5 1140 25,120 27,640 42,400 2 1140 24,320 26,760 40,000
AL4S-4583 77.5 1 1140 30 30,240 33,280 41,600 537 1.5 1140 30,240 33,280 41,600 2 1140 28,600 31,480 38,000
AL4S-45103 77.5 1.5 1140 30 36,120 39,720 44,800 578 2 1140 35,720 39,280 44,000 3 1140 35,720 39,280 44,000
AL4S-4564 77.5 1 1140 30 28,520 31,360 40,800 526 2 1140 29,840 32,840 44,000 3 1140 29,840 32,840 44,000
AL4S-4584 77.5 1.5 1140 30 36,360 40,000 45,600 588 2 1140 35,400 38,960 44,000 3 1140 35,720 39,280 44,400
AL4S-45104 77.5 2 1140 30 40,840 44,920 45,600 588 2 1140 39,080 43,000 42,400 3 1140 38,200 42,040 41,200
AL4S-4563 77.5 3 1140 30 30,080 - 59,200 764 5 1750 31,000 - 64,000 5 1750 30,240 - 60,800
AL4S-4583 77.5 3 1140 30 36,200 - 57,200 738 5 1750 38,040 - 62,800 5 1750 37,120 - 60,000
AL4S-45103 77.5 3 1140 30 41,000 - 55,200 712 5 1750 44,080 - 62,800 5 1750 42,560 - 58,800
AL4S-4564 77.5 3 1140 30 34,160 - 57,200 738 5 1750 35,960 - 63,200 5 1750 35,280 - 60,800
AL4S-4584 77.5 3 1140 30 40,920 - 56,000 723 5 1750 43,400 - 62,000 5 1750 42,640 - 60,000
AL4S-45104 77.5 3 1140 30 45,200 - 53,200 686 5 1750 49,120 - 60,800 5 1750 47,280 - 57,200
AL4S-4563 77.5 7.5 1750 30 33,960 - 78,000 1,006 7.5 1750 33,640 - 76,000 7.5 1750 32,920 - 72,800
AL4S-4583 77.5 7.5 1750 30 42,400 - 77,200 996 7.5 1750 41,600 - 74,800 7.5 1750 40,840 - 72,000
AL4S-45103 77.5 7.5 1750 30 48,840 - 75,200 970 7.5 1750 47,880 - 72,400 7.5 1750 46,880 - 69,600
AL4S-4564 77.5 7.5 1750 30 39,760 - 77,200 996 7.5 1750 39,080 - 74,800 7.5 1750 38,440 - 72,000
AL4S-4584 77.5 7.5 1750 30 48,280 - 75,600 975 7.5 1750 47,120 - 72,800 7.5 1750 46,520 - 70,400
AL4S-45104 77.5 7.5 1750 30 54,960 - 73,200 945 7.5 1750 53,880 - 70,800 7.5 1750 52,560 - 68,000
AL4S-4963 85.3 0.75 1140 36 27,800 30,600 47,200 554 1.5 1140 29,160 32,080 50,800 2 1140 28,640 31,520 50,000
AL4S-4983 85.3 0.75 1140 36 33,320 36,640 46,000 540 1.5 1140 34,600 38,080 49,200 2 1140 34,200 37,640 48,000
AL4S-49103 85.3 0.75 1140 36 36,160 39,760 42,000 493 2 1140 40,680 44,760 50,800 3 1140 40,680 44,760 50,800
AL4S-4964 85.3 0.75 1140 36 31,280 34,400 44,800 526 1.5 1140 33,000 36,320 49,200 2 1140 32,560 35,800 48,000
AL4S-4984 85.3 0.75 1140 36 36,760 40,440 44,000 516 1.5 1140 38,800 42,680 48,000 2 1140 38,440 42,280 47,200
AL4S-49104 85.3 1.5 1140 36 44,680 49,160 49,600 582 2 1140 44,920 49,400 50,000 3 1140 44,920 49,400 50,000
AL4S-4963 85.3 3 1140 36 34,280 - 71,200 835 3 1140 33,840 - 69,200 5 1140 33,600 - 68,400
AL4S-4983 85.3 3 1140 36 41,600 - 67,600 793 3 1140 40,840 - 66,000 5 1140 42,280 - 70,400
AL4S-49103 85.3 3 1140 36 48,600 - 69,200 812 5 1140 48,240 - 68,000 5 1750 49,960 - 72,400
AL4S-4964 85.3 3 1140 36 39,200 - 68,000 798 3 1140 38,720 - 66,400 5 1140 39,880 - 70,800
AL4S-4984 85.3 3 1140 36 47,760 - 68,000 798 5 1140 48,160 - 69,200 5 1750 49,440 - 72,800
AL4S-49104 85.3 5 1140 36 55,600 - 70,000 821 5 1140 55,000 - 68,800 5 1750 55,400 - 69,600
AL4S-4963 85.3 5 1140 36 37,600 - 86,400 1,013 5 1750 37,000 - 84,000 5 1750 35,880 - 78,400
AL4S-4983 85.3 5 1140 36 46,200 - 83,600 981 7.5 1750 48,760 - 93,600 7.5 1750 47,560 - 89,200
AL4S-49103 85.3 7.5 1140 36 55,480 - 88,000 1,032 7.5 1750 55,840 - 89,200 7.5 1750 54,400 - 84,000
AL4S-4964 85.3 5 1140 36 43,400 - 84,000 985 7.5 1750 45,680 - 94,000 7.5 1750 44,840 - 89,600
AL4S-4984 85.3 7.5 1140 36 55,160 - 90,000 1,056 7.5 1750 55,240 - 90,400 7.5 1750 53,960 - 86,000
AL4S-49104 85.3 7.5 1140 36 61,800 - 84,000 985 7.5 1750 62,320 - 85,200 7.5 1750 60,520 - 81,200
AL4S-5463 93.0 1.5 1140 36 31,800 35,000 55,600 598 2 1140 31,520 34,680 54,800 3 1140 31,520 34,680 54,800
AL4S-5483 93.0 1.5 1140 36 38,680 42,560 55,600 598 2 1140 38,680 42,560 56,000 3 1140 38,520 42,360 55,200
AL4S-54103 93.0 1.5 1140 36 43,440 47,800 54,000 581 2 1140 43,600 47,960 54,400 3 1140 44,360 48,800 55,600
AL4S-5464 93.0 1.5 1140 36 36,840 40,520 55,600 598 2 1140 36,840 40,520 56,000 3 1140 36,840 40,520 55,600
AL4S-5484 93.0 1.5 1140 36 44,080 48,480 55,200 594 2 1140 44,080 48,480 56,000 3 1140 44,080 48,480 56,000
AL4S-54104 93.0 2 1140 36 48,920 53,800 54,400 585 3 1140 49,560 54,520 55,200 3 1140 48,160 52,960 53,200
AL4S-5463 93.0 2 1140 42 37,000 - 76,000 817 3 1140 36,920 - 75,600 5 1140 37,960 - 80,000
AL4S-5483 93.0 3 1140 42 47,160 - 80,000 860 5 1140 47,720 - 82,000 5 1140 47,720 - 82,000
AL4S-54103 93.0 3 1140 42 53,000 - 75,200 809 5 1140 54,680 - 78,800 5 1140 53,760 - 77,200
AL4S-5464 93.0 3 1140 42 44,360 - 80,400 865 5 1140 45,120 - 82,800 5 1140 45,400 - 83,200
AL4S-5484 93.0 3 1140 42 52,560 - 75,600 813 5 1140 54,600 - 80,800 5 1140 54,040 - 79,600
AL4S-54104 93.0 5 1140 42 62,320 - 80,000 860 5 1140 62,320 - 80,000 7.5 1140 63,040 - 81,600
AL4S-5463 93.0 5 1140 42 41,680 - 98,000 1,054 7.5 1140 42,120 - 100,000 7.5 1140 41,120 - 95,200
AL4S-5483 93.0 5 1140 42 51,160 - 94,000 1,011 7.5 1140 52,720 - 100,000 7.5 1140 51,160 - 94,000
AL4S-54103 93.0 7.5 1140 42 61,920 - 100,000 1,075 7.5 1140 60,280 - 94,000 7.5 1750 60,560 - 96,000
AL4S-5464 93.0 5 1140 42 47,880 - 93,600 1,006 7.5 1140 49,280 - 100,000 7.5 1140 47,880 - 94,000
AL4S-5484 93.0 5 1140 42 58,400 - 92,000 989 7.5 1140 59,520 - 96,000 7.5 1750 60,840 - 100,000
AL4S-54104 93.0 7.5 1140 42 68,440 - 94,000 1,011 7.5 1750 70,120 - 98,400 7.5 1750 67,240 - 91,200

K31

Avg.
AL4S-5863 100.8 1.5 1140 36 33,840 37,240 58,400 580 2 1140 34,440 37,880 60,000 3 1140 34,440 37,880 60,400
AL4S-5883 100.8 2 1140 36 41,120 45,240 58,400 580 2 1140 41,200 45,320 58,800 3 1140 41,400 45,560 59,200
AL4S-58103 100.8 2 1140 36 46,440 51,080 57,200 568 3 1140 47,640 52,400 59,600 3 1140 46,560 51,200 57,600
Refrigeration
AL4S-5864 100.8 2 1140 36 39,280 43,200 58,800 584 2 1140 39,480 43,440 59,200 3 1140 39,480 43,440 58,800
AL4S-5884 100.8 2 1140 36 46,440 51,080 57,600 572 3 1140 47,560 52,320 60,000 3 1140 46,960 51,640 58,800
AL4S-58104 100.8 2 1140 36 53,920 59,320 60,000 596 3 1140 53,920 59,320 60,400 3 1140 49,560 54,520 53,600
AL4S-5863 100.8 3 1140 42 41,200 - 87,200 866 5 1140 42,200 - 92,000 5 1140 41,320 - 87,600
AL4S-5883 100.8 3 1140 42 49,760 - 82,400 818 5 1140 51,280 - 87,600 5 1140 50,160 - 84,000
AL4S-58103 100.8 5 1140 42 58,320 - 84,000 834 5 1140 59,240 - 86,400 7.5 1140 60,640 - 90,000
AL4S-5864 100.8 3 1140 42 47,240 - 84,000 834 5 1140 49,480 - 92,000 5 1140 47,760 - 85,200
AL4S-5884 100.8 5 1140 42 60,760 - 92,400 917 5 1140 59,160 - 88,000 7.5 1140 60,760 - 92,400
AL4S-58104 100.8 5 1140 42 67,000 - 85,200 846 5 1140 65,880 - 83,200 7.5 1140 66,600 - 84,800
AL4S-5863 100.8 7.5 1140 42 45,760 - 108,800 1,080 7.5 1140 45,520 - 107,600 7.5 1140 44,120 - 100,000
AL4S-5883 100.8 7.5 1140 42 57,720 - 110,400 1,096 7.5 1140 56,000 - 104,400 7.5 1140 53,680 - 96,000
AL4S-58103 100.8 7.5 1140 42 65,600 - 104,000 1,032 7.5 1750 66,600 - 106,800 7.5 1750 64,600 - 100,400
AL4S-5864 100.8 7.5 1140 42 53,800 - 110,000 1,092 7.5 1140 52,400 - 104,000 7.5 1140 50,680 - 96,800
AL4S-5884 100.8 7.5 1140 42 65,080 - 106,000 1,052 7.5 1140 63,280 - 99,600 7.5 1750 64,160 - 102,800
AL4S-58104 100.8 7.5 1140 42 72,560 - 98,000 973 7.5 1750 73,840 - 101,600 7.5 1750 71,520 - 96,000
AL4S-6363 108.5 2 1140 36 35,280 38,800 60,000 553 3 1140 36,680 40,360 63,600 3 1140 37,000 40,720 64,400
AL4S-6383 108.5 2 1140 36 45,120 49,640 65,200 601 3 1140 45,120 49,640 65,200 3 1140 44,160 48,560 62,800
AL4S-63103 108.5 3 1140 36 51,120 56,240 64,400 594 3 1140 50,560 55,600 62,800 3 1140 48,400 53,240 58,800
AL4S-6364 108.5 2 1140 36 42,840 47,120 65,200 601 3 1140 42,960 47,240 65,200 3 1140 42,080 46,280 62,800
AL4S-6384 108.5 3 1140 36 51,440 56,600 64,800 597 3 1140 50,760 55,840 63,600 3 1140 49,240 54,160 60,800
AL4S-63104 108.5 3 1140 36 57,280 63,000 64,000 590 3 1140 57,600 63,360 64,400 5 1140 58,040 63,840 65,200
AL4S-6363 108.5 3 1140 42 42,960 - 88,000 811 5 1140 44,600 - 95,200 7.5 1140 45,480 - 98,400
AL4S-6383 108.5 5 1140 42 56,320 - 97,600 900 5 1140 54,560 - 92,000 7.5 1140 55,680 - 95,600
AL4S-63103 108.5 5 1140 42 64,360 - 94,400 870 7.5 1140 65,000 - 96,000 7.5 1140 63,680 - 92,800
AL4S-6364 108.5 5 1140 42 53,160 - 98,800 911 5 1140 51,520 - 93,200 7.5 1140 52,520 - 96,400
AL4S-6384 108.5 5 1140 42 64,360 - 96,000 885 7.5 1140 65,200 - 98,800 7.5 1140 63,800 - 94,800
AL4S-63104 108.5 5 1140 42 71,520 - 90,800 837 7.5 1140 73,560 - 95,200 7.5 1140 70,080 - 88,000
AL4S-6363 108.5 7.5 1140 42 49,040 - 116,000 1,069 7.5 1140 47,760 - 110,000 7.5 1750 48,280 - 112,800
AL4S-6383 108.5 7.5 1140 42 60,560 - 113,200 1,043 7.5 1140 58,600 - 106,000 7.5 1750 59,560 - 109,600
AL4S-63103 108.5 7.5 1140 42 68,800 - 106,400 981 7.5 1750 70,000 - 109,600 7.5 1750 67,920 - 104,000
AL4S-6364 108.5 7.5 1140 42 56,320 - 112,000 1,032 7.5 1140 55,240 - 106,800 7.5 1750 55,880 - 109,200
AL4S-6384 108.5 7.5 1140 42 68,480 - 109,200 1,006 7.5 1750 69,440 - 112,000 7.5 1750 67,720 - 106,400
AL4S-63104 108.5 7.5 1140 42 76,600 - 102,000 940 7.5 1750 77,480 - 104,000 7.5 1750 75,280 - 99,200
Physical Data

AL4S-456X 77.5 6 12.8 278 x 53 1/4 x 49 1/2 5,158 6,696 4,053 4,836 6,675 7,332 4,208 4,992
AL4S-458X 77.5 8 16.4 278 x 53 1/4 x 49 1/2 6,877 7,695 4,372 5,397 8,900 8,533 4,580 5,604
AL4S-4510X 77.5 10 19.6 278 x 53 1/4 x 49 1/2 8,597 8,693 4,692 5,957 11,125 9,734 4,951 6,216
AL4S-496X 85.3 6 14.0 278 x 53 1/4 x 54 5,674 6,818 3,944 4,806 7,343 7,517 4,115 4,977
AL4S-498X 85.3 8 18.0 278 x 53 1/4 x 54 7,565 7,917 4,295 5,422 9,790 9,167 4,853 5,980
AL4S-4910X 85.3 10 21.6 278 x 53 1/4 x 54 9,457 9,345 4,977 6,368 12,238 10,488 5,262 6,653
AL4S-546X 93.0 6 15.6 278 x 53 1/4 x 58 1/2 6,190 7,242 4,137 5,076 8,010 8,002 4,323 5,263
AL4S-548X 93.0 8 19.6 278 x 53 1/4 x 58 1/2 8,253 8,440 4,520 5,748 10,680 9,443 4,768 5,997
AL4S-5410X 93.0 10 23.6 278 x 53 1/4 x 58 1/2 10,316 9,968 5,233 6,751 13,350 11,214 5,544 7,061
AL4S-586X 100.8 6 16.8 278 x 53 1/4 x 63 6,706 7,988 4,652 5,670 8,678 8,811 4,854 5,872
AL4S-588X 100.8 8 21.2 278 x 53 1/4 x 63 8,941 9,286 5,067 6,398 11,570 10,372 5,337 6,667
AL4S-5810X 100.8 10 25.6 278 x 53 1/4 x 63 11,176 10,584 5,482 7,126 14,463 11,932 5,819 7,463
AL4S-636X 108.5 6 18.0 278 x 53 1/4 x 67 1/2 7,222 8,405 4,838 5,933 9,345 9,289 5,055 6,151
AL4S-638X 108.5 8 22.8 278 x 53 1/4 x 67 1/2 9,628 9,803 5,285 6,718 12,460 10,970 5,575 7,008
AL4S-6310X 108.5 10 27.6 278 x 53 1/4 x 67 1/2 12,036 11,200 5,732 7,502 15,575 12,651 6,095 7,865

K32
Engineering Drawings
62”
HANGER CL
AL 1
88 3/4”
62” 62”
HANGER CL HANGER CL
AL 2
150 3/4”
62” 62” 62”

AL 3
212 3/4”
62” 62” 62” 62”

HANGER CL HANGER CL HANGER CL HANGER CL
AL 4
274 3/4”

K33
AL-45 = 72 3/8”
AL-49 = 73 3/4”
53 1/8” AL-54 = 76 5/8”
AL-58 = 78 3/4”
33 5/8
HANGER/LEG CL AL-63 = 80 3/4”
33 5/8
Refrigeration
HANGER/LEG CL
AIR AL - 45 = 49 1/2” *
AL - 49 = 54” *
FLOW AL - 54 = 58 1/2” *
AL - 58 = 63” *
AL - 63 = 67 1/2” *
R
* ADD 2 1/2”
AI
FOR OPTIONAL
OW
FL
INSULATED PAN
DRAIN 5 1/2”
FLOW
AIR
1 - 1/2”
FLOW
FLOW
AIR
AIR
FLANGE A
(TYP) S/A 33 5/8”
ADJUSTABLE LEGS B S/A B DEPTH
(TYP) (TYP)
HANGER/LEG CL
WIDTH (TYP) CL
CL CL D
Supply Air Supply Air

Model Width Depth “A” “B” “C” “D”
AL - 45 41 7/8” 30 1/2” 8” 10 1/16” 50 13/16” 78 3/4”
AL - 49 41 7/8” 35” 5 11/16” 10 1/16” 55 1/8” 81 3/4”
AL - 54 46 3/8” 39 1/2” 5” 7 13/16” 59 13/16” 84 3/4”
AL - 58 46 3/8” 44” 3 1/2” 7 13/16” 64 5/16” 87 3/4”
AL - 63 46 3/8” 48 1/2” 2” 7 13/16” 68 13/16” 90 3/4”

K34
AC Engineering Data
Frosted Wet Est. Shipping Wt.

Fan Face Fin Surf. Coil
Model Capacity Fan Pwr. Capacity Pwr. Area Rows Dens. Area Vol. Galv. Alum. SST-Al
Number (BTUH/°F) (HP) (BTUH/°F) (HP) (ft2) Deep (fpi) (ft2) (ft3) (lbs.) (lbs.) (lbs.)
AC1*-4563 6,584 - 10,123 3 - 20 7,243 - 8,396 3 19.4 6 3 1,290 3.2 2,519 1,736 1,996
AC1*-4583 8,071 - 12,754 3 - 20 8,878 -10,313 3 19.4 8 3 1,719 4.1 2,780 1,820 2,146
AC1*-45103 9,231 - 14,986 3 - 20 10,154 - 11,812 3 19.4 10 3 2,149 4.9 3,044 1,906 2,298
AC1*-4564 7,664 - 11,888 3 - 20 8,430 - 9,782 3 19.4 6 4 1,669 3.2 2,684 1,775 2,035
AC1*-4584 9,185 - 14,673 3 - 20 10,103 - 11,747 3 19.4 8 4 2,225 4.1 2,999 1,874 2,200
AC1*-45104 10,385 - 17,080 3 - 20 11,424 - 13,305 3 19.4 10 4 2,781 4.9 3,312 1,972 2,365
AC2*-4563 13,168 - 20,247 3 - 25 14,485 - 16,792 3 - 7.5 38.8 6 3 2,579 6.4 4,357 2,954 3,388
AC2*-4583 16,142 - 25,509 3 - 25 17,756 - 20,626 3 - 7.5 38.8 8 3 3,439 8.2 4,864 3,116 3,675
AC2*-45103 18,462 - 29,973 3 - 25 20,308 - 23,624 3 - 7.5 38.8 10 3 4,299 9.8 5,376 3,283 3,967
AC2*-4564 15,327 - 23,777 3 - 25 16,860 - 19,564 3 - 7.5 38.8 6 4 3,338 6.4 4,679 3,032 3,466
AC2*-4584 18,370 - 29,346 3 - 25 20,207 - 23,494 3 - 7.5 38.8 8 4 4,450 8.2 5,292 3,225 3,784
AC2*-45104 20,770 - 34,160 5 - 25 22,847 - 26,609 5 - 7.5 38.8 10 4 5,563 9.8 5,929 3,441 4,124
AC3*-4563 19,753 - 30,370 5 - 25 21,728 - 25,188 5 - 10 58.1 6 3 3,869 9.6 6,045 4,022 4,631
AC3*-4583 24,213 - 38,263 5 - 25 26,634 - 30,939 5 - 10 58.1 8 3 5,158 12.3 6,798 4,263 5,054
AC3*-45103 27,693 - 44,959 5 - 25 30,462 - 35,436 5 - 10 58.1 10 3 6,448 14.7 7,558 4,511 5,485
AC3*-4564 22,991 - 35,665 7.5 - 25 25,290 - 29,346 7.5 - 10 58.1 6 4 5,006 9.6 6,524 4,138 4,747
AC3*-4584 27,554 - 44,019 7.5 - 25 30,310 - 35,241 7.5 - 10 58.1 8 4 6,675 12.3 7,436 4,426 5,217
AC3*-45104 31,155 - 51,240 7.5 - 25 34,271 - 39,914 7.5 - 10 58.1 10 4 8,344 14.7 8,420 4,785 5,759
AC1*-5463 7,901 - 12,148 5 - 25 8,691 - 10,075 5 23.3 6 3 1,548 3.9 2,851 1,930 2,241
AC1*-5483 9,685 - 15,305 5 - 25 10,654 - 12,376 5 23.3 8 3 2,063 4.9 3,165 2,031 2,421
AC1*-54103 11,077 - 17,984 5 - 25 12,185 - 14,174 5 23.3 10 3 2,579 5.9 3,478 2,131 2,601
AC1*-5464 9,196 - 14,266 5 - 25 10,116 - 11,738 5 23.3 6 4 2,003 3.9 3,048 1,977 2,288
AC1*-5484 11,022 - 17,608 5 - 25 12,124 - 14,096 5 23.3 8 4 2,670 4.9 3,423 2,093 2,483
AC1*-54104 12,462 - 20,496 5 - 25 13,078 - 15,965 5 23.3 10 4 3,338 5.9 3,799 2,210 2,680
AC2*-5463 15,802 - 24,296 5 - 25 17,382 - 20,150 5 - 10 46.5 6 3 3,095 7.8 4,873 3,224 3,745
AC2*-5483 19,370 - 30,610 5 - 25 21,307 - 24,751 5 - 10 46.5 8 3 4,126 9.8 5,482 3,419 4,089
AC2*-54103 22,154 - 35,967 5 - 25 24,370 - 28,348 5 - 10 46.5 10 3 5,158 11.8 6,090 3,614 4,433
AC2*-5464 18,393 - 28,532 5 - 25 20,232 - 23,477 5 - 10 46.5 6 4 4,005 7.8 5,258 3,318 3,838
AC2*-5484 22,044 - 35,215 5 - 25 24,248 - 28,193 5 - 10 46.5 8 4 5,340 9.8 5,988 3,543 4,213
AC2*-54104 24,924 - 40,992 5 - 25 27,417 - 31,931 5 - 15 46.5 10 4 6,675 11.8 6,721 3,772 4,591
AC3*-5463 23,703 - 36,445 7.5 - 25 26,074 - 30,225 7.5 - 15 69.8 6 3 4,643 11.7 6,887 4,510 5,240
AC3*-5483 29,055 - 45,916 7.5 - 25 31,961 - 37,127 7.5 - 15 69.8 8 3 6,190 14.7 7,790 4,799 5,748
AC3*-54103 33,231 - 53,951 10 - 25 36,555 - 42,523 10 - 20 69.8 10 3 7,737 17.7 8,724 5,118 6,286
AC3*-5464 27,589 - 42,798 7.5 - 25 30,348 - 35,215 7.5 - 15 69.8 6 4 6,008 11.7 7,460 4,650 5,380
AC3*-5484 33,065 - 52,823 7.5 - 25 36,372 - 42,289 10 - 20 69.8 8 4 8,010 14.7 8,575 5,016 5,965
AC3*-54104 37,386 - 61,488 10 - 25 41,125 - 47,896 10 - 20 69.8 10 4 10,013 17.7 9,665 5,356 6,524
AC1*-6363 9,218 - 14,173 3 - 20 10,140 - 11,754 3 27.1 6 3 1,805 4.5 3,436 2,377 2,740
AC1*-6383 11,299 - 17,856 3 - 20 12,429 - 14,438 3 27.1 8 3 2,407 5.7 3,802 2,495 2,950
AC1*-63103 12,923 - 20,981 3 - 20 14,216 - 16,537 3 27.1 10 3 3,009 6.9 4,173 2,617 3,164
AC1*-6364 10,729 - 16,644 3 - 20 11,802 - 13,695 3 27.1 6 4 2,336 4.5 3,665 2,432 2,794
AC1*-6384 12,859 - 20,542 3 - 20 14,145 - 16,446 3 27.1 8 4 3,115 5.7 4,108 2,572 3,027
AC1*-63104 14,539 - 23,912 3 - 20 15,993 - 18,626 3-5 27.1 10 4 3,894 6.9 4,545 2,707 3,255
AC2*-6363 18,436 - 28,346 5 - 40 20,279 - 23,509 5 - 7.5 54.3 6 3 3,611 9.0 5,767 3,873 4,479
AC2*-6383 22,598 - 35,712 5 - 40 24,858 - 28,876 5 - 7.5 54.3 8 3 4,814 11.4 6,477 4,100 4,881
AC2*-63103 25,847 - 41,962 7.5 - 40 28,431 - 33,073 7.5 54.3 10 3 6,018 13.8 7,272 4,412 5,367
AC2*-6364 21,458 - 33,287 5 - 40 23,604 - 27,390 5 - 7.5 54.3 6 4 4,673 9.0 6,215 3,981 4,588
AC2*-6384 25,717 - 41,085 7.5 - 40 28,289 - 32,891 7.5 54.3 8 4 6,230 11.4 7,152 4,330 5,111
AC2*-63104 29,078 - 47,824 7.5 - 40 31,986 - 37,253 7.5 54.3 10 4 7,788 13.8 8,004 4,593 5,548
AC3*-6363 27,654 - 42,519 7.5 - 50 30,419 - 35,263 7.5 - 10 81.4 6 3 5,416 13.5 8,099 5,368 6,219
AC3*-6383 33,898 - 53,568 7.5 - 50 37,287 - 43,314 7.5 - 10 81.4 8 3 7,221 17.1 9,153 5,705 6,812
AC3*-63103 38,770 - 62,942 10 - 50 42,647 - 49,610 10 81.4 10 3 9,027 20.7 10,251 6,087 7,450
AC3*-6364 32,187 - 49,931 7.5 - 50 35,406 - 41,085 7.5 - 10 81.4 6 4 7,009 13.5 8,765 5,531 6,382
AC3*-6384 38,576 - 61,627 10 - 50 42,434 - 49,337 10 81.4 8 4 9,345 17.1 10,077 5,968 7,075
AC3*-63104 43,618 - 71,736 10 - 50 47,979 - 55,879 10 - 15 81.4 10 4 11,681 20.7 11,343 6,359 7,722

K35
62"
HANGER/LEG ?
50 3/16"
HANGER/LEG ?
5 7/8" AC-45 = 50 5/8"

(TYP.) AC-54 = 50 5/8"
AC-63 = 66 1/4" 33 5/8"
Refrigeration
16 5/8" HANGER/LEG ? HANGER/LEG ?
AIR
AC-45 = 49 1/2"
AC-45 = 53 1/2"
FLOW AC-54 = 54" *
AC-54 = 62 1/2"
AC-63 = 67 1/2"
AC-63 = 71 1/2"
Unit Height
SHIPPING HEIGHT
AC-45 = 102" *
DRAIN
AC-54 = 102" *
AC-63 = 117 3/8"
88 3/4" UNIT WIDTH
62" 62" 62" 62"

HANGER/LEG ? HANGER/LEG ? HANGER/LEG ? HANGER/LEG ?
56 1/8" 56 1/8" 36 1/8" 40" 36 1/8"

HANGER/LEG ? HANGER/LEG ? HANGER/LEG ? HANGER/LEG ? HANGER/LEG ?
150 3/4" 150 3/4"
62" 62" 62" 62" 62" 62"

HANGER/LEG ? HANGER/LEG ? HANGER/LEG ? HANGER/LEG ? HANGER/LEG ? HANGER/LEG ?
56 1/8" 62" 56 1/8" 41 5/8" 45 1/2" 45 1/2" 41 5/8"

HANGER/LEG ? HANGER/LEG ? HANGER/LEG ? HANGER/LEG ? HANGER/LEG ? HANGER/LEG ? HANGER/LEG ?
212 3/4" 212 3/4"
Notes:
1. Capacities and HP reflect a partial product offering in the 600 fpm to 1,100 fpm face velocity range. Capacity is affected by material of
construction (both steel and aluminum shown), horsepower, and face velocity requirements. For project-specific selections, contact your
local BAC Representative.
2. Models available in 0” to 2” external static pressure options. Capacities shown are at 0” ESP.
3. Overstating static pressure could result in oversized motor selections, resulting in overamping.
4. All models ship with motors installed. AC**-63** models utilize a swing-away motor base to allow for this feature.

K36
AR Engineering Data
Models AR2S-2744 to AR2S-4084

AR2S-2744-033L 3,550 3,910 7,500 645 1/3 1140 20 11.6 4 4 668 1.4 1,225 792 944
AR2S-2764-033L 4,650 5,120 7,100 611 1/3 1140 20 11.6 6 4 1,001 1.9 1,411 860 1,069
AR2S-2784-050L 5,740 6,310 7,500 645 1/2 1140 20 11.6 8 4 1,335 2.4 1,598 927 1,194
AR3S-2744-033L 5,320 5,850 11,250 645 1/3 1140 20 17.4 4 4 1,001 1.8 1,546 1,024 1,211
AR3S-2764-033L 6,980 7,680 10,650 611 1/3 1140 20 17.4 6 4 1,502 2.5 1,775 1,108 1,370
AR3S-2784-050L 8,610 9,470 11,250 645 1/2 1140 20 17.4 8 4 2,003 3.3 2,003 1,192 1,528
AR4S-2744-033L 7,090 7,800 15,000 645 1/3 1140 20 23.3 4 4 1,335 2.2 1,868 1,256 1,478
AR4S-2764-033L 9,300 10,230 14,200 611 1/3 1140 20 23.3 6 4 2,003 3.2 2,138 1,356 1,670
AR4S-2784-050L 11,490 12,640 15,000 645 1/2 1140 20 23.3 8 4 2,670 4.1 2,408 1,456 1,863
AR5S-2744-033L 8,860 9,750 18,750 645 1/3 1140 20 29.1 4 4 1,669 2.6 2,189 1,488 1,745
AR5S-2764-033L 11,630 12,790 17,750 611 1/3 1140 20 29.1 6 4 2,503 3.8 2,501 1,604 1,971
AR5S-2784-050L 14,360 15,800 18,750 645 1/2 1140 20 29.1 8 4 3,338 4.9 2,813 1,721 2,197
AR6S-2744-033L 10,640 11,700 22,500 645 1/3 1140 20 34.9 4 4 2,003 3.1 2,510 1,720 2,012
AR6S-2764-033L 13,950 15,350 21,300 611 1/3 1140 20 34.9 6 4 3,004 4.4 2,864 1,852 2,271
AR6S-2784-050L 17,230 18,950 22,500 645 1/2 1140 20 34.9 8 4 4,005 5.7 3,219 1,985 2,531
AR2S-4044-050L 5,230 5,750 10,800 619 1/2 1140 24 17.4 4 4 1,001 2.1 1,574 956 1,182
AR2S-4064-050L 6,910 7,600 10,400 596 1/2 1140 24 17.4 6 4 1,502 2.9 1,847 1,050 1,363
AR2S-4084-050L 8,020 8,820 10,000 573 1/2 1140 24 17.4 8 4 2,003 3.7 2,120 1,145 1,543
AR3S-4044-050L 7,850 8,640 16,200 619 1/2 1140 24 26.2 4 4 1,502 2.7 1,970 1,226 1,505
AR3S-4064-050L 10,360 11,400 15,600 596 1/2 1140 24 26.2 6 4 2,253 3.8 2,304 1,343 1,734
AR3S-4084-050L 12,030 13,230 15,000 573 1/2 1140 24 26.2 8 4 3,004 4.9 2,637 1,460 1,963
AR4S-4044-050L 10,460 11,510 21,600 619 1/2 1140 24 34.9 4 4 2,003 3.4 2,366 1,496 1,828
AR4S-4064-050L 13,810 15,190 20,800 596 1/2 1140 24 34.9 6 4 3,004 4.7 2,760 1,635 2,105
AR4S-4084-050L 16,040 17,640 20,000 573 1/2 1140 24 34.9 8 4 4,005 6.1 3,154 1,774 2,382
AR5S-4044-050L 13,080 14,390 27,000 619 1/2 1140 24 43.6 4 4 2,503 4.0 2,762 1,767 2,151
AR5S-4064-050L 17,260 18,990 26,000 596 1/2 1140 24 43.6 6 4 3,755 5.7 3,216 1,928 2,476
AR5S-4084-050L 20,050 22,060 25,000 573 1/2 1140 24 43.6 8 4 5,006 7.3 3,671 2,089 2,802
AR6S-4044-050L 15,690 17,260 32,400 619 1/2 1140 24 52.3 4 4 3,004 4.6 3,158 2,037 2,473
AR6S-4064-050L 20,720 22,790 31,200 596 1/2 1140 24 52.3 6 4 4,506 6.6 3,673 2,220 2,847
AR6S-4084-050L 24,060 26,470 30,000 573 1/2 1140 24 52.3 8 4 6,008 8.6 4,188 2,404 3,221

K37
AR 2
Refrigeration
AR 3
AR 4
AR 5
AR 6

K38
Engineering Applications
Coil Connections
Following are general guidelines for connection types Galvanized steel coil connections will be capped car-
and sizes for various construction options, refriger- bon steel pipe, Schedule 80 for less than 2” diame-
ant systems, and unit capacities. Pump recirculated ter and Schedule 40 elsewhere. Aluminum coils will
guidelines are based on overfeed ratios of 3:1 for am- ship with an aluminum flange and a mating carbon
monia and 2:1 for halocarbons. Please refer to factory steel flange. Stainless steel coils will terminate with a
certified data for specific project requirements. capped carbon steel stub to facilitate field piping. Hot
gas defrost connections in the pan will be capped car-
bon steel.
Table 3. Ammonia Connection Size Guidelines – Iron Pipe Sizes
Pump Recirculated (3:1) Flooded Direct Exp.
Capacity Liquid Liquid Suction

Per Conn. Suction Temperature (˚F) Suction Temperature Temperature (˚F)
Feed Feed
+40 +20 0 –20 –40 +40 +20 0 –20 –40 +30 +10
2.5 Tons 0.75 0.75 1 1 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.5 2 2 0.75 1
5 Tons 0.75 1 1 1.25 1.5 2 1.5 1.5 2 2 2.5 3 1 1.25
10 Tons 0.75 1.25 1.25 2 2 2.5 2 2 2 2.5 3 4 1.25 1.25
15 Tons 0.75 1.25 1.5 2 2.5 3 2.5 2.5 2.5 3 4 4 1.25 1.5
20 Tons 0.75 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 3 3 3 3 4 5 1.5 2
25 Tons 1 2 2 2.5 3 4 3 3 3 4 4 5 1.5 2
30 Tons 1 2 2.5 3 4 5 3 3 3 4 5 5 2 2
35 Tons 1 2 2.5 3 4 5 4 4 4 4 5 6 2 2.5
40 Tons 1 2 2.5 3 4 5 4 4 4 4 5 6 * *
Table 4. R-22 Connection Size Guidelines – Iron Pipe Sizes

Warning:
Pump Recirculated (2:1) Direct Expansion
Do not use connection size
Capacity Liquid
Suction Temperature (˚F)
Suction estimates to size system piping.
Per Conn. Feed Temperature (˚F)
+40 +20 0 –20 –40 +30 +10 -10
2.5 Tons 0.75 1 1.25 1.25 1.5 2 1 1 1.25

5 Tons 0.75 1.25 1.5 1.5 2 2.5 1.25 1.25 1.5
10 Tons 1 1.5 2 2.5 2.5 3 1.5 2 2
15 Tons 1.25 2 2.5 2.5 3 4 2 2 2.5
20 Tons 1.25 2 2.5 3 4 4 2 2.5 3
25 Tons 1.25 2.5 3 3 4 5 2.5 2.5 3
30 Tons 1.5 2.5 3 4 4 5 2.5 3 *
35 Tons 1.5 3 3 4 4 5 2.5 3 *
40 Tons 1.5 3 3 4 5 6 * * *

K39
Following are the schematics of coil connection locations for a right hand unit, identifying the general location of
liquid feed (L), suction (S), hot gas feed (G), and hot gas defrost relief (R) locations.
AS, AM, AL and AC Units:

Air/Water Defrost Hot Gas Defrost
FL RT DX FL RT DX
SL S L G
Refrigeration
G G
FAN FAN
S S L S G S S
L R R R R
L L L
FEED SYSTEMS
AR Units:
Air/Water Defrost: Hot Gas Defrost:
FAN FAN
S G S
RB/FL RB/FL
L L R L
G L
RT RT
S L R S
L
G
DX DX
S R S
Motor Amperage
The capacities of TEAO motors increase as room temperatures decrease due to the increased cooling effects
of the colder, denser air. This increase in capacity more than accommodates the motor amp draw increase that
also results from the colder, denser air. For reference, Tables 5 and 6 provide approximate motor full load amps
(FLA) and air density correction factors for a range of room temperatures.
Table 5. Approximate Motor Nameplate FLA (3-Ph/60-Hz)

Motor (hp) 200V 230V 460V 575V
1/3 hp 2.1 1.8 0.9 0.7
1/2 hp 2.8 2.4 1.2 1
3/4 hp 3.5 3.1 1.5 1.2
1 hp 4.3 3.7 1.9 1.5
1.5 hp 5.3 4.6 2.3 1.8
2 hp 7 6.8 3.4 2.4
3 hp 10.4 9.1 4.5 3.6
5 hp 16.4 14.5 7.3 5.8
7.5 hp 21.5 18.9 9.4 7.5
Table 6. Air Density Correction Factors

Room Temp. +40°F +20°F 0°F -20°F -30°F
Factor 1.06 1.11 1.15 1.21 1.26

K40
Nomenclature
Style of Evaporator AS, AM, AL, AR or AC
Motor HP
033 – 1/3 hp
050 – 1/2 hp
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 8 075 – 3/4 hp AD – Air defrost
100 – 1 hp GC – Hot gas, coil only
150 – 1.5 hp GU – Hot gas, coil & pan
S – Galvanized steel 200 – 2 hp WD – Water defrost
A – Aluminum 300 – 3 hp ED – Electric defrost, coil only
3 – Stainless-aluminum 500 – 5 hp EU – Electric defrost, coil & pan
C – Copper-aluminum 750 – 7.5 hp
S – Standard (paddle fan)

S – 870 RPM F – 45° down discharge
L – 1140 RPM P – Penthouse 90° down
H – 1750 RPM L – Long throw adaptor
4 – 0.25” E.S.P.
2 – 0.5” E.S.P.
AL 2 S – 54 10 3 – 300 L – A RB – GU – S – R
R – Right hand
(nom.) L – Left hand
31” A – Ammonia
,
36” F – Halocarbon RB – Recirculated, bottom
40 B – Brine/water/glycol RT – Recirculated, top
45” 6, 8, or 10 FL - Flooded
49” DX – Direct expansion
54” 3 or 4 PB – Control pressure bottom
58” V – Vari-Fin PT – Control pressure top
or
63”

K41
Aircoil™ Evaporator Application Guide

Table of contents
Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .K41
Load Estimating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .K44
Fin Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .K45
Face Velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .K46
Refrigeration
Feed Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .K47
Defrost Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .K51
Condensate Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .K53
Unit Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .K54
Terminology
For clarification purposes, below are terms and abbreviations used throughout this application guide.
Tubes
(Primary Surface)
Support
Frame
End Return
Cap Bend
Inlet / Outlet
Liquid / Suction
Headers
Fins
(Secondary Surface)
Tubesheet Structural
Channel
Room Temperature – This is the room temperature that is drawn into the air unit and is used to determine
the TD of the air unit. For clarification, the air that discharges from the air unit and travels to the opposite
end of the room will be approximately 5°F colder. Therefore, the average room temperature will be the
average of the two.
Supply Air Temperature – This is the temperature of the air as it leaves the air unit. In a draw-through unit,
it is slightly warmer than the air leaving the coil face as it has absorbed the fan motor energy.
Dry Coil – A coil where water vapor will not condense or freeze on to the coil surface.
Wet Coil – Water vapor is condensed out of the air onto the coil surface. This occurs when the coil surface
temperature is below the dew point of the entering air. The face velocity should be kept below 625 fpm on
wet coils to prevent moisture carryover, also called “spitting.”

K42
Frosted Coil – A coil with ice or frost on the fins and tubes. This occurs when the coil surface temperature is
below freezing and there is moisture condensing out of the air. There are separate ratings for wet versus
frosted coils because frost acts as an insulating barrier to heat transfer, which reduces capacity.
Evaporator / Air Unit / Air Handling Unit / Aircoil / Fan Coil / Product Cooler / Unit Cooler – This is a
finned, tubular air to refrigerant heat exchanger with one or more fans for moving the air and a drain pan to
capture the condensate.
Coil / Bare Coil / Coil Slab – This is a free standing finned, tubular air to refrigerant heat exchanger with no
Aircoil™ Evaporators Application Guide
attached fans. It may or may not include a drain pan.
Finned Height – The height of the fin in a bare coil.
Finned Length – The length of the portion of coil tubes that are covered with fins.
Face Area – The finned height multiplied by the finned length, typically expressed in ft2.
FINNED
HEIGHT
AIR
FINNED LENGTH
Face Velocity – The airflow through the coil divided by the face area of the coil; expressed in ft/min (fpm).
Finned Depth – The length of the fin in the direction of air flow.
Rows Deep – The number of tube rows that the air passes through.
Tubes High – The number of tubes in each row of the coil.
Fin Spacing – The number of fins per inch (FPI) of finned length. Typically, this is 3, 4 or 6 FPI for industrial
refrigeration applications.

K43
Variable Fin Spacing (Vari-Fin) – For severe frost applications, fins on the air inlet face of the coil have
wider spacing than the remainder of the coil. Fin spacing is 2 fins/inch (fpi) or 1.5 fpi for the first 2 rows and
4 fpi or 3 fpi, respectively, for the remaining rows. Performance must be de-rated accordingly.
Liquid Connection – This is the field connection point for the liquid supply (refrigerant inlet) to the coil.
Generally this is a pipe stub for welding or brazing, a dielectric flange, or a di-electric welded coupling.
Liquid Header – This is the pipe that connects the liquid connection to all of the individual / parallel circuits
in a coil. A liquid header is only used when the amount of flash gas in this header is minimal (otherwise a
Refrigeration
refrigerant distributor is used). It can be oriented either vertically or horizontally depending on the desired
style of liquid feed.
Refrigerant Distributor – If there is flash gas present in the liquid feed, a distributor is used to proportion-
ately divide the liquid and vapor flow to each circuit. It is usually a conical device with tubular leads situated
around the base of the distribution cone. The refrigerant is passed through an orifice prior to impinging on
the point of the cone. Distributors are always used on DX feed systems and occasionally on control pressure
receiver (CPR) feed systems.
Suction Connection – This is the field connection point for the suction (refrigerant outlet) from the coil.
Generally this is a pipe stub for welding or brazing, or a di-electric flange.
Evaporator Temperature / Evaporating Temperature / Coil Temperature – This is the temperature of the
refrigerant in the coil, typically slightly higher than the suction temperature due to pipe friction losses.
TD (Temperature Difference) – Room Temperature minus the Coil Temperature.
∆T (Delta T) – Room Temperature minus Discharge Air Temperature from the air unit.
Feed Types – For information on feed types (recirculated, flooded, direct expansion, etc.), see page K47.
Defrost Methods – For information on defrost methods (air, hot gas, electric, water, etc.), see page K51.
Recirculation Rate – GPM or mass flow pumped into a coil divided by the GPM or mass flow evaporated in
the coil.
Defrost Condensate – The water that is melted from the coil during defrost.
Refrigerant Condensate – The refrigerant that is condensed during the hot gas defrost process.
Static Pressure Drop (in. wc) – This is the air pressure drop through the coil due to friction, generally
expressed in inches water column.
External Static Pressure – The pressure losses external to the air unit, typically imposed by ductwork or
the product being cooled.
Total Static Pressure – The sum of the static pressure plus the external static pressure. This is the pres-
sure that the fan(s) is selected for.
Paddle Fan – This fan type has stamped aluminum sheet metal blades which have a slight curve. They are
generally riveted to a steel hub. This type of fan is very sensitive to static pressure and generally has a very
scattered air discharge pattern which contributes to a short air throw.

K44
Axial Fan – This type of fan uses cast aluminum fan blades that have an airfoil cross section. It is capable of
higher static pressures. The air throw can be up to 150 ft or more with a long throw adaptor.
Centrifugal Fan – In this application the centrifugal fan most used is the forward curved type. It is quiet and
economical to produce. It is generally used when high external static pressures are required or there are
stringent sound requirements.
Drain Pan – This is the pan that is situated under the coil to collect the moisture that drains from the coil
during operation or defrost.
Insulated Drain Pan – The water draining from a coil during operation is generally below the dew point of
the room air which is drawn under the pan back to the air unit. The cold pan surface will sweat if not
insulated. A sheet metal outer cover is added to protect the insulation.
Hot Gas Drain Pan – In rooms near or below freezing, any water in the pan will have a tendency to freeze
unless heated. A coil is placed between the pan and the insulated outer cover to warm the pan to above
freezing when the coil is defrosting.
Electric Drain Pan – Same as above, only with electric heaters in lieu of a hot gas coil.
Load Estimating
The selection of any refrigeration equipment must first start with an estimate of the cooling load in the room
or from the process.
In some instances, this can be as simple as replacing existing equipment with known capacity, by rule of
thumb, or as complicated as a detailed load and process analysis.
Refrigeration loads are primarily comprised of four segments: transmission, infiltration, product and other.
Transmission Loads – This is the heat gain that is transmitted through the walls due to the conductance of
the wall, roof and floor construction materials. This heat gain is directly proportional to the temperature
difference across the walls. Refrigerated spaces are very well insulated. Typically 4” or more of urethane or
polystyrene insulation is used in a laminated, metal skinned panel wall.
Care and judgment should be exercised when evaluating older buildings and using insulation values of
unknown origin. With the phase-out of CFC’s as a foam blowing agent, many insulations are no longer as
thermally efficient as the originally published values. In addition, as some insulations age, the CFC or HFC
blowing agent leaches out and air with water vapor replaces it. This leads to thermal degradation. Insulations
that do not have a solid vapor barrier will absorb moisture from the increased vapor pressure of the colder
environment. Adjust the transmission load accordingly.
The outside color of the walls and roof also has an influence on the load if it is exposed to the sun. Darker
outside surfaces will absorb heat and increase the temperature differences across the panel. White panels
and roof membrane are the optimum for minimal heat gain.
Infiltration Loads – This is the portion of the load that comes from the air exchange that occurs when the
doors are opened. Additionally, older buildings and /or poorly constructed buildings may have leaks which
allow outside air in. Please note that colder rooms have a lower vapor pressure and air contracts as it cools,
this means that outside air is always flowing into a colder space.

K45
When doors are open, a flow pattern is established that consists of denser cold air flowing out of the cold
room into the warmer room across the lower portion of the door. As the cold air flows out, the volume must
be replaced with air that flows in from the warm room through the upper half of the door. There are
equations available to predict the amount of flow.
The amount of infiltration can be roughly calculated by estimating the number of air changes in the room
over a 24 hour period. A more detailed approach is to estimate the traffic flow into and out of the room and
estimate the amount of door open time and subsequent air exchange.
Refrigeration
The load is calculated from the enthalpy difference of the inside air and the infiltrated outside air times the
mass of air exchanged. The enthalpy and density of the air can be extracted from a psychrometric chart.
Product Loads – Typically most product to be stored, frozen or processed enters the room at a higher
temperature, which creates load. The amount of load depends on the heat content of the product, the mass
of the product and the temperature drop incurred over a defined time period. If the room is below the
product’s freezing temperature and the product is in the room long enough to partially or fully freeze, the
latent load of freezing must be taken into account. This is usually significantly higher than the sensible
cooling load alone and should not be ignored.
If the product is fresh fruit or vegetables, there is a heat load from the respiration of these items.
The sensible, latent and respiration heat loads are available in the ASHRAE Refrigeration handbook.
Other Loads – These loads consist of the additional internal items in the room that give off heat such as
lights, motors, air unit fan motors, defrost loads, fork trucks and people.
Safety Factor – When all of the calculations have been completed, the result should be compared to rules
of thumb to be sure that there were no omissions or errors. A safety factor is almost always incorporated into
the total load.
Air Unit Operating Time – All air units operating below freezing require down time for defrosting. This time
is not available for cooling, therefore the capacity of the installed air units must be proportionately larger to
remove 24 hours of heat gain in less hours due to lost time due to defrost. With matched systems with air
cooled condensing units, the condensing unit must be proportionately enlarged as well.
Fin Spacing
The distance between fins in a coil is generally expressed with the term fins per inch (FPI). Note: In Europe,
the fin spacing is expressed directly in mm. The spacing of the fins is a trade off of the coil’s ability to
accumulate water, frost or dirt and its performance. In other words, greater fin density leads to higher
performance but it will clog faster.
In industrial refrigeration applications, 3, 4 & 6 fins per inch are commonly used. The various fin densities
have considerations as follows:
Bare Tube – This has the poorest heat transfer capacity due to the lack of overall surface area but a
significant amount of moisture can be frozen on to the tube with very little effect on air flow resistance and a
tolerable effect on heat transfer. Generally, only the first two rows of any coil are bare. These serve as
moisture gatherers to reduce the frost load on the remaining rows.

K46
1.5 & 2 FPI this fin spacing is generally accomplished by skipping every other fin in a 3 or 4 FPI configuration
on the first two rows of a coil (BAC’s Vari-Fin option). For applications where there is an intermittent high
load such as above a door in a freezer that opens to an un-refrigerated room or a process room with
washdown, it is good practice to use variable fin spacing such as 1.5/3 or 2/4 FPI. The first two rows are
able to accumulate a significant amount of frost without clogging the air entering face of the coil.
3 FPI is used when the coil is operating below freezing and moisture laden air has a short and direct path to
the coil. This will deposit the moisture directly on the fins creating a high loading rate. If the air has a chance
to mix with the colder room air, the moisture loading will not be as high and 4 FPI can be used for a more
economical coil selection.
4 FPI can be used in a below freezing room as noted above. This would be an example of a penthouse
application or a room with vestibules into the freezer which projects the infiltrated air to the discharge side of
the air unit. 4 FPI is the most common fin spacing for rooms over 32°F.
6 FPI is usually the minimum fin spacing encountered in industrial refrigeration for two reasons: hot dipped
galvanizing has a tendency to clog 8 FPI or higher coils, and industrial refrigeration applications generally do
not have filtered air so dirt in the coil and cleanability are issues. 6 FPI coils should only be applied in rooms
with wet coils.
Application Fin Spacing (FPI) Room Temperature
HVAC 6 to 14 Above 45˚F
Coolers 4 to 6 Above 32˚F
Freezers 3 Below 32˚F
High Latent Freezers Variable Low Temperature
Face Velocity
Face velocity is defined as the volume of air flow divided by the face area of the coil. It is usually expressed
in feet per minute (fpm). When the coil is operating in any room above freezing, water can be carried off of
the face of the coil and into the room at high velocities, typically over 625 fpm. To avoid this carryover (also
called “spitting”), follow the guidelines below.
Room
Coil Temperature Coil Surface Face Velocity
Temperature
Above 30˚F Above 32˚F Wet 625 fpm or Less
Below 32˚F Above 32˚F Possibly Wet 625 fpm or less
Below 32˚F Below 32˚F Frosted No Limit (450 - 1,100 fpm)

K47
Refrigeration Feed Types for Aircoil™ Evaporators

For a finned tube evaporator to work most efficiently, the entire inside tube surface must be covered with a
thin layer of liquid refrigerant. If too little liquid refrigerant is present, portions of the tube dry out and the heat
transfer coefficient drops significantly. The following feed types regulate the refrigerant feed rates in different
ways.
Recirculated
Recirculated feed is when a coil has more liquid refrigerant flowing through it than it evaporates. The
Refrigeration
recirculation rate is defined as the mass circulated divided by the mass evaporated. Overfeeding the coil
ensures that the entire internal surface of the coil is wet with liquid refrigerant for maximum heat transfer
efficiency. The minimum and maximum recirculation rates are governed by the following parameters:
The minimum rate must be enough to ensure that there is sufficient liquid refrigerant present at the outlet of
every circuit to prevent dry tube wall areas. This would be enough liquid to create a full film around the
complete internal perimeter of the coil. It is a function of the surface tension, viscosity and velocity of the
refrigerant and the roughness of the tube surface. Bear in mind that most coils have many parallel circuits
that may not be identical in design or loading. Therefore, the heavier loaded and longer circuits will force a
higher recirculation rate for the lighter loaded and shorter circuits. If the minimum overfeed rate is not met,
the coil’s capacity will drop off significantly and rapidly, as the vapor heat transfer coefficient is much lower
than the boiling liquid coefficient.
Any excess overfeed beyond the minimum required rate will progressively diminish the coil capacity by
adding internal pressure drop to the coil. This pressure drop comes from the shear and friction losses of
moving additional liquid refrigerant through the coil. As the internal pressure drop goes up, the saturated
temperature goes up as well. The capacity of a coil is decreased with higher temperatures. In addition, the
overfed liquid creates additional pressure drop in the suction pipes back to the compressor room.
Ammonia overfeed rates can be as low as 2:1 with low temperature applications where the exit of the tube
will have high velocities. A properly circuited coil should not require more than a 3:1 overfeed rate. However,
there are instances where the minimum orifice diameter is dictated by clogging, hot gas and oil passage
considerations. In these instances, the overfeed rate on small coils with short circuit lengths can be as high
as 5 or 6:1.
Now that we have discussed the amount of overfeed, let’s look at the direction. A coil can be fed in to the
bottom and up through the circuits (recirc bottom), in to the top and down through the circuits (recirc top), or,
rarely, horizontally through the coil.
Top feed coils are generally used when there is no hot gas defrost to “back flush” the coil. They have the
benefit of a lower refrigerant charge during part load operation and they are free draining upon shut down.
Top feed coils can be hot gas defrosted but the orifices at the beginning of each circuit will limit the hot gas
flow. This is the reason for a lower evaporating limit of 10˚ to 20˚F on hot gas defrosted, conventionally top
fed coils.
Bottom feed coils will have roughly the same refrigerant charge at design conditions as a top fed coil. This
is due to equivalent velocity sweep through the coil. At part load, this velocity sweep slows down and liquid
will accumulate in the coil. At very low loads, the coil will be almost full of liquid refrigerant. Care must be
exercised in the system design to provide this liquid reserve to fill the coil and to accommodate the liquid
surge when a load is suddenly applied and the liquid is sent back to the compressor room.

K48
Even in consideration of the greater charge, bottom fed coils are preferred for low temperature applications,
below +10˚F coil temperatures, because of superior defrosting characteristics. The hot gas is usually fed into
the suction of the coil and flows down hill and against the normal refrigerant flow. This warms and sweeps the
oil out of the coil. From the hot gas perspective, an orifice is encountered at the end of each circuit, which will
pass condensed refrigerant at a rate proportional to the pressure differential across the orifice. This is
approximately the hot gas supply pressure to the coil, less the setting of the defrost relief regulator. This
orifice governs the pressure drop of each circuit, effectively ensuring a balanced flow through each circuit. If
a circuit is totally defrosted and there is little condensation occurring, the orifice will pass gas, which will
severely limit the mass flow, greatly reducing the false load back to the compressors.
Flooded
Gravity flooded coils are the simplest arrangement; there are no feed control valves to the coil. A refrigerant
level is maintained in the surge drum and the static head differential feeds the refrigerant through the coil.
The elevation of the liquid level relative to the top of the coil and the piping design are the controlling
parameters.
The liquid refrigerant is supplied to the coil by gravity from a surge drum that is elevated above the unit. The
refrigerant vapor and any un-evaporated liquid is swept up the outlet pipe to the surge drum for separation
and recirculation due to the density difference of pure liquid refrigerant and the refrigerant liquid/vapor mix-
ture. The make-up liquid refrigerant is supplied to the surge drum to maintain a set level.
Direct Expansion
Uses a thermal expansion valve (TXV) to control the flow of refrigerant into the coil. A TD (temperature
difference) of 12°F is required to create 10°F of superheat, which is the minimum required to fully stroke the
ammonia duty thermal expansion valve. This results in a performance decrease over a fully wetted,
recirculated or flooded feed coil.
Coils that are fed with a thermal expansion valve are known as direct expansion (DX) fed coils. The thermal
expansion valve can be as basic as a conventional bulb and diaphragm type or as sophisticated as a pulsed
or stepper motor electronic valve.
The control parameter for a DX fed coil is the superheat at the outlet of the coil. Superheat is created by
limiting the rate of liquid refrigerant flow into the coil, so that all of it boils off and the remaining vapor absorbs
additional heat from the room air. This superheated vapor temperature is compared to the saturated
temperature that corresponds with the coil outlet pressure. The feed valve is controlled to maintain a set
amount of superheat.
Because superheat is generated from the room air temperature, it can never be greater than the coil TD, less
the slight (1-2˚F) temperature difference required for heat transfer to occur between the room air on the
outside of the coil and the refrigerant vapor on the inside. Coils typically have multiple parallel circuits, which
have slightly different flow characteristics. The superheat that is sensed at the outlet of the coil is an average
of all circuits.
Most conventional TXV’s require 6˚F superheat to overcome the internal spring pressure and lift the needle
off from the seat and initiate the flow of refrigerant. From there, 4˚F of additional superheat is required to fully
open the valve. In other words, a 10 ton valve has no capacity at 6˚F of superheat, 5 tons of capacity at 8˚F
and 10 tons of capacity and 10˚F of superheat. Keep in mind that an 11 or 12˚F TD over the coil is required
to create the 10˚F of superheat.

K49
If a coil is forced to operate at a lower superheat, the TXV cannot fully open. For instance, an 8˚F superheat
will result in the TXV flowing at 50% of design capacity. This will starve the coil and the obvious fix is to
install a larger TXV. This in turn, results in a valve that controls over a 2˚F range. Therefore it will have a
greater tendency to overfeed, followed by underfeeding, resulting in cyclical operation, and valve hunting.
Conversely, if the superheat is greater than 10˚F, an additional portion of the coil will be inefficiently used to
heat refrigerant vapor. Therefore, it is most efficient to limit the superheat to the 10˚F minimum requirement
and nothing more.
Refrigeration
DX feed is more common on halocarbon refrigerants than ammonia. The thermal expansion valve
essentially controls the volume of liquid that enters the coil. Ammonia requires approximately 0.25 in3/sec/ton
and R-22 requires 0.73 in3/sec/ton. For this reason ammonia is more difficult to control with a TXV.
Please refer to the attached graph. It shows that ammonia has less pressure available per degree of
temperature to open the valve. This makes it more difficult for the TXV to control. Ammonia TXV’s use
ammonia in the bulb to drive the diaphragm. Halocarbon TXV’s use an isobutane based charge which has
a flatter line in relation to the R-22 for improved performance.
Once the proper temperatures have been established to make a thermal expansion valve work properly, the
next challenge is distribution. When the high temperature / high pressure refrigerant passes through the
expansion valve the pressure drops and 5-20% of the refrigerant is vaporized as it cools the remaining
liquid. This vapor, called flash gas, has to be sent through the coil with an equal percentage going through
each parallel circuit. A distributor uses geometrical symmetry and pressure drop to evenly balance the flow
through all circuits.

K50
For the longevity of the thermal expansion

valve, there should be a minimal amount of
pressure drop across the valve’s piston and
seat. This prevents erosion and wire drawing.
The pressure drop is instead taken across the
distributor. After passing through the TXV, the
refrigerant passes through an orifice at the inlet
to the distributor and part of the pressure drop
occurs. The flow downstream of the orifice is a
somewhat homogenous mix of vapor and liquid.

This mixture then passes over a cone with an
outlet at the base for each circuit. Each outlet
connects to a small diameter (3/16” to 3/8”)
piece of tubing that is 18” to 48” long. The small
diameter of this tubing creates a significant
amount of pressure drop, which governs the
distribution to each circuit. When the coil is
designed, the orifice size, number of circuits
and distributor lead length and quantity are all
precisely engineered for the maximum and Distributor
minimum liquid supply temperatures. The
accuracy of this information when the coil is ordered is critical to its performance. The presence of subcooling
which was not incorporated into the design can significantly reduce coil performance.
Care should be taken when piping DX coils. The high pressure liquid feed, if not subcooled, should be routed
to minimize ambient heat gain, as the flash gas in the liquid line will severely limit the thermal expansion
valve’s capacity and wear the seat of the valve. The branch take off to feed each air unit should come off from
the bottom of the supply header to avoid vapor entrainment. The thermal expansion valve should be mounted
in line and immediately adjacent to the distributor without any elbows or other flow altering fittings. The liquid
solenoid should then be mounted as close to the expansion valve as practical, as the refrigerant downstream
of the solenoid will bleed off through the expansion valve. This will leave a void and potentially cause water
hammer when the solenoid reopens. A strainer, upstream of the solenoid valve is good practice.
Direct expansion coils do, however, have their

S
place. In high temperature applications, the
supply pressure of the pump recirculated
liquid must have enough pressure to
overcome the suction pressure regulator and
coil pressure drop. The price of the larger DX
coils has to be weighed against the total price
of a recirculator package and smaller
recirculated coils.
A suction line with a vertical lift and a

minimum refrigerant charge requirement are
two additional reasons to choose DX over
other types of feed.
N
IO
CT
SU
D
UI
LIQ
MAINS
Typical piping for DX Coils

K51
Defrost Methods
A summary of the various mechanisms to remove frost accumulation from the coil follows.
No Defrost
There are two requirements for a coil to accumulate frost:
• The air flowing over the coil is cooled to or below its dewpoint temperature, resulting in
the condensation of water vapor.
• Some portion of the coil surface has to be below freezing.
Refrigeration
If both of these conditions are not met, the coil will not frost and a defrost mechanism is not necessary.
Air Defrost
In situations where the room air temperature is above freezing, defrost can be accomplished by stopping the
flow of refrigerant to the coil and allowing it to warm up, thus melting the accumulated frost as the fans
continue to run, drawing warm room air over the coil. Industry literature generally lists a 36˚F minimum room
temperature for air defrost. Note: Another method of defrost may be required in warm rooms where moisture
removal is critical.
Hot Gas Defrost – Coil Only

As shown by the previous section, in applications where the room temperature falls below 36˚F or where
moisture removal is paramount, an external source of defrost heat is required. Most industrial refrigeration
systems utilize a central ammonia compressor room. This is an ideal source for hot ammonia gas and the
latent heat it contains. It requires the discharge gas from the compressor to be piped in a header to the
vicinity of the air units with a branch take off to each air unit.
The basics of a hot gas defrost are as follows:
1. Either a time clock, elapsed run timer, frost sensor or manual control will initiate the defrost process.
2. The liquid solenoid is de-energized and the residual refrigerant charge is boiled out of the unit. This
process generally takes 20 minutes.
3. Fans turn off.
4. The suction solenoid is closed or elevated to a pressure corresponding to 47˚F (70 psig for ammonia).
5. The hot gas solenoid is energized allowing hot ammonia vapor to enter the coil and condense, thus giving
up its latent heat to melt the accumulated frost. This generally takes 8 -15 minutes.
6. After the frost has melted, a small bleed solenoid will open, gradually (1-3 minutes) reducing the pressure
in the coil back to the prevailing suction pressure. On higher temperature coils (above 10˚F evaporating
temperature) this step is often skipped.
7. If the face velocity of the coil is below 625 ft/min, then the liquid and suction solenoids are opened and
the fans are turned on. If the face velocity is above 625 ft/min, there is a 2-5 minute time delay to refreeze
the residual defrost water on to the coil to prevent moisture carry-over when the fans re-start.
Hot Gas Defrost – Unit

When a coil is applied in a room that is 32˚F or below, the drain pan needs to be heated during the defrost
process as well. It is recommended to use a hot gas pan on rooms that operate at 33˚ and 34˚F as well.
This is because the pan is radiating to the colder underside of the coil and could be colder than the room
temperature. Additionally, a 2˚F swing in room temperature is quite possible.

K52
A cautionary note on condensate induced hydraulic shock (applies to both hot gas defrost options) : When
warm refrigerant vapor is introduced into a cold environment, it will condense. The resulting reduction in
volume will cause a temporary low pressure area. If liquid refrigerant is present and the tube or cavity is small
enough for a liquid slugs or plugs to form, these slugs will collide with each other or the end of the pipe with
extreme force. The force is the product of the mass of the slug times it’s actual vapor propelled velocity and
it’s acoustic velocity. It is this acoustic velocity component that generates sufficient energy to rupture pipes.
This situation can be avoided, by reducing the amount of residual liquid present when hot gas is injected, or
controlling the rate of hot gas injection. Which in turn, controls the rate of vapor contraction.
Water Defrost
While hot gas is the most popular method of evaporator defrost, there are situations where there are no other
loads in the plant that are generating hot gas, such as a spiral freezer with a small or no holding freezer or
production loads. When this is the case, water defrost is the most often used alternative.
The prerequisite to water defrost is an ample supply of sufficiently warm (> 60˚F) water. This water is
cascaded over the coil from a drip pan style of distribution tray at a rate of approximately 4 GPM per ft2 of
plan fin area (coil length times the coil depth in the direction of air flow). This flow rate continues until all of
the frost is melted off of the coil, generally 10-15 minutes.
The coil should be pumped out prior to the start of the water flow, as the warm water will cause rapid boiling
of the refrigerant. This will overload the defrost relief regulator and potentially cause unsafe high pressures.
However, the pressure on the coil has to be raised to the pressure corresponding with the defrost water
temperature or the defrost water will be refrigerated.
The water quantity required for defrost is large enough to avoid needlessly dumping it down the drain. It can
either be captured in a tank, reheated with hot gas, or pumped to the evaporative condenser sump, if it does
not contain any contaminants that are harmful to the condenser.
The water piping should supply the unit from above. If in a freezer, it should be heat traced and insulated.
The branch connections to the distribution pans on the unit should be flexible hose to allow removal of the
distribution pans for cleaning.
This large flow rate also requires care with regard to the condensate water piping from the drain pan. The
larger flow rates require large drain pipes, sufficient fall from the unit is required before trapping so that the
static head can overcome the pressure drop of the water flow through the trap. Ideally, the trap should be
located outside of the conditioned space and as low as possible. A standpipe vent should also be
incorporated to prevent drain line backup into the drain pan and subsequent pan overflow.
Electric Defrost
The predominate method of defrosting DX halocarbon coils is with electric heaters in the coil and pan if
necessary. The electric heaters are rigid, insertion type that feed in from the end(s) of the coil. While most
commonly installed in copper tube / aluminum finned coils, they can be installed in any coil that does not get
hot dip galvanized, such as, aluminum and stainless steel tube / aluminum fin. Some heaters require a pull
space for replacement that is equal to the length of the heater. BAC uses flexible heaters to reduce pull
space.
These heaters are either inserted into unused tube openings or holes in the fin stack. The presence of
electric heaters requires a high temperature switch for safety reasons. This switch is generally set at 45˚F
and is used to terminate the defrost cycle. Consult the manufacturers literature for the amount of wattage
required on any given coil. If the unit has an electrically heated drain pan, the heating elements are generally
mounted on the underside of an insulated drain pan. They are held in place with clips.

K53
There is an energy consideration with electric defrost. Typically 11 Watts per square foot of total surface
area is required to defrost a freezer coil. On a halocarbon split system, the defrost amperage are generally
less than the compressor amperage. The heaters only operate with the compressor off, so the total electrical
load does not increase during defrost. On a central system, where the compressors stay operating, the
defrost heater load is additive to the overall electrical demand. In addition, this heat has to be purchased
directly as opposed to a free diversion of hot gas that is a byproduct of the refrigerated load.
Condensate Water Piping
Refrigeration
When a coil defrosts, the melted frost collects in the drain pan. From there it has to be routed to a drain hub,
outside onto the ground or onto the roof. Even if a coil does not frost, it will shed water as the air is
dehumidified while it is cooled. This condition also requires condensate drain piping.
All air units are supplied with drain pans beneath the coil. The factory will have provided a generously sized
connection on that drain pan. That line size is generally sufficient to handle the largest anticipated water
flow. Dehumidification condensate flow can range from 0.033 GPM/1000 CFM in high TD air conditioning
applications to 0.006 gpm/1000 cfm in 40˚F rooms with a 10˚F TD. The following formula is a good
approximation for most refrigeration applications:
GPM = CFM (Tin - 30)/ 1,810,000
For defrost water flow, the following formula provides a reasonable approximation:
Total Gallons @ Total Surface (ft2)/75
Peak GPM @ Total Surface (ft2)/300
The flow from the drain pan is driven by gravity only. The piping from the drain pan should immediately drop
from the pan to pick up some velocity and static head before encountering the friction loss of any fittings.
Due to height and clearance considerations this drop is generally in the 6” range. It is imperative that the
piping is sufficiently sized for minimal pressure drop. To avoid air locking in the drain line, sewer flow is
recommended.
The air surrounding the coil is the coldest air in the vicinity, which will have the lowest vapor pressure. Air
will migrate up the condensate drain line to this area of low pressure and create a frosted mess in a freezer
and excessive coil load in a cooler. For this reason, a P-trap is installed in the drain line to block this air
migration. The placement of this P-trap is governed by two requirements; A) it should be placed outside of
the frozen space to prevent freeze-up if the heat tracing fails, and B) it should be mounted at least two feet
below the drain pan to allow sufficient static head to overcome the trap’s frictional losses and not back water
up into the pan.
When the air unit is located in a frozen space, the condensate drain line will have to be heat traced, then
insulated to contain the heat in the pipe. The heat tracing can either be an electrical tape wrapped around
the pipe or an insertion type heater mounted inside of the pipe. If it is internal, be sure to consider the effect
of the heater on the water flow and oversize the pipe if necessary. The amount of heat tracing is dependent
upon the heat loss to the ambient air, which is a function of room temperature and insulation R-value.
Galvanized pipe is the traditional material used for drain piping. It is a must in a freezer, where a heat tape
failure could allow freeze-up. It is good design practice to use tees and plugs in lieu of elbows in order to
allow the use of a snake to clear a frozen line. PVC lines have been used in high temperature, above
freezing rooms. Although PVC has a tendency to sag resulting in a poor installation appearance and can
trap water in the low points.

K54
Unit Placement
The placement of air units is critical to the success of an installation. There are a number of items to be
considered when designing the room layout and air unit placement.
Obstructions – The air unit should have an inlet clearance equal to the height of the unit. The discharge air
flow of the unit should be unimpeded by pipes, racks, structural members, etc.
Piping Access – Consider where the refrigerant headers that will feed the air unit are, or will be, located.
There should be an easy route between the room and the headers. There should be room to mount the
valves external to the refrigerated space to lessen the chance of refrigerant leaks into the room. There should
be a nearby floor drain for condensate or other pathway to an above freezing room.
Protection – The air unit should be located in an area that provides protection from forktruck traffic.
Structural Requirements – Steel air units can weigh up to 6 - 8 tons. The building steel should be sufficient
to hold the weight and the units should be positioned to minimize the amount of steel required.
Air Flow – For a room to have even temperature distribution, the air must circulate completely and freely
about the room. As the air leaves the air unit, consider where that air is accumulating and its return path.
The colder air that leaves the air unit will be denser than the room air causing it to sink. The discharge
stream velocity must be high enough to keep moving to the end of the room. This terminal velocity is
generally accepted as 100-150 fpm.
Warehouses- Racked
The flow should be directed down every other aisle if possible, with the alternating aisles left for return air
flow. Flow across the tops of racks is very disruptive and leaves no clear return path for the air.
Air units placed opposite from the doors in freezers will have to penetrate the warm air pocket that rises up
from the open doors. This will require a high velocity. Conversely, air units placed on the dock wall of a
freezer will be subjected to high infiltration loads unless internal vestibules are used.
A standard freezer unit with cast aluminum fan blades will throw the air approximately 100 ft. If channeled by
an aisle with a clear return path, this can increase up to 150 ft. The use of long throw adaptors increases the
average fan discharge velocity to over 2,500 FPM. This can boost the throw distance to over 200 ft. Consult
your BAC Representative for unit specific ratings.
Warehouses and Coolers – Un-racked

Un-racked rooms generally have ceiling heights of 10 to 18 feet. Therefore, the airstream does not have to
fall far to be disrupted by pallets or totes. Evaporators with paddle wheel fans will only throw 50 to 60 feet in
these conditions. Axial fan units will throw up to 100 feet. The airflow out of an evaporator without long throw
adaptors will diverge out by approximately 10 to 15° per side.
Shipping Docks
Most shipping docks use AS style evaporators on the freezer wall blowing towards the truck doors. This
distance is short enough for the velocity to be high enough to penetrate the infiltrated air from the truck
openings. Some designers use large centrifugal fan air units for their lower sound qualities. They are
generally located to throw air the length of the dock, perpendicular to the trucks. Because of the high amount
of fork truck traffic on docks, placing the air units in a protected area or installing a protective curb is good
practice.

K55
Process Rooms
These rooms typically have production lines that are staffed by people who will be sensitive to drafts,
especially in rooms below 45°F. For this reason, AR units with their “umbrella” airflow pattern will move the
most air with the lowest velocity air distribution. The radius of air throw on an AR unit is approximately 30 ft.
Blast Freezers
Quick and effective freezing in a blast cell is primarily dependent upon air flow through the pallets. For this
reason the air flow in a blast cell should be through the lowest number of pallets. Because most blast cells
Refrigeration
utilize air units with cast aluminum fan blades, there is a practical external pressure limit of 1/2 to 3/4 ” WC.
If the air flow is forced through more than three pallets, a high static pressure drop will occur which will
significantly reduce the volume of air flow, which in turn hinders the blast cells overall performance.
Typical Applications – Quick Reference

Model Types Defrost Options Possible Options
Heat
Full
Room Temps Hot-Gas Hot-Gas Taped
Applications AS AM AL AR AC Custom Air Water Electric Re-Heat Electro-fin Coverage
(˚F) Coil Unit Pan
Pans
Covers
Blast
-45 to -20 X X X X X
Freezers
Candy
65 X X X
Storage
Cold Storage
-20 to 20 1* X X X X X
Warehouse
Coolers- Meat
28 X X X X X X X X
& Poultry
Coolers-
35 X X X X X
General
Coolers- Milk 32 X X X
Docks 35 to 45 X X X X X
Hog or Beef -
28 X X X X X X X
Chill
Ice Cream
-20 X X X X
Storage
Process
35 to 45 X X X X X X X
Areas
Air-Handler
32 to 80 X X X
Coils
Note: 1* AS units are on occasion used in freezers under perfect circumstances, normally only use AS units
for 32ºF and above.

K56
New BAC Aircoil™

Evaporators Pan Features
Product Report
Thermography testing of
aluminum extrusions
Enhanced pan layout
BAC has created an industry-leading pan design, taking into account the feedback from our most
important resource…..our customers. By replacing flanges with welds, moving all the piping within the
pan profile, and giving extra space for insulation and piping, BAC has created a contractor friendly
design, which offers the best value in the industrial refrigeration marketplace.
In addition, we have used an innovative new design to get the right amount of heat to the pan during
hot-gas defrost. BAC uses stainless steel tubes that are expanded into an aluminum extrusion to
enhance the tube-to-pan contact area exponentially. Combined with our standard aluminum pan…you
get a great heat transfer surface, eliminating the possibility of random ice formation.
New Features Include:

• Removal of all flanges from piping
• Full coverage of unit piping
• 90˚ welded and serviceable check valve
• Additional spacing for insulation and piping
• Stainless steel pan defrost circuit
• Aluminum heat transfer extrusions
• Optimized pan circuiting
• A smooth welded aluminum pan surface

L1
ICE CHILLER ®
Thermal Storage Units
Refrigeration
Product Detail
Why Ice Storage? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L2
Construction Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L5
Selection Flexibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L6
Unit Selection-Ammonia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L7
Engineering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L9
Engineering Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L13

L2
ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Units

Low Temperature Chilled Water for: Lower First Cost, Reduced Energy, and Space Savings
Why Ice Storage? Reduced Energy Cost

Stored cooling, because of its lower first cost and With less connected horsepower, ice storage can lower
operating cost, is now widely recognized as an excellent electrical demand charges by over 50%. In addition,
answer to the increasing cost of operating today’s total annual kilowatt-hours used can be less than with
cooling systems. Generating and storing cooling capacity a conventional instantaneous cooling system. As an
at a constant rate during off-peak hours results in smaller increasing number of electric utility companies impose
cooling equipment being used, reducing maximum rate schedules with higher peak demand charges and/or
system peak electrical demand and taking advantage of time-of-use rates, ice storage can provide even greater
lower, off-peak energy costs. future savings in operating costs.
Ice storage, in particular, has emerged as the most

practical method of storing cooling capacity. The high
latent heat of fusion of ice permits large capacity Space Savings
storage in a relatively small space, and the low melting Ice has proven to be the most space efficient thermal
temperature of ice provides the cooling system with a storage system. Since ice storage systems utilize the
constant source of low temperature chilled water. latent heat of fusion, they require approximately one-
Ice storage is a proven technology that has been used fourth the volume of an equivalent capacity chilled water
for decades in churches, dairies, breweries and theaters storage system.
due to the advantages of lower first cost, reduced energy
cost and minimum space requirements. Today with these
advantages, ice storage provides lower cost cooling on a Industrial Cooling
wider variety of process/batch cooling systems, industrial
For industrial applications, stored cooling using ICE
refrigeration and comfort cooling applications.
CHILLER® Thermal Storage Units provides many oppor-
tunities for savings: smaller compressors and likewise
smaller system components and electrical equipment;
Lower First Cost shifting or leveling of energy usage peaks; and efficient
Cooling systems using BAC ICE CHILLER® Thermal use of equipment. Also, since ice storage systems are
Storage Units can be installed for the same or lower first sized to operate primarily at full capacity, compressor
cost than conventional instantaneous cooling systems. wear from capacity adjustment is minimized, providing
This important breakthrough results from: maintenance savings over the life of the compressor.
Stored cooling from ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage
Smaller Refrigeration System Units supplies consistently low temperature water,
making them appropriate for daily and/or infrequent
When designed to operate on a 24-hour basis, or when
cooling loads in many industrial processes such as:
the time available for building ice is significantly greater
than the duration of the load, a smaller refrigeration • Bakeries
system is required compared to a chiller sized for an • Dairies
instantaneous peak load.
• Breweries, Wineries, Distilleries
Smaller Electrical Equipment and Wiring • Chemical/Plastics Manufacturers
• Laboratories
Electrical equipment and wiring costs are also lower
• Food Product Cooling
since the smaller mechanical equipment can reduce
connected horsepower by over 50%. • Bottling Process
• Vegetable/Fruit Cooling
For most system requirements, these significant savings
will exceed any cost premium associated with the ice
storage equipment.

L3
Suitable For: Industrial Refrigeration • Process Cooling • Batch Cooling
Principle of Operation When chilled water is required for cooling, the ice water
pump is started, and the meltout cycle begins. Warm
The basic ice storage system includes an ICE CHILLER® water returning from the load circulates through the
Thermal Storage Unit, a refrigeration system, and ice ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Unit and is cooled by
water pump as shown below in Figure 1. direct contact with the melting ice. During this cycle, the
tank water is also agitated to provide more uniform ice
Refrigeration
When no cooling load exists, the refrigeration system
melting and a constant supply water temperature of 36°F
operates to build ice on the outside surface of the coil.
or less.
This refrigeration effect is provided by feeding refrigerant
directly into the coil. To increase the heat transfer during For a closed chilled water loop, see Figure 2. With this
the ice build cycle the water is agitated by air bubbles system, warm return water from the load is pumped
from a low pressure distribution system beneath the through a heat exchanger and cooled by the ice water
coil. When the ice has reached design thickness, BAC’s circuit from the ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Unit.
exclusive ICE-LOGIC™ Ice Thickness Controller sends
a signal to turn off the refrigeration system.
BLOWER
Figure 1
Figure 2

L4
Energy Efficient Design ICE-LOGIC™ ICE Thickness

The ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Unit coils are
Controller
designed for efficient energy use in building ice and All BAC ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Units are
constant leaving water temperatures during the meltout furnished with the exclusive ICE-LOGIC™ ICE Thickness
cycle. Controller. This state-of-the-art controller was designed
by BAC to provide maximum operating efficiency by
Compared to traditional ice builders used in the past
enabling the operator to limit the ice build to only the
for industrial refrigeration, the ICE CHILLER® Thermal
amount needed for the next cooling cycle.
Storage Unit design with its smaller diameter coil circuits
and thinner ice (Figure 3) results in more evaporator The ICE-LOGIC™ Controller operates by sensing the
surface per ton-hour of latent storage. Ice builds to a difference in the electrical resistance between water
thin 2.0 inches, which results in more than a 16% gain in and ice. When the desired amount of ice is built,
refrigeration system efficiency by permitting compressor the change in resistance opens a control relay which
operation at higher suction pressures. typically deactivates the refrigeration system. A series
of probes are employed, accurately positioned to detect
ice thickness corresponding to 20, 40, 60, 80 and 100
OTHERS percent of design ice storage. The amount of ice required
BAC
1.66" O.D. COIL
1.05" O.D. COIL
for the next cooling cycle can be conveniently set on the
face of the control box. In addition, the ICE-LOGIC™
2.0" 2.5" Controller contains the necessary logic to prevent
unwanted compressor cycling after the desired ice build
is complete. The controller requires approximately 20
percent of the ice to be melted before the control relay is
COIL SURFACE: 3.0 FT2/TON-HOUR 2.8 FT2/TON-HOUR activated. Lights on the face of the control panel indicate
ICE SURFACE: 14.5 FT2/TON-HOUR 11.1 FT2/TON-HOUR the current status of the relay.
Figure 3
By building only the amount of ice needed, the operating
time for the refrigeration system and the kilowatt-hours
of energy used are kept at the lowest possible levels for
The BAC ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Unit is specifi- maximum system efficiency.
cally designed to provide consistent 34°-36°F supply
water temperatures throughout the melt cycle. Two
keys to maintaining this consistently low temperature
are an extensive ice surface area and direct contact of
the water to be cooled with the ice. As shown in Figure
3, the unique BAC coil design provides over 30% more
ice surface than traditional designs. This provides a
greater surface area for the warm return water to come
into direct contact, making consistent cold temperatures
available throughout the entire melt cycle.
The ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Unit is designed

for efficient operation with either of two liquid refrigerant
feed systems: gravity flooded with surge drum or pumped
recirculation. With either arrangement, liquid refrigerant is
supplied to the coils at a rate several times greater than
that required to satisfy the load. This excess flow rate
thoroughly wets the entire internal surface of the coil,
assuring high heat transfer coefficients throughout to
efficiently utilize the entire coil surface for ice building.

L5
5 COVERS
Sectional insulated tank covers 6 COIL
Refrigeration
4 AIR BLOWER
are provided with BAC’s exclusive The coil is constructed of multiple
7THICKNESS
BALTIBOND® Corrosion prime surface serpentine steel
Centrifugal regenerative blower Protection System. Covers are circuits and tested at 375 psig air ICE-LOGIC™ ICE
for field mounting to supply low interlocking and rain shedding. pressure under water. It is encased
pressure air for agitation of the in a steel frame, and the entire
CONTROLLER
water. Blower is furnished with an An electronic, multi-point
assembly is hot-dip galvanized after
inline air filter, check valve and adjustable ice thickness control
fabrication. For ammonia systems,
rain shield for field installation. is mounted on the unit. A
purge connections are provided on
control relay is provided for
each coil for oil maintenance.
deactivating the refrigeration
system when a full build of ice
is reached.
5
7
4 6
2
1
8
3 EXTERIOR PANELS
Exterior panels sealed at all
seams provide a complete vapor
barrier and protect the insulation.
They are furnished with BAC’s
exclusive BALTIBOND®
Corrosion Protection System.
2 INSULATION
Expanded polystyrene insulation
8 AIR DISTRIBUTOR
Low pressure air from the air
is provided between the tank and
the exterior panels. The insulation
is three inches thick (R-13) on the
1 TANK
The tank is constructed of heavy
blower is distributed below the
coils through multiple perforated
Schedule 40 PVC pipes.
tank sides and ends, two inches gauge, hot-dip galvanized steel
thick (R-8) on the bottom and one reinforced with full-length structural
inch thick inside the covers. steel angles beneath and on all four
sides. All seams are welded to
ensure watertight construction. A zinc
rich coating is applied to all exposed
edges and welds.

L6
Selection Flexibility
System Design Flexibility TSU Selection
Full Storage
The system design involving an ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage
1. From the system load profile (figure 4) establish the required
Unit can range from full storage to partial storage of the cooling system cooling capacity in ton-hours. This is the ton-hours
load requirements. of storage required.
Full Storage 2. Determine the build time, which is the number of hours
With full storage, the ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Unit with no load that is available for ice building. If less than
generates and stores ice to handle the entire cooling load. The ten (10) hours, consult your BAC Representative.
refrigeration system operates to build the ice only during no-load
3. For a gravity flooded ammonia feed system, continue
periods when utility rates are usually lowest. This design offers the
the selection with the gravity flooded procedure on
maximum energy cost savings, but requires the largest ice storage page L7. For a pump recirculated ammonia feed
capacity and refrigeration system. system, continue the selection with the pump
recirculated procedure on page L8.
Partial Storage
A partial storage system builds ice during no-load periods as with the Parallel Chilled Water Evaporator Partial Storage
full storage system. However, the refrigeration system continues to 1. From the system load profile (figure 4), establish the required
operate during the cooling load period. The compressor operation system cooling capacity in ton-hours and the number of hours
supplements the stored cooling capacity of the ICE CHILLER® this cooling is needed.
Thermal Storage Unit to satisfy the cooling requirements. Since a
2. Determine the cooling capacity in tons of the compressor
portion of the cooling requirement is supplied by the refrigeration
operating with the parallel evaporator (figure 5) during the
system, a partial storage system will require less storage capacity. cooling load hours established in Step 1.
Parallel Chilled Water Evaporator 3. Multipy the cooling capacity of the compressor operating with
The most common type of partial ice storage is the parallel
parallel evaporator found in Step 2 times the number of
evaporator system. During the melt cycle, cooling is provided
cooling load hours found in Step 1. This gives the capacity in
by the refrigeration system to a separate evaporator for direct ton-hours that will be handled by direct refrigeration during the
water chilling. By using a separate evaporator, the refrigeration cooling period.
system gains system efficiency from operation at higher suction
pressures. 4. Subract the direct cooling ton-hours found in Step 3 from the
toal system cooling capacity found in Step 1. This is the
The refrigeration system will operate continuously during full design storage capacity in ton-hours that are required in ice storage.
load. At less than full load the compressor operates only as needed
5. Determine the build time, which is the number of hours with
to supplement the ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Unit. When the
the compressor dedicated to ice building. If less than (10) ten
load is less than 50% of design, this system can operate in the full hours, consult BAC Representative.
storage mode. Systems which often operate at part load can benefit
most from a partial system with equipment sizes typically over 50% 6. For gravity flooded ammonia feed system, continue the
smaller than required for full storage. selection with the gravity procedure on page L7. For a pump
recirculated ammonia feed system, continue the selection with
For additional information on ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Units the pump recirculated procedure on page L8.
and their system design options consult your BAC Representative.
System Load
The system load is the amount of cooling capacity that must be
generated and stored, expressed in ton-hours or Btu. (1 ton-hour
= 12,000 Btu = 83.3 pounds of ice). This load is equal to the area
under the typical system load profile curve (figure 4) shown below.
Load handled
by Stored Ice
Load handled
by Parallel
Evaporator
Figure 4 Figure 5

L
Unit Selection – Ammonia

Application Notes 3. The capacities of all BAC ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage
1. To use the selection procedures outlined below, the ton-hours Units are based on latent storage (ice) only. The temperature of
of storage capacity required and the available build time must the water supplied from the storage tank for most system
first be known. For guidance on estimating these values refer to designs will be 34°-36°F throughout the latent storage
the TSU selection on pages L6 or contact your local BAC discharge (melt) cycle. For specific system design
Representative. requirements, contact your BAC Representative.

Refrigeration
2. The evaporator temperatures for each build time are 4. For selections based on other refrigerants, contact your
“average” values. During the build cycle, the temperature will BAC Representative.
initially be about 8°F above the “average” and gradually drop
through the cycle to about 4°F below the “average” when full ice 5. These procedures assume that no system cooling load occurs
is reached. Throughout the cycle the refrigeration system while ice is being formed. For ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage
should be allowed to run fully loaded. Reciprocating and rotary Unit selections involving systems with continuous cooling loads
screw compressors are suitable for this duty. If in doubt consult your BAC Representative.
about the use of a particular compressor, review the application
with the compressor manufacturer.
4. Using the Storage Factor of 1.05 from Step 3 and the build time
Selection Procedure – Gravity Flooded of 14 hours, enter Table 2 to find the design evaporator
1. Enter Table 1 and read down the base ton-hours column to the
temperature of 19.9°F.
capacity which meets or exceeds the ton-hours of storage
5. Calculate the design compressor capacity.
required. Select either an E, F, or G series unit. (Units are
201 Ton-Hours of Storage Required = 14.4 Tons
grouped by tank width in Table 1. Refer to pages L9 thru L12 for
14 Hours Build Time
unit dimensions.)
6. Based on the design evaporator conditions of 14.4 tons at a
2. Read the selected unit from the model number column
19.9°F evaporator temperature (17.9°F saturated suction
on the left.
temperature, with 2.0°F estimated suction line losses), select
3. Calculate the Storage Factor for the selected unit.
an ammonia refrigerant compressor.
Base Ton-Hours = Storage Factor
7. Select a BAC Evaporative Condenser or Cooling Tower to
Ton-Hours of Storage Required
match the compressor manufacturer’s heat rejection
4. Using the Storage Factor from Step 3 and the available build
requirements.
time, enter Table 2 to find the design evaporator temperature.
5. Determine the design compressor capacity in tons.
Table 1: Base storage capacity (ton-hours) for
Ton-Hours of Storage Required = Compressor Tons
gravity flooded ammonia feed
Build Time (Hrs)
6. Using the design conditions from Steps 4 and 5, select a
E-Series Units F-Series Units F-Series Units
compressor. (Note: The evaporator temperature must
be adjusted for the system suction line losses to arrive at the MODEL NO.
BASE
MODEL NO.
BASE
MODEL NO.
BASE
compressor saturated suction temperature.) TON-HRS TON-HRS TON-HRS
7. Once the compressor has been selected, use the compressor TSU-125E 112 TSU-145F 128 TSU-840F 756
manufacturer’s heat rejection data to size a BAC Evaporative TSU-155E 137 TSU-175F 157 TSU-840F 894
Condenser or Cooling Tower. TSU-180E 163 TSU-205F 186 TSU-1140F 1,031
TSU-210E 188 TSU-240F 215 TSU-1290F 1,169
EXAMPLE: Gravity Flooded Ammonia TSU-235E 214 TSU-270F 244 TSU-1520F 1,375
Given: 16,700 lbs ice required storage capacity TSU-190E 173 TSU-220F 197 G-Series Units
14 hours available build time TSU-230E 211 TSU-265F 243 TSU-940G 851
To get Ton-Hours of storage required: TSU-280E 251 TSU-320F 288 TSU-1110G 1,007
16,700 lbs ice required storage capacity = 201 Ton-Hours TSU-320E 291 TSU-370F 332 TSU-1280G 1,163
83.3 lbs ice per Ton-Hour TSU-365E 331 TSU-420F 377 TSU-1450G 1,315
1. Enter the base ton-hours column of Table 1 and find 211 ton- TSU-290E 261 TSU-330F 300 TSU-1710G 1,550
hours, which is the smallest value that meets or exceeds the TSU-345E 310 TSU-395F 356
201 ton-hours of storage required. TSU-395E 359 TSU-455F 410
2. Read to the left to find the selected model number, in this case TSU-450E 408 TSU-515F 466
a TSU-230E. TSU-505E 456 TSU-580F 522
3. Calculate the Storage Factor. TSU-590E 536 TSU-675F 614
211 Base Ton-Hours = 1.05 TSU-700E 631 TSU-800F 722
201 Ton-Hours of Storage Required TSU-810E 729 TSU-920F 834
TSU-910E 827 TSU-1040F 947
TSU-1080E 968 TSU-1230F 1,110

L8
Table 2: Design evaporator temperature (°F) for 4. Using the Storage Factor of 1.10 from Step 3 and the build
gravity flooded ammonia feed time of 11 hours, enter Table 4 to find the design evaporator
temperature of 17.7 °F.
STORAGE BUILD TIME (HRS)
FACTOR 10 11 12 13 14 5. Calculate the design compressor capacity.
1.00 14.3 15.7 17.2 18.3 19.4
700 Ton-Hours of Storage Required = 63.6 Tons
11 Hours Build Time
1.05 15.6 16.8 18.1 19.0 19.9 6. Based on the design evaporator conditions of 63.6 tons at a
1.10 16.5 17.7 18.9 19.7 20.5 17.7 °F evaporator temperature (15.7 °F saturated suction
1.15 17.4 18.5 19.6 20.3 21.1 temperature, with 2.0 °F estimated suction line losses), select
an ammonia refrigerant compressor.

1.20 18.1 19.1 20.2 20.9 21.7
1.25 18.8 19.7 20.7 21.4 22.1 7. Select a BAC Evaporative Condenser or Cooling Tower to
1.30 19.4 20.3 21.2 21.9 22.6 match the compressor manufacturer’s heat rejection
NOTE: Interpolation between values is permitted, but extrapolation of requirements.
values is not.
Table 3: Base Storage Capacity (ton-hours) for
pump recirculated ammonia feed
Selection Procedure –
Pump Recirculated E-Series Units F-Series Units F-Series Units
1. Enter Table 3 and read down the base ton-hours column to MODEL BASE MODEL BASE MODEL BASE
the capacity which meets or exceeds the ton-hours of NO. TON-HRS NO. TON-HRS NO. TON-HRS
storage required. Select either an E, F, or G Series unit. (Units TSU-125E 121 TSU-145F 138 TSU-840F 820
are grouped by tank width in Table 3. Refer to pages L9 thru L12
TSU-155E 147 TSU-175F 169 TSU-990F 966
for unit dimensions.
TSU-180E 175 TSU-205F 199 TSU-1140F 1,116
2. Read the selected unit from the model number column TSU-210E 201 TSU-240F 228 TSU-1290F 1,263
on the left.
TSU-235E 227 TSU-270F 258 TSU-1520F 1,480
3. Calculate the Storage Factor for the selected unit. TSU-190E 187 TSU-220F 212 G-Series Units
Base Ton-Hours = Storage Factor TSU-230E 227 TSU-265F 258
MODEL BASE
Ton-Hours of Storage Required TSU-280E 270 TSU-320F 308 NO. TON-HRS
4. Using the Storage Factor from Step 3 and the available build TSU-320E 311 TSU-370F 353 TSU-940G 912
time, enter Table 4 to find the design evaporator temperature. TSU-365E 351 TSU-420F 399 TSU-1110G 1,076
TSU-290E 282 TSU-330F 322 TSU-1280G 1,229
5. Determine the design compressor capacity in tons.
TSU-345E 334 TSU-395F 381 TSU-1450G 1,378
Ton-Hours of Storage Required = Compressor Tons TSU-395E 385 TSU-455F 435 TSU-1710G 1,593
Build Time (Hrs)
TSU-450E 434 TSU-515F 492
6. Using the design conditions from Steps 4 and 5, select a
compressor. (Note: The evaporator temperature must be TSU-505E 481 TSU-580F 547
adjusted for the system suction line losses to arrive at the TSU-590E 578 TSU-675F 660
compressor saturated suction temperature.) TSU-700E 679 TSU-800F 771
TSU-810E 779 TSU-920F 886
7. Once the compressor has been selected, use the compressor
manufacturer’s heat rejection data to size a BAC Evaporative TSU-910E 879 TSU-1040F 1,000
Condenser or Cooling Tower. TSU-1080E 1,022 TSU-1230F 1,154
EXAMPLE: Pump Recirculated Ammonia Table 4: Design evaporator temperature (°F) for
Given: 700 Ton-Hours Required Storage pump recirculated ammonia feed
11 Hours Available Build Time
STORAGE BUILD TIME (HRS)
1. Enter the base ton-hours column of Table 3 and find 771 FACTOR 10 11 12 13 14
ton-hours, which is the smallest value that meets or exceeds
the 700 ton-hours of storage required. 1.00 14.3 15.7 17.1 18.1 19.1
1.05 15.5 16.8 18.1 19.0 20.0
2. Read to the left to find the selected model number, in this case a
1.10 16.5 17.7 19.0 19.9 20.8
TSU-800F.
1.15 17.4 18.5 19.7 20.5 21.4
1.20 18.3 19.3 20.4 21.2 22.0
3. Calculate the Storage Factor.
1.25 19.0 20.0 21.0 21.7 22.5
771 Base Ton-Hour = 1.10 1.30 19.7 20.6 21.6 22.3 23.0
700 Ton-Hours of Storage Required NOTE: Interpolation between values is permitted, but extrapolation of values
is not.

L9
Engineering Data
Nominal 5’ wide units:
Models TSU-125E to TSU-235E and TSU-145F to TSU-270F
Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions. This handbook includes data current at the time
of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase.
Refrigeration
REFRIG. CONN.
AIR INLET
AIR OUTLET
SEE NOTE (4)
+ OVERFLOW
+ WATER OUT
7'7"
4' 9"
DRAIN
+ + WATER IN
6" L
A
18" W/2
LBS OF ICE2 APPROX. PULL

APPROX. OPERAT- AIR WATER DOWN COIL R-717 WATER
GRAVITY PUMP SHIPPING ING WGT PUMP VOLUME VOLUME VOLUME CHARGE CONN
MODEL NO. FLOODED RECIRCULATED WGT (LBS) (LBS) HP (GAL) (GAL) (FT3) (LBS)5 IN/OUT W L A
E Series
TSU-125E 9,330 10,808 5,500 23,500 3 2,080 270 9 245 3” 5’ 3-1/8” 10’ 1” 4.5”
TSU-155E 11,410 12,250 6,230 28,000 3 2,520 320 10 275 3” 5’ 3-1/8” 12’ 1” 4.5”
TSU-180E 13,580 14,580 7,070 32,600 3 2,960 380 12 325 3” 5’ 3-1/8” 14’ 1” 4.5”
TSU-210E 15,660 16,740 8,090 37,400 3 3,400 440 13 355 4” 5’ 3-1/8” 16’ 0” 5”
TSU-235E 17,830 18,910 8,830 41,900 3 3,840 490 15 410 4” 5’ 3-1/8” 18’ 0” 5”
F Series
TSU-145F 10,660 11,500 5,730 23,700 3 2,070 40 10 275 3” 5’ 3-1/8” 10’ 1” 4.5”
TSU-175F 13,080 14,080 6,500 28,100 3 2,510 45 12 325 3” 5’ 3-1/8” 12’ 1” 4.5”
TSU-205F 15,490 16,580 7,370 32,800 3 2,950 55 13 355 3” 5’ 3-1/8” 14’ 1” 4.5”
TSU-240F 17,910 18,990 8,370 37,600 3 3,390 65 15 410 4” 5’ 3-1/8” 16’ 0” 5”
TSU-270F 20,330 21,490 9,140 42,100 3 3,820 70 17 460 4” 5’ 3-1/8” 18’ 0” 5”
Support
ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Units should be continuously supported on a flat level surface.
Notes:
1. All dimensions are in feet and inches. Weights are in pounds.
2. Lbs. of Ice Capacity is based on R-717. For other refrigerants, consult your BAC Representative.
3. Dimensions showing location of connections are approximate and should not be used for prefabrication of connecting piping.
4. Dimension is installed height. Coils are capped for shipping and storage. Add 3 inches for shipping height.
5. Refrigerant charge listed is operating charge for gravity flooded system at 15°F. For other feed systems, consult your
BAC Representative.

L10
Engineering Data
Nominal 8’ and 10’ wide units:
AIR INLET REFRIG. CONN.

AIR OUTLET
SEE NOTE (4)
+ OVERFLOW
+ WATER OUT
7'7"
4' 9"
+ DRAIN + WATER IN
6" L
A
* W
W/2
*18" ON TSU-190E-365E; TSU-220F-420F

*16" ON TSU-290E-505E; TSU-330F-580F

MODEL GRAVITY PUMP SHIPPING ING WGT PUMP VOLUME VOLUME VOLUME CHARGE CONN
NO. FLOODED RECIRCULATED WGT (LBS) (LBS) HP (GAL) (GAL) (FT3) (LBS)5 IN/OUT W L A
E Series
TSU-190E 14,410 15,580 7,670 36,200 3 3,300 420 15 410 4” 7’ 10-1/2” 10’ 1” 5”
TSU-230E 17,580 18,910 8,740 43,200 3 4,000 510 17 465 4” 7’ 10-1/2” 12’ 1” 5”
TSU-280E 20,910 22,490 9,700 50,200 3 4,700 600 19 515 4” 7’ 10-1/2” 14’ 1” 5”
TSU-320E 24,240 25,910 11,120 57,700 3 5,400 700 22 600 4” 7’ 10-1/2” 16’ 0” 5”
TSU-365E 27,570 29,240 12,100 64,500 3 6,100 800 24 650 6” 7’ 10-1/2” 18’ 0” 6”
TSU-290E 21,740 23,490 9,950 53,400 3 5,040 640 21 570 6” 9’ 9-3/8” 12’ 1” 6”
TSU-345E 25,820 27,820 11,200 62,000 3 5,920 760 23 625 6” 9’ 9-3/8” 14’ 1” 6”
TSU-395E 29,900 32,070 12,900 71,300 3 6,800 860 26 705 6” 9’ 9-3/8” 16’ 0” 6”
TSU-450E 33,990 36,150 14,050 80,000 3 7,080 980 29 790 6” 9’ 9-3/8” 18’ 0” 6”
TSU-505E 37,980 40,070 14,700 88,600 3 8,550 1090 32 870 6” 9’ 9-3/8” 20’ 0” 6”
F Series
TSU-220F 16,410 17,660 8,040 36,500 3 3,290 60 16 435 4” 7’ 10-1/2” 10’ 1” 5”
TSU-265F 20,240 21,490 9,150 43,600 3 3,990 70 19 515 4” 7’ 10-1/2” 12’ 1” 5”
TSU-320F 23,990 25,660 10,180 50,600 3 4,680 90 21 570 4” 7’ 10-1/2” 14’ 1” 5”
TSU-370F 27,660 29,400 11,700 58,100 3 5,380 100 24 650 4” 7’ 10-1/2” 16’ 0” 5”
TSU-420F 31,400 33,240 12,730 65,100 3 6,070 110 26 705 6” 7’ 10-1/2” 18’ 0” 6”
TSU-330F 24,990 26,820 10,460 53,900 3 5,020 95 23 625 6” 9’ 9-3/8” 12’ 1” 6”
TSU-395F 29,650 31,740 11,780 62,510 3 5,890 110 26 705 6” 9’ 9-3/8” 14’ 1” 6”
TSU-455F 34,150 36,240 13,430 71,800 3 6,770 130 29 790 6” 9’ 9-3/8” 16’ 0” 6”
TSU-515F 38,820 40,980 14,650 80,500 3 7,640 140 32 870 6” 9’ 9-3/8” 18’ 0” 6”
TSU-580F 43,480 45,570 15,370 89,200 3 8,520 160 35 950 6” 9’ 9-3/8” 20’ 0” 6”
Support
Notes:
5. Refrigerant charge listed is operating charge for gravity flooded system at 15°F. For other feed systems,
consult your BAC Representative.

L11
Engineering Data
Nominal 10’ wide units (cont.):
Refrigeration
REFRIG. CONN. AIR INLET
AIR OUTLET
SEE NOTE (4)
+ OVERFLOW
+ WATER OUT
7'7"
4' 9"
+ DRAIN + WATER IN
6" L
A
16" W/2

E Series
TSU-590E 44,650 48,150 18,200 106,900 3 10,240 1320 42 1140 6” 9’ 9-3/8” 23’ 11” 6”
TSU-700E 52,560 56,560 20,820 124,500 3 12,030 1540 47 1275 6” 9’ 9-3/8” 27’ 11” 6”
TSU-810E 60,730 64,890 24,300 144,400 5 13,790 1760 53 1440 8” 9’ 9-3/8” 31’ 10” 7”
TSU-910E 68,890 73,220 26,600 160,200 5 15,540 1990 58 1575 8” 9’ 9-3/8” 35’ 10” 7”
TSU-1080E 80,630 85,130 30,060 186,200 5 18,180 2330 67 1820 8” 9’ 9-3/8” 41’ 9” 7”
F Series
TSU-675F 51,150 54,980 19,240 107,900 3 10,200 190 46 1250 6” 9’ 9-3/8” 23’ 11” 6”
TSU-800F 60,140 64,220 21,960 125,600 3 11,980 230 52 1410 6” 9’ 9-3/8” 27’ 11” 6”
TSU-920F 69,470 73,800 25,380 143,700 5 13,700 260 59 1600 8” 9’ 9-3/8” 31’ 10” 7”
TSU-1040F 78,891 83,300 27,820 161,300 5 15,480 290 65 1765 8” 9’ 9-3/8” 35’ 10” 7”
TSU-1230F 92,460 96,130 31,460 187,500 5 18,100 340 74 2010 8” 9’ 9-3/8” 41’ 9” 7”
Support
Notes:
5. Refrigerant charge listed is operating charge for gravity flooded system at 15 °F. For other feed systems,

L12
Engineering Data
Nominal 12’ wide units:
Models TSU-840F to TSU-1520F and TSU-940G to TSU-1710G
AIR INLET
REFRIG. CONN.
AIR OUTLET
SEE NOTE (4)
+ OVERFLOW
+ WATER OUT
7'111/2"
5' 2"
+ DRAIN + WATER IN
6" L
A
22" W/2

F Series
TSU-840F 62,980 68,310 24,120 146,500 5 14,240 1,800 55 1,490 8” 11’ 9” 23’ 11” 7”
TSU-990F 74,470 80,470 26,900 170,000 5 16,650 2,100 63 1,710 8” 11’ 9” 27’ 11” 7”
TSU-1140F 85,880 92,960 31,460 200,600 5 19,080 2,320 71 1,925 8” 11’ 9” 31’ 10” 7”
TSU-1290F 97,380 105,210 34,340 218,800 5 21,500 2,710 78 2,115 8” 11’ 9” 35’ 10” 7”
TSU-1520F 114,540 123,280 38,660 254,400 5 25,150 2,900 90 2,440 8” 11’ 9” 41’ 9” 7”
G Series
TSU-940G 70,890 75,970 25,440 147,700 5 13,960 280 61 1,655 8” 11’ 9” 23’ 11” 7”
TSU-1110G 83,880 89,630 28,340 171,400 5 16,350 330 70 1,900 8” 11’ 9” 27’ 11” 7”
TSU-1280G 96,880 102,380 33,220 196,900 5 18,730 380 79 2,145 8” 11’ 9” 31’ 10” 7”
TSU-1450G 109,540 114,790 36,260 220,600 5 21,110 420 87 2,360 8” 11’ 9” 35’ 10” 7”
TSU-1710G 129,120 132,700 40,820 256,400 5 24,690 490 100 2,710 8” 11’ 9” 41’ 9” 7”
Support
Notes:
5. Refrigerant charge listed is operating charge for gravity flooded system at 15°F. For other feed systems,

L13
For ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Units
Thermal Storage Unit - Furnish and install, as Exterior Panels - Exterior panels shall be sealed
shown on plans, factory-assembled ICE CHILLER® at all seams to provide a complete vapor barrier and to
Thermal Storage Unit(s) with all water-touched steel protect the insulation. They shall be furnished with the
Refrigeration
components hot-dip galvanized, all exposed edges and BALTIBOND® Corrosion Protection System*
welds fully coated with Zinc-Rich Compound, and
exterior panels protected from corrosion with the Covers—The ICE CHILLER® Unit(s) shall be provided
BALTIBOND® Corrosion Protection System. with sectional, rain shedding, interlocking and insulated
steel covers provided with the BALTIBOND® Corrosion
Qualtity Assurance - The thermal storage unit Protection System
manufacturer shall have a Management System
certified by an accredited registrar as complying with the ICE Thickness Control
requirements of ISO-9001:2000 to ensure consistent A multi-point adjustable, solid state, electronic
services. resistivity type ice thickness control shall be provided.
The sensing probe shall be mounted on the coil, and a
Capacity - The ICE CHILLER® Unit(s) shall have a control relay to deactivate the refrigeration system shall
thermal storage capacity of ton-hours, operating with be installed in a NEMA4 box mounted on the unit.
refrigerant and a build time of hours at a °F
nominal evaporator temperature. Air Blower - A centrifugal regenerative blower for field
mounting shall supply low pressure air for agitation of
Tank - The tank shall be constructed of heavy gauge the water. Blower shall be furnished with inline air filter,
hot-dip galvanized steel and reinforced with full-length check valve and rain shield for field installation.
structural angles underneath and on all four sides. All
seams shall be welded to ensure watertight construction. Air Distributor - Low pressure air shall be
A zinc rich coating shall be applied to all exposed edges distributed through multiple perforated Schedule 40
and welds. PVC pipes.
Coil - The coil shall be constructed of prime surface Unit Size - Unit plan dimensions shall not exceed
serpentine steel circuits and shall be tested at 375 psig approximately feet by feet with an overall height
air pressure under water. The coil shall be encased in a not exceeding feet. The operating weight shall not
steel frame and the entire assembly hot-dip galvanized exceed pounds.
after fabrication. For use with ammonia refrigerant, coil
shall be complete with purge connection for oil The ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Unit(s) shall be
maintenance. Baltimore Aircoil Company Model TSU-
Insulation - Expanded polystyrene insulation shall be

provided between the tank and the exterior panels. The
insulation shall be three inches thick (R-13) on the tank
sides and ends, two inches thick (R-8) on the bottom and
one inch inside the covers.

L14
Channel Island Power Station

Opts for Ice Thermal Storage System
A dramatic increase in the city of Darwin, Australia’s

power demand since the early 1990’s has been met
by the introduction of an ammonia ice thermal
Project Report
storage system at its Channel Island Power Station.
The power station was built in 1985, and is operated

by the Northern Territory Government utility - the
Power and Water Authority (PAWA). The electricity
consumption by Darwin has been steadily monitored
over the years by PAWA. An assessment in 1995
clearly showed that demand was growing at a
faster rate than earlier projections had identified,
and that a solution was needed.
The decision to use an ice thermal storage system has

not only eased the pressure, but also resulted in considerable savings for PAWA and the Government.
The actual cost is one-third the installation cost of an extra turbine. The final system chosen by PAWA
employs an ammonia ice thermal storage system plant, supplying ice water during peak periods to wet air
coolers on the inlets of the three turbines.
The first stage of the project includes the following major equipment:
• Five 500 kW screw compressors, 1,500 kW (426 tons) each
• Five BAC Model CXV Evaporative Condensers
• 96 BAC ice coils, building 1,400 metric tons of ice that will provide 130,000 kWh
(36,932 ton-hours) of storage
• Three BAC wet air cooler modules, cooling inlet air from 37˚C to 9˚C
(98.6˚F to 48.2˚F)
• Two concrete tanks 15m (49’) x 15m (49’) x 7m (23’) high
The system is remarkable in its simplicity and efficiency of operation. During the night and morning
off-peak periods, the refrigeration plant builds ice on the ice coils. At peak demand, ice water is pumped
from the storage tanks and across a direct contact heat exchanger medium to cool air before it enters the
turbine.
“The ice build period is off-peak, with no effect on the daily maximum demand,” John Rule Marketing
Manager BAC Australia stated. “Also, the control of ice build can be coordinated with spinning reserve
needs. The wet air cooler provides extra benefits in washing the air, removing dust, insects and smoke.
The dirt is collected in an easily accessible basin for filtration cleaning. There are no finned coils to clog.”
“Using ammonia is a highly energy-efficient process, as well as being greenhouse friendly, and has
essentially no affect on the ozone layer. This, combined with the piped natural gas system, means that
greenhouse gas production is much less than that from a coal-fired power station.”

M1
Technical Resources
Resources Index
Technical Resources
Wet-Bulb Temperature Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M2
Temperature Conversion Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M13
Formulas and Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M14
Converstion Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M16
Selection Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M18
The Values of Standards and Independent Certification Programs . .M20
CTI Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M22
What’s a Green Building? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M24
Materials of Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M26
Selection of a Remote Sump for an Open CT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M28
Selection of a Remote Sump for a CCCT or EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M32
Layout Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M36
Connection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M56
Friction Loss Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M58
Piping Considerations - Maximum Fluid Velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M59
Cooling Tower Pumping and Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M60
Refrigeration Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M105
Thermophysical Properties of Refrigerants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M114
Cooling Towers in Parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M121
Fundamentals of Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M124
Fundamentals of Cooling System Filtration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M159
Water Quality Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M167
Maintenance Check List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M169
Replacement Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M171

M2
Wet-Bulb Temperature Selection

This section contains tables that are commonly used for the design and sizing of evaporative cooling
equipment, reproduced from chapter 27 of the 2001 ASHRAE Handbook-Fundamentals.
The data presented in the tables represents different climatic conditions throughout North America. Dry-bulb
temperature data represents the sensible component of outdoor air, whereas wet-bulb temperature data
represents the amount of moisture that the air can evaporate. Evaporative cooling equipment selection is
based on wet-bulb temperature, as units rely on the process of evaporation to reject heat.
Columns in the table are organized to present dry-bulb and wet-bulb temperatures corresponding to 0.4%,
1% and 2% annual cumulative frequency of occurrence. Each temperature in a column represents the value
that is exceeded by the indicated percentage of hours in a year (8,760). For instance, according to Table 1B,
the wet-bulb temperature in Anniston, Alabama will exceed 79ºF as shown in column 3A on average 35
hours (0.4%) in any given year. As cooling systems must be designed to meet the peak cooling load, most
comfort cooling and light industrial application designs are based on 0.4% annual cumulative frequency of
occurrence. This corresponds to the data found in Column 3a of Tables 1B (United States) and 2B
(Canada).
Pages M3 to M12 are Copyright 2001, American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning
Engineers, Inc. (www.ashrae.org). Reprinted by permission from 2001 ASHRAE Handbook-Fundamentals.
This text may not be copied nor distributed in either paper or digital form without ASHRAE's permission.

M3
Wet-Bulb Data
Technical Resources
Reprinted with permission from 2001 ASHRAE Handbook-Fundamentals. Copyright 2001.

M4

M5
Technical Resources

M6

M7
Technical Resources

M8

M9
Technical Resources

M10

M11
Technical Resources

M12

M13
Temperature Conversion Chart

In the center column, find the number which corresponds to the base temperature to be converted. The
Celsius equivalent temperature to a Fahrenheit base temperature is in the left column. The Fahrenheit
equivalent temperature to a Celsius base temperature is in the right column.
Base Base Base Base
Technical Resources
Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature
°C (°C or °F) °F °C (°C or °F) °F °C (°C or °F) °F °C (°C or °F) °F
-40
-40.0 -40 -40.0 -4.4 24 75.2 31.1 88 190.4 66.7 152 305.6
-39.4 -39 -38.2 -3.9 25 77.0 31.7 89 192.2 67.2 153 307.4
-38.9 -38 -36.4 -3.3 26 78.8 32.2 90 194.0 67.8 154 309.2
-38.3 -37 -34.6 -2.8 27 80.6 32.8 91 195.8 68.3 155 311.0
-37.8 -36 -32.8 -2.2 28 82.4 33.3 92 197.6 68.9 156 312.8
-37.2 -35 -31.0 -1.7 29 84.2 33.9 93 199.4 69.4 157 314.6
-36.7 -34 -29.2 -1.1 30 86.0 34.4 94 201.2 70.0 158 316.4
-36.1 -33 -27.4 -0.6 31 87.8 35.0 95 203.0 70.6 159 318.2
-35.6 -32 -25.6 0.0 32 89.6 35.6 96 204.8 71.1 160 320.0
-35.0 -31 -23.8 0.6 33 91.4 36.1 97 206.6 71.7 161 321.8
-34.4 -30 -22.0 1.1 34 93.2 36.7 98 208.4 72.2 162 323.6
-33.9 -29 -20.2 1.7 35 95.0 37.2 99 210.2 72.8 163 325.4
-33.3 -28 -18.4 2.2 36 96.8 37.8 100 212.0 73.3 164 327.2
-32.8 -27 -16.6 2.8 37 98.6 38.3 101 213.8 73.9 165 329.0
-32.2 -26 -14.8 3.3 38 100.4 38.9 102 215.6 74.4 166 330.8
-31.7 -25 -13.0 3.9 39 102.2 39.4 103 217.4 75.0 167 332.6
-31.1 -24 -11.2 4.4 40 104.0 40.0 104 219.2 75.6 168 334.4
-30.6 -23 -9.4 5.0 41 105.8 40.6 105 221.0 76.1 169 336.2
-30.0 -22 -7.6 5.6 42 107.6 41.1 106 222.8 76.7 170 338.0
-29.4 -21 -5.8 6.1 43 109.4 41.7 107 224.6 77.2 171 339.8
-28.9 -20 -4.0 6.7 44 111.2 42.2 108 226.4 77.8 172 341.6
-28.3 -19 -2.2 7.2 45 113.0 42.8 109 228.2 78.3 173 343.4
-27.8 -18 -0.4 7.8 46 114.8 43.3 110 230.0 78.9 174 345.2
-27.2 -17 1.4 8.3 47 116.6 43.9 111 231.8 79.4 175 347.0
-26.7 -16 3.2 8.9 48 118.4 44.4 112 233.6 80.0 176 348.8
-26.1 -15 5.0 9.4 49 120.2 45.0 113 235.4 80.6 177 350.6
-25.6 -14 6.8 10.0 50 122.0 45.6 114 237.2 81.1 178 352.4
-25.0 -13 8.6 10.6 51 123.8 46.1 115 239.0 81.7 179 354.2
-24.4 -12 10.4 11.1 52 125.6 46.7 116 240.8 82.2 180 356.0
-23.9 -11 12.2 11.7 53 127.4 47.2 117 242.6 82.8 181 357.8
-23.3 -10 14.0 12.2 54 129.2 47.8 118 244.4 83.3 182 359.6
-22.8 -9 15.8 12.8 55 131.0 48.3 119 246.2 83.9 183 361.4
-22.2 -8 17.6 13.3 56 132.8 48.9 120 248.0 84.4 184 363.2
-21.7 -7 19.4 13.9 57 134.6 49.4 121 249.8 85.0 185 365.0
-21.1 -6 21.2 14.4 58 136.4 50.0 122 251.6 85.6 186 366.8
-20.6 -5 23.0 15.0 59 138.2 50.6 123 253.4 86.1 187 368.6
-20.0 -4 24.8 15.6 60 140.0 51.1 124 255.2 86.7 188 370.4
-19.4 -3 26.6 16.1 61 141.8 51.7 125 257.0 87.2 189 372.2
-18.9 -2 28.4 16.7 62 143.6 52.2 126 258.8 87.8 190 374.0
-18.3 -1 30.2 17.2 63 145.4 52.8 127 260.6 88.3 191 375.8
-17.8 0 32.0 17.8 64 147.2 53.3 128 262.4 88.9 192 377.6
-17.2 1 33.8 18.3 65 149.0 53.9 129 264.2 89.4 193 379.4
-16.7 2 35.6 18.9 66 150.8 54.4 130 266.0 90.0 194 381.2
-16.1 3 37.4 19.4 67 152.6 55.0 131 267.8 90.6 195 383.0
-15.6 4 39.2 20.0 68 154.4 55.6 132 269.6 91.1 196 384.8
-15.0 5 41.0 20.6 69 156.2 56.1 133 271.4 91.7 197 386.6
-14.4 6 42.8 21.1 70 158.0 56.7 134 273.2 92.2 198 388.4
-13.9 7 44.6 21.7 71 159.8 57.2 135 275.0 92.8 199 390.2
-13.3 8 46.4 22.2 72 161.6 57.8 136 276.8 93.3 200 392.0
-12.8 9 48.2 22.8 73 163.4 58.3 137 278.6 93.9 201 393.8
-12.2 10 50.0 23.3 74 165.2 58.9 138 280.4 94.4 202 395.6
-11.7 11 51.8 23.9 75 167.0 59.4 139 282.2 95.0 203 397.4
-11.1 12 53.6 24.4 76 168.8 60.0 140 284.0 95.6 204 399.2
-10.6 13 55.4 25.0 77 170.6 60.6 141 285.8 96.1 205 401.0
-10.0 14 57.2 25.6 78 172.4 61.1 142 287.6 96.7 206 402.8
-9.4 15 59.0 26.1 79 174.2 61.7 143 289.4 97.2 207 404.6
-8.9 16 60.8 26.7 80 176.0 62.2 144 291.2 97.8 208 406.4
-8.3 17 62.6 27.2 81 177.8 62.8 145 293.0 98.3 209 408.2
-7.8 18 64.4 27.8 82 179.6 63.3 146 294.8 98.9 210 410.0
-7.2 19 66.2 28.3 83 181.4 63.9 147 296.6 99.4 211 411.8
-6.7 20 68.0 28.9 84 183.2 64.4 148 298.4 100.0 212 413.6
-6.1 21 69.8 29.4 85 185.0 65.0 149 300.2
-5.6 22 71.6 30.0 86 186.8 65.6 150 302.0
-5.0 23 73.4 30.6 87 188.6 66.1 151 303.8

M14
Formulas and Tables

Fan Laws:
The fan laws can be used to predict the performance of a tower with a non-standard motor.
RPM2 = RPM1 (CFM2) / (CFM1)
Static Pressure2 = Static Pressure1 (CFM2/CFM1)2
Formulas & Tables
Horsepower2 = Horsepower1 (CFM2 / CFM1)3
Formulas
Range = Entering Water Temperature - Leaving Water Temperature
Approach = Leaving Water Temperature - Ambient Wet-Bulb
Heat Rejected by a Cooling Tower:

BTUH = (Flow) X (Range) X 500 X (SG) X (SH)
Note: SG = SH = 1 for water
MBH = 1000 BTUH
Did you know?

Refrigeration Tons:
Cooling tower tons account for the heat of
BTUH compression imposed by the chiller in addition to the
Tons = building load. The heat of compression is typically
12,000 assumed to be a 25% addition, or 3,000 BTUH per ton.
Cooling Tower Tons:
BTUH
Tons =
15,000
Basic Electrical:
E=IxR
P=IxE
where: E = voltage (volts) I = current (amps) R = resistance (ohms) P = power (watts)
AC Line Current in a Single Phase Supply

P
I=
E x PF x EFF
AC Line Current in a Three Phase Supply
P
I=
√3x E x PF x EFF
Where:
I is the RMS line current in Amps PF is the input power factor
P is the average output power in Watts EFF is the efficiency of the supply
E is the AC line voltage in Volts

M15
Steel Gauge Thickness Specific Heat and Specific Gravity of Glycol

Gauge Inches Ethylene Glycol Propylene Glycol
8 0.165 SH SG SH SG
9 0.150 10% 0.957 1.015 0.981 1.009
10 0.135 20% 0.924 1.030 0.960 1.019
11 1.120 30% 0.887 1.045 0.934 1.027
12 0.105 40% 0.849 1.058 0.904 1.034
Technical Resources
13 0.090 50% 0.809 1.071 0.868 1.040
14 0.075
15 0.067
16 0.059
Temperature Conversions
Fahrenheit to Celsius: Temp ºC = 5/9 (Temp ºF — 32)
For quick temperature
conversion, see page M13.
Celsius to Fahrenheit: Temp ºF = 9/5 (Temp ºC) + 32
Water Quality Guidelines

In order to control the cycles of concentration such that BAC water quality guidelines* are maintained, it
will be necessary to “bleed” or “blow down” a small amount of recirculating water from the system. This
“bleed” water is replenished with fresh make-up water, thereby limiting the build-up of impurities.
The required continuous bleed rate can be calculated using the following formula:
Bleed Rate = Evaporation Rate

Number of Cycles of Concentration -1
Where:
Evaporation Rate = (Flow) x (Range) x 0.001
The evaporation rate can also be estimated as:
• 2 GPM per 1 million BTU/HR of heat rejection
• 3 GPM per 100 tons of refrigeration
Number of Cycles of Concentration

The degree to which dissolved solids and other impurities build up in the recirculating water may be
defined as the cycles of concentration. Specifically, cycles of concentration is the ratio of the
concentration of a dissolved solid (for example - chlorides, sulfates, etc.) in the recirculating water to
the concentration of the same material in the make-up water.
Water Make-Up Rate = Bleed Rate + Evaporation Rate
* Note: BAC water quality guidelines are available in the applicable Operating and Maintenance Manual,
downloadable from www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.

M16
CONVERSION FACTORS
Multiply By To Obtain Multiply By To Obtain
acre 43,560 square feet (ft2) joule (J) 9.478×10–4 Btu
ampere-hr (A-hr) 3,600 coulomb (C) J 0.7376 ft-lbf
ångström (Å) 1×10–10 meter (m) J 1 newton·m (N·m)
atmosphere (atm) 76.0 cm, mercury (Hg) J/s 1 watt (W)
atm, std 29.92 in, mercury (Hg)
atm, std 14.70 lbf/in2 abs (psia) kilogram (kg) 2.205 pound (lbm)
atm, std 33.90 ft, water kgf 9.8066 newton (N)
atm, std 1.013×105 pascal (Pa) kilometer (km) 3,281 feet (ft)
Conversion Factors
km/hr 0.621 mph

bar 1×105 Pa kilopascal (kPa) 0.145 lbf/in2 (psi)
barrels–oil 42 gallons–oil kilowatt (kW) 1.341 horsepower (hp)
Btu 1,055 joule (J) kW 3,413 Btu/hr
Btu 2.928×10–4 kilowatt-hr (kWh) kW 737.6 (ft-lbf )/sec
Btu 778 ft-lbf kW-hour (kWh) 3,413 Btu
Btu/hr 3.930×10–4 horsepower (hp) kWh 1.341 hp-hr
Btu/hr 0.293 watt (W) kWh 3.6×106 joule (J)
Btu/hr 0.216 ft-lbf/sec kip (K) 1,000 lbf
K 4,448 newton (N)
calorie (g-cal) 3.968×10–3 Btu
cal 1.560×10–6 hp-hr liter (L) 61.02 in3
cal 4.186 joule (J) L 0.264 gal (US Liq)
cal/sec 4.186 watt (W) L 10–3 m3
centimeter (cm) 3.281×10–2 foot (ft) L/second (L/s) 2.119 ft3/min (cfm)
cm 0.394 inch (in) L/s 15.85 gal (US)/min (gpm)
centipoise (cP) 0.001 pascal·sec (Pa·s)
centistokes (cSt) 1×10–6 m2/sec (m2/s) meter (m) 3.281 feet (ft)
cubic feet/second (cfs) 0.646317 million gallons/day m 1.094 yard
(mgd)
cubic foot (ft3) 7.481 gallon m/second (m/s) 196.8 feet/min (ft/min)
cubic meters (m3) 1,000 Liters mile (statute) 5,280 feet (ft)
electronvolt (eV) 1.602×10–19 joule (J) mile (statute) 1.609 kilometer (km)
mile/hour (mph) 88.0 ft/min (fpm)
foot (ft) 30.48 cm mph 1.609 km/h
ft 0.3048 meter (m) mm of Hg 1.316×10–3 atm
–3
ft-pound (ft-lbf) 1.285×10 Btu mm of H2O 9.678×10–5 atm
ft-lbf 3.766×10–7 kilowatt-hr (kWh)
ft-lbf 0.324 calorie (g-cal) newton (N) 0.225 lbf
ft-lbf 1.356 joule (J) N·m 0.7376 ft-lbf
ft-lbf/sec 1.818×10–3 horsepower (hp) N·m 1 joule (J)
gallon (US Liq) 3.785 liter (L) pascal (Pa) 9.869×10–6 atmosphere (atm)
gallon (US Liq) 0.134 ft3 Pa 1 newton/m2 (N/m2)
gallons of water 8.3453 pounds of water Pa·sec (Pa·s) 10 poise (P)
gamma (γ, Γ) 1×10–9 tesla (T) pound (lbm,avdp) 0.454 kilogram (kg)
gauss 1×10–4 T lbf 4.448 N
gram (g) 2.205×10–3 pound (lbm) lbf-ft 1.356 N·m
lbf/in2 (psi) 0.068 atm
hectare 1×104 square meters (m2) psi 2.307 ft of H2O
hectare 2.47104 acres psi 2.036 in of Hg
horsepower (hp) 42.4 Btu/min psi 6,895 Pa
hp 745.7 watt (W)
hp 33,000 (ft-lbf)/min radian 180/π degree
hp 550 (ft-lbf)/sec
hp-hr 2,544 Btu stokes 1×10–4 m2/s
hp-hr 1.98×106 ft-lbf
hp-hr 2.68×106 joule (J) therm 1×105 Btu
hp-hr 0.746 kWh
watt (W) 3.413 Btu/hr
inch (in) 2.540 centimeter (cm) W 1.341×10–3 horsepower (hp)
in of Hg 0.0334 atm W 1 joule/sec (J/s)
in of Hg 13.60 in of H2O weber/m2 (Wb/m2) 10,000 gauss
in of H2O 0.0361 lbf/in2 (psi)
in of H2O 0.002458 atm
Reprinted with permission from Fundamentals of Engineering (FE) Supplied-Reference Handbook, 6th Edition, Copyright 2003.

M17
Register for your

Guide and you may
WIN ®
A BOSE
WAVE® RADIO
WITH CD PLAYER
For a limited time

receive a
free copy
of the new BAC


M18
Selection Software
Easy-To-Use Selection Software
BAC offers, easy-to-use selection software to assist you in the selection and evaluation of evaporative
cooling products. In addition to cataloged models, CTI Certified alternate-horsepower selections are also
available from the selection software. The program provides equipment specifications, engineering data,
Selection Software
performance curves, layout recommendations, sound data and other information to aid in selecting the best
BAC product for your application.
Cooling Tower Selections

All cooling tower models in the selection program are
included in the CTI Thermal performance certification
program. The selection program also provides the ability
to make selections outside the scope of CTI Thermal
performance certification criteria. BAC warrants the ther-
mal performance of all cooling tower selections made by
the selection program, whether or not under the scope of
the certification program.
Product selections often contain reserve capacity at the

design conditions. The selection program can optimize the performance of a unit at specified conditions.
Select a unit for design conditions, and then maximize flow rate, hot and cold water temperatures, wet-bulb
temperature or approach.
Closed Circuit Cooling Tower Selections

The Closed Circuit Cooling Tower Selection Program provides equipment selections for applications
utilizing water, aqueous ethylene glycol or aqueous propylene glycol as the process fluid. As with open
circuit cooling towers, all models using water as the process fluid are CTI Certified.
Evaporative Condenser Selections

The Evaporative Condenser Selection Program provides equipment selections for applications utilizing
R-717 (ammonia), R-22, and R-134a.
Accessories
Each selection program evaluates the use of accessories that may impact capacity (i.e., low-sound fans,
sound attenuation, etc.)

M19
Alternative Motors
Standard selections utilize a standard horsepower motor to meet the full load performance required for the
project. Alternative selections based on a reduced speed provided by the ENERGY-MISER® Fan System, a
2-speed motor or a variable frequency drive are also available.
Technical Resources
Performance Curves
The Cooling Tower and Closed Circuit Cooling Tower
Selection Programs generate performance curves based
on flow rates ranging from 80% to 120% of the design flow
rate. Performance curves are a graphical representation of
the leaving water temperature versus the entering wet-bulb
temperature, and are typically evaluated at a number of
ranges.
Performance curves from the Cooling

Tower Selection Program
Sound Data
The selection program provides sound ratings for standard selections at 5 and 50-foot distances. For
extremely sound sensitive installations, sound ratings are also available for units with low sound fans and
sound attenuation.
Website
The BAC selection software is available for download from
www.BaltimoreAircoil.com. Direct links to the website
within the program provide users of the selection program
with additional information pertaining to Unit Engineering
Data, Certified Unit Drawings, Layout Guidelines and
Specifications. Consult your local BAC Representative for
additional application assistance.

M20
The Value of Standards and

Independent Certification Programs
Baltimore Aircoil Company strongly believes in the value of standards and independent certification
programs. Through this philosophy, customers can be assured of a consistent level of performance and
The Values of Standards
quality when using BAC products and services. These standards and certification programs cover many
diverse areas, ranging from how product improvements are implemented in BAC’s factories to how BAC
products are rated for thermal performance.
This fundamental belief is demonstrated first and foremost by ISO 9001:2000 Certification of BAC’s design,
engineering, and manufacturing of evaporative cooling products. Compliance with ISO 9001:2000
standards offers BAC customers better, more consistent quality, reliable
performance, and confidence that the product can be delivered on time
and per the specifications. Consistent quality also reduces the potential
for installation and operational problems. Any problems reported from
the field receive swift corrective and preventative actions to prevent
reoccurrence. This level of performance is assured through frequent
internal training and audits, backed by rigorous external audits by an
independent, ISO-accredited Registrar. ISO 9001:2000 also requires demonstrating continuous
improvement of products, processes, and systems over time, benefiting both BAC and its many customers.
BAC is also fervently committed to providing independent thermal

performance verification for all its products. BAC leads the industry with
nine product lines, including both open and closed circuit cooling towers,
currently certified by the Cooling Technology Institute (CTI), more than any
other manufacturer. Independent certification by the CTI assures owners,
operators, consulting engineers, and installing contractors that BAC units
will perform in accordance with published thermal performance ratings.
Owners and operators can realize the full value of their investment in their cooling system, and avoid the
operating cost penalties associated with a deficient tower. System design engineers can reduce or eliminate
“safety factors” and avoid the need to specify costly field performance tests, while minimizing their liability.
Contractors can compare equipment based on features and benefits, rather than questioning whether all the
proposals are based on the same true level of thermal performance. CTI certification also reduces the
potential for costly callbacks due to deficient performance. Leveling the playing field also advances the
state of the industry: manufacturers must devote their energies toward product improvement to gain true
competitive advantage. Users of evaporative cooling equipment benefit from this true competition through
innovative new products, features, and service options.

M21
The design of BAC products is also influenced by many other standards. Examples include the following:
• All access platforms, ladder systems, and handrail packages are designed and manufactured to meet
or exceed OSHA standards.
• Evaporative cooling equipment with Factory Mutual (FM) Approval is available where required to help
reduce insurance premiums and potentially eliminate the need for fire suppression sprinkler systems.
• The standard heat transfer coils used in BAC evaporative condensers and closed circuit cooling towers
comply with the ASME B31.5 Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Component Standard. This
Technical Resources
standard assures the user of the pressure integrity, material composition, engineering design, and
fabrication techniques used for the heat exchange coils. When required by local codes or the specific
needs of a project, BAC can also produce coils with the ASME “U” stamp per Section VIII, Division 1 of
the ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code.
Compliance with these codes and standards helps assure BAC customers that the unit they purchase is
suitable for the duty required.
Besides supporting these standards, BAC actively works with industry organizations, such as ASHRAE,
ASME, ARI, CTI, and FM to improve their standards, or develop standards where none currently exist. For
instance, BAC led the industry by working with CTI to update the certification standard in the early 1980s,
and led the way by certifying the first factory assembled cooling tower product line under this updated
standard. BAC is also currently working with both CTI and ARI on developing standards for evaporative
condenser thermal performance, as well as keeping current standards up-to-date. Additionally, BAC actively
participated on the ASME B31.5 Piping Committee to integrate heat transfer components, such as
evaporative condensers and closed circuit cooling towers, within the standard.
BAC strongly encourages its customers, suppliers, and

competitors to join us in developing and supporting these
standards and certification programs for the benefit of the
industry and society as a whole. BAC welcomes feedback on
this subject, which can be sent to info@BaltimoreAircoil.com.

M22
Cooling Technology Institute

(CTI) Certification
Independent Assurance of Thermal
Performance In Advance
CTI Certification
For over two decades, cooling tower owners, operators, design

engineers and installing contractors have relied upon CTI Certification of
cooling tower thermal performance in accordance with CTI Standard
STD-201. CTI Certification provides independent assurance, prior to
shipment and installation, that a specific cooling tower will perform in
accordance with the manufacturer’s published thermal performance data.
Having CTI certification eliminates the need for costly onsite field tests
and ensures system performance will meet design objectives.
BAC Commitment to CTI Certification

BAC is committed to providing independent thermal performance verification for all its products. Starting with
FXT Cooling Towers, in 1981, every factory-assembled BAC Cooling Tower line has been CTI Certified.
CTI Certification For Closed Circuit Cooling Towers

CTI Standard STD-201 was expanded to include Closed Circuit Cooling Towers. BAC led the industry,
certifying the thermal performance of the FXV Closed Circuit Cooling Tower line in 1998 and the Series V
Closed Circuit Cooling Tower line in 2000. Dual air inlet FXV models were added in 2003, with the largest
capacity of any factory-assembled Closed Circuit Cooling Tower cell in the industry. BAC Closed Circuit
Cooling Towers can be specified with the same assurance of thermal performance as its Open Circuit
Cooling Towers.
Why is CTI Certification Important to You?

Equipment Owners and Operators
Independent certification of cooling tower thermal performance assures owners and operators that they will
receive full value from their investment. It eliminates the potential for years of excessive operating costs due to
deficient equipment and provides this benefit at no additional cost to the project. In fact, performance certifica-
tion can actually reduce first cost by eliminating the need for “safety factors” when sizing the equipment and
the cost of a field acceptance test to verify performance.

M23
Design Engineers
By specifying CTI Certification of thermal performance, a design engineer can protect the owner and ensure
that his or her client receives the performance they paid for. CTI performance certification provides a
responsible basis for design and complements codes and standards used to control other systems and
products. Many industry organizations are working to include certification in their standards. For instance,
California Title 24 has required CTI Certification of all cooling towers since 2005. CTI Certification complies
with these codes, prevents contractual misunderstandings, and eliminates disputes over deficient
Technical Resources
performance after installation.
Installing Contractors
Independent certification of cooling tower thermal performance assures the installing contractor that all
certified cooling tower proposals are based on the same level of thermal performance. This not only
eliminates the potential for costly callbacks due to deficient thermal performance, but also maintains a
responsible basis of design for design/build, design/assist, or value-engineered projects.
The Cost of Cooling Tower Deficiency

While sometimes hard to detect, a deficient cooling tower forces other system components to work harder to
make up for its shortcomings. In an air conditioning application, this burden is imposed upon the chiller. If the
cooling tower cannot reject the required load at the lowest possible temperatures, the chiller is forced to
operate against a condensing pressure higher than necessary, thereby consuming considerably more energy.
This may not affect building comfort levels except at peak conditions, but it will increase operating costs
year-round. A tower that is 20% underrated will cost the owner three to four times the original price of the
tower in added energy costs! Why take a chance – insist on CTI certified performance!
Specify CTI Certification for ALL

Your Cooling Tower Needs
The equipment sections of this handbook include
suggested specifications for each product. When
adding verbiage to an existing specification,
suggested wording is as follows:
“The thermal performance shall be certified by the

Cooling Technology Institute in accordance with CTI
Standard STD-201 or, lacking such certification, a
field acceptance test shall be conducted within the
warranty period in accordance with CTI Acceptance
Test Code ATC-105, by the Cooling Technology
Institute, or other qualified independent third-party
testing agency, licensed by CTI. Tests performed by
the manufacturer’s personnel are not acceptable.”
Performance testing in BAC’s R&D facility

M24
What’s a Green Building?

As the cost of energy increases and environmental concerns are brought to the forefront of design, building
“green” may very well become the standard instead of the exception. The US Green Building Council with
the LEED Green Building Rating System® provides step-by-step guidelines on environmentally friendly and
sustainable building design practices.
Green Building Council
What is the U.S. Green Building Council (USGBC)?

The US Green Building Council is non government organization (NGO) comprised of leaders from the
building industry brought together to promote buildings that are environmentally responsible, profitable and
healthy places to live & work. Members of the USCBC represent all segments of the building industry
including: manufacturers, municipalities, architects, interior designers, builders and several branches of the
military.
What is LEED?
The LEED (Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design) Green Building Rating System® gives
developers a checklist to measure a building's level of "greenness" and is conceived and tested
collaboratively by members of the USGBC. LEED standards are available or under development for:
• New commercial construction and major renovation projects (LEED-NC)
• Existing building operations (LEED-EB)
• Commercial interiors projects (LEED-CI)
• Core and shell projects (LEED-CS)
• Homes (LEED-H)
• Neighborhood development (LEED-ND)
LEED was created to:

• Define "green building" by establishing a common standard of measurement
• Promote whole-building design practices
• Recognize environmental leadership in the building industry
• Raise consumer awareness of green building benefits
LEED provides a framework for assessing building performance based on standards such as
• ASHRAE 90.1-2004
• California Title 24
• Various US Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Documents for storm water management

M25
Points are given for various sustainable features in five categories: building site; water efficiency; energy &
atmosphere; materials & resources; & indoor environmental quality. There are 80 total possible base points
plus 5 points for Innovations in Upgrades, Operations & Maintenance. Depending on the number of points,
the project can be classified at the following levels:
• Certified: 32–39 points

• Silver: 40–47 points
Technical Resources
• Gold: 48–63 points
• Platinum: 64–85 points
Future of USGBC & LEED

Approximately 33% to 50% of new building projects research the feasibility of LEED certification during the
initial phase of construction. Since 2000, 137 new buildings have been certified, while 1,700 buildings in 50
states have been registered as LEED projects to be evaluated for their sustainability and environmental
performance over their lifecycles.
Several cities and regions in the US have incorporated green building into local ordinances, incentives and
guidelines. LEED buildings and the concept of building “green” is going to continue and become the normal
practice worldwide as the price of energy increases and our natural resources decline in the future.
BAC, USGBC & LEED

BAC is a member of USGBC and is becoming active in both local chapters and on a national basis. BAC
has exhibited in Greenbuild, USGBC’s Annual Conference. Additionally, BAC is in the process of certifying
employees to become the leaders in providing green products.
Interested in learning more? Go to the US Green Building Council website: USGBC.org

M26
Materials of Construction
Operating environment, desired life expectancy, and budget all influence the materials of construction
selected for an evaporative cooling product. BAC products are available in a variety of materials and BAC
designs focus on long life and easy maintenance. As a result, owners can maximize their operational goals.
Materials of Construction
This section describes the materials of construction available for BAC products. To determine the best
material options for your specific project, consult your local BAC Representative.
Galvanized Steel
G-235 (Z700 metric) hot-dip galvanized steel is the heaviest commercially available galvanized steel,
universally recognized for its strength and corrosion resistance. To assure long-life, G-235 (Z700 metric)
hot-dip galvanized steel is used as the base material for all steel products and parts, and all exposed cut
edges are protected with a zinc-rich coating after fabrication. With good maintenance and proper water
treatment, G-235 (Z700 metric) galvanized steel products will provide excellent service life under the
operating conditions normally encountered in comfort cooling and industrial applications.
BALTIBOND® Corrosion Protection System

The BALTIBOND® Corrosion Protection System is a unique system approach to evaporative cooling
equipment protection. A special hybrid polymer, formulated for tenacious bonding, toughness, and
impermeability to fluids, is applied by electrostatic spray to G-235 (Z700 metric) hot-dip galvanized steel
surfaces. The polymer undergoes a heat-activated, thermosetting cure process, fuse-bonding it to the
galvanized steel substrate.
The BALTIBOND® Corrosion Protection System can extend the service life of equipment and alleviates
concerns with white rust, virtually eliminating the need for periodic passivation of galvanized steel
components.
Fused Bonded Thermosetting Polymer

Zinc
Steel
Zinc
Fused Bonded Thermosetting Polymer

M27
Technical Resources
HXV Closed Circuit Cooling Tower Series V Closed Ciruit Cooling Tower shown
shown with the optional BALTIBOND® with the optional BALTIBOND® Corrosion
Corrosion Protection System Protection System
Stainless Steel
Series 300 stainless steel is the industry’s traditional alternative to galvanized steel when elevated levels of
corrosion resistance are required. Series 300 stainless steel materials can be provided in lieu of standard
materials for unit structure, as well as many auxiliary components.
Component Construction
In addition to the various materials available for the structure of its units, BAC carefully selects the materials
used for all components of its products. Additional materials such as fiberglass reinforced polyester (FRP),
polyvinyl chloride (PVC), aluminum and copper are used for components when necessary to provide the
corrosion resistance required a unit providing evaporative cooling service.
Which material option is right for my project?

Included within the product section of each open cooling tower, closed circuit cooling tower and evaporative
condenser in this handbook is a discussion on construction options. These sections define the availability of
certain materials and combinations of materials for each product. Refer to these sections for specific product
information. Your local BAC Representative can provide guidance on the proper unit construction for your
project.

M28
Selection of a Remote Sump Tank for an

Open Circuit Cooling Tower
Note: This section provides a simplified method for the selection of a remote sump tank for an open circuit
cooling tower only. For information on sizing a remote sump tank for a closed circuit cooling tower or
Remote Sump Tank - Selection
evaporative condenser, see page M32.
Remote sump tanks are used on evaporative cooling systems to provide a means of cold water basin freeze
protection during cold weather operation. The remote sump tank is usually located in a heated, indoor
space, and may preclude the need to winterize the cooling tower. A remote sump tank must provide suffi-
cient storage volume to accommodate all the water that will drain back to it during cooling system shutdown,
including:
• The total volume of water contained within the cooling tower during operation (cooling tower volume).
• The volume of water contained in all system piping located above the operating water level of the
remote sump tank (system piping volume).
• The volume of water contained within any heat exchanger, or other equipment located above the
operating water level of the remote sump tank that will drain to the tank when the cooling system is
shut down (system components volume).
The maximum volume of water contained within the cooling tower is the volume of water to the overflow
level. Besides the water in the cold water basin during operation, this volume will take into consideration
water in the distribution system, water in suspension in the fill, plus an allowance for the external
pulldown from piping and other equipment. This simplified method is a conservative approach as it will not
consider any volume reductions based on flow rates. For specific information for your application, contact
On remote sump applications, the standard float valve(s) and strainer(s) are omitted from the cold water
basin and a properly sized outlet connection is added.
Cold water basin volumes at the overflow level are given in Tables 1 through 4. Table 5 provides pipe
capacities (gallons per linear foot) for common Schedule 40 nominal pipe sizes, useful when determining
system piping volume.
Safety Factor
When selecting a remote sump tank, select a model with a net available volume that is 5% greater than the
total volume required. The net available volume is the volume between the operating level and the overflow
level in the remote sump tank. See page H5 for engineering data (including net available volume) on BAC’s
RS Remote Sump Tanks. The minimum operating level must be maintained in the remote sump tank to
prevent vortexing of air through the tank's suction connection.

M29
Table 1. Series 3000 - Cold Water Basin Volume at Overflow
Model Number Overflow Volume (gallons)

3420A to 3299A 958
3333A to 3379A 1,019
3412A to 3436A 1,219
3455A to 3527A 1,289
3473A to 3501A 1,549
3552A to 3672A 1,787
3728A to 3828A 2,196
Technical Resources
3872A to 3970A 2,465
3985A to 31056A 2,674
3583A to 3725A 2,237
31132A 2,963
31213A to 31301A 3,211
Table 2. Series 1500 - Cold Water Basin Volume at Overflow

Overflow Volume Overflow Volume
Model Number Model Number
(gallons) (gallons)
15146 475 15270 815
15160 475 15282 815
15176 475 15296 1,050
15162 530 15325 1,050
15177 530 15350 1,050
15201 530 15368 1,050
15219 530 15310 1,200
15200 725 15340 1,200
15227 725 15365 1,200
15250 725 15385 1,200
15214 815 15425 1,200
15245 815

M30
Table 3. FXT - Cold Water Basin Volume at Overflow
FXT-6 to 7.5 63
FXT-11 98
FXT-16 to 20 73
FXT-26 to 33 113
FXT-38 to 47 146
FXT-58 to 68 197
FXT-74 to 99 273
FXT-115 to 142 420
FXT-160 to 200 558
FXT-216 to 268 666
Table 4. Series V - Cold Water Basin Volume at Overflow

VTL-016-E to VTL-039-H 72
VTL-045-H to VTL-079-K 146
VTL-082-K to VTL-095-K 215
VTL-103-K to VTL-137-M 287
VTL-152-M to VTL-227-O 432
VTL-245-P to VTL-272-P 574
VT0-12-E to VT0-28-H 26
VT0-32-H to VT0-57-K 55
VT0-65-J to VT0-88-L 85
VT0-102-L to VT0-116-M 114
VT0-132-L to VT0-176-O 153
VT1-N209-P to VT1-N270-Q 488
VT1-N301-Q to VT1-N395-R 742
VT1-N418-P to VT1-N540-Q 994
VT1-275-P to VT1-415-R 900
VT1-416-O to VT1-600-P 1,367
VT1-550-P to VT1-830-R 1,832
VT1-825-P to VT1-1335-S 2,764

M31
Table 5. Schedule 40 Pipe Capacities*

Nominal Pipe Size Gallons Per Linear Foot
2 0.174
3 0.384
4 0.662
6 1.503
8 2.603
Technical Resources
10 4.101
12 5.822
14 7.04
16 9.193
18 11.636
20 14.461
24 20.916
* Not applicable for other types of piping.
Example
A VTL-059-H will be installed on a cooling tower/heat exchanger system that will also utilize an RS Remote
Sump Tank. The tower side volume contained in the heat exchanger is 25 gallons. The system has been
designed with 35 feet of 4 inch pipe that will be above the operating level of the remote sump tank. What is
the correct RS Remote Sump Tank selection?
Solution:
From Table 4, the cold water basin volume at overflow for the VTL-059-H is 146 gallons.
From Table 5, the 4” pipe will contain 0.662 gallons of water per linear foot. The total volume contained in the
4” pipe is 23 gallons.
The tower side volume of the heat exchanger is 25 gallons.
The total volume required is:

Cooling Tower Volume at Overflow (146 gallons)
+ System Piping Volume (23 gallons)
+ System Components Volume (25 gallons)
= Total Volume 194 gallons
194 gallons x 1.05 (safety factor) = 204 gallons required.

From the engineering data on page H5, the correct RS Remote Sump Tank selection is an RS-335, which
has a net available volume of 257 gallons.

M32
Selection and Application of a Remote

Sump Tank for a Closed Circuit Cooling
Tower or Evaporative Condenser
Note: This section provides instruction in the selection of a remote sump tank for a closed circuit cooling
tower or evaporative condenser only. For information on sizing a remote sump tank for an open circuit
cooling tower, see page M28.
Remote sump tanks are used on evaporative cooling systems to provide a means of cold water basin freeze
protection during cold weather operation. When the recirculating pump of a closed circuit cooling tower or
evaporative condenser is not operating, all of the recirculating water drains by gravity to the remote sump.
The remote sump tank is usually located in a heated, indoor space, and may preclude the need to winterize
the cold water basin.
The remote sump tank must be sized to accommodate the suction head for the pump plus a surge volume
to hold all the water that will drain back to the tank when the pump is shut down. This surge volume (also
called drain down volume) includes water in the evaporative cooling equipment and water held in the piping
between the unit and the remote sump. The volume of water in the evaporative equipment includes the
water in suspension (water within the spray distribution system and falling through the heat transfer section)
and water in the cold water basin during normal operation. Tables 1 through 4 provide the volume of water
in suspension plus the water in the cold water basin, labeled as "spray water volume." Table 5 can be used
to calculate the volume of water in the piping between the unit and the remote sump (includes riser and
drain piping) for applications where piping is Schedule 40.
To select a remote sump tank for a particular application, determine the total volume (spray water volume
plus piping volume) and select a remote sump tank with a net available volume that is 5% greater than
required. See page H5 for RS Remote Sump Tank Engineering Data.

M33
Application Notes
The standard close-coupled centrifugal pump normally furnished with BAC units is designed and selected
specifically for the pump head and flow rate required when the pump is mounted on the unit. This pump
cannot be used for remote sump applications and is therefore omitted. The following factors should be
considered when selecting remote pumps:
• Total static head from the remote sump tank operating level to the inlet of the evaporative equipment.
• Pipe and valve friction losses.
Technical Resources
• For FXV & HXV Closed Circuit Cooling Towers and CXV Evaporative Condensers, 1.0 psig water
pressure is required at the inlet of the water distribution system. For Series V Closed Circuit Cooling
Towers and Evaporative Condensers, 2.0 psig water pressure is required at the inlet of the water
distribution system.
• Required flow rate as shown in Tables 1 through 4.
A valve should always be installed in the pump discharge line so that the water flow can be adjusted
to the proper flow rate and pressure. Inlet water pressure should be measured with a pressure gauge
installed in the water supply riser near the equipment inlet. The valve should be adjusted to permit the
specified inlet pressure, which results in the design water flow rate.
Accurate inlet water pressure and flow rate are important for proper evaporative equipment operation.
Higher pressure (in excess of 10 psig) can cause leaks in the spray distribution system. Lower pressure or
low flow may cause improper wetting of the coils, which will negatively affect thermal performance, promote
scaling, and may also cause excessive drift.
On remote sump applications, the standard float valve(s) and strainer(s) are omitted from the cold water
basin and a properly sized outlet connection is added. Tables 1 through 4 include the proper outlet size for
each model. The remote sump outlet connection is located on the bottom of most units. On smaller Series V
units, the connection is located on the end of the unit. To clarify the location of the remote sump outlet
connection, refer to the appropriate unit print, available from your local BAC Representative or at
www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
Another effect of using a remote sump is that the operating weight of the evaporative unit is reduced (design
changes, the omission of the integral spray pump, and/or changes in cold water basin volume can contribute
to this deduct). Please refer to the tables below for the operating weight deduct associated with a remote
sump application.

M34
Table 1. FXV/CXV Remote Sump Data

Closed Circuit Evaporative Spray Water Required Flow Rate Outlet Size3 Weight Deduct
Cooling Tower Model Condenser Model Volume1,2 (gallons) (GPM) (in) (lbs)
FXV-42X CXV-64 to 95 270 190 6 290
FXV-43X CXV-103 to 153 290 290 6 330
FXV-44X CXV-160 to 206 550 500 8 560
FXV-64X CXV-196 to 305 600 715 10 560

FXV-66X CXV-310- to 481 750 900 10 560
N/A CXV-420 to 610 1,200 1,430 (2) 10 1,120
N/A CXV-620 to 962 1,500 1,800 (2) 10 1,120
FXV-288X CXV-T645 to T792 1,625 1,720 12 1,400
FXV-364X CXV-T791 to T944 2,000 1,720 12 1,400
N/A CXV-T1290 to T1584 3,250 3,440 (2) 12 2,800
N/A CXV-T1582 to T1888 4,000 3,440 (2) 12 2,800
Table 2. Low Profile Series V (VFL/VCL) Remote Sump Data

Cooling Tower Model Condenser Model Volume1,2 (gallons) (GPM) (in) (lbs)
VFL-012-X VCL-016 to 035 40 45 3 350
VFL-024-X VCL-038 to 079 95 94 4 550
VFL-036-X VCL-087 to 120 200 142 4 290
VFL-048-X VCL-134 to 155 250 192 6 600
VFL-072-X VCL-167 to 234 385 284 6 720
VFL-096-X VCL-257 to 299 405 384 8 1,740
Table 3. Series V Centrifugal Fan (VF1/VC1) Remote Sump Data

Cooling Tower Model Condenser Model Volume 1,2 (gallons) (GPM) (in) (lbs)
VF1-009-X VC1- 10 to 25 25* 35 2.5 180
VF1-018-X VC1- 30 to 65 50* 75 3 310
VF1-027-X VC1-72 to 90 75* 115 4 440
VF1-036-X VC1-100 to 135 105* 150 4 590
VF1-048-X VC1-150 to 205 140* 220 6 850
VF1-072-X VC1-N208 to N230 360* 305 6 2,250
VF1-096-X VC1-N243 to N315 360* 385 6 2,100
VF1-144N-X VC1-N338 to N470 520* 580 6 3,250
VF1-192-X N/A 720* 770 (2) 6 4,200
VF1-288-N N/A 1,040* 1,160 (2) 6 6,500
VF1-144-X VC1-386 to 516 600 585 8 4,510
VF1-216-X VC1-540 to 804 710 835 10 6,560
VF1-288-X VC1-772 to 1032 1,360 1,170 10 8,170
VF1-432-X VC1-1158 to 1608 2,090 1,670 12 13,270
N/A VC1-C216 to C321 360* 385 6 2,100
N/A VC1-C339 to C469 520* 580 6 3,250

M35
Table 4. Series V Axial Fan (VC2) Remote Sump Data

Evaporative Spray Water Required Flow Rate Notes Tables 1 - 4:
Outlet Size3 (in) Weight Deduct (lbs)
Condenser Model Volume 1,2 (gallons) (GPM) 1. The spray water volume is
VC2-N138 to N191 270* 220 6 1,310 based on the maximum
operating water level in the cold
VC2-N206 to N235 430* 305 6 2,260 water basin with no net drop leg
VC2-N261 to N301 480* 385 8 1,960 included in the piping system
below the unit outlet.
VC2-N356 to N446 820* 580 10 3,010
2. All remote sump unit volumes
Technical Resources
VC2-319 to 626 480 585 8 5,040 are based on bottom outlets
sized as noted, except those
VC2-526 to 957 670 835 10 7,380 models with an asterisk, which
VC2-N870 to N1204 1,440 1,170 10 10,260 are based on an end outlet
sized as noted.
VC2-684 to 1252 1,440 1,170 10 10,260
3. Drain connection size is for
VC2-1052 to 1914 2,220 1,670 12 14,930 remote sump applications only.
Table 5. Schedule 40 Pipe Capacities*

Nominal Pipe Sizes Gallons Per Linear Foot
2 0.174
3 0.384
4 0.662
6 1.503
8 2.603
10 4.101
12 5.822
14 7.040
16 9.193
18 11.636
20 14.461
24 20.916
* Not applicable for other types of piping.
Example
An FXV-421 will be installed on a system that will also utilize an RS Remote Sump Tank. The system has
been designed with 40 feet of 6-inch pipe that will be above the operating level of the remote sump tank.
What is the correct RS Remote Sump Tank selection?
Solution:
From Table 1, the spray water volume for an FXV-421 is 270 gallons.
From Table 5, the 6-inch pipe will contain 1.503 gallons of water per linear foot. The total volume contained
in the 6-inch pipe is 40 feet x 1.503 gallons/foot = 60 gallons.
The total volume required is:
Spray Water Volume (270 gallons)
+ System Piping Volume (60 gallons)
= Total Volume 330 gallons
330 gallons x 1.05 (safety factor) = 347 gallons required.

From the engineering data on page H5, the correct RS Remote Sump Tank selection is an RS-457, which
has a net available volume of 351 gallons.

M36
Layout Guidelines
Open circuit cooling towers, closed circuit cooling towers, and evaporative condensers all depend upon an
adequate supply of fresh, ambient air to provide design capacity. Other important considerations such as
the proximity to building air intakes or discharges also must be taken into account when selecting and
designing the equipment site. Included are the design layout guidelines for evaporative cooling products in
several situations typically encountered by designers. These guidelines represent minimum spacing
Layout Guidelines
requirements; more open spacing should be utilized whenever possible.
As the size of an installation increases, the total amount of heat being rejected to the atmosphere and the
volume of discharge air increase -- to the point where the units can virtually create their own environment.
As a result, it becomes increasingly difficult to apply a set of general guidelines for each case. Such
installations, and particularly those in wells or enclosures, will recirculate and the problem becomes one of
controlling the amount of recirculation and/or adjusting the design wet-bulb temperature to allow for it.
Consequently, any job that involves four or more cells should be referred to your local BAC Representative
for review.
Axial fan equipment units are not generally suited for indoor or ducted applications. In such situations, a
Series V centrifugal fan unit is recommended.
General Considerations:
When selecting the site for a cooling tower, closed circuit cooling tower, or an evaporative condenser,
consider the following factors:
1. Locate the unit to prevent the warm discharge air from being introduced into the fresh air intakes of the
building(s) served by the unit, intakes of neighboring buildings, or from being carried over any populated
area such as a building entrance.
2. Consider the potential for plume formation and its effect on the surroundings, such as large windowed
areas, and pedestrian or vehicular traffic arteries, particularly if the unit(s) will be operated during low
ambient temperatures.
3. Provide sufficient unobstructed space around the unit(s) to ensure an adequate supply of fresh, ambient
air to the air intake. Avoid situations that promote recirculation of unit discharge air, such as units
located:
a. Adjacent to walls or structures that might deflect some of the discharge airstream back into the air
intake.
b. Where high downward air velocities in the vicinity of the air intake exist.
c. Where building air intakes or exhausts, such as boiler stacks in the vicinity of the unit, might raise
the inlet wet-bulb temperature or starve the unit of air.
4. Provide adequate space around the unit for piping and proper servicing and maintenance, as shown in
Figure 1, 2, and 3.

M37
Technical Resources
Figure 1: Plan view of recommended unit servicing and maintenance spacing for dual air inlet unit
(Series 3000 Cooling Towers, FXV-288 & 364 Closed Circuit Cooling Towers, CXV-T Evaporative
Condensers)
See note
Figure 2: Plan view of recommended unit servicing and maintenance spacing for single air inlet unit
(Series 1500 Cooling Towers, FXV Closed Circuit Cooling Towers, CXV Evaporative Condensers,
Series V Cooling Towers, Closed Circuit Cooling Towers and Evaporative Condensers
Note: On Models VT0-12 through 176, VC1-10 through 205, VF1-009, 018, 027, 036, and VF1-048
clearance equal to the length of the unit should be provided on one end to facilitate fan shaft removal.

M38
Layout Guidelines
Figure 3: Plan view of recommended unit servicing and maintenance spacing

for single air inlet unit (FXT Cooling Towers)
5. The top of the fan discharge cylinder, velocity recovery stack, or discharge sound attenuation must be at
least level with, and preferably higher than any adjacent walls or buildings.
6. When possible, orient the unit so the prevailing summer wind blows the discharge air away from the air
intakes of the unit(s).
7. When the unit is installed with intake sound attenuation, the distances given in the tables below should be
measured from the face of the intake sound attenuation.
8. On larger unit installations, the problem of ensuring an adequate supply of fresh, ambient air to the tower
intakes becomes increasingly difficult. See the “Multi-cell Installations” Section of this article for specific
considerations.
9. If the installation does not meet the recommended guidelines, the units will have a greater tendency to
recirculate and the design conditions should be altered to include an allowance for the recirculation. For
instance, if the design conditions are 95°F/85°F/78°F and it was estimated that the allowance for
recirculation rate was 1°F, then the new design conditions would be 95°F/85°F/79°F and the units should
be reselected based on the new design conditions.
The "Layout Guidelines" describe several typical site layouts for BAC’s cooling towers, closed circuit cooling
towers, and evaporative condensers. If these guidelines do not cover a particular situation or if the layout
criteria cannot be met, please refer the application to your BAC Representative for review. Please indicate
prevailing wind direction, geographic orientation of the unit(s), and other factors such as large buildings and
other obstructions that may influence layout decisions.

M39
Layout Guidelines:
1. Unit Orientation
When a unit is located near a building wall, the preferred arrangement is to have the unit situated with the
cased end or blank-off side (unlouvered side) facing the adjacent wall or building.
2. Air Inlet Requirements:
Technical Resources
Should it be necessary to install a unit with the air intake facing a wall, provide at least distance “d” between
the air intake and the wall, as illustrated in Figures 4a and 4b.
Wall
Figure 4a: Plan view of unit adjacent to a wall
Wall
Figure 4b: Section view of unit adjacent to a wall
Below is the method for determining the minimum acceptable dimension "d" for a unit located with the air
intake facing a solid wall:

M40
The maximum acceptable envelope air velocity for all products except Series V with tapered hood is 300
FPM, as illustrated in the following equation:
Envelope Velocity = Unit Airflow < 300 FPM

Envelope area
For Series V units with a tapered hood the maximum acceptable air velocity increases to 400 FPM as
illustrated in the following equation:
Layout Guidelines
Envelope Velocity = Unit Airflow < 400 FPM

Envelope area
NOTE: The louver face CFM for the FXV Closed Circuit Cooling Towers and CXV Evaporative Condensers
is 70% of the total unit airflow. The remaining 30% of the airflow entering the unit through the top of the coil
section.
The Envelope area as illustrated on Figures 4a & 4b is [(L +2 +2) x d) + 2(H+h) x d)], where:
"H" - height of the air intake face in feet

“h” - elevation of the unit from the roof/ground/pad in feet. The maximum elevation is 4 feet.
"L" - length of the air intake in feet
"d" - minimum acceptable distance between the wall and the air intake face in feet
The minimum acceptable dimension "d" for the products is tabulated in Table 1. The distance "d" was
calculated using the largest horsepower model in the box size.
Example: Model 31132A-3 Adjacent to a Solid Wall

What is the minimum distance required between the air inlet of the 31132A-3 when installed facing a wall?
Unit Airflow = 267,880 CFM x 3 cells = 803,640 CFM

H = 18' 1-1/2" (18.1')
h = 0’
L= 42' 2-3/8" (42.2')
300 FPM = maximum acceptable envelope air velocity for a cooling tower
Envelope Velocity = (Unit Airflow) / (Envelope Area)
solving for "d",
300 FPM = (803,640 CFM/ 2 air intake sides)/[((42.2+4) x d) + 2(18.1+0) x d)]

d x (82.4) = (401,820 CFM) / (300 FPM)
d = [(401,820 CFM) / (300 FPM)] / 82.4
d = 16.25 feet
This is rounded up to the next 0.5' increment. Therefore, the air intake should be located no less than
16.5 feet from the solid wall.

M41
Example: VT1-415-R adjacent to a wall

What is the minimum distance required between the air inlet of the VT1-415-R when installed facing a wall?
Solution:
Unit Airflow = 90,250 CFM
H = 8'4" (8.33')
h = 0'
Technical Resources
L+6' = 11' 7-3/4"+6' (17.65')
300 FPM = maximum acceptable envelope air velocity with no hood.
Solving for "d"
Unit Airflow
d=
300 x [2(H + h) + (L + 6)]
90,250 cfm
d=
300 fpm x [2(8.33’+0’) + (11.65’+6’)]
d = 9’ rounded
Therefore, the air intake should be no less than 8.0 feet from the wall.
Minimum Acceptable Air Inlet Distance "d" (feet) to Solid Wall
Table 1: Series 3000
One Cell Two Cell Three Cell Four Cell
Elevation 0’ 2’ 4’ 0’ 2’ 4’ 0’ 2’ 4’ 0’ 2’ 4’
Series 3000 Model
3240A to 3299A 4.5 4 3.5 6.5 6 5.5 8 7.5 7 9.5 9 8
3333A to 3379A 5 4.5 4 8 7 6.5 9.5 9 8.5 11 10.5 9.5
3412A to 3436A 5.5 5 4.5 8 7.5 7 10 9.5 9 1.5 11 10
3455A to 3527A 6 5.5 5 9 8.5 8 11.5 10.5 10 13 12 11.5

3473A to 3501A 6 5.5 5 8.5 8 7.5 10.5 10 9.5 14.5 11 10.5
3552A to 3672A 7 6.5 6 11 10 9.5 13 12.5 11.5 14.5 14 13.5

3728A to 3828A 7 6.5 6 11.5 10.5 10 14 13.5 13 16 15.5 15
3872A to 3970A 7.5 7 6.5 12 11 10.5 15 14 13.5 17 16.5 16
3985A to 31056A 7 6.5 6.5 11.5 11 10.5 15 14.5 13.5 17.5 16.5 16
3583A to 3725A 7 6.5 6 10.5 10 9.5 13 12 11.5 14 13.5 13
331132A 8 7.5 7 13 12 11.5 16 15.5 14.5 18 17.5 17
31213A to 31301A 8.5 8 7.5 13.5 13 12.5 17 16 15.5 19.5 19 18

M42
Table 2: Series 1500

One Cell Two Cell Three Cell
Elevation 0’ 2’ 4’ 0’ 2’ 4’ 0’ 2’ 4’
15146, 15160, 15176 5 4.5 4 8 7 6.5 10 9 8.5
15162, 15177
6 5 4.5 9 8.5 7.5 11.5 10.5 10
15201, 15219
15200, 15227, 15250 5.5 5 4.5 9 8.5 8 11.5 10.5 10
15214, 15245
6 5.5 5 10 9 8.5 12.5 11.5 11
15270, 15282
Layout Guidelines
15296, 15325
7.5 7 6.5 11.5 10.5 10 14 13.5 12.5
15350, 15368
15310, 15340, 15365
8.5 7.5 7 13 12 11.5 16 15 14.5
15385, 15425
Table 3: FXT Models

One Cell
Elevation 0’ 2’ 4’
“X” “D” “X” “D” “X” “D”
FXT-6, 7.5 11 3 3 3 3 3 3
FXT-16, 20, 26, 30, 33 3 3 3 3 3 3
FXT-38, 42, 47, 58, 68 3 3 3 3 3 3
FXT-74, 87, 99 4 4 3.5 3.5 3 3

FXT-115, 130, 142 5 5 4.5 4.5 4 4
FXT-160, 175, 200 6.5 6.5 5.5 5.5 5 5
FXT-216, 250, 268 6.5 6.5 6 6 5.5 5.5
Table 4: VT0/ VT1

No Discharge Hood 4’ Discharge Hood
Elevation 0’ 2’ 4’ & Up 0’ 2’ 4’ & Up
VT0-12-E to VT0-176-O 5 6 3 3.5 3 3

VT1-N209-P to VT1-N255-P 6.5 6 5 5 4.5 4
VT1-N301-Q to VT1-N395-R 8 7.5 6.5 6 5.5 5
VT1-N418-P to VT1-N510-P 9 8.5 7.5 7 6.5 6

VT1-275-P to VT1-415-R 9.5 8.5 7.5 7 6.5 6
VT1-416-O to VT1-600-P 11.5 10.5 9.5 8.5 8 7
VT1-550-P to VT1-830-R 13.5 12.5 11.5 10 9.5 8.5
VT1-825-P to VT1-1335-S 17 16 15 13 12 11.5
Table 5: VTL
Elevation 0’ 2’ 4’ & Up 0’ 2’ 4’ & Up
VTL-016-E to VTL-039-H 3 3 3 3 3 3
VTL-045-H to VTL-079-K 3 3 3 3 3 3
VTL-082-K to VTL-095-K 3 3 3 3 3 3
VTL-103-K to VTL-137-M 4.5 3.5 3 3 3 3

VTL-152-M to VTL-227-O 6 5 4.5 4.5 4 3
VTL-245-P to VTL-272-P 7 6 5.5 5 4.5 4

M43
Table 6: CXV and FXV

One Cell Two Cell
Unit Elevation 0’ 2’ 4’ 0’ 2’ 4’
CXV 64 to CXV 95 FXV-42X 4 3.5 3 6 5.5 5

CXV 103 to 153 FXV-43X 5.5 4.5 4 7.5 7 6.5
CXV 160 to 206 FXV-44X, Q44X 6.5 5.5 5 9 8 7.5
CXV 196 to CXV 305 FXV-64X, Q64X 7 6 5.5 10 9.5 8.5

CXV 310 to 481 FXV-66X, Q66X 9 8 7.5 12 11 10.5
Technical Resources
CXV 420 to 610 - - - 9.5 9 8
CXV 620 to 962 - - - 11 10.5 10
CXV N465 to N687 11 10 9.5 - - -
Table 7: CXVT and FXV3

One Cell Two Cell
CXV T645 to T792 FXV-288-XXX 7.5 6.5 6 11 10 9.5

CXV T791 to T944 FXV-364-XXX 8.5 8 7.5 12.5 12 11
CXV T1290 to T1584 - - - 11 10 9.5
CXV T1582 to T1888 - - - 12.5 12 11
Table 8: HXV
One Cell
Unit Elevation 0’ 2’ 4’
HXV-64X 6 5.5 5
HXV-66X 7.5 7 6
Table 9: VC1/ VF1

VC1-10 to 25 VF1-009-XXX 3 3 3 3 3 3
VC1-30 to 65 VF1-018-XXX 3 3 3 3 3 3
VC1-72 to 90 VF1-027-XXX 3 3 3 3 3 3
VC1-100 to 135 VF1-036-XXX 4 3.5 3 3 3 3

VC1-150 to 205 VF1-048-XXX 5 4.5 4 3.5 3 3
VC1-N208 to N230 VF1-072-XXX 6.5 5.5 5 5 4 3.5
VC1-N243 to N315 VF1-096-XXX 7 6 5.5 5 4.5 4
VC1-N338 to N470 VF1-144N-XXX 7 6.5 6 5 4.5 4
---- VF1-192-XXX 10 9 8 7 6.5 6
---- VF1-288N-XXX 9.5 8.5 8 7 6.5 6
VC1-386 to 516 VF1-144-XXX 10 9 8 7.5 6.5 6
VC1-540 to 804 VF1-216-XXX 13 11.5 10.5 9.5 8.5 8
VC1-772 to 1032 VF1-288-XXX 13.5 12.5 11.5 10 9.5 8.5
VC1-1158 to 1608 VF1-432-XXX 17.5 16 15 13 12 11.5
VC1-C216 to C320 ---- 7 6 5.5 5.5 4.5 4
VC1-C339 to C469 ---- 10 8.5 7.5 7.5 6.5 5.5

M44
Table 10: VC2

No Discharge Hood
Unit Elevation 0’ 2’ 4’
VC2-N138 to N191 5 4 3.5

VC2-N206 to N235 5.5 4.5 4
VC2-N261 to N301 6.5 5.5 5
VC2-N356 to N446 8.5 7.5 6.5

VC2-319 to 626 8.5 7.5 7
Layout Guidelines
VC2-526 to 957 12.5 11.5 10.5

VC2-N870 to N1204 17.5 15.5 14.5
VC2-684 to 1252 17 15 14
VC2-1052 to 1914 25 22.5 20
Table 11: VCL/ VFL

VCL-016 to 035 VFL-012-XXX 3 3 3 3 3 3

VCL-038 to 079 VFL-024-XXX 3 3 3 3 3 3
VCL-087 to 120 VFL-036-XXX 4.5 3.5 3 3 3 3
VCL-134 to 155 VFL-048-XXX 4.5 4 3.5 3.5 3 3

VCL-167 to 234 VFL-072-XXX 6 5.5 5 4.5 4 3.5
VCL-257 to 299 VFL-096-XXX 7 6.5 5.5 5.5 5 4.5
Well Layout
The following method is used to determine the minimum acceptable dimension "d" for units installed in a
well layout.
Figure 5: Plan view of dual air inlet units in a well enclosure

M45
Technical Resources
Figure 6: Plan view of single air intake units in a well enclosure
Figure 7: Plan view of single air intake & horizontal discharge units in a well enclosure
The maximum allowable downward air velocity for a well installation is 400 fpm. The downward velocity is
determined using the following equation:
Downward Air Velocity = Unit Airflow

Useable Well Area < 400 fpm
NOTE: The louver face CFM for the FXV Closed Circuit Cooling Towers and CXV Evaporative Condensers
is 70% of the total unit airflow. The remaining 30% of the airflow entering the unit through the top of the coil
section.
The usable well area at each air intake face is defined as illustrated in Figure 5 & 6.
Useable Well Area = [(d)(L+4'+4')]+[(4' x 1') + (4' x 1')], where
"d" - minimum acceptable distance between the air intake of the unit and the wall of the well in feet
"L" - length of the air intake of the unit in feet.

M46
The minimum acceptable distance "d" for well installations is tabulated in Table 2.
Example: Model 3672A-2 in a well

L= 23'-10" (23.8')
400 fpm = maximum allowable air downward velocity for a cooling tower
Downward Air Velocity = (Unit Airflow) / (Useable Well Area)

Layout Guidelines
solving for "d",
400 fpm = (332,040 CFM / 2 air intake sides) / [(d)(23.8+4+4)]+(4+4)

[(d)(31.8)]+(8) = (166,020 CFM) / (400 FPM)
d = [((166,020 CFM) / (400 FPM))-8] / 31.8
d = 12.8 feet
This is rounded up to the next 0.5' increment. Therefore, the air intakes should be no less than 13.0 feet
from the enclosure walls.
Example: Model FXV-443 in a Well
Unit Airflow = 65,450 CFM

L= 12’-1’ (12.104’)
400 fpm = maximum allowable air downward velocity for a cooling tower
Downward Air Velocity = (Unit Airflow) / (Useable Well Area)
solving for "d",
400 FPM = (65,450 CFM) / [(d)(12.1+4+4)]+(4+4)

[(d)(20.1)]+(8) = (65,450 CFM) / (400 FPM)
d = [((65,450 CFM)/(400 FPM))-8]/20.1
d = 7.7 feet
This is rounded up to the next 0.5' increment. Therefore, the air intake should be no less than 8.0 feet from
the enclosure walls.
Example: VF1-144-31Q
If the VF1-144-31Q has a 4' tapered discharge, what is the minimum distance between the air inlet of the
VF1-144-31Q in a well?
cfm = 86,500 cfm per cell.

Length = 11'-7 3/4" (11.65')
400 fpm = maximum allowable downward velocity for a VF1 with tapered hood
400 fpm = (86,500cfm)/ [d (11.65 + 4 + 4)] + (4 + 4)

[d(19.65)] + 8 = (86,500 cfm) / (400 fpm)
d = [((86,500 cfm) / (400 fpm)) - 8] / 19.65
d = 10.59 feet
This is rounded up to the next 0.5’ increment. Therefore the air intake should be no less than 11 feet from
the enclosure walls.

M47
Minimum Acceptable Air Intake Distance "d" (feet)
Table 12: Series 3000 Table 15: Series 1500
Technical Resources
One Cell Two Cell Three Cell Four Cell One Cell Two Cell Three Cell
3240A to 3299A 6 8 9 9.5 15146, 15160, 15176 7 9.5 10.5
3333A to 3379A 7.5 9.5 11 11.5 15162, 15177

8.5 11.5 13
15201, 15219
3412A to 3436A 7.5 10 11 12
15200, 15227, 15250 9.5 12.5 14.5
3455A to 3527A 9 12 13 14
15214, 15245
3473A to 3501A 8 10 11 11.5 11 14.5 16.5
15270, 15282
3552A to 3672A 10.5 13 14.5 15 15296, 15325
11.5 14.5 16
3728A to 3828A 13 16 17.5 18.5 15350, 15368
15310, 15340, 15365
3872A to 3970A 14.5 18.5 20 21 14 17.5 19
15385, 15425
3985A to 31056A 15.5 20 21.5 22.5
3583A to 3725A 10 12 12.5 13
331132A 17.5 21 23 24
31213A to 31301A 17.5 21 23 24
Table 13: FXT Table 16: VTO/ VT1

One Cell With or
Without a
FXT-6, 7.5 11 3 3 Tapered
FXT-16, 20, 26, 30, 33 3 3 Discharge
Hood
FXT-38, 42, 47, 58, 68 3.5 3.5
Model Number
FXT-74, 87, 99 5 5
VT0-12-E to VT0-176-O 3
FXT-115, 130, 142 6 6
VT1-N209-P to VT1-N255-P 6.5
FXT-160, 175, 200 7 7
VT1-N301-Q to VT1-N395-R 8
FXT-216, 250, 268 8.5 8.5
VT1-N418-P to VT1-N510-P 8.5
VT1-275-P to VT1-415-R 11
VT1-416-O to VT1-600-P 12.5
VT1-550-P to VT1-830-R 14
Table 14: VTL VT1-825-P to VT1-1335-S 16.5
With or
Without a
Tapered
Discharge
Hood
Model Number
VTL-016-E to VTL-039-H 3
VTL-045-H to VTL-079-K 3
VTL-082-K to VTL-095-K 4
VTL-103-K to VTL-137-M 5.5

VTL-152-M to VTL-227-O 7
VTL-245-P to VTL-272-P 8.5

M48
Table 17: CXV / FXV

One Cell Two Cell
CXV 64 to 95 FXV-42X 4 6
CXV 103 to 153 FXV-43X 5.5 7.5
CXV 160 to 206 FXV-44X, Q44X 6.5 8
CXV 196 to 305 FXV-64X, Q64X 8.5 10.5

CXV 310 to 481 FXV-66X, Q66X 10 12
CXV 420 to 610 - 10.5
Layout Guidelines
CXV 620 to 962 - 12

CXV N465 to N687 11.5 -
Table 18: CXV-T / FXV-3 Table 20: HXV

One Cell Two Cell One Cell
CXV T645 to T792 FXV-288-XXX 9.5 12.5 HXV-64X 7
CXV T791 to T944 FXV-364-XXX 11 14 HXV-66X 8.5
CXV T1290 to T1584 12.5 -
CXV T1582 to T1888 14 -
Table 19: VC1 / VF1 Table 21: VC2

One Cell
With or Without a
Tapered Discharge VC2-N138 to N191 5.5
Hood
VC2-N206 to N235 6.5
VC1-10 to 25 VF1-009-XXX 3 VC2-N261 to N301 7.5
VC1-30 to 65 VF1-018-XXX 3 VC2-N356 to N446 11
VC1-72 to 90 VF1-027-XXX 3 VC2-319 to 626 10.5
VC1-100 to 135 VF1-036-XXX 3 VC2-526 to 957 15.5
VC1-150 to 205 VF1-048-XXX 4.5 VC2-N870 to N1204 22
VC1-N208 to N230 VF1-072-XXX 6.5 VC2-684 to 1252 21
VC1-N243 to N315 VF1-096-XXX 8 VC2-1052 to 1914 31.5
VC1-N338 to N470 VF1-144N-XXX 7.5

---- VF1-192-XXX 10
Table 22: VCL / VFL
---- VF1-288N-XXX 9
With or
VC1-386 to 516 VF1-144-XXX 11.5 Without a
Tapered
VC1-540 to 804 VF1-216-XXX 14 Discharge
VC1-772 to 1032 VF1-288-XXX 13.5 Hood
VCL-016 to 035 VFL-012-XXX 3
VC1-1158 to 1608 VF1-432-XXX 16.5
VCL-038 to 079 VFL-024-XXX 3
VC1-C216 to C320 ---- 8.5
VCL-087 to 120 VFL-036-XXX 5.5
VC1-C339 to C469 ---- 11.5
VCL-134 to 155 VFL-048-XXX 6
VCL-167 to 234 VFL-072-XXX 8
VCL-257 to 299 VFL-096-XXX 9

M49
Louvered Well Installation

Check to see if the layout meets the requirements for a well installation. If the criteria for the well installation
are met, the layout is satisfactory. If the layout does not satisfy the criteria for the well installation, analyze the
layout as follows:
Technical Resources
Figure 8: Plan view of a dual air intake unit in enclosure with louvered walls
Figure 9: Plan view of a single air Iintake unit in enclosure with louvered walls
1. Air intake requirements:
Units should be arranged within the enclosure such that:
a. The air intake directly faces the louver or slot locations as shown in Figure 8 or 9.
b. Maintain a distance of at least three feet (3'-0") between the unit air intake(s) and the louvered or
slotted wall for uniform air distribution.

M50
c. If the available space does not permit the unit can be arranged with the air intakes facing the louvered or
slotted walls and the enclosure cannot be modified to permit such an arrangement, consider the
alternative illustrated in Figure 10 or 11. This arrangement should be restricted to one-cell or two-cell
installations. The effective area of the louvers is only the length extending beyond the width of the
tower.
Layout Guidelines
Figure 10: Plan view of dual air inlet unit in enclosure with alternate louver arrangement
Figure 11: Plan view of single air inlet unit in enclosure with alternate louver arrangement
2. Louver Requirements:
a. Louvers must provide at least 50% net free area to ensure that the unit airflow is not reduced due to
friction or dynamic losses and that sufficient air is drawn through the openings and not downward
from above.
b. The required total louver or slot area is based on drawing the total unit airflow through the net free
area of the louvers at a velocity of 600 FPM or less.
c. Locate the louver area in the walls of the enclosure such that air flows uniformly to the air intakes.

M51
d. If the unit is elevated to ensure the discharge is at the same level or above the top of the
enclosure, it is acceptable to extend the louvered or slot area below the base of the units up to
2 feet if needed to achieve the minimum gross louver area. To calculate air velocity through the
louver, the useable louvered or slot area may extend beyond the ends of the unit, by 4’ maximum
Calculate the louver velocity as follows:
Louver Velocity = Total Unit Airflow (CFM) < 600 fpm
Technical Resources
% Louver Free Area x Useable Louver Area (sq ft)
Example: 3473A-2 in a Louvered Enclosure

The enclosure is 27.5' long x 38' wide x 10' tall. The enclosure walls are equal in elevation to the unit
discharge height. The louvers are 70% free area and 3'-0" from the air inlet of the tower. The louvers extend
the full width of the enclosure (38') on both air intake ends and they extend 9' vertically of the 10' enclosure
height.
Unit "L" Dimension = 11' 9-3/4" per cell x 2 cells = 23' 10" (23.83')
"d" max. = 4 feet per side
Useable Louver Length = 23.83' + 4' + 4' = 31.83 ft. (of total 38' louver length)
600 FPM = Maximum Allowable Louver Velocity
Louver Vel. = Louver Face Airflow (CFM) / [(% Louver Free Area)x(Use. Louver Area)]
= (237,740 CFM / 2 intake sides) / [(70%) x [(23.83' + 4' + 4') x (9')]
= (118,870 CFM) / (200 sq ft))
= 594 fpm
Therefore, louver sizing is sufficient because 594 FPM < 600 fpm maximum allowable.
Indoor Installation Layout Guidelines –

Applicable for Series V Centrifugal Fan Products Only (VT0, VT1, VTL, VF1, VC1)
Figure 12: Plan view of unit enclosure with louvered wall & closed top installation

M52
Air inlet Requirements
a. Louvers must have at least 50% net free area.
b. Install the cooling tower with the limitations shown in Figure 12 for uniform air distribution.
c. Determine the total louver or slot area required based on drawing the total unit cfm through the net free
area of the louvers at a velocity of 800 fpm or less.
Calculate the louver velocity as follows:
d. The louver or slot area should be located in the walls of the enclosure so that air flows uniformly to
Layout Guidelines
all air inlets.
e. It is acceptable to extend the louvered or slot area below the base of the unit if needed to achieve the
minimum gross free area. The usable or slot area may also be extended beyond the ends of the tower
by 4’.
f. As a general rule, Series V Multi-Stage Axial Fan Models cannot be located indoors.
Ductwork Requirements
a. Air velocities in the inlet duct should be kept below 800 FPM to hold static pressure losses to a minimum
and ensure a uniform supply of air to all fans. In general the maximum allowable ESP on Series V
centrifugal fan units is 1/2". Consult the factory for any ESP greater than 1/2".
b. Air velocities in the discharge duct(s) should not exceed 1,000 fpm to reduce friction losses in the duct,
and more importantly, to ensure uniform air through the unit.
c. Turns in inlet or discharge ducts should be avoided. Where turns must be used, velocities should be
minimized in the vicinity of the turn. Turns in discharge ducting should be designed in accordance with
the "2/3's rule" shown in Figure 13 a & b.
d. Where individual fan sections are to be cycled for capacity control, each fan section must be ducted as a
separate system on both inlet and discharge to avoid recirculation within the ductwork. All ductwork
systems should be symmetrical to ensure that each fan section operates against the same ESP.
e. Access doors must be provided in both the inlet and discharge ducts.
f. When multi-cell units are located indoors with the room as a plenum, the installation must be operated
as a single unit to avoid pulling air through an idle cell.
Figure 13 a & b: Section & front view of ducted unit enclosure

M53
Multi-cell Installations
Multiple cells create a "wall" of moist discharge air which could easily be swept into the air intakes due to
prevailing wind. To minimize the potential of recirculation of the discharge air, the units should be situated
with adequate spacing between air intakes.
Technical Resources
Figure 14: Plan view of multi-cell units with air intakes facing each other
When multiple cells are arranged with the air intakes facing each other, the distance between air intakes
should follow the equation below:
M = (2 x d) + (number of cells per module), where "d" is obtained from the appropriate model in Section A,
Table 1.
Example: Model 2-3985A-3
There are two modules of three cells of units on a roof. There are no enclosures surrounding the unit instal-
lation. The two banks of units have air intakes facing each other. The minimum distance "M" between rows
of units is determined as follows:
from Table 1, "d" = 15.5',
M = (2 x d) + (number of units per module)

= (2 x 15.5) + (3)
= 34 feet
The calculated "M" dimension of 34 feet will minimize the potential of recirculation of the discharge air.
Group the units in two cell or three cell groups, spaced at least one unit length between adjacent end walls to
allow fresh air to circulate around each group, as shown in Figure 15.

M54
Layout Guidelines
Figure 15: Plan view of recommended multi-cell installation

In the extreme case, when multiple cells are arranged with the air inlets facing each other in a well, the
dimensions between the cells should follow the following requirements.
1. Enclosure: The bottom 3 feet of the well should be louvered a minimum of 50% net free area to allow air
flow under the units as shown in Figure 17.
2. Support: The units should be raised off the roof deck to allow fresh air to flow under to the air inlets
between the bank of cells.
3. The distance between the cells should be determined using the following method.
a. Determine the maximum airflow drawn from the louvered area using the following equation:
CFM drawn through the louvers = Louver Velocity x % Louver Free Area x Useable Louver Area
CFM drawn through the louvers = 800 FPM x % Louver Free Area x Useable Louver Area
b. Determine the CFM drawn from the top of the enclosure using the following equation:
CFM drawn from the top of the enclosure = Downward Velocity x Useable Well Area
Figure 16: Plan view of multi-cell installation

M55
4’ 4’
Technical Resources
3’ 3’
Figure 17: Elevation view of recommended enclosure
Example: (10) 31056A
For example, what is the minimum distance D between the banks of cells of a (10) 31056A?
Unit Airflow = 246,700 CFM x 10 cells = 2,467,000 CFM
Overall length of enclosure = Number of cells x L + Number of Openings x L + 4 + 4
= 5 x 12+1 x 12+ 4 + 4
= 80 feet
3' of 50% louvered around building with a louver velocity of 800 fpm
CFM Drawn through louvers = Louver Velocity x % Louver Free Area x Useable Louver Area
= Louver Velocity x % Louver Free Area x Perimeter of the Enclosure x Height of Louvered Wall
= Louver Velocity x % Louver Free Area x (2x (Overall Length + Overall Width) x Height of
Louvered Wall
= 800 x 0.5 x 2 x (80 + 4D) x 3
= 192000+9600D
CFM Drawn from Top of the Enclosure = Downward Velocity x Useable Area
= Downward Velocity x 4D x (Overall Length)
= 400 x 4D x Overall Length
= 400 x 4D x 80
= 128000D
CFM Drawn through louvers + CFM Drawn from Top of the Enclosure = Total CFM per Installation
192000+9600D + 128000 D = 2467000
137600 D = 2467000 - 192000
137600 D = 2275000
D= 16.533
The "Layout Guidelines" describe several typical site situations involving evaporative cooling products. If
these guidelines do not cover a particular situation or if the layout criteria cannot be met, please refer the
application to the your local BAC Representative for review. Please indicate prevailing wind direction,
geographic orientation of the unit(s), and other factors such as large buildings and other obstructions that
may influence layout decisions.

M56
Connection Guide
A summary of connection types used by BAC follows. The specific connection type for a particular BAC
model can be found on the unit print drawing (available on BAC’s website) or from your local BAC
Representative.
Connection Guide
Weld Material
Beveled for Welding (BFW): Beveled edge of Beveled edge of
This connection type is a pipe stub with a field-installed piping BAC connection
beveled edge. The bevel allows for
easier welding in the field and a full
penetration weld. Weld materials fill the
trimmed area between two beveled edges
as shown here.
Grooved to Suit a Mechanical Coupling:

Weld Details
This connection type is a pipe stub with a groove to accept
a mechanical pipe coupler. Beveled edge
BFW/Grooved:
Many of BAC’s connections are both beveled for weld and
grooved to suit a mechanical coupling. Either method of
fastening to field-fabricated piping can be used when this
connection type is provided. Grooved for
mechanical coupling
BFW/grooved connection
ASME Class 150 Flat Face Flange:

This connection type is a standard bolt and hole
pattern at the point of connection to mate to an
ASME Class 150 Flat Face Flange. When BAC
provides this connection type to a hot water basin,
mounting bolts are permanently fastened to the
connection plate. When BAC provides this connec-
tion type from a cold water basin, a back-up ring
and neoprene washers are provided. All other
components (piping, nuts, bolts, flatwashers, etc.)
are provided by others unless otherwise specified.
An ASME Class 150 Flat Face Flange pattern is

shown on this cold water basin panel

M57
Technical Resources
An ASME Class 150 Flat Face Flange pattern with mounting bolts is
shown on this hot water basin panel
Male Pipe Thread (MPT):

This connection type is a threaded pipe
stub connection designed to mate with
a Female Pipe Thread (FPT) fitting.
MPT connection
Side Outlet Depressed Sump Box:

This option is offered to facilitate
horizontal piping below the cold water
basin of a unit, and is a compact
alternative to using an elbow in the
piping arrangement, saving installation
time and cost.
Side outlet depressed sump box

M58
Friction Loss of Water In Ft Per 100

Ft Length (Schedule 40 Pipe)
FRICTION LOSS OF WATER IN FEET PER 100 FEET LENGTH OF SCHEDULE 40 PIPE, BASED ON
WILLIAMS & HAZEN FORMULA USING CONSTANT 100. SIZES OF STANDARD PIPE IN INCHES
1/2" Pipe 3/4" Pipe 1" Pipe 1 1/4" Pipe 1 1/2" Pipe 2" Pipe 2 1/2" Pipe 3" Pipe 4" Pipe 5" Pipe 6" Pipe
U.S. Vel. Loss Vel. Loss Vel. Loss Vel. Loss Vel. Loss Vel. Loss Vel. Loss Vel. Loss Vel. Loss Vel. Loss Vel. Loss U. S.
Gals. Ft. per in Ft. per in Ft. per in Ft. per in Ft. per in Ft. per in Ft. per in Ft. per in Ft. per in Ft. per in Ft. per in Gals.
per min. Sec. Feet Sec. Feet Sec. Feet Sec. Feet Sec. Feet Sec. Feet Sec. Feet Sec. Feet Sec. Feet Sec. Feet Sec. Feet per min.
Friction Loss Tables
2 2.10 7.4 1.20 1.9 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 2
4 4.21 27.0 2.41 7.0 1.49 2.14 .86 .57 .63 .26 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 4
6 6.31 57.0 3.61 14.7 2.23 4.55 1.29 1.20 .94 .56 .61 .20 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 6
8 8.42 98.0 4.81 25.0 2.98 7.8 1.72 2.03 1.26 .95 .82 .33 .52 .11 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 8
10 10.52 147.0 6.02 38.0 3.72 11.7 2.14 3.05 1.57 1.43 1.02 .50 .65 .71 .45 .07 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 10
12 …….. …….. 7.22 53.0 4.46 16.4 2.57 4.3 1.89 2.01 1.23 .79 .78 .23 .54 .10 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 12
15 …….. …….. 9.02 80.0 5.60 25.0 3.21 6.5 2.36 3.00 1.53 1.08 .98 .36 .68 .15 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 15
18 …….. …….. 10.84 108.2 6.69 35.0 3.86 9.1 2.83 4.24 1.84 1.49 1.18 .50 .82 .21 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 18
20 …….. …….. 12.03 136.0 7.44 42.0 4.29 11.1 3.15 5.20 2.04 1.82 1.31 .61 .91 .25 .51 .06 …….. …….. …….. …….. 20
25 …….. …….. …….. …….. 9.30 64.0 5.36 16.6 3.80 7.30 2.55 2.73 1.63 .92 1.13 .38 .64 .09 …….. …….. …….. …….. 25
30 …….. …….. …….. …….. 11.15 89.0 6.43 23.0 4.72 11.0 3.06 3.84 1.96 1.29 1.36 .54 .77 .13 .49 .04 …….. …….. 30
35 …….. …….. …….. …….. 13.02 119.0 7.51 31.2 5.51 14.7 3.57 5.10 2.29 1.72 1.59 .71 .89 .17 .57 .06 …….. …….. 35
40 …….. …….. …….. …….. 14.88 152.0 8.58 40.0 6.30 18.8 4.08 6.6 2.61 2.20 1.82 .91 1.02 .22 .65 .08 …….. …….. 40
45 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 9.65 50.0 7.08 23.2 4.60 8.2 2.94 2.80 2.04 1.15 1.15 .28 .73 .09 …….. …….. 45
50 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 10.72 60.0 7.87 28.4 5.11 9.9 3.27 3.32 2.27 1.38 1.28 .34 .82 .11 .57 .04 50
55 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 11.78 72.0 8.66 34.0 5.62 11.8 3.59 4.01 2.45 1.58 1.41 .41 .90 .14 .62 .05 55
60 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 12.87 85.0 9.44 39.6 6.13 13.9 3.92 4.65 2.72 1.92 1.53 .47 .98 .16 .68 .06 60
65 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 13.92 99.7 10.23 45.9 6.64 16.1 4.24 5.4 2.89 2.16 1.66 .53 1.06 .19 .74 .076 65
70 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 15.01 113.0 11.02 53.0 7.15 18.4 4.58 6.2 3.18 2.57 1.79 .63 1.14 .21 .79 .08 70
75 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 16.06 129.0 11.80 60.0 7.66 20.9 4.91 7.1 3.33 3.00 1.91 .73 1.22 .24 .85 .10 75
80 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 17.16 145.0 12.59 68.0 8.17 23.7 5.23 7.9 3.63 3.28 2.04 .81 1.31 .27 .91 .11 80
85 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 18.21 163.8 13.38 75.0 8.68 26.6 5.56 8.1 3.78 3.54 2.17 .91 1.39 .31 .96 .12 85
90 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 19.30 180.0 14.71 84.0 9.19 29.4 5.88 9.8 4.09 4.08 2.30 1.00 1.47 .34 1.02 .14 90
95 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 14.95 93.0 9.70 32.6 6.21 10.8 4.22 4.33 2.42 1.12 1.55 .38 1.08 .15 95
100 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 15.74 102.0 10.21 35.8 6.54 12.0 4.54 4.96 2.55 1.22 1.63 .41 1.13 .17 100
110 8" PIPE …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 17.31 122.0 11.23 42.9 7.18 14.5 5.00 6.0 2.81 1.46 1.79 .49 1.25 .21 110
120 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 18.89 143.0 12.25 50.0 7.84 16.8 5.45 7.0 3.06 1.17 1.96 .58 1.36 .24 120
130 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 20.46 166.0 13.28 58.0 8.48 18.7 5.91 8.1 3.31 1.97 2.12 .67 1.47 .27 130
140 .90 .08 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 22.04 190.0 14.30 67.0 9.15 22.3 6.35 9.2 3.57 2.28 2.29 .76 1.59 .32 140
150 .96 .09 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 15.32 76.0 9.81 25.5 6.82 10.5 3.82 2.62 2.45 .88 1.70 .36 150
160 1.02 .10 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 16.34 86.0 10.46 29.0 7.26 11.8 4.08 2.91 2.61 .98 1.82 .40 160
170 1.08 .11 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 17.36 96.0 11.11 34.1 7.71 13.3 4.33 3.26 2.77 1.08 1.92 .45 170
180 1.15 .13 10" PIPE …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 18.38 107.0 11.76 35.7 8.17 14.0 4.60 3.61 2.94 1.22 2.04 .50 180
190 1.21 .14 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 19.40 118.0 12.42 39.6 8.63 15.5 4.84 4.01 3.10 1.35 2.16 .55 190
200 1.28 .15 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 20.42 129.0 13.07 43.1 9.08 17.8 5.11 4.4 3.27 1.48 2.27 .62 200
220 1.40 .18 .90 .06 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 22.47 154.0 14.38 52.0 9.99 21.3 5.62 5.2 3.59 1.77 2.50 .73 220
240 1.53 .22 .98 .07 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 24.51 182.0 15.69 61.0 10.89 25.1 6.13 6.2 3.92 2.08 2.72 .87 240
260 1.66 .25 1.06 .08 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 26.55 211.0 16.99 70.0 11.80 29.1 6.64 7.2 4.25 2.41 2.95 1.00 260
280 1.79 .28 1.15 .09 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 18.30 81.0 12.71 33.4 7.15 8.2 4.58 2.77 3.18 1.14 280
300 1.91 .32 1.22 .11 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 19.61 92.0 13.62 38.0 7.66 9.3 4.90 3.14 3.40 1.32 300
320 2.05 .37 1.31 .12 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 20.92 103.0 14.52 42.8 8.17 10.5 5.23 3.54 3.64 1.47 320
340 2.18 .41 1.39 .14 12" PIPE …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 22.22 116.0 15.43 47.9 8.68 11.7 5.54 3.97 3.84 1.62 340
360 2.30 .45 1.47 .15 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 23.53 128.0 16.34 53.0 9.19 13.1 5.87 4.41 4.08 1.83 360
380 2.43 .50 1.55 .17 1.08 .069 14" PIPE …….. …….. …….. …….. 24.84 142.0 17.25 59.0 9.69 14.0 6.19 4.86 4.31 2.00 380
400 2.60 .54 1.63 .19 1.14 .075 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 26.14 156.0 18.16 65.0 10.21 16.0 6.54 5.4 4.55 2.20 400
450 2.92 .68 1.84 .23 1.28 .95 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 20.40 78.0 11.49 19.8 7.35 6.7 5.11 2.74 450
500 3.19 .82 2.04 .28 1.42 .113 1.04 .06 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 22.70 98.0 12.77 24.0 8.17 8.1 5.68 2.90 500
550 3.52 .97 2.24 .33 1.56 .135 1.15 .07 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 24.96 117.0 14.04 28.7 8.99 9.6 6.25 3.96 550
600 3.84 1.14 2.45 .39 1.70 .159 1.25 .08 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 27.23 137.0 15.32 33.7 9.80 11.3 6.81 4.65 600
650 4.16 1.34 2.65 .45 1.84 .19 1.37 .09 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 16.59 39.0 10.62 13.2 7.38 5.40 650
700 4.46 1.54 2.86 .52 1.99 .22 1.46 .10 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 17.87 44.9 11.44 15.1 7.95 6.21 700
750 4.80 1.74 3.06 .59 2.13 .24 1.58 .11 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 19.15 51.0 12.26 17.2 8.50 7.12 750
800 5.10 1.90 3.26 .66 2.27 .27 1.67 .13 16" PIPE …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 20.42 57.0 13.07 19.4 9.08 7.96 800
850 5.48 2.20 3.47 .75 2.41 .31 1.79 .14 1.36 .08 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 21.70 64.0 13.89 21.7 9.65 8.95 850
900 5.75 2.46 3.67 .83 2.56 .34 1.88 .16 1.44 .084 …….. …….. …….. …….. 22.98 71.0 14.71 24.0 10.20 10.11 900
950 6.06 2.87 3.88 .91 2.70 .38 2.00 .18 1.52 .095 20" PIPE …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 15.52 26.7 10.77 11.20 950
1000 6.38 2.97 4.08 1.03 2.84 .41 2.10 .19 1.60 .10 1.02 .04 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 16.34 29.2 11.34 12.04 1000
1100 7.03 3.52 4.49 1.19 3.13 .49 2.31 .23 1.76 .12 1.12 .04 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 17.97 34.9 12.48 14.55 1100
1200 7.66 4.17 4.90 1.40 3.41 .58 2.52 .27 1.92 .14 1.23 .05 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 19.61 40.9 13.61 17.10 1200
1300 8.30 4.85 5.31 1.62 3.69 .67 2.71 .32 2.08 .17 1.33 .06 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 14.72 18.4 1300
1400 8.95 5.50 5.71 1.87 3.98 .78 2.92 .36 2.24 .19 1.43 .06 24" PIPE …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 15.90 22.60 1400
1500 9.58 6.24 6.12 2.13 4.26 .89 3.15 .41 2.39 .21 1.53 .07 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 17.02 25.60 1500
1600 10.21 7.00 6.53 2.39 4.55 .98 3.34 .47 2.56 .24 1.63 .08 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 18.10 26.90 1600
1800 11.50 8.78 7.35 2.95 5.11 1.21 3.75 .58 2.87 .30 1.84 .10 1.28 .04 30" PIPE …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. ……. 1800
2000 12.78 10.71 8.16 3.59 5.68 1.49 4.17 .71 3.19 .37 2.04 .12 1.42 .05 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 2000
2200 14.05 12.78 8.98 4.24 6.25 1.81 4.59 .84 3.51 .44 2.25 .15 1.56 .06 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 2200
2400 15.32 14.2 9.80 5.04 6.81 2.08 5.00 0.99 3.83 .52 2.45 .17 1.70 .07 1.09 .020 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 2400
2600 …….. …….. 10.61 5.81 7.38 2.43 5.47 1.17 4.15 .60 2.66 .20 1.84 .08 1.16 .027 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 2600
2800 …….. …….. 11.41 6.70 7.95 2.75 5.84 1.32 4.47 .68 2.86 .23 1.98 .09 1.27 .030 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 2800
3000 …….. …….. 12.24 7.62 8.52 3.15 6.01 1.49 4.79 .78 3.08 .27 2.13 .10 1.37 .037 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 3000
3200 …….. …….. 13.05 7.80 9.10 3.51 6.68 1.67 5.12 .88 3.27 .30 2.26 .12 1.46 .041 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 3200
3500 …….. …….. 14.30 10.08 9.95 4.16 7.30 1.97 5.59 1.04 3.59 .35 2.49 .14 1.56 .047 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 3500
3800 …….. …….. 15.51 13.4 10.80 4.90 7.98 2.36 6.07 1.20 3.88 .41 2.69 .17 1.73 .05 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 3800
4200 …….. …….. …….. …….. 11.92 5.88 8.76 2.77 6.70 1.44 4.29 .49 2.99 .20 1.91 .07 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 4200
4500 …….. …….. …….. …….. 12.78 6.90 9.45 3.22 7.18 1.64 4.60 .56 3.20 .22 2.04 .08 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 4500
5000 …….. …….. …….. …….. 14.20 8.40 10.50 3.92 8.01 2.03 5.13 .68 3.54 .27 2.26 .09 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 5000
5500 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 11.55 4.65 8.78 2.39 5.64 .82 3.90 .33 2.50 .11 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 5500
6000 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 12.60 5.50 9.58 2.79 6.13 .94 4.25 .38 2.73 .13 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 6000
6500 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 13.65 6.45 10.39 3.32 6.64 1.10 4.61 .45 2.96 .15 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 6500
7000 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 14.60 7.08 11.18 3.70 7.15 1.25 4.97 .52 3.18 .17 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 7000
8000 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 12.78 4.74 8.17 1.61 5.68 .66 3.64 .23 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 8000
9000 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 14.37 5.90 9.20 2.01 6.35 .81 4.08 .28 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 9000
10000 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 15.96 7.19 10.20 2.44 7.07 .98 4.54 .33 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 10000
12000 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 12.25 3.41 8.50 1.40 5.46 .48 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 12000
14000 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 14.30 4.54 9.95 1.87 6.37 .63 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 14000
16000 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 11.38 2.40 7.28 .81 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 16000
18000 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 12.76 2.97 8.18 1.02 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 18000
20000 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 14.20 3.60 9.10 1.23 …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. …….. 20000

M59
Piping Considerations –
Maximum Fluid Velocity
BAC designs its standard evaporative cooling products to limit fluid velocities to approximately 10 feet per
second (fps) through all piping connection points. This generally accepted piping practice is recommended
Piping Considerations
for a variety of reasons:
Friction Loss: Higher fluid velocities increase friction losses (commonly referred to as “pressure drop”),
resulting in increased pump energy costs.
Noise and Vibration: Systems designed to current codes minimize excessive noise or vibration
when the fluid velocity is held to 10 fps.
Erosion / Corrosion: Fluids have a greater propensity to damage the inside walls of pipe at high
velocities. The effect of velocity is increased with chemically aggressive fluids or fluids with a high amount of
solids entrained in the fluid stream.
Hydraulic Shock: Also known as “water hammer,” hydraulic shock can cause excessive damage
when a line is shut down suddenly. Maintaining a low fluid velocity will substantially reduce the impact of
hydraulic shock.
BAC Standard Connection Sizes (outlet/inlet)

Connection Max. Fluid Connection Maximum Max. Fluid
Maximum Flow
Diameter Velocity Diameter Flow Velocity
3” 225 GPM 10.2 fps 10” 2,300 GPM 9.4 fps
4” 400 GPM 10.2 fps 12” 3,200 GPM 9.1 fps
6” 900 GPM 10.2 fps 14” 3,700 GPM 7.8 fps
8” 1,600 GPM 10.2 fps 16” 4,650 GPM 6.7 fps
GPM = (U.S.) Gallons Per Minute
BAC’s Closed Circuit Cooling Tower Selection Software is programmed to automatically select the
appropriate quantity and size of entering and leaving process fluid connections, to maintain the limits listed
above. Only by specific customer request and acceptance will BAC provide evaporative cooling products
designed for higher velocities. Fewer connection points and smaller pipe sizes associated with high fluid
velocities may reduce installation costs, but the customer must also consider the increased operating costs
and equipment maintenance concerns. Successful operation of BAC’s equipment in the system is based on
established industry principles.

M60
Cooling Tower Pumping

and Piping
This section courtesy of ITT Industries, Inc.
©
COPYRIGHT 2003 ITT INDUSTRIES, INC.
Cooing Tower Pumping & Piping
Tower Pumping
Tower pumping does not present great difficulty in terms of good pump application. Troubles do occur
occasionally, however, and these troubles can be classified as caused by:
1. Incorrect pump head estimation.

2. Pump cavitation and loss of pumping ability, as caused by inadequate pump suction pressure.
3. Air in pump suction; as caused by tower pan vortex, pan drain-down or faulty bypass.
4. Unstable pump operational points as caused by:
(a) Improper application of tower bypass controls.
(b) High pressure drop tower spray nozzles in combination with tower bypass.
5. Inadequate maintenance procedures causing:
(a) Plugged suction strainer.
(b) Lack of tower treatment with consequent fouling of the condenser.
It is intended that each potential trouble source be evaluated so that the necessary design safeguards
can be erected against operational problems.
Open “Tower” System Pump Head Requirements

The pumping head determination procedure for the “open” tower piping loop differs from the
conventional “closed” loop piping circuit used for most Hydronic (Heat-Cool) applications. The
difference concerns consideration of “open” loop static heads. The closed loop circuit has no need for
consideration of static heads for pump selection because of a balance or cancellation of static heads
between the supply and return risers. Static head lost by water flow to any height in the supply piping is
cancelled by a static head “regain” as water flows down the return piping. The only pump head
requirement for the “closed” loop is that due to flow-friction pressure drop; static heights are not
considered.
Reprinted with permission from ITT Industries, Inc. Copyright 2003.

M61
FIGURE 1. STATIC HEIGHT (H) NOT CONSIDERED FOR PUMP

SELECTION IN CLOSED LOOP
The “open” or tower circuit is different
from the “closed” loop circuit. The
difference is that all static heads are
not cancelable. In the open piping
circuit, the pump must raise fluid from a
Technical Resources
low reference level to a higher level;
this requires pump work and open
statics becomes an important
consideration for pump selection.
In Figure 2, the required pump head

will be the pipe flow-friction loss from
A to D plus the energy head (Hs)
required to raise water from the lower to
higher level.
The cooling tower circuit differs slightly from the basic “open” circuit in that the discharge piping is
seldom connected directly to a discharge tank. The tower discharge is generally to atmosphere and
then into a distribution pan.
FIGURE 2. OPEN PIPING CIRCUIT

M62
For the tower piping circuit, the pump

FIGURE 3. TYPICAL “OPEN” TOWER PIPING CIRCUIT
must overcome the piping flow friction
loss; piping, condenser, valves, etc. It
must also provide the energy head
necessary to raise water from a low to a
higher static head level.
Most discussions concerning tower

and/or open piping circuits would simply
define the required pump static energy
head as Ho (in Figure 3); the “open”
height of the piping circuit. This is,
however, an over-simplified assumption
which may or may not be true
depending on whether or not a “siphon
draw” is established in the downcomer
return piping DE.
The nature of the downcomer siphon draw and its limitations should be evaluated.
Downcomer Siphon Draw

In Figure 3, water is being discharged at E to atmosphere. Pressure at D must be equal to exit loss
plus flow-friction loss DE and minus the static pressure reduction caused by downcomer return static
height Hr.
Pressure reduction to D as caused by static height Hr will generally, but not always, permit cancellation
of height Hr as a part of the required pump head. This is because of a resultant siphon draw action in
the downcomer.
Given that the “siphon draw” does indeed occur, the required pump head will become:
PUMP HEAD = Ho + ∆h (AE)
The pump head selection statement shown above is commonly accepted as a truism. It has
limitations, however, and will not apply under certain circumstances. These circumstances should be
understood if unnecessary cost and embarrassment are to be avoided by the consultant.
Exit loss and flow-friction loss in the downcomer will generally be less than the downcomer height Hr.
For this circumstance the downcomer must operate at sub-atmospheric pressure when the siphon draw
is established. If the downcomer vacuum is broken, the expected siphon draw will not occur and the
estimated pump head may be inadequate.

M63
The expected downcomer return siphon draw vacuum can be broken by any of three basic application
circumstances:
1. Top vented downcomer.
2. Inadequate downcomer flow rates; bottom vented downcomer.
3. Fluid vapor pressure or flash considerations.
Technical Resources
Top Vented Downcomer
A downcomer vent will break the siphon draw vacuum. The vent may be a simple loose pipe connection
- or it may be a mechanical vent purposefully applied at the downcomer return high point.
Vents are sometimes applied to establish known reference pumping conditions when downcomer return
siphon draw conditions propose stability problems; as with a very high downcomer, when fluid boiling is
a probability or when start-up downcomer flow rates are anticipated as inadequate for the siphon draw.
Given a top vented downcomer, it will be seen that the pump must raise water from the pump suction
pan water level to the highest vented point in the downcomer.
Considering this point to occur at D in Figure 3, the required pump static head will become:
Ho + Hr = Hs
The total pumping head to point D will become Hs plus the flow-friction loss ∆h (AD). Separate
consideration must now be given to the downcomer return.
Since the pump has raised water to level “D,” it will have provided a fluid head equal to Hr to overcome
flow-friction loss in the downcomer. There are two different pumping possibilities; fluid head Hr greater
than downcomer flow-friction loss (∆h DE) and the reverse: Hr less than ∆h (DE).
The usual pumping circumstance will be the condition of Hr greater than ∆h (DE). This is because the
available fluid head Hr is the equivalent of 100 ft / 100 ft pipe friction loss rate. Downcomer piping
flow-friction loss will generally be to the order of 4 ft /100 ft. Since the pump has already provided the
necessary fluid head to flow the downcomer, Hr > ∆h (DE); flow loss in the downcomer is not a part of
the required pump head and total pump head becomes:
PUMP HEAD; Hr > ∆h (DE) = Hs + ∆h (AD)
High downcomer pressure drops can be caused by control valves or tower spray nozzles. When this
pressure drop plus the downcomer pipe flow-friction loss exceeds fluid head Hr, the pump head must be
increased by the difference ∆h (DE) minus Hr. Total pump head then becomes:
PUMP HEAD; ∆h (DE) > Hr = Hs + ∆h (AD) + [∆h (DE) – Hr]

M64
Bottom Vented Downcomer; Inadequate Flow Rates

Downcomer flow rates can be so low, relative to pipe size, as to allow air to enter at the pipe discharge.
This circumstance will cause the downcomer to become vented and will prevent formation of the
necessary siphon draw vacuum.
Tests conducted at ITT Bell & Gossett indicate that the siphon draw will not be established when the
actual flow-friction loss rate is less than the order of 1 ft /100 ft based on clean pipe pressure drop
evaluation.
Pump head requirements for the bottom vented downcomer will be as previously noted for the top
vented circumstance.
An unfortunate operational sequence can occur during pump start-up when the pump energy head is
devoted towards simply raising water from the low level pan to the highest part of the system.
During this start-up period, flow rates can be so low as to cause “bottom venting” and prevent
(sometimes forever) formation of siphon draw circumstances and full design flow rates. A water legged
discharge or discharge reducer will provide automatic siphon, draw establishment so long as minimum
“start-up” flow velocity in the downcomer is to the order of 1 ft/s.
In Figure 4, air entry into the pipe

FIGURE 4. WATER LEG OR REDUCER HELP ESTABLISH SIPHON
discharge is prevented. The minimum DRAW IN DOWNCOMER ON START-UP
flow velocity pulls air bubbles down
the piping, finally evacuating the
downcomer of air and establishing the
siphon draw condition; downcomer
pipe full of water and operating at
subatmospheric pressure.
Unusual application circumstances

will sometimes establish such a low
start-up flow rate (less than 1 ft/s
velocity) that air bubbles are not
carried down the piping. The
downcomer cannot then be emptied of
air and expected siphon draw will never occur.

M65
FIGURE 5. EXIT VALVE & VENT PERMIT “START-UP”

FILL OF DOWNCOMER PIPING
For this circumstance it is necessary

to separately fill the downcomer with
water. This can be accomplished by
valve closure at the piping exit in
Technical Resources
combination with a top vent. During
start-up, the exit valve is closed and
the vent opened. After the piping is
filled, the vent is closed and the exit
valve opened.
Siphon Draw Limitation Due to Vapor Pressure; Fluid Boiling

Given sufficiently low subatmospheric pressure, any fluid will flash or boil. Fluid pressure in the
downcomer piping cannot be less than the pressure at which the fluid boils. Fluid vapor pressure thus
provides a siphon draw limitation.
Theoretical cancelable downcomer return static height (due to subatmospheric siphon draw) will vary
dependent on fluid vapor or boiling pressure and on atmospheric pressure as this changes from sea
level. The variation for water as affected by water temperature and height above sea level is shown in
Table 1.
TABLE 1*
Maximum theoretical downcomer return cancelable static height because of siphon draw; water only.
Height Above Water Temperature (Degrees Fahrenheit)
Sea Level (ft) Cold 105 120 140 160 180 200
0 34.0 31.8 30.0 27.6 23.4 17.0 7.7
1,000 32.8 30.1 29.0 26.4 22.2 15.8 6.4
2,000 31.6 29.1 28.0 25.3 21.0 14.6 5.2
3,000 30.2 28.2 26.8 24.1 19.9 13.5 4.03
4,000 29.2 27.0 25.6 23.0 18.7 12.2 2.82
5,000 28.0 25.6 24.4 21.8 17.5 11.1 1.61
6,000 26.9 24.6 23.2 20.6 16.4 10.0 0.48
7,000 25.8 23.4 22.2 19.4 15.2 8.8 --
8,000 24.6 22.2 21.0 18.2 14.0 7.6 --
9,000 23.4 21.1 19.8 17.1 12.9 6.4 --
10,000 22.2 19.9 18.6 15.9 11.7 5.2 --
*Figures shown correspond to available fluid head over and above vapor pressure for the water temperature shown.

M66
FIGURE 6. EXAMPLE PROBLEM
Figure 6 illustrates an example tower

schematic for an installation located at
6,000 ft elevation. The tower is to be used
to dissipate heat from 180°F water; what is
required pump head?
Reference to Table 1 shows that the

cancelable siphon draw height for 6,000 ft
elevation and 180°F water is only 10 ft,
while downcomer return static height is
30 ft.
If conventional pump selection practice were to be followed, the pump selection would be:
WRONG PUMP HEAD = ∆h (AE) + Ho
= 30 ft + 10 ft = 40 ft
It will be noted that this pump selection provides a perfect example of low start-up flow rates; the pump
head will just be enough to raise water to the system top. Start-up flow rate will be insignificant.
Even given the special application precautions previously stated, however, the pump selection would
not work. This is because water flash in the downcomer will prevent establishment of the presumed 30
ft siphon draw head. In this instance, water would flash because the downcomer return static height
exceeds the cancelable siphon draw head (see Table 1; 6,000 ft at 180°F = 10 ft).
When downcomer return height exceeds cancelable siphon draw head, it is necessary to separately
evaluate downcomer needs. For these circumstances:
The summation of cancelable siphon draw static height plus downcomer return flow friction loss
must exceed downcomer return height; the excess providing anti-flash pressurization.
The necessary downcomer flow-friction loss would generally be established by a balance valve
positioned close to the outlet (E). This valve will now provide the necessary “back pressure” to
maintain downcomer fluid pressure at above its boiling or vaporization point.

M67
For the particular example, a valve pressure drop equal to the order of 23 ft would establish an overall
downcomer return flow-friction loss of 25 ft (23 + 2 = 25).
A 25 ft downcomer flow-friction loss added to the theoretical cancelable height of 10 ft will establish a
pressure over and above boiling of 5 ft at “D.”
25 ft + 10 ft = 35 ft; 5 ft over static height Hr = 30 ft
Technical Resources
The correct pump head selection now becomes:
PUMP HEAD = ∆h (AD) + ∆h (DE) + ∆h (Valve) + Ho
= 28 ft + 2 ft + 23 ft + 10 ft
= 63 ft
For this particular example, a simpler solution could apply an open vent at “D”, eliminating need for the
downcomer balance valve and its setting*. Required pump head would then become:
PUMP HEAD = ∆h (AD) + Ho + Hr
= 28 ft + 10 ft + 30 ft
= 68 ft
Either correct solution will provide required design flow rates. Design flow rates would not and could not
be established by the “conventional” head selection of 40 ft.
Pump Piping Basics

In order for a pump to fulfill its fluid flow function, it must be provided with a solid stream of fluid. The
Centrifugal Pump cannot pump fluid and vapor or fluid and air and still provide flow in accordance with
its published curve
1. The pump suction must be under enough pressure so that vapor flash pressure within the pump
(cavitation) is prevented.
2. The pump cannot be expected to provide design flow when large quantities of air are drawn into
the pump suction; as by tower pan vortex, pan draw-down or bypass vacuum.
*In this case, the pump provides an “available” head at D of 30 ft. This fluid head is available for
downcomer flow and is greater than flow-friction loss in the downcomer (∆h DE) of 2 ft. Downcomer
return flow friction loss can then be neglected since downcomer fluid will be in “free fall.”

M68
In addition to flow capacity reduction, the pump will often be mechanically damaged by “shock” loads
applied to the impeller or its shaft because of cavitation or air in the suction line.
Large quantities of air in the suction line will break pump shafts in remarkably short order. This is
because the pump impeller alternates between virtually no load when an air “gob” enters the impeller
casing and an instantaneous shock load of very high order when it slugs against suddenly introduced
water.
There are three basic ways for air to be drawn into the suction piping:
1. Tower bypass into pump suction line.
2. Pan drain-down on start-up.
3. Tower vortex.
Improperly applied tower bypass lines connected directly to the pump suction line can cause
introduction of large amounts of air into the pump. Air can be drawn into the pump suction when
subatmospheric pressures exist at the bypass and discharge line connections.
FIGURE 7. TOWER BYPASS CAN INTRODUCE AIR INTO

When the tower illustrated in Figure 7 is in PUMP SUCTION ON FULL BYPASS
full bypass, pressure at “B” will be above
atmospheric pressure by an amount stated
by static height H1. Pressure at “C” can
become subatmospheric, causing air
suction unless static pressure reduction
caused by height H2 is counter-balanced
by an equal to or greater flow-friction loss
in the bypass line.
The bypass control valve and bypass

piping should be designed for sufficient
pressure drop to prevent subatmospheric
pressure at “C” and to cause water to rise
into the water leg when the tower is in
bypass.
The desired result will generally be obtained by use of a bypass balance valve with the valve so set
that at full tower bypass, bypass “back pressure” causes water to rise into the water leg to some set
point as established by a pet cock design observation point.

M69
FIGURE 8. PROPERLY SET BALANCE VALVE

PREVENTS AIR SUCTION INTO PUMP
It should be noted that tower bypass directly
Technical Resources
into the tower pan eliminates any possibility of
air suction into the pump because of bypass
operation and is generally preferred.
FIGURE 9. BYPASS TO TOWER PREFERRED
Tower pans typically have sufficient water

volume to fill condenser water piping (this
volume is known as pulldown volume and is
available from the tower manufacturer) while
maintaining minimum operating levels in the
pan. If not, however, the pump can drain the
pan dry on pump start-up, or lower pan water
level to the point of starting a vortex. In either
event, air will be drawn into the pump suction,
usually with disastrous results.
Right and wrong applications are (figures 10 FIGURE 10. WRONG - TOWER PIPING AND
CONDENSER DRAINS INTO AND OVERFLOWS
and 11) shown concerning the pan drain-down PAN ON PUMP SHUT-DOWN
problem.
In Figure 10, the pump must fill the condenser,

and all return piping each time it starts. In
addition to a non-flooded condenser on start-up,
the pipe and condenser water fill requirement
will almost assure pan drain-down and
consequent suction line air problems.

M70
FIGURE 11. RIGHT - CHECK, WATER LEG & FILL

In Figure 11, the check valve prevents PREVENT PIPING TO TOWER DRAINAGE
back drainage of the vertical tower
piping, while the water leg prevents
drainage of the inside horizontal
return piping.
As a general rule, tower piping systems

should be fitted with a piping fill line
located at the check valve discharge. The
fill line will provide two functions:
1. It permits filling of the condenser
piping independent of the tower
pan and pump. The hazards
of pan drain-down on initial pump
start-up can be avoided.
2. It is important on chiller start-up that the condenser be flooded on the tower side. Many
condensers are located above the tower pan water level and additional insurance as to a
flooded condenser under these conditions can be provided by use of an automatic fill or
Pressure Reducing Valve. This valve would be set to maintain fill to just below the topmost
piping point. Use of the Pressure Reducing Valve also guards against back drainage problems
as caused by a leaking check valve.
In Figure 11, it will be noted that the manual bleed blow-down valve is located in the top horizontal
return piping run. Bleed will only occur during pump operation. The top or “outside” horizontal return
piping will always drain to the tower and location of bleed blow-down in this line is to be recommended.
Tower Vortexing; Excessive Exit Velocities

Solution of the back drainage problem does not necessarily solve all pump suction line air problems.
Tower vortexing may still occur when tower pan water level over the pan outlet is insufficient for the
flow rate (outlet or exit velocity) actually taking place.
Tower manufacturers often provide vortex breakers in the tower pans and would generally be able to
guarantee non-vortex operation up to some stated flow rate for a particular tower, its pan and pan exit
pipe size.

M71
In some cases, pump suction line pipe size may be less than pan exit size. Given a bushed down pan
exit, exit velocities may become so high as to cause vortex. Tower exit pipe size should conform to pan
exit size for the order of 10 pipe diameters before reducing to the smaller pump suction line size in order
to insure that intended tower exit velocities are not exceeded.
It would seem important that the engineer state, as a part of his tower specification, that tower be able
to operate without vortex to the design flow rate plus some reasonable increment. It would then be the
Technical Resources
engineer's responsibility to provide a pump and piping system combination that establishes some
reasonable facsimile of design flow; at least not to exceed tower manufacturer's requirements.
There are several problems:

1. The initial pump selection head may be overestimated; the less than estimated head causing a
flow increase. In this case, use of the throttle or balance valve illustrated in Figure 11 is
highly recommended.
2. Improper application of tower bypass controls can cause highly variable pumping points and
flow increase possibilities.
Uncontrollable flow increases cannot only cause tower vortex problems, but are also a trouble source
concerning pump cavitation.
Design application points concerning stable pump operation will be evaluated after consideration of the
suction line pressure drop or cavitation problem.
NPSH; Cavitation
It is well known that fluids boil at defined temperature-pressure relationships. For any given fluid at a
given temperature, pressure reduction to some stated value will cause boiling or vaporization.
A pumped fluid can vaporize or flash within the pump itself because of inadequate pressurization. Fluid
vaporization within the pump is generally defined as cavitation and can cause trouble as follows:
1. Pump impeller damage will occur. This is because low pressures in the impeller “eye” will
cause vapor bubble formation. The vapor bubbles then collapse or “implode” because of the
pressure increase as the bubbles move into higher pressure areas inside the impeller. These
hammer-like blows against the impeller can cause physical destruction within a short time.
2. The pump curve will change drastically and in an unpredictable manner. Flow can
virtually cease or “slug” because the pump cannot readily deliver both fluid and vapor.
3. Pump shafts can be broken because of slugging of the impeller against alternate bodies of fluid,
vapor and air.
4. Mechanical pump seal failure can occur because the mechanical seal is asked to work under
intolerable conditions; vapor flash around the seal causes “dry” operation and rapid wear

M72
It is most important to successful pump application that adequate (above vaporization) pressures be
maintained within the pump.
The engineering tool used to insure adequate anti-flash pressurization is a term defined as “Net
Positive Suction Head” (NPSH). NPSH is a rather abstract term which has been subject to much
misunderstanding. Before defining NPSH, it will be worthwhile to establish why the term is necessary.
All pumps operate at a lower pressure in the impeller eye and inlet to the impeller vanes than the
pressure existing at the pump suction flange. Even though pressure at the pump suction flange is
measured and known to be above the flash or vaporization point, the pump can still cavitate because
of the pressure reduction that exists from the suction flange to the pump interior.
Internal pump pressure drop occurs because of greatly increased fluid velocities from the pump suction
flange to and through the impeller eye and because of turbulence, vane entrance friction losses, etc. In
order to prevent cavitation, then, the application engineer must know how much internal pump pressure
drop will occur for his design circumstances and for any of a number of specific pump selection
possibilities.
The pump manufacturer’s measure of this pressure reduction is called “Required NPSH”.
Test procedures for establishing Required FIGURE 12. REQUIRED NPSH IS MEASURE
NPSH have been standardized and are OF PUMP PRESSURE DROP
carefully followed by pump manufacturers
so as to obtain as true an estimation of
internal pump pressure drop as possible.
Required NPSH is illustrated on pump

curves by several different methods.
Figure 13 shows a separate curve plot of
Required NPSH. This type of illustration
is used when only a single pump capacity
curve is shown.
Regardless of the illustration method,

Required NPSH is not a constant value
for any pump. Similar to valve pressure
drop, Required NPSH will increase with
flow increase.

M73
FIGURE 13. REQUIRED NPSH INCREASES AS

FLOW INCREASES THROUGH PUMP
Again, referencing to valves, it is well
known that for a given flow rate, a large
valve will cause less pressure drop than a
smaller valve. In a similar manner, pumps
can be considered as small or large by
Technical Resources
reference to impeller eye diameter for
intended pumped flow rate. For the same
pumped flow rate, a small pump (small
impeller eye diameter) will have a much
higher Required NPSH than a larger
pump.
Figure 14 provides some important basic

pump application points. FIGURE 14. DIFFERENCE IN REQUIRED NPSH
FOR SAME FLOW MOST OFTEN DETERMINEDBY PUMP SIZE
1. Pumps selected to the end of the

capacity curve (Ft Hd vs. GPM)
are being driven to maximum
capability and are the smallest
pump that can provide design flow
rate. The pump is “small” however,
and establishes a maximum
Required NPSH (pump
pressure drop).
While generally lowest cost,
because of minimum size, the
selection establishes maximum
trouble potential.
2. Pumps selected to the midpoint area of the capacity curve are larger; impeller eye velocity is
reduced and the pump internal pressure drop must be lower.
The pump so selected will cost more than the minimal “end of curve” selection but will reduce
trouble potential when NPSH or cavitational problems are a consideration.
It should be noted, in passing, that many potential pump application problems other than cavitation are
reduced by midpoint selection: flow balance, noise, etc.

M74
We have thus far established a basic point; that Required NPSH is a description of a specific pump’s
internal pressure drop as flow rate through the pump changes. How is knowledge of Required NPSH
used for specific pump application problems?
The fundamental manner in which NPSH is used is simple and direct. An assessment is made by the
application engineer as to the pressure that will be available at the pump suction flange for the given
fluid at design flow rate.
The fluid temperature is also known, and vapor pressure tables define the pressure at which the fluid
will boil.
The difference between the available suction flange pressure and the fluid boiling point is then
determined and defined as “Available NPSH”. Available NPSH is then the available suction flange
pressure over and above the fluid boiling point pressure.
What this means is that fluid will not flash or cavitate inside the pump so long as the internal pump
pressure drop (Required NPSH) is less than available NPSH.
As an example, a system under design is intended to pump 212°F water. The application engineer
states his conclusion, after calculation, that the pump suction flange will be at 12 PSIG pressure during
operation. What is the Available NPSH?
Since 212°F water boils at 0 PSIG, the Available NPSH must be 12 PSI; the pump suction flange
pressure will be 12 PSI above the fluid boiling point.
Given that the pump internal pressure drop (Required NPSH) is only 8 PSI, it will be known that the
lowest possible internal pump pressure will still be 4 PSI over the boiling point; the pump will not
cavitate because Available NPSH is greater than Required NPSH.
Suppose, for this example, that a pump is inadvertently selected which has a Required NPSH of 14
PSI at design flow rate. This condition immediately establishes that the internal pump pressure will be
below the boiling point; 12 - 14 = - 2 PSI. The internal pump pressure drop (Required NPSH) is
greater than Available NPSH; pump cavitation will and must occur.
The example illustrates the fundamental reasoning behind NPSH evaluation procedure. It will be noted,
however, that the example has stated NPSH as PSI. This has been done only to clarify fundamental
usage of the terms. NPSH, whether available or required, is never expressed in PSI terms... it is
always stated in terms of ft fluid head.

M75
The reason NPSH is stated in terms of ft fluid head is because of the need for generalization. It would
not be feasible to publish a different pump capacity curve and NPSH curve for an infinite variety of fluids
and, in addition, to provide separate NPSH and capacity curves for all temperature variations with each
separate fluid. This would be needed if pump curves and NPSH data were expressed in terms of PSI.
Pump curves and NPSH data are illustrated as ft head versus GPM because ft fluid head means
differential energy per unit weight of fluid. A pound of water at 85°F weighs as much as a pound of
Technical Resources
water at 200°F… or a pound of gasoline at 60°F. Pump curves and NPSH data expressed as ft head
versus GPM is then generalized and the pump data established by water test at 85°F applies
without change* to water at 200°F or 45°F, and to gasoline or to a huge variety of fluids within broad
temperature and viscosity ranges.
A typical pump curve, illustrating capacity and Required NPSH is shown as Figure 15.
The need for an ability to apply the developed pump curves to a wide variety of fluids is neatly solved by
use of the term ft head. The solution to the one problem causes other difficulties; especially in NPSH
application. The difficulty has to do with abstract considerations of the term ft head as classically applied
to NPSH evaluations.
NPSH must finally be defined in terms of

ft fluid head. Since this is true, the FIGURE 15. CAPACITY AND NPSH PUMP CURVE
classical methods for application of PLOT APPLIES TO ALL FLUIDS WITHIN BROAD VISCOSITY RANGE
NPSH data for pump selection is to
convert all pressures to ft fluid head…
including vapor pressure and
atmospheric pressure. It is difficult to
picture sea level atmospheric pressure
as equivalent to 34 ft of 60°F water head
or to 68 ft of fluid at a fluid specific
gravity of 0.5. The statements of
atmospheric pressure related to ft fluid
head are abstract engineering truths…
not concrete, easily visualized truths that
can be mentally referenced to gauge
pressure readings.
*Pumping horsepower will change with fluid density, of course.

M76
Conventional NPSH design evaluations will be avoided in this discussion. This is because of its very
abstract nature. Conventional NPSH evaluation can be a very confusing, time consuming procedure for
the majority of engineers whose NPSH evaluation needs are generally sporadic.
The B&G NPSH evaluation procedure is as theoretically correct as the conventional. It differs in that
the calculation reference is to pump suction, flange pressure expressed in terms of PSIG; gauge
pressure - not absolute.
The reference, or start point for the evaluation is atmospheric pressure at the pump suction supply
level. Simple calculations are then made to determine pump suction flange gauge pressures during
operation. An example problem is illustrated in Figure 16; for 85°F tower water.
FIGURE 16. EXAMPLE PROBLEM
At sea level, the atmospheric pressure on water at the suction pan will be 0 PSIG.
With tower water at a specific gravity of 1, each 2.3 ft of fluid head = 1 PSI.
For these circumstances, and starting with atmospheric pressure at 0 PSIG; a static fluid head of 2.3 ft
would cause + 1 PSIG to be registered at gauge “A.” A suction pipe flow-friction loss of 4.6 ft is
equivalent to 2 PSI pressure drop.

M77
The calculated pump suction gauge pressure reading would then be:
0 + 1 - 2 = -1 PSIG*
The B&G NPSH Chart (Figure 17) is entered at a calculated pump suction gauge pressure of -1 PSIG.
A line is then run vertically to interception with the fluid vapor pressure; for 85°F water, this is the order
of 0.6 PSIA.
Technical Resources
From this interception point (1) a line is run horizontally to interception with the fluid specific gravity line
as at point (2). (In this case specific gravity = 1). Available NPSH is read at point (2); in this case @ 31 ft.
FIGURE 17
What has the NPSH Chart
accomplished?
The NPSH Chart has simply taken available
suction pressure and deducted fluid vapor
pressure to establish available pressure over
and above the fluid boiling point. This
available pressure has then been converted
to ft fluid head at the fluid specific gravity.
This is fluid pressure-head over and above
the fluid boiling point and is defined in
conventional pumping terms as Available
NPSH.
*It will be noted that velocity head static pressure reduction (h = V2/2g) has not been taken
into account.
Velocity head is a point of concern for the pump manufacturer in his development of Required
NPSH. The pump test engineer reads pump suction gauge pressure, converts this to ft fluid head
and adds velocity head to obtain pump suction pressure as an absolute fluid energy head
statement.
The pump application engineer is not concerned with velocity head in his Available NPSH
calculation, however. This is because he is not working with an actual gauge reading. His
calculation establishes absolute fluid energy head available at the pump suction only when velocity
head is not considered.
Velocity head is only considered for NPSH when an actual gauge reading is used. Velocity head
will also be considered when a suction static pressure calculation is made for fluid flash possibility
in the suction line; but without NPSH reference.

M78
Our example problem now states that we have 31 ft available NPSH. In order for fluid to flash or
cavitate inside the pump, the pump internal pressure drop (Required NPSH) must exceed 31 ft.
To provide a satisfactory pumping system, we need only provide a pump which has a Required NPSH
of less than 31 ft.
This will be a simple proposition since only a remarkably bad “end of the curve” pump selection would
reach this order of Required NPSH.
The preceding example has important application points as it applies to tower pumping. Before
discussing tower pump suction application requirements, however, use of the B&G NPSH Chart for
fluids other than water and at elevations above sea level should be pointed out.
When any fluid is to be pumped, the engineer will know its specific gravity and its vapor pressure at the
pumping temperature. This data is tabulated in handbooks or is available from the fluid manufacturer.
FIGURE 18. PUMPING DIAGRAM; EXAMPLE PROBLEM
As an example, an exotic fluid is to be

pumped from an open tank in Denver.
The fluid manufacturer states that at
its pumping temperature, the fluid has
a vapor pressure (boiling pressure) of
5 PSIA and that its specific gravity will
be 0.6. Determine Available NPSH for
the pumping situation illustrated in
Figure 18.
Elevation (ft) Atmospheric Pressure (PSIG)

0 0
1,000 -0.5
It will be useful to tabulate changes in atmospheric 2,000 -1
pressure with elevation above sea level. It will be 3,000 -1.5
noted that atmospheric pressure decreases about 4,000 -2
5,000 -2.5
1/2 PSI for every 1,000 ft elevation above sea level. 6,000 -3
7,000 -3.5
8,000 -4
9,000 -4.5
10,000 -5

M79
It will also be useful to tabulate head to PSI relationships for various specific gravities.
Fluid Specific Gravity Ft Fluid Head Equal to 1 PSI

1.5 1.5
1.4 1.64
1.3 1.75
1.2 1.9
1.1 2.1
1.0 Usual Water Reference 2.3
Technical Resources
0.9 2.6
0.8 2.85
0.7 3.3
0.6 3.85
0.5 4.5
The example diagram pump suction pressure would then be established as in Figure 19.
FIGURE 19. PUMP SUCTION PRESSURE; EXAMPLE
In Figure 19, atmospheric pressure at -2.5

PSIG is unaffected by fluid weight. 10 ft of
fluid head at 0.6 specific gravity will cause
10/3.85 or about 2.6 PSI pressure. Gauge
“A” must then read 2.6 PSI over
atmospheric pressure or + 0.1 PSIG. The
fluid flow friction loss of 4 ft; (4/3.85) = 1.04
PSI pressure drop so the pump suction
pressure will then read -0.94 PSIG or the
order of -1 PSIG:
(Atmospheric) Static Friction Loss

-2.5 + 2.6 - 1.04 = -0.94 or about -1 PSIG
The B&G NPSH Chart is then entered at -1 PSIG. The next step is to proceed upward to an intersection
with 5 PSIA vapor pressure. A horizontal line drawn from this intersection to a 0.6 specific gravity
establishes that the pump will have an available NPSH of 35 ft.
A pump is then selected which has a Required NPSH of less than 35 ft at the design flow rate.
The B&G NPSH Chart is generalized and can be used for analysis of pump suction requirements for
any fluid and for any piping system; open or closed. It is not limited to cooling tower application.
It would seem that the previous tower NPSH evaluation points out that very simple application rules will
eliminate the need for actual evaluation of NPSH requirements for tower systems.

M80
The Tower Pump and Its Suction Line

It is the unusual tower system that has pump suction troubles. Trouble can be experienced, however,
when relatively simple application rules are not followed.
The first pump suction application rule is:

1. LEAVE THE SUCTION LINE ALONE!
So long as the suction line is only pipe and the pump is below the tower pan water level, the available
NPSH will be at least to the order of 30 ft. Any pump selected to a reasonable point on its curve will
work.
FIGURE 20. RIGHT - LEAVE SUCTION LINE ALONE
FIGURE 21. WRONG - HIGH PRESSURE DROP STRAINER, CHECK,

CONTROL AND BALANCE VALVE IN SUCTION LINE
High pressure drop units in the pump suction line are generally installed by the amateur in the “wreck it
your self” approach.
Tower bypass valve, checks, balance valves and fine mesh strainers can almost always be installed in
the pump discharge - and should be.
If it becomes absolutely necessary to install a strainer or check in the suction line, a strong
specification should be stated with respect to minimizing allowable pressure drops.
The second application rule is:

2. PLACE THE PUMP BELOW TOWER PAN WATER LEVEL!

M81
In Figure 22, the pan water level is FIGURE 22. RIGHT - PUMP BELOW PAN WATER LEVEL
shown above the pump for both
illustrations. This insures a flooded
pump on start-up. It is best to maximize
“H” if possible as in b, though even a
minimum “H” of the order of several
feet static height will still provide a very
Technical Resources
high available NPSH (generally above
30 ft) provided the suction line is left
alone, and does not exceed the order
of 5 ft friction-flow loss.
FIGURE 23. PUMP ABOVE PAN WATER LEVEL -

In Figure 23, the pump will not be flooded AVOID IF POSSIBLE
on start-up and will, therefore, require
the fill as illustrated. A check valve must
be provided in the suction line to
prevent suction line drainage.
Available NPSH has now been reduced

because the pump is above pan water
level and because a suction line check
or foot valve has become necessary.
The diagramed situation can usually be avoided. If unavoidable, however, a careful NPSH evaluation
should be made and strong specifications made concerning allowable check valve pressure drop.
A third suction line application point is:

3. AVOID “ABOVE THE PUMP” AIR TRAPS IN THE SUCTION LINE!
FIGURE 24. WRONG - SUCTION LINE AIR TRAPPED
Installations as in Figure 24 should,

and usually can be avoided. When
absolutely unavoidable, the
modifications shown in Figure 25 will
prove of help.

M82
FIGURE 25. IMPROVED SUCTION LINE

AIR TRAP INSTALLATION
While the air trapped suction is still not
recommended, the modifications
illustrated in Figure 25 will help alleviate
the otherwise intolerable operating
conditions established in Figure 24.
Careful evaluations as to available

pump suction pressures will have to be
made and strong specifications stated
to allowable check valve pressure drop.
A fourth suction line application point

concerns:
SUCTION LINE STRAINERS
The application point is:

4. AVOID FINE MESH HIGH PRESSURE DROP STRAINERS IN THE SUCTION LINE!
Pump suction line strainers are apparently one of those peculiar “be darned if you do and darned if you
don’t” propositions. There are two conflicting needs.
1. Protection of the system; pumps, valves, condenser, spray nozzles, etc. against dirt and debris.
2. The fact of placing a fine mesh strainer in the suction piping will make a mockery of the most
careful pump suction pressure evaluation. This is because an uncontrollable variable has been
introduced; once the strainer gets clogged cavitation will occur.
The problem is not unsolvable, however, once it is understood that the Centrifugal Pump will pass fairly
large objects. This means that strainer mesh openings from 3/16” to 1/4” can be used if the only
function of the strainer is to protect the pump.
Tower pans are usually provided with an exit strainer (at tower outlet to suction piping) of this mesh
order. Such tower strainers should be specified since they can be watched and are easily cleaned
without piping drainage.
When tower pan strainers cannot be provided, a large mesh low pressure drop strainer can be placed
in the suction line. Such strainers should be strongly specified both as to mesh size (3/16” min.) and
pressure drop.

M83
Fine mesh strainers are often needed for protection of the condenser, its valves and/or spray nozzles.
The fine mesh strainer should be placed at the pump discharge; usually between pump discharge and
the pump check valve. This location will often simplify the work of the operator in removal and cleaning
of the easily clogged basket.
Strainer clog always has and will continue to present operating problems; old newspapers, cottonwood
seeds, tree leaves, etc. seem to find their way with an unerring directional sense to the tower - and
Technical Resources
ultimately to the tower strainers.
FIGURE 26. WRONG - FINE MESH

STRAINER IN PUMP SUCTION LINE
FIGURE 27. RIGHT - TOWER STRAINER

PROTECTS PUMP; FINE MESH PROTECTS
CONDENSER, ETC.
FIGURE 28. RIGHT - LARGE MESH

STRAINER PROTECTS PUMP; FINE MESH
PROTECTS CONDENSER, ETC.

M84
Several protective measures are available. In addition to locating the tower away from trees and other
potential sources of debris when possible, the tower itself can be screened and a tower overflow can
be used (in place of bleed blow-down) to “float off” leaves and other debris to drain before they get into
the piping strainers.
The importance of a well designed tower pan strainer and proper maintenance should again be
emphasized.
Given even the best preventative measures, strainers will still become clogged, however, and the
operator should be given simple working tools to determine when strainers need cleaning.
A differential gauge can be placed across the strainer. This can often be set to trigger an alarm under
high pressure differential (clogged strainer) conditions. This is illustrated in Figure 29, together with a
manual differential read-out method.
FIGURE 29. READING STRAINER

PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL
Predicting Pump Operating Points: The System Curve

Actual pump operating points considerably beyond that stated in the pump specification should be
guarded against. The more than predicted flow rates can cause tower air vortexing and will increase
pump cavitation probability. Increases in system flow rate will decrease available pump suction
pressure and, at the same time, state a need for increased suction pressures.
System curve analysis will be used to point out the importance of the initial specification points; the
importance of balance or throttle valves and the importance of stable operating points. This is because
system operating characteristics may be affected by tower bypass control and other factors.

M85
The closed loop system curve analysis considers only flow-friction loss. Static head losses do not occur
in the closed loop piping circuit.
A closed loop piping circuit is illustrated in Figure 30. The flow-friction or energy head loss is calculated
at 40 ft at a flow rate of 300 GPM.
FIGURE 30. FLOW-FRICTON LOSS IN CLOSED
PIPING CIRCUIT DETERMINES REQUIRED PUMP
Technical Resources
HEAD; HEIGHT (H) NOT CONSIDERED
It should be apparent, for Figure 30, that if

only 150 GPM flow rate occurred, the
flow-friction loss will be less. This is so,
and the change in energy head required to
drive 150 GPM, rather than 300, through
the piping circuit is defined by the basic
flow-friction loss relationship which states:
“Friction loss changes as the square of the

flow change.”
In other words, a reduction of flow to one half that initially stated means a friction or head loss reduction
to (1/2)2 or 1/4 that required for “design” flow conditions. If we reduce flow to 150 GPM, from 300 GPM,
the friction loss for Figure 30 will only be 10 ft (40 x (1/2)2 = 40 x 1/4 = 10 ft).
This relationship can be set up on a programmable calculator, computer, or the B&G System Syzer,
available at www.bellgossett.com.
Considered in isolation, the changes in system fricton loss can be stated as Ft Head versus GPM in the
tables as below.
Design
Flow (GPM) 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400
Ft Head 0 1.1 4.4 10 17.5 27.5 40 54 70
The above figures can be plotted on a Ft Head versus GPM chart as in Figure 31 and will illustrate the
piping circuit flow-friction loss or head relationship for the closed loop piping circuit shown in Figure 30.

M86
FIGURE 31. PLOT OF FLOW-FRICTION LOSS OR

The First Law of Thermodynamics
SYSTEM CURVE FOR FIGURE 30
expressly establishes that:
“ENERGY IN EQUALS ENERGY
OUT.”
It must then follow the plotting of a

pump curve across the system

curve establishes the point of
operation for that particular pump
when applied to the particular
piping system stated for Figure 30.
The pumping point must be at the
intersection of the pump curve with
the system curve; as illustrated in
Figure 32.
FIGURE 32. INTERSECTION OF SYSTEM CURVE WITH PUMP

CURVE WITH PUMP CURVE IS PUMPING POINT
A great many application

observations could be made
concerning closed loop pumping
as shown in Figure 30. Our present
concern, however, is not with the
closed loop but is with the open
loop; in particular the tower piping
circuit. The difference is that we
must take into account the “open”
or “static” pumping head.
Supposing now, that we establish

the same flow-friction loss; 40 ft at
300 GPM, as for our previous example - but state this to a tower pumping example with a “static” or
“open circuit” pumping head requirement of 13 ft.

M87
Reference should be made to previous discussion concerning determination of “open” piping circuit
pump head requirements (page J56 to J63).
Given, however, that the flow-friction loss is 40 ft at 300 GPM, we would set up a table exactly as Table
2 for the closed piping circuit analysis. This would describe the flow-friction loss relationship in the piping
circuit shown in Figure 33.
Technical Resources
FIGURE 33. TOWER EXAMPLE:
∆h (AE) = 40 FT; Ho = 13 FT
TABLE 3 (Flow-Friction Loss; Figure 33)

Design
Flow (GPM) 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400
Friction Loss (Ft Head) 0 1.1 4.4 10 17.5 27.5 40 54 70
It will be apparent, from Figure 33, that water flow cannot occur, until the pump has raised water from
level “A” to level “E”; a height of 13 ft.
The open pipe circuit system curve differs from “closed loop” in that static head loss must be introduced
into the problem.
Static head losses are added to the flow-friction losses to establish total head requirement at various
flow rates. This is illustrated in Table 4 for Figure 33.
TABLE 4
Flow (GPM) 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400
Friction Loss (Ft Head) 0 1.1 4.4 10 17.5 27.5 40 54 70
Static Head (Ft Head) 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13
Total Head Loss (Ft Head) 13 14.1 17.4 23 30.5 40.5 53 70 83
Plotting of total head loss versus GPM establishes then, the “open system curve” for the piping circuit
defined in Figure 33. The pump curve intersection with the system curve so described illustrates the
actual pumping point. This is again defined by the First Law.

M88
FIGURE 34. OPEN SYSTEM PUMPING POINT

System curve analysis will be of value
in evaluating:
1. Pump operating point shift

due to less than
anticipated flow-friction
loss in the piping circuit.

2. Unstable pump operation
as caused by:
(a) Incorrect tower bypass
arrangements.
(b) Tower bypass with high pressure
drop spray nozzles.
Pump operating points should be stable and as close to that specified as possible in order to set up
design safeguards against tower vortexing and pump suction problems.
Non Bypassed Tower Pump Operating Shift

While tower pump static heads can be easily defined, the flow-friction heads will often be less
determinate.
Installed condenser pressure drop may be less than specified and the pipe friction loss less than
anticipated.
The piping friction loss is often based on a pipe “age” factor, based on possible interior pipe fouling due
to aerated tower water. The rate of fouling is a relative unknown, leading to divergent engineering
practice.
1. Some engineers design to clean pipe; Hydraulic Institute or B&G System Syzer. The opinion
being that the tower must be treated in order to insure condenser performance and that
chemical treatment will provide against the pipe fouling problem.
2. Others engineers provide an “age” factor for pipe pressure drop ranging from 50% over “clean”
data to 100% or twice that used for the closed loop system. Pipe pressure drop data for “15
year old” pipe is stated to the order of twice that used for clean pipe.*
* The B&G System Syzer can be used for either clean or “aged” conditions. When used for “15 year
old” pipe, the illustrated friction loss is simply multiplied by 2.

M89
Unlike the closed loop heat-cool Hydronic System, it does not generally make a great deal of difference
as to whether “clean” or “15 year old” pipe friction loss data is used for the tower system. This is
because pipe friction loss is usually only a small part of the total pump head; system statics and the
condenser providing the major part.
As an illustrative example, a proposed tower system is composed of the following elements concerning
pump head.
Technical Resources
Static or Open “Head” 12’
Condenser 25’
Valves, Strainer, etc. 7’
100’ Piping @ 15 Year Old 6’
TOTAL HEAD 50’
The actual clean pipe pressure drop is only 3 ft, so that the true initial head is 47 ft rather than 50 ft.
The difference (system curve not shown) would cause an increase in flow rate of some 4%; an
insignificant change.
Much more significant and bothersome change can be caused by substitution of a low pressure drop
condenser when the pump head estimate is based on the highest pressure drop condenser unit
expected to be bid.
The same tower system will be evaluated; estimated head will be compared with actual head loss.
Estimated Head Loss Actual Head Loss
Condenser 25’ 8’
Valves, Strainer, etc. 7’ 7’
150’ Piping @ 15 Year Old 6’ 3’
Total Flow-Friction 38’ 18’
Static or Open + 12’ + 12’
TOTAL PUMP HEAD 50’ 30’

M90
The pump is specified at design flow for 50 ft while the true head loss is only 30 ft. Assuming a design
flow rate of 300 GPM, what will the actual flow be?
A system curve table plot is made following procedures previously provided.
Flow (GPM) 0 250 300 350 400 450

Actual Flow-Friction (Ft Head) 0 12.5 18 24.5 32 41
Statics (Ft Head) 12 12 12 12 12 12

Total Head (Ft Head) 12 24.5 30 36.5 44 53
FIGURE 35. EXAMPLE SYSTEM CURVE;

The system curve plot is then as illustrated as LESS THAN ANTICIPATED PUMP HEAD
Figure 35.
The pump point shift has increased flow over

design to the order of 45%. Cavitational and/or
tower vortex can occur unless corrective
measures are applied.
The pump impeller diameter could, and should

be cut down to match the pump to the system.
It is more usual, however, to simply throttle the

pump discharge. This leads to a very important
tower application point:
THROTTLE OR BALANCE VALVES SHOULD NOT ONLY BE INSTALLED AT THE PUMP

DISCHARGE; THEY SHOULD BE USED!
FIGURE 36. USE OF THE BALANCE VALVE WILL OFTEN

PREVENT AIR VORTEX AND SUCTION PRESSURE PROBLEMS

M91
Flow through the tower system can be measured by any of several methods:
1. Pump differential pressure (based on pump curve).
2. Condenser differential pressure (based on manufacturer’s data).
3. Triple Duty Valve (combination check and throttle) differential pressure (Based on calibrated Cv
data for various valve openings).
Technical Resources
Given a stable pumping arrangement, a properly set balance valve will help protect the pump against
many operating problems.
The unstable tower pumping system will be aided by use of the balance valve - but problems may still
occur because of improper tower bypass applications.
Tower Bypass - General Methods

Improperly applied tower bypass control arrangements can cause unstable pump operation and large
volume flow changes through the condenser. Condenser flow change can cause chilled water
temperature control instability, especially for absorption machines, and will greatly increase pump
trouble probability.
There are two basic methods for tower bypass:

1. Bypass to tower pan.
2. Bypass to suction piping.
FIGURE 37. BASIC TOWER BYPASS METHODS

Bypass to the tower pan will generally be
preferred because of greater flow stability and
because the possibility of air suction into the
pump is greatly reduced (See page J64).
Bypass control valves that are used are:

1. Three way “diverting or bypass.”
2. Two “linked” two way valves (usually
butterfly valves) acting as a three way
diverting valve.
3. A single two way butterfly valve placed in the bypass line.
It should be particularly noted that three way mix valves should not be applied to tower bypass control.

M92
FIGURE 38. THREE WAY “MIX” - DO NOT USE

The three way mix valve (two inlets; one outlet) should not be used for tower bypass application
because it must be placed in the pump suction line and can cause pump suction pressure problems.
The three way mix valve application is “inviting” in the sense that the mix valve costs less and is more
readily available than the diverting three way valve. Its actual application is only an invitation to trouble,
however.
Three way diverting (one inlet; two outlets) application is much preferred since this valve will be placed
in the condenser return line (pump discharge) where its operation will not effect pump suction
pressures.
Relatively high cost and limited availability generally confines use of the actual three way diverting
valve to sizes in the general order of 4 inches or less.
For pipe sizes beyond the order of 4 inches or larger, linked butterfly valves are usually provided to
serve the same function.
The single two way butterfly valve is also used for tower bypass; two generalized application
possibilities are shown with the valve installed in the bypass line.
FIGURE 39. USE DIVERTING VALVES NOT THREE WAY MIX

M93
Basic conceptual patterns and valve bypass arrangement possibilities have been presented. The
problem now is to establish application considerations that will eliminate pump instability when bypass
actually occurs. Three working tools are needed:
FIGURE 40. SINGLE BUTTERFLY ALSO

1. Tower circuit pump head USED FOR BYPASS
requirements; static and flow-friction.
These considerations have
Technical Resources
already been presented
(page J56 to J63).
2. Tower system curve analysis
methods. This has been illustrated
(page J80 to J84).
3. Knowledge of valve operational
patterns; flow-friction loss as related
to size and valve opening.
This has not been shown.
Bypass Valve Operational Characteristics; Valve Coefficeint (Cv)

Valve “Cv” is a statement of the flow rate necessary to cause a pressure drop of 1 PSI across the valve.
FIGURE 41. Cv RELATIONSHIP
While the pressure drop at Cv flow rate is

conventionally defined as 1 PSI, it is better for
general system application to consider this in
terms of ft fluid head equivalent. For Hydronic
System work then:
Cv = Flow rate that causes 1 PSI pressure drop

or
Cv = Flow rate GPM that causes 2.3’ Hd. friction loss
Cv = GPM FLOW RATE AT 2.3 FT HEAD FRICTION LOSS ACROSS THE VALVE

M94
As with the system curve previously described, a change in flow rate will cause a change in head loss.
Head loss will change as a squared function of flow rate. The tabulated change can be plotted as in
Table 5 for a valve; Cv =10.
TABLE 5
Cv
Flow (GPM) 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
Ft Head 0 0.58 2.3 5.2 9.3 14.3 20.5 28 37
The points shown in Table 5 can be plotted on a Ft Head versus GPM chart to illustrate the complete
flow-friction loss relationship defined by the specific Cv = 10.
The curve illustrates that at a flow rate of FIGURE 42. VALVE FLOW-FRICTION LOSS
20 GPM a pressure drop of 9.3 ft will occur RELATIONSHIP DESCRIBED BY Cv=10
through a valve rated at 10 Cv. Curve plots
are generally not necessary, since the B&G
System Syzer will provide this same
information in a single simple setting.
As an example in use of Cv, a valve is to be

installed for bypass, and application
considerations require that a 20 ft head be
developed across the valve at 300 GPM
design flow rate.
From the B&G System Syzer;

20 ft at 300 GPM = Cv of 100.
A valve selection for Cv = 100 will meet requirements.
Valve Cv information is provided by control valve manufacturers in either tabulated or chart form.
Figure 43 shows a possible plot of Cv for a line of butterfly valves, 2 inches to 12 inches in size. This
plot illustrates changes in valve Cv from wide open (90°) through various degrees of closure. It should
be understood that this plot simply illustrates the general order of Cv relationship for butterflies and
should not be used for actual design.

M95
For a Cv selection of 100, the following valve sizes can be used:
Valve Size Cv = 100 @ Approximate ° Open

5" 34°
4" 42°
3" 53°
2.5" 68°
Technical Resources
FIGURE 43. APPROXIMATE BUTTERFLY Cv
Actual valve selection would be left to control AS RELATED TO ° OPEN
people. It is of interest to note, however, that
300 GPM dictates a pipe size of 5” while
valve selection possibilities range down to
the order of 2-1/2”; with an increased control
“range” (° movement) for the smaller valve.
This will usually mean more control
precision.
It should be noted that for two way

modulating valves, Cv changes as the valve
moves from open to closed. This is not true
for a conventional three way valve applied to
modulating service.
Three way valves are designed to a comparatively constant Cv factor. That is to say; at a constant
differential head a constant total flow will occur through the valve; whether through a single port or
through any combination of port openings.
FIGURE 44. THREE WAY VALVES ARE

DESIGNED TO CONSTANT Cv
Directly linked butterfly valves acting as a

three way will not necessarily establish this
same correlation, however. This will be seen
from examination of Figure 43.
A 3” valve at Cv = 120 will be set for the

order of 60° open. This would be the setting
for both the tower valve and its linked bypass
valve when either is open with the other
closed.

M96
At 50% position, each valve is positioned at 30° and the direct link would state that each valve would
have a Cv to the order of 30; with a total “linked” Cv of 60.
This means, unless precautions are taken, that the linked valves will provide a rising pressure drop
characteristic on bypass. For the example; pressure drop at a 50% open condition for both valves
would be the order of four times that when one valve is open and the other closed.
In terms of tower bypass control, the above means that condenser flow can be reduced when bypass
occurs. The precautions taken are:
1. Use of three way diverting valves when size availability and cost permits.
2. When “linked” butterfly valves are applied, generally in sizes 4” and above, the valves should
be selected for low pressure drop characteristics at design flow. This will minimize condenser
flow reduction on bypass.
3. Knowledgeable control people will often avoid a single operator with directly linked butterfly
valves. They often prefer individual valve operators with “lead-lag” operation to reduce Cv
change on bypass.
4. It should be noted that the peculiar characteristic of butterfly valves is sometimes of benefit;
reference page J98.
FIGURE 45. DIRECTLY LINKED BUTTERFLIES CAN REDUCE CONSENSER FLOW WHEN
IN PARTIAL BYPASS AND WHEN VALVES ARE SELECTED TO HIGH P.D.
FIGURE 46. INDIVIDUAL OPERATORS IN LEAD-LAG SEQUENCE HELPS SOLVE

PROBLEM AS DOES LOW P.D. SELECTION

M97
Tower Bypass; Design for Flow Stability

Working tools have now been provided for analysis of various tower bypass arrangements as they affect
pumping stability. It will again be noted that pumping instability can affect chilled water temperature
control and greatly increases pump trouble potential.
A. BYPASS TO PUMP SUCTION; BYPASS AND CONDENSER BELOW TOWER; TOWER WITH
SPLASH BASIN
Technical Resources
FIGURE 47. TOWER BYPASS EXAMPLE
A proposed floor below condenser installation is

shown in Figure 47. Bypass is to the pump
suction and it will be noted that the usual check
valve in the tower suction line (AB1) has been
omitted for discussional reasons.
PUMP HEAD SELECTION = Ho + ∆h (AB1) + ∆h (B1F) + ∆h (FE)

= 12 + 1 + 27 + 2 = 42 ft
Assume now that the bypass valve is 5” butterfly (selected at line size for 300 GPM) and has not yet
been “set” by the control contractor; the valve swings to wide open at Cv = 830 (See Figure 43).
At 830 Cv and at 300 GPM, the bypass valve would develop only 0.3 ft head resistance and because of
this, trouble could develop.
It will be noted for this example; and for all tower bypass to the pump suction, that complete bypass will
cause the following changes to occur:
1. Tower suction line friction loss will be eliminated because of no flow.
2. Tower discharge line friction loss will be eliminated.
3. Static head will be lost.

M98
Pump static head will be lost if bypass valve back-pressure to point “F” (Figure 47) is insufficient to
maintain a full column of water in the tower line. For our example the levels would change as illustrated
in the following diagrams in which gauge readings are stated in Ft Head.
FIGURE 47A. PUMP OFF (For Figure 47)

FIGURE 47B. PUMP ON; BYPASS CLOSED (For Figure 47)
FIGURE 47C. PUMP ON; BYPASS OPEN IN VALVE Cv =830
The pumped piping circuit on bypass has now become a closed loop since all statics have been lost.

M99
FIGURE 48. TOWER IN TOTAL BYPASS ESTABLISHES CLOSED

LOOP OPERATION; NO STATICS
Technical Resources
The comparative system curves, full tower versus full bypass, can now be illustrated.
SYSTEM CURVE TABLES

1. Full Tower Flow
Design
GPM 0 100 200 300 350 400
Friction Loss 0 3.4 13.1 30 41 53
Static Loss 12 12 12 12 12 12
TOTAL HEAD 12 15.4 25.1 42 53 65
2. Full Bypass Flow

Design
GPM 0 100 200 300 350 400
Friction Loss 0 3 12 27.3 37 47
Static Loss * 0 0 0 0 0 0
TOTAL HEAD 0 3 12 27.3 37 47
FIGURE 49. PUMP OPERATING SHIFT

*Complete loss of all static head as caused by full CAUSED BY LOSS OF STATIC HEAD
bypass operation will cause a shift in pump
operational point as described in Figure 49.
The pumping point shift can be virtually eliminated

with reduced system cost and improved
controllability by proper sizing and setting of the
bypass valve.

M100
When the bypass is to pump suction and is below tower pan level, the following application point
should be observed:
The valve should be selected for design flow at a head approximately equal to system static
pump-height Ho.
This is the height from tower pan water level to the topmost tower discharge piping. For the example,
described in Figure 47, Ho is 12 ft. At a design flow rate of 300 GPM, the valve selection point would
be at Cv = 130.
Reference to Figure 43 illustrates that a 3” valve at 60° open will satisfy the requirement. Final
selection should be left to the control engineer, since it is finally and ultimately his responsibility to both
select and set the valve.
It should be pointed out that the valve will often be much smaller than conventional line size. The valve
must remain as the control element in the bypass line, however, and the bypass would be pipe sized to
usual criteria (in this case 5”) except for the order of 5 valve size pipe diameters up and downstream of
the valve, which would be valve size.
Given proper bypass valve sizing and setting, the operating pump shift will disappear because the “lost”
static head is replaced by an introduced flow-friction head.
B. OTHER BYPASS APPLICATION PROBLEMS
1. High System Static Head Requirement

It will be noted that as system static pump FIGURE 50. WRONG - INTOLERABLE VALVE
head (Ho) increases, an intolerable valve SIZING SITUATION BECAUSE OF HIGH STATIC Ho
pressure drop situation can be created. This
would be especially true for a winterized
penthouse tower draining into a basement
receiving tank.
The application solution to Figure 50 is a

bypass to the tower sump pan, or to the
gravity drain line at a point directly below
the tower.

M101
It will be noted that bypass could be installed as shown in Figure 50 given a reasonable Ho; a
reasonable valve selection head. This will be defined by the control valve manufacturer and would
generally not exceed the order of 25 ft.
2. High Pressure Drop Spray Nozzle Tower with Bypass
Technical Resources
The bypass arrangement in Figure 52 can propose almost insurmountable pumping problems because
of changes in pumping head as bypass occurs.
Pump head requirements for full tower flow will be:

PUMP HEAD = Ho + Nozzle ∆h + Friction ∆h
= 10 + 25 + 30 = 65 ft
During bypass, static head Ho will be lost, as will flow-friction head through the spray nozzles, discharge
piping ∆h (ED) and suction piping ∆h (AB). The only pumping head that will remain will be flow-friction in
the condenser and bypass loop.
FIGURE 52. BYPASS TO SUCTION WITH HIG

FIGURE 51. BYPASS TO TOWER SOLVES HIGH PRESSURE DROP SPRAY NOZZLE; CAN
STATIC HEAD BYPASS PROBLEM ESTABLISH INTOLERABLE FLOW INSTABILITY
FIGURE 53. OPEN BYPASS VALVE

ESTABLISHES CLOSED LOOP PUMPING
CIRCUIT WITH LOST STATICS AND LOST
FLOW-FRICTION HEAD THROUGH TOWER
NOZZLES, SUCTION AND DISCHARGE PIPING

M102
Given a line sized bypass valve at wide open setting, the new pump head will only be:
PUMP HEAD = 27 + 0.3 = 27.3 ft @ 300 GPM
FIGURE 54. BYPASS TO TOWER WITH LINKED BUTTER-

Pump head has now dropped from 65 ft to the
FLIES AND BALANCE VALVE PROVIDES SOLUTION TO
order of 27 ft at design flow. This will result in FLOW INSTABILITY PROBLEM
a remarkable flow change as the bypass valve
opens and closes; from a design 300 GPM

with bypass closed to the order of 500 GPM
with an open bypass.
Location of the bypass valve at a high point in

the tower discharge line establishes that the
pump static head Ho will be a constant factor
and is not “lost” as in Figure 52.
Linked butterfly valves are illustrated in Figure

54 rather than the conventional diverting valve.
This is because of a previously mentioned characteristic of linked butterflies that will, in this case, aid in
providing flow stability. The characteristic is that linked butterflies will increase flow-friction head
resistance as the valves move from “one side open” to a modulating or “each valve 50% open”
position. The characteristic combination valve head increase at 50%, will be to the order of four times
that for only one side open.
When the valves move to a 50% bypass flow, flow-friction head through the spray nozzles will reduce
from 25 ft to the order of 6 ft (50% flow = 25% head). The butterfly valves can now provide the “lost
head” difference of 19 ft (25 – 6).
Since the lost spray nozzle head of 19 ft is to be provided at a 50% valve open condition; and since
combined valve resistance head is 4 times that at a “one side open” condition… valve selection will be
to design flow and to “lost spray nozzle head” divided by four. In this case:
Valve Selection Head = 19/4 = 4.7 ft; say 5 ft
Assuming a design flow of 300 GPM, the example valve selection will be 300 GPM @ 5 ft or Cv = 200.
This would be line sized butterflies (5”) at 50° open.

M103
The balance valve illustrated in Figure 54 serves the same function as bypass balance on a
conventional Hydronic three way controlled coil; in this case it is set to spray nozzle pressure drop at
design flow.
The tower piping arrangement is now basically stabilized in terms of pumping flow rates.
(a) Full Tower Flow Pump Head:
Pump Head = Ho + ∆h (AD) + Valve ∆h + Spray ∆h
Technical Resources
= 10 + 30 + 5 + 25 = 70 ft
(b) Tower @ 50% Bypass
Pump Head = Ho + ∆h (AD) + Valve ∆h + Spray ∆h
= 10 + 30 + 20 + 6 = 66 ft
It will be noted that pump head has only decreased from 70 ft to 66 ft. This is tolerable since flow
changes will be insignificant; 300 GPM to 310.
(c) Tower @ 100% Bypass
Pump Head = Ho + ∆h (AD) + Valve ∆h + Balance ∆h
= 10 + 30 + 5 + 25 = 70 ft
3. Bypass to Suction; Condenser Above Tower Pan FIGURE 55. POSSIBLE PROBLEM
INSTALLATION; BYPASS TO SUCTION
Severe operating problems can be caused with pump

suction bypass as illustrated in Figure 55. Improper
valve setting will cause air to be introduced into the
pump suction, causing pump “air binding” and
mechanical pump troubles. These problems have
been described on page J64. Lost statics will cause
further troubles.
FIGURE 56. BYPASS TO TOWER ELIMINATES

The balance valve, when set, minimizes static head SUCTION AIR DRAW POSSIBILITY AND REDUCES
PUMP HEAD CHANGE
loss problem possibilities. The tower bypass
eliminates any possibility of air draw into the pump
suction as caused by bypass.
4. Condenser Above Tower

M104
FIGURE 57. OVERHEAD CONDENSER; BYPASS TO

TOWER WITH LINKED BUTTERFLY
Bypass to the tower should always be

employed when the condenser is located above
the tower.
Given the downcomer return height Hr is

greater than cancellable siphon return statics,
balance valve #1 would be set in terms of
previous design procedure (page J58).
Balance valve #2 is set for open system height

Ho; valve pressure drop = Ho ft for full bypass
flow rate.
The linked butterfly valves would be selected for a low order of pressure drop at full design flow rate in
order to minimize valve pressure drop change effect on total pumping head during partial bypass.
It will be noted that high pressure drop diverting three way valve application may be preferable. The
valves can be much smaller since there is no real concern regarding changed pressure drop on
bypass. Use of a high pressure drop diverting valve would often eliminate the need for balance valve
#1 as shown on Figure 57.
Notes for table, opposite page:
Friction Loss
Friction loss can be easily calculated for any length of pipe, as the relationship between friction loss and
length of pipe is proportional. For 200 feet of pipe, for example, the pressure drop is approximately twice
the value given in the table (table values are based on 100 feet lengths of pipe).
Velocity
Velocity will be constant regardless of pipe length, as it is a function of the pipe diameter.

M105
Refrigerant Piping
The following recommendations are given for ammonia piping. Local codes or ordinances governing
ammonia mains should also be complied with.
Refrigerant Piping
Recommended Material
Because copper and copper-bearing materials are attacked by ammonia, they are not used in ammonia
piping systems. Steel piping, fittings, and valves of the proper pressure rating are suitable for ammonia gas
and liquid.
Ammonia piping should conform to ASME Standard B31.5, Refrigerant Piping and IIAR Standard 2, which
states the following:
1. Liquid lines 1.5 inches and smaller shall be not less than Schedule 80 carbon steel pipe.
2. Liquid lines 2 through 6 inches shall be not less than Schedule 40 carbon steel pipe.
3. Liquid lines 8 through 12 inches shall be not less than Schedule 20 carbon steel pipe.
4. Vapor lines 6 inches and smaller shall be not less than Schedule 40 carbon steel pipe.
5. Vapor lines 8 through 12 inches shall be not less than Schedule 20 carbon steel pipe.
6. Vapor lines 14 inches and larger shall be not less than Schedule 10 carbon steel pipe.
7. All threaded pipe shall be Schedule 80.
8. Carbon steel pipe shall be ASTM Standard A 53 Grade A or B, Type E (electric resistance welded) or
Type S (seamless); or ASTM Standard A 106 (seamless), expect where temperature-pressure criteria
mandate a higher specification material. Standard A 53 Type F is not permitted for ammonia piping.
Fittings
Couplings, elbows, and tees for threaded pipe are for a minimum of 3000 psi design pressure and
constructed of forged steel. Fittings for welded pipe should match the type of pipe used (i.e., standard
fittings for standard pipe and extra-heavy fittings for extra-heavy pipe).
Tongue and groove or ANSI flanges should be used in ammonia piping. Welded flanges for low-side piping
can have a minimum 150 psi design pressure rating. On systems located in high ambients, low-side piping
and vessels should be designed for 200 to 225 psig. The high side should be 250 psig if the system uses
water-cooled or evaporative cooled condensing. Use 300 psig minimum for air-cooled designs.
Pipe Joints
Joints between lengths of pipe or between pipe and fittings can be threaded if the pipe size is 1.25 in. or
smaller. Pipe 1.5 inches or larger should be welded. An all-welded piping system is superior.

M106
Table 1 - Suction Line Capacities in Tons for Ammonia with Pressure Drops of 0.25 and 0.50˚F per 100 ft Equivalent
Steel Line Saturated Suction Temperature, ˚F
Size -60 -40 -20
∆t = 0.25˚F ∆t = 0.50˚F ∆t = 0.25˚F ∆t = 0.50˚F ∆t = 0.25˚F ∆t = 0.50˚F
IPS SCH
∆p = 0.046 ∆p = 0.092 ∆p = 0.077 ∆p = 0.155 ∆p = 0.123 ∆p = 0.245
3/8 80 0.03 0.05 0.06 0.09 0.11 0.16
1/2 80 0.06 0.10 0.12 0.18 0.22 0.32
3/4 80 0.15 0.22 0.28 0.42 0.50 0.73
1 80 0.30 0.45 0.57 0.84 0.99 1.44
Refrigerant Piping
1 1/4 40 0.82 1.21 1.53 2.24 2.65 3.84

1 1/2 40 1.25 1.83 2.32 3.38 4.00 5.80
2 40 2.43 3.57 4.54 6.59 7.79 11.26
2 1/2 40 3.94 5.78 7.23 10.56 12.50 18.03
3 40 7.10 10.30 13.00 18.81 22.23 32.09
4 40 14.77 21.21 26.81 38.62 45.66 65.81
5 40 26.66 38.65 48.68 70.07 82.70 119.60
6 40 43.48 62.83 79.18 114.26 134.37 193.44
8 40 90.07 129.79 163.48 235.38 277.80 397.55
10 40 164.26 236.39 297.51 427.71 504.98 721.08
12 ID* 264.07 379.88 477.55 686.10 808.93 1157.59
Steel Line Saturated Suction Temperature, ˚F
Size 0 20 40
∆t = 0.25˚F ∆t = 0.50˚F ∆t = 0.25˚F ∆t = 0.50˚F ∆t = 0.25˚F ∆t = 0.50˚F
IPS SCH
∆p = 0.184 ∆p = 0.368 ∆p = 0.265 ∆p = 0.530 ∆p = 0.366 ∆p = 0.582
3/8 80 0.18 0.26 0.28 0.40 0.41 0.53
1/2 80 0.36 0.52 0.55 0.80 0.82 1.05
3/4 80 0.82 1.18 1.26 1.83 1.87 2.38
1 40 1.62 2.34 2.50 3.60 3.68 4.69
1 /14 40 4.30 6.21 6.63 9.52 9.76 12.42
1 1/2 40 6.49 9.34 9.98 14.34 14.68 18.64
2 40 12.57 18.12 19.35 27.74 28.45 36.08
2 1/2 40 20.19 28.94 30.98 44.30 45.37 57.51
3 40 35.87 51.35 54.98 78.50 80.40 101.93
4 40 73.56 105.17 112.34 160.57 164.44 208.34
5 40 133.12 190.55 203.53 289.97 296.88 376.18
6 40 216.05 308.62 329.59 469.07 480.96 609.57
8 40 444.56 633.82 676.99 962.47 985.55 1250.34
10 40 806.47 1148.72 1226.96 1744.84 1786.55 2263.99
12 ID* 1290.92 1839.28 1964.56 2790.37 2862.23 3613.23
Note: Capacities are in tons of refrigeration resulting in a line friction loss (∆p in psi per 100 ft equivalent * The inside diameter of the pipe is
pipe length), with corresponding change (∆t in ˚F per 100 ft) in saturation temperature.* the same as the nominal pipe size.
Threaded Joints. Many sealants and compounds are available for sealing threaded joints. The
manufacturer’s instructions cover compatibility and application method. Do not use excessive amounts or
apply on female threads because any excess can contaminate the system.
Welded Joints. Pipe should be cut and beveled before welding. Use pipe alignment guides to align the pipe
and provide a proper gap between pipe ends so that a full penetration weld is obtained. The weld should be
made by a qualified welder, using proper procedures such as the Welding Procedure Specifications, prepared
by the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau (NCPWB).
Gasketed Joints. A compatible fiber gasket should be used with flanges. Before tightening flange bolts to
valves, controls, or flange unions, properly align the pipe and bolt holes. When flanges are are used to
straighten pipe, they put stress on adjacent valves, compressors, and controls, causing the operating
mechanism to bind. To prevent leaks, flange bolts are drawn up evenly when connecting the flanges.
Flanges at compressors and other system components must not move or indicate stress when all bolts are
loosened.

M107
Union Joints. Steel (3000 psi) ground joint unions are used for gage and pressure control lines with
screwed valves and for joints up to 0.75 in. When tightening this type of joint, the two pipes must be axially
aligned. To be effective, the two parts of the union must match perfectly. Ground joint unions should be
avoided if at all possible.
Pipe Location
Piping should be at least 7.5 ft above the floor. Locate pipes carefully in relation to other piping and
structural members, especially when the lines are to be insulated. The distance between insulated lines
should be at least three times the thickness of the insulation for screwed fittings, and four times for flange
Technical Resources
fittings. The space between the pipe and adjacent surfaces should be three-fourths of these amounts.
Hangers located close to the vertical risers to and from compressors keep the piping weight off the
compressor. Pipe hangers should be placed no more than 8 to 10 ft apart and with in 2 ft of a change in
direction of the piping. Hangers should be designed to bear on the outside of insulated lines. Sheet metal
sleeves on the lower half of the insulation are are usually sufficient. Where piping penetrates a wall, a
sleeve should be installed and where the pipe penetrating the wall is insulated, it must be adequately
sealed.
Piping to and from compressors and to other components must provide for expansion and contraction.
Sufficient flange or union joints should be located in the piping that components can be assembled easily
during initial installation and also disassembled for servicing.
System Practices for Ammonia Refrigerant

Table 2- Suction, Discharge, and Liquid Line Capacities in Tons for Ammonia (Single- or High-Stage Applications)
Steel Suction Lines (∆t = 1˚F) Discharge Steel Line

Liquid Lines
Line Size Saturated Suction Temperature, ˚F Lines Size
-40 -20 0 20 40 ∆t = 1˚F Velocity = ∆p = 2.0 psi
IPS SCH IPS SCH
∆p = 0.31 ∆p = 0.49 ∆p = 0.73 ∆p = 1.06 ∆p = 1.46 ∆p = 2.95 100 fpm ∆t = 0.7˚F
3/8 80 - - - - - - 3/8 80 8.6 12.1
1/2 80 - - - - - 3.1 1/2 80 14.2 24.0
3/4 80 - - - 2.6 3.8 7.1 3/4 80 26.3 54.2
1 80 - 2.1 3.4 5.2 7.6 13.9 1 80 43.8 106.4
1 /14 40 3.2 5.6 8.9 13.6 19.9 36.5 1 1/4 80 78.1 228.6
1 1/2 40 4.9 8.4 13.4 20.5 29.9 54.8 1 1/2 80 107.5 349.2
2 40 9.5 16.2 26.0 39.6 57.8 105.7 2 40 204.2 811.4
2 1/2 40 15.3 25.9 41.5 63.2 92.1 168.5 2 1/2 40 291.1 1292.6
3 40 27.1 46.1 73.5 111.9 163.0 297.6 3 40 449.6 2287.8
4 40 55.7 94.2 150.1 228.7 333.0 606.2 4 40 774.7 4662.1
5 40 101.1 170.4 271.1 412.4 600.9 1095.2 5 40 - -
6 40 164.0 276.4 439.2 667.5 971.6 1771.2 6 40 - -
8 40 337.2 566.8 901.1 1366.6 1989.4 3623.0 8 40 - -
10 40 611.6 1027.2 1634.3 2474.5 3598.0 - 10 40 - -
12 ID* 981.6 1644.5 2612.4 3963.5 5464.6 - 12 ID* - -
Notes: 4. Values in the table are based on 90˚F condensing temperature.

1. Table capacities are in tons of refrigeration. Multiply table capacities by the following factors for other condensing
∆p = pressure drop due to line friction, psi per 100 ft of equivalent line length temperatures:
∆t = corresponding change in saturation temperature, ˚F per 100 ft Condensing Temperature, ˚F Suction Lines Discharge Lines
2. Line capacity for other saturation temperatures ∆t and equivalent lengths Lc
70 1.05 0.78
80 1.02 0.89
0.55
Table Lc Actual ∆t 90 1.00 1.00
Line capacity = Table capacity X
Actual Lc Table ∆t 100 0.98 1.11
3. Saturation temperature ∆t for other capacities and equivalent lengths Lc 5. Discharge and liquid line capacities are based on 20˚F suction.
Evaporator temperature is 0˚F. The capacity is affected less than 3%
1.8
Actual Lc Actual Capacity when applied from -40 to +40˚F extremes.
∆t = Table ∆t X
Table Lc Table Capacity
*The inside diameter of the pipe is the same as the nominal pipe size.

M108
Table 3: Liquid Ammonia Line Capacities (Capacity in tons of refrigeration, except as noted)
Thermosiphon Lubricant
Pumped Liquid
Equalizer Cooling Lines Gravity
Nominal Overfeed Ratio High-Pressure Hot-Gas
High Flow, c 1000 Btu/h
Size, in. Liquid at 3 psia Defrosta
Sideb
3:1 4:1 5:1 Supply Return Vent
Refrigerant Piping
1/2 10 7.5 6 30 - - - - -
3/4 22 16.5 13 69 4 50 - - -
1 43 32.5 26 134 8 100 - - -
1 1/4 93.5 70 56 286 20 150 - - -
1 1/2 146 110 87.5 439 30 225 200 120 203
2 334 250 200 1016 50 300 470 300 362
2 1/2 533 400 320 1616 92 500 850 530 638
3 768 576 461 2886 162 1000 1312 870 1102
4 1365 1024 819 - 328 2000 2261 1410 2000
5 - - - - 594 - 3550 2214 3624
6 - - - - 970 - 5130 3200 6378
8 - - - - - - 8874 5533 11596
Source: Wile (1977)

A. Hot-gas line sizes are based on 1.5 psi pressure drop per 100 ft of equivalent length at 100 psig discharge pressure and 3 times the evaporator
refrigeration capacity.
B Line sizes are based on experience using total system evaporator tons.
C From Frick Co. (1995). Values for line sizes above 4 in are extrapolated.
Pipe Sizing
Table 1 presents practical suction line sizing data based on 0.25˚F and 0.50˚F differential pressure drop
equivalent per 100 ft for the total equivalent length of pipe. Table 2 lists data for sizing suction and discharge
lines at 1˚F differential pressure drop equivalent per 100 ft equivalent length of pipe, and for sizing liquid lines
at 100 fpm. Charts prepared by Wile (1977) present pressure drops in saturation temperature equivalents.
For a complete discussion of the basis of these line sizing charts, see Timm (1991). Table 3 presents line
sizing information for pumped liquid lines, high-pressure liquid lines, hot-gas defrost lines, equalizing lines,
and thermosiphon lubricant cooling ammonia lines.
Valves
Stop Valves should be placed in the inlet and outlet lines to all condensers, vessels, evaporators, and long
lengths of pipe so that they can be isolated in case of leaks and to facilitate “pumping out” by evacuation.
Sections of liquid piping that can be valved off and isolated must be protected with a relief device.
Installing globe-type stop valves with the valve stems horizontal lessens the chance (1) for dirt or scale to
lodge on the valve seat or disk and cause it to leak or (2) for liquid or lubricant to pocket in the area below
the seat. Wet suction return lines (recirculation system) should employ angle valves to reduce the possibility
of liquid pockets and to reduce pressure drop.
Welded flanged or weld-in-line valves are desirable for all line sizes; however, screwed valves may be used
for 1 1/4” and smaller lines. Ammonia globe and angle valves should have the following features:
• Soft seating surfaces for positive shutoff (no copper or copper alloy)
• Back seating to permit repacking the valve stem while in service
• Arrangement that allows packing to be tightened easily
• All-steel construction (preferable)
• Bolted bonnets above 1 inches, threaded bonnets for 1 inches and smaller

M109
Consider seal cap valves in refrigerated areas and for all ammonia piping. To keep pressure drop to a
minimum, consider angle valves (as opposed to globe valves).
Control Valves, Pressure regulators, solenoid valves, and thermostatic expansion valves should be flanged
for easy assembly and removal. Valves 1.5 in. and larger should have welded companion flanges. Smaller
valves can have threaded companion flanges.
A strainer should be used in front of self-contained control valves to protect them from pipe construction
material and dirt. A ceramic filter installed in the pilot line to the power piston protects the close tolerances
from foreign material when pilot-operated control valves are used.
Technical Resources
Solenoid Valve stems should be upright with their coils protected from moisture. They should have flexible
conduit connections, where allowed by codes, and an electric pilot light wired in parallel to indicate when the
coil is energized. A manual opening stem is useful for emergencies.
Solenoid valves for high-pressure liquid feed to evaporators should have soft seats for positive shutoff.
Solenoid valves for other applications, such as in suction lines, hot-gas lines, or gravity feed lines, should be
selected for the pressure and temperature of the fluid flowing and for the pressure drop available.
Relief Valves must be provided in conformance with ASHRAE Standard 15 and Section VIII, Division 1, of
the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. For ammonia systems, IIAR Bulletin 109 also addresses the
subject of safety valves.
Dual relief valve arrangements enable testing of the relief valves (Figure 1). The three-way stop valve is
constructed so that it is always open to one of the relief valves if the other is removed to be checked or
repaired.
Isolated Line Sections

Sections of piping that can be isolated between hand valves or check valves can be subjected to extreme
hydraulic pressures if cold liquid refrigerant is trapped in them and subsequently warmed. Additional safety
valves for such piping must be provided.
Insulation and Vapor Retarders

Insulation and effective vapor retarders on low-temperature systems are very important. At low tempera-
tures, the smallest leak in the vapor retarder can allow ice to from inside the insulation, which can totally
destroy the integrity of the entire insulation system. The result can cause a significant increase in load and
power usage.
Figure 1: Dual Relief Valve Fitting for Ammonia

M110
Refrigerant Piping

M111
Technical Resources

M112
Refrigerant Piping

M113
Technical Resources

M114
Refrigerant Properties

M115
Technical Resources

M116

M117
Technical Resources

M118

M119
Technical Resources

M120

M121
Cooling Towers in Parallel

When cooling towers with common supply and return piping are installed in parallel, special consideration
should be given to the piping design in order to maintain balanced water flow through each tower. If the
levels are not equal, one tower could overflow while the other tower will draw air through the circulating
pump.
Technical Resources
BAC recommends the following design guidelines when considering the layout of your cooling towers:
A) All towers should be installed so that their overflow levels are at the same elevation.
B) Design all supply and return piping between towers so that it is symmetrical. This helps to ensure
balanced flows through each tower.
C) Install valves at the inlet and outlet of each tower for final adjustment of water flow. These valves can
also be used as shut-off valves to isolate each tower during maintenance. Make certain that the outlet
valve is closed when the inlet valve is closed, and have both valves operate simultaneously if they are
automatically controlled.
D) Install equalizing lines with shut-off valves between tower basins in order to ensure the same water
levels. Differences in water levels may arise due to dirty strainers, changes in valve position, and
clogged nozzles.
Equalizers:
Equalizing lines serve to correct a difference between water levels that may develop during operation.
Equalizers do not correct unbalanced flows.
Equalizers should be adequately sized so that a minimal water level differential exists between two cold
water basins. Refer to Table 1 for recommended equalizer connection sizes.
Table 1: Equalizer Connection Sizes

Flow To Tower (GPM) Equalizer Size IPS*
Up to 120 3”
121-240 4”
241-630 6”
631-1170 8”
1171-1925 10”
1926-2820 12”
2821-3465 14”
2336-3850 (2) 10” or (1) 16”
3851-5640 (2) 12” or (1) 18”
5641-6930 (2) 14” or (1) 20”
6931-7560 (3) 12” or (2) 16” or (1) 20”
* SCH 40 for 3” - 10”, Std. Wt. for 12” and above

M122
Table 2: Maximum Allowable Equalizer Connection Sizes and Locations
Type of Unit End1 Back Bottom2

Series VTL
VTL-016-E to VTL-272-P 6” -- 10”
Series VTO
VTO-12-E to VTO-116-M 4” 6” --
VTO-132-L to VTO-176-0 6” 8” --
Coolint Towers in Parallel
Series VT1
VT1-N209-P to VT1-N510-P 12” 12” --
VT1-275-P to VT1-13335-S 14” 14” 20”
Series 3000
3240A to 31301A 14” -- 14”
Series 1500
15146 to 15425 12” 12” 12”
FXT
FXT-6 to FXT-11 3” -- 3”
FXT-16 to FXT-33 4” -- 4”
FXT-38 to FXT-99 6” -- 6”
FXT-115 to FXT-268 8” -- 8”
1. End equalizer connections on the Series VTL, VT0, VT1, and Series 3000 Cooling Towers must
be located on the end of the tower, opposite the suction connection. The low operating level on
Series VTL and Series 1500 Cooling Towers may restrict the use of the end equalizer connection.
Consult your local BAC Representative for applications requiring end equalizers on these
products.
2. Bottom connections for 8" through 20" will be a bolt circle for 150# standard flange and 6" and
smaller will be MPT. On model VTL Cooling Towers, all bottom connections will be a bolt circle for
150# flanges.
Caution:
Where bottom connections are employed, care must be taken to ensure that the supporting steel
does not interfere with the proposed connection location.

M123
Example:
Given: A 3333A tower cooling 999 gpm from 95°F to 85°F at 78°F entering wet bulb is to be installed in
parallel with an existing FXT-250 tower cooling 750 gpm from 95°F to 85°F at 78°F entering wet bulb.
The towers will be arranged side-by-side as shown below:
Return Supply
Technical Resources
FXT 250
3333A Return
Find: Determine the equalizer line size required between the two towers. Also determine the proper
elevation for each tower.
1. The larger flow rate is 999 gpm.

2. Entering Table 2, find an 8" equalizer is satisfactory for tower flow rates of 631 gpm to 1,170 gpm.
3. This connection can be located either on the ends or on the bottom of both units. With towers situated
side-by-side, it is more convenient to locate the equalizer connections on the ends of both towers, as
shown below.
3333A
FXT 250
8” equalizer
3333A with valve
NOTE: Contact your local BAC Representative for overflow level and operating level data.

M124
Fundamentals of Sound
Sound is an important consideration in the selection of mechanical equipment. The purpose of this article is
to present a procedure for evaluating the sound levels created by evaporative cooling equipment to
determine if these levels will be acceptable to the neighbors* who live or work near the installation. In
addition, sound levels must comply with local code requirements. While most often these levels are found to
be acceptable, certain situations may call for sound levels lower than those produced by the equipment. It is
then the task of the manufacturer, engineer, and owner to determine the best way to decrease the sound
levels for the particular installation. This article presents a means for assessing the impact of the
evaporative cooling equipment’s sound on a neighbor and possible means to reduce that impact should it be
a potential problem.
The procedure consists of three steps, followed by a fourth step if necessary:

1. Establish the noise criterion for the equipment: i.e., determine the sound levels that will be considered
acceptable by the neighbors who will be exposed to them. Also consult local codes for appropriate
sound levels. For a general idea of how sound levels produced by a cooling tower compare to sound
from other common sound sources, see the graph below.
2. Estimate the sound levels that will be produced by the equipment, taking into account the effects of
equipment geometry, the installation, and the distance from the equipment to the neighbor.
3. Compare the noise criterion with the expected sound levels to determine if the sound levels from the
equipment will be acceptable.
4. In the event that the equipment sound levels are excessive for the particular site conditions, a method
should be determined to modify the neighbor’s perception of the sound. There are three ways to
change the effects that any undesirable sound has on the receiver of that sound:
• Modify the source of the sound
• Control the path of the sound
• Adjust the receiver’s expectation or satisfaction, keeping in mind that sound can be very
subjective and is highly dependent on perception
*In this article, the term “neighbor” is used to denote the person or group of persons to be protected against excessive
sound levels created by the evaporative cooling equipment. It is intended that this include not only the occupants of
other buildings, but also the occupants of the building served by the equipment.

M125
Source Path
Technical Resources
Receiver
Some ways that sound from BAC equipment can be adjusted for a more favorable impact on the receiver
include:
• Modify equipment location or position

• If possible, simply do not run the equipment at the critical time (at night for residential areas and during
the day for office parks)
• Install a pony motor, two-speed motor, or VFD so that the unit can run at lower speeds when the full
capacity is not required
• Use a low sound fan
• Oversize the equipment and run the fan at lower speed and power level
• Construct sound barriers (sound walls, etc.) or use existing barriers (trees, other buildings, etc.) when
planning the location of the equipment
• Install sound attenuation (available on the air intake and air discharge of the equipment)
The article also includes several appendices to lend assistance in understanding and performing some
aspects of a sound analysis. Contact your local BAC Representative with questions on sound analysis or
sound issues specific to your installation.
Terminology and Units of Measurement

The following terms and units of measure are used in this article, in accordance with accepted
U.S. Standards:
Decibel (dB) – the unit of measurement used in sound control (dimensionless, used to express
logarithmically the ratio of a sound level to a reference level).
dB(A) – the A-weighted sound pressure level.
Evaporative cooling equipment – used in this article to represent all BAC product lines in the sound
analysis (includes open cooling towers, closed circuit cooling towers, and evaporative condensers).
Frequency – the number of repetitions per unit time (the unit for frequency is the Hertz (1 cycle/s)).
Hertz – abbreviated Hz, is the unit of measure for frequency, defined as “cycles per second.”
Noise – unwanted sound.

M126
Noise Criteria – the maximum allowable sound pressure level(s) (Lp) at a specific location. Criteria may be
expressed as a single overall value or in individual octave bands. The NC values and curves are further
explained throughout this article.
Octave Band – a range of sound frequencies with an upper limit twice its lower limit. The bands are
identified by their center frequencies (“identifying frequencies”), which is the square root of the product of the
upper and lower cutoff frequencies of a pass band. These center frequencies and band widths are shown
on page M127. In some sound data tables, these eight octave bands are also called by their “Band
Numbers;” hence, the Band Numbers are also listed as such in this article, in addition to the BAC Sound
Rating Program and BAC Selection Software.
Sound – the sensation of hearing; rapid, small fluctuations to which our ears are more or less sensitive;
small perturbation of the ambient state of a medium (ambient air in most cases) that propagate at a speed
characteristic of the medium.
Sound Pressure Level (Lp) in dB – a ratio of a sound pressure to a reference pressure and is defined as:
Lp = 20LogP/0.002(dB), reference 0.0002 microbar.
The reference pressure used in this article is the long-used and accepted value of 0.0002 microbar. Another
way to describe the same value, which may be used in other publications, is the value of 20 x 10-6 Pascals
(N/m2).
Sound Power Level (Lw) in dB – the measure of the total acoustic power radiated by a given source and
is defined by:
Lw = 10Log (W/10-12 )dB, reference 10-12 .
The standard reference power used in the BAC literature is 10-12 watt. To eliminate any possible confusion,
the reference power should always be quoted, as in “a sound power level of 94 dB reference 10-12 watt.”
Unit – a single cell of evaporate cooling equipment.
Establishing the Noise Criterion

At the beginning of any sound analysis, it is necessary to establish the sound level at a particular site that
would be considered acceptable by those who might be affected. This acceptable sound level is called the
“noise criterion” for that situation, and it is important to realize that it may vary widely for different situations.
The procedure for developing the noise criterion involves consideration of the following:
1. The type of activity of those people in the vicinity of the evaporative cooling equipment who will be
affected
2. The amount of sound reduction accomplished by distance, acoustic barriers or walls that lie between
the equipment and the people who may hear it
3. The outdoor background noise that might help mask the sound from the equipment
From these factors, we can arrive at the final noise criterion for the particular installation.

M127
The noise that humans hear covers a frequency range of about 20 Hz to about 20,000 Hz. Of course, there
are exceptions to this, but this range has come to be accepted for most practical purposes. Furthermore, for
most engineering applications, most of this audio range is subdivided into eight frequency bands called
“octave bands” which cover the range of frequency somewhat as the octaves on a piano cover the range of
pitch. The eight octave bands used in this article have the following identifying center frequencies and
ranges:
Band Identifying Aprox. Frequency
Technical Resources
Number Frequency (Hz) Range (Hz)
1 63 44-88
2 125 88-176
3 250 176-353
4 500 353-707
5 1000 707-1414
6 2000 1414-2828
7 4000 2828-5656
8 8000 5656-11312
When sound levels are plotted on a graph, they are most often divided into these eight octave bands. In this
way it is possible to observe the variation of a sound level with change in frequency. This variation is
important in any situation since humans display a different sensitivity and a different response to low
frequency sounds as compared with high frequency sounds. In addition, engineering solutions for low
frequency sound issues differ markedly from those for high frequency sound issues.
Indoor Neighbor Activity

From earlier studies of real-life situations where people have judged sounds all the way from “comfortable” to
“acceptable” to “disturbing” and even to “unacceptable” for various indoor working or living activities, a series
of “Noise Criterion Curves” (“NC” curves) has been developed. Figure 1 is a graph of these “NC” curves.
Each curve represents an acceptable balance of low frequency to high frequency sound levels for particular
situations, and is keyed into the listening conditions associated with the sound. The lower NC curves
describe sound levels that are quiet enough for resting or sleeping or for excellent listening conditions, while
the upper NC curves describe rather noisy work areas when even conversation becomes difficult and
restricted. These curves may be used to set desired sound level goals for almost all typical indoor functional
areas where some acoustic need must be served.
Note that the curves of Figure 1 have as their x-axis the eight octave frequency bands; and as their y-axis,
sound pressure levels given in decibels (dB) relative to the standard reference pressure of 0.0002 microbar.
For convenience, Table 1 lists the sound pressure levels at each octave band center frequency, for each
Noise Criterion.

M128
Table 1 - Octave band sound pressure levels (dB re 0.0002 microbar) of indoor noise criterion
(“NC”) Curves of Figure 1
Noise Octave Band Center Frequency in Hz

Criterion 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
NC-15 47 36 29 22 17 14 12 11
NC-20 51 40 33 26 22 19 17 16
NC-25 54 44 37 31 27 24 22 21
NC-30 57 48 41 35 31 29 28 27
NC-35 60 52 45 40 36 34 33 32
NC-40 64 56 50 45 41 39 38 37
NC-45 67 60 54 49 46 44 43 42
NC-50 71 64 58 54 51 49 48 47
NC-55 74 67 62 58 56 54 53 52
NC-60 77 71 67 63 61 59 58 57
NC-65 80 75 71 68 66 64 63 62
Figure 1 - Noise criterion “NC” Curves. The octave band sound pressure levels associated with the
noise criterion conditions of Table 2

M129
Table 2 is used with the NC curves and lists some typical activities that require indoor background sound
levels in range of NC-15 to NC-55. Certain unusual acoustical requirements may not easily fall into one of
the Table 2 groups. It may be necessary to apply specific criteria for those special situations or to assign a
criterion based in similarity to one of the criterion given in the table.
It is emphasized that the NC curves are based on, and should be used only for, indoor activity.
Technical Resources
The first step in the development of the evaporative cooling equipment’s noise criterion is to select from Table
2 the particular activity that best describes what the indoor “neighbors” in the vicinity of the equipment will be
doing when the equipment is operating. Where two or more neighbor conditions may be applicable, the one
having the lowest NC value should be selected. The corresponding NC values of Figure 1 or Table 1 give the
eight octave band sound pressure levels, in decibels, for that selection. The goal is to keep the sound heard
by the neighbor, inside his home or building, at or below these sound pressure levels.
Table 2 - Suggested schedule of noise criteria for indoor neighbor activities
SUGGESTED RANGE OF
ACTIVITY
NOISE CRITERIA
Sleeping, Resting, Relaxing

Homes, apartments, hotels, hospitals, etc.
Suburban and rural NC-20 to NC-25
Urban NC-25 to NC30
Excellent Listening Conditions Required
Concert halls, recording studios, etc. NC-15 to NC-20
Very Good Listening Conditions Required

Auditoriums, theaters NC-20 to NC-25
Large meeting and conference rooms NC-25 to NC-30
Good Listening Conditions Required
Private offices, school classrooms, libraries, small confrence rooms, radio and NC-30 to NC-35
television listening in the home, etc.
Fair Listening Conditions Desired
Large offices, restaurants, retail shops, and stores, etc. NC-35 to NC-40
Moderately Fair Listening Conditions Acceptable
Business machine areas, lobbies, cafeterias, laboratory work areas, drafting NC-40 to NC-45
rooms, satisfactory telephone use, etc.
Acceptable Working Conditions with Minimum Speech Interference
Light to heavy machinery spaces, industrial areas, commercial areas such as NC-45 to NC-55
garages, kitchens, laundries, etc.
* The ASHRAE Guide usually lists a 10 dB range of NC values for each situation leaving it to the option of
the user to select the specific NC value for his own need. In the interest of more assuredly achieving
satisfactory neighbor conditions, Table 2 listings are the more conservative lower 5 dB range of the ASHRAE
value.

M130
Sound Reduction Provided by Building Construction

Neighbors who are either indoors in their own building or outdoors on their property may hear sound from
outdoor equipment. If they are outdoors, they may judge the sound against the more-or-less steady
background sounds in the area. If they are indoors, they may tend to judge the sound by whether it is
audible or identifiable or intrusive into the surroundings.
When outdoor sound passes into a building, it suffers some reduction, even if the building has open
windows. The actual amount of sound reduction depends on building construction, orientation, wall area,
window area, open window area, interior acoustic absorption, and possibly some other factors. The
approximate sound reduction values provided by several typical building constructions are given in Table 3.
For identification, the listed wall constructions are labeled with letters A through G and are described in the
notes under Table 3. Note that A represents no wall, hence no sound reduction, and the use of A indicates
that the selected NC curve would actually apply in this special case to an outdoor activity, such as for a
screened-in porch, an outdoor restaurant, or an outdoor terrace.
By selecting the wall construction in Table 3 which most nearly represents that of the building containing the
neighbor activity, and adding the amounts of sound reduction from Table 3 to the indoor NC curves,
band-by-band, the outdoor sound pressure levels that would yield the desired indoor NC values when the
equipment sound passes through the wall and comes inside, are obtained. This second step, then, provides
a “tentative outdoor noise criterion” based on hearing the sound indoors in the neighbor’s building.
Table 3 - Approximate sound reduction (in dB) provided by typical exterior wall construction
Octave
Frequency Wall Type (See Notes Below)
Band
(Hz) A B C D E F G
63 0 10 13 19 14 24 32
125 0 10 14 20 20 25 34
250 0 10 15 22 26 27 36
500 0 10 16 24 28 30 38
1000 0 10 17 26 29 33 42
2000 0 10 18 28 30 38 48
4000 0 10 19 30 31 43 53
8000 0 10 20 30 33 48 58
A: No wall; outside conditions

B: Any typical wall construction, with open windows covering about 5% of exterior wall area
C: Any typical wall construction, with small open-air vents of about 1% of exterior wall area, all windows closed
D: Any typical wall construction, with closed but operable windows covering about 10%-20% of exterior wall area
E: Sealed glass wall construction, 1/4 inch thickness over approximately 50% of exterior wall area
F: Approximately 20 lb/sq foot solid wall construction with no windows and no cracks or openings
G: Approximately 50 lb/sq foot solid wall construction with no windows and no cracks or openings

M131
Outdoor Background Sound

In a relative noisy outdoor area, it is possible that the outdoor background sound is even higher than the
“tentative outdoor noise criterion.” In this case, the steady background sound in the area may mask the
sound from the evaporative cooling equipment and take over as the controlling outdoor noise criterion.
Determining whether or not this situation does exist is the third step in developing the noise criterion.
The best way to judge this is to take a few sound pressure level measurements to get the average minimum
background level during the quietest intervals in which the equipment is expected to operate, or during the
Technical Resources
intervals when noise complaints are most likely to be caused; for example, at night in residential areas where
cooling equipment is operating at night, or during the day in office areas exposed to daytime cooling
equipment sound.
In the event that background sound measurements cannot be made, Tables 4 and 5, and Figure 2 may be
used to estimate the approximate outdoor background noise. In Table 4, the condition should be determined
that most nearly describes the community area or the traffic activity in the vicinity of the evaporative cooling
equipment during the quietest time that the equipment will operate. For the condition selected, there is a
curve in Figure 2 that gives an estimate of the average minimum outdoor background sound pressure levels.
The sound pressure levels of the Figure 2 curves are also listed in Table 5.
It is cautioned that these estimates should be used only as approximations of background sounds, and that
local conditions can give rise to a wide range of actual sound levels.
Table 4 - Estimate of outdoor background sounds based on general type of community area and
nearby automotive traffic activity
(Determine the appropriate conditions that seem to best describe the area in question during the time interval that is most critical, i.e.,
day or night. Then refer to corresponding Curve No. in Figure 2 or Table 5 for average minimum background sound levels to be used in
sound analysis. Use lowest Curve No. where several conditions are found to be reasonably appropriate.)
CONDITION CURVE No. in FIGURE 2 or TABLE 5

1. Nighttime, rural; no nearby traffic of concern 1
2. Daytime, rural; no nearby traffic of concern 2
3. Nighttime, suburban; no nearby traffic of concern 2
4. Daytime, suburban; no nearby traffic of concern 3
5. Nighttime, urban; no nearby traffic of concern 3
6. Daytime, urban; no nearby traffic of concern 4
7. Nighttime, business or commercial area 4
8. Daytime, business or commercial area 5
9. Nighttime, industrial or manufacturing area 5
10. Daytime, industrial or manufacturing area 6
11. Within 300 ft of intermittent light traffic 4
12. Within 300 ft of continuous light traffic 5
13. Within 300 ft of continuous medium-density traffic 6
14. Within 300 ft of continuous heavy-density traffic 7
15. 300 to 1000 ft from intermittent light traffic 3
16. 300 to 1000 ft from continuous light traffic 4
17. 300 to 1000 ft from continuous medium-density traffic 5
18. 300 to 1000 ft from continuous heavy-density traffic 6
22. 1000 to 2000 ft from continuous heavy-density traffic 5

M132
Figure 2 -Approximate average minimum outdoor background sound pressure levels associated with the
conditions of Table 4
Table 5 - Octave band sound pressure levels (in dB) of outdoor background noise curves of Figure 2
CURVE No. In OCTAVE BAND CENTER FREQUENCY In Hz

FIGURE 2 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
1 40 37 32 27 22 18 14 12
2 45 42 37 32 27 23 19 17
3 50 47 42 37 32 28 24 22
4 55 52 47 42 37 33 29 27
5 60 57 52 47 42 38 34 32
6 65 62 57 52 47 43 39 37
7 70 67 62 57 52 48 44 42
Final Noise Criterion

The measured or estimated average minimum background sound levels should now be compared,
band-by-band, with the “tentative outdoor noise criterion” determined previously. The larger of these values,
in each frequency band, now becomes the octave band sound pressure levels that comprise the “final
outdoor noise criterion” for the equipment installation.
Any new intruding sound is generally judged in comparison with the background sound that was already
there. If the new sound stands out loudly above the existing sound, the neighbors will notice it, be disturbed
by it, and object to it. On the other hand, if the new sound can hardly be heard in the presence of the old
sound, it will pass relatively unnoticed. Therefore, if the sound coming from the equipment is below or just
equal to the final noise criterion, it will not be noticed and our objectives will have been satisfied.
If there are two or more different criterion for a particular installation, the analysis should be carried out for
each situation and the lowest final criterion should be used.

M133
Municipal Codes and Ordinances

Where local sound codes or ordinances exist, it is necessary to check the expected sound levels of the unit
to be installed, including any sound control treatments, to determine if they comply with the code
requirements. Depending on the form and language of the code, it may be necessary to introduce the code
sound levels into the noise criterion analysis.
Example
Technical Resources
To summarize this procedure, consider a cooling tower installation located near the edge of a college
campus, approximately 300 feet (91.4 m) from a classroom building. The college is located within a large
city, and two main streets pass by one corner of the campus about 1500 feet (457.2 m) from the classroom
building. The cooling tower will be used both day and night during warm weather. The classroom must rely
on open windows for air circulation. Determine the noise criterion for the cooling tower.
The steps for this example are given in the sample Sound Evaluation Work Sheet, included as
Appendix D in this article.
Step 1 Determine the neighbor activity condition from Table 2. For “good listening conditions” inside a typical
classroom, select NC-30 as the noise criterion.
Step 2 In the indicated spaces under Item 2 of the Sound Evaluation Work Sheet, enter the sound pressure
levels for the octave frequency bands of the NC-30 curve as taken from Figure 1 or Table 1.
Step 3 Determine the wall condition of Table 3 that best describes the exterior wall of the classroom. Wall B
can be selected for normally open windows during the summer time. Insert the Wall B values in the Item 3
spaces.
Step 4 Add the values of Steps 2 and 3 together and insert the sums in the Item 4 spaces. This is the
“tentative outdoor noise criterion.”
Step 5 In the Item 5 spaces, enter either the measured average minimum background sound pressure levels
or the estimated background levels obtained from the use of Figure 2 and Tables 4 and 5. In this example,
we estimate that the traffic activity is best represented by “1000-2000 feet (304.8-609.6 m) from continuous
heavy-density traffic.” This leads to Curve 5 of Figure 2 and Table 5, whose values are then inserted in the
Item 5 spaces.
Step 6 In the Item 6 spaces insert the higher value, in each frequency band, of either the Item 4 or Item 5
values. This is the “final noise criterion.”

M134
In this example, note that the Item 4 values are equal to or higher than the Item 5 values in all bands. Thus,
the final noise criterion is based essentially on the classroom noise criterion and the wall condition.
However, the outdoor background noise estimate equals the “tentative outdoor noise criterion” in the 250
and 500 Hz bands. If they had been higher, in this example, those higher values would have been used in
setting the final noise criterion in those bands.
We will attempt to keep all octave band sound pressure levels of the selected cooling tower equal to, or
below, the values of Step 6. Should a sound code exist, this would be an appropriate point in the analysis to
check agreement between the code and the Step 6 final outdoor noise criterion. If the criterion developed
here is lower than the sound code levels at the specified distance, the sound analysis will yield results that
will comply with the code.
The remaining steps of this sound evaluation example are explained in later sections of this article as we
progress with the entire sound evaluation procedure.
Sound Levels for Evaporative Cooling

Equipment
Now that we have established an acceptable noise criterion, the next step is to study the source of the
sound and develop equipment sound levels at the neighbor location, in the same sound pressure level terms
used to express the noise criterion. It will be the aim of this section to discuss the actual sound pressure
levels of BAC evaporative cooling equipment, and to show how these levels can be corrected for various
distances and certain geometric arrangements.
The orientation of the equipment and distance from the equipment to the most “critical neighbor” will be our
primary concern. Where possible, the distance from the equipment to the neighbor should be kept as large
as possible, and the equipment should be oriented so that its lowest sound levels are radiated toward the
neighbor.
Evaporative cooling equipment sound ratings can be stated in terms of both sound pressure levels and
sound power levels, and both may be necessary to permit thorough sound analysis in a given situation.
However, in any sound evaluation, octave band sound pressure levels for the proposed equipment are
essential, and it is important to have a fairly accurate indication of the directivity characteristics of the
equipment’s sound.
For general use, sound pressure levels measured in the four different horizontal directions (one from each
side) of the unit, plus the vertical direction above, will yield the desired directivity data. The primary
requirements for obtaining the outdoor equipment’s sound levels are:

M135
1. Accurate calibrated sound measurement equipment should be used.

2. Octave band sound pressure levels are mandatory.
3. The sound level data should indicate the true directivity effects of the unit’s sound (there should be no
nearby buildings, obstructions, or excessive background noise obstructions to distort the true radiation
pattern of the unit test).
4. The measurement distance should be specified.
Technical Resources
Some equipment is rated in terms of the total sound power radiated, expressed as sound power level. Sound
power level is a valid index for comparing the sum of sounds radiated by evaporative cooling equipment, but
has the serious disadvantage of not revealing the directivity effects of the radiated sounds. Where only
sound power level data are given, the resulting conversion to sound pressure level at a particular location will
give less accurate results than if directional sound pressure level data are used. Sound generated by
evaporative cooling equipment is directional, and sound pressure level ratings are necessary in order to
determine the actual sound in any direction around the installation.
Single Number Rating System

Many attempts have been made to express the frequency content and pressure level (intensity) of sounds
using a single number system. The most common method used is the A-B-C weighting network of sound
level meters.
Sound meters with A-B-C weighting networks attempt to simulate the ear’s response to sound at different
pressure intensities. At a relatively low sound pressure level, the human ear is considerably more sensitive
to high frequency than to low frequency sounds. This difference, however, becomes less noticeable at higher
sound levels where the ear approaches more nearly equal sensitivity for low frequency and high frequency
sounds.
The A-scale weighting network is designed to simulate the ear’s response for low pressure sounds (below
about 55 dB). The B-scale weighting is designated to simulate the ear’s response for medium pressure
sounds (about 55 dB to 85 dB). The C-scale weighting tends to provide nearly equal response in all
frequencies and is used to approximate the ear’s response at higher sound pressure levels (above about
85 dB).
A-B-C scale ratings have been used in some sound ordinances and equipment sound ratings because of
their simplicity of statement. They may have value in some sound comparison situations, but such data are
of little value in making an engineering evaluation of a sound issue caused by evaporative cooling equipment,
because no indication of the frequency content of the sound is apparent. For example, two different types of
cooling towers could have the same A scale rating, but one could have most of its energy in the low
frequency bands while the other could have its energy concentrated in the high frequency bands. A single
number rating will give no indication of this and its use could lead to less than optimal and sometimes costly
decisions.

M136
Comparison of Evaporative Cooling Equipment employing a Centrifugal

Fan versus an Axial Fan
Based on extensive studies of field data from several cooling tower installations, it has been found that
overall sound pressure levels of centrifugal fan cooling towers are about 5 to 7 dB lower than those of axial
fan cooling towers for the same cooling capacity even though the axial towers use about half the
horsepower. As a comparison, this means that an axial fan cooling tower would have to be twice as far
away from the neighbors as a centrifugal fan tower in order to be just as quiet (6 dB reduction for each
doubling of distance, see Table 6). The frequency distribution and the radiation patterns also differ for these
two types of units. For any specific comparison of cooling towers, the manufacturer’s actual measured data
should be used.
BAC Sound Ratings

BAC has measured the sound levels radiated by its products at 5-foot (1.5 m) and 50-foot (15.2 m)
distances for the five principle directions, (four horizontal and one vertical). The sample sound rating data
sheet shown on page M137 indicates the five principle directions and the type of sound data available for a
BAC cooling tower. As the data sheet suggests, the data given in the five blocks pertain to the sound
pressure levels measured at 5-foot and 50-foot distances from the five principle directions of the cooling
tower. Where it might be desired to estimate the sound pressure levels at some intermediate direction, such
as halfway between the right end and the air inlet, levels can be averaged or interpolated from the data
actually presented.
In addition to the five sets of sound pressure levels at each of the two distances, the data sheets contain the
calculated sound power level values for the reference power level 10-12 watt. Current sound data for all BAC
equipment is available from BAC Representatives and from the BAC Selection Program, available at
www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
Since sound power levels are being mentioned here, it is appropriate at this point to note that Appendices A,
B, and C are given at the end of this article to supply basic information related to sound power levels and to
other calculations that may be required from time-to-time in a sound evaluation. Appendix A describes a
simplified method for calculating the sound power level of a unit where the five sets of sound pressure level
readings are known. Appendix B gives a procedure for calculating the average sound pressure level at a
given distance if the sound power level is known. Appendix C gives a simple procedure for adding decibel
values. This is required, for example, in converting sound pressure levels into sound power levels, or in
calculating an overall sound pressure level from the eight individual octave band levels, or in adding two or
more sound sources.

M137

Series 3000
Model : 3299A Top Lp
Technical Resources
No. of Fans: (1) 7.5 ft. Diameter Fan Per Cell Sound Pressure (dB)
Fan Type: Standard Octave Distance
Band 5 ft 50 ft
Motor HP: 20 HP per fan
1 60 51
Octave band and A-weighted sound pressure levels (Lp) are expressed in decibels (dB) 2 78 57
reference 0.0002 microbar. Sound power levels (Lw) are expressed in decibels (dB) 3 85 63
reference one picowatt. Octave band 1 has a center frequency of 63 Hertz. 4 79 65
5 81 68
6 82 68
7 79 65
8 75 66
A-wgtd 87 74
Air Inlet Lp End Lp

Sound Pressure (dB) Sound Pressure (dB)
Octave Distance Octave Distance
Band 5 ft 50 ft Band 5 ft 50 ft
1 61 46 1 68 56
2 70 53 2 68 60
3 73 61 3 73 63
4 76 61 4 73 59
5 79 64 5 75 65
6 78 64 6 72 61
7 71 57 7 65 54
8 66 54 8 59 53
A-wgtd 83 69 A-wgtd 78 68
End Lp Air Inlet Lp

Sound Pressure (dB) Sound Pressure (dB)
Octave Distance Octave Distance
Band 5 ft 50 ft Band 5 ft 50 ft
1 68 56 1 61 46
2 68 60 2 70 53
3 73 63 3 73 61
4 73 59 4 76 61
5 75 65 5 79 64
6 72 61 6 78 64
7 65 54 7 71 57
8 59 53 8 66 54
A-wgtd 78 68 A-wgtd 83 69
Sound Power (dB)

Octave Center Frequency
Band (Hertz) Lw
1 63 85
2 125 90
3 250 94
4 500 94
5 1000 97
6 2000 96
7 4000 92
8 8000 92

M138
Effect of Distance Beyond 50 feet (15.2 m)

In any actual situation, it is usually necessary to determine the sound pressure levels of the equipment at
some distance other than the 5-foot (1.5 m) and 50-foot (15.2 m) distances given in the BAC rating sheets.
In this section, distance corrections are given for estimating sound pressure levels at distances beyond 50
feet.
For distances that are large compared to the dimensions of the unit, the “inverse square law” holds for
sound reduction with distance: i.e., for each doubling of distance from the unit, the sound pressure level
decreases 6 dB. Thus, for distances beyond 50 feet the inverse square law applies and the distance
correction is quite straightforward. Table 6 presents the reduction of sound pressure level for distances from
50 feet out to 2500 feet (762 m). The values given in Table 6 are to be subtracted from the sound pressure
levels at the given distance of 50 feet in order to arrive at the sound pressure levels at the distance of
interest.
For relatively short distances (less than 100 feet (30.5 m)), the same correction value applies to all eight
frequency bands. For the larger distances (greater than 100 feet (30.5 m), high frequency sound energy is
absorbed in the air and the correction terms have larger values in the high frequency bands. For distances
greater than about 500 feet (152.4 m), wind and temperature of the air may further influence sound propaga-
tion; but because these are variables, they are not considered in this article and the correction figures of
Table 6 represent more or less “average” sound propagation conditions.
If the critical distance falls between the specific distances given in the left-hand column of Table 6,
interpolate the sound reduction value to the nearest 1 dB. Do not attempt to use fractions of decibels.
Table 6 - Reduction of sound pressure level (in dB) for distances beyond 50 feet
Octave Band Center Frequency in Hz
Distance
(ft) 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
50 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
63 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
80 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
100 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7
125 8 8 8 8 8 8 9 10
160 10 10 10 10 10 10 11 12
200 12 12 12 12 12 13 14 15
250 14 14 14 14 14 15 16 18
320 16 16 16 16 16 17 18 21
400 18 18 18 18 19 19 21 24
500 20 20 20 20 21 22 24 27
630 22 22 22 22 23 24 27 31
800 24 24 24 25 25 26 30 35
1000 26 26 26 27 27 29 34 40
1250 28 28 28 29 30 32 38 46
1600 30 30 30 31 32 35 43 53
2000 32 32 32 33 35 38 47 61
2500 34 34 34 36 38 42 53 70

M139
Effect of Distance Between 5 feet (1.5 m) and 50 feet (15.2 m)

In this section, distance corrections are given for estimating sound pressure levels in the close-in range of 5
feet (1.5 m) to 50 feet (15.2 m). When the distance from a sound source is small or comparable to the
dimensions of the source, the “inverse square law” does not necessarily hold true for variations of sound level
with distance. So, for the relatively short distances of 5 feet (1.5 m) to 50 feet (15 m), it might be necessary
to accept some sound pressure level variations, which do not follow the straightforward trends that hold for
distances beyond 50 feet (15 m). Table 7 permits us to estimate the sound pressure levels at these close-in
Technical Resources
distances, provided the 5-foot (1.5 m) and 50-foot (15 m) sound pressure levels are known.
To illustrate the use of Table 7, suppose the sound pressure level of a unit in a particular frequency band is
68 dB at 5 feet (1.5 m) and 54 dB at 50 feet (15 m) distance. The difference between these two values is 14
dB. In Table 7, we find the column of values under the heading “If the difference between the 5-foot (1.5 m)
and 50-foot (15 m) levels is 13 – 15 dB.” The numbers in this column are the values (in decibels) to be
added to the 50-foot sound pressure level of 54 dB to obtain the sound pressure level at some desired short-
er distance. If, for instance, we wish to know the “sound pressure level” of this unit at 15 feet (4.6 m), we find
that we must add 8 dB to the 50-foot level (15 m) of 54 dB to get 62 dB as the sound pressure level at the
desired distance of 15 feet (4.6 m).
Now, for these close distances, the difference values between the 5-foot (1.5 m) and 50-foot (15 m) sound
pressure levels may not be constant for all octave bands so it is necessary to follow this procedure for each
octave band. For example, in one octave band the difference may be 12 dB but in another band it may be 15
or 16 dB.
Close-in interpolation of sound pressure levels is inherently somewhat unreliable; so do not be surprised if
some oddities or discrepancies in the data begin to appear at very close distances. The method used here at
least gives some fairly usable data to work with.
Table 7 - Interpolation terms for obtaining sound pressure levels (in dB) between 5 feet and 50 feet
If the difference between the 5 ft and 50 ft levels is:
Distance at
which SPL is 4-6 dB 7-9 dB 10-12 dB 13-15 dB 16-18 dB 19-21 dB* 22-24 dB
desired(ft)
Add the following value to the 50-ft. sound level to obtain sound level at desired distance:
50 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
45 0 0 1 1 1 1 1
40 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
35 1 1 2 3 3 3 3
30 2 2 3 4 4 4 5
25 2 3 4 5 5 6 7
20 2 4 5 6 7 8 9
15 3 5 6 8 9 10 12
10 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
5 5 8 11 14 17 20 23
* This column of values is based on the "Inverse Square Law" variation with distance from 50 feet all the way in to 5 feet.
All other columns represent variations with distances that do not follow the "Inverse Square Law."

M140
Reflecting Walls and Enclosures

Discussion so far has been concerned with what might be considered “simple installations” from an acoustic
point of view, where only distance to the neighbor and relative orientation of the unit have been required
points of consideration.
Frequently, the geometry of an installation involves some nearby reflecting walls or buildings, which adds to
the acoustic complexity of the site. Let us consider this for three typical situations:
• Cases in which reflecting walls modify the radiation pattern of the sound from the unit to the neighbor
• Cases in which close-in walls confine the unit and cause a build-up of close-in sound levels
• Cases in which the unit is located in a well and all the sound radiates from the top of the wall
1. Effect of Reflecting Walls

Several factors that influence the amount of reflected sound are the following:
1) The sound radiation pattern (directivity) of the equipment
2) The radiating area of the equipment
3) The orientation of the equipment
4) The distance of the unit to the neighbors
5) The distance of the equipment to the reflecting wall
6) The area of the reflecting wall
7) Various angles of incidence and reflection between the equipment, the wall, and the neighbors
Because so many variables are involved, we will not attempt to develop a rigorous procedure for estimating
the influence of a reflecting wall. Rather, we caution that if a large reflecting surface is located near the
equipment, it should be considered as a potential reflector of sound. If the equipment is oriented such that
its loudest side is already facing toward the neighbor, the influence of the reflecting wall can be ignored!
However, if this is not the case, these conditions must be met for the reflected sound to be of concern:
1) The area of the reflecting wall is at least three times the area of the side of the equipment that faces
that wall
2) The distance from the unit to the reflecting wall is less than half the distance from the equipment to
the neighbor
3) If a simple optical ray diagram is drawn from the center of each unit to all parts of the reflecting wall
and the reflecting rays are then drawn away from the wall, the neighbor is located within the angular
range of the reflected rays on page M141
If each of these three conditions is met, then the sound pressure levels at the neighbor may be higher than
if the wall were not there.

M141
Neighbor area influenced by the reflecting wall
Technical Resources
In Figures 3 and 4, a few representative reflecting walls are shown for various orientations, and approximate
sound pressure level adjustments are suggested for A, B, C, and D directions away from the equipment.
These adjustments should be made using the 50-foot (15.2 m) levels. Figure 3 applies to units having one
air intake, while Figure 4 applies to units having two air intakes.
As an example, for Case 1, if the neighbor is located off the A side of the unit, apply the “A” adjustment to the
A side 50-foot (15 m) sound pressure level rating of the unit and then correct as necessary to the neighbor’s
distance. If the situation is that of Case 9 and the neighbor is located in the direction D, then the “D”
adjustment would be utilized to arrive at a 50-foot sound pressure level for the unit.
Figure 3: For Single Air Inlet Units
A
A
B D
CASE 1 CASE 2
B D
CC
CC
A. Use average of A and C levels A. Not applicable
B. Use average of B and C levels B. Use greater of B level or average of B and A levels
C. Not applicable C. No change to C levels
D. Use average of D and C levels D. Use greater of D level or average of D and A levels

M142
A A
B D CASE 4 B D
CASE 3
C
C
A. Use greater of A level or average of A A. Use average of A and C levels

and B levels B. Not applicable
B. Not applicable C. Not applicable
C. No change to C levels D. Use average of D and C levels
D. Add 2 dB to D levels
A
A
B D CASE 6
CASE 5 B D
C
C
A. Not applicable For sound levels out the open end of a 3-sided
B. Not applicable enclosure, add 3 dB to the sound pressure levels of
the air intake side of the unit.
C. No change to C levels
D. Use average of A, C, D levels

M143
Figure 4: For dual air inlet units
A
A
CASE 7 CASE 8
B DD B D
Technical Resources
C
C
A. Add 2 dB to A levels A. No change to A levels

B. Use average of B and C levels B. Not applicable
C. Not applicable C. No change to C levels
D. Use average of C and D levels D. Add 3 dB to D levels
A
A
CASE 10
CASE 9 B D B D
C C
A. Not applicable
For sound levels out the open end of a
B. Not applicable
3-sided enclosure, add 3 dB to the sound
C. Add 2 dB to C levels
pressure levels of the air intake side(s)
D. Add 3 dB to D levels of the unit.
These figures and their associated adjustment values are to be used to correct base 50 ft sound pressure
level ratings in the neighbor direction for the effect of the reflecting surface conditions shown. Instructions on
when and how to do so are presented on page M140.

M144
2. Build-Up of Close-In Sound Levels

Evaporative cooling equipment is sometimes located very close to a building wall, inside a “court” formed by
two or three surrounding walls, or even in a specially provided room or space in the mechanical equipment
area inside a building. In these installations, the principal concern may be the sound in the immediate
vicinity (within 5 (1.5m) -10 feet (3 m) of the unit(s)), rather than the sound levels radiated and reflected
away to some neighbor location.
For these situations, we may use Table 7 to determine approximately the sound pressure levels for the
close-in distances of interest, and then add an increment to account for the build-up of sound levels. Here
also, the geometry of the layout controls the problem and it is not possible to give a general solution that will
cover the multitude of possible layouts. As an approximate acknowledgement of this situation, we suggest
that the close-in sound pressure levels be increased by 5 dB, recognizing that the range of increase could
be as little as 2 or 3 dB (in a fairly open courtyard) and as much as 10 to 15 dB (in a fairly confined
mechanical room enclosure). This adjustment should be applied to all eight-octave band readings.
3. Sound Radiation from a Four-Sided Enclosure or “Well”

Evaporative cooling equipment is sometimes located inside a four-sided enclosure or “well,” where all the
sound radiates more-or-less vertically out the top of the well and then “spills over” the sidewalls of the well.
A simple generalized solution to this problem is not possible, but a reasonable approximation can be made.
While the sidewalls serve as barrier walls against normal sound radiation in horizontal directions, the
four-sided enclosure tends to “average-out” any free-field directional characteristics of the unit and causes
an average sound pressure level to be radiated from the top of the well in all directions in which sound is
free to radiate per the geometry of the situation. Appendix B provides a procedure for calculating sound
pressure levels for a given sound power level, at various distances and with several radiation patterns.
In the typical case illustrated, where the sound from the well radiates over a hemisphere, the sound
pressure levels of the unit at a 50-foot (15 m) distance would be determined by subtracting 32 dB from the
sound power levels of the unit.
It should be recognized that this method of sound evaluation is an approximation. Actual sound levels may
be somewhat lower in the higher frequency bands, and could be slightly lower in the lower frequency range
depending upon the neighbor location relative to the equipment. If the sidewall of the well clearly serves as
a barrier wall for the radiated sound, barrier wall attenuation values can be applied to the problem in the
same manner as the sound evaluation procedure of this article subsequently permits for the non-well type
installation.

M145
Example Continued
Let us now summarize Step 2 in the sound evaluation process, looking at the source of sound and correcting
it for distance and path. This will yield equipment sound pressure levels for the same point, which the final
noise criterion was calculated in the earlier example.
We are now interested in Items 7-11 in the sample Sound Evaluation Work Sheet (see Appendix D) which
pertain to the cooling tower sound pressure levels as extrapolated to the 300-foot (91.4m) distance.
Technical Resources
We continue the step-by-step procedure on the Sound Evaluation Work Sheet where we left off earlier.
Step 7 Decide on the preferred orientation of the cooling tower at the site. From the BAC Sound Rating
Data Sheet (page M137 shows a sample), determine the sound pressure levels at the 50-foot (15 m)
distance for the side of the cooling tower facing the college classroom. Assume one of the end sides here
(the “blank-off sides”), since they are the quietest. Insert these sound pressure level values in the Item 7
spaces of the Sound Evaluation Work Sheet.
Step 8 Insert the distance “300” feet (91.4 m) in the appropriate space under Item 8 and refer to Table 6 for
the distance correction values corresponding to 300 feet (91.4 m). Insert these values in eight spaces of
Item 8.
Step 9 The sound pressure levels at 300 feet (91.4 m) will be lower than at 50 feet (15 m), hence subtract
the Item 8 values from the Item 7 values and insert the remainder in the Item 9 spaces. These then are the
sound pressure levels that will exist just outside the college classroom, 300 feet (91.4 m) from the cooling
tower.
Step 10 Had there been a sound increase due to the presence of a reflecting wall that met one of the
conditions illustrated by Figures 3 or 4, corrections would be inserted now in the Item 10 spaces. Had this
been a close-in problem involving a build-up of sound levels due to some nearby enclosing walls around the
tower, “+5 dB” would have been inserted in the Item 10 spaces. Since neither of these conditions applied in
this example, we insert “0” in each of the Item 10 spaces.
Step 11 Item 11 is the sum of Items 9 and 10. This is the sound pressure level of the cooling tower at the
300-foot (91.4 m) distance.

M146
Comparison of Noise Criteria and Evaporative

Cooling Equipment Sound Levels
Example Continued
From the material given in the two preceding sections, it is now possible to determine if a particular cooling
tower will be satisfactory (from a sound point-of-view) in a given location for a given set of circumstances.
The analysis now consists of comparing the estimated cooling tower sound levels with the noise criterion
developed for the neighbor situation. The comparison may be made by plotting the sound levels and the
noise criterion on a graph, as show in Figure 5, or merely by comparing the two groups of values on a
band-by-band basis. We are now interested in Items 12-13.
Step 12 Merely as a means of simplifying the next step, copy in the Item 12 spaces the values taken from
Item 6, which was the “Final Noise Criterion.”
Step 13 By subtracting the Final Noise Criterion (Item 12) from the Resultant Cooling Tower Sound Pressure
Levels (Item 11), we determine if there is any excess of cooling tower sound above the criterion. Any
positive-valued remainder represents sound excess above the criterion. Any negative-valued remainder
means that the cooling tower level is below the criterion and no sound reduction is required in the frequency
bank; hence, “0” is inserted in that space.
If the cooling tower levels in all eight octave bands are below the criterion values, there should be no sound
problem. If two or three of the cooling tower levels exceed the criterion values by only 1 or 2 or 3 dB, there
will probably be no sound problem. If several octave band sound levels exceed the criterion by 5 to 10 dB,
or more, a sound problem should be anticipated – the higher the sound excess the more assured is the
problem if suitable measures are not taken.
Figure 5 - Comparison of Final Noise Criterion and Equipment Sound Levels
70
60
Sound Pressure Level dB RE 0.0002 microbar
50
40
30
20
10
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
Octave Band Center Frequency - Hz
Final noise criterion (see line 6 & 12 of wksheet) Noise from unit at neighbor location (line 11)

M147
Judgment Factor
At this point, some remarks should be made on the overall reliability of this approach, and an opportunity
should be provided for inserting a judgment factor. In as much as the original criterion selection was based
mostly on lower range NC values for the various environments considered, the derivation presented here
may be somewhat conservative. Because of this, decisions based on this approach will usually lead to
acceptance of the sound from the equipment. As explained throughout the procedure, several
approximations are made (such as for the sound reduction of various general types of walls, and the sound
Technical Resources
estimates of community or traffic background sounds, and others). These approximations may lead to some
variability from one installation to the next, although it is believed that a small amount of variability can be
accommodated by the procedure without changing the results unreasonably.
Experience shows that where the criterion is based on sleeping at night, the criterion should not be
exceeded, and therefore, the conclusions reached by this procedure should be followed. However, where the
criterion is based on somewhat less critical daytime activities, and the background sound frequently ranges
considerably above the average minimum conditions used here, then the risk is not too great if the criterion is
exceeded by about 5 dB. In such cases the criterion should not be exceeded by more than 5 dB for fear of
serious objections. If it is decided to permit the sound to exceed the criterion by as much as 10 dB or more,
sound reduction steps should be considered for future addition to the installation, even though they may not
be included in the initial installation.
In view of the above, if the equipment’s owner, architect or engineer chooses to follow a conservative
approach or even to allow for some excess sound on a particular project (that is, permit the equipment’s
sound to exceed the background sounds slightly and thus be identifiable and possibly disturbing to the
neighbors), this opportunity is afforded in Items 14 and 15 of the Sound Evaluation Work Sheet.
Step 14 Insert the cooling tower owner’s Judgment Factor. For a “conservative approach” insert 0 dB in the
Item 14 spaces of the Work Sheet. To purposely allow the cooling tower sound to exceed the acceptable
levels slightly, insert 5 dB in the Item 14 spaces.
Step 15 The Final Sound Reduction Requirement for the cooling tower is the difference, in each band,
obtained by subtracting Item 14 from Item 13. These are the attenuation values in each octave band
necessary to reduce the cooling tower sound to an acceptable level. A brief discussion of sound control for
evaporative cooling equipment is given in the next section.
Step 16 Sound reduction can be accomplished in several ways, and quantitative values for possible sound
reduction steps are discussed in the next section. Step 16 of the Sound Evaluation Work Sheet should
include the attenuation obtained from the use of two-speed fan motors, ENERGY-MISER® Fan System, VFD,
low sound fans, barrier walls, and from any special acoustic treatments to be provided. Other situations that
may apply are oversizing the equipment and utilizing strategic layout.

M148
Evaporative Cooling Equipment

Sound Control
The sound reduction required for evaporative cooling equipment is simply the excess of the equipment’s
sound pressure levels over the applicable noise criterion levels. This is shown numerically by the dB values
found in Item 15 of the Sound Evaluation Work Sheet when the particular calculation is carried out. The key
as to whether it will be a simple or complex sound reduction problem lies largely in the amount and
frequency distribution of the required sound reduction.
Job conditions may allow some quieting to be obtained by strategically positioning the equipment, controlling
the fan motor, installing a low sound fan option, or constructing barrier walls located between the equipment
and neighbor. Additional sound reduction needs may be met with packaged attenuators or other acoustic
treatments, which, in general, can achieve high frequency noise reduction rather easily but usually involve
larger weight and space requirements to accomplish low frequency quieting.
Strategic Positioning
The first and most economical strategy in reducing sound pressure levels from evaporative cooling
equipment involves considering the layout of the equipment. Strategic Positioning includes two aspects.
First, make sure to position the quietest side of the equipment towards the sound sensitive direction. This
option should always be a first consideration with single side air inlet products. Next, take advantage of any
existing sound barriers that may aid in muffling the sound from the equipment to the neighbor. For example,
if a building or shed exists on the job site, position the equipment so that the structure blocks the direct path
between the equipment and the neighbor, thus acting as a sound barrier. Trees and bushes are also good
examples of barriers that greatly reduce sound exposure at neighboring properties.
Fan Motor Control

Operating the equipment at various speeds by utilizing a VFD, ENERGY-MISER® Fan System,
BALTIGUARD PLUS™ Fan System or a two-speed motor is a practical option of sound control if reduced
equipment loads can be made to coincide with periods when low sound pressure levels are required. This is
a normal nighttime situation for many air conditioning installations.
An 1800-900 rpm fan motor operating at 900 rpm would provide about 60% of full-load capacity on a BAC
unit and would give approximately the following octave band dB noise reductions:
FREQUENCY BAND – Hz
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
4 6 8 10 8 8 6 4

M149
In as much as these are average dB reductions that can be anticipated for half-speed operation, these
figures can apply to both sound power and sound pressure levels. Also, these approximations are sufficiently
accurate to be used for both centrifugal and axial fan towers.
In addition to running the equipment at a lower speed during noise-critical hours, it is beneficial to investigate
whether or not the equipment could be turned off completely during these hours. This would completely
negate any sound created by the unit; however, the system and its loads must be researched to understand if
Technical Resources
this option is feasible.
In some cases what people find objectionable is not the steady sound of the equipment, it is the abrupt
stopping and starting of the fan system. Properly setting the control sequence to avoid excessive cycling of
fan motors is important in this regard, as well as to protect the motor from overheating. VFD’s solve this
issue by allowing for a soft start of the fans, followed by a gentle ramping up and down of the fan speed in
‘line with the load requirement. VFD’s allow the fan motor to run at the speed required to meet leaving water
temperature requirements rather than running at full speed all the time. Decreasing the motor speed, and
therefore the fan rpm, can decrease sound levels significantly.
Figure 6 - BAC axial fan cooling tower utilizing the ENERGY-MISER® Fan System

M150
Figure 8 - VFD with integrated bypass

Oversizing the Equipment

If space and budget allow, it may be beneficial to oversize the equipment and run the larger capacity
equipment at a lower fan speed rated for the specific job. As discussed in the previous section, reducing the
motor speed reduces the fan speed and because fan speed is directly proportional to sound, reduces sound.
Figure 9 - Axial fans

Low Sound Fans
Another option for reducing the sound that
the equipment produces is to select a low
sound fan. Low sound fans provide
greater solidity than regular fans and so
are able to move the same amount of air,
while operating at a slower speed.
Barrier Walls
Barrier walls can be used to provide sound
attenuation. In some cases barrier walls may exist due to the architectural treatment of the site, while at
other times they are constructed specifically to provide needed sound reduction.
Taking the first case, a wall used to shield a unit from view can also act to reduce the sound radiated by the
tower, particularly high frequency sound (broadly considered here as the upper four octave frequency
bands). However, such barrier walls must “cover” by line-of-sight the entire sound source as observed from
the neighbor’s position. Louvered, latticed or slotted openings will render negligible the attenuation abilities
of a barrier wall. A solid wall of height equal to a unit and located close to it will provide the following
approximate attenuation:

M151
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
4 5 5 5 5 6 7 8
When greater attenuation is required, a larger specially constructed barrier wall may be designed and
installed. Care must be taken, though, in locating the wall because of the many geometric and material
Technical Resources
considerations involved.
As an example, a barrier wall that (1) extends at least 3 to 5 feet (.9 to 1.5m) beyond the line-of-sight in both
the horizontal and vertical directions, (2) that is located within 5 to 8 feet (1.5 to 2.4m) of the cooling tower
and (3) that is made of a solid impervious material having a surface weight of at least 2 lbs/ft2 will have
approximately the following attenuation:
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
5 5 6 8 10 12 14 16
A still larger and heavier barrier wall will provide still greater attenuation. To be most effective, however, a
barrier wall must be located as close as possible to the sound source and there must be no reflecting
surfaces in the area that can reflect sound around the barrier.
Design details of barrier walls and other acoustic treatment such as custom–engineered plenum chambers
and acoustic mufflers are best left to acoustical engineers or consultants and acoustical treatment
manufacturers.
Figure 10 - Architectural walls being constructed around FXV Closed Circuit Cooling Towers

M152
Sound Attenuation
A significant feature of both axial and centrifugal fan equipment is that its noise, if it is a problem at all, can
be treated with relatively simple package attenuation. Figure 11 is a photograph of a BAC Series 3000
Cooling Tower (axial fan), with sound attenuation on both the intake and discharge of the unit. The fan
intake attenuator is an array of parallel baffles and the discharge treatment is a lined plenum chamber.
Lined plenum chambers, to be effective, (1) must be fairly large, (2) should contain a thick absorbent lining,
and (3) should be arranged such that the sound path through the plenum includes does not allow line-of-
sight. Depending on the degree to which the plenum chamber conforms to these three requirements, its
sound reduction may range in the order of 5 to 10 dB for low frequency noise up to 10 to 20 dB for high
frequency noise.
Some BAC attenuation packages provide a sound reduction in the horizontal direction of about 12 to 17 dB
in the high frequency bands. The attenuation is less in the low frequency bands. Such accessory-type
attenuation can provide an economical solution to most sound problems. Exact values of the attenuation of
these factory-available units can be obtained from local BAC Representatives.
Figure 11 - Intake and discharge sound attenuation on a BAC

Series 3000 Cooling Tower
Effects of Sound Reduction Options on

Equipment Performance
The cost of sound attenuation, including the effect on performance, must be evaluated versus simpler
methods such as oversizing the unit(s) to meet the sound criteria for a project. Note that with either low
sound fans or “add-on” attenuation, lower sound levels often come at the expense of lower airflow. The
system designer must ensure that the manufacturer’s ratings are adjusted to account for any decrease in
thermal performance from this reduction in airflow.
Another caution is for the use of sound barrier walls. It is necessary for barrier walls to be far enough away
from the tower so as to prevent recirculation of the moist discharge air. If this practice is not followed, the
warm air can be introduced to the air intake, increasing the wet bulb temperature of the unit, and in turn
decreasing the cooling capacity of the tower.

M153
Summary
This section provides a simple and direct evaluation method for determining whether or not a given
evaporative cooling equipment installation is producing, or will produce, excess sound. It also offers some
general information on methods that can be used to reduce the sound.
BAC can provide reliable sound level data on its open cooling towers, closed-circuit cooling towers, and
Technical Resources
evaporative condensers through their representatives. Consult your local BAC Representative for specific
project applications.
Acknowledgement:
BAC extends its sincere appreciation to Mark E. Schaffer, P.E. (President of Schaffer
Acoustics Inc. of Pacific Palisades, CA) for his contributions to this article.
Appendix A
The Calculation of Sound Power Level (Lw) From Measured Sound
Pressure Levels (Lp)
Sound power is a measure of the total acoustic power radiated by a sound source. “Sound power level” is
the sound power, expressed in decibels, relative to the reference power quantity 10-12 watt.
Sound power is not directly measured as such. Instead, it is a calculated quantity and is obtained from the
measurement of sound pressure levels at a suitable number of measurement positions. Even in indoor
testing with reverberant or semi-reverberant rooms and a standard reference sound source, sound power
level is calculated from sound pressure level measurements. In this discussion, no technical detail is given for
the derivation of sound power level; instead, a very simple procedure is provided for establishing the
approximate sound power level of evaporative cooling equipment for the case in which the sound pressure
level is measured at four horizontal positions (each position at a specific distance from each of the four sides)
plus one vertical position above the unit. The measurement positions may be at any distance between 2 and
4 times the unit’s largest dimension, which is usually its length.
The measured sound pressure levels must be obtained with accurate, calibrated equipment, and the sound
data must be in the conventional eight octave bands of frequency. The measurements should be made
under essentially free-field conditions: i.e., outside in an area free of any nearby reflecting surfaces. The unit
is assumed to be located on the ground or on a platform reasonably close to ground level.
The approximate sound power level in each of the eight octave bands is the sum, by decibel addition, of the
individual five sound pressure level readings in each octave band plus a correction term (K) which is a
function of the number of measurements positions, the measurement distance and the reference power. In
equation form, this can be expressed as
Lw= ∑Lp + K

M154
The decibel summation of a number of sound pressure levels is determined from the material given in
Appendix C and the correction terms are given below in Table A for the appropriate conditions. The use of
the five measurement positions and the decibel addition of the five readings automatically introduce the
directivity characteristics of the unit into the calculated sound power level. No further provision for directivity
is required in this simplified method.
To illustrate this procedure, suppose we wish to estimate the sound power level (Lw) in one octave band for
the case of the five-position measurements 50 feet (15.24 m) from a cooling tower. Assume the five sound
pressure levels measured in the particular frequency band are 56, 53, 59, 53 and 47 dB (re 0.0002
microbar).
By the decibel addition method shown in Appendix C we find that the decibel sum of these five sound
pressure levels is 62 dB. From Table A we then find that for the 50-foot measurement distance, the
correction term is 25 dB re 10-12 watt. For this example,
Lw = ∑Lp + K
= 62 + 25
= 87 dB
The same procedure could be followed for all octave bands to get the complete Lw of the cooling tower.
The procedure given here is for the specific five measurement positions noted and may not be applicable
generally to other situations. The procedure is not accurate to less than 1 dB, so fractional values of
decibels should not be used or relied upon.
Table A
Correction term K to be used in converting Sound Pressure Levels (Lp) into Sound Power Level (Lw) for
special five-position procedure given
Measurement Distance Correction Term K for

(to Acoustic Center) (ft) Lw re 10-12 Watt (dB)
25 19
30 20
35 21
40 23
45 24
50 25
60 26
70 27
80 29
90 30
100 31

M155
Appendix B
The Calculation of Average Sound Pressure Level (Lp) For A Given Sound
Power Level (Lw)
For comparative purposes it may occasionally be necessary to estimate the approximate average sound
pressure level radiated by a unit for which only the sound power level is given. There are also some
Technical Resources
applications that are best appraised by converting sound power back to average sound pressure levels. The
procedure outlined in this Appendix will provide this estimate.
It is important to realize that the resulting value is an average sound pressure level that theoretically would be
radiated the same in all directions from the unit. In practice, the unit probably would not radiate the same
levels in all directions; but, when only the sound power level is given it is not possible to know the directivity
characteristics of the unit.
The average sound pressure level at a desired distance is obtained by subtracting from the sound power
level in any given octave frequency band the appropriate correction term (C) from Table B. In equation form,
this relationship is expressed as
Lp Avg. = Lw – C
As an illustration, suppose we wish to know the average sound pressure at a 50-foot (15.24 m) distance for a
cooling tower that is stated to have a sound power level 87 dB re 10-12 watt. (Note that this is the
counterpart of the example given in Appendix A.) From Table B, for a 50-foot distance, we see that the
correction term is 32 dB.
Lp Avg. = Lw – C
= 87 – 32
= 55 dB
By comparing this value with the five levels fed into the illustration in Appendix A, we see that although this is
an average value, it actually does not equal any of the levels from the five measured directions. Note again
that the average value does not pretend to show the directivity characteristics of the sound source.
If two competitive cooling towers are being compared for a particular site condition, a comparison of the
sound power level or the average sound pressure level may be a general clue to the relative sound from the
two units, but a more careful comparison should take into account the actual sound levels to be radiated in
the particular critical direction(s).

M156
Table B
Correction terms C to be used in converting Sound Power Level into average Sound Pressure Level
for special five-position procedure given.
Measurement Distance Correction Term K for

(to Acoustic Center) (ft) Lw re 10-12 Watt (dB)
25 26
30 27
35 28
40 30
45 31
50 32
60 33
70 34
80 36
90 37
100 38
Note: The correction term C is based on the sound radiating uniformly over a hemisphere. This would apply
for a typical ground level installation or for a unit located on a large roof. If there are conditions such that
the sound will radiate over a large angle, say a 3/4 sphere, add 3 dB to the above C. Subtract 3 dB from
the above C for a 1/4 sphere radiation.
For distance beyond 100 feet (30.48 m) calculate the average Lp for 50 feet (15.24 m) using the method
here; then extrapolate to the desired distance using the Lp reduction values of Table 6 on page M138.

M157
Appendix C
Addition of Decibels
Since decibels are logarithmic values it is not proper to add them by normal algebraic addition. For example,
63 dB plus 63 dB does not equal 126 dB but only 66 dB.
Technical Resources
A very simple, but adequate schedule for adding decibels is as follows:
When two decibel Add the following amount

values differ by: to the higher value
0 or 1 dB 3 dB
2 or 3 dB 2 dB
4 to 8 dB 1 dB
9 dB or more 0 dB
When several decibel values are to be added, perform the above operation on any two numbers at a time,
the order does not matter. Continue the process until only a single value remains.
As an illustration let us add the five sound levels used in the example of Appendix B.
56
= 58
53
59 = 60 = 62 dB
53
47 = 60
Or, suppose we arrange the same numbers in a different order, as in:
47
= 54
53 = 57
53
56 = 62 dB
= 61
59
Sometimes, using different orders of adding may yield sums that might differ by 1 dB, but this is not too
significant a difference in acoustics. In general, the above simplified summation procedure will yield accurate
sums to the nearest 1 dB. This degree of accuracy is considered acceptable in the material given in this
article.

M158
Appendix D
BAC Sound Evaluation Worksheet
Job Name______________________________ Date_____________________________________

Address _______________________________ Engineer ________________________________
Architect ______________________________ BAC Unit_________________________________
Center Frequency-Hz
Steps Items 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
1. Determine appropriate "NC" Criterion for neighbor

activity from ASHRAE Handbook or Table 2 of this article. NC=
2. Insert sound pressure levels (Lp) for selected "NC"
Noise Criterion
Criterion. (Obtain values from Figure 1 or Table 1)

3. Tabulate sound reduction provided by wall
construction. (Obtain Values from Table 3)
4. Establish tentative outdoor Noise Criterion for the unit.
(Item 2 plus Item 3)
5. List average minimum outdoor background sound
levels. (measured, or estimated from Figure 2 and Tables
4, 5)
6. Set final outdoor background Noise Criterion. (high
value, by octave band, of Items 4 and 5)
7. Enter unit sound pressure level rating at 50 ft.
8. Insert distance correction to adjust unit ratings to
distance of ____ ft in direction toward critical neighbor.
(For distances greater than 50 ft use Table 6; for
distances less than 50 ft use Table 7)
Sound Levels
9. Establish outdoor unit Lp at neighbor location. (Item 7

minus Item 8 for distances greater than 50 ft. Item 7 plus
Item 8 for distances less than 50 ft.)
10. Apply reflection adjustment to meet condition existing
at unit site. Refer to Figures 3 and 4 for effect of reflecting
walls; or add 5 dB for close-in build up of noise; 0 dB if no
reflection effects.
11. Tabulate resultant unit Lp at critical neighbor location.
(Item 9 plus Item 10)
12. Copy Item 6 levels from above. This is the outdoor
Comparison, Criteria vs Levels
noise criterion for the critical neighbor.
13. Ascertain tentative sound reduction required for unit.

(Item 11 minus Item 12. Insert "0" for negative values).
14. Apply judgment factor. (For conservative approach,
use "0" in all bands. To permit unit noise to exceed
background levels slightly, insert "5")
15. Tabulate final sound reduction requirement for the
job. (Item 13 minus Item 14)
16. Indicate estimated or rated attenuation of all sound
reduction treatment if used. (Should at least equal Item
15)

M159
Fundamentals of Cooling
Systems Filtration
Introduction
Filtration Guide
BAC recommends that an effective filtration system be installed on all cooling systems. There are several
very good reasons for this.
Proper cooling tower filtration:

• Extends the life of your cooling system and offers a quick return on the investment
(payback period usually 12-18 months)
• Reduces the risk of Legionnaires Disease outbreaks
• Maintains optimum heat transfer efficiency in heat exchangers
• Aids in optimization of water treatment equipment
• Reduces expenses for chemical treatment programs, maintenance and cleaning costs, downtime
The following section on filtration is a brief review of different technologies and approaches to cooling tower
filtration, including the advantages and limitations of the most popular filtration systems that are used in both
open and closed loop cooling systems.
The Fundamental Goals of Fluid Filtration

When considering what type of filtration provides the best value for your cooling system it is important to
review the Fundamental Goals of Fluid Filtration, which include:
1. WHAT are the solids you want to filter out of the fluid?
This is specified in terms of:
• Size (measured in microns)
• Weight of the particles (measured in specific gravity)
• Shape
• Volume
2. WHERE, or at what point in the system do you want to filter these particles, and what effect will a given
filtration technique have on the rate of flow, pressure losses, and other characteristics of the fluid being
filtered? Tied in with these considerations is the basic question of which components of the cooling tower
system needs the protection that the chosen filtration provides?
It is critical that the fundamentals of filtration are addressed to insure that the expected results are achieved.
Let’s start with the solids.
Fundamental #1: The Solids

Particle contamination of evaporative cooling loops can be created by a variety of sources, including air-
borne entry, make-up water, corrosion by-products, and precipitated mineral development. Contamination of
closed loops is typically from construction or corrosion by products. For both open and closed loops the par-
ticle matter commonly fouls heat exchangers reducing heat transfer efficiency, causing excessive shut-
down/cleaning routines, and posing health and safety concerns. It is important to first identify and define the
particle contaminants before applying a filtration technique to effectively remove those contaminants. It is
also equally important to select a filtration technique with an understanding of its proper placement, sizing
and solution potential.

M160
Particle analysis must include an awareness of not only what type of particles are in the cooling water, but
also what particles are most responsible for the fouling and/or lost efficiency of the heat exchanger. An
understanding of particle type will greatly determine the proper type of filtration to apply. Understanding the
issue of particle size will determine the level of filtration necessary to achieve the desired protection of the
heat exchanger, AND address any health and safety issues that may be involved. In essence, it is not always
critical to remove the very finest sizes of all types of particle matter in order to assure proper protection, and
safe operation of the cooling water system and heat exchangers.
With the knowledge of what contaminants must be filtered to achieve reliable and safe cooling system
Filtration Guide
operation, a review of the popular filtration methods helps identify the proper devices for a given application.
Then, using an objective set of selection criteria, the most appropriate filtration system can be determined.
Performance and price are obvious issues, but there are several other key factors to consider when the goal
is long-term overall savings.
The techniques for filtering cooling water each promise a different level of success as it relates to protecting
heat exchangers. Understanding the basic installation scheme for each technique unveils that technique’s
ability to remove particle contaminants. Over the years, experience and performance have produced a
comparative view of various techniques that can help grade the potential solution capability of each
technique. An in-depth review of the techniques will identify advantages and limitations.
Settleable solids, such as sand, silt, grit, scale, rust and precipitated minerals are certainly problematic, since
they are large enough to clog nozzles and small orifices and heavy enough to settle in tower basins and
remote sumps. These solids are routinely present in sufficient concentrations to create problematic conditions
throughout a cooling tower system.
Suspended particle matter, such as leaves, grasses, cottonwood seeds, bird feathers, insects and organic
matter in excess concentrations can clog nozzles and small orifices shutting of flow in the system. This type
of particle is also of concern to tower fill. Since these contaminants typically do not settle, it is unlikely that
they will create problems in tower basins or remote sumps, but potentially cause problems downstream at the
heat exchangers.
Particle size is an area for debate within the whole process of particle analysis. One view is that
contaminants as small as 0.5 microns or less are not only the predominant numerical contaminants in cooling
tower water, but also most responsible for the majority of cooling tower problems. The other view is that ultra
fine particles (defined as particles smaller that 5 microns – about the size of blood cells) and particles not
visible to the naked eye (40 microns – the size of a grain of talcum powder or the end of a human hair) are
not the major source of fouling and increased health risks in cooling systems. In determining what filtration
system is best for your system, BAC recommends that a common sense approach be utilized and take into
consideration:
1. Particles that are capable of plugging orifices and restricting flow must be removed.
2. On the health and safety side of this issue, the United States Center for Disease Control
(direct communication with Dr. Barry Fields, CDC) recommends that there be less than 1/16th
inch of dirt settling in a cooling tower basin in order for the system’s water treatment/biocide to
work effectively and come in contact with the bacteria in the system.
3. The Water Quality Association – an authority on drinking water standards in the U.S.
recognizes that any contaminants below 5 microns in size are most commonly identified as
bacteria, a contaminant that is not removed by filtration, but by disinfection.

M161
Particle volume should also be considered. The chart below offers a comparative and hypothetical example,
taking a sample of one trillion particles, with given portions of that sample in each of several particle sizes.
As can be seen, if 15% of the total numerical count of particles is greater than 10 microns, those 15%
represent over 99% of the total volume. In an actual cooling water loop, there may be many times this
amount, but the relative ratio is still valid and important to consider in terms of which contaminants to be
most concerned about. This fact should be considered when determining the particles that are capable of
fouling a heat exchanger’s small orifice, clogging a nozzle or accumulating in a cooling tower’s fill, basin or
remote sump preventing the system biocide from reaching the bacteria.
Technical Resources
Table 1 – Particle Size vs. Volume
Size of Particle Quantity of Particle Total Volume
0.45 microns 212.5 billion particles 0.006 cubic inches
1 micron 212.5 billion particles 0.007 cubic inches
3 microns 212.5 billion particles 0.190 cubic inches
Sub-total: 850 billion particles 1.088 cubic inches
Sub-totals: 150 billion particles 674.0 cubic inches
The table above, representing a sample of one trillion particles in a range of sizes, shows that even a
relatively small number of particles 10-75 microns in size can represent a very large total volume of
particles.
Fundamental #2: Where will the filtration solution be installed and how it will affect other variables
At what location in a cooling tower installation should filtration be installed, and what effect will it have on the
operation (and maintenance) of the cooling tower? Although often overlooked, this is a very important aspect
of cooling tower filtration. The decision of exactly where to install the filtration solution is often dictated by
first identifying what equipment/components needing protection from the contaminants, e.g.: the heat
exchangers, the cooling tower basin or remote sump, the tower fill and/or the distribution headers/nozzles.
After making that determination, a second step should assess the costs associated with the problem:
increased energy and chemical costs, downtime, cleaning, repairs and/or replacements, outside services,
and overtime labor and maintenance. The anticipated costs will become important when the cost of the
problem is being compared to the cost of the solution.
In general, there are three approaches (designed by “A”, “B”, and “C” below) to answering the question
where to install the filtration solution, and each addresses the problem in a different way and has its own
distinct value and benefits.
APPROACH A: Full-stream filtration
With full-stream filtration, the filter is usually installed at the cooling system pump/s discharge, prior to the
heat exchangers/chillers. The filter is sized according to the full flow of the pump, filtering all the water that
passes on to the heat exchangers/chillers – which is the primary value of this approach. It is estimated to
increase the operating cycle of the heat exchanger by ten times before servicing requirements appear
(based on experiences with users who have kept good before and after records).

M162
Figure 1: Full Stream Filtration

Filtration Guide
This approach does not directly address the problem of basin/remote sump solids accumulation. Although
effective filtration can reduce overall solids concentration, the tower environment itself does attract and create
unwanted solids that can settle in the basin and pass on to the heat exchanger. Full flow filtration is most
commonly used for new applications where the effect of the filtration system on system head requirements
and space can be considered, and not commonly used in retrofit applications.
APPROACH B: Side stream (or slip stream) filtration
A typical side stream filtration diverts approximately 5-20% of the full-stream flow through a filter and back
into the full-stream flow prior to the heat exchangers/chillers. The logic of this technique is filtering the water
at a rate greater than the anticipated input of contaminants and volumetric system turn-over. Lower side
stream percentages are occasionally employed on closed loops, but not usually sufficient on open systems to
adequately remove incoming solids. Location (such as near open fields or windy, dusty situations) and
seasonal conditions (such as pollen, harvesting or spring blossoming) provide for higher contaminant
potential, suggesting a higher percentage of side stream filtration to overcome these conditions.
Figure 2: Side stream filtration

M163
This approach is estimated to increase the operating cycle of a cooling systems heat exchangers by 3 times
before servicing requirements become acute (based on experience with users who have kept good before
and after records). This technique is used most often when the full stream flow is extremely high, causing
full stream filtration to be financially unfeasible. Like full stream, this technique does not address the problem
of solids accumulation in the tower basin or remote sump. Side stream filtration is commonly and effectively
applied to both new and existing systems. Care must be utilized when re-directing the side-stream flow
back to the pump suction since that reduces the flow to the heat exchangers, or may require an increase in
the pump output. With side stream filtration the location of the filtration device is very important to make
sure that dirt will get to the filtering system. See Figure 2 for a suggested piping configuration when using
Technical Resources
the side stream approach.
By using a full flow “Y” or tee and coming off the bottom of a pipe, the solids are more likely to enter a side
stream filter increasing the effectiveness of the filtration in removing the solids from the system and reducing
“carryover”.
APPROACH C: Basin Cleaning
Compared to the previous two approaches, filtration directed specifically at the control of solids accumulation
in the cooling tower basin or remote sump is new to the HVAC industry. However because this approach
takes control of getting the solids to the filtration system, virtually eliminates solids build up in the tower
basin addressing health and safety issues, and is very effective at preventing dirt from reaching the heat
exchange surfaces, basin cleaning is among the most popular and effective filtration approaches in use
today.
Figure 3: Basin Cleaning
When applying basin cleaning as a means of filtration, water is drawn from the tower basin/sump to the filter
package and directly back to the tower basin/sump via a pattern of specialized nozzles (See Figure 4 for an
example) to create a directed turbulence of flow designed to influence any settleable particles toward the
basin cleaning package’s pump intake. The size of a basin sweeping filtration package is based on the
planned area of the cooling tower’s basin or remote sump.
A simple rule of thumb is:

Water Depths GPM Filtration Required
Less than 3 feet or 0.9 meters 1 GPM per square foot (0.2 m3/hr per 0.1 m2)
Greater than 3 feet or 0.9 meters 1.5 GPM per square foot (0.3 m3/hr per 0.1 m2)

M164
This technique, despite concentrating its effort to the prevention of basin or remote sump build-up and not
directly protecting the heat exchanger, is very effective at keeping dirt from entering the cooling system and
expected to increase the operating cycle of a heat exchanger by eight times before servicing requirements
become necessary (based on experiences with users who have kept good “before” and “after” records).
Figure 4: Lakos hydrobooster nozzles

Filtration Guide
Unlike the previously mentioned techniques, basin cleaning does directly address basin/sump accumulation.
Basin cleaning does require the appropriate use of a venturi-like nozzle system to increase the total flow
activity without the need for a high volume pump, thereby keeping equipment and pump energy costs to a
minimum. These nozzles and/or eductors increase the flow that passes through them by a factor of 5-6 times,
enabling the filter package to use a smaller filter and pump, while still achieving the flow activity necessary to
sweep the settleable solids across the basin/sump to the filter package’s pump intake.
An important element to making this approach work effectively is adhering to the flow and pressure
requirements (20 psi or 1.4 bar minimum) of the chosen nozzles in order to achieve the necessary flow to
sweep the solids in the basin/sump and prevent troublesome accumulation. Inadequate flow/pressure to
these nozzles dramatically reduces their effectiveness and the ability of the system to direct solids toward the
pump intake and into the filter. In essence, inadequate flow/pressure results in the same effectiveness as that
of a side stream filter.
Popular Filtration Equipment

The advantages and limitations of each of the types of equipment are given in each section. Please See
Table II – Advantages and Limitations of Popular Filtration Equipment for a quick comparison.
Sand Filters
Widely known, sand filters direct fluid into the top of their tank(s) and onto the surface of a bed of specified
sand or other media. As the fluid passes through the bed of sand media, the contaminants are captured
within the upper layer of media. The fluid ultimately makes its way downward, passing into some form of
underdrain at the bottom of the filter tank and discharging through an outlet pipe or manifold. The cleaning
procedure reverses flow upward from the outlet/manifold (either from other filter tanks in the system or from
the main system flow), fluidizing the sand media and backwashing the contaminants through the tank’s inlet
to a backwash line for disposal discharge. Sand filters are most commonly installed in side stream applica-
tions. Care must be taken must be taken before installing in a full flow or basin sweeping configuration
because of the potential for interrupted flow during backwash or fouling of the media.

M165
Solids removal – This type of device is most appropriate for lightweight solids, organics and other floating
contaminants. Though capable of removing heavier solids, the cleaning/backwash procedure makes it very
difficult to rid the sand filter of these solids…which may result in a residual build-up and an increasing
pressure differential across the filter or excessive backwashing frequency. When specified for removing very
fine solids, sand filters must either be oversized to reduce the flow rate per-square-foot or the sand media
must be upgraded, adding both cost and higher pressure loss through the filter.
Flow range – The total surface area of a sand filter’s media bed and the specified flow rate per-square-inch
(20 gpm/sq ft is typical) dictate the size (diameter) and/or quantity of tanks in a sand filter system. Through
Technical Resources
some makers use only one large tank, others use multiple smaller diameter tanks. Unlimited flow range
capability is offset by the logistics of the size and/or configuration of the overall sand filter system.
Pressure loss – Pressure loss varies from low (1 psi typical) to high (11 psi). A very low pressure loss
through a clean sand filter can be rapidly lost in high solids loading applications.
Liquid loss – It is not uncommon to lose hundred or even thousands of gallons of fluid during a backwash
cycle. Significant make-up water may also require significant chemical treatment. As a general rule, some
sand media is also regularly lost during backwashing, resulting in periodic media replacement.
Solids handling – Solids handling is usually automated as the solids are carried away in the backwash
water. Due to the high liquid content during a backwash cycle, solids concentration is not usually practical.
Replacement parts – Typical parts manuals for sand filters number eight or more pages. The moving parts
and electro-mechanical hardware for automatic backwashing account for most of this requirement. Sand
media must be monitored and periodically disposed and replaced. Improper backwashing can also lead to
contaminant build-up in the sand bed, providing the opportunity for troublesome bacteria to breed and/or
accumulate. If oils or grease are present in the system, frequent sand media replacement will be neces-
sary…and may be designated as hazardous waste, complicating disposal procedures.
Maintenance requirements – Backwashing can be manually initiated or automatic. Manual operation

creates the risk that pressure differential may become excessive and disruptive to the system if not
performed regularly and at appropriate intervals. Additionally, infrequent backwashing drives the
contaminants deeper into the sand bed, making it more difficult to completely backwash the sand filter and
resulting in residual build-up, which increases the frequency of backwashing/liquid loss.
Periodically, even when properly monitored, it is necessary to shutdown the system and dispose & replace
the sand media. In high calcium (hard water) content waters it is also not unusual for mineral build-up to
induce the sand media to become a hardened cake, incapable of backwashing.
Inspection monthly is usually recommended monthly in order to sustain proper operating conditions.
Space requirement – Expect sand filters to demand 10 to 20 times more space than other types of filtration
for a given flow rate. Sand filter configurations are also limited for specific ceiling or piping restrictions.
Advantages: Sand filters remove fine and light particles; Improved water clarity; easily automated; Requires
no solids handling; Wide range of particles removed; Effective over a wide range of flows and pressures.
Disadvantages: Prone to changing, or interrupted flow with solids collection; Handling of backwash water
volume; Can be maintenance intensive; Heavy, or precipitated solids pack into sand requiring frequent
changing of the sand; Space can become an issue; Backwash water volume can be excessive in high solids
loading applications.

M166
Separators
Separators use centrifugal action to remove solids that are heavier than water by use of a tangential inlet that
starts the centrifugal action. More efficient designs utilize internal accelerating slots to increase the velocity,
and then allow for settling in a low flow area necessary for the removal of the separable solids. Separated
particle matter spirals downward along the perimeter of the inner separation barrel and into the solids
collection chamber, located below the vortex deflector plate. Solids removal performance varies widely
depending on the design.
Solids removal – Separators are proven capable of 5-75 micron performance for particles that are heavier
Filtration Guide
than water. Since the tested performance of centrifugal action separators varies widely among different
manufacturers, we encourage third party testing to confirm actual performance at flow rates representing
particular site requirements.
Flow range – Separators feature individual units for 3 U.S. gpm (0.7 m2/hr) up to 12,750 U.S. gpm (2895
m2/hr). Easily manifolded for even higher (or variable) flow rates.
Pressure loss – Separators operate continuously (no fluctuations) at a steady pressure loss of only 3-12 psi
(0.2-0.8 bar). Compare to screens and barrier filters, which build-up to very high pressure losses.
Liquid loss – Separators require no backwashing. Low-flow periodic purging or a controlled bleed technique
can achieve zero liquid loss. Selected solids collection options ensure minimum liquid waste and easy
disposal/recovery of solids collected.
Solids handling – evacuation of separated solids should be accomplished automatically by the use of an
electrically-actuated valve programmed at appropriate intervals and duration in order to efficiently and
regularly purge solids from the separator's collection chamber. Solids can also be concentrated by the use of
a solids recovery vessel. In a solids recovery vessel, separated solids are continuously purged under
controlled flow into a vessel equipped with one (or three, depending on the separator size needed) 1 to
50-micron fiber-felt solids collection bag(s). The bags are then manually removed and cleaned or discarded.
Replacement parts – Separators have no moving parts, and no filter elements or sand media to clean or
replace. The purge options (bag filter, or motorized ball valve) for the separator may have replacement parts.
Maintenance requirements – Separators may be purged of separated solids without system interruption.
Easily automated for no maintenance routine. No filter cleaning. No duplicate equipment needed.
Space requirements – Separators are compact. Larger models may be specified at low or vertical profile
and/or with alternate inlet/outlet configurations to accommodate limited space or piping needs.
Advantages: Removes a wide range of particles; No moving parts; Very minimal to no maintenance
requirements; Constant pressure drop is better for basin sweeping applications; Can be installed full flow
with low risk for interrupting flow to the main heat exchangers; can be automated
Disadvantages: Primarily removes only solids that are heavier than water;
Table 2:
Particle Size Removal Pressure Loss Maintenance Requirements Liquid Loss
Back washing; periodic

Best for fine light particles;
inspection; sand
Sand Filters avoid heavy coarse particle Low, variable Potentially excessive
replacement, electro
applications
mechanical parts
Fine to coarse Purge components only -
Separators Low and steady None to minimal
inorganics only periodic inspection/servicing

M167
Automatic Bearing Greaser

Maintenance-Free Bearings with
BAC Automatic Bearing Greasers
Background:
Product Report
For nearly a decade, a customer at a government
installation in Washington, DC felt that the ongoing
lubrication requirements of bearings on their evaporative
cooing equipment put an unnecessary burden on the
organization’s sparse maintenance staff. The process of
lubricating bearings, which were mounted in areas with
limited access, had traditionally been one of the most
tedious and time-consuming tasks.
Solution:
The introduction of the new BAC Automatic Bearing
Greaser eliminated that task from the maintenance
schedule, allowing the maintenance staff to pursue
other productive activities. In July 2005, immediately
after hearing about the BAC Automatic Bearing Greaser, the
customer ordered eight (8) greasers for their four (4) VT1-560-P
cooling towers. The customer mounted the Automatic Bearing
Greasers to the unit exteriors using the included mounting brackets.
The maintenance team then attached the greaser’s flexible tubing
to the bearings, activated the Automatic Bearing Greasers and
programmed the devices to automatically apply a pre-measured
quantity of grease to each bearing at a pre-determined time. Typical Bearing Greaser Installation
Operating Benefits:
Not only does this continuous supply of new grease eliminate the need for maintenance, but it also
extends the life of the bearing! When the cartridge is nearly depleted, the customer will simply replace
the cartridge with a new one. The replacement grease cartridge comes with a fresh set of batteries to
ensure uninterrupted operation of the Automatic Bearing Greaser.
Results:
The customer is extremely pleased with the results of the BAC Automatic Bearing Greaser: less
maintenance, no mess, and increased productivity!

M168

A proper water treatment program, administered under the supervision of a competent water treatment specialist, is an essential part of
routine maintenance to ensure the safe operation and longevity of evaporative cooling equipment, as well as other system components
In evaporative cooling products, cooling is accomplished by evaporating a small portion of the recirculating water as it flows through the
unit. As this water evaporates, the dissolved solids originally present in the water remain behind and, if not controlled, their concentration
will increase rapidly. This can lead to corrosion, scale or biological fouling which may negatively affect heat transfer as well as the
longevity of the unit and other system components.
• Corrosion – Red rust on steel components and

“white rust” on galvanized surfaces will affect the Table 1 - Circulating water quality guidelines for
longevity of the unit. chemically treated water
Property of Water Range
• Scale formation – Scale not only reduces heat
transfer and system efficiency, but may lead to pH 6.5 to 9.0*
Hardness as CaCO3 30 to 750 ppm
under deposit corrosion.
Alkalinity as CaCO3 500 ppm maximum
• Biological Fouling – Slime and algae formations may
Total Dissloved Solids 1500 ppm maximum
reduce heat transfer, promote corrosion, and harbor
Conductivity 2400 micromhos
pathogens such as Legionella.
250 ppm maximum as Cl
Each of these aspects of water quality is discussed in greater Chlorides
410 ppm maximum as NaCl
detail below. Since the quality of the ambient air and make-up
water varies significantly from job site to job site, BAC strongly
Silica 150 ppm maximum
recommends obtaining the services of a competent water
treatment agency prior to the initial start-up of the evaporative * Galvanized steel surfaces must be passivated before
operating at pH levels of 8.3 and higher. See
cooling equipment. Additionally, to protect against the risk of
“Passivation” on next page for details.
Legionella contamination, the cooling equipment should never be
operated without adequate biological control.
Corrosion and Scale Control

To control corrosion and scale, the water chemistry of the recirculating water must be maintained within certain parameters. The specific
measures required vary from system to system and are dependent on the chemistry of the make-up water, the metallurgy of the piping
and heat transfer devices exposed to the recirculating water, and the temperatures at which the system will be operating. Bleed/
blowdown, the continuous flow of a small portion of the recirculating water to a drain, is used to control the concentration of dissolved
solids. On rare occasions this may be adequate to control scale and corrosion. More often, however, chemical scale and corrosion
inhibitors are necessary, which raise the allowable level of dissolved solids without the risk of scale and corrosion.
Chemically treated water should be kept within the guidelines given in Table 1, or within the limits provided by your water treatment
specialist. In cases where bleed/blowdown alone is being employed for corrosion and scale control, without chemical treatment, your
water treatment specialist may recommend more conservative limits than those shown in Table 1.
Chemical treatment programs must meet the following requirements:

1. The chemicals must be compatible with the unit materials of construction as well as other materials used in the system
(pipe, heat exchanger, etc.)
2. Chemical scale and corrosion inhibitors, and particularly acid (if used) should be introduced into the circulating water through automatic
feeders at a point in the system where total mixing and dilution occur before reaching the evaporative cooling equipment. The preferred
injection point for chemical scale and corrosion inhibitors is on the discharge side of the system circulating pump(s). These chemicals
should not be batch fed directly into the unit’s cold water basin or water distribution system, as this can severely damage
areas directly contacted.
3. When chlorine is added to the system, free residual should not exceed 1 ppm. Exceeding this limit may accelerate corrosion.
4. Closed Circuit Cooling Towers and Condensers only: Unless a common remote sump is utilized, each cell of a multi-cell coil product
must be treated as a separate entity, even if the cold water basins are flumed together or equalized.

M169
Passivation
When new systems are first commissioned, special measures should be taken to ensure that galvanized steel surfaces are properly
passivated to provide maximum protection from corrosion. Passivation is the formation of a protective, passive, oxide layer on galvanized steel
surfaces. To ensure the galvanized steel surfaces are passivated, the pH of circulating water should be kept between 7.0 and 8.2 for four to
eight weeks after start-up, or until new zinc surfaces turn dull gray in color. If white deposits form on galvanized steel surfaces after the pH is
returned to normal service levels, it may be necessary to repeat the passivation process.
Note: Stainless steel units and units protected by the BALTIBOND® Corrosion Protection System do not require passivation.
Biological Control
Technical Resources
The warm, oxygen and nutrient rich environment inside evaporative cooling equipment provides an ideal environment conducive to the growth
of algae, slime, and other micro-organisms. Uncontrolled, this can reduce heat transfer, promote corrosion, and promote the growth of
potentially harmful organisms such as Legionella. To avoid biological contamination and minimize the risk of Legionella, a biocide
treatment program should be initiated at start-up, and administered on a regular basis thereafter in accordance with the treatment
supplier’s instructions. Bleed/ blowdown or chemical treatment used for corrosion and scale control alone is not adequate for
control of biological contamination.
Solid or granular biocides should be introduced through a chemical "pot" feeder installed in parallel with the system circulating pump(s).
Dilute liquid biocides may be added directly to the cold water basin. If ozone water treatment is used, ozone concentrations should not
exceed 0.5 ppm.
Start-up, Initial and Following a Shut-down Period

To minimize the risk of biological contamination during a shut-down period of three days or more, it is recommended that the entire system
(evaporative cooling equipment, system piping, heat exchangers, etc.) be drained. To resume operation of a drained system and at initial
start-up, clean all debris from the cold water basin and fill the system with fresh water. Then execute one of the following biocide treatment
programs while operating the circulating pump(s) and prior to operating the unit fans:
1. Resume treatment with the biocide that was used prior to shut-down. Then run the pump only while maintaining the maximum recommended
biocide residual for a sufficient period of time (residual and time will vary with the biocide) as recommended by the water treatment supplier.
Only after this treatment period is completed should the fan(s) be started.
2. Check the pH of the circulating water and, if necessary, adjust it to 7.0 to 7.6. Then, running the pump only, treat the system with sodium
hypochlorite to maintain a level of 4 to 5 mg/l (ppm) free chlorine (as Cl2) over a six (6) hour period. Test kits that can be used to measure
the free residual of chlorine are commercially available. Only after this treatment period is completed should the fan(s) be started.
When it is not practical to drain the system during shutdown periods, a by-pass line with shut-off valves should be installed to permit the
recirculating water to be circulated throughout the system, including the unit basin, while bypassing the fill section of the evaporative cooling
equipment (fans should remain off). The system should be treated per one of the two methods described above prior to restarting the unit.
System Cleaning for Coil Products

This section is applicable to BAC Closed Circuit Cooling Towers and Evaporative Condensers only.
The outside surface of the heat exchanger coil may require occasional cleaning. The chemicals used for cleaning must be compatible with the
materials being treated (the outside of a standard coil is galvanized steel). For specific recommendations on coil cleaning, consult a qualified
water treatment specialist.

When the following precautions are taken, an alkaline solution used to clean condenser water systems prior to start-up may be circulated
through the coil of a closed circuit cooling tower.
1. Limit the duration of the cleaning to one day.
2. The temperature of the solution should never exceed 100ºF.
3. The maximum concentration of chemicals in the circulation solution should not exceed any of the following:
5% Sodium Hydroxide 5% Sodium Metasilicate
2% Sodium Carbonate 2% Tetra Sodium Pyrophosphate
0.5% Trisodium Phosphate 0.5% Sodium Nitrite
10% Butyl Cellosolve
The installation and manufacturing processes commonly used for field-assembled steel-piped refrigeration systems leave weld byproducts
inside coils and connecting piping. It is common practice to install filters and/or strainers that remove contaminants during initial system
operation. Shortly after system startup, the filters and/or strainers should be cleaned or replaced.

M170
QUICK REFERENCE
Maintenance COOLING TOWERS
CLOSED CIRCUIT COOLING TOWERS
Check List EVAPORATIVE CONDENSERS
Maintenance Checklist
Type of Service: JAN. FEB. MAR. APR. MAY JUN. JUL. AUG. SEPT. OCT. NOV. DEC.
Check fan bearings and lubricate,

1. if necessary.
Check tightness and adjustment of

2. thrust collars on sleeve bearing units
and locking collars on ball bearing units.
Check belt tension and adjust

3. if necessary. For gear drive units, check
oil level.
Clean strainer (if atmosphere is

4. extremely dirty, it may be necessary to
clean strainer weekly).
Check for biological growth in basin.

5. Consult water treatment specialist if
such growth is not under control.
6. Clean and flush basin.
Check spray distribution system. Check

7. spray branches and clean as necessary.
Check and re-position nozzles, if necessary.
8. Check operating water level in the basin

and adjust float valve, if required.
9. Check bleed rate and adjust

if necessary.
Check fans and air inlet screens

10. and remove any dirt or debris.
Once a Year: Inspect and clean protective finish inside and out. Look particularly for any signs of
spot corrosion. Clean and refinish any damaged protective coating.
Before undertaking start-up procedures or performing inspection or maintenance of BAC equipment, make certain the power has
been disconnected. Refer to appropriate operating and maintenance manuals and comply with all caution label instructions.
See our website at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com for an electronic copy of the

Quick Reference Maintenance Check List.

M171
Suggestions for Spring Start-Up of Suggestions for Winterizing

Your Evaporative Cooling Equipment Your Evaporative Cooling Equipment
1. Inspect the Unit.
a. Check position of strainer screens and air inlet screens to be Provision must be made to protect the water in the basin from
sure screens have not shifted during shutdown.
b. Check fans, bearings, fan motors, and pumps (if applicable) for
1. freezing when the unit is idle. This can be accomplished by using
a remote sump installed in a heated space or installing steam/hot
lubrication. See item 5. water coils or electric immersion heaters in the tower basin.
c. Rotate all fan shafts by hand to make sure they turn freely.
d. Check fan motors for proper rotation. Directional arrows on fan All outdoor water lines, including the make-up water line to the
cowls or housings indicate correct rotation. 2. unit and drain lines from the unit should be traced with heater
Technical Resources
e. Clear fans of any trash or debris that may have accumulated cable and insulated.
during shutdown.
During operation, frequent visual inspections of the unit must
f. Check make-up valve for shut-off ability. Check float ball for buoyancy.
g. Check spray nozzles for proper distribution. 3. be performed regularly to:
h. Check surface for scale, sludge or debris and clean if necessary.
i. Check access door gaskets and replace, if necessary. a. Insure all operating controls are properly set and functioning
j. Check the condition of the cooling tower fill. If it is clogged or normally.
deteriorated, replace it with Factory Authorized Replacement Fill. b. Insure the method of freeze prevention is effective.
c. Discover any icing conditions before they develop to the point
2. Inspection of Casing. where the unit is damaged or system performance is impaired.
a. While the unit is still drained, thoroughly inspect the unit casing.
A regular preventive maintenance program must be established
Clean and touch-up any areas showing signs of deterioration.
For galvanized steel construction units, any damaged area 4. and carried out despite adverse weather conditions. Items
covered should include:
should be cleaned to bare metal and refinished with Zinc-Rich
Compound (ZRC). This is also the time when any casing joint
leaks can be easily repaired. a. Regular lubrication of moving parts.
b. Remove any deposits that have built up and were not cleared by b. Regular checking of the make-up value and cleaning of
flushing the basin. Touch up the area beneath deposits as required. strainers to prevent high water levels in basin.
c. Regular checking and cleaning of hot water distribution system
3. Fill the Cold Water Basin with Fresh Water to the to assure uniform flow over unit.
Overflow level.
a. At initial start-up or before restart-up where the basin was
completely drained; the initial biocide treatment should be
Coil Protection for Closed Circuit
applied at this time (see Water Treatment section of the Cooling Towers
appropriate maintenance manual).
b. Following a shut-down period, where the basin was not Charge the coil with ethylene glycol to prevent the system fluid
completely drained: It is recommended that an initial shock
treatment of appropriate biocides be administered at restart-up
1. from freezing. The percentage of ethylene glycol should be
determined based upon the conditions in your area.
to eliminate accumulated biological contaminants.
If no ethylene glycol is used, adequate* flow through the coil must
4. Fill Basin with Water and Check Float
Valve Level.
2. be maintained so that the temperature of the circulating fluid is
never less than 45°F.
After the unit has been in operation under load for several days,
During light load periods, artificial heat should be applied
operating water level should be checked. Check the Operating and
Maintenance Manual to determine the proper operating water level. 3. directly to the circulating fluid.
A vacuum breaker or air vent should be installed at the high point

5. Adjust Belt Tension of Fan Motors.
Proper belt tension is determined by pressing against a single belt 4. of the system and an adequately sized drain should be installed
at the low point to permit emergency drainage of the coil.
midway between sheaves with one finger, which should deflect the
belt 1/2” with moderate pressure. To adjust belts, loosen locknut on
All outdoor water lines and the spray pump body should be
the motor base and rotate the exterior nut as necessary. Re-tighten
locknut and recheck tension. 5. traced with heating cable and insulated.
*See appropriate product information for details.
6. Lubricate Bearings.
a. Sleeve Bearings: Use the BAC oil that was shipped with the unit.
We would like to emphasize again the importance of frequent, regular
During the first week of operation, refill each bearing cup several
visual inspection of the units while in operation during the winter
times to saturate the felt wick in the bearing cartridge. DO NOT
months. Early detection of a potential cold weather problem can often
USE OILS CONTAINING DETERGENTS FOR LUBRICATION.
result in a simple, inexpensive remedy now, rather than a major repair
b. Ball Bearings: Purge bearings with new grease.
and inconvenience later.
c. Fan Motors/Pumps (If applicable): Lubrication should be in
accordance with motor manufacturer’s recommendations.
PROPER MAINTENANCE — Proper winterizing, Spring start-up procedures, and scheduled periodic maintenance will prolong the life of
the equipment, and ensure the trouble-free performance for which the unit was designed. Detailed instructions for maintenance are given
in the BAC Operating and Maintenance Manual, which is included with every unit shipped. This manual should be read and kept in a
safe place. Additional copies are available from your local BAC Representative.

M172
Replacement Spare Parts

BAC parts are the “Perfect Fit” for your cooling tower. These parts are specifically designed,
engineered and manufactured to work in a cooling tower environment. They are the right parts,
at competitive pricing levels, and BAC offers the best deliveries in the industry.
Spare Parts
&HQWULIXJDO)DQV $[LDO)DQV 6ROLG6KDIWV +ROORZ6KDIWV

)RUFHG'UDIW%HDULQJ ,QGXFHG'UDIW%HDULQJ $XWRPDWLF%HDULQJ*UHDVHU %HOWVDQG3RZHUEDQGV %$&*HDU6\VWHPV
%$&3DUWV'HSRW *HDU&RXSOLQJV &RPSRVLWH'ULYH6KDIWV &DVW,URQ%XVKLQJV $OXPLQXP6KHDYHV

6KHDYHV
&RRO7RZHU6WDQGDUG :DWHU'LVWULEXWLRQ1R]]OHV 6SUD\%UDQFKHV 6SUD\3XPSV

'XW\0RWRUV 'XW\0RWRUV
3XPS3DUWV )ORDW9DOYHV )ORDW%DOOV (OHFWULF:DWHU/HYHO&RQWURO 6ROHQRLG9DOYHV

,QOHW6WUDLQHUV 6XFWLRQ6WUDLQHUV &RROLQJ7RZHU9DFXXP &RQWUROV %DVLQ+HDWHUV

M173
BAC stocks most common repair and retrofit parts in our Parts Depot and can ship other parts,
often overnight, from any of three manufacturing facilities strategically located in California,
Delaware, and Illinois. In addition, most BAC Representatives maintain a local inventory of
commonly used parts.
Even with this fast delivery capability, it is still recommended that certain essential, emergency
repair parts be maintained in your local inventory, to minimize any potential downtime.
Technical Resources
%DVLQ+HDWHU&RQWUROV 'DPSHU&RQWUROV 9LEUDWLRQ&XW2XW6ZLWFKHV 5HWURILWDQG5HMXYHQDWH )LOO5HWURILW.LWV
<RXU(TXLSPHQW
%$&URVV 2(0 %$&RXQW&RXQWHUIORZ 9HUVD3DFN5HSODFHPHQW

&URVVIORZ.LW )LOO%XQGOHV )LOO%XQGOHV
6DIHW\DQG$FFHVV /DGGHUVDQG+DQGUDLO ([WHUQDO6HUYLFH3ODWIRUPV ,QWHUQDO:DONZD\VDQG ,QFUHDVH<RXU&DSDFLW\

5HWURILWV 5HWURILWV DQG&DWZDONV 6HUYLFH3ODWIRUPV
$GG5HGXQGDQF\DQG $OXPLQXP6KHDYHDQG $OXPLQXP)DQDQG /DUJH2ULILFH6SUD\ /RZ6RXQG$OWHUQDWLYHV

&DSDFLW\&RQWURO %XVKLQJ.LWV %XVKLQJ.LWV 'LVWULEXWLRQ5HWURILWV
0LVW(OLPLQDWRUV &RLOVDQG&RLO&DVLQJV (YDSRUDWRU3DUWV 3DUWVIRU2WKHU +DUGZDUH

0DQXIDFWXUHUV(TXLSPHQW

N1
The Value of Maintaining Evaporative

Cooling Equipment
Cooling Tower Maintenance and upgrades … what’s in it for you? How
about savings in time, money, energy and longer life?
An evaporative heat rejection device enables building owners and

operators to take advantage of the operating cost savings
inherent in water-cooled systems. A well-maintained tower enables
the entire cooling system to perform at optimum efficiency by
conserving both energy and water.
A cooling tower is selected to provide a fluid (usually water) to a

system at a specific design temperature and specific flow rate
(GPM). If the delivered temperature of the fluid to the system is
higher than desired, system performance suffers.
Owners gain operating cost benefits when they implement a regular,

comprehensive cooling tower maintenance program.
Today’s building owners are constantly challenged to keep operating costs down and are anxious to learn
ways to get the most out of their systems with the least expense. Therefore, owners are motivated to
purchase system equipment that is energy-efficient, reliable, and maintenance-friendly. When properly
maintained, water-cooled systems meet these objectives.
The cooling tower is often the forgotten component of the system when it comes to maintenance. It’s a
good example of the phrase “out of sight, out of mind”. A newly installed cooling tower reliably delivers the
design fluid temperature and flow rate. However, since its heat transfer operation creates a “hurricane-like”
environment and is a natural “air-washer”, the cooling tower needs routine inspection and maintenance to
continue performing as designed.
A Cost-Saving Opportunity
Owners and operators who have a working
knowledge of cooling tower preventive maintenance
and upgrade technology will get the most out of
their cooling towers. Their efforts can yield benefi-
cial results, including:
• keeping them running smoothly and reliably
• increasing cooling tower life expectancy
• maintaining and potentially improving
performance
This article will take a look at routine maintenance

and suggest ways to improve cooling tower
performance.

N2
Cooling Tower Basics

In an open circuit cooling tower, warm water from
the heat source is evenly distributed via a gravity
or pressurized nozzle system directly over a heat
transfer surface called “fill” or “wet deck”, while air
is simultaneously forced or drawn through the
tower, causing a small percentage of the water to
evaporate. The evaporation process removes
heat and cools the remaining water, which is
Operating and Maintenance Manuals

collected in the tower’s cold water basin and
returned to the heat source (typically a
water-cooled condenser or other heat
exchanger).
Similarly, in a closed circuit cooling tower or evaporative

condenser, the heat is rejected indirectly from a fluid or
vapor flowing through the coil section by spraying
re-circulated water over the coil section, again
evaporating a small percentage of the water in the
process.
The temperature at which the cooled fluid is returned to

the system measures tower performance. This
temperature can vary depending upon the actual cooling
load, water flow, airflow, and the entering air conditions.
Preventive Maintenance
Performing routine preventive maintenance is paramount for consistently achieving the desired temperature
and flow rate, and plays an important role in maximizing cooling tower operating life. Today, those
manufacturers conscious of the importance of maintenance offer many features which simplify these
procedures, saving time and money.
To perform properly, all tower components must be kept clean and free of obstructions. The following sections
describe standard maintenance procedures for optimized operation. These procedures can prevent loss of
efficiency in the heat transfer section by maintaining proper water and air flow, as well as preventing corrosion
in the cooling tower.

N3
Maintenance frequency will depend largely upon the condition of the circulating water, the cleanliness of the
ambient air used by the tower, and the environment in which the tower is operating. More detailed
information is provided by BAC’s Operating and Maintenance Manual.
Strainer
Fundamentally important to the performance of a cooling tower is a method to minimize contact between air
& water-borne debris and the system components. This is accomplished with strainers. Strainers in the
tower provide a means of keeping debris out of the condenser water loop. Strainers in the cold water basin
outlet prevent debris from reaching the pump. Some towers feature low-pressure drop pre-strainers
upstream of the hot water basin to prevent clogging of distribution nozzles. This added feature eliminates the
need to access the distribution nozzles. Both strainers should be routinely inspected and cleaned as
necessary. Some tower designs allow external access to the strainers, which enables maintenance to take
place without the need to turn off the unit.
Inspecting cold water basin srainer Hot water basin strainer cleaning
Water Distribution
The water distribution system should evenly distribute water over the fill section or coil section via either a
gravity distribution system or a pressurized spray system. If the water distribution is found to be uneven, the
nozzles need to be checked. Clogged nozzles should be cleaned in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Pressurized spray water distribution

N4
In a gravity distribution system, the nozzles can be externally accessed, visually inspected and cleaned by
removing the hot water basin covers on the fan deck. Most pressurized spray distribution systems use
nozzles and branches held in place by snap-in rubber grommets, which allow easy removal to clean and
flush debris.

Hot water basin with gravity water distribution
Cold Water Basin

Since some debris will eventually make its way into the cooling tower, the unit design should facilitate debris
removal. A well-designed cold water basin is sloped toward the strainer to keep dirt (which can accelerate
corrosion) from accumulating throughout the cold water basin. The basin should be kept clean by
occasionally flushing the dirt out of the system through the tower drain. Another way to accomplish this is to
install basin sweeper piping in conjunction with water filtration or separator devices. Water filtration saves
maintenance costs by reducing the dirt in the cooling water system, which in turn reduces the time required to
clean the cold water basins. It also reduces water treatment cost, as water treatment chemicals tend to work
more effectively in clean water. Foreign particles in dirty water can absorb treatment chemicals, thus
requiring the distribution of even more chemicals to properly treat the tower water.
Cold water basin with sweeper piping Basin sweeper piping
Make-up
Though most of the water in the system is recirculated, some water must be added to replace what is lost by
evaporation and bleed. Bleed is the defined as the water that is discharged to prevent the accumulation of
solids in the recirculated water. The make-up water system provides the means to replace the water via a
mechanical float ball and valve assembly or an electronic water level probe assembly (with solenoid valve),
which measures water depth in the cold water basin. The make-up water supply pressure should typically be
maintained between 15 psig and 50 psig to ensure proper valve shut-off and avoid “chatter”. If the supply
pressure is higher than 50 psig, install a pressure reducing valve.

N5
Mechanical water level control
The operating water level of the cooling tower will vary with system thermal load (evaporation rate), the
bleed rate employed, and the make-up water supply pressure. Some tower designs offer access to the
make-up assembly external to the cooling tower, which allows easy basin water depth inspection and
adjustment without the need to turn off the unit. The tower water level should be set in accordance with the
BAC’s recommendations to ensure no air enters the pump suction, but not so high that water is wasted
through the overflow when the tower is shut down.
Electronic water level control
Bleed
To prevent the accumulation of solids in the recirculating water, the tower should be equipped with a bleed
line (including a metering connection and globe valve) connected to a nearby drain. In a closed circuit
cooling tower or evaporative condenser with a circulating pump, a metering valve to control the bleed rate
should be provided at the pump discharge. While a manually adjusted bleed valve is the simplest system,
getting the proper bleed rate can be a problem, as cooling tower loads vary throughout the day. A
conductivity meter connected to a solenoid valve solves this problem by maintaining the proper cycles of
concentration at all times. Also, it is recommended that a separate meter is installed to measure bleed
volume, since less water is discharged to drain than supplied to the cooling tower. This can reduce sewer
water charges.
The bleed rate should be adjusted to prevent an excessive build-up of impurities in the re-circulating water.
This is largely dependent upon the local water quality and the evaporation rate. Constant bleed and
replacement with fresh water will prevent the accumulation of impurities. To obtain specific
recommendations, contact a competent water treatment professional for your area.

N6
Mechanical Drive System

The mechanical fan drive system has several
components, which should be checked
regularly. Many of these components
operate at high speed. Follow proper
lock-out/tag-out procedures, including locking
out all motor disconnect switches before
working on the mechanical system.

Cooling tower fans are typically driven by belt
or gear drive systems. Both require routine
maintenance to ensure reliable, trouble-free
performance. Belt drive systems are
popular, yet reliable, offer single point
adjustment, and have no limit on turndown
capabilities for variable speed applications.
If a problem does occur,a simple change of Mechanical belt drive system
the belt is usually all that is required,
and replacement components are readily available.
Gear drives provide reliable operation, when properly maintained. If a problem occurs, resolution may be
more involved if a gear box rebuild or replacement is required. Some manufacturers offer both systems to
meet user needs or preferences. To ensure proper operation of a belt drive system, tighten drive belts to
manufacturer’s specifications. In gear drive systems, the oil level and quality, as well as shaft alignment
should be checked regularly in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
When starting up a new unit, lubrication for the fan shaft bearings is typically not necessary, since most units
leave the factory already greased. However, for seasonal start-up, purge the fan shaft bearings with new
grease (per manufacturer’s recommendations). Fan shaft bearings should be lubricated after every 2,000
hours of operation or every three months (whichever occurs sooner). Motor bearings should be lubricated as
recommended by the manufacturer’s instructions. For maximum life, it is best to install motors with a “cooling
tower duty” rating.
The Importance of Clean Operation

Cooling tower components must be kept clean and free of obstructions. Neglecting the cooling tower will lead
to higher than desired return water temperatures to the system, which will result in higher energy usage from
two perspectives. First, the system (chiller) will consume more energy because it must operate at a higher
than necessary condensing pressure (head) to satisfy the load. Due to the higher fluid temperatures provided
by the cooling tower. As little as 2˚F higher temperature can result in 6% more energy being consumed by
the chiller. Second, the tower must operate longer at higher fan horsepower while trying to attain the design
cold water temperature.
Common Problems: Causes, Effects, and Solutions

Regardless of how often routine maintenance is performed, like any other mechanical component, problems
with cooling towers may sometimes materialize unexpectedly. These include elevated leaving water
temperatures, drift, and corrosion. Should any of these problems occur, follow the actions listed and contact
the cooling tower manufacturer’s representative or water treatment supplier for assistance.
Check Cooling Load: If the actual cooling load exceeds the design load for which the tower was selected
the leaving water temperature will exceed the design specification.

N7
Check Water Flow & Distribution: Visually

inspect the water distribution system to ensure
the spray distribution nozzles are clean and
correctly installed and are distributing a
uniform spray pattern over the fill. In
counterflow towers, measure the pressure at
the cooling tower inlet connection and compare

it to the design pressure provided by BAC.
For towers with a gravity distribution system,
the operating level in the hot water basin
(typically between 2 and 5 inches) can be
correlated to a specific flow rate.
Inspecting spray distribution nozzles
Check Air Flow: Cooling towers should be located where an unimpeded supply of fresh air is available to
the air inlets. The cooling tower air discharge should also be at least as high as any surrounding walls to
reduce the possibility of hot, moist discharge air being recirculated into the air inlets, creating artificially
elevated entering wet-bulb and leaving water temperatures. To insure full design air flow, the cooling tower
drive system must be adjusted according to the BAC’s Operating and Maintenance Manual.
Incorrect orientation of tower Proper orientation of tower

and neighboring walls and neighboring walls
The cooling tower and surrounding area should be examined for air flow restrictions which may cause
blockage of the air inlets. Check for clogging or improper distribution of water across the tower fill and
check for proper operation of capacity control dampers in centrifugal fan towers to ensure proper air flow.
The dampers, airfoil blades located in the discharge of the fan housing, help achieve tight temperature
control and energy savings by matching cooling tower airflow to actual load requirements.
Though you may encounter dampers in older existing units, today’s towers tend to take advantage of
variable frequency drive technology (VFD’s) to control capacity. VFD’s help save energy, do a better job of
following the load, and help reduce wear and tear on the drive system.

N8
Check Ambient Conditions: Cooling towers are selected to produce the required leaving water temperature
at the design cooling load and entering wet-bulb temperature. Whenever the actual entering wet-bulb
temperature is higher than design conditions, the leaving water temperature will also be higher. The result
is decreased energy efficiency.
Drift occurs as air flows through the cooling tower and carries water droplets out of the tower. Drift eliminators
are installed in the discharge stream to remove water droplets from the air. In a properly maintained system,
efficient eliminators will reduce drift loss to a negligible percentage of the design flow rate.

If excess drift occurs, check drift eliminators for proper installation, spacing, and overall condition. Examine
the fill for even spacing, to insure there is no clogging or blockage, and check water and air flow as described
above. Repair or replace eliminators as necessary.
Inspecting coil Inspecting drift eliminator
Corrosion is always a concern with cooling towers because of their ability to wash the air of impurities. These
impurities cause scale, corrosion, and eventually damage to system components after long-term exposure.
If a constant bleed of the system is ineffective to combat scale or corrosion, chemical treatment may be
necessary. A successful chemical or water treatment program should satisfy the specific guidelines set by the
manufacturer, provide effective microbiological control, and be compatible with the system’s materials of
construction as an integral part of the total water treatment program.
Potential airborne impurities and biological contamination (such as Legionella) should be controlled through
the use of biocides, and such treatment should be initiated at system start-up and continued regularly.
ASHRAE has taken proactive steps to understand and deal with Legionella through its popular publication,
ASHRAE Guideline 12 – 2000, entitled “Minimizing the Risk of Legionellosis Associated with Building Water
Systems”. Contact ASHRAE to secure a copy of this important document. To obtain specific
recommendations of water treatment programs, contact a competent water treatment supplier.
Performance Improvements
Older, structurally sound cooling towers can be retrofitted with upgrade kits to:
• conserve energy
• restore or improve performance
• facilitate maintenance
To conserve energy, two-speed motors, variable frequency drives (VFD’s) or the ENERGY MISER® Fan
System can be added to the mechanical drive system. VFD’s offer a wide range of speeds to closely parallel
operating requirements, and pony motors provide the added benefit of redundancy in the event of a motor
failure. A popular energy conservation approach employs a pony motor system with a VFD controlling the
lower horsepower motor.

N9
To improve performance on water distribution systems, kits are available to replace older, smaller nozzles or
troughs with large-orifice, clog-free design. Retrofit fill kits now exist that easily replace the original fill that
may be clogged with scale or airborne debris. Access platforms can also be added to existing
cooling towers to facilitate maintenance.
Access platforms and ladder Installing retrofit kit
Conclusion
Paying regular attention to the forgotten system component, the cooling tower, through a regular,
comprehensive maintenance program can save time, money and energy while increasing the tower’s life
expectancy. A well-maintained tower is a candidate for retrofit kits designed to enhance performance and
lengthen its life. Owners and operators save money through preventative maintnance technology. If you are
not regularly performing routine maintenance on your cooling tower, implement a comprehensive
maintenance program today.
For more information on how to get started, contact your local BAC Represetative.

N10
Series 3000, Series 1500 and FXT

Crossflow Cooling Towers

Baltimore Aircoil Company Crossflow Cooling Towers have been designed to give long, trouble-free service
when properly installed, operated, and maintained. To obtain optimum performance and maximum service
life, it is important that a program of regular inpection and maintenance be developed and carried out. This
manual is published as a guide to establishing such a program
Included in this manual are the recommended maintenance services for start-up, operation, and shutdown
and the approximate frequency for each. Note that the recommendations on frequency of service are
minimums and where operating conditions are severe, the services should be performed more often. For
each required service, follow the procedures outlined under the "Maintenance Procedures" section of this
manual. The cooling towers are illustrated in each appropriate section with the major points of inspection
and service identified.
If you need additional information about the operation or maintenance of this equipment that is not covered
in this manual, contact your local BAC Representative. Their name and telephone number are on a label
located adjacent to the access door. The model and serial number of the unit are also located in this area.
You can also visit our web site at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com or contact us at 800-896-8097.
Model Number: _______________________ Serial Number: _________________________

N11
Table of Contents.........................................................................................Page
General Maintenance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N11
Safety Precautions & Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N12
Construction Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N13-N15
Recommended Maintenance Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N16
Operation and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N17
Initial and Seasonal Start-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N17

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N18
Seasonal Shut-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N18
General Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N18
Hot Water Basins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N18
Cold Water Basins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N19
Make-Up Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N20
Fan Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N21
Fan Shaft Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N21
Motor Bases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N22
BALTIDRIVE® Power Train Drive System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N23
Fan Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N25
Gear Drive – Series 3000 only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N25
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N28
Winter Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N29
Water Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N30
Biological Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N32
General Maintenance Information

The services required to maintain a cooling tower are primarily a function of the quality of the air and water in
the locality of the installation:
Air:
The most harmful atmospheric conditions are those with unusual quantities of industrial smoke, chemical
fumes, salt or heavy dust. Such airborne impurities are carried into the cooling tower and absorbed by the
recirculating water to form a corrosive solution.
Water:
The most harmful conditions develop as water evaporates from the cooling tower, leaving behind the
dissolved solids originally contained in the make-up water. These dissolved solids may be either alkaline or
acidic and, as they are concentrated in the circulating water, can produce scaling or accelerated corrosion.
The extent of impurities in the air and water determines the frequency of most maintenance services and also
governs the extent of water treatment which can vary from a simple continuous bleed and biological control to
a sophisticated treatment system. (See sections on "Water Treatment and Biological Control.")

N12
Safety Precautions
WARNING: Before performing any maintenance or inspection, or performing service on or near fans,
drives, motors or inside the unit, make certain that all power has been disconnected and locked in the
off position.
WARNING: The top horizontal surface of the unit is not intended for use as a walking surface or
working platform. If access to the top of the unit is desired, the purchaser/end-user is cautioned to use
appropriate means complying with applicable safety standards of governmental authorities.

WARNING: When the fan speed of the unit is to be changed from the factory set speed, including
changes achieved by the use of a variable fan speed device, steps must be taken to avoid operation at
or near the fan’s “critical speed” which could result in fan failure and possible personal injury or
damage. Consult with your local BAC Representative on any such applications.
WARNING: The recirculating water system may contain chemicals or biological contaminants, including
Legionella, which could be harmful if inhaled or ingested. Personnel exposed directly to the discharge
airstream and the associated drift mists, generated during operation of the water distribution system
and/or fans, or mists produced by high pressure water jets or compressed air (if used to clean
components of the recirculating water system), must wear respiratory protection equipment approved
for such use by governmental occupational safety and health authorities.
Safety Precautions
Only qualified personnel may operate, maintain, and repair this equipment. All such personnel must be
thoroughly familiar with the equipment, the associated system and controls, and procedures in this manual.
Use proper care, procedure, and tools when handling, lifting, installing, operating, maintaining, and repairing
CAUTION: Storage
BAC units are typically installed immediately after shipment, and many operate year round. However, if the
unit is to be stored for a prolonged period of time either before or after installation, certain precautions
should be observed. For instance, covering the unit with a clear plastic tarpaulin during storage can trap
heat inside the unit, potentially causing damage to the fill and other plastic components. If units must be
covered during storage, an opaque, reflective tarp should be used. Consult with your local BAC
Representative for additional recommendations on long-term storage. For normal seasonal shutdowns, refer
to the applicable section in this manual.
CAUTION: All electrical, mechanical, and rotating machinery are potential hazards, particularly for those
not familiar with there design, construction and operation. Accordingly, use appropriate lockout procedures
and adequate safeguards (including the use of protective enclosures where necessary) should be taken with
this equipment both to safeguard the public from injury and to prevent damage to the equipment, its
associated system, and the premises.
CAUTION: This equipment should never be operated without all fan screens, access panels, and
access doors in place. For the protection of authorized service and maintenance personnel, install a
lockable disconnect switch located within sight of the unit on each fan and pump motor associated with this
equipment.
Freeze Protection: Mechanical and operational methods must be employed to protect these products
against damage and/or reduced effectiveness due to possible freeze-up. Please refer to the product catalog
or contact the local BAC Representative for recommended protection alternatives.
Warranties: Please refer to the Limitation of Warranties applicable to and in effect at the time of the
sale/purchase of these products. Described in this manual are the recommended services for start-up,
operation, and shut down and the approximate frequency for each of BAC’s Crossflow Cooling Towers.

N13
Series 3000 Construction details:

Figure 1a
BALTIDRIVE® Power Train
Fan Guard Fan System
Fan Deck
Top Water
Inlet
Casing Hot Water

Basin & Cover
Air Inlet
Louvers
Make-up Valve
Adjustable Float
Cold Water
Water Outlet Basin
Connection
Suction
Strainer BACross® Fill
with Integral Drift
Eliminators
Figure 1b

N14
Series 1500 Construction Details:

Figure 2a
Fan and Fan Guard Hot Water Basin

and Cover
Water Inlet with

Prestrainer
Air Inlet Louvers
BACross® Fill
with Integral Drift
Eliminators
Cold Water Basin

Make-up Valve
Figure 2b Adjustable Float and
Suction Strainer

N15
FXT Construction Details:

Figure 3a
Plastic Metering
Hot Water
Orifices
Distribution Basin
Hot Water Inlet
BACross® Fill Integral

Drift Eliminators
Drives
Motor
Access Door
Air Inlet
Cylinder
Fan Shaft
Water Make-Up And Bearings
Valve Assembly
Axial Fan
Adjustable
Float Strainer Water Outlet
Connection
Figure 3b

N16
Table 1. Recommended Maintenance Services for Crossflow Cooling Towers (1)

Type Service Start-Up Monthly Quarterly Annually Shutdown
Inspect general condition of the tower (2) and check
X X
unit for unusual noise of vibration
Inspect and clean as necessary:
Cold and hot water basins/spray nozzles X X
Air inlet louvers X X

Check and adjust water level in basins X X
Check operation of make-up valve X X
Check and adjust bleed rate X X
Optional BALANCE CLEAN® Chamber Inlet Strainer

X X X
(Series 3000)
Mechanical equipment system:
Check Belt Condition X X

(3)
Adjust Belt Tension X X
Lubricate Fan Shaft Bearings X X X
Lubricate Motor Base Adjusting Screw X X X
Check and Lubricate Optional Gear Drive See gear drive section for detailed instructions and schedule
Check Drive Alignment X
Check Fan for Rotation without Obstruction X X
Check Fan Motor for Proper Rotation X
Check Motor Voltage and Current X X X
Clean Fan Motor Exterior X X
Drain Basins and Piping X X
Inspect Tower Finish X
WARNING: Before performing any maintenance or inspection, make certain that

all power has been disconnected and locked in the off position.
Notes:
1. Recommended service intervals are for typical installations. Different environmental
conditions may dictate more frequent servicing.
2. When operating in ambient temperatures below freezing, the cooling tower should be
inspected more frequently (see Winter Operation).
3. Tension on new belts must be readjusted after the first 24 hours of operation and
quarterly thereafter.

N17
Operation and Maintenance

Initial and Seasonal Start-up:
Prior to initial start-up or after a shut-down period, the cooling tower must be thoroughly inspected and
cleaned:
1. Clean all debris, such as leaves and dirt, from inside the tower, the air inlets and the hot water basins.
2. Remove, clean and install the inlet pre-strainer on Series 1500, and the inlet strainer on Series 3000
Cooling Towers provided with the optional BALANCE CLEAN® Chamber.
3. Drain the cold water basin (with basin strainers in place) and flush to remove accumulated dirt.
4. Remove the suction strainer, clean and reinstall.
5. Turn the fan(s) by hand to insure rotation without obstruction.
6. Bump the fan motor(s) and check for proper fan rotation.
7. At seasonal start-up, check and adjust the belt tension on the fan drive system. Note, during initial
start-up, the belt tension may not require adjustment since the drive has been properly tensioned at the
factory prior to shipment.
8. Check float operated make-up valve to be sure it is operating freely.
9. Lubricate the fan shaft bearings prior to seasonal start-up.
10. At start-up, when the cold water basin is completely drained, fill the cold water basin with fresh water to
the overflow level. For new installations, initiate the biocide water treatment program at this time (See
section on "Biological Control"). At seasonal start-up, and following a shutdown period of more than 3
days, resume the biocide treatment program or administer a shock treatment of appropriate biocides prior
to operating the cooling tower fans to eliminate accumulated biological contaminants (See section on
"Biological Control").
11. Set the float on the make-up valve to close the valve when the float is approximately 1/2" below the
overflow level.
12. Balance flow to the hot water basin(s) by adjusting the flow balancing valves (provided by others or
optionally supplied by BAC) on Series 3000, Series 1500 and FXT Cooling Towers. This is not required
on Series 3000 Cooling Towers equipped with the optional EASY CONNECT® Piping Arrangement with
the BALANCE CLEAN® Chamber. However, multi-cell arrangements will require flow balancing between
cells to obtain even water distribution.
13. Open the valve in the tower bleed line and adjust bleed.
14. Check the voltage and current of all three legs of the fan motor. The current should not exceed the
nameplate rating. Note: Current should be measured during warm ambient conditions and with a heat
load on the tower. After prolonged shutdowns, the motor insulation should be checked with an insulation
tester prior to restarting the motor.
WARNING: No service work should be performed on or near the fans, motors, and drives or inside the
unit without first ensuring the fan and pump motors have been disconnected and locked out.
CAUTION: Rapid on-off cycling can cause the fan motor to overheat. It is recommended that the controls be
set to allow a maximum of 6 on-off cycles per hour. When using a 2-speed motor, the starter should include a
15-second time delay when switching from high speed to low speed.
Inverter duty fan motors, furnished in accordance with NEMA Standard MG.1 Part 31, are required for
applications using variable frequency drives for fan motor control.
AFTER 24 HOURS: After 24 hours of operation under thermal load, the following services should be
performed:
1. Check the tower for any unusual noise or vibration.
2. Check the operating water level in the hot and cold water basins and adjust balancing valves.
3. Adjust make-up valve.
4. Readjust the belt tension.

N18
Operation:
During operation, the tower should be inspected, cleaned, and lubricated on a regular basis. The required
services and the minimum recommended frequency for each are summarized in Table 1 on page N16 of this
bulletin.
Seasonal Shutdown:
The following services should be performed whenever the cooling tower is to be shutdown for more than
3 days:

1. Drain the cold water basin and all piping that will be exposed to freezing temperatures.
2. Clean and flush the hot and cold water basins with the basin strainers in place. Leave the cold water
basin drain open so rain and melting snow will drain from the tower. For Series 3000 Cooling Towers with
the optional BALANCE CLEAN® Chamber, clean and flush the inlet strainer.
3. Clean the basin strainers and reinstall.
4. Cover the fan discharge opening to keep out dirt and debris on Series 3000 and Series 1500 Cooling
Towers.
5. Lubricate the fan shaft bearings and motor base adjusting screw.
6. Close the shut-off valve in the make-up water line (supplied by others) and drain all exposed make-up
water piping.
7. Inspect the integrity of the corrosion protection system on the steel portion of the tower. (See section on
"Corrosion Protection").
8. On Series 1500 Cooling Towers, inspect the anti-skid tape on the internal walkway and replace as
necessary if deterioration or lifting is observed.
9. Secure the fan motor starting device in the off position. If inspection or repair requires service personnel
to work around either the fan or drives during shutdown, a personal safety hazard exists if this precaution
is not taken.
WARNING: No service work should be performed on or near the fans, motors, and drives or inside
the unit without first ensuring the fan and pump motors have been disconnected and locked out.
General Maintenance Procedures

Hot Water Basin
The system water enters the cooling tower through the hot water basin(s) – Figure 4a. At design flow, the
operating level should not be less than two (2) inches or greater than five (5) inches deep. Quarterly, or
more often as required, remove any dirt or debris which may clog the nozzles. Seasonally clean and flush
the hot water basin with fresh water.
Hot Water Basin and Integral Pre-Strainer (Series 1500):

The hot water basin, the integral pre-strainer and the nozzles must be kept clean – Figure 4b. The Series
1500 water inlet is furnished with a removable pre-strainer at the inlet to prevent debris from entering the hot
water basin. This strainer should be periodically cleaned as shown in the Recommended Maintenance
Schedule. This is accomplished by removing the access panel on top of the unit and then removing the
strainer basket.
Figure 4b - Series 1500 hot water basin

Figure 4a - Series 3000 hot water basin and pre-strainer

N19
Optional BALANCE CLEAN® Chamber (Series 3000):

The water to be cooled enters the tower through a single connection and passes through the BALANCE
CLEAN® Chamber. This device is equipped with an internal strainer. The bottom of the BALANCE CLEAN®
Chamber is a capped cleanout connection. This can be used to periodically purge the BALANCE CLEAN®
Chamber of dirt and debris as indicated in the Recommended Maintenance Schedule. This is accomplished
by un-bolting and temporarily removing the chamber bottom plate and inspecting the strainer for dirt and
debris, see Figure 5.
Figure 5 – Strainer for optional

Cold Water Basin and Suction Strainer:

As the water circulating though the tower is cooled, it collects in the cold water basin and passes through the
suction strainer into the system. The operating water level is controlled by the make-up valve and should be
maintained at the operating water level shown in Table 2.
The operating water level in the cold water basin will vary with system thermal load (evaporation rate), the
bleed rate employed, and the make-up water supply pressure. Because the typical winter load is less than
the summer load, the winter evaporation rate is frequently less than the summer evaporation rate. With this
reduced evaporation rate in winter, the water level in the cold water basin will increase unless the float is
re-adjusted. The operating water level should be checked monthly and the float re-adjusted as necessary to
maintain the recommended operating level.
The water level in the cold water basin of units designed for remote sump operation is a function of the
circulating water flow rate, along with quantity, location, size and configuration of the water outlet piping.
Units designed for remote sump applications are not supplied with a water make-up assembly and the basin
operating level is not adjustable during operation.
The cold water basin should be inspected regularly. Any trash or debris which may have accumulated in the
basin or on the strainers should be removed and, if necessary, the float adjusted to maintain the design
operating level. (See Table 2, "Cold Water Basin Operating Levels").
Table 2: Cold Water Basin Operating Levels

Height of Water in Height of Water in Height of Water in
Series 3000 Series 1500 FXT
the Cold Water the Cold Water the Cold Water
Model Number Model Number Model Number
Basin (in.) Basin (in.) Basin (in.)
6 - 11 4 1/2”
3420A - 3501A 8 3/4”
All Models 7” 16 - 33 5”
3552A - 31301A 9 3/4”
38 - 536 6”
The entire cold water basin should be drained, cleaned, and flushed quarterly, or more often if necessary,
with fresh water to remove the silt and sediment which normally collects in the basin.

N20
It is important to note that the same maintenance applies to galvanized steel basins, basins protected by the
BALTIBOND® Corrosion Protection System, and stainless steel basins. If not removed periodically, sediment
can become corrosive and cause deterioration of the protective finish of metallic basins. When flushing the
basin, the strainers should be left in place to prevent the sediment from re-entering the tower system. After
the basin has been flushed, the strainers should be removed, cleaned, and replaced before refilling the
basin with fresh water.
WARNING: Openings and/or submerged obstructions may exist in the bottom of the cold water basin.
Use caution when walking inside this equipment.

Make-Up Valve:
A float-operated mechanical water make-up assembly is furnished as standard equipment on the cooling
tower (unless the unit has been ordered with the optional electric water level control package or is equipped
for remote sump application). The mechanical make-up assembly is located within easy reach from the
access door at the connection end of the unit on FXT and Series 3000 Cooling Tower. The mechanical
make-up valve is easily accessible from the louver face of the Series 1500 Cooling Tower. The standard
make-up assembly consists of a bronze make-up valve connected to a float arm assembly and is actuated
by a large diameter polystyrene-filled plastic float. The float is mounted on an all-thread rod held in place by
wing nuts. The operating water level in the cold water basin can be adjusted by repositioning the float and
all-thread rod using the wing nuts provided.
The make-up assembly should be inspected monthly and adjusted as necessary. The valve itself should be
inspected annually for leakage and the valve seat replaced if necessary. The make-up water supply
pressure should be maintained between 15 and 50 psig for proper operation of the valve.
Series 3000, Series 1500 & FXT

mechanical make-up valve
To set the initial basin water level, adjust the wing nuts so that the make-up valve is completely closed when
the water level in the cold water basin is 1/2" below the overflow connection. Under design thermal load and
with average water pressure (15 to 50 psig) at the valve, this setting should produce the operating water
levels stated in Table 2.
Note that if the thermal load is less than the design load at the time of unit start-up, the procedure may
produce operating levels greater than these shown in table 2. It may be necessary to re-adjust the float in
order to attain the recommended operating level. The unit cold water basin should be closely monitored and
water level adjusted as necessary during the first 24 hours of operation.
As an option, an electric water level control package is available in lieu of the mechanical make-up
assembly. The package consists of a probe-type liquid level control assembly and a slow-closing solenoid
valve. Stainless steel electrodes, factory-set at predetermined lengths, extend from an electrode holder into
the cold water basin. These electrodes should be periodically cleaned to prevent accumulations of scale,
corrosion, sludge or biological growth which could interfere with the electrical circuit.

N21
With the electric water level control package, the water level is maintained at the recommended operating
level regardless of the system thermal load. Therefore, it is not necessary, nor is it recommended, that the
operating level be adjusted. During the start-up of units equipped with the electric water level control package,
the control unit should be bypassed in order to fill the unit 1/2" below the overflow connection.
Operation at the recommended water level will ensure that the unit basin contains sufficient water volume to
prevent air entrainment in the circulating pump during system start-up and to provide sufficient excess basin
capacity to accept the total system pull-down volume. ("Pull-down volume" is defined as that quantity of water
suspended in the tower during operation plus that contained in the hot water basin, fill, external piping, and
any heat exchangers which could drain to the tower cold water basin when the circulating pump is shut down.)
Fan Motors:
The standard fan motors used on BAC Cooling Towers are Cooling Tower Duty Motors, either a TEAO (Totally
Enclosed, Air Over), or a TEFC (Totally Enclosed, Fan Cooled) configuration, with permanently lubricated ball
bearings and special moisture protection on the bearings, shaft, and windings. The only servicing required
during operation is to clean the outside surface of the motor at least quarterly to ensure proper motor cooling.
Additionally, after prolonged shutdowns, the motor insulation should be checked with an insulation tester prior
to restarting the motor.
Series 1500 & Series 3000: The fan motor(s) is totally enclosed, air-over (TEAO), single-speed, single-wind-
ing, reversible "squirrel cage", ball bearing type, designed specifically for evaporative heat rejection service.
Series 3000 (Option): The fan motor(s) is totally enclosed, fan-cooled (TEFC) ball bearing type,
single-speed, single-winding, and suitable for outdoor service. A TEFC motor(s) is standard when the cooling
tower is provided with gear drive and externally mounted motor(s).
FXT: The fan motor(s) is totally enclosed, fan-cooled (TEFC), single-speed, single-winding, suitable for
outdoor service.
WARNING: When the fan speed of the cooling tower is changed from the factory-set speed, including
changes achieved by the use of a variable fan speed control device, steps must be taken to avoid
operating at or near the fan’s "critical speed", which could result in fan failure and possible injury or
damage. On most fan drive systems, it is not uncommon for one or more resonant speeds to exist.
Consult with your local BAC Representative on any such applications.
Fan Shaft Bearings:

The fan shaft is supported by two pillow block ball bearings, each equipped with a lubrication fitting and a
slinger/locking collar to keep out moisture. The bearings should be lubricated as follows:
Initial Start-Up: Normally, no lubrication is required since the bearings have been lubricated at the factory
prior to shipment. However, if the cooling tower has been stored at the job site for more than one year,
bearings should be lubricated with new grease before initial operation. When lubricating, purge the old grease
from the bearing by gradually adding grease until a bead of new grease appears at the seal on the underside
of the bearing.
Seasonal Start-Up: Purge both bearings with new grease prior to start-up.
Operation: Lubricate bearings every 2,000 hours of operation or once every three months, whichever
occurs first.
Seasonal Shutdown: Purge bearings with new grease prior to any prolonged storage or downtime.
CAUTION: The fan shaft bearing should be lubricated only with a hand grease gun. Do not use high pressure
grease guns since they may rupture the bearing seals. Lubricate the bearings with only one of the following
water resistant greases which are suitable for ambient temperatures ranging from –65ºF (-53.9ºC) to +250ºF
(121.1ºC) .

N22
Amoco - Rycon Premium #3 Chevron - SRI

Mobil - Mobil #28 Mobil - SHC 32
Shell - Alvania 3 Shell - Dolium "R"
Texaco - Regal AFB 2
Locking Collars (FXT Cooling Towers)

Each eccentric locking collar should be checked every six months to ensure that the inner bearing race is
secured to the fan shaft. The locking collar can be set using the following procedure. (See Figures 6 & 7).

1. Loosen the set screw.
2. Using a drift pin or centerpunch, tap the collar (in the hole provided) tangentially in the direction
of rotation while holding the shaft.
3. Retighten the set screw.
Figure 6 Figure 7
FXT Bearing with locking collar
Adjustable Motor Base:

The motor base slides and adjusting screws (see Figures 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 & 13) should be coated twice
a year using a good quality grease such as those recommended for lubricating the fan shaft bearings.
Figure 8- Adjustable Motor Base Figure 9- Adjustable Motor Base Figure 10- Adjustable Motor Base
FXT Models 26-68. FXT Models 74-142 and 230-284. FXT Models 160-268 and 320-536.

N23
Fan Belt Adjustment (3000, 1500 and FXT):

Models FXT-26 thru FXT-536 use V-belts, Series 1500 and Series 3000 use powerbands. Belt tension should
be checked and adjusted at least quarterly, or as needed. To properly adjust the belt tension, position the fan
motor so that the belt will deflect 1/2” when moderate pressure (approximately 15 lbs.) is applied midway
between the sheaves.
NOTE: There should be no "chirp" or "squeal" when the fan motor is started.
The position of the fan motor can easily be changed by adjusting the rod which extends from the frame to the
motor base. Loosen the locknut on top of the frame and rotate the nut under the frame with a wrench as
necessary. Then retighten the locknut (see Fig. 12 and 13).
NOTE: Direct drive units (FXT-6 thru FXT-20) do not employ fan shaft bearings, adjustable motor bases, fan
drives or belts. The fans are driven directly by the motor and there is never a need for any adjustment.
Figure 11 – Series 1500 Figure 12– Series 3000 Figure 13 – FXT

adjustable motor base adjustable motor base fan belt adjustment
BALTIDRIVE® Power Train (SERIES 1500 and SERIES 3000):

The BALTIDRIVE® Power Train consists of a specially designed belt, with corrosion-resistant fan motor
sheaves (see Figures 11 and 12). The solid-backed, multi-groove, neoprene/polyester belt provides the
premium quality necessary for cooling tower service. The corrosion-resistant sheaves extend the life of the
belt by minimizing any possibility of rust or corrosion. These components provide a highly reliable system with
low maintenance requirements. The only service required on the BALTIDRIVE® Power Train is to periodically
check the condition of the belt and, when necessary, adjust the tension. The recommended service intervals
are specified below:
Initial Start-Up:
No servicing is required prior to initial tower start-up since the drive has been tensioned and aligned at the
factory.
Seasonal Start-Up:
Re-adjust the tension on the belt.
Operation:
After the initial tower start-up or the installation of a new belt, the tension must be readjusted after the first 24
hours of operation. Thereafter, the condition of the belt should be checked monthly and the tension adjusted
as necessary, but at least once every three months.

N24
To check the belt tension, place a straight edge along the belt from sheave to sheave as shown in Figure
15a or use a tape measure as shown in Figure 15b to measure belt deflection. Apply a moderate force by
hand (approximately 40 lbs) evenly across the width of the belt in the center of the span between the
sheaves. If the belt deflects between 1/4" and 3/8" as shown in Figures 15a and 15b, the belt is adequately
tensioned.
If belt tensioning is required, proceed as follows:
1. Loosen the lock nut on the motor base adjusting screw.

2. Turn the motor base adjusting screw clockwise to tension the belt, or counterclockwise to relieve belt
tension. During adjustment of belt tension, the drives should be rotated several times by hand to
evenly distribute the tension throughout the belt.
3. When the belt is properly tensioned, retighten the locking nut on the motor base adjusting screw.
NOTE: There should be no "chirp" or "squeal" when the fan motor is started.
Figure 15a Figure 15b

Belt Tension
The drive alignment should be checked annually to ensure maximum belt life. This can be done by placing a
straight edge across the driver and driven sheaves as shown in Figure 16a for standard drives and in Figure
16b for ENERGY-MISER® Fan System drives. When the drives are properly aligned, the straight edge will
contact all four points as indicated. There should be no more than 1/16" deviation from four points of
contact. If realignment is necessary, loosen the motor sheave and align it with the fan sheave. Allow
approximately 1/4" for draw-up as the bushing screw is retightened.
Figure 16a – Standard Drive Alignment Figure 16b – ENERGY-MISER® Fan System
Drive Alignment

N25
Fan Operation:
1. If the unit is already in operation, check while the fan is running for any unusual noise or vibration.
2. With the fan off and the motor locked out and tagged:
a. Inspect for any loose or missing bolts in the fan shaft bushing, the fan hub and the fan shaft
bearings.
b. Check the fan blades for looseness, first by twisting the blade by hand and then by moving the
blade tip up and down.There should be no play or slippage whatsoever.
c. Inspect along each blade for excessive scale build-up that could cause vibration and for any signs
of cracking.
3. Tip Clearance – Check the clearance between the tip of the blade and the fan cowl. This should be
between 1/2” and 1”.
4. Drain Holes – On hollow blades, the drain hole in the blade tip should be unobstructed. (Hint: Use a
piece of wire to probe the hole).
5. Blade Pitch – Check to ensure that the blades are all at the same pitch. If uncertain, measure the pitch
with an inclinometer. All blades should be within +/- 1/2°.
6. Rotation – Turn the fan by hand to ensure that it moves freely with no rough spots, binding or other
malfunctions that could cause vibration or fan motor overload. While rotating the fan, check the blade
tracking. All blades should be within a 1" band at any single point around the cowl.
7. Direction of Rotation – On initial start up, or if the fan motor has been rewired for some reason, bump
the fan motor and note the direction of rotation. It should rotate in the direction indicated by the arrow
on the fan cowl.
8. Operation – On initial start up, run the fan in the manual position for several minutes and check for any
unusual noises or vibration.
Gear Drive System (Series 3000):

Inspection: All gear drives are shipped with oil installed. The initial oil level should be at or near the middle of
the oil level sight gage, and should be maintained so that the oil level is always visible in the sight gage
window when the unit is idle or not energized and the oil is at ambient temperature. See Figure 17 for
locations of the gear drive fittings. Prior to start-up, check all fittings on the gear drive to ensure that there are
no visible leaks. The standard oil provided in BAC gear drive systems is mineral oil. Synthetic lubricants are
also available as an option. Refer to the unit nameplate for the oil type provided with the gear drive system.
Breather Plug Name Plate
Oil Sight Glass
Drain Plug
Figure 17 – Single reduction gear drive
Gear drive units with internally mounted motors are properly installed and aligned at the factory. All fasteners
are factory tightened, but should be checked after installation. For units supplied with externally mounted
motors, install and align the motor and driveshaft in accordance with the customer assembly instructions
included with the unit. It is recommended that alignment and all external fasteners be rechecked after two
weeks of operation.

N26
Operation: No special break-in procedures, other than rechecking alignment and external fasteners, are
necessary except as noted under the Lubrication section.
Excessive noise or vibration at initial operation is an indication of one or more of the following:
1. Misalignment
2. Imbalance of the fan or other rotating parts
3. Improperly adjusted fan blades
4. Operation at mechanical equipment resonant speed

WARNING: If noise or vibration persists, shut the unit down and correct the cause before further
operation.
On installations with two speed motors, when slowing from high speed, allow a minimum 15 second time
delay for the fan to slow down before energizing the low-speed winding.
CAUTION: When reversing the direction of rotation, allow the fan to come to a complete stop before restart-
ing the motor.
Variable Frequency Drive Operation:
CAUTION: On installations with variable speed motors, do not operate standard gear drives below 450 RPM
motor speed (gear input speed). Modifications to the lubrication system or special gear oil pumps are
required for operation at input speeds lower that 450 RPM.
CAUTION: Continued operation at a resonant speed condition will result in torsional vibrations within the
gear which can be damaging to all components of the system. The most common indicator of torsional
vibrations is an unusual rumbling or grinding noise from the gear drive at a sharply defined speed. The
noise will disappear when the speed is increased or decreased. This noise is not indicative of a defect but
results when the vibratory torque exceeds the drive torque causing the gear teeth to separate and clash
together very rapidly. On variable speed applications, operation close to a resonant speed should be
avoided and transition through a resonant speed range should be swift.
At start-up, the variable frequency drive should be increased through the range from 0 RPM to maximum
motor speed. As the speed is increased, the gear drive system should be observed to note the onset of
any unusual rumbling or grinding at specific speeds. These resonant speeds (+/- 10%) should be "locked
out" by the variable speed drive. Please refer to the variable frequency drive manufacturer’s
recommended start-up procedure for further information.
Lubrication: Use only rust and oxidation inhibited gear oils in accordance with AGMA (American Gear
Manufacturer’s Association), Standard 9005-D94. For general operating conditions, AGMA lubricant number
and corresponding ISO Grade should be as shown in Table 3 for mineral oils and Table 4 for synthetic
lubricants (reference the cooling tower nameplate to determine if synthetic lubricant was furnished). For
operation under extremely hot or cold ambient conditions, contact your local BAC Representative for specific
recommendations.
Start-up at an ambient temperature less than 20°F (-7°C ) requires either the use of lube oil heaters (for
mineral oils) or synthetic oil (ambient temperature to -20°F (-29°C)). Each unit has provisions for an internal
oil reservoir heater. Heaters and synthetic oil are extra cost accessories and can be ordered with new units
or may be ordered and installed in existing units.
The vertical and horizontal shafts are equipped with grease-lubricated dual seals. Relubrication is not
required.

N27
Table 3: Recommended Mineral Oils

Ambient Temperature at Gear Drive: 20˚F to 120˚F (-7˚C to 49˚C)
AGMA Lubricant Number: 5
ISO Grade: 220
Manufacturer Oil Type**
Atlantic Richfield Co. Duro 220
Chevron Oil Co. Machine Oil A W 220
Cities Service Oil Co. Citgo Pacemaker 220
Conoco Hydroclear Multipurpose R & O Oil 220
Exxon Co. Teresstic 220
Gulf Oil Co. Harmony 220
Mobil Oil Co. DTE Oil BB

Pennzoil Pennzbell R & O 220
Philips Petroleum Co. Magnus 220
Shell Oil Co. Morlina 220
Sun Oil Co. Sunvis 999
Texaco Inc. Regal 220 R & O, Code 1531
Total Carter 220
Table 4: Recommended Synthetic Lubricants

Ambient Temperature at Gear Drive: -20˚F to 150˚F (-29˚C to 66˚C)
AGMA Lubricant Number: 5S
ISO Grade: 220
Manufacturer Oil Type**
Chevron Oil Co. Clarity 220 Synthetic
Conoco Syncon 220 - R70 Oil
Exxon Co. Teresstic SHP 220
Mobil Oil Co. SHC 630
Shell Oil Co. Omala RL220
** List of brand names is for purpose of identifying types and is not to be construed as exclusive
recommendations.
Synthetic Lubricants: Synthetic lubricants offer advantages such as extended service life, a broader
operational temperature range, reduced friction, and the ability to maintain a higher film strength which can
extend the service life of the gear drive. For general operating conditions, AGMA lubricant number and
corresponding ISO Grade should be as shown in Table 4. Synthetic lubricants can be made of various base
stocks which are incompatible with certain gear drive components; therefore, any synthetic lubricant not listed
in this manual should not be used without first consulting your local BAC representative.
Change Interval: The original oil should be replaced after 500 hours or four weeks of operation, whichever
comes first. It is recommended that the oil be drained through the drain plug when it is at operating
temperature. Refill the drive through the air breather port with the recommended type (Tables 3 & 4) and
amount of lubricant (Table 5). See Figure 17 for locations of the gear drive fittings.
Maintenance: Check oil level weekly with the unit idle. Add oil if level is below oil level indicator. Normal oper-
ating oil capacity of each gear drive is given in Table 5. Specific gear model number for each unit can also be
found in Table 6, or on the gear drive nameplate. Daily visual inspections and observation for oil leaks and
unusual noises and vibrations are recommended. If any of these occur, the unit should be shut down and the
cause found and corrected.
Periodic checks should be made to ensure the proper alignment of all system components and that all bolts
and external fasteners are tight.
Special precautions are necessary during periods of inactivity. When the internal parts are not continually
bathed by the lubricant as during operation, the gear drive is susceptible to corrosion. For best results, let the
drive cool for approximately four hours after shutdown, start the fan and let run for approximately five minutes.
This will coat the internal parts of the drive with cool oil. Thereafter run the fan for five minutes once a week
throughout the shutdown period to maintain the oil film on the internal parts of the gear drive.
On seasonal shut down, it is recommended that the drive unit be completely filled with oil. This can be
accomplished by filling through the air breather port. Cover the drive with a tarpaulin or other protective covering.

N28
CAUTION: Drain the excess oil before returning the gear drive to service.
By following the above procedures, each BAC gear drive system will provide years of useful service.
Table 5 – Normal Operating Oil Capacity Table 6– Gear Model/Unit

Unit Model (HP) Gear Model Unit Model (HP) Gear Model
Gear Model Gallons Liters
3240A 65 3728A 110
65 0.5 2 3272A 65 3781A 110

3299A 85 3828A 110
85 1 4 3333A 65 3872A 110
3333A (20) 85 3923A 110
110 2 8
3358A 85 3970A 135
135 3 11 3379A 85 3985A 110

3412 A 85 31056A 135
155 5 19 3436A 85 3583A 110
3455A 85 3618A 110
175 5.5 21
3482A 85 3676A 110
3527A 110 3725A 110
3473A 85 31132A 110
3501A 85 31132A (50) 135
3552A 85 31132A (75) 155
3604A 110 31213A 135
3648A 110 31213A (75) 155
3672A 110 31301A 175
Corrosion Protection
BAC cooling towers are constructed of corrosion-resistant materials. The fill is made of an inert synthetic
material, which requires no protection against rot, decay, rust or biological attack. Other materials used in
construction of the equipment, which are listed below, should be inspected regularly.
Galvanized Steel Components

Galvanized steel components should be inspected for blemishes or corrosion. Affected areas should be wire
brushed and recoated with a cold galvanizing compound such as Zinc Rich Compound (ZRC).
BALTIBOND® Corrosion Protection System Components

Galvanized steel components protected with the BALTIBOND® Corrosion Protection System may develop
scratches, scrapes or blemishes. These may be touched up with a repair kit (BAC Part No. 16-133P). In the
unlikely event that the damage is more extensive than simple scratches or minor blemishes, contact your local
BAC Representative.
Stainless Steel Components

Stainless steel components should be inspected for signs of blemishes or corrosion and cleaned with
stainless steel wool as necessary. If more extensive corrosion is prevalent, contact your local BAC
Representative.
Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester (FRP) Components

Series 3000 Cooling Towers are provided with FRP casing panels as standard. These components should be
inspected for accumulation of dirt and cleaned with soap and water as necessary.

N29
Winter Operation
BAC cooling towers can be operated at ambient temperatures below freezing provided proper operating
methods are established and diligently followed.
Precautions that must be taken to ensure satisfactory operation include:
• Freeze protection of the water in the cold water basin and elimination of water in the optional BALANCE
CLEAN® Chamber (Series 3000) and in all internal piping when the tower is idle.
• Freeze protection must be provided for the cold water basin during shutdown since ice formation in the
basin can severely damage the cooling tower. A remote sump located indoors in a heated space is an ideal
method since the water in the tower and connecting piping will drain by gravity whenever the circulating
pump is stopped. Where a remote sump arrangement is impractical, the cold water basin heat must be
provided in the tower itself. Electric immersion heaters, steam injectors, or steam coils, controlled by a
thermostat in the cold water basin, may be used. Consult your BAC Representative for details. Additionally,
all exposed make-up lines and water piping that does not drain at shutdown should be traced with electric
heater tape and insulated.
EASY CONNECT® Piping Arrangement with BALANCE CLEAN® CHAMBER (Optional Series 3000):
Draining the water from the BALANCE CLEAN® Chamber and internal piping is essential whenever the
potential for freezing temperatures exist. This can be accomplished by utilizing the 1/2" NPT drain port
located on the inboard side of the BALANCE CLEAN® Chamber. There are 3 recommended methods for
draining the piping:
1. The preferred approach is to install a normally open 1/2" solenoid valve on the 1/2" drain connection of
the BALANCE CLEAN® Chamber. This valve should be wired in the pump circuit such that it closes
when the pump is energized. The solenoid valve must be selected to operate with a minimum pressure
differential of zero PSI. The zero pressure differential valve is required due to the limited static head
imposed on the valve from the water column.
2. A 1/2" manual valve can be installed on the 1/2" drain connection of the BALANCE CLEAN® Chamber.
The valve should be opened during cold weather operation. CAUTION: The valve must be closed
during warm weather to obtain full thermal performance.
3. Remove the 1/2" plug from the 1/2" drain connection of the BALANCE CLEAN® Chamber during cold
weather operation. CAUTION: The plug must be reinstalled during warm weather to obtain full thermal
performance.
When operating at subfreezing ambient temperatures, the cooling tower will normally produce leaving water
temperatures appreciably below design. However, low leaving water temperatures tend to promote ice
formation. Therefore, when operating in subfreezing ambient temperatures, the leaving water temperatures
should be maintained as high as possible. The recommended minimum water temperature in the cold water
basin is 43ºF (6.1ºC). Additionally, frequent visual inspections should be performed to detect potential icing
problems.
The first step in maintaining a high leaving water temperature is to ensure the tower operates with the
maximum possible heat load. Next, reduce the tower capacity by cycling fans, which modulates the air flow
through the tower. Modulating the water flow rate to the tower is not recommended as a method for cooling
tower capacity control. (CAUTION: Rapid on-off cycling can cause the fan motor to overheat. It is
recommended that controls be set to allow a maximum of 6 on-off cycles per hour.) If the tower is equipped
with two-speed motors or VFD, operation at a lower speed may be sufficient to prevent icing.
Note: When two speed motors are used, the motor starter should include a minimum 15 second time
delay when switching from high to low speed.

N30
However, it may also be necessary to cycle fans off periodically to prevent ice formation and/or to melt ice
that accumulates on the intake louvers and face of the fill of the Series 3000 and Series 1500 Cooling
Towers. Under severe conditions where fan cycling is insufficient to prevent icing, it may be necessary to
operate the fan(s) in reverse for short periods of time to remove any ice accumulation by forcing warm air
through the fill.
WARNING: DO NOT operate the fans in reverse any longer than is necessary since extended reverse
operation may cause ice to form on the fan blades, fan cowl, or eliminators and damage the tower.

Because of this possibility, cooling towers using reverse fan operation for ice removal should be equipped
with a vibration cutout switch and the duration of reverse operation should be limited to a maximum of 30
minutes. A time delay of approximately 40 seconds between forward and reverse direction should be
incorporated into the motor controls. Lastly, the importance of performing frequent visual inspections and
routine maintenance services during operation in subfreezing weather cannot be overemphasized. These
must be carried out on a routine basis to:
1. Ensure all controls for capacity and freeze protection are set properly and functioning normally.
2. Prevent excessively high water levels and possible overflow of the cold water basin due to over
pumping clogged strainers, or make-up valve malfunction.
3. Discover any icing conditions that may develop before they reach the point where the tower or
supports are damaged or system performance is impaired.
For more detailed information on winter operation and for recommended operating procedures on specific
installation, contact your local BAC Representative.
Water Treatment
A proper water treatment program, administered under the supervision of a competent water treatment
specialist, is an essential part of routine maintenance to ensure the safe operation and longevity of evapora-
tive cooling equipment, as well as other system components.
In evaporative cooling products, cooling is accomplished by evaporating a small portion of the recirculating
water as it flows through the unit. As this water evaporates, the impurities originally present in the water
remain behind and, if not controlled, the concentration of dissolved solids will increase rapidly. This can lead
to corrosion, scale or biological fouling which may negatively affect heat transfer as well as the longevity of
the unit and other system components.
• Corrosion – Red rust on steel components and "white rust" on galvanized surfaces will affect the
longevity of the unit.
• Scale formation – Scale not only reduces heat transfer and system efficiency, but may lead to under
deposit corrosion.
• Biological Fouling – Slime and algae formations may reduce heat transfer, promote corrosion, and
harbor pathogens such as Legionella.
Each of these aspects of water quality is discussed in greater detail below. Since the quality of the ambient
air and make-up water varies significantly from job site to job site, BAC strongly recommends obtaining the
services of a competent water treatment specialist prior to the initial start-up of the evaporative cooling
equipment. Additionally, to protect against the risk of Legionella contamination, the cooling equipment
should never be operated without adequate biological control.

N31

To control corrosion and scale, the water chemistry of the recirculating water must be maintained within certain
parameters. The specific measures required vary from system to system and are dependent on the chemistry
of the make-up water, the metallurgy of the piping and heat transfer devices exposed to the recirculating
water, and the temperatures at which the system will be operating. Bleed/blowdown, the continuous flow of a
small portion of the recirculating water to a drain, is used to control the concentration of dissolved solids. On
rare occasions this may be adequate to control scale and corrosion. More often, however, chemical scale and
corrosion inhibitors are necessary, which raise the allowable level of dissolved solids without the risk of scale
and corrosion.
Chemically treated water should be kept within the guidelines given in Table 7. In cases where bleed/
blowdown alone is being employed for corrosion and scale control, without chemical treatment, your water
treatment specialist may recommend more conservative limits than those shown in Table 7.
Table 7 – Quality Guidelines for Chemically Treated Circulating Water

Property of Water Recommended Level
pH 6.5 to 9.0*
Hardness as CaCO3 30 to 750 ppm2
Alkalinity as CaCO3 500 ppm maximum2
Total Dissolved Solids 1500 ppm maximum
Conductivity 2400 micromhos3
250 ppm maximum as Cl
Chlorides
410 ppm maximum as NaCl
Silica 150 ppm maximum
Chemical treatment programs must meet the following requirements:

1. The chemicals must be compatible with the unit materials of construction as well as other materials used in
the system (pipe, heat exchanger, etc.)
2. Chemical scale and corrosion inhibitors, and particularly acid (if used) should be introduced into the
circulating water through automatic feeders at a point in the system where total mixing and dilution occur
before reaching the evaporative cooling equipment. The preferred injection point for chemical scale and
corrosion inhibitors is on the discharge side of the system circulating pump(s). These chemicals should not
be batch fed directly into the unit’s cold water basin or water distribution system, as this can severely
damage areas directly contacted.
3. When chlorine is added to the system, free residual chlorine should not exceed 1 ppm, except as noted in
start-up and shut-down section. Exceeding this limit may accelerate corrosion.
*Passivation
When new systems are first commissioned, special measures should be taken to ensure that galvanized steel
surfaces are properly passivated to provide maximum protection from corrosion. Passivation is the formation of a
protective, passive, carbonate layer on galvanized steel surfaces. To ensure the galvanized steel surfaces are
passivated, the pH of circulating water should be kept between 7.0 and 8.2 for four to eight weeks after start-up,
or until new zinc surfaces turn dull gray in color. If white deposits form on galvanized steel surfaces after the pH
is returned to normal service levels, it may be necessary to repeat the passivation process.
NOTE: Stainless steel units and units protected by the BALTIBOND® Corrosion Protection System do not
require passivation.

N32
Biological Control
The warm, oxygen and nutrient rich environment inside evaporative cooling equipment provides an ideal
environment conducive to the growth of algae, slime, and other micro-organisms. Uncontrolled, this can
reduce heat transfer, promote corrosion, and promote the growth of potentially harmful organisms such as
Legionella. To avoid biological contamination and minimize the risk of Legionella, initiate the biocide
treatment program at start-up and continue on a regular basis thereafter in accordance with the treatment
supplier’s instructions. Bleed/blowdown or chemical treatment used for corrosion and scale control alone is
not adequate for control of biological contamination.

Solid or granular biocides should be introduced through a chemical "pot" feeder installed in parallel with the
system circulating pump(s). Dilute liquid biocides may be added directly to the cold water basin. If ozone
water treatment is used, at no point should concentrations exceed 0.5 ppm.
Start-up, Initial and Following a Shutdown Period

To minimize the risk of biological contamination during a shut-down period of three days or more, it is
recommended that the entire system (evaporative cooling equipment, system piping, heat exchangers, etc.)
be drained. To resume operation of a drained system and at initial start-up, clean all debris from the cold
water basin and fill the system with fresh water. Then execute one of the following biocide treatment
programs while operating the circulating pump(s) and prior to operating the unit fans:
1. Resume treatment with the biocide that was used prior to shut-down. Then run the pump only while
maintaining the maximum recommended biocide residual for a sufficient period of time (residual and time
will vary with the biocide) as recommended by the water treatment supplier. Only after this treatment
period is completed should the fan(s) be started.
2. Check the pH of the circulating water and, if necessary, adjust it to 7.0 to 7.6. Then, running the pump
only, treat the system with sodium hypochlorite to maintain a level of 4 to 5 mg/l (ppm) free chlorine
(as Cl2) over a six (6) hour period. Test kits that can be used to measure the free residual of chlorine are
commercially available. Only after this treatment period is completed should the fan(s) be started.
When it is not practical to drain the system during shut-down periods, a by-pass line with shut-off valves
should be installed to permit the recirculating water to be circulated throughout the system, including the unit
basin, while bypassing the fill section of the evaporative cooling equipment (fans should remain off). The
system should be treated per one of the two methods described above prior to restarting the unit.

N33
CXV Evaporative Condensers

FXV Closed Circuit Cooling Towers
HXV Closed Circuit Hybrid Cooling Towers
Crossflow Coil Products
Baltimore Aircoil Company FXV Closed Circuit Cooling Towers, HXV Closed Circuit Hybrid Cooling Towers, and
CXV Evaporative Condensers have been designed to give long, trouble-free service when properly installed,
operated and maintained. To obtain optimum performance and maximum service life, it is important that a pro-
gram of regular inspection and maintenance be developed and carried out by the end-users of these products.
This manual is published as a guide to establishing such a program. Included in this manual are the recom-
mended services for start-up, operation, shutdown, and the approximate frequency for each. Note that the rec-
ommended frequency of service in this manual is the minimum, and where operating conditions are severe, the
services should be performed more frequently. For each required service, follow the procedures outlined under
the “Maintenance Procedures” section of this manual. The FXV/CXV unit and the HXV unit are illustrated on
pages N34 and N35 (see Figure 1A, 1B, and Figure 2), with the major points of inspection and service identified.
In addition, a copy of the unit certified drawing should be available for reference. If you need additional informa-
tion about operation or maintenance, contact your local BAC Representative whose name and phone number
are on a label at the connection end of the unit.
Table of Contents Page Page

General Information...............................................N34-N35 Spray Nozzles and Heat Transfer Section................... N43
Operation and Maintenance......................................... N36 Flow Control Package (For HXV Only)........................ N43
Safety Precautions....................................................... N37 Corrosion Protection..................................................... N43
Operating Modes & Seasonal Periods Winter Operation.......................................................... N43
(For HXV Only)............................................................. N38 Protection Against Cold Water Basin Freezing............ N43
Initial and Seasonal Start-Up....................................... N39 Leaving Fluid Temperature........................................... N43
After 24 Hours.............................................................. N40 Protection Against Coil Freezing.................................. N44
Seasonal Shutdown..................................................... N40 Capacity Control........................................................... N45
Maintenance Procedures......................................N40-N44 Water Treatment....................................................N46-N48
Cold Water Basin and Strainer..................................... N40 Biological Control......................................................... N47
Make-Up Valve......................................................N40-N41 Start-Up Following a Shutdown Period........................ N48
Fan Shaft Bearings...................................................... N41 Coil Cleaning................................................................ N48
Fan Motor..................................................................... N42 Factory Authorized Parts.............................................. N48
Adjustable Motor Base................................................. N42
BALTIDRIVE® Power Train System......................N42-N43

N34
General Maintenance Information

The services required to maintain an FXV Closed Circuit Cooling Tower, HXV Closed Circuit Hybrid Cooling
Tower, or CXV Evaporative Condenser are primarily a function of the air and water quality at the installation
site.
AIR: The most harmful atmospheric conditions are those with unusual quantities of industrial smoke,
chemical fumes, salt or heavy dust. Such airborne impurities are carried into the cooling tower and absorbed
by the recirculating water to form a corrosive solution.
WATER: The most harmful conditions develop as water evaporates from the unit, leaving behind the dissolved
Operating and Maintance Manuals

solids originally contained in the make-up water. These dissolved solids may be either alkaline or acidic and,
as they are concentrated in the circulating water, can produce scaling or accelerated corrosion.
The extent of impurities in the air and water determines the frequency of most maintenance services and also
governs the extent of water treatment which can vary from simple continuous bleed and biological control to a
sophisticated treatment system (see " Water Treatment” section, page N46).
Spray Distribution Header
(A)
Coil Connection:
FXV Fluid Out CXV
Refrigerant In
Water Spray
Distribution System
(A)
Coil Connection: FXV
Fluid In/CXV Refrigerant Air Inlet Louvers
Liquid Out
Access Door
Water Make-up Valve
and Adjustable Float
Bleed Line & Valve
Cold Water Basin

Recirculating
Water Pump
Fill with Integral
Drift Eliminators
Figure 1A - Single-side air inlet FXV/CXV

N35
Make-up Valve w/
Prime Surface Coil Adjustable Float
Cold Water Basin
BACross® Fill With

Integral Eliminator
Figure 1B – Double-Side air inlet FXV/CXV
Spray Water
Distribution System
Basin Fill
Figure 2 – HXV closed circuit hybrid cooling tower

N36
Operation and Maintenance

Described below are the recommended services for start-up, operation, and shutdown as well as the
approximate frequency for each. For each required service, follow the procedures outlined under the
“Maintenance Procedures” section of this manual.
Table 1 – Recommended Maintenance Services (1) for FXV Closed Circuit Cooling Towers and CXV

Table 2 – Recommended Maintenance Services (1) for HXV Closed Circuit Hybrid Cooling Towers

N37
Notes Table 1 and Table 2:

1. Recommended service intervals are for typical installations. Severe environmental conditions may
dictate more frequent servicing.
2. When operating in ambient temperatures below freezing, the FXV/HXV/CXV unit should be inspected
more frequently (see pages N43-N45).
3. Tension on new belts must be re-adjusted after the first 24 hours of operation and quarterly thereafter.
WARNING: Before performing any maintenance or inspection, make certain that all power has been
disconnected and locked in the off position.
CAUTION: STORAGE
If the unit is to be stored for a period of time prior to installation, it is not recommended that any cover be placed
over the unit. This can trap heat inside of the unit and cause damage to the fill section and other PVC
components. Consult with your local BAC Representative for additional recommendations on long-term
storage.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Only qualified personnel may operate, maintain, and repair this equipment. All such personnel must be
thoroughly familiar with the equipment, the associated system and controls, and procedures in this manual. Use
proper care, procedure, and tools when handling, lifting, installing, operating, maintaining, and repairing this
equipment to prevent personnel injury and/or property damage.
CAUTION: All electrical, mechanical, and rotating machinery are potential hazards, particularly for those not
familiar with its design, construction and operation. Accordingly, use appropriate lockout procedures and
adequate safeguards (including the use of protective enclosures where necessary) should be taken with this
equipment both to safeguard the public (including minors) from injury and to prevent damage to the equipment,
its associated system, and the premises.
WARNING: The top horizontal surface of the unit is not intended for use as a walking surface or working
platform. If access to the top of the unit is desired, the purchaser/end-user is cautioned to use appropriate
means complying with applicable safety standards of governmental authorities.
CAUTION: This equipment should never be operated without all fan screens, access panels, and access doors
in place. For the protection of authorized service and maintenance personnel, install a lockable disconnect switch
located within sight of the unit on each fan and pump motor associated with this equipment.
WARNING: Do no service work on or near the fans, motors, drives, or inside the unit without first disconnecting
and locking out the fan and pump motors.
WARNING: When the fan speed of the unit is to be changed from the factory set speed, including changes
achieved by the use of a variable fan speed device, steps must be taken to avoid operation at or near the fan’s
“critical speed” which could result in fan failure and possible personal injury or damage. Consult with your local
BAC Representative on any such applications.
WARNING: The recirculating water system may contain chemicals or biological contaminants, including
Legionella, which could be harmful if inhaled or ingested. Personnel exposed directly to the discharge airstream
and the associated driftmists, generated during operation of the water distribution system and/or fans, or mists
produced by high pressure water jets or compressed air (if used to clean components of the recirculating water
system), must wear respiratory protection equipment approved for such use by governmental occupational
safety and health authorities.
FREEZE PROTECTION: Mechanical and operational methods must be employed to protect these products
against damage and/or reduced effectiveness due to possible freeze-up (see pages N43-N45).
WARRANTIES: Please refer to the Limitation of Warranties applicable to and in effect at the time of the sale/
purchase of these products.

N38
Operating Modes & Seasonal Periods (for HXV only)

Operating Modes
The HXV Closed Circuit Hybrid Cooling Tower operates under three different operating modes:
Combined Dry-Wet Mode: During this mode, the process fluid flows through the finned coil bundle (sensible
heat transfer) and then through the wetted prime surface coil bundle (sensible and latent heat transfer). At
reduced heat load and/or low ambient temperatures, the evaporative cooling portion (and hence water usage)
is reduced as the flow through the wetted prime surface coil bundle is gradually reduced. This is accomplished

by a modulating flow control valve that maintains the design outlet temperature.
Adiabatic Mode: During this mode, the process fluid flows through the finned coil bundle and bypasses the
wetted prime surface coil bundle completely. The entering ambient air is pre-humidified (cooled) by the spray
water before flowing over the high density finned coil bundle.
Dry Mode: In this mode, the process fluid flows through both the finned coil bundle and the prime surface coil
bundle. Since the spray pump is turned off, only sensible heat transfer is used.
Seasonal Periods
The optimal operation of the HXV Closed Circuit Hybrid Cooling Tower is obtained by a combination of the above
mentioned operating modes, depending on the thermal load of the process and the ambient conditions. Typically
two different seasonal periods are distinguished from each other:
Summer Period: During this period all three operating modes are applied and the spray pump is activated dur-
ing the dry/wet and the adiabatic operating mode. Therefore, the cold water basin is filled with water during this
period.
Winter Period: during this period, only the dry operating mode is applied and the cold water basin is drained.
Table 3 below summarizes the use of the different operating modes during the seasonal periods.
Table 3. HXV Operating Modes and Seasonal Periods
Note
*Process fluid flow through prime surface coil bundle is controlled by a three-way valve and is a function of the
process fluid temperature returning to the system.
**The three-way valve is locked and closes the bypass line completely. Refer to specific control sequences that may be
supplied with the unit.

N39
Operating Procedures
General
Inspect, clean and lubricate the unit on a regular basis 13. Open the valve in the tower bleed line and adjust bleed
during operation. The required services and recommended to the recommended rate (see “Water Treatment”
frequency for each are summarized in Table 1 and Table 2 section on page N46).***
on page N36 of this bulletin. 14. Thoroughly inspect cooling tower fans for the following
items: (note: Before inspecting mechanical equipment
Initial and Seasonal Start-up components, the fan driver should always be turned off
Before initial start-up or after a shutdown period, the FXV/ and starter or disconnect switch locked out and
tagged to prevent personal injury).
HXV/CXV unit should be thoroughly inspected and cleaned.

1. If the unit sits on vibration isolators or isolation rails, a) Fan bolts - Inspect all bolts on the fan hub
refer to the manufacturer’s guidelines before bushing and those connecting fan blades to the
loading/unloading weight from the unit. hub. Insure all are installed (none missing), tight
2. Clean all debris, such as leaves and dirt, from inside and show no signs of cracking or failure.
the unit, the top of the finned coil bundle (for HXV b) Fan Blades - Visually inspect all fan blades. The
only), and the air inlet louvers. clearance between the tips of the blades and the
3. Drain the cold water basin (with basin suction strainers fan cowl should be between 1/2” and 1” and all
in place) and flush to remove accumulated dirt. blades should be at the same pitch. Inspect
4. Remove the basin suction strainer, clean and reinstall. blades for any signs of cracking or failure.
5. Inspect spray nozzles and heat transfer section. c) Blade Looseness - Twist each blade by hand to
6. Turn the fan by hand to ensure rotation without check for looseness. There should be no play or
obstruction. slippage whatsoever.
7. Start the fan motor and check for proper fan rotation. d) Fan Rotation - Rotate fan by hand. It should
8. At seasonal start-ups, adjust the belt tension. This is rotate freely with no rough spots, binding, or
typically not required at initial start-up since the factory other malfunctions that could cause vibration or
has already applied proper tension. fan motor overload. While rotating the fan,
9. Check float-operated make-up valve to ensure the check the blade tracking. All blades should track
valve is operating freely. within a 1” band at any single point around the cowl.
10. Before seasonal start-up, lubricate the fan shaft e) Drain Holes - On hollow fan blades, check the
bearings. This is not required at initial start-up drain hole in the end of the blade to be sure it is
since the fan bearings have been lubricated at the clear.
factory prior to shipment. f) Direction of Rotation - Jog the fan motor and
A. At initial start-up or before start-up when the observe the direction of fan rotation. It should
basin is completely drained, fill the cold water basin rotate in the direction indicated by the arrow
with fresh water to the overflow level. For new located on the fan cowl.
installations, initiate a biocide water treatment g) Noise - Run the fan in the manual position for
program at this time (see “Water Treatment” several minutes to check for any unusual noises
section, page N46). or vibrations.
B. At seasonal start-up and following a shutdown 15. Check the voltage and current of all three legs of both
period of more than 3 days, resume the biocide the fan and pump motor wiring. The current must not
treatment program or administer a shock treatment exceed the nameplate rating. After prolonged shut
of appropriate biocides prior to operating the unit downs, the motor insulation should be checked with a
fans to eliminate accumulated biological “megger” insulation tester before restarting the motor.
contaminants (see “Biological Control” on page 16. For the HXV unit, if the three-way valve and control
N47). logic are supplied by BAC, please refer to separate
11. Set the float on the make-up valve to shut off the valve documentation supplied with this option.
when the float is approximately 1/2” below the overflow
level.*** Caution: Rapid on/off cycling of fan motors can cause the
12. Start the spray water pump and check for proper fan motors to overheat. Controls for motors should be set
rotation as indicated by the arrow on the pump to allow a maximum of six on/off cycles per hour. If this unit
cover.*** is to be controlled with a variable frequency drive (VFD),
(Note: On remote sump applications, adjust system flow refer to the “Variable Frequency Drives” section on page
rate to design. The supply valve to the spray header N42.
should be opened slowly until the design pressure (1.0
psi at spray header connection) and spray water flow
are reached. Pressure greater than 10.0 psi may
cause damage to the distribution system).

N40
CAUTION: Rapid on/off cycling of spray pump motors in the cold basin will increase unless the float is readjusted.
can cause scaling of the prime surface coil bundle and The operating water level should be checked monthly and
the fill. the float readjusted as necessary to maintain the recom-
mended operating level.
WARNING: Before performing any maintenance or
inspection, make certain all electric power has been The water level in the basin of the equipment designed for
disconnected and locked in the off position. remote sump operation is a function of the spray water flow
rate, water outlet connection size/location, and outlet piping
size/configuration. The remote sump unit is supplied without
After 24 Hours: a water make-up assembly and the basin operating level dur-
After 24 hours of operation under load, the following services ing remote sump operation is not adjustable.

should be performed.
1. Check the unit for any unusual noise or vibration. Inspect the cold water basin regularly. Remove any trash
2. Check the operating water level in the cold water basin. or debris accumulating in the basin or on the strainer and, if
Adjust the make-up float valve if necessary.*** necessary, adjust the float to maintain the design operating
3. Readjust the belt tension. level. Quarterly, or more often if necessary, drain, clean and
4. Clean the basin suction strainer.*** flush the entire cold water basin with fresh water. This will
remove the silt and sediment normally collecting in the basin
Seasonal Shutdown and under the fill during operation. If not removed periodical-
The following services should be performed whenever the ly, this sediment can become corrosion and cause deteriora-
FXV/HXV/CXV unit is shutdown for a prolonged period: tion of the protection finish. After the basin has been flushed,
1. If the unit sits on vibration isolators or isolation rails, the strainer should be removed, cleaned, and reinstalled or
refer to the manufacturer’s guidelines before replaced before refilling the basin with fresh water.
loading/unloading weight from the unit. For units that operate dry during the cold winter months, the
2. Clean all debris, such as leaves and dirt, from the inside cold water basin should be drained completely, with the drain
of the unit, the top of the finned coil bundle (for HXV left open to prevent collection of rainwater, snow, etc.
only), and the air-inlet louvers.
3. Drain the cold water basin with basin strainers in place
and flush to remove accumulated dirt.
4. Remove the basin strainers, clean, and reinstall.
5. Lubricate the fan shaft bearings and motor base
adjusting screw(s).
6. Close the shut off valve in the make-up water line
(supplied by others) and drain all exposed make-up
water piping.***
7. Inspect the integrity of the corrosion protection system
on the steel portion of the unit.
8. Check the anti-freeze solution to ensure adequate coil
freeze protection. Note that anti-freeze suppliers may Figure 3 A – Single-Side Air Inlet Figure 3 B – Double-Side Air Inlet
offer free yearly glycol analysis. FXV/CXV and HXV and Suction Strainer FXV/CXV Make-Up Valve and
Suction Strainer
9. Inspect the prime surface coil bundle and the high
density finned coil bundle (HXV only), and clean or
repair if required. Make-Up Valve
10. Inspect the integrity of the anti-skid tape on the internal A float operated water make-up assembly is furnished as
walkway. standard equipment on all FXV/HXV/CXV units unless the
unit has been ordered with the optional electric water level
***Note: Actions not required for the HXV dry operation
control package or for remote sump application. For the
during winter period.
single-side air inlet FXV/HXV/CXV unit, the make-up valve is
located inside the cold water basin within easy reach from the
Maintenance Procedures outside of the unit on the air inlet face (see Figure 3A). For
the double-side air inlet FXV/CXV unit, the make-up valve is
Cold Water Basin and Suction Strainers located inside the cold water basin and can be reached from
The spray water collects in the cold water basin and passes inside the unit plenum (see Figure 3B). The standard make-
through the strainer into the system. The operating water up assembly (see Figure 4) consists of a bronze make-up
level is controlled by the make-up valve and should be valve connected to a float arm assembly and actuated by a
maintained at the operating water level listed in Table 4 large diameter polystyrene filled plastic float.
(measured from the inside basin bottom, near make-up
float). The operating water level in the cold water basin will
vary somewhat with the system thermal load (evaporation
rate), the bleed rate employed, and the make-up water sup-
ply pressure. With reduced evaporation rate, the water level

N41
The float is mounted on an all-thread rod that is held in During start-up of units equipped with the electric water level
place by wing nuts. The operating water level in the cold control package, the control should be bypassed in order to
water basin can be adjusted by repositioning the float and fill the unit 1/2” below the overflow connection.
all-thread rod using the wing nuts provided. Operation at the recommended water level will ensure that
the unit basin contains sufficient water volume to prevent air
entrainment in the circulating pump during system start-up.
WARNING: Before performing any maintenance or inspec-

Figure 4 – Mechanical tion, make certain all electric power has been disconnected
Make-up Valve
and locked in the off position.
Fan Shaft Bearings

Each fan shaft is supported by two pillow block ball bear-
The make-up assembly should be inpected monthly and ings. Each bearing is equipped with a lubrication fitting and
adjusted as necessary. Inspect the valve annually for leak- a slinger/locking collar to keep out moisture. The fan shaft
age and replace the valve seat if necessary. Maintain the bearings should be lubricated only with a hand grease gun.
make-up water supply pressure between 15 and 50 psig for Do not use high-pressure grease guns since they may rup-
proper operation. ture the bearing seals. The bearings should be lubricated
as follows:
To make the initial basin water level setting, adjust the wing
Initial Start-up: Lubrication is normally not required since
nuts so that the make-up valve is completely closed when
the bearings have been lubricated at the factory. If, however,
the water level in the cold water basin is 1/2” below the
the equipment is stored at the jobsite for more than one year,
overflow connection. Under design thermal load and with
purge the bearings with new grease before initial operation.
average city water pressure (15 to 50 psig) at the valve, this
Seasonal Start-up: Purge bearings with new grease before
setting should produce the operating water levels stated in
start-up.
Table 4. Note that if the thermal load is less than the design
load at the time of unit start-up, the procedure may produce
Operation: Purge bearings with new grease after every two
operating levels greater than those shown in Table 4. It may
thousand (2,000) hours of operation, or once every three
be necessary to re-adjust the float in order to attain the rec-
months, whichever comes first.
ommended operating level. The unit basin should be closely
Seasonal Shutdown: Purge bearings with new grease before
monitored and water level adjusted as necessary during the
any prolonged storage or downtown.
first 24 hours of operation.
Lubricate the bearings only with one of the following water-
Table 4. Basin Operating Level
resistant greases for ambient temperatures ranging from
-65°F (-53.9ºC) to +250°F (121.1ºC):
Amoco - Rycon Premium #3 Chevron - SRI

Moil - Mobil #28 Mobil - SHC 32
Shell - Alavania 3 Shell - Dolium "R"
Texaco - Regal AFB 2
The use of non-listed lubricants is not recommended

and may void the unit warranty.
As an option, an electric water level control package is avail-

able in lieu of the mechanical make-up assembly described
above (either included with new units or as a field installed
upgrade). The package consists of a probe-type liquid
level control assembly and a slow closing solenoid valve.
Stainless steel electrodes, factory set at predetermined
lengths, extend from an electrode holder into the cold water
basin. These electrodes should be periodically cleaned to Figure 5 – Location of Fan
prevent accumulations of scale, corrosion, sludge or biologi- Shaft Bearings and Lube
Fittings
cal growth from interfering with the electrical circuit. With the
electric water level control package, the water level is main-
tained at the recommended operating level regardless of the
system thermal load. Therfore, it is not necessary, nor is it
recommended, that the operating level be adjusted.

N42
Fan Motor BALTIDRIVE® Power Train

The standard fan motor used on FXV/HXV/CXV is a TEAO The BALTIDRIVE® Power Train consists of a specially
(Totally Enclosed Air Over) motor. The motor has designed belt, heavy duty, corrosion resistant, aluminum
permanently lubricated ball bearings and special moisture fan and drive sheaves, and cooling tower duty bearings.
protection on the bearings, shaft, and windings. The only The solid-backed, multi-groove, neoprene/polyester belt
servicing required during operation is to clean the outside provides the premium quality necessary for evaporative
surface of the motor at least quarterly to ensure proper cooling service. The aluminum sheaves extend the life of
motor cooling. Condensation drain openings, located at the the belt by minimizing the possibility of corrosion. These
lowest point of the housing, should be open and free of any components provide a highly reliable system with low
debris (check after prolonged shutdowns). Also, the motor maintenance requirements. The only servicing required

insulation should be checked with a “megger” insulation on the BALTIDRIVE® Power Train is to periodically check
tester prior to restarting the motor. the condition of the belt and, when necessary, adjust the
tension. The recommended service intervals are specified
Variable Frequency Drives below.
Motors: Applications employing variable frequency drives
(VFDs) for fan motor control must use inverter duty electric Initial Start-Up: No servicing is required prior to initial unit
motors built in compliance with NEMA Standard MG-1, start-up since the drive has been tensioned and aligned at
Part 31,available as an option from BAC. The standard the factory.
fan motors normally furnished with BAC products are
not intended for this duty and will not be warranted if so Operation: After initial start-up or the installation of a new
applied. belt, the tension must be readjusted after the twenty-four
(24) hours of operation. Thereafter, the condition of the belt
WARNING: When the fan speed of the unit is to be should be checked monthly and the tension adjusted as
changed from the factory set speed, including changes necessary, but at least once quarterly.
achieved by the use of a variable fan speed device,
steps must be taken to avoid operation at or near the Seasonal Start-Up: Readjust the tension on the belt.
fan’s “critical speed” which could result in fan failure
and possible personal injury or damage. Consult with To check the belt tension, place a straight edge along the
your local BAC Representative on any such belt from sheave to sheave as shown in Figure 7 or use a
applications. tape measure to measure belt deflection. Apply a
moderate force by hand (approximately 40 lbs.) evenly
across the width of the belt in the center of the span
Adjustable Motor Base between the sheaves. If the belts deflect between 1/4”
The motor base adjusting screw (see Figure 6) should be and 3/8” (as shown in Figure 7), the belt is adequately
greased quarterly using a good quality corrosion-inhibiting tensioned.
grease such as one of those recommended for lubricating
the fan shaft bearings.
Figure 7 – Belt Tension Check
If belt tensioning is required, proceed as follows:

1. Loosen the lock nuts on the motor base adjusting screw
(see Figure 6).
2. Turn the motor base adjusting screw clockwise to tension
Figure 6 B – Adjustable Motor Base
for Double-Side Air Inlet FXV/CXV the belt, or counter-clockwise to relieve belt tension.
Figure 6 A – Adjustable Motor Base During adjustment of belt tension, the drives should be
for Single-Side Air Inlet FXV/CXV rotated several times by hand to evenly distribute the
and HXV
tension throughout the belt.
3. When the belt is properly tensioned, retighten the locking
nut on the motor base adjusting screw.
Note: There should be no “chirp” or “squeal” when the

fan motor is started.

N43
The drive alignment should be checked annually to ensure WARNING: Do not use steam or high pressure water to
maximum belt life. This can be done by placing a clean the cooling tower fill.
straightedge across the drive and driven sheaves (as shown
in Figure 8) and the optional ENERGY-MISER® Fan System Corrosion Protection
drives (as shown in Figure 9). When the drive is properly FXV/HXV/CXV units are constructed of corrosion-resistant
aligned, the straightedge will contact all four points as materials. The fill is made of an inert synthetic material -
indicated. No more than 1/16” deviation from four-point polyvinyl chloride (PVC), which is impervious to rot, decay,
contact is recommended. If realignment is necessary, loosen rust, or biological attack. Other materials used in
the motor sheave and align it with the fan sheave. Allow construction of the equipment, which are listed below,
approximately 1/4” for draw-up as the bushing screw is should be inspected regularly.
retightened.
Galvanized Steel Components
Galvanized steel components should be inspected for
blemishes or corrosion on the galvanized steel. Affected
areas should be thoroughly wire brushed and recoated with
a cold galvanizing compound such as Zinc-Rich Compound
(ZRC).
BALTIBOND® Corrosion Protection System Components

Figure 8 – Standard Drive Figure 9 – ENERGY-MISER® Fan Galvanized steel components protected with the
System Drives
STANDARD
DRIVER
??? BALTIBOND® Corrosion Protection System may develop
Flow Control Package scratches, scrapes or blemishes. These can easily be
touched up with a repair kit (BAC Part No. 16-133P).
(For HXV Only
If the Flow Control Package is supplied by BAC, refer to the Stainless Steel Components
specific HXV-Control Sequence Manual provided by BAC for Stainless steel components should be inspected for signs of
this option. blemishes or corrosion and cleaned with stainless steel wool
as necessary.
Spray Nozzles and Heat Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester (FRP) Components
Transfer Section Double-side air inlet units are provided with FRP casing
The spray nozzles and heat transfer section should be panels and air inlet louvers as standard. These components
inspected and cleaned each quarter. The inspection should be inspected for accumulation of dirt and cleaned
procedure is as follows: with soap and water as necessary.
1. Check to see if the nozzles are producing the spray In the event that the corrosion damage is more extensive
pattern shown in Figure 10. than simple scratches or minor blemishes, contact your local
2. Clean any nozzles that are clogged. If necessary, the BAC Representative.
nozzle and rubber grommet may be removed for
cleaning. To remove, grasp the nozzle at the base Winter Operation
(closest to the rubber grommet) and pull while twisting. Protection Against Cold Water Basin Freezing
Replace any damaged nozzles. If the unit is idle or operating at ambient temperatures below
3. Inspect the coil and fill. Any corrosion, damage, or freezing with water in the cold water basin, the water needs
obstructions must be corrected. to be protected from freezing. This can be
accomplished with electric immersion heaters. A remote
sump will eliminate the need for freeze protection in the unit.
When a remote sump is not used, trace with electric heat
tape and insulate all exposed make-up lines and water
piping not draining at shutdown.
Leaving Fluid Temperature

When operating at ambient temperatures below freezing,
the unit will normally produce leaving spray water and/or
leaving process fluid temperatures below design. Low
Figure 10 – 360° Umbrella Type Spray
system temperatures tend to promote ice formation. When
During periods of low ambient temperature (well below operating wet at below-freezing ambient temperatures, the
design), these units may be able to run at reduced fan leaving process fluid temperature of the FXV/HXV/CXV
speeds. The fans should be cycled with the spray water unit with liquid cooling circuits should be maintained at
pump running continuously. The coil may be used for 50°F (45°F for an anti-freeze solution). The unit should be
seasonal dry operation, followed by seasonal wet inspected frequently to detect any potential problems.
operation, but NOT for frequent cycling of the spray pump. Various methods of capacity control (fan cycling, VFD’s, etc.)
Frequent spray pump cycling may lead to excessive scale may be used to maintain the leaving fluid temperature.
buildup and reduced wet and dry performance.

N44
Protection Against Coil Freeaing When the use of an industrial grade antifreeze solution is
The best protection against coil freeze-up is the use of an not possible, the system must be operated to meet both of
anti-freeze solution. An industrial grade inhibited ethylene the following conditions:
glycol or propylene glycol solution is recommended for
most installations. Table 5 and Table 6 provide the coil 1. Maintain full flow through the coil. If this is not
volume (U.S. gallons) for each FXV and HXV model (the possible, keep flow above the recommended minimum
coil volume for CXV condensers models using liquid cooling flow (through coil bundles) stated in Table 7. For an
circuits is job specific). HXV unit, the by-pass line has to be closed (by-pass
line and three-way valve must be heat-traced by others
Table 5. FXV Coil Volume (per unit) to prevent freezing). The minimum coil flow for CXV

condenser models using liquid cooling circuits is job
specific. Consult your local BAC Representative for
recommendations per job specification.
Table 7. Minimum Coil Flow
600
712
706
Note: The “x” represents the variable numbers or
696 characters in the model numbers.
828
862 2. Maintain a heat load on the circulating fluid so that the
fluid leaving the coil will not fall below 50°F.
Note: The “x” represents the variable characters in the
model numbers which does not change coil volume. If the process load is extremely light during shut-off, it may
be necessary to apply an auxiliary heat load to the
Table 6. HXV Coil Volume (per Unit) circulating fluid to maintain the fluid above 50°F when
freezing conditions exist.
CAUTION:
Do not drain the coil as a normal method of freeze
protection. Frequent draining promotes corrosion inside
the coil tubes resulting from the introduction of air to bare
steel. However, draining is acceptable as an emergency
method of freeze protection if the coil is not protected by an
industrial grade antifreeze solution. Consult your local BAC
Representative for guidelines on the installation of an
emergency coil drain system.
Further protection against coil freeze-up is possible with

the installation of an alarm to alert personnel when the
temperature of the fluid leaving the coil falls below 50°F .
For more detailed information on winter operation and for

recommended operating procedures on specific
installations, contact your local BAC Representative.

N45
Capacity Control HXV Closed Circuit Hybrid Cooling Tower

Proper capacity control in the winter will optimize energy To optimize water and energy savings, the HXV Closed
efficiency and minimize the potential for freeze-related prob- Circuit Hybrid Cooling Tower operates in three differ-
lems. Several capacity control methods may be used: ent modes (also see “HXV Operation Modes & Seasonal
Periods”). In each mode, capacity is controlled by a com-
1. Unit Cycling: During periods of cold weather, it is best bination of fan motor and 3-way valve modulation. In the
to operate each unit with the highest load it can handle dry/wet mode the spray pump and fan motor(s) are in opera-
- rather than evenly dividing the total heat load across tion and the complete process fluid flow passes through the
all cells. During prolonged periods, idle units may be finned coil bundle. The flow through the wetted prime surface
bypassed and have their basins drained. coil bundle is gradually controlled (using the three-way
2. Fan Cycling: Reduce the heat rejection capacity of the valve arrangement) to maintain a constant process return
unit by cycling fans on/off - CAUTION: Rapid on/off temperature. In the adiabatic mode, the spray pump and fan
cycling of fan motors can cause the fan motor to motor(s) are in operation and the complete process fluid flow
over heat. Set controls to allow a maximum of six passes through the finned coil bundle, though it bypasses
(6) on/off cycles per hour. Cycling the fans off the wetted prime surface coil. The HXV unit remains in this
periodically to prevent ice formation or to melt ice operating mode until the process return temperature is low
accumulating on the air inlet louvers may be necessary. enough to switch over to dry mode.
3. Multi-Speed Motors: If the unit is equipped with two
-speed fan motors, operation at low speed may be In the dry mode the fan motor(s) can be operated at variable
suffcient to prevent icing - Note: When two-speed speeds. For units with more than (1) fan motor, the speed of
motors are used, the motor starter should include the different motors should be equal at all times for the most
a fifteen-second time delay when switching from efficient unit operation.
high to low speed.
4. Variable Frequency Drives: The most precise WARNING: When the fan speed of an HXV Closed Circuit
method of capacity control is accomplished by using Hybrid Cooling Tower is to be changed from the factory
VFDs to control fan motor speed - WARNING: When speed, including the use of a Variable Frequency Drive
the fan speed of a unit is to be changed from the (VFD) device, steps must be taken to avoid operating
factory speed, including the use of a VFD device, at or near “critical speeds”. Consult with your BAC
steps must be taken to avoid operating at or near Representative on any application utilizing variable
“critical speeds”. Consult with your local BAC speed control to determine whether any critical speeds
Representative on any application utilizing may be encountered and if any modifications may be
variable speed control to determine whether any required. Additionally, inverter duty motors are required
critical speeds may be encountered and if any on installations that are to be controlled by VFDs (See
modifications may be required. Additionally, “Variable Frequency Drives” section, page N42). The
inverter duty motors are required on installations spray pump is not in operation and the complete pro-
that are to be controlled by VFDs (see Variable cess fluid flows through both the finned and the wetted
Frequency Drives, page N42). prime surface coil bundles.
Under severe conditions, when fan cycling is insufficient to Consult with your local BAC Representative for specific
prevent icing, it may be necessary to operate the fan(s) in operating sequences with VFD’s, two-speed motors, etc.
reverse to remove any ice accumulation by forcing warm air
out the inlet louvers. CAUTION: DO NOT operate the fans CAUTION: Rapid on/off cycling of fan motors can
in reverse any longer than is necessary since extended cause the fan motor to overheat. Set controls to allow
reverse operation may cause the ice to form on the a maximum of six (6) on/off cycles per hour. If the unit
fan blades, fan stack, or eliminators and damage the has two-speed motors, the motor starter should include
unit. Because of this possibility, units using reverse a minimum fifteen-second time delay when switching
fan operation for ice removal should be equipped with a from high to low speed.
vibration-cut-out switch. The duration of reverse opera-
tion must be limited to a maximum of thirty minutes. A CAUTION: Frequent on/off cycling of the spray pump
time delay of approximately forty seconds between for- may lead excessive scale build-up and reduce wet and
ward and reverse direction should be incorporated into dry performance. During winter months, when the HXV
the motor controls. unit stays in the dry mode, the water from the basin
should be drained. When the basin is drained, any elec-
tric basin heaters, should be disconnected and locked
in the off position.

N46
on galvanized steel surfaces. Stainless steel units and

Water Treatment units protected by the BALTIBOND® Corrosion Protection
System do not require passivation. Consult your water
Although general recommendations regarding the quality of
treatment specialist for specific recommendations regard-
water circulated through BAC evaporative cooling equipment
ing passivation (or repassivation) of galvanized steel sur-
are made below, it is always the responsibility of the end-user
faces.
to contract a competent water treatment specialist to design
an application-specific treatment program for a given sys-
2. Hardness and alkalinity limits may be exceeded under
tem. This program should consider (as a minimum) setting
certain circumstances. Consult your water treatment spe-
and adjustment of the bleed rate, passivation of galvanized
cialist for recommendations.

steel surfaces, chemical treatment, and biological control.
Biological control cannot be ignored. Uncontrolled growth
3. The conversion factor used to determine conductivity is
of algae, slimes, and other microorganisms may contribute to
0.625 (TDS = 0.625 * Conductivity).
the growth of potentially harmful microorganisms, including
Legionella, in the recirculating water system. Furthermore,
the program should consider all components of the system
Bleed Rate
In evaporative cooling equipment, cooling is accomplished
(piping, chiller, heat exchanger, etc.), not just the cooling
by the evaporation of a small portion of the recirculating
tower.
spray water as it flows through the equipment. As this water
evaporates, the impurities originally present remain in the
In order to control scaling and corrosion, a combination
recirculating water. The concentration of the dissolved solids
of chemical treatment and bleed-off should be used to
increases over time and can reach unacceptable levels. In
maintain the given properties of water within the limits
addition, airborne impurities are often introduced into the
shown below. In rare cases where chemical treatment is
recirculating water. If these impurities and contaminants
not required to control scale and corrosion, more conserva-
are not effectively controlled, they can cause scaling, cor-
tive limits are recommended. Similarly, certain limits may be
rosion, and sludge accumulations that reduce heat transfer
exceeded when under the guidance of a water treatment
efficiency and increase system operating costs, potentially
specialist. As make-up water properties, materials of
shortening the useful life of the equipment.
construction, and environmental conditions will vary on
a case-by-case basis, treatment programs will also vary
The degree to which dissolved solids and other impurities
and should always be administered by a water treatment
build up in the recirculating water may be defined as the
specialist.
cycles of concentration. Specifically, cycles of concentra-
tion is the ratio of the concentration of a dissolved solid (for
Recirculated Water Quality Guidelines example - chlorides, sulfates, etc.) in the recirculating water
for Chemically Treated Water to the concentration of the same material in the make-up
water. For optimal heat transfer efficiency and maximum
equipment life, the cycles of concentration should be con-
trolled to maintain the quality of the recirculating water within
the guidelines given above. In order to control the cycles of
concentration such that the above guidelines are maintained,
it will be necessary to “bleed” or “blow down” a small amount
of recirculating water from the system. This “bleed” water is
replenished with fresh make-up water, thereby limiting the
build-up of impurities.
Typically, the bleed is accomplished automatically through

a solenoid valve controlled by a conductivity meter. The
conductivity meter set point is the water conductivity at the
desired cycles of concentration and should be determined
by a competent water treatment expert. (Note: The solenoid
valve and conductivity meter must be supplied by others.)
Alternatively, a bleed line with a valve can be used to contin-
1. Galvanized steel units require passivation in order to pre- uously bleed from the system. In this arrangement, the rate
vent white rust. To passivate the galvanized steel, the pH of bleed can be adjusted using the valve in the bleed line and
must be maintained between 7 and 8.2 for 4 to 8 weeks measured by filling a container of known volume while noting
or until the new zinc surfaces turn dull gray in color. After the time period. The bleed rate and water quality should
passivation, the pH can be maintained at higher levels. be periodically checked to ensure that adequate control
Repassivation may be necessary if white deposits appear of the water quality is being maintained.

N47
The following example illustrates a bleed rate calculation. Chemical Treatment

Given: Follow all applicable laws and regulations while handling and
Closed Circuit Cooling Tower disposing chemicals.
Process Fluid Flow Rate = 800 GPM Chemical treatment programs must meet the following
Range = 10°F requirements:
Maximum Allowable Chloride Concentration = 250 ppm
Concentration of Chlorides in Make-Up Water = 45 ppm 1. The chemicals must be compatible with the unit materi-
als of construction as well as other materials used in the
Find: Bleed Rate system (pipe, heat exchanger, etc.)
E 2. Chemical scale and corrosion inhibitors, and particularly

Solution: B =
N–1 acid (if used) should be introduced into the circulating
water through automatic feeders at a point in the system
where total mixing and dilution can occur before reaching
the evaporative cooling equipment. Stainless steel and
Where: B = Bleed Rate (GPM) galvanized steel materials coated with the BALTIBOND®
E = Evaporation Rate (GPM) = Corrosion Protection System are less sensitive to the addi-
Q (GPM) x R (°F) x .001 tion of acid than galvanized steel materials. Regardless of
Q = Process Fluid Flow Rate (GPM) the unit materials of construction, the preferred injection
R = Range = Entering – point for chemical scale and corrosion inhibitors is on the
discharge side of the recirculating spray water pump(s).
Leaving Fluid Temperature (°F)
These chemicals should never be batch fed directly into
N = Number of Cycles of Concentration = CR/CM
the cold water basin or water distribution system, as such
CR = Concentration in Recirculating Water practice can cause severe damage to directly contacted
CM = Concentration in Make-Up Water areas.
So in this case, 3. When chlorine is added to the system, free residual shall
not exceed 1 ppm. Exceeding this limit may accelerate
corrosion.
E = 800 x 10 x 0.001 = 8 GPM
N = 250 = 5.56
HXV Blowdown
45 Note that the HXV has been designed to minimize water
usage. Therefore the use of an automated blowdown sys-
8 tem is highly recommended, to maximize water savings and
B= = 1.75 GPM
5.56 – 1 reduce sewage charges.
This example focuses on a single parameter (chloride

Biological Control
Bleed-off with or without chemical treatment for scale and
concentration) of water only. The bleed rate required for a
corrosion control is not adequate for control of biological
system (when evaluating more than one parameter) is the
contamination. The growth of algaes, slimes, and other
highest bleed rate required to keep all parameters within
microorganisms, if unchecked, will reduce system efficiency
recommended limits.
and may contribute to the growth of potentially harmful
The evaporation rate (E) can be determined by any one of microorganisms, including Legionella, in the recirculating
the following methods: water system. All water treatment programs for evapora-
tive cooling equipment must employ some form of bio-
1. The evaporation rate is approximately 2 GPM per 1 million logical control to control Legionella and other biological
BTUH of heat rejection. contaminants. A competent water treatment specialist
should be contacted for specific recommendations.
2. The evaporation rate is approximately 3 GPM per 100
tons of refrigeration. Accordingly, a biocide treatment program specifically
designed to address biological control should be initiated
3. Evaporation Rate = Q (GPM) x R (°F) x .001 (as shown in when the system is first filled with water and adminis-
the example above) tered on a regular basis thereafter in accordance with
the supplier’s instructions. Solid or granular biocides
should be introduced through a chemical "pot" feeder
installed in parallel with the system circulating pump(s).
Dilute liquid biocides may be added directly to the basin. If
ozone water treatment is used, ozone concentrations should
not exceed 0.1 - 0.5 ppm in order to ensure maximum equip-
ment life.

N48
Start-Up Following a Factory Authorized Parts

Shut-Down Period Baltimore Aircoil Company maintains a stock of replacement
parts at each of its several manufacturing facilities. Many
To minimize risk from biological contamination following a BAC Representatives also have their local stocks of BAC
shutdown period, it is recommended that the entire sys- replacement parts. These parts are designed and built spe-
tem (evaporative cooling equipment, system piping, heat cifically for BAC units and assure BAC’s customers of:
exchangers, etc.) be drained when the system is to be shut-
down for more than three days. To resume operation of a • Guaranteed performance
drained system, clean all debris, such as leaves and dirt from • Immediate availability
the unit and refill the system with fresh water. While operat- • Original equipment quality

ing the recirculating spray pump(s) and prior to operating • Local assistance with service problems
the unit fan(s), execute one of the following two alternative
biocide treatment programs: All factory-authorized parts are guaranteed for one (1) full
year, and their use will ensure continued maximum per-
1. Resume treatment with the biocide that had been used formance from your BAC equipment. Shipment of parts
prior to shutdown. Maintain the maximum recommended is normally made within three (3) days after receipt of an
biocide residual (for the specific biocide) for a sufficient order. In emergency situations, shipment can usually be
period of time (residual and time will vary with the biocide) made within 24 hours. To order factory authorized parts,
as recommended by the water treatment supplier to bring contact your local BAC Representative. You can determine
the system under good biological control. Only after this your local BAC Representative by the label next to the unit
treatment period is completed should the unit fan(s) be nameplate, by calling 1-(800)-896-8497, or via the Internet at
started. www.BaltimoreAircoil.com. Be sure to include the unit serial
number when ordering any parts.
2. Check the pH of the circulating water and, if necessary,
adjust it to 7.0 to 7.6. Then treat the system with sodium To facilitate servicing the FXV Closed Circuit Cooling Tower/
hypochlorite to maintain a level of 4 to 5 mg/l (ppm) free HXV Closed Circuit Hybrid Cooling Tower/CXV Evaporative
chlorine (as Cl2) over a six (6) hour period. Test kits that Condenser, it is suggested that one of each of the following
can be used to measure the free residual of chlorine are spare parts be carried on hand:
commercially available. Only after this treatment period is
completed should the unit fan(s) be started. Make-Up Float Ball – Large diameter, foam filled plastic
float for make-up valve.
Coil Cleaning
Both the inside and outside of the heat exchanger coil may Valve Seat for Make-up Valve – Elastomer seat for positive
require occasional cleaning. The chemicals used must be shut off.
compatible with the materials being treated (for example
Set of Fan Shaft Bearings – Grease-lubricated ball bear-
- standard coil: outside of the coil is galvanized steel; inside
ings with special moisture proof seals and integral slinger
of the coil is black carbon steel). For finned coils, the coil
rings designed specifically for evaporative cooler applica-
cleaning must be careful not to damage the fins (outside of
tions.
the coils) and the coils themselves. For specific recommen-
dations on coil cleaning, consult a qualified consultant. Fan Belt – Solid backed, multi-groove, specially compound-
ed, neoprene polyester drive band.
Weld Byproduct Cleaning (CXV)
The installation and manufacturing processes commonly Spray Nozzle and Grommet Kit – 360° large diameter
used for field assembly of steel-piped systems may leave plastic metering nozzles engineered to give optimum water
weld byproducts inside coils and connecting piping (espe- distribution.
cially in refrigeration systems). It is common practice to
install filters and/or strainers that remove contaminants dur- In addition, your local BAC Representative usually stocks
ing initial system operation. Shortly after system startup, the common wear items for immediate delivery, and is available
filters and/or strainers should be cleaned or replaced. to inspect your unit to ensure it is in proper operating condi-
tion.
Summary Please record your unit’s model number and serial number
For specific recommendations on treatment for scale, cor- (as they appear on the unit nameplate) on the front and
rosion and biological control, consult a qualified water treat- back cover. This will help ensure the quickest, most accurate
ment consultant. response to your inquiries.
In addition to the issues addressed above, some routine
maintenance is also required to keep evaporative cooling
equipment in its optimal condition. Refer to the maintenance
procedures addressed in this bulletin for more information.

N49
Series V & Low Profile Series V

Cooling Towers
Counter Flow Products
Baltimore Aircoil Company Series V equipment has been designed to give long, trouble-free service when
properly installed, operated and maintained. To obtain optimum performance and maximum service life, it
is important that a program of regular inspection and maintenance be carried out. This manual is
published as a guide to establishing such a program.
Included in the bulletin are the recommended services for start-up, operation and shutdown and the
approximate frequency for each. Note that the recommendations on frequency of service are minimums.
Where operating conditions are severe, the services should be performed more often. For each
required service, follow the procedures outlined under the “Maintenance Procedures” section of this manual.
The VT1, VT0, VTL, VF1, VFL, VC1, VC2 and VCL models are illustrated in a cutaway form on pages N50 thru
N53 with the major points of inspection and service identified. A copy of the unit certified drawing should also
be available for reference. If you need additional information about operation or maintenance, contact your
local BAC Representative whose name and telephone number are on the label at the connection end of the
unit. The model and serial number of the unit are also located in this area.
Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page Fan Motor Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N58

Construction Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N50-N53 Locking Collars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N58
Operation and Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . .N54 Adjustable Motor Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N58
Operation and Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . .N55 Fan Belt Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N59
Initial and Seasonal Start-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N55 Fan Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N59
After 24 Hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N55 Spray Nozzles and Heat Transfer Section . . . .N60
Seasonal Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N55 Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N60
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N56
Cold Water Basin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N56
Make-up Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N56
Fan Shaft Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N57

N50
Series V
Model VT1 and VT0 Cooling Towers
Spray Branches Heat Transfer Casing Section

Eliminators
Spray Nozzles
Spray Header
Fill
Casing
Basin Section
Water Make-up Valve
Assembly
Fan Housing
Adjustable Float
Access Door
Fan Screens
Strainer
Fan Shaft
Fan Motor
Fan Drive Fan

Fan Bearing

N51
Series V
Model VF1 Closed Circuit Cooling Towers
Model VC1 Evaporative Condensers
Spray Branches Heat Transfer Coil Section
Eliminators
Casing
Spray Nozzles
Coil
Water Make-up Valve Assembly Basin Section
Adjustable Float
Strainer
Water Pump
Fan Housing
Water Bleed Line
Fan Screens
Fan Motor
Fan
Fan Drives
Fan Bearing Fan Shaft

N52
Series V
Model VC2 Evaporative Condensers
Spray Branches Heat Transfer Coil Section

Eliminators
Casing
Coil
Basin Section
Spray Nozzles
Two-stage
Axial-Flow
Fan
Water Make-up Valve Assembly
Fan Ball
Access Door Bearing
Adjustable Float Fan

Screen
Spray Water Pump
Fan Drives
Water Bleedline
Motor Base
Fan Adjustment
Strainer Motor
Fan Shaft
Pump End
Access Door Fan End
Adjustable Two Stage Axial Flow Fan
Float
Fan Screen
Spray Water
Pump Fan Shaft
Water Fan Ball Bearing

Bleedline
Water Make-up Fan Drives
Strainer Fan Motor
Valve Assembly

N53
Low Profile Series V
Model VTL Cooling Towers
Eliminators
Fan Shaft and

Bearing
Spray
Branches
Fan
Spray
Nozzles
Fan Motor
Fill
Strainer Assembly Water Make-up Valve Assembly
Model VFL Closed Circuit Cooling Towers

Model VCL Evaporative Condensers
Spray Nozzles
Eliminators
Fan Shaft and Bearing
Spray Branches
Coil
Fan Motor
Access Door
Water Pump V-Belt Drive System with

Guard

N54
Operation and Maintenance Schedule

Table 1: Recommended Maintenance Services for Series V and Low Profile Series V Equipment.
Every Six
Type of Service Start-Up Monthly Months Shutdown Annually
Inspect General Condition of Unit X X
Clean Debris from Unit X X X
Clean and Flush Basin X X X
Clean Basin Strainer X X X
Check and Adjust Basin Water Level X X
Inspect Heat Transfer Section X X

Inspect Spray Nozzles X X X
Check and Adjust Fan Belt Tension X X
Check and Adjust Bleed Rate X X
Check Operation of Make-up Valve X X
Check Unit for Unusual Noise or Vibration X X
Check Fan Bearing Locking Collars X X
Check Motor Voltage and Current X X
Lubricate Fan Shaft Bearings X X X
Lubricate Fan Motor Bearings X
Lubricate Motor Base Adjusting Screw X X X
Check Fan for Rotation Without Obstruction X
Check Fan and Pump Motor for Proper Rotation X
Drain Basin and Piping X
Inspect Protective Finish X
WARNING: Before performing any maintenance or inspection, make certain that all power has been disconnected
and locked in the off position.
SAFETY: The operation, maintenance, and repair of injury and to prevent damage to the equipment, its
this equipment must be undertaken only by qualified associated system, and the premises.
personnel. All qualified personnel should be thoroughly
familiar with the equipment, the associated system and WARNING: PVC eliminators on this product are not
controls, and the procedures set forth in this manual. designed to support the weight of a person or to be
Proper care, procedures, and tools must be used in used as a storage or work surface for any equipment
handling, lifting, installing, operating, maintaining and or tools. Use of these PVC eliminators as walking,
repairing this equipment to prevent personal injury and/or working or storage surfaces may result in injury to
property damage. personnel or damage to equipment. Units with PVC
WARNING: When the fan speed of the cooling tower eliminators should not be covered with a plastic
is changed from the factory set speed, including tarpaulin.
changes achieved by the use of a variable fan speed Access: Depending upon site conditions, it also may be
control device, steps must be taken to avoid necessary to install bottom air inlet screens, ladders, safety
operating at or near the fan’s “critical speed” which cages, stairways, access platforms, hand rails and toe
could result in fan failure and possible injury or boards for the safety and convenience of authorized
damage. Consult with your local BAC Representative service and maintenance personnel.
on any such applications. At no time should this equipment be operated without
Lockout Warning: For the protection of authorized all fan screens, access panels, and access doors in
service and maintenance personnel, each fan and pump place.
motor associated with this equipment must be installed Caution: The recirculating water system may contain
with a lockable disconnect switch located within sight of chemicals or biological contaminants, including Legionella,
the cooling tower. No service work should be performed which could be harmful if inhaled or ingested. Accordingly,
on or near the fans, motors, and drives or inside the unit personnel who may be exposed directly to the discharge
without first ensuring the fan and pump motors have been airstream and the associated drift, mists generated during
disconnected and locked out. operation of the water distribution system and/or fans, or
Electrical Hazard: All electrical, mechanical, and mists produced by high pressure water jets or compressed
rotating machinery constitute a potential hazard, air, should these be used to clean portions of components
particularly for those not familiar with its design, of the recirculating water system, should wear respiratory
construction, and operation. Accordingly, adequate protection equipment approved for such use by OSHA
safeguards (including the use of protective and/or local occupational safety and health authorities.
enclosures where necessary) should be taken with
this equipment both to safeguard the public from
WARRANTIES- Please refer to the Limitation of Warranties applicable to and in effect at the time of sale/purchase of these products.
FREEZE PROTECTION - These products must be protected by mechanical and operational methods against damage
and/or reduced effectiveness due to possible freeze-up. Please refer to the Cold Weather Operation Guidelines (page
N61) or contact your local BAC Representative for recommended protection alternatives.

N55
Operation and Maintenance Procedures

Initial and Seasonal Start-Up: 14. Check the voltage and current of all three legs
Prior to initial start-up or after a shut down period, the of the fan and pump motors. The current
unit should be thoroughly inspected and cleaned: should not exceeded the service factor of the
nameplate rating. After prolonged shutdowns,
1. Clean all debris from the inlet air screens, fans, the motor insulation should be checked with a
eliminators, heat transfer sections, and the cold megger insulation tester prior to restarting the
water basin. motor. To prevent motor overload, do not
2. Drain the cold water basin (with basin strainers operate the fan motor without design water flow
in place) and flush to remove accumulated dirt. over unit.
3. Remove, clean, and replace basin strainers. 15. Check the bleed system to be sure it is fully
4. Turn the fan(s) by hand to ensure rotation functional and the bleed rate has been properly
without obstruction. adjusted prior to putting the unit into
5. Check the locking collar on each fan bearing operation (see “Water Treatment”).
assembly and tighten as required.
6. Check and, if necessary, adjust the fan belt After 24 Hours:
tension.
7. Prior to seasonal start-up, lubricate the fan After 24 hours of operating under load, the following servic-
shaft. The motor marked “cooling tower duty” es should be performed:
has permanently lubricated and sealed bearings
designed for the life of the motor and cannot be 1. Check the unit for any unusual noise or vibration.
greased. 2. Check the operating water level in the cold water
8. Check float operated make-up valve to be sure it basin. Adjust the make-up float valve if necessary.
is operating freely. 3. Readjust the fan belt tension.
9. Fill the cold water basin with fresh water to the 4. Inspect the spray nozzles and heat transfer section.
over-flow level.
a. The initial biocide treatment should be Operation:
applied at initial start-up or before restart-up,
During operation, the unit should be inspected, cleaned, and
where the basin was completely drained.
lubricated on a regular basis. The required services and
(see Water Treatment section)
recommended frequency for each are summarized in Table
b. Following a shutdown period, where the
1 on page N54 of this manual.
basin was not completely drained: It is
recommended that an initial shock
treatment of appropriate biocides be Seasonal Shut-Down:
administered at restart-up to eliminate
The following services should be performed whenever the
accumulated biological contaminants.
unit is to be shut-down for more than three days:
10. Set the float on the make-up valve to shut off
the valve when the float is approximately 1/2”
1. Drain the cold water basin and all piping that will
below the overflow level.
be exposed to freezing temperatures.
11. On Closed Circuit Cooling Towers and
2. Clean and flush the cold water basin with the
Evaporative Condensers, start the pump and
basin strainers in place. Leave the cold water
check for the proper rotation as indicated by the
basin drain open so rain and melting snow will
arrow on the pump cover. On installations where
drain from the unit.
the unit pump was not furnished by the factory,
3. Clean the basin strainers and reinstall.
a globe valve should be installed in the pump
4. Lubricate the fan shaft and motor bearings,
discharge line and the pump flow rate adjusted
motor base, and motor adjusting screw.
to the correct water flow and pressure (2 psig at
5. Close the shut-off valve in the make-up water line
spray header connection). Pressure greater
(by others) and drain all exposed make-up water
than 10.0 psig may cause damage to the
piping.
6. Inspect the protective finish on the unit. Clean and
12. Inspect the spray nozzles and heat transfer
refinish as required (see page N60).
section.
7. For VF1 and VFL closed circuit cooling towers,
13. Start the fan and check for the proper rotation
follow the coil freeze protection guidelines
as indicated by the arrow on the fan housing.
explained on page N61.

N56
Maintenance Procedures
Cold Water Basin Make-Up Valve
The cold water basin should be inspected regularly. Any A float operated mechanical water make-up assembly is
trash or debris which may have accumulated in the basin furnished as standard equipment on all Series V and Low
or on the strainers should be removed. Each month, the Profile Series V equipment unless the unit has been ordered
entire cold water basin should be drained, cleaned and with the optional electric water level control package or for
flushed with fresh water to remove the silt and sediment remote sump application. It is located inside the unit cold
water basin within easy reach from the access door at the

which normally collects in the basin during operation. If
not removed periodically, this sediment can become connection end of each unit.
corrosive and cause deterioration of the protective
finish. When flushing the basin, the strainers should be The standard make-up assembly (See Figure 1) consists of a
left in place to prevent the sediment from re-entering the bronze make-up valve connected to a float arm assembly and
system. After the basin has been flushed, the strainers actuated by a large diameter polystyrene filled plastic float.
should be removed, cleaned, and replaced before refilling The float is mounted on an all-thread rod which is held in
the basin with fresh water. place by wing nuts. The operating water level in the cold
water basin can be adjusted by repositioning the float and all-
CAUTION: Do not use acid to clean the strainers
thread rod using the wing nuts provided.
The operating water level in the cold water basin will vary The make-up assembly should be inspected monthly and
somewhat with system thermal load (evaporation rate), adjusted as necessary. The valve itself should be
the bleed rate employed and the make-up water supply inspected annually for leakage and the valve seat
pressure. Because the typical winter load is less than the replaced if necessary. The make-up water supply
summer load, the winter evaporation rate is frequently pressure should be maintained between 15 and 50 psig
less than the summer evaporation rate. With this reduced for proper operation of the valve. To set the initial basin
evaporation rate in the winter, the water level in the cold water level, adjust the wing nuts so that the make-up valve is
water basin will increase unless the float is re-adjusted. completely closed when the water level in the cold water
The operating water level should be checked monthly basin is 1/2” below the overflow connection. Under design
and the float re-adjusted as necessary to maintain the thermal load and with average city water pressure (15 to 50
recommended operating level. psig) at the valve, this setting should produce the operating
The water level in the basin of equipment designed for water levels stated in Table 2. Note that if the thermal load is
remote sump operation is a function of the circulating less than the design load at the time of unit start-up, the pro-
water flow rate, water outlet connection size, quantity and cedure may produce operating levels greater than that shown.
location, and outlet piping size and configuration. The It may be necessary to re-adjust the float in order to
remote sump unit is supplied without a water make-up attain the recommended operating level. The unit basin
assembly and the basin operating level during remote should be closely monitored and water level adjusted as
sump operation is not adjustable. necessary during the first 24 hours of operation.
WARNING: Openings and/or submerged obstructions
may exist in the bottom of the cold water basin. Use
caution when walking inside the equipment. Table 2: Operating Water Level
Operating Height
Model Number (measured from
basin bottom)
VTL, VFL, VCL 5 1/2”
VF1-009 thru VF1-036, VC1-10 thru 135 13 1/2”
VF1-048, VC1-150 thru 205 16 1/2”
VF1-072, VC1-N208 thru N230 17”
VT0-12 to VT0-116 12 7/8”
VT0-132 to VT0-176 15 1/2”
All VT1-N, VF1-096, VF1-144N, VF1-192, VF1-288N,
17”
VC1-N243 thru N470, VC1-C216 thru C469
Figure 1: Water Make-Up Valve Assembly All VT1, VF1-144, VF1-216, VF1-288, VF1-432,
14”
VC1-386 thru 1608
VC2-N138-N191 8 7/8”
VC2-N206-N235 9 5/8”
VC2-N261-N446 6”
VC2-319-1914 12 1/8”
VC2-N870 thru VC2-N1204 14”

N57
Maintenance Procedures (continued)

As an option, an electric water level control package is Amoco - Rycon Premium #3 Chevron - SRI
available in lieu of the above described mechanical Mobil - Mobil #28 Mobil - SHC 32
make-up assembly. The package consists of a Shell - Alvania 3 Shell - Dolium "R"
probe-type liquid level control assembly and a slow Texaco - Regal AFB 2
closing solenoid valve. Stainless steel electrodes,
factory set at predetermined lengths, extend from a
NEMA 4 electrode holder into the cold water basin.
These electrodes should be periodically wiped

clean to prevent accumulations of scale, corrosion,
sludge or biological growth from interfering with
the electrical circuit. With the electrical water level
control package, the water level is maintained at the
recommended operating level regardless of the system
thermal load. Therefore, it is not necessary, nor is it
recommended that the operating level be adjusted.
During initial and seasonal start-up, the probe type level
control assembly should be bypassed to fill the cold
water basin to approximately 1/2” below the overflow
connection. Unit operation at the recommended water
level will ensure that the unit basin contains sufficient
water volume to prevent air entrainment in the Figure 2: Ball bearing
circulating pump during system start-up and to provide
sufficient excess basin capacity to accept the total Only lubricate the bearings with a hand grease gun. Do
system pull-down volume. The cooling tower not use high pressure grease guns sine they may
“total-system pull-down volume” is the quantity of water rupture the bearing seals. When lubricating, purge the old
suspended in the tower during pump operation plus that grease from the bearing by gradually adding grease until a
contained in the water distribution system, external bead of new grease appears at the seal.
piping, and any heat exchangers which could drain to
the tower cold water basin when the circulating pump is
shut down.
Fan Shaft Bearings

The fan shafts on VT0, VT1, VTL, VF1, VFL, VC1, and
VCL units are supported at each end by ball bearings
(see Figure 2), each equipped with a lubrication fitting
and locking collar. Models VT0-65 to 116, VF1-027,
VF1-036, and VC1-72 thru 135 also have a sleeve
bearing (see Figure 3) located midway on the shaft.
The fan shafts on VC2 units are supported by ball
bearings (see Figure 2A) in the middle of the shaft with
fans at each end. Each bearing is equipped with a
lubrication fitting and locking collar. Lubrication lines
are extended to the outside of the unit as standard.
Figure 2A: Ball bearing
Ball Bearings
Under normal operating conditions, the bearings should Sleeve Bearings
be greased every 2,000 operating hours or at least Prior to start-up and during the first week of operation, the
every six months. The bearings should also be bearing oil cup (see Figure 3) must be refilled with an
greased at seasonal start-up and shutdown. Only industrial-type mineral oil (see Table 3) to saturate the felt
lubricate the bearings with one of the following wick in the bearing reservoir. After the initial start-up, fill the
water resistant inhibited greases which are good for bearing oil cup every 1,000 operating hours or at least every
ambient temperatures ranging from -65ºF (-53.9ºC) six months. When ambient temperatures below 0˚F are
to 250ºF (121.1ºC): expected, a light oil must be used. With such light oils, the
bearing oil cup should be checked and refilled several times
during the first several hours of operation until the bearings
reach operating temperature.

N58

Figure 4: Locking collar assembly
Figure 3: Sleeve bearing Adjustable Motor Base

The motor base slides and adjusting screw (see Figure 5)
should be coated twice a year using a good quality
Table 3: Sleeve Bearing Lubricants
corrosion inhibiting grease such as one of those
TEMP AMBIENT BAC P/N TEXACO EXXON recommended for lubricating the fan shaft bearings
(see page N57).
70˚F to 100˚F Regal R & O 320 Teresstic 220
30˚F to 70˚F #582628PI Regal R & O 150 Teresstic 100
5˚F to 30˚F Regal R & O 32 Teresstic 32
#582627PI
-25˚F to 5˚F Capella 32
Caution: Do not use oils containing detergents for

bearing lubrication. Detergent oils will remove the
graphite in the bearing sleeve and cause bearing
failure. Also, do not disturb bearing alignment by
tightening the bearing cap adjustment on a new unit
as it is torque-adjusted at the factory.
Figure 5: Adjustable motor base
VT0, VT1, VTL, VF1, VFL, VC1, VCL
Fan Motor Bearings
All Cooling Tower Duty Totally Enclosed Fan-Cooled
(TEFC) fan motor bearings are permanently lubricated Adjustable Motor Base
and sealed for life. The motor base hangers, hinges, and adjusting screw (see
Figure 5A and 5B) should be coated twice a year using a
good quality corrosion inhibiting grease such as one of
Locking Collars those recommended for lubricating the fan shaft bearings
Each eccentric locking collar should be checked (see page N57).
every six months to ensure that the inner bearing
race is secured to the fan shaft. The locking collar can
be set using the following procedure (see Figure 4):
1. Loosen the set screw.

2. Using a drift pin or center punch, tap the collar (in
the hole provided) tangentially in the direction of
rotation while holding the shaft.
3. Retighten the set screw.
Figure 5A: Adjustable motor base

VC2-N138-N446

N59
Fan Drives
The drive alignment should be checked annually to
ensure maximum belt life. This can be done by placing a
straight edge across both sheaves as shown in Figure 6.
When the drive is properly aligned, the straightedge will
contact all four points as indicated. If re-alignment is
necessary, loosen the motor sheave and align it with the fan
sheave. Allow approximately 1/4” for draw-up as the motor
sheave is pulled tight on the bushing, then retighten the
bushing screw:
Figure 6: Checking Sheave Alignment
Figure 5B: Adjustable Motor Base

VC2-319-1914
Fan Belt Adjustment

Some of the smaller axial fan models use individual
V-belts, but most of the models use multi-groove,
banded belts. Belt tension should be checked and
adjusted (as needed) every month. To properly
adjust the belt tension, position the fan motor so that
moderate pressure on the belt midway between the
sheaves will produce 1/2” deflection in centrifugal fan
units and the deflection shown in Table 4 below for axial
fan units. The position of the fan motor can easily be
changed by adjusting the rod which extends from the
frame to the motor base. Motor Replacement
On rare occasions, the fan motor will have to be replaced.
1. Loosen the locking nut (See figure 5, 5A, 5B) On the VC2 models, make sure the drain holes are pointing
2. Rotate the adjusting nut in the downward direction. This may require that the end
a. To loosen belt tension, turn clockwise (on models bell be reversed on some motors.
VTL, VFL and VCL turn counterclockwise)
b. To tighten belt tension, turn counterclockwise (on
models VTL, VFL and VCL turn clockwise).
Spray Nozzles and Heat
3. Tighten the locking nut - failure to do so may result Transfer Section
in the motor base vibrating free, which will loosen The spray nozzles and heat transfer section should be
the belt tension. inspected and cleaned each month. The inspection
procedure is as follows:
Note: There should be no “chirp” or “squeal” when the 1. Shut off the fan, but leave the pump running.
fan motor is started. 2. Remove the eliminators.
3. Check to see if the nozzles are producing the spray
pattern shown in figure 7 for coil products only.
Table 4: Fan Belt Deflection for VC2 Models 4. Clean any nozzles which are clogged. If necessary,
the nozzle and rubber grommet may be removed for
Model Number Deflection (inches) cleaning.
5. Inspect the coil or fill surface. Any corrosion,
VC2-N138-N191 9/16” damage, or obstructions must be corrected.
6. Some VF1, VFL, VC1, VC2, and VCL units are
provided with an extended surface finned coil.
VC2-N206-N235 11/16”
During the winter season, when the ambient
temperature is well below design, units with this coil
VC2-N261-N301 11/16” can operate with the spray pump off. The coil is
designed for seasonal dry operation followed by
VC2-N356-N446 13/16” seasonal wet operation, and not for frequent
cycling of the spray pump. Frequent spray pump
cycling may lead to excessive scale buildup.
VC2-319-1914 13/16”
Caution: Do not use steam or high pressure water to
clean cooling tower fill or materials other than steel.

N60
Maintenance Procedures (continued)

Cold Weather Operation
Series V and Low Profile Series V equipment can be
operated in subfreezing ambient conditions provided
proper measures are taken:

1. Protection against basin water freezing when the
unit is idle.
2. Capacity control to prevent ice formation in heat
transfer sections during operation.
3, Protection against coil freezing (VF1 and VFL
Closed Circuit Cooling Towers and cooling circuits in
VC1,VC2, and VCL Evaporative Condensers).
Figure 7 - Nozzle Spray Distribution Cold weather applications should be reviewed with your
local BAC Representative to ensure that the unit
Corrosion Protection selection, location, control, and accessories are
Series V units feature corrosion-resistant materials. The fill adequate for reliable operation. The following
and eliminators of the VT1, VT0 and VTL are made of paragraphs are general guidelines, which should be
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) which requires no protection against followed to minimize the possibility of freeze-up.
rot, decay, rust, or biological attack. The standard coil of the
VF1, VFL, VC1, VC2, and VCL is constructed of all prime Protection Against Basin
surface steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. The
Water Freezing
balance of the construction in all units is either heavy-gauge
When the unit is shutdown and exposed to
galvanized steel, the optional BALTIBOND® Corrosion
subfreezing ambient temperatures, the basin water
Protection System, or Series 300 stainless steel.
may freeze. A remote sump located in a heated indoor
area is an ideal method of protection, since the water in
Galvanized Steel Construction the unit and connecting piping will drain by gravity
The standard Series V and Low Profile Series V units are whenever the circulating pump has stopped.
constructed of hot-dip galvanized steel. These units should Alternatively, basin heaters, electrical immersion
be inspected annually. Inspect the inside of the unit for heaters, steam coil, or hot water coil can be used to
blemishes or corrosion on the galvanized steel. Affected maintain the basin water at a minimum temperature of
areas should be thoroughly wire brushed and recoated with 40˚F (4.4ºC). In addition, to protect the cold water
a cold galvanizing compound such as Zinc-Rich Compound basin, all exposed water piping, including pump
(ZRC). piping below the overflow level and makeup water
lines, should be traced with electrical heater tape
BALTIBOND® Corrosion and insulated.
Protection System
The Series V and Low Profile Series V units can be
Capacity Control
constructed of hot-dip galvanized steel, protected with the It is necessary to prevent the recirculating water
BALTIBOND® Corrosion Protection System as an option. from approaching freezing conditions when the unit
Scratches and scrapes on parts which do not require is operating under load. Capacity control on
extraordinary corrosion protection can be touched up with a centrifugal fan units may be achieved through fan
repair kit (BAC Part No. 16-133P). In the unlikely event that cycling, capacity control dampers, the ENERGY-
the damage is more extensive than simple scratches or MISER® Fan System, two-speed motors, or inverter duty
dents, contact your local BAC Representative. motors. Capacity control dampers and VFD fan speed
control offer the greatest protection and should be used
for close temperature control. Capacity control on axial
fan units (VC2 only) may be achieved by fan cycling,
two-speed fan motors, or VFD fan speed control.

N61
WARNING: Rapid on-off cycling can cause the fan WARNING: Before performing any maintenance or
motor to overheat, leading to premature failure. It inspection, make certain all electric power has been
is required that controls be set to allow a maximum disconnected and locked in the off position.
of six on-off cycles per hour.
Maximum Allowable Wire Runs: Good practice
Multiple fan motors serving a single coil, fill section, or suggests locating the VFD close to the inverter duty motor;
fan section must be cycled simultaneously. This applies however lead length is not limited when using a VFD with a
to models VT1-478 through VT1-600, VF1-216, BAC supplied standard inverter duty motor. If using a
VF1-432, VC1-540 through 804, VC1-1158-1608, and non-standard motor, consult your local BAC Representative
VC2-319 through 1914. for lead length guidelines.

Units with two-speed motors should have a
15-second time delay during switch down from high Protection Against Coil Freezing
to low speed to avoid overloads on the low speed
windings of the motor. Units with the ENERGY- (Models VF1 and VFL Only)
MISER® Fan System should also have a 15-second time The best protection against coil freeze-up is the use of an
delay during the switch down from high to low speed to anti-freeze solution. An industrial grade inhibited ethylene
avoid overloads on the lower horsepower motor. glycol or propylene glycol solution is recommended for most
Please note that capacity control dampers allow the unit installations.
to operate longer and with closer control than the When anti-freeze solution is not possible, the system must
ENERGY-MISER® Fan System, two-speed motor, and/or be operated to meet both of the following conditions.
fan cycling. The use of a modulating spray water 1. Maintain the minimum recommended flow through
by-pass or pump cycling is not a recommended the coil at all times (see Table 5 below).
method of capacity control. 2. Maintain a heat load on the circulating fluid so that
the temperature of the fluid leaving the coil will
not fall below 50˚F (10ºC).
Motors: Applications employing variable frequency
Table 5: VF1 and VFL Minimum Coil Flow Requirements
drives (VFDs) for fan motor control must use inverter
If the process load is extremely light or shut off, it may be
duty electric motors built in compliance with NEMA
necessary to apply an auxiliary heat load to the circulating
Standard MG.1, Part 31. The standard fan motors
fluid to maintain the leaving fluid temperature at 50˚F (10ºC)
normally furnished with BAC products are not
when freezing conditions exist.*
intended for this duty and will not be warranted if
so applied. Model Number Minimum Coil Flow (gpm)
VF1-009, VF1-018
50
WARNING: When the fan speed of a Series V VF1-027, VF1-036
Evaporative Cooling Product is to be changed from VF1-048 75
the factory set speed, including the use of a VF1-072 100
variable speed control device, steps must be taken VF1-096, VF1-144N 125
to avoid operating at or near the fan’s “critical VF1-144, VF1-216N 200
speed” with resulting excessive vibration and VF1-192, VF1-288N 250
stresses and the risk of personal injury and/or VF1-288, VF1-432 400
property damage. Consult your local BAC VFL-012 thru VFL-048 65
VFL-072 thru VFL-096 125
Representative on any application utilizing variable
speed control to determine whether any critical
Draining the coil is not recommended as a normal
speeds may be encountered and if any
method of freeze protection. Frequent draining promotes
modifications may be required.
corrosion inside the coil tube. However, draining is
acceptable as an emergency method of freeze protection if
Recommended Operating Speeds: For optimum
the coil is not protected by an anti-freeze solution. Your local
system performance and equipment longevity, fan
BAC Representative should be consulted for guidelines on
motors should be operated below 10%. Fans must not
the installation of an emergency coil drain system.
be operated in excess of 100% speed without prior
consultation with your local BAC Representative,
nor within 10% of any unit frequencies.
* For evaporative chilling applications only, the coil leaving fluid temperature can be maintained as low as 45˚F(7.2ºC) with
glycol solutions. Consult your local BAC Representative for necessary precautionary measures.

N62
Register for your

Guide and you may
WIN ®
A BOSE
WAVE® RADIO
WITH CD PLAYER
For a limited time

receive a
free copy
of the new BAC


N63
ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Unit

Introduction
Baltimore Aircoil Company's ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Units are designed for long, trouble free
service when properly installed, operated, and maintained. This manual presents the procedures,
precautions, and safeguards for rigging, installing, operating, and maintaining these units. These
instructions, along with the certified drawing(s), should be thoroughly reviewed prior to receiving the
equipment to ensure all personnel understand the requirements and all necessary equipment is available.
All work should follow sound engineering practices and comply with federal, state, and local codes. If
additional information is needed about installing, operating or maintaining this equipment, please contact
the local BAC Representative whose name and telephone number are on a label at the connection end
of the unit.
Table of Contents:
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N63
Receiving & Rigging
Inspection of Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N64
Temporary Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N64
Rigging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N64
Installation
Site Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N65
Support Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N66
Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N66
Tank Filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N67
System Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N68
Operation and Control
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N69
Build Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N69
Discharge Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N71
Outdoor Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N71
Commissioning Maintenance
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N71
Unit Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N72
Unit Interior/Tank Water Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N72
Glycol Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N72
Seasonal Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N72
Winter Operation/Spring Start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N73
Water Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N73
Freezing Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N74
NOTICE - Operation, maintenance and repair of this equipment must be undertaken only by qualified
personnel. Proper care, procedures and tools must be used in handling, lifting, installing, operating,
maintaining, and repairing this equipment to prevent personal injury and/or property damage.
SAFETY - Adequate precautions, appropriate for the installation and location of this product, must
be taken to safeguard the public from possible injury and the premises from damage.
WARRANTIES - Please refer to the Limitation of Warranties applicable to and in effect at the time of
sale/purchase of this product.

N64
Receiving and Rigging

Inspection of Shipment:
ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Units are factory assembled to assure uniform quality and minimize field
installation requirements. Each unit is delivered to the jobsite on a wooden skid and should be thoroughly
inspected for damage prior to unloading and signing the bill of lading. The inspection should include exterior
panels, tank covers, sight-tube, controls, and if applicable, the ice inventory sensor. Any damage found must
be noted on the bill of lading or the shipping agent may not honor the claim.

Temporary Storage:
If the ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Unit is to be stored temporarily before being set in place, it must be
stored on the shipping skid on a smooth, level site free of any bumps or irregularities that could penetrate or
damage the bottom of the tank.
Rigging:
Lifting devices have been provided for short lifts and final positioning. For extended lifts or where hazards
exist, safety slings under the unit should be used. Spreader bars similar to those illustrated in Figures 1 and
2 must be used for all lifts to prevent damaging the unit.
Figure 1. Lifting: TSU-237M Figure 2 Lifting: TSU-476M, 594M, and 761M
CAUTION
When planning the lift(s), use the unit shipping weight shown on the certified drawing. Do not use for
construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions.
For the Model TSU-237M, the proper lifting procedure is shown in Figure 1. For Models TSU-476M, 594M,
and 761M, refer to Figure 2.
Table 1. Lifting Dimension "W"
Model Dimension “W”
TSU-476M 7’ 11”
TSU-594M 9’ 10”
TSU-761M 11’ 10”

N65
WARNING!
Before lifting, ensure that no water, ice, or debris has collected in the unit or on the covers. Such
accumulations will add substantially to the lifting weight and could damage the tank.
Before final placement of the thermal storage unit, remove the shipping skids, as illustrated in Figures 3 and
3A. If the thermal storage unit is to be rolled to its final position, the surface over which it is moved must be
level and hard. Place the rollers under each corner as shown in Figure 4.
Figure 3. Removal of skids - side view Figure 3A. Removal of skids - end view
Figure 4. Arrangement of rollers-side view
Installation
Site Requirements:
ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Units are suitable for installation indoors or out. Units should be positioned
with sufficient clearance between units and adjacent walls to provide easy access for inspection and
maintenance. When multiple units are installed, provide a minimum of 18" side to side and 36" end to end
and preferably more, particularly on the connection end with the control assembly. An overhead clearance
of at least 3' should be provided for piping and access.

N66
Support Requirements:
ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Units must be continuously supported by a level concrete pad designed for
the unit's operating weight (see certified drawing). The pitch of the concrete pad must not exceed 1/8" per 10
feet. Any variation over this amount must be corrected with high strength grout. Do not use shims to level the
unit.
Piping:
The design and installation of supply and return piping to ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Units should follow
good practice and conform to applicable codes. Coil connections are grooved to suit a mechanical coupling.

CAUTION
DO NOT WELD THE COIL CONNECTIONS!
This could damage the tank insulation and liner.
Do not support piping from the walls of the Thermal Storage Unit or the coil connections
For single unit applications, a shut-off valve should be installed for each pair of manifolded coil connections
so the unit can be isolated from the system. Figure 5 illustrates the valving recommended for a single unit.
These valves should offer little resistance to flow and provide tight shut-off. The piping should include a
bypass circuit to permit continued system operation when the ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Unit is isolated
from the system. This bypass can employ a three-way modulating valve to control the temperature of the gly-
col being supplied to the system. Temperature and pressure taps should be provided to simplify balancing the
flow and system troubleshooting. A relief valve, set at a maximum of 150 psi, must be installed between the
shut-off valves and the coil connections to protect the coils from excessive pressure due to hydraulic expan-
sion, if and when both valves are closed. The relief valve should be vented to a portion of the system which
can accommodate expansion or to an approved containment vessel.
Figure 5. Typical glycol piping — single unit Figure 6. Typical reverse return piping for
multiple units
When installing multiple units in parallel, a reverse return piping system must be used and provision made for
balancing the flow rate to each unit (see Figure 6).
On installations with a large number of tanks, consider dividing them into groups with a common balancing
valve for each group. In such an application, shut-off valves should still be installed on each tank to allow for
isolating individual tanks. As with single unit installations, a relief valve should be installed between the shut-
off valves and the ice coils to protect the coils from hydraulic expansion.
The system must include an expansion/compression tank to accommodate changes in fluid volume.
Adequately sized air vents must be installed at the high points in the piping loop to remove trapped air from
the system.

N67
After the piping is installed, pressurize the system with air (but not to the point where the pressure relief
valve(s) would be activated) and check the piping for leaks. Once the pressure test is complete, isolate the
thermal storage unit(s) from the system before flushing and cleaning the system piping. Otherwise, some of
the flushing chemicals, which may be detrimental to the glycol solution, could be trapped in the system. The
thermal storage coils do not require flushing and are NOT FREE DRAINING. If the units are flushed with the
system piping, the tube bundles cannot be readily drained and allowance must be made for the volume of
water that remains in the coils when calculating the quantity and concentration of the glycol solution to be
added to the system.
Tank Filling:
After final placement and piping, verify the unit is uniformly supported on the concrete pad. Then, locate
the tank fill connection (see Figure 7) and the Sight Tube showing the tank water level (see Figure 8).
Figure 7. Location of fill connection Figure 8. Location of sight tube
Using good quality water (see quality guidelines in the Water Quality and Treatment section, page N73), fill
the tank following the steps outlined below. For proper, long-term operation of the thermal storage unit, the
tank must be filled exactly to the prescribed level, (+1/4", -0").
1. Remove the access cover on the top of the unit, connect the fill hose to the tank fill connection and begin
to fill the tank. See Table 2 for the approximate volume of water required.
2. Continue filling the tank until the water level in the clear sight tube reaches the "0% Ice Build" level (See
Figure 9 below).
Table 2. Fluid Volumes
Coil Volume
Tank Volume
Model (gallons of
(gallons of water)
solution)
TSU-237M 2990 260
TSU-476M 5840 495
TSU-594M 7460 610
TSU-761M 9150 790

Figure 9. Water level in sight tube

N68
3. When the tank is filled, disconnect the fill hose, then replace and tightly secure the access cover.
CAUTION DO NOT OVERFILL!

Overflowing the tank may damage the insulation and/or cause the operating controls furnished with
the unit to malfunction.
System Charging:
Typically, a 25% solution (by weight) of ethylene or propylene glycol is specified for use with thermal storage
systems.

However, project specifications vary and the type and concentration of solution to be used must be verified
for each application. When ethylene glycol has been specified, two acceptable fluids are Dow's
DOWTHERM® SR-1 and UCARTHERM®. If propylene glycol is required, Dow's DOWFROST® is suggested.
BAC also recommends that premixed solutions be purchased, rather than mixing on site.
CAUTION:
DO NOT USE UNINHIBITED GLYCOLS OR ANTIFREEZE SOLUTIONS INTENDED FOR AUTOMOTIVE
USE!
If the solution is to be mixed on site, be sure to use good quality dilution water (see page N73) and follow the
manufacturer's directions. Mix the solution thoroughly and test the concentration before it is introduced to the
system. Use a refractometer specifically designed for heat transfer solutions to determine the glycol
concentration. When calculating the total volume of solution required, see Table 2, page N67, for the internal
volume of the thermal storage coils.
To fill the system, open all valves and the air vent(s) at the system high point(s) to allow the glycol solution to
flow freely throughout the system. Then, pump the premixed solution into the system. When the charging is
almost complete, isolate the charging tank or tank truck from the glycol loop and turn on the system
circulating pump to ensure the solution is circulated throughout the loop. Operate the pump for 24 hours
and then check the system pressure and glycol concentration.
NOTE: The Model TSU-237M has two 1/2" MPT vent connections (see Figure 10) that must be bled during
the charging process. The installing contractor is responsible for providing the vent valves and plugs.
Figure 10. Air vents on TSU-237M

N69
Operation and Control

General:
To ensure dependable, trouble-free, efficient operation of the thermal storage units, each system is provided
with factory-installed, preset operating control assemblies (see Figure 11). The operation of which is
described below.
Figure 11. Detail of control assembly

Build Cycle:
For the most energy-efficient operation of the system, the controls should be designed to operate the build
cycle as follows:
Once the Ice Build cycle has been initiated, the glycol chiller(s) should run at full capacity without cycling or
unloading until the storage device is fully charged (recharged). At that point, the chiller and the glycol
circulating pump should be turned off and not allowed to restart until the Discharge (Cooling) Cycle is
initiated. Additionally, a Build Cycle should not be re-initiated until approximately 15% of the ice has been
melted.
To accomplish this control strategy simply and dependably, each ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage System is
furnished with at least one Operating Control Assembly comprised of (See Figure 12):
1. A Low Water Cut-Out (LWCO), factory-set to lock-out the Ice build cycle if there is insufficient water in
the tank.
2. A Shut-Off Switch (OC), factory-set to terminate the Ice build cycle when the thermal storage unit(s)
are fully charged and to prevent the Ice build cycle from being re-initiated until approximately 15% of the
ice has been melted.
Note: On multiple tank installations, more than one Operating Control will be provided to ensure consistent
operation of all Thermal Storage Units.
As illustrated in Figure 13, the operating controls must be connected to the chiller operating controls or the
building energy management system to start and stop the Ice build cycle on demand.
On systems with multiple Operating Controls, the ice build cycle for all units should be terminated when any
one operating control is activated. Similarly, the ice build cycle should not be re-initiated until the contacts of
all the operating controls are closed, signaling the inventory has been reduced to 85% of design or less.

N70

Figure 12. Wiring for operating control assembly
Figure 13. Wiring multiple units
WARNING!
Under no condition should the operating or safety controls furnished by BAC be bypassed or
deactivated during the Ice Build Cycle or the factory settings be changed. To do so will risk damaging
the equipment.

N71
Discharge (Cooling) Cycle:

ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Units can be discharged in a variety of ways depending upon the system
configuration and objectives of the system designer. Consult the project drawings and specifications for
direction on how the system is to operate during the Discharge (Cooling) Cycle. When the operating
strategy calls for operation of the chiller at any time during the Cooling Cycle, the Operating Control(s) used
to control the Build cycle must be bypassed/deactivated when operating in the Discharge cycle.
Outdoor Installations:
CAUTION: When the Thermal Storage Unit will be exposed to subfreezing ambient temperatures, the
Operating Control Assembly, the Sight Tube Assembly, and, if so equipped, the Ice Inventory Sensor, (see
Figure 15) must be protected. An enclosure with a thermostatically controlled, 100 Watt heater, is available
from the Baltimore Aircoil Company.
Figure 15. Heated enclosure for controls. Figure 16. Wiring for enclosure heater
Commissioning
General:
Before initiating the first ice build cycle, check the following points:
1. Confirm all Thermal Storage Units are filled with water to the 0% Ice Build level. (+1/4", -0")
2. Check the units with Operating Controls to ensure the contacts on the Low Water Cut-Out are made
and will allow the ice build cycle to be initiated.
3. Verify the system has been charged with a glycol solution of the type and concentration specified.
4. Confirm all circulating pumps are rotating in the proper direction.
5. Verify all operating controls have been wired correctly and set in accordance with the instructions in
this manual.
6. Confirm there is sufficient load to discharge the tanks.
7. On systems equipped with an Ice Inventory Sensor, check to insure the sensor has been wired,
calibrated and purged of air by bleeding water through the Bleed Port.
8. If any of the units are equipped with a heated enclosure around the Operating Control and Sight Tube,
check to ensure the Heater and Thermostat are wired and operational.

N72
Once the checks are completed, start the initial build cycle and monitor the system throughout the cycle,
recording glycol temperatures and noting the duration of the build. Confirm the Operating Controls function
properly to terminate the build cycle and that once the build cycle is completed, the chiller is shut down and
locked out until the cooling cycle is initiated.
On multiple unit installations, once the initial build cycle has been completed, check all the sight tubes to
verify the water levels in each tank are equal. If the inventories are significantly out of balance, the flow rates
of the glycol solution to each of the thermal storage units should be checked and balanced. Then, after the
next ice build cycle, check the sight tubes once again to ensure balance has been achieved.

Maintenance
General:
A program of regular inspection and maintenance is essential for optimum performance and maximum serv-
ice life. The following information is provided as a guide to establishing such a maintenance program. If you
have any specific questions, please contact your local BAC Representative whose name and address appear
on a decal at the connection end of the unit, adjacent to the nameplate.
Unit Exterior:
On a monthly basis, inspect the frame and exterior panels, for signs of corrosion or any unusual conditions.
If corrosion is found, wire brush the area and treat with a cold galvanizing, Zinc Rich Compound (ZRC)
Unit Interior:
Quarterly, remove the access cover (see Figure 7) and inspect the interior of the unit for signs of scale
formation, corrosion, or biological growth on the tube bundle. If present, initiate or modify the water treatment
program (see the section on Water Treatment).
Note: Repeated freezing and thawing can cause some minerals dissolved in the water to precipitate. If
observed, this is not cause for concern.
Water Level in Tank:

To properly check the water level in the tank, THE ICE MUST BE COMPLETELY MELTED. At seasonal
start-up, and at least once a quarter thereafter during the operating season, conduct a full melt-out and
continue to add heat to the tank until the water temperature is approximately 40°F (4.4ºC). Then check the
water level in the sight tube. Add or remove water from the tank as necessary to restore the level to "0% Ice"
in the Sight Tube (+1/4", -0").
Glycol Solution:
Semi-annually, or at the seasonal start-up and shut-down, draw a sample of the glycol solution from the sys-
tem and check the concentration using a refractometer. If necessary, adjust the concentration using the prop-
er type of industrially inhibited ethylene or propylene glycol.
Annually, have your glycol supplier check samples of the glycol solution for the proper level of inhibitors and
adjust if necessary.
Seasonal Shut-down:
ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Units installed indoors in a heated space or outdoors where subfreezing
temperatures do not occur require special attention or preparation for a seasonal or winter shut-down.
CAUTION
Where the Thermal Storage Unit(s) will be exposed to subfreezing ambient temperatures, the Ice
Inventory Sensor, the Operating Control, and the Sight Tube Assembly must be protected. An
enclosure with a thermostatically controlled, 100 Watt heater is available from Baltimore Aircoil
Company.

N73
Where the unit(s) will be decommissioned for a sustained period and exposed to subfreezing temperatures,
first ensure all the ice has been melted from the tank. Then, using the quick disconnect fitting at the bottom
of the Sight Tube (see Figure 15), disconnect the clear tubing and drain the water from the float chamber of
the Operating Control. If the unit is equipped with an optional Inventory Sensor, see the bulletin provided
with that device for instructions on draining it. The water in the tank and sight tube do not have to be drained
or the level lowered to protect it from freezing.
CAUTION
The concentration of the glycol solution in the system should be verified to ensure it adequately
protects the coils and system piping from freezing. See Table 3, page N74, for a list of freeze point
temperatures versus concentration for ethylene and propylene glycol solutions. Adjust the
concentration if necessary.
Intermittent Winter Operation/Spring Start-up.
ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Units that have been exposed to severe or sustained subfreezing ambient
temperatures, should be checked before initiating an Ice Build Cycle. Ice created by subfreezing ambient
temperatures which accumulates at the top of the tank and around the walls must be melted out before
initiating a build cycle. This ice can prevent normal water displacement during the build cycle, possibly
leading to physical damage to the coil and tank walls.
Ice melt can be confirmed visually, but it is recommended the temperature of the water in the tank be raised
to 40°F to ensure all ice is melted.
Water Quality and Treatment

Dilution Water Quality:
The dilution water used to mix glycol-based heat transfer solutions must be of good quality, meeting certain
minimum standards. Otherwise, the effectiveness of the corrosion inhibitors may be compromised and scale
or other deposits may form on heat transfer surfaces. BAC recommends you consult the glycol supplier for
their specific recommendation but, typically, distilled or de-ionized water with a total hardness of less than
100 ppm (expressed as ppm calcium carbonate) and less than 25 ppm each of chlorides and sulfates is
recommended.
Water in Thermal Storage Tank:

The constantly near or below freezing temperatures of the tank water tend to retard scale formation,
corrosion, and biological growth. Therefore, little or no water treatment may be required unless the quality of
the water used to charge the tank is extremely corrosive or scaling in nature. A biocide may be desirable,
however, to control the growth of iron bacteria or other organisms, particularly during prolonged shutdowns.
Since water quality can vary widely from site to site, a qualified water treatment specialist should be
consulted for specific recommendations. The water treatment program, whether simple or extensive,
should be tailored to maintain the water quality within the following guidelines:
pH 7.0 to 9.0
Chlorides ≤ 125 ppm
Sulfate ≤ 125 ppm
Total Alkalinity ≤ 500 ppm
Total Dissolved Solids ≤ 625 ppm
CAUTION: Do not treat the tank water with chemicals that alter the freeze point of water.
• Tank water pH of 8.3 or higher will require periodic passivation of the galvanized steel coils to prevent
“white rust”, the accumulation of white, waxy, non-protective zinc corrosion products on galvanized steel
surfaces

N74
Table 3. Freezing Points of Aqueous Solutions of Ethylene and Propylene Glycol
Ethylene Glycol Propylene Glycol

Percent
Solution
Freezing Point Freezing Point
% By Volume by Weight % By Volume
(˚F) (˚F)
32.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 32.0

29.4 4.4 5.0 4.8 29.1
26.2 8.9 10.0 9.6 26.1
22.2 13.6 15.0 14.5 22.9
17.9 18.1 20.0 19.4 19.2
16.8 19.2 21.0 20.4 18.3
15.9 20.1 22.0 21.4 17.6
14.9 21.0 23.0 22.4 16.6
13.7 22.0 24.0 23.4 15.6
12.7 22.9 25.0 24.4 14.7
11.4 23.9 26.0 25.3 13.7
10.4 24.8 27.0 26.4 12.6
9.2 25.8 28.0 27.4 11.5
8.0 26.7 29.0 28.4 10.4
6.7 27.7 30.0 29.4 9.2
Dow Chemical USA. 1996. Engineering and Operating Guide for Inhibited Ethylene Glycol-based Heat
Transfer Fluids and Engineering and Operating Guide for Inhibited Propylene Glycol-based Heat Transfer
Fluids. Midland, Michigan. Reprinted with permission.

N75
Baltimore Aircoil Company Aircoil™ Evaporators are designed to deliver long, trouble-free service when properly
installed, operated and maintained. To obtain optimum performance and maximum service life, it is important
that a program of regular inspection and maintenance be developed and carried out. This manual is published
as a guide to establish such a program.
Included in the manual are the recommended procedures for rigging, storage, installation, start-up, operation,
and shut down. There are also minimum recommendations for maintenance. These recommendations are mini-
mums and should be adjusted to cope with the severity of the operating environment. While reviewing these
instructions or installing, operating or maintaining the equipment, a copy of the certified unit drawing(s) should be
available for reference. If you need additional information about the operation or maintenance of this equipment,
please obtain the unit serial number and contact your BAC Representative.
Table of Contents Piping...........................................N83 Direct Expansion.......................N87 .

General.........................................N76 Refrigerant Piping.....................N83 Brine..........................................N88
Product Lines...............................N76 Refrigeration Connections....N83 Hot Gas Defrost....................N88
Refrigerant Caution......................N76 Interconnecting Defrost Electric Defrost.....................N88
Piping....................................N83 Water Defrost........................N88
Installation Thermal Expansion Valves....N83 Sequence Of Operation............N88
Receiving......................................N77 Defrost Water Piping.................N84 No Defrost.............................N88
Inspection..................................N77 Drain Line Piping...................N84 Air Defrost.............................N88
Holding Charge.........................N77 Water Defrost Piping.............N84 Hot Gas Defrost....................N89
Handling.......................................N77 Electrical.......................................N84 Electric Defrost.....................N89
Fork Trucks...............................N77 Field Wiring...............................N84 Water Defrost........................N89
Cranes.......................................N78 Electrical Data...........................N85
Stacking....................................N80 Maintenance
Storage......................................N80 Operation Routine Maintenance...................N90
Location........................................N80 Pre-Start-Up Checklist.................N87 Cleaning.......................................N90
Mounting......................................N81 Post-Start-Up...............................N87 Parts.............................................N90
Ceiling-Hung.............................N81 General Comments......................N87 Long Term Shut Down.................N90
Leg-Mounted.............................N82 Field Adjustments.........................N87
Field Assembly.............................N82 Pumped & CPR Recirculated.......N87
AR Pan Positioning...................N82 Flooded.....................................N87 .

N76
General
Read the following instructions carefully before handling or installing Baltimore Aircoil Company (BAC)
Aircoil™ Evaporators. These instructions contain important safety information along with recommendations for
the installation, operation, and maintenance of the equipment. Failure to comply could result in bodily harm
and damage to property and may void the equipment warranty. Refer to the Limitation of Warranties applicable
to and in effect at the time of the sale/purchase of these products.
Product Lines

The following product lines are addressed in this manual.
AS Series AM Series

AL Series AR Series
Refrigerant Warning
AircoilTM Evaporators may contain liquid refrigerant such as ammonia, R-22, R-507, etc. For this reason,
AircoilTM Evaporators should be installed, operated and serviced by qualified refrigeration
technicians only.
Liquid refrigerant causes burns, which may be fatal, if it leaks and comes in contact with a person.
Refrigerant vapor can cause asphyxiation and or tissue burns if released to the atmosphere in the
vicinity of people.
iquid refrigerant, that is isolated in a pipe or equipment without an adequate means of pressure
L
relief can rupture pipe or equipment if it is allowed to warm.
Hot refrigerant vapor, when injected into an evaporator containing cold refrigerant, will rapidly
condense. This rapid condensation can accelerate liquid slugs to dangerously high energy levels
that can rupture pipes, valves and other components.
Please refer to various manuals from organizations such as IIAR, ASHRAE and RETA for more information
concerning the safe operation of refrigeration equipment.

N77
Installation Instructions
Receiving
Inspection
Carefully inspect all equipment upon arrival to detect any shipping damage and to verify receipt of all equipment
listed on the bill of lading. Specifically look for loose items listed on the bill of lading such as fan guards, long
throw adaptors, mating flanges and thermal expansion valves (TXVs). If there is damage or a shortage, note it on
the delivery receipt prior to signing for the shipment and subsequently file a claim with the freight carrier. While
BAC will gladly provide information to assist with the process, the responsibility for filing such a claim is that of
the purchaser or the purchaser’s consignee.
Holding Charge
Each BAC Aircoil™ Evaporator coil is shipped with a low-pressure nitrogen charge. Slightly open the Schrader
valve located on the coil connection cap to detect the presence of the charge by listening for the nitrogen escap-
ing through the valve. After this brief test, close the valve to maintain the nitrogen charge until the unit is ready
to be connected to the system piping.
If the unit has lost its nitrogen charge, it may have been compromised during shipment. Before installation, pres-
sure test the coil with dry nitrogen to ensure there is not a coil leak and report the loss of the shipping charge
to BAC. If the unit will not hold pressure, please obtain the unit’s serial number, then contact your local BAC
Representative for a resolution.
Handling
BAC Aircoil™ Evaporators are designed to facilitate safe handling with fork trucks or cranes. Use caution when
handling to prevent damage to exposed components. The shipping skid should remain affixed to the unit to
enable handling and to prevent damage to the pan and other components. The coil/air inlet side of the unit
has most of the unit weight. When rigging with a fork truck, lift from the coil side.
Fork Trucks
Lifting forks should be placed under appropriate areas of the wooden shipping skid for proper handling;
damage may result if the forks come in direct contact with the equipment. The lifting skid may be used to
lift the unit into place for either ceiling-hung or foot-mounted applications.
lift from side approximate

opposite fans transporting position
fans
Lift from the Face Opposite Fans to Prevent Damage

N78
Cranes
When lifting AS, AM, & AL models with a crane, attach appropriate lifting devices to the recommended hanger
points and lift in a level and balanced manner to avoid concentrating stresses on any point. Do not apply load
or lifting stresses to the headers, connections, or tubes.
0° Max. (WHEN USING THE MINIMAL NUMBER OF

PICK POINTS SHOWN IN TABLE 1)
CONNECTION &
RIGGING METHOD
TO BE DETERMINED
BY OTHERS
AS, AM, & AL Models
All Models - Do Not Lift with Sling

N79
Table 1 illustrates the minimum number and location of rigging points. Contact your local BAC Representative
for information on models not shown.
Table 1. Lifting Requirements


N80
Units Stacked for Shipment

Some units may be stacked “two high” to minimize shipping costs. Do not lift such units in tandem. Units must
be removed from the truck one-at-a-time by first disconnecting the fasteners that bind them together, then
removing the top unit first. Either a fork truck or a crane may be used to remove the units one at a time.

units are secured
together by lag
bolts which must
be removed prior
to lifting units. approximate
remove stacked units transporting
one at a time position
Storage
If the units are not to be hung or mounted upon receipt, they should be stored in a clean dry place, under roof
or tarp.
Location
Unit(s) should be located to permit unobstructed airflow both to and from the unit. The intake face of the
unit should be located at least one unit height away from any wall or other significant obstruction. The discharge
area should be adequately free and clear of obstructions, such as building structures, racks, or product, to permit
the desired air throw.
Locate away from walls

by at least one unit height
Units should be located away from areas of high infiltration such as doorways. If located near an open door,
the entry of warm, moist air will increase the defrost requirements and “falsely load” the unit.

N81
Units with hinged fan faces require a completely unencumbered area approximately 3-feet wide, along the fan
face extending the length and height of the unit. In general, it is good practice to provide approximately 3-feet
clearance on all sides of the unit to permit inspection, service, and maintenance.
If the unit is water defrosted, allow for 2-feet of clearance above the unit to clean the water distribution pan.
If the unit has electric defrost heaters, allow for the necessary heater pull area at the end(s) of the unit, as noted
on the unit drawings.
Mounting
All units must be installed such that the top of the unit is level to ensure quick and thorough pan
drainage. Units are equipped for ceiling-hung or leg-mounted applications.
Ceiling-Hung
Hangers for ceiling-hung installations are located on the unit framework on each face of the unit. Table 2, below,
provides hanger quantities, hole diameter, and maximum support rod diameter. Hanger rod and hardware selec-
tion and size are to be provided by the design engineer using sound engineering practices. For proper support,
all hangers must be used. The unit must be lifted to the secured hanger rods and secured in place such
that the top of the unit is level and each hanger provides equal support. Securely tightened double nuts
with washers, or equivalent, must be used above and below the hanger hole to minimize the chances
of loosening due to vibration. After the unit is secure, the shipping/handling skid and legs should be removed
and discarded.
Table 2. Hanger Hole Data for Ceiling Hung Installations
Maximum
Model Number of Hole Rod
Hangers Diameter Diameter
AS1, AS2, AS3 4 13/16” 3/4”
AS4, AS6 6 13/16” 3/4”
AS5, AS8 8 13/16” 3/4”
AM1, AM2, AM3 4 13/16” 3/4”
AM4, AM6 6 13/16” 3/4”
AM5, AM8 8 13/16” 3/4”
AL1 4 13/16” 3/4”
AL2 6 13/16” 3/4”
AL3 8 13/16” 3/4”
AL4 10 13/16” 3/4”
AR2 6 5/8” 1/2”
AR3 8 5/8” 1/2”
AR4 10 5/8” 1/2”
AR5 12 5/8” 1/2”
AR6 14 5/8” 1/2”
“Double-Nut” Hanger

N82
Leg-Mounted (optional)
Adjustable legs are provided for floor-mounted or steel-mounted installations. For proper support, all legs must
be supported on a level structural member and must be securely positioned such that the top of the unit
will be level. Depending on the location and installer preference, the shipping/handling skid may be removed
before or after the unit is set in its final position. Once set in position, all legs should be bolted or welded to the
supporting structure to prevent movement.
Field Assembly

Pan Positioning on AR models
On AR models, the drain pans ship attached to the unit, in a raised position. The pan must be lowered to permit
adequate airflow and to be sloped for drainage. This should be accomplished just after securing the unit in
place and prior to removing the unit lifting device (fork truck). Loosen the hardware on the adjustable pan hanger,
carefully lower the pan to the bottom position on the drain end using the fork truck, then re-secure the pan hanger
hardware. At this point, the skid should be removed and discarded.
Interconnecting Hot Gas Piping on AR models

Field assembly is required for the interconnecting piping on units with hot gas defrost of the coil and pan for
AR Models, only. On other models, the piping can ship installed since the pans are in a fixed, final position. For
AR Models, fix the pan in its final position, as described above, then measure, cut to length, and weld the inter-
connecting piping components provided by BAC. Piping must be performed in accordance with applicable
codes and as described in the piping section of this instruction handbook.
Piping
Refrigerant Piping
The refrigerant piping design and installation must be performed by qualified personnel in accordance
with applicable national and local codes and standards. Piping is to be designed and supported independent
of the evaporator to minimize the transmission of vibration, to permit expansion and contraction, and to impose
no load on the evaporator connections. Pipe sizes are to be established according to good engineering design
practices, taking into account all applicable facets of the system: the connection size provided by BAC should
not be used to determine the system piping. Prior to charging the system with refrigerant, the entire system
must be pressure tested to ensure there are no leaks and evacuated to remove moisture. Documents
concerning the engineering and installation of refrigerant piping are available from organizations such as IIAR,
ASME & ASHRAE.

N83
Refrigeration Connections
The nitrogen holding charge should be permitted to remain intact as long as possible. When ready to connect the
refrigerant piping, slowly vent the nitrogen charge to the atmosphere, then remove the connection caps.
Galvanized steel and stainless steel coils use carbon steel pipe connections, which should be trimmed, cleaned
of slag and fines, and prepared for welding at a point that removes any temporary capping provisions such as
threads or welded endplates. Note that these temporary capping provisions are not intended for refrig-
eration service and must be removed prior to placing the coil in service. Carbon steel connections will be
Schedule 80 pipe for connections less than or equal to 1-1/2” in diameter or Schedule 40 for connections 2” in
diameter and greater.
Black Steel Pipe Stub on

Stainless Coils
Aluminum coil flanged connections are provided with carbon steel mating flanges. Weld the system piping to
the carbon steel flange prior to mating the aluminum unit and carbon steel flanges. Use the new service
gasket that shipped with the unit. Discard used gaskets.
Thermal Expansion Valve Installation

Perform the following tasks when installing a thermal expansion valve (TXV) on a direct expansion
system:
• Confirm that the distributor orifice and retainer wire is in place and was not dislodged during shipping and
handling. Note that some hot gas defrost systems will have a side port for hot gas located between the
distributor orifice and the distributor.
• For ammonia systems, confirm that the discharge tube is removed from the outlet of the TXV.
• Install the expansion valve immediately adjacent to the distributor with no elbows, valves, or fit-
tings in between. If a side port must be provided, the orifice will be removed to the upstream side of the
port, adjacent to the TXV.
• Connect the equalizer tube.
• Secure the expansion valve bulb directly on a horizontal length of pipe as close to the suction header as
possible, but not at a trap nor downstream from a trap. The preferred location on the pipe is in the 3, 4, 8,
or 9 o’clock position. Do not place the bulb at the 6 or 12 o’clock positions.
CAUTION: It is recommended that a suction trap, or suction accumulator, be used on all direct expansion sys-
tems for compressor protection.
Defrost Water Drain Piping

Defrost water drain lines should be as short as possible within the refrigerated space and should be pitched at
least 1/4” to 1/2” per foot. The drain line for each unit must be piped to an independent trap to prevent the
migration of warm air through the drain lines. Only units that are defrosted in tandem may share a trap.
Drain pan connections and any drain lines and traps that are located in freezing temperatures must be
heat traced and insulated to prevent freezing. Heating elements should be continuously energized.

N84
The trap requires static head to overcome the resistance to flow. For this reason, it should be located in the
vertical piping at least 2’ below the unit (preferably outside of the refrigerated space). The trap should not be
heated if it is located in a space in which the temperature is continuously above freezing. This avoids the pos-
sibility of boiling the trap dry. The piping should include a cross or tee to facilitate cleanout. All piping should
be adequately supported independent of the unit so no load is imposed on the pan connection. In some
cases, consideration should be given to using a union at/near the pan connection to enable disconnecting the
drain line for maintenance.

Caution- Do not apply torque to the drain pan connection; use two wrenches to secure the pipe union.
Electrical
Field Wiring
All wiring must be performed by qualified personnel, in compliance with national and local codes and standards.
Refer to the unit nameplate and the specific certified wiring drawings for details. The nameplate contains the
required electrical power characteristics and the serial number, which can be cross-referenced to the certified
prints. The cast aluminum fans on an AM or AL unit should rotate CCW when looking into the airflow. The paddle
wheel style of fans on an AS or AR unit should rotate CW when looking into the airflow. Connect the leads in the
order that provides proper rotation.

N85
AS & AR AM & AL
Direction of Fan Rotation

Review the certified prints and wiring diagrams to determine what, if any, electrical components have been
provided by BAC. For example, factory wiring options range from no wiring through pre-wired and mounted
combination starters with fused disconnects. Standard motors on AS, AM and AR units are inherently protected
with auto-resetting thermal overloads (ATOs). Motors on AL units do not feature this inherent protection due to
the size of the motors. Refer to certified prints for specific details.
Review the following data to adequately size supply wiring, motor protection, and other necessary electrical com-
ponents that are supplied by other than BAC. As the room air gets colder, the increasing air density causes an
increase in the amp draw of the motors. There is a corresponding increase in the ability of the motor to dissipate
heat. To size the electrical components (switchgear, wires, overloads, et cetera) to accomodate this increased
amp draw, use the service factor full load amps multiplied by the cold air correction factor.
Electrical Data
Tables 3 through 6 provide approximate amperage data for sizing electrical components, based on common
single-speed, standard efficiency, 1200 rpm (nominal) motors. Refer to certified unit prints to confirm specific
electrical and motor data.
Table 3. Amperage for 460-Volt, 3-Phase, 60-Hertz Power.
Motor FLA Amps at Room Air Temperature

HP (at 70°F) 1.15 SF 50°F 40°F 30°F 20°F 10°F 0°F -10°F -20°F -30°F -40°F -50°F
1/3 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.3 1.3 1.3
1/2 1.1 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.6 1.6 1.6
3/4 1.5 1.7 1.8 1.8 1.9 1.9 1.9 2.0 2.0 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2
1 1.9 2.2 2.3 2.3 2.4 2.4 2.5 2.5 2.6 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.8
1 1/2 2.3 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.9 3.0 3.1 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.3 3.4
2 3.4 3.9 4.0 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 5.1
3 4.5 5.2 5.3 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 6.0 6.1 6.2 6.4 6.5 6.7
5 7.3 8.4 8.6 8.9 9.1 9.3 9.5 9.7 9.9 10.1 10.4 10.6 10.9
7 1/2 9.4 10.8 11.1 11.4 11.7 11.9 12.2 12.5 12.8 13.1 13.4 13.7 14.0

N86

1/3 1.8 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2 2.3 2.3 2.4 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.6 2.7
1/2 2.2 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.9 3.0 3.1 3.1 3.2 3.3
3/4 3.1 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.8 3.9 4.0 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6
1 3.7 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 5.0 5.1 5.3 5.4 5.5
1 1/2 4.6 5.3 5.4 5.6 5.7 5.8 6.0 6.1 6.2 6.4 6.5 6.7 6.9

2 6.8 7.8 8.1 8.2 8.4 8.6 8.8 9.0 9.2 9.4 9.7 9.9 10.1
3 9.1 10.5 10.8 11.0 11.3 11.5 11.8 12.1 12.3 12.6 12.9 13.2 13.6
5 14.5 16.7 17.2 17.6 18.0 18.4 18.8 19.2 19.7 20.1 20.6 21.1 21.6
7 1/2 18.9 21.7 22.4 22.9 23.4 24.0 24.5 25.1 25.6 26.2 26.9 27.5 28.2

1/3 2.1 2.4 2.5 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.7 2.8 2.8 2.9 3.0 3.1 3.1
1/2 2.5 2.9 3.0 3.0 3.1 3.2 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.6 3.7
3/4 3.5 4.0 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.9 5.0 5.1 5.2
1 4.3 4.9 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 6.0 6.1 6.3 6.4
1 1/2 5.3 6.1 6.3 6.4 6.6 6.7 6.9 7.0 7.2 7.4 7.5 7.7 7.9
2 7.0 8.1 8.3 8.5 8.7 8.9 9.1 9.3 9.5 9.7 9.9 10.2 10.4
3 10.4 12.0 12.3 12.6 12.9 13.2 13.5 13.8 14.1 14.4 14.8 15.1 15.5
5 16.4 18.9 19.4 19.9 20.3 20.8 21.3 21.8 22.3 22.8 23.3 23.9 24.4
7 1/2 21.5 24.7 25.5 26.1 26.7 27.3 27.9 28.5 29.2 29.8 30.5 31.3 32.0

1/3 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.1 1.1
1/2 0.9 1.0 1.0 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.3 1.3 1.3
3/4 1.2 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.5 1.5 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.7 1.7 1.8 1.8
1 1.5 1.7 1.8 1.8 1.9 1.9 2.0 2.0 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2 2.3
1 1/2 1.8 2.1 2.2 2.2 2.3 2.3 2.4 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.6 2.7 2.8
2 2.7 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 4.0 4.1
3 3.6 4.1 4.3 4.3 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 5.0 5.1 5.3 5.4
5 5.8 6.7 6.9 7.1 7.3 7.4 7.6 7.7 7.9 8.1 8.3 8.5 8.7
7 1/2 7.5 8.6 8.9 9.1 9.3 9.5 9.8 9.9 10.2 10.5 10.7 11.0 11.2

Variable frequency drives require suitable optional motors. Designers should consider such operating param-
eters as air throw, minimum/maximum fan RPM and coil charge fluctuations when applying variable frequency
drives.
Electric Defrost
Electric defrost requires sufficient power supply as shown on the drawings.

N87
Operation Instructions
Pre-Start Checklist
Following is a representative checklist of items to be checked prior to startup. It is not, nor is it intended to be, a
comprehensive checklist for the many varying industrial refrigeration systems. Consult with a qualified system
start-up expert for assistance.
❑ Confirm the unit is level and secure.
❑ Confirm hanger rod nuts are securely tightened with double nuts or legs securely are bolted or welded down.
❑ Confirm piping is complete and conforms to good practice.

❑ Confirm the condensate drain line is piped properly, including proper pitch, trap, and functioning heat tracing.
❑ Confirm there are no leaks in the unit or surrounding piping.
❑ Confirm the supply voltage is within 10% of design and the phase-to-phase imbalance is within 2%.
❑ Confirm electrical connections are correct and secure.
❑ Confirm fan set screws and/or bushings are tight.
❑ Check fan direction & amperage.
❑ Dry run control valves through defrost and control sequence to verify proper operation.
❑ Check time settings.
❑ Open suction, discharge and receiver service valves.
❑ Optional) Confirm the thermal expansion bulb is mounted properly and insulated.
❑ (Optional) “Jumper” the electric defrost termination thermostat.
Post-start Checklist
❑ Reconfirm there are no leaks in the unit or surrounding piping.
❑ Reconfirm voltage is within 10% of design and the phase-phase imbalance is within 2%.
❑ Confirm the room thermostat and/or control system are functioning properly.
❑ Look and listen for any excessive vibration, severe valve chatter, water hammer, or moving pipes, and correct as
necessary.
General Comments
• The compressor may overload during the time it takes to "pull-down" the temperature in the room.
• Ensure that there is sufficient refrigerant in the system to properly feed all of the units.
• Severe frost buildup during pull-down may necessitate frequent, manual defrost.
Field Adjustments
Perform the following functions when commissioning aircoils, based on the refrigerant feed system and defrost
technique being employed on the particular unit. These instructions are not, nor are they intended to be, a
comprehensive list of tasks required to successfully commission all aircoils. Consult with a qualified system
start-up expert for assistance.
Recirculated & Controlled Pressure Receiver Feed: Open hand expansion valves (HEVs) slowly and observe
frost/condensate formation on all return bends, top and bottom alike. The proper setting may be achieved by
observing the frost or condensate on all return bends and opening the HEV until all return bends are evenly
wetted or frosted. Alternatively, if the defrost relief regulator is connected to the liquid line and is equipped with a
gauge, set the HEV to achieve a 5 psi rise in pressure when the liquid solenoid valve is energized.
Flooded Feed: Verify that the liquid level is at the design level in the surge drum. Open and adjust the liquid feed
HEV to allow for the solenoid to be energized approximately 70% of the time at design temperature difference
(TD).
Direct Expansion Feed: After room temperature has been achieved, check the superheat, and adjust the
thermal expansion valve. If the coil is being starved, resulting in too much superheat at the desired room
temperature, reduce the superheat setting of the valve by turning the adjusting stem counter-clockwise. If there
is not enough superheat, increase the setting by turning the adjusting stem clockwise. After waiting approximately
30 minutes, re-check the superheat and re-adjust the thermal expansion valve. Repeat until the unit operation is
stable. Note that 10°F is the minimum superheat required to fully stroke a conventional TXV and that 10°F
superheat requires an 11° or 12°F split between the room return air temperature and the evaporating temperature.

N88
Brine, Glycol or Water Feed: Vent the system, bleed off all air, and check for water hammer. Verify the feed
solenoid valve or mixing valve function.
Hot Gas Defrost:
• Allow the unit to frost, then initiate the defrost cycle.
• Monitor the leaving air temperature. It should show a rise if the pump-out time is sufficient.
• Monitor the condensate flow. It should diminish to a trickle prior to hot gas termination. Check the bottom of
the coil for residual ice or frost. Do not allow long hot gas times that cause coil steaming. If more than 15
minutes of hot gas is required, there may be system design problems.
• Monitor the bleed time. The pressure of the coil should be within 25 psig of suction pressure by the end of
the bleed cycle.

• Monitor the fan delay. The free water on the coil should be frozen prior to the fans starting.
• Adjust the various function times as necessary.
Electric Defrost:
• Monitor the condensate flow. It should diminish to a trickle prior to heater termination. Check the bottom of
the coil for residual ice or frost. Do not allow long heater on times that cause coil steaming.
• Verify the operation of the defrost termination thermostat and remove the start-up jumper, if used.
• Verify that all of the heaters are working by checking the amp draw.
• Monitor the fan delay. The free water on the coil should be frozen prior to the fans starting.
Water Defrost:
• Monitor the water flow and check for even flow coverage, overflows or excessive splashing.
• Check the coil for any residual frost or ice.
• Monitor the fan delay. The free water on the coil should be frozen prior to the fans starting if the unit is in a
freezer.
Typical Operational Sequences

The following sequences of operation for various defrost methods are general in nature and are considered typical.
They are published here for general reference. They are not intended for use in all circumstances. Refer to the certi-
fied submittals to determine the defrost method for a specific unit. Consult with a qualified refrigeration engi-
neer to determine what sequence of operation is appropriate for your specific needs.
No Defrost
Evaporators may be used with no defrost only where suction temperatures are at or above freezing. Following is the
sequence of operation, beginning just as the room temperature rises to a temperature where cooling is required:
1. The thermostat opens the feed valve to allow refrigerant to flow to the coil.
2. After a prescribed delay, the fan motor energizes.
3. The room cools to a preset temperature where no cooling is required, so the thermostat stops flow to the coil.
4. The fans continue to run for a prescribed time to clear liquid from the coil, then they may or may not be
de-energized, depending upon the chosen control scheme.
Air Defrost
Air defrost can be used where room temperatures are above 36°F while the suction temperature may be below 32°F.
Following is the sequence of operation, beginning just prior to initiation of defrost:
1. Unit is in the cooling mode -- the thermostat has energized the liquid solenoid and the fan motors.
2. At a prescribed time of day, the timer closes the liquid solenoid and energizes the suction pressure regulator to a
higher pressure corresponding to 47°F, if so equipped.
3. The fans continue to run, allowing the room air to defrost the coil
4. After a prescribed time delay, the timer opens the liquid solenoid, resets the suction pressure regulator and
cooling continues.

N89
Hot Gas Defrost

Hot gas defrost connections are identified and located on the submittal drawings. In the case of hot gas defrost for the coil
and the pan, a pan defrost coil and an insulated cover are affixed to the bottom of the drain pan.
For series-flow, or “three-pipe”, hot gas defrost of the coil and pan, the hot gas flows through the pan coil, then via BAC-
supplied interconnecting piping and check valve, into the cooling coil. For parallel-flow, or “two-pipe”, hot gas defrost of
the coil and pan, BAC interconnecting piping transports a portion of the defrost flow through the pan then back to join the
coil defrost relief.
Following is the sequence of operation, beginning just prior to initiation of defrost:

1. Unit is in the cooling mode – the thermostat has energized the liquid solenoid and the fan motors.
2. At a prescribed time of day, the timer overrides the room thermostat and closes (de-energizes) the liquid solenoid
valve, stopping refrigerant flow to the coil.
3. The fans continue to run for a prescribed time to clear liquid refrigerant from the coil, then the fans are de-energized.
4. The hot gas supply solenoid is energized to introduce hot gas to the unit, and, at the same time, the suction solenoid
is de-energized. (Larger coils operating at low temperatures, may have a smaller pre-pressurization solenoid with a
time delay prior to opening the main hot gas solenoid).
5. After a prescribed time delay of approximately 10-12 minutes, the hot gas supply solenoid is de-energized.
6. The bleed solenoid or defrost relief regulator is energized and given a prescribed length of time to bleed the coil
pressure back down to the suction pressure.
7. After a prescribed time, the room thermostat is again allowed to control the liquid solenoid and the fan motors, as
cooling is required.
Note: Settings for time of day and time delays are set by the operator to suit specific unit requirements.
Electric Defrost
Electric defrost consists of a series of resistance heating elements that are inserted through the fin bank to heat the fins
during the defrost mode. Units may also have an electric defrost pan which includes heating elements and an insulated
pan cover to allow the defrost water to drain from the pan in freezing room temperatures. Following is the sequence of
operation beginning just prior to initiation of defrost:
1. Unit is in the cooling mode - the room thermostat has energized the liquid solenoid and the fan motors.
valve, stopping refrigerant flow to the coil.
4. The heaters are energized as the fans are stopped to defrost the coil.
5. Once the defrost thermostat senses a prescribed temperature, the heaters are de-energized.
6. The timer then energizes the liquid solenoid to introduce refrigerant and freeze water droplets that remain on the coil.
7. After a prescribed delay, the room thermostat is again allowed to control the liquid solenoid and the fan motors, as
Note: Settings for time of day and delays are set by the operator to suit specific site requirements.
Water Defrost
Water defrost systems heat the coil by introducing warm water to the coil through a series of distribution pans with flow
orifices or through a low pressure spray system. Valves must be provided (by others) to limit the water supply pressure
and balance the flow to prevent overflowing and splash-out. Following is a sequence of operation beginning just prior to
initiation of defrost:
1. Unit is in the cooling mode - the room thermostat has energized the liquid solenoid and the fan motors.
valve, stopping the refrigerant flow to the coil.
4. The water defrost supply solenoid is energized to defrost the coil for a prescribed period of time.
5. After the water supply solenoid is closed, there is a prescribed delay to allow water to drip from the coil.
6. The timer then energizes the liquid solenoid to introduce refrigerant and freeze water droplets that remain on the coil.
7. After a prescribed delay, the room thermostat is again allowed to control the liquid solenoid and the fan motors, as
Note: Settings for time of day and delays are set by the operator to suit specific unit requirements.

N90
Maintenance Instructions
Routine Maintenance
Although there is limited routine maintenance required for BAC Aircoil™ Evaporators, the units should be
inspected periodically to ensure proper and efficient operation. Visually inspect the units and listen for any
signs of mechanical wear. Note that the motors are totally enclosed, with sealed bearings that do not require
re-greasing. Inspect the unit for debris or deposits, particularly on the air inlet face of the fins and the pan drain

area, and clean using water with a suitably mild cleaning agent, as required. Check the frequency and duration
of frost events and inspect the unit for ice-build-up at least monthly.
Cleaning
Note that equipment may be damaged by incompatible cleaning agents or water condensate from defrost that
is contaminated by airborne impurities. It is the responsibility of the owner/operator to be familiar with
these chemicals and the room environment and to select compatible agents and materials of
construction. Refer to the certified submittals for a listing of the materials used in the specific
evaporator in question. Consult with a qualified chemical/corrosion expert to ensure compatibility and
to develop a plan to address any special circumstances, such as airborne impurities.
Hinged fans
facilitate maintenance
Parts
Aircoil™ Evaporators have few parts subject to wear: primarily the motors, fans, and defrost heaters if so
equipped. These parts have been selected to provide a service life of many years. Contact your local BAC
Representative to order any replacement parts that may be required. Please have the serial number of the unit
in question available when ordering.
Long Term Shut Down

If an Aircoil™ Evaporator is to be shut down for a period longer than one week, it should have the liquid
refrigerant removed from the unit. The isolation service valves should all be closed and tagged with
technicians name, date and reason for unit shut down. The electrical disconnect(s) for that unit’s fan
motors (and heaters) should be locked out and similarly tagged.

P1
Glossary
Air Conditioning: The control of the temperature, humidity, cleanliness (quality) and movement of air in a confined space.
Airflow: The distribution or movement of air through a space; generally measured in cubic feet per minute (cfm).
Air Handling Unit: The central component of an HVAC system that distributes conditioned air to a variety of destinations.
Algae: Small, usually aquatic plants which require light to grow.
Glossary
Ambient: The surrounding atmosphere.

Ambient Air Temperature: The surrounding air temperature, such as the outdoor air temperature around a building.
Approach: The difference between the leaving water temperature and the ambient wet-bulb temperature.
ARI: Air conditioning and Refrigeration Institute.
ASHRAE: American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers.
Biocide: A chemical capable of killing living microorganisms.
Biological Contaminants: Living organisms or agents derived from those organisms (e.g., viruses, bacteria, fungi, and
mammal and bird antigens) that can be inhaled and can cause many types of health effects including allergic reactions, respiratory
disorders, hypersensitivity diseases, and infectious diseases. Also referred to as "microbiologicals" or "microbials.”
Bleed: Water deliberately removed from evaporative cooling equipment to control the concentration of dissolved solids in the
system.
BTU (British Thermal Unit): The amount of heat required to raise or lower the temperature of one pound of water one
degree Fahrenheit.
BTUH (British Thermal Unit Per Hour): Establishes a time reference to BTU input or output. A BTUH is how
many BTUs are used per hour.
Bypass Connection: An inlet connection provided in the cold water basin of a unit that allows recirculating water to bypass
the heat transfer media when system pumps are running but evaporative cooling is not required.
Capacity: The output or producing ability of a piece of equipment. Evaporative cooling capacity is normally referred to in
BTUHs; the capacity at a standard set of conditions is often referred to as "tons of cooling."
Carryover: Excessive drift.

Casing: The exterior panels of an evaporative cooling unit.
Cell: The smallest subdivision of a unit that can operate independently; often multiple cells are used together to form one “unit” of
a greater capacity.
Celsius (C): A temperature scale based on the freezing (0 degrees) and boiling (100 degrees) points of water. Also known as
Centigrade. Conversion to Fahrenheit: ºF = 1.8(ºC) + 32
CFM (Cubic Feet per Minute): A standard measurement of airflow that indicates how many cubic feet of air pass by a
stationary point in one minute.
Charge: The amount of refrigerant placed in a refrigeration unit.

Chiller: A device that produces chilled water to provide cooling for HVAC and industrial applications.
Circulating Water: See “Reirculating Water.”
Cogeneration: Simultaneous production of two or more forms of useable energy from a single fuel source, e.g., heat energy
and electrical or mechanical power, in the same facility.

P2
Coil: A tube, often including fins, through which gas or liquid is passed, exchanging thermal energy with air or water surrounding it
for heating or cooling purposes.
Cold Water Basin: The collection pan that houses the cold water processed by the evaporative cooling unit.
Combined Flow: The use of both a coil and wet deck surface for heat transfer in a closed circuit cooling tower or evaporative
condenser. Combined flow designs reduce evaporation in the coil section.
Comfort Cooling: The process of treating air to control its temperature to meet the comfort requirements of the occupants of
a conditioned space.
Glossary
Commercial: The commercial sector is generally defined as non-manufacturing business establishments; this classification
includes hotels, restaurants, office buildings, retail stores, educational institutions, etc.
Commissioning: The start-up of a building that includes testing and adjusting HVAC, electrical, plumbing, and other systems
to assure proper functioning and adherence to design criteria. Commissioning also includes the instruction of operating personnel in
the use of the building systems.
Compressor: The “pump” of a refrigerating mechanism that draws a low-pressure gas on the cooling side of the
refrigerant cycle and compresses the gas into the high-pressure side of the cycle. The compressor maintains adequate pressure to
cause refrigerant to flow in sufficient quantities to meet the cooling requirements of the system.
Conduction: The transfer of heat through a solid material. The transfer of heat energy through a material (solid, liquid or gas)
by the motion of adjacent atoms and molecules without gross displacement of the particles.
Contactor: A switch used to make or break an electrical circuit.

Convection: The movement of heat by airflow.
Cooling Tower: Any device in which atmospheric air and water are distributed together over a heat transfer medium in order
to lower the temperature of the water through evaporative cooling.
Corrosion Inhibitors: Chemicals designed to prevent or slow down the waterside corrosion of metals.
Counterflow: The flow of air is in the opposite direction of the flow of water.
CRN: Canadian Registration Number. This registration is sometimes required on coils shipping into Canada.
Crossflow: The flow of air is at a right angle to the direction of the flow of water.
CTI: The Cooling Technology Institute (CTI) is an organization comprised of evaporative cooling equipment owners and operators,
equipment manufacturers and component suppliers, and water treatment specialists, which advocates and promotes the use of
environmentally responsible evaporative heat transfer systems for the benefit of the public through education, research, standards
development, government relations, and technical information exchange.
Current: A flow of electrons in an electrical conductor. The strength or rate of flow is generally measured in amperes.
Dampers: A series of movable plates that can be opened or closed to control the flow of air through a space.
Decibel (dB): A decibel describes the relative loudness of a sound. The dimensionless unit of measurement used in noise
control. Logarithmically expresses the ratio of sound level to a reference level (0.0002 microbar).
Defrost Cycle: The process of removing ice or frost buildup from a piece of equipment during the winter months.
Delta (or Delta T or ∆T): A difference in temperature. Often used in the context of the difference between the entering
water temperature and the leaving water temperature of a cooling tower or closed circuit cooling tower.
Demand (Utility): The rate at which electricity or natural gas is delivered to or by a system, part of a system, or piece of
equipment at a given instant or averaged over any designated period of time. Electricity demand is typically expressed in kilowatts.

P3
Demand Billing: The electric capacity requirement for which a large user pays. It may be based on the customer's peak
demand during the contract year, on a previous maximum or on an agreed minimum. Measured in kilowatts.
Demand Charge: The sum to be paid by a large electricity consumer for its peak usage level.
Design Conditions: A set of conditions specific to the local climate and expected building usage, used to calculate the
cooling load for a building.
Dewpoint: The temperature at which air becomes saturated with water and begins to condense, forming a dew.
Drift: The water aerosol carried out of an evaporative cooling unit by the discharge air.
Glossary
Drift Eliminator: A component of most evaporative cooling units that is designed to remove water droplets from the air
passing through it.
Dry-Bulb Temperature (DB): The temperature measured by a standard thermometer. A measure of the sensible
temperature of air.
Efficiency: The ratio of the output to the input of any system.
Electric Resistance Heater: A device that produces heat through electric resistance.
Energy: Broadly defined, energy is the capability of doing work. In the electric power industry, energy is more narrowly defined
as electricity supplied over time, generally expressed in kilowatts.
Energy Management System: A control system designed to regulate the energy consumption of a building by
controlling the operation of energy consuming systems, such as the heating, ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC), lighting and
water heating systems.
Entering Water Temperature (EWT): The temperature of the fluid as it returns to the evaporative cooling
equipment from the system heat source.
Enthalpy: A thermodynamic function of a system, equivalent to the sum of the internal energy of the system plus the product
of its volume multiplied by the pressure exerted on it by its surroundings.
Equalizer Connection: A connection in the cold water basin of a unit that allows piping (the piping is called an “equalizer
line”) to be run from that unit to the basin of another unit; equalizer lines serve to correct any difference in water levels that may
develop during operation.
Evaporative Cooling: Cooling accomplished through the exchange of latent heat in the form of evaporation.
External Pulldown Volume: The volume of water in any external piping and heat exchangers that will drain back to the
unit when the pump is shut down, which is equal to the total pulldown volume minus the water suspended in the unit and its
External Static Pressure: The pressure imposed on cooling equipment by external sources such as ductwork and sound
attenuation.
Fahrenheit (F): A temperature scale in which the boiling point of water is 212 degrees and its freezing point is 32 degrees at
normal atmospheric pressure. Conversion to Celsius: ºC = (ºF – 32)/1.8
Fan, Axial: An air moving device consisting of impeller blades oriented around a central shaft, usually with an aerodynamic
inlet housing; axial fans typically move large volumes of air at low pressures as compared to centrifugal fans for the same fan
horsepower.
Fan, Centrifugal: An air moving device consisting of impeller blades radially oriented parallel to a central shaft, bound with
a rim and hub; centrifugal fans typically move smaller volumes of air than axial fans but at a higher pressure for the same fan
horsepower.

P4
Fan Coil Unit: A terminal unit that delivers conditioned air directly to the occupied space.
Fan Deck: The finished surface adjacent to a horizontally mounted axial fan, sometimes used as a working surface to perform
maintenance when the proper safety precautions are taken (handrails, ladder, etc.).
Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester (FRP): A non-corrosive composite material comprised of a plastic resin matrix,
glass fiber reinforcement and other additives.
Fill: A heat transfer surface where air and water interface.

Filtration: The process of separating solids from a liquid by means of a filter media through which only the liquid passes.
Glossary
Flume Box: A short channel that runs between two cooling towers, allowing water to flow from one cold water basin to another;
a flume box serves to correct any difference in water levels that may develop during operation and generally has a greater capacity
of water flow than an equalizer line.
Forced Draft: Refers to the location of the fan(s) on evaporative cooling equipment. On forced draft equipment, the fans are
located at the air inlets to “force” or push air through the unit.
Fouling: Organic growth or other deposits on heat transfer surfaces causing loss of efficiency.
Frequency: The number of cycles that an alternating current moves through in each second. Standard electric utility frequency
in the United States is 60 cycles per second (60 Hertz).
Full Load Amps (FLA): The current draw of a motor under full load.
GPM: Measure of liquid flow rate (Gallons Per Minute). Typically based on U.S. gallons, sometimes clarified as USGPM.
Heat Exchanger: A device for the transfer of heat energy from the source to the conveying medium.
Heat Pump: A device that is capable of both heating and cooling space, depending on user comfort requirements. Heat
pumps are generally individually controlled and therefore a heat pump in one room may be heating, while a heat pump in an
adjacent room may be cooling.
Heat Transfer: Moving heat from one location to another.

Hertz (Hz): A unit of electromagnetic wave frequency that is equal to one cycle per second.
Horsepower (HP): A unit for measuring the rate of doing work. One horsepower equals approximately 746 watts.
Hot Water Basin: The collection pan that houses the hot water in an evaporative cooling unit with a gravity distribution
system.
Humidity: The amount of moisture in the air.

HVAC: Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning.
Induced Draft: Refers to the location of the fan(s) on evaporative cooling equipment. On induced draft equipment, the fans
are located on the air discharge side of the equipment to “induce” air through the unit.
Industrial: The industrial sector is generally defined as manufacturing, construction, mining, agriculture, fishing, and forestry
establishments (Standard Industrial Classification [SIC] codes 01-39).
Interference: The reintroduction of warm discharge air from one evaporative cooling unit into the air inlet of an adjacent unit.
To avoid interference, layout guidelines provided by equipment manufacturers should be closely followed.
Inverter: See “Variable Frequency Drive.”

ISO 9001: A comprehensive, internationally recognized standard which is concerned with all aspects of quality management in
the design, engineering and manufacturing of a product.

P5
Latent Heat: Heat that causes a change in state when added or removed, but does not cause a change in temperature. For
example, heat that evaporates a substance from a liquid to a vapor but does not increase its temperature.
Leaving Water Temperature (LWT): The temperature of the fluid as it leaves the evaporative cooling equipment to
return to the system heat source.
Legionella: A genus of bacteria; most species of this genus are capable of causing disease in humans. LD, Legionnaires’
Disease, is a pneumonia like disease caused by one genus of Legionella.
Life-Cycle Cost: The amount of money required to own, operate and maintain a piece of equipment over its useful life.
Glossary
Load: The demand for services or performance made on a machine or system, i.e. amount of heat rejection required by the
evaporative cooling equipment
Louver: A series of sloping vanes that allow the entrance of air but prevent the escape of water droplets.
Make-Up Water: Water added to the recirculating water to compensate for losses from evaporation and bleed.
NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturing Association.
Nominal Cooling Tower Ton: Defined as 3 GPM of water cooled from a 95°F (35°C) entering water temperature to an
85°F (29.4°C) leaving water temperature at a 78°F (25.6°C) entering wet-bulb temperature.
Nozzle: A device used for regulating and directing the flow of a fluid.
Parts Per Million (PPM): A unit which represents a comparison of mass to mass, volume to volume, mass to volume,
etc.; commonly used to represent the concentration of dissolved solids in the recirculating water of evaporative cooling equipment.
Plenum: The open area of a crossflow evaporative cooling unit through which air is pulled before being discharged to the
atmosphere.
Plume: Saturated discharge air that forms a visible cloud over evaporative cooling equipment under certain
temperature and humidity conditions.
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): A polymer of vinyl chloride often used for a heat transfer media surface (film) and piping on
factory-assembled evaporative cooling equipment.
Power: The rate at which energy is transferred. Electricity for use as energy is also referred to as power.
Preventive Maintenance: Regular maintenance implemented to reduce the possibility of sudden or unexpected
equipment failures.
PSI: Pounds per square inch.

PSIA: Pounds per square inch, absolute.
PSIG: Pounds per square inch, gauge.
Pulldown: Water that collects in the cold water basin of a unit when the system pumps shut off.
Pump, Spray: A water moving device on a closed circuit cooling tower or evaporative condenser for transporting the spray
water from the basin to the water distribution system in order to wet the heat transfer surface.
Pump, System: A flow moving device for transporting the fluid to be cooled (water in a cooling tower; water, glycol, or other
fluid in the case of a closed circuit cooling tower) to the tower and back to the system in a continuous loop.
Range: The difference between the entering water temperature and leaving water temperature of an evaporative
cooling unit. See also “Delta.”
Recirculating Water: The water being circulated over the coil or fill in an evaporative cooling unit.
Recirculation: Situation that occurs when the warm discharge air flows back into the air inlets of the evaporative cooling
equipment. To avoid recirculation, layout guidelines provided by equipment manufacturers should be closely followed.

P6
Reclaiming: Processing or returning used refrigerant to the manufacturer or processor for disposal or reuse.
Refrigerant: A chemical that condenses from a vapor to liquid and, in the process, decreases in temperature.
Refrigerant Charge: The amount of refrigerant in a system.
Retrofit: Broad term that applies to any change after the original purchase, such as adding equipment or accessories to an
existing installation.
Saturation Temperature: Also referred to as the boiling point or the condensing temperature. This is the temperature at
Glossary
which a refrigerant will change state from a liquid to a vapor or vice versa.
Scale: The accumulation of solids from the minerals contained in water, most often referred to as hardness deposits, i.e. calcium
and magnesium.
Scale Inhibitor: Chemical added to water to inhibit formation of scale.

Sensible Heat: Heat that causes a change in temperature when added or removed, but does not cause a change in state.
Separator: A device which uses centrifugal force to separate particles from a suspension; used to remove sediment from
evaporative cooling systems.
Setpoint: The temperature to which a thermostat is set to result in a desired heated space temperature.
Sound Attenuator: Component used on the air inlet or air discharge of an evaporative cooling unit to reduce airborne noise.
Specific Heat: In English units, the quantity of heat, in BTU, needed to raise the temperature of one pound of material one
degree Fahrenheit.
Strainer: A filter used to remove large, suspended solids from a liquid.

Subcooled Liquid: Liquid refrigerant that is cooled below its saturation temperature.
Suction Connection: The outlet connection through which leaving water is pumped back to the chiller.
Sump: The cold water basin of the evaporative cooling equipment.
Superheated Vapor: Refrigerant vapor that is heated above its saturation temperature.
Thermal (Energy) Storage: A technology that lowers the amount of electricity needed for comfort conditioning during
utility peak load periods. A building’s thermal energy storage system might, for example, use off-peak power to make ice at night,
then use the ice for cooling during the day.
Thermostat: A temperature control device that consists of a series of sensors and relays that monitor and control the functions
of a heating and cooling system.
Ton: A unit of measurement used for determining cooling capacity. One ton of refrigeration is the equivalent of 12,000 BTUH per
hour, or the amount of heat absorbed by melting one ton of ice in twenty-four hours. One “cooling tower” ton takes the heat of
compression into account and is therefore the equivalent of 15,000 BTUs per hour.
Total Pulldown Volume: The sum of the water suspended within the unit and its distribution system during operation, plus
the water in any external piping and heat exchangers draining back to the unit when the pump is shut down.
Valve: Any device used to control the flow of a fluid through piping.
Variable Frequency Drive (VFD): An electronic device that controls the speed of a motor by controlling the frequency
of the voltage supplied to that motor. Also known as an inverter.
Wet-Bulb Temperature (WB): The temperature at which water, by evaporating into air, can bring the air to
saturation at the same temperature.
Wet Deck: See “Fill”.

Register for your
Guide and you may
WIN ®
A BOSE
WAVE® RADIO
WITH CD PLAYER
For a limited time

receive a
free copy
of the new BAC


P8
Timely Retrofit Keeps

Casino Comfortable
Facility Owner/Operator:
Project Report
Palace Station Hotel and Casino
Installing Contractor:
Southwest Air Conditioning Company
Local BAC Representative:

Engineered Equipment and
Systems Company
Pat Lester, Senior Engineer at the Palace Station Hotel The Engineered Equipment and Systems representative
and Casino in Las Vegas, Nevada, had a problem. In recommended replacing the clogged heat transfer
the summer of 1999, the facility’s climate conditioning material with a BAC VersaCrossTM Fill Replacement kit.
system was constantly being pushed to its limits in order The kit is designed for easy handling and a quick
to maintain the cooling performance required for the installation, as well as superior thermal performance,
building. On particularly hot days, Pat was forced to which met the project’s requirements for improved
drain the water from the cooling tower basin and replace performance with minimum down-time.
it with cold city water. This action was a temporary
remedy, but certainly not the problem solution. The replacement was scheduled and completed the
following May, before the sweltering Las Vegas summer
The system was losing capacity. Without some weather arrived. According to Stephen, “Repairing one
attention, it would not meet the facility’s needs in the tower at a time allowed the system to keep up with the
summer of 2000. In Pat’s words, “If we don’t do facility’s cooling requirements, and the kits were installed
something, this time next August we’ll be dead.” without a hitch.”
Pat asked Stephen Corkins, of Southwest Air At the end of the summer season, Pat reported that the
Conditioning Company, to evaluate the system. temperature level of the condenser water was consistent,
Suspecting a problem with the cooling towers, Stephen the chillers easily handled the cooling load, and the
turned to Engineered Equipment and Systems building’s operating costs went down because the
Company, the local Baltimore Aircoil Company improvements resulted in reduced system energy
Representative. An inspection of the cooling towers requirements.
revealed them to be in good condition, with the
exception of a significant build-up of scale on the fill, Pat Lester advised, “The VersaCrossTM solution reduced
limiting its heat transfer capability. The makeup of the my headaches, gave me greater peace of mind, and I’ve
locally available water is not kind to cooling tower fill. had less phone calls at home.”
The situation called for a change-out of the fill.
According to Stephen Corkins, “The VersaCrossTM
Repair work in Las Vegas has its own unique solution was installed in less time than estimated,
challenges. With a year-round cooling requirement, a resulting in a project that was both a performance
hotel/casino cannot be without its cooling system for long and a financial success. Since this project, we have
and still keep its patrons. Any repair work would have to completed 3 more VersaCrossTM installations, all with
be done in the shortest possible time frame, and there the same results. When it comes to keeping the heat
was no margin for error. transfer surface in aging but structurally-sound cooling
towers operating at its peak, VersaCrossTM is the
answer.”

Relax…
…when you insist on BAC Controls for all

your evaporative cooling projects.
• Simplify your submittal and procurement process
• Custom engineered solutions provide energy and
water savings
• Specifically designed to work with all BAC equipment
For BAC Controls information refer

to page G1 of the BAC Product and
Application Handbook or visit
www.BaltimoreAircoil.com

Contents
Notes
Notes
Contents
Notes
Notes
Q1
Catalog Index by Page Number

B1 Baltimore Aircoil Company E7 Advantages of Closed Circuit Cooling Towers
C1 Introduction to Evaporative Cooling Products E10 FXV Closed Circuit Cooling Towers
D1 Open Cooling Tower Overview E11 Product Introduction
D7 Product Report Comcast Center E13 Benefits
D8 Series 3000 Open Cooling Towers E15 Construction Details
Index
D9 Product Introduction E21 Custom Features and Options
D11 Benefits E25 Accessories
D13 Construction Details E26 Structural Support
D15 Custom Features and Options E27 Engineering Data
D18 Accessories E30 Engineering Specifications
D21 Engineering Data E34 Series V Closed Circuit Cooling Towers
D29 Structural Support E35 Product Introduction
D31 Engineering Specifications E37 Benefits
D36 Series 1500 Open Cooling Towers E39 Construction Details
D41 Construction Details E47 Engineering Data
D43 Custom Features and Options E55 Structural Support
D45 Accessories E56 Engineering Specifications
D47 Engineering Data E59 Project Report, Lonza Biologics Inc.
D49 Structural Support E60 HXV Closed Circuit Cooling Towers
D51 Engineering Specifications E61 Product Introduction
D55 Project Report Wachovia Center E63 Benefits
D56 FXT Open Cooling Towers E65 Construction Details
D61 Construction Details E73 Engineering Data
D63 Accessories E74 Structural Support
D64 Structural Support E77 Engineering Specifications
D65 Engineering Data E81 Engineering Considerations, Closed Circuit
D67 Engineering Specifications Cooling Towers
D70 Series V Open Cooling Towers E87 Project Report, Colt Armory
D71 Product Introduction F1 ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Products
D73 Benefits F2 Product Introduction
D75 Construction Details F4 Benefits
D77 Custom Features and Options F8 Proven Technology
D79 Accessories F12 Construction Details
D81 Engineering Data F14 Engineering Data
D87 Structural Support F15 Custom Coils
D89 Engineering Specifications F20 Engineering Specifications
D92 Engineering Considerations, F21 Engineering Considerations
Open Cooling Towers F26 Project Report, Comfort Link
D96 Project Report Georgetown University
E1 Closed Circuit Cooling Tower Overview

Q2
Catalog Index by Page Number

G1 Custom Engineered Controls M1 Technical Resources
G2 Product Introduction M2 Wet-bulb Temperature Selection
G4 Benefits M13 Temperature Conversion Chart
G6 Construction Details M14 Formulas and Tables
G8 Custom Features and Options M16 Conversion Factors
Index
G13 Engineering Specifications M18 Selection Software

H1 Remote Sump Tanks M20 The Value of Standards and Independent
H2 Product Introduction Certification Programs
H3 Benefits M22 CTI Certification
H4 Custom Features and Options M24 What’s a Green Building?
H5 Engineering Data M26 Materials of Construction
H6 Structural Support M28 Remote Sump Selection for an Open
H7 Engineering Specifications Cooling Tower
H8 Production and Application M32 Remote Sump Selection for a Closed
Handbook Survey Circuit Cooling Tower or
J1 Evaporative Condensers Evaporative Condenser
J2 Introduction M36 Layout Guidelines
J4 Features M56 Connection Guide
J10 Benefits M58 Friction Loss Table
J14 Construction Details M59 Piping Considerations – Maximum
J20 Options and Accessories Fluid Velocity
J24 Selection M60 Cooling Tower Pumping and Piping
J32 Engineering Data M105 Refrigerant Piping
J48 Structural Support M114 Thermophysical Properties of
J50 Engineering Specifications Refrigerants
J54 Engineering Manual M121 Cooling Towers in Parallel
K1 Aircoil™ Evaporators M124 Fundamentals of Sound
K2 Product Information M159 Fundamentals of Cooling System
K3 Features Summary Filtration
K4 Construction Options M167 Product Report, Automatic Bearing
K6 Optional Features Greaser
K8 Selection M168 Water Quality Guidelines
K10 Engineering Data M170 Maintenance Checklist
K38 Engineering Applications M172 Replacement Spare Parts List
K40 Nomenclature N1 Maintenance Section
K41 Application Guide N1 The Value of Maintaining Evaporative
K56 Product Report, New Pan Features Cooling Equipment
L1 ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Units N10 Crossflow Cooling Towers
L2 Why Ice Storage? N33 Crossflow Coil Products
L5 Construction Details N49 Counterflow Cooling Products
L6 Selection Flexibility N63 Ice Thermal Storage Units
L7 Unit Selection-Ammonia N75 Aircoil™ Evaporators
L9 Engineering Data P1 Glossary
L13 Engineering Specifications
L14 Project Report, Channel Island

®

BAC ProdAppHBii2007

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BAC ProdAppHBii2007

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

®

Product & Application Handbook

Our objective with Volume II is to continue to enhance industry knowledge

We are committed to continuing to provide products, services, and technical

Introduction to Evaporative Cooling Products . . . . . . . . . . . . .C1 Certification Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M20

Open Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D1 CTI Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M22

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D1 What’s a Green Building? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M24

Series 3000 Open Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D8 Materials of Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M26

Engineering Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D92 Layout Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M36

Closed Circuit Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E1 Connection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M56

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E1 Friction Loss Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M58

Series V Closed Circuit Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E34 Refrigerant Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M105

Engineering Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E81 Cooling Towers in Parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M121

ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F1 Fundamentals of Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M124

Engineering Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F21 Fundamentals of Cooling System Filtration . . . . . . . . . .M159

Remote Sump Tanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .H1 Water Quality Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M168

Evaporative Condensers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J1 Maintenance Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M170

Engineering Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J54 Replacement Spare Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M172

Aircoil™ Evaporators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .K1 Maintenance Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N1

Application Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .K41 The Value of Maintaining Evaporative

ICE CHILLER® Thermal Storage Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L1 Cooling Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N1

Technical Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M1 Crossflow Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N10

Wet-bulb Temperature Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M2 Crossflow Coil Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N33

Temperature Conversion Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M13 Counterflow Cooling Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N49

Formulas and Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M14 Ice Thermal Storage Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N63

Conversion Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M16 Aircoil™ Evaporators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N75

Selection Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M18 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P1

Baltimore Aircoil Company

How can we help?

BAC Sales Channel

BAC Product & Application

Evaporative Cooling Products

Open Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages D1 - D95

Closed Circuit Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages E1 - E86

Evaporative Condensers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages J1 - J72

Need help deciding which

Baltimore Aircoil Company

Evaporative Cooling Products

...because temperature matters™

Open Cooling Towers

Baltimore Aircoil Company

Water Distribution System

Gravity distribution basin

...because temperature matters™

units, offering significant lifecycle cost savings.

Centrifugal fan Axial fan

Baltimore Aircoil Company

Maximum Entering Water Temperature

A list of typical applications is provided on pages D5 and D6 for your reference.

...because temperature matters™

Open Circuit Cooling Towers

Configuration Crossflow Crossflow Crossflow

Medium HVAC & industrial

Baltimore Aircoil Company

VTL VT0 VT1

Pressurized Pressurized Pressurized

134 - 1,335 Nominal Tons

170˚F (76.7˚C) with 170˚F (76.7˚C) with 170˚F (76.7˚C) with

Indoor installations High temperature industrial High temperature industrial

...because temperature matters™

COOL in the New

Baltimore Aircoil Company

Open Cooling Towers

Construction Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D13